SP8
Uploaded by
duhofudeSP8
Uploaded by
duhofudeGeneral Insurance Pricing
Specialist Principles
Combined Materials Pack
for exams in 2019
The Actuarial Education Company
on behalf of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold for
the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is owned by
Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a subsidiary of the
Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire out,
lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or photocopy
any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it is
not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through the
profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished using
the course.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Study Guide Page 1
Subject SP8
2019 Study Guide
Introduction
This Study Guide has been created to help guide you through Subject SP8. It contains all the
information that you will need before starting to study Subject SP8 for the 2019 exams and you
may also find it useful to refer to throughout your Subject SP8 journey.
The guide is split into two parts:
Part 1 contains general information about the Specialist Principles subjects
Part 2 contains specific information about Subject SP8.
Please read this Study Guide carefully before reading the Course Notes, even if you have studied
for some actuarial exams before.
Contents
Part 1 Section 1 Before you start Page 2
Section 2 Core study material Page 3
Section 3 ActEd study support Page 5
Section 4 Study skills Page 11
Section 5 The examination Page 16
Section 6 Queries and feedback Page 17
Part 2 Section 1 Subject SP8 – background Page 18
Section 2 Subject SP8 – Syllabus and Core Reading Page 19
Section 3 Subject SP8 – the course structure Page 24
Section 4 Subject SP8 – summary of ActEd products Page 25
Section 5 Subject SP8 – skills and assessment Page 26
Section 6 Subject SP8 – frequently asked questions Page 27
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8: Study Guide
1.1 Before you start
When studying for the UK actuarial exams, you will need:
a copy of the Formulae and Tables for Examinations of the Faculty of Actuaries and the
Institute of Actuaries, 2nd Edition (2002) – these are often referred to as simply the
Yellow Tables or the Tables
a ‘permitted’ scientific calculator – you will find the list of permitted calculators on the
profession’s website. Please check the list carefully, since it is reviewed each year.
These are both available from the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries’ eShop. Please visit
www.actuaries.org.uk.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Study Guide Page 3
1.2 Core study material
This section explains the role of the Syllabus, Core Reading and supplementary ActEd text. It also
gives guidance on how to use these materials most effectively in order to pass the exam.
Some of the information below is also contained in the introduction to the Core Reading
produced by the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Syllabus
The Syllabus for Subject SP8 has been produced by the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries. The
relevant individual Syllabus Objectives are included at the start of each course chapter and a
complete copy of the Syllabus is included in Section 2.2 of this Study Guide. We recommend that
you use the Syllabus as an important part of your study.
Core Reading
The Core Reading has been produced by the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries. The purpose of
the Core Reading is to ensure that tutors, students and examiners understand the requirements
of the syllabus for the qualification examinations for Fellowship of the Institute and Faculty of
Actuaries.
The Core Reading supports coverage of the Syllabus in helping to ensure that both depth and
breadth are re-enforced. It is therefore important that students have a good understanding of
the concepts covered by the Core Reading.
The examinations require students to demonstrate their understanding of the concepts given in
the syllabus and described in the Core Reading; this will be based on the legislation, professional
guidance etc that are in force when the Core Reading is published, ie on 31 May in the year
preceding the examinations.
Therefore the exams in April and September 2019 will be based on the Syllabus and Core Reading
as at 31 May 2018. We recommend that you always use the up-to-date Core Reading to prepare
for the exams.
Examiners will have this Core Reading when setting the papers. In preparing for examinations,
students are advised to work through past examination questions and may find additional tuition
helpful. The Core Reading will be updated each year to reflect changes in the syllabus and current
practice, and in the interest of clarity.
Accreditation
The Institute and Faculty of Actuaries would like to thank the numerous people who have helped
in the development of the material contained in this Core Reading.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8: Study Guide
ActEd text
Core Reading deals with each syllabus objective and covers what is needed to pass the exam.
However, the tuition material that has been written by ActEd enhances it by giving examples and
further explanation of key points. Here is an excerpt from some ActEd Course Notes to show you
how to identify Core Reading and the ActEd material. Core Reading is shown in this bold font.
Note that in the example given above, the index will fall if the actual share price goes below the
theoretical ex-rights share price. Again, this is consistent with what would happen to an
underlying portfolio.
This is
After allowing for chain-linking, the formula for the investment index then becomes: ActEd
text
Ni ,t Pi ,t
I (t ) i This is Core
B(t ) Reading
where Ni ,t is the number of shares issued for the ith constituent at time t;
B (t ) is the base value, or divisor, at time t.
Copyright
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold for the exclusive use of the
purchaser. The copyright is owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a subsidiary of the
Institute and Faculty of Actuaries. Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or photocopy any part of the study
material. You must take care of your study material to ensure that it is not used or copied by
anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In addition, we may seek to take
disciplinary action through the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished using the course.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Study Guide Page 5
1.3 ActEd study support
This section gives a description of the products offered by ActEd.
Successful students tend to undertake three main study activities:
1. Learning – initial study and understanding of subject material
2. Revision – learning subject material and preparing to tackle exam-style questions
3. Rehearsal – answering exam-style questions, culminating in answering questions at exam
speed without notes.
Different approaches suit different people. For example, you may like to learn material gradually
over the months running up to the exams or you may do your revision in a shorter period just
before the exams. Also, these three activities will almost certainly overlap.
We offer a flexible range of products to suit you and let you control your own learning and exam
preparation. The following table shows the products that we produce. Note that not all products
are available for all subjects.
LEARNING LEARNING & REVISION REVISION & REHEARSAL
REVISION REHEARSAL
Course Notes X Assignments Flashcards Revision Notes Mock Exam
Combined ASET Mock Exam
Materials Pack Marking
(CMP)
X Assignment
Marking
Tutorials
Online
Classroom
The products and services are described in more detail below.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8: Study Guide
‘Learning’ products
Course Notes
The Course Notes will help you develop the basic knowledge and understanding of principles
needed to pass the exam. They incorporate the complete Core Reading and include full
explanation of all the syllabus objectives, with worked examples and questions (including some
past exam questions) to test your understanding.
Each chapter includes:
the relevant syllabus objectives
a chapter summary
practice questions with full solutions.
‘Learning & revision’ products
X Assignments
The Series X Assignments are written assessments that cover the material in each part of the
course in turn. They can be used to both develop and test your understanding of the material.
Combined Materials Pack (CMP)
The Combined Materials Pack (CMP) comprises the Course Notes and the Series X Assignments.
The CMP is available in eBook format for viewing on a range of electronic devices. eBooks can be
ordered separately or as an addition to paper products. Visit www.ActEd.co.uk for full details
about the eBooks that are available, compatibility with different devices, software requirements
and printing restrictions.
X Assignment Marking
We are happy to mark your attempts at the X assignments. Marking is not included with the
Assignments or the CMP and you need to order it separately. You should submit your script as a
PDF attached to an email. Your script will be marked electronically and you will be able to download
your marked script via a secure link on the internet.
Don’t underestimate the benefits of doing and submitting assignments:
Question practice during this phase of your study gives an early focus on the end goal of
answering exam-style questions.
You’re incentivised to keep up with your study plan and get a regular, realistic assessment
of your progress.
Objective, personalised feedback from a high quality marker will highlight areas on which
to work and help with exam technique.
In a recent study, we found that students who attempt more than half the assignments have
significantly higher pass rates.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Study Guide Page 7
There are two different types of marking product: Series Marking and Marking Vouchers.
Series Marking
Series Marking applies to a specified subject, session and student. If you purchase Series Marking,
you will not be able to defer the marking to a future exam sitting or transfer it to a different subject
or student.
We typically send out full solutions with the Series X Assignments. However, if you order Series
Marking at the same time as you order the Series X Assignments, you can choose whether or not
to receive a copy of the solutions in advance. If you choose not to receive them with the study
material, you will be able to download the solutions via a secure link on the internet when your
marked script is returned (or following the final deadline date if you do not submit a script).
If you are having your attempts at the assignments marked by ActEd, you should submit your scripts
regularly throughout the session, in accordance with the schedule of recommended dates set out in
information provided with the assignments. This will help you to pace your study throughout the
session and leave an adequate amount of time for revision and question practice.
The recommended submission dates are realistic targets for the majority of students. Your scripts
will be returned more quickly if you submit them well before the final deadline dates.
Any script submitted after the relevant final deadline date will not be marked. It is your
responsibility to ensure that we receive scripts in good time.
Marking Vouchers
Marking Vouchers give the holder the right to submit a script for marking at any time, irrespective of
the individual assignment deadlines, study session, subject or person.
Marking Vouchers can be used for any assignment. They are valid for four years from the date of
purchase and can be refunded at any time up to the expiry date.
Although you may submit your script with a Marking Voucher at any time, you will need to adhere
to the explicit Marking Voucher deadline dates to ensure that your script is returned before the date
of the exam. The deadline dates are provided with the assignments.
Tutorials
Our tutorials are specifically designed to develop the knowledge that you will acquire from the
course material into the higher-level understanding that is needed to pass the exam.
We run a range of different tutorials including face-to-face tutorials at various locations, and Live
Online tutorials. Full details are set out in our Tuition Bulletin, which is available on our website at
www.ActEd.co.uk.
Regular and Block Tutorials
In preparation for these tutorials, we expect you to have read the relevant part(s) of the Course
Notes before attending the tutorial so that the group can spend time on exam questions and
discussion to develop understanding rather than basic bookwork.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8: Study Guide
You can choose one of the following types of tutorial:
Regular Tutorials spread over the session.
A Block Tutorial held two to eight weeks before the exam.
Online Classroom
The Online Classroom acts as either a valuable add-on or a great alternative to a face-to-face or
Live Online tutorial.
At the heart of the Online Classroom in each subject is a comprehensive, easily-searched collection
of tutorial units. These are a mix of:
taught material, helping you to really get to grips with the course material, and
guided questions, enabling you to learn the most efficient ways to answer questions and
avoid common exam pitfalls.
The best way to discover the Online Classroom is to see it in action. You can watch a sample of
the Online Classroom tutorial units on our website at www.ActEd.co.uk.
‘Revision’ products
For most subjects, there is a lot of material to revise. Finding a way to fit revision into your
routine as painlessly as possible has got to be a good strategy. Flashcards are an inexpensive
option that can provide a massive boost. They can also provide a variation in activities during a
study day, and so help you to maintain concentration and effectiveness.
Flashcards
Flashcards are a set of A6-sized cards that cover the key points of the subject that most students
want to commit to memory. Each flashcard has questions on one side and the answers on the
reverse. We recommend that you use the cards actively and test yourself as you go.
Flashcards are available in eBook format for viewing on a range of electronic devices. eBooks can
be ordered separately or as an addition to paper products. Visit www.ActEd.co.uk for full details
about the eBooks that are available, compatibility with different devices, software requirements
and printing restrictions.
The following questions and comments might help you to decide if flashcards are suitable for you:
Flashcards
Do you have a regular train or bus journey?
Flashcards are ideal for regular bursts of revision on the move.
Do you want to fit more study into your routine?
Flashcards are a good option for ‘dead time’, eg using flashcards on your phone or sticking
them on the wall in your study.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Study Guide Page 9
Do you find yourself cramming for exams (even if that’s not your original plan)?
Flashcards are an extremely efficient way to do your pre-exam memorising.
If you are retaking a subject, then you might consider using flashcards if you didn’t use them on a
previous attempt.
‘Revision & rehearsal’ products
Revision Notes
Our Revision Notes have been designed with input from students to help you revise efficiently.
They are suitable for first-time sitters who have worked through the ActEd Course Notes or for
retakers (who should find them much more useful and challenging than simply reading through
the course again).
The Revision Notes are a set of A5 booklets – perfect for revising on the train or tube to work.
Each booklet covers one main theme or a set of related topics from the course and includes:
Core Reading with a set of integrated short questions to develop your bookwork
knowledge
relevant past exam questions with concise solutions from the last ten years
other useful revision aids.
ActEd Solutions with Exam Technique (ASET)
The ActEd Solutions with Exam Technique (ASET) contains our solutions to eight past exam
papers, plus comment and explanation. In particular, it highlights how questions might have been
analysed and interpreted so as to produce a good solution with a wide range of relevant points.
This will be valuable in approaching questions in subsequent examinations.
‘Rehearsal’ products
Mock Exam
The Mock Exam is a 100-mark mock exam paper that provides a realistic test of your exam
preparation.
Mock Marking
We are happy to mark your attempts at the mock exam. The same general principles apply as for
the X Assignment Marking. In particular:
Mock Exam Marking is available for the Mock Exam and it applies to a specified subject,
session and student
Marking Vouchers can be used for the Mock Exam.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8: Study Guide
Recall that:
marking is not included with the products themselves and you need to order it separately
you should submit your script as a PDF attached to an email
your script will be marked electronically and you will be able to download your marked
script via a secure link on the internet.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Study Guide Page 11
1.4 Skills
The Subject SP exams
It is important to recognise that the SP subject exams are very different from the Core Principles
subject exams in both the nature of the material covered and the skills being examined.
Both the Core Reading and the exam papers themselves are generally much less numerical and
more ‘wordy’ than the Core Principles subjects. The exam will primarily require you to explain a
particular point in words and sentences, rather than to manipulate formulae or do calculations.
Numerical questions typically account for only a small part of each exam paper. If you haven’t sat
this type of exam for some time, you need to start practising again now. Many students find that
it takes time to adjust to the different style of the SP subject exam questions. As ever, practice is
the key to success.
The aim of the exams is to test your ability to apply your knowledge and understanding of the key
principles described in the Core Reading to specific situations presented to you in the form of
exam questions. Therefore your aim should be to identify and understand the key principles, and
then to practise applying them. You will also need a good knowledge of the Core Reading to score
well and quickly on any bookwork questions.
Study skills
Overall study plan
We suggest that you develop a realistic study plan, building in time for relaxation and allowing
some time for contingencies. Be aware of busy times at work, when you may not be able to take
as much study leave as you would like. Once you have set your plan, be determined to stick to it.
You don’t have to be too prescriptive at this stage about what precisely you do on each study day.
The main thing is to be clear that you will cover all the important activities in an appropriate
manner and leave plenty of time for revision and question practice.
Aim to manage your study so as to allow plenty of time for the concepts you meet in this course
to ‘bed down’ in your mind. Most successful students will probably aim to complete the course at
least six weeks before the exam, thereby leaving a sufficient amount of time for revision. By
finishing the course as quickly as possible, you will have a much clearer view of the big picture. It
will also allow you to structure your revision so that you can concentrate on the important and
difficult areas of the course.
You can also try looking at our discussion forum on the internet, which can be accessed at
www.ActEd.co.uk/forums (or use the link from our home page at www.ActEd.co.uk). There are
some good suggestions from students on how to study.
Study sessions
Only do activities that will increase your chance of passing. Try to avoid including activities for the
sake of it and don’t spend time reviewing material that you already understand. You will only
improve your chances of passing the exam by getting on top of the material that you currently
find difficult.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8: Study Guide
In particular, you may already be familiar with the content of some of the chapters (from the Core
Principles (CS, CM or CB subjects), Subject CP1 or other SP subjects). Try to cover these chapters
quickly to give yourself more time on the material with which you are less comfortable. Where
chapters refer back to material from the Core Principles subjects, you don’t have to follow these
links up unless you are feeling curious or clueless.
Ideally, each study session should have a specific purpose and be based on a specific task,
eg ’Finish reading Chapter 3 and attempt Practice Questions 3.4, 3.7 and 3.12 ’, as opposed to a
specific amount of time, eg ‘Three hours studying the material in Chapter 3’.
Try to study somewhere quiet and free from distractions (eg a library or a desk at home dedicated
to study). Find out when you operate at your peak, and endeavour to study at those times of the
day. This might be between 8am and 10am or could be in the evening. Take short breaks during
your study to remain focused – it’s definitely time for a short break if you find that your brain is
tired and that your concentration has started to drift from the information in front of you.
Order of study
We suggest that you work through each of the chapters in turn. To get the maximum benefit from
each chapter you should proceed in the following order:
1. Read the Syllabus Objectives. These are set out in the box at the start of each chapter.
2. Read the Chapter Summary at the end of each chapter. This will give you a useful overview
of the material that you are about to study and help you to appreciate the context of the
ideas that you meet.
3. Study the Course Notes in detail, annotating them and possibly making your own notes. Try
the self-assessment questions as you come to them. As you study, pay particular attention
to the listing of the Syllabus Objectives and to the Core Reading.
4. Read the Chapter Summary again carefully. If there are any ideas that you can’t
remember covering in the Course Notes, read the relevant section of the notes again to
refresh your memory.
5. Attempt (at least some of) the Practice Questions that appear at the end of the chapter.
It’s a fact that people are more likely to remember something if they review it several times. So,
do look over the chapters you have studied so far from time to time. It is useful to re-read the
Chapter Summaries or to try the Practice Questions again a few days after reading the chapter
itself. It’s a good idea to annotate the questions with details of when you attempted each one. This
makes it easier to ensure that you try all of the questions as part of your revision without repeating
any that you got right first time.
Once you’ve read the relevant part of the notes and tried a selection of questions from the
Practice Questions (and attended a tutorial, if appropriate) you should attempt the corresponding
assignment. If you submit your assignment for marking, spend some time looking through it
carefully when it is returned. It can seem a bit depressing to analyse the errors you made, but
you will increase your chances of passing the exam by learning from your mistakes. The markers
will try their best to provide practical comments to help you to improve.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Study Guide Page 13
To be really prepared for the exam, you should not only know and understand the Core Reading but
also be aware of what the examiners will expect. Your revision programme should include plenty of
question practice so that you are aware of the typical style, content and marking structure of exam
questions. You should attempt as many past exam questions as you can.
Active study
Here are some techniques that may help you to study actively.
1. Don’t believe everything you read. Good students tend to question everything that they
read. They will ask ‘why, how, what for, when?’ when confronted with a new concept,
and they will apply their own judgement. This contrasts with those who unquestioningly
believe what they are told, learn it thoroughly, and reproduce it (unquestioningly?) in
response to exam questions.
2. Another useful technique as you read the Course Notes is to think of possible questions
that the examiners could ask. This will help you to understand the examiners’ point of
view and should mean that there are fewer nasty surprises in the exam room. Use the
Syllabus to help you make up questions.
3. Annotate your notes with your own ideas and questions. This will make you study more
actively and will help when you come to review and revise the material. Do not simply
copy out the notes without thinking about the issues.
4. As you study each chapter, condense the key points (not whole chunks of text) on to a
double side of A4 or less. This is essential as otherwise, when you come to revision, you
will end up having to re-read the whole course again, and there won’t be time.
5. Try to use memory aids, such as mind maps and acronyms, to help remember the material
when you come back to it later.
6. Attempt the questions in the notes as you work through the course. Write down your
answer before you refer to the solution.
7. Attempt other questions and assignments on a similar basis, ie write down your answer
before looking at the solution provided. Attempting the assignments under exam
conditions has some particular benefits:
It forces you to think and act in a way that is similar to how you will behave in the
exam.
When you have your assignments marked it is much more useful if the marker’s
comments can show you how to improve your performance under exam conditions
than your performance when you have access to the notes and are under no time
pressure.
The knowledge that you are going to do an assignment under exam conditions and
then submit it (however good or bad) for marking can act as a powerful incentive to
make you study each part as well as possible.
It is also quicker than trying to write perfect answers.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8: Study Guide
8. Sit a mock exam four to six weeks before the real exam to identify your weaknesses and
work to improve them. You could use a mock exam written by ActEd or a past exam
paper.
You can find further information on how to study in the profession’s Student Handbook, which
you can download from their website at:
www.actuaries.org.uk/studying
Revision and exam skills
Revision skills
You will have sat many exams before and will have mastered the exam and revision techniques
that suit you. However it is important to note that due to the high volume of work involved in
Subject SP8, it is not possible to leave all your revision to the last minute. Students who prepare
well in advance have a better chance of passing the exam on the first sitting.
We recommend that you prepare for the exam by practising a large number of exam-style
questions under exam conditions. This will:
help you to develop the necessary knowledge and understanding of the key principles
described in the Core Reading
highlight exactly which are the key principles that crop up time and time again in many
different contexts and questions
help you to practise the specific skills that you will need to pass the exam.
There are many sources of exam-style questions. You can use past exam papers, the Practice
Questions at the end of each chapter (which include many past exam questions), assignments,
mock exams, the Revision Notes and ASET.
Exam question skill levels
Exam questions are not designed to be of similar difficulty. The Institute and Faculty of Actuaries
specifies different skill levels that questions may be set with reference to.
Questions may be set at any skill level:
Knowledge – demonstration of a detailed knowledge and understanding of the topic
Application – demonstration of an ability to apply the principles underlying the topic
within a given context
Higher Order – demonstration of an ability to perform deeper analysis and assessment of
situations, including forming judgements, taking into account different points of view,
comparing and contrasting situations, suggesting possible solutions and actions, and
making recommendations.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Study Guide Page 15
Command verbs
The Institute and Faculty of Actuaries use command verbs (such as ‘Define’, ‘Discuss’ and
‘Explain’) to help students to identify what the question requires. The profession has produced a
document, ‘Command verbs used in the Associate and Fellowship written examinations’, to help
students to understand what each command verb is asking them to do.
It also gives the following advice:
The use of a specific command verb within a syllabus objective does not indicate that this
is the only form of question which can be asked on the topic covered by that objective.
The Examiners may ask a question on any syllabus topic using any of the agreed command
verbs, as are defined in the document.
You can find the relevant document on the profession’s website at:
https://www.actuaries.org.uk/studying/prepare-your-exams
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8: Study Guide
1.5 The examination
What to take to the exam
IMPORTANT NOTE: The following information was correct at the time of printing, however it is
important to keep up-to-date with any changes. See the profession’s website for the latest
guidance.
For the written exam, the examination room will be equipped with:
the question paper
an answer booklet
rough paper
a copy of the Yellow Tables.
Remember to take with you:
black pens
a permitted scientific calculator – please refer to www.actuaries.org.uk for the latest
advice.
Past exam papers
You can download some past exam papers and Examiners’ Reports from the profession’s website
at www.actuaries.org.uk. However, please be aware that these exam papers are for the
pre-2019 syllabus and not all questions will be relevant.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Study Guide Page 17
1.6 Queries and feedback
Questions and queries
From time to time you may come across something in the study material that is unclear to you.
The easiest way to solve such problems is often through discussion with friends, colleagues and
peers – they will probably have had similar experiences whilst studying. If there’s no-one at work
to talk to then use our discussion forum at www.ActEd.co.uk/forums (or use the link from our
home page at www.ActEd.co.uk).
Our online forum is dedicated to actuarial students so that you can get help from fellow students
on any aspect of your studies from technical issues to study advice. You could also use it to get
ideas for revision or for further reading around the subject that you are studying. ActEd tutors
will visit the site from time to time to ensure that you are not being led astray and we also post
other frequently asked questions from students on the forum as they arise.
If you are still stuck, then you can send queries by email to the relevant subject email address (see
Section 2.6), but we recommend that you try the forum first. We will endeavour to contact you as
soon as possible after receiving your query but you should be aware that it may take some time to
reply to queries, particularly when tutors are away from the office running tutorials. At the
busiest teaching times of year, it may take us more than a week to get back to you.
If you have many queries on the course material, you should raise them at a tutorial or book a
personal tuition session with an ActEd tutor. Information about personal tuition is set out in our
current brochure. Please email [email protected] for more details.
Feedback
If you find an error in the course, please check the corrections page of our website
(www.ActEd.co.uk/paper_corrections.html) to see if the correction has already been dealt with.
Otherwise please send details via email to the relevant subject email address (see Section 2.6).
Each year our tutors work hard to improve the quality of the study material and to ensure that
the courses are as clear as possible and free from errors. We are always happy to receive
feedback from students, particularly details concerning any errors, contradictions or unclear
statements in the courses. If you have any comments on this course please email them to the
relevant subject email address (see Section 2.6).
Our tutors also work with the profession to suggest developments and improvements to the
Syllabus and Core Reading. If you have any comments or concerns about the Syllabus or Core
Reading, these can be passed on via ActEd. Alternatively, you can send them directly to the
Institute and Faculty of Actuaries’ Examination Team by email to
[email protected].
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8: Study Guide
2.1 Subject SP8 – background
History
The Specialist Principles subjects are new subjects in the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries 2019
Curriculum.
Subject SP8 is General Insurance: Pricing Principles.
Predecessors
The Specialist Principles subjects cover content that was previously in the equivalent Specialist
Technical subjects. So:
Subject SP8 replaces Subject ST8.
Exemptions
You will need to have passed or been granted an exemption from Subject ST8 to be eligible for a
pass in Subject SP8 during the transfer process.
Links to other subjects
Subject CS2 – Risk Modelling and Survival Analysis.
Subject CP1 – Actuarial Practice.
Subject SP7 – General Insurance Reserving and Capital Modelling Principles.
Subject SA3 – General Insurance Advanced.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Study Guide Page 19
2.2 Subject SP8 – Syllabus and Core Reading
Syllabus
The Syllabus for Subject SP8 is given here. To the right of each objective are the chapter numbers
in which the objective is covered in the ActEd course.
Aim
The aim of this General Insurance: Pricing Principles subject is to instil in successful candidates the
ability to apply, in simple pricing situations, the mathematical and economic techniques and the
principles of actuarial planning and control needed for the operation on sound financial lines of
general insurers.
Competences
On successful completion of this subject, a student will be able to:
1. understand the main principles and techniques of pricing that are relevant to general
insurance
2. apply these principles to simple situations within the context of general insurance.
3. analyse hypothetical scenarios, including using judgement to assess the implications of
possible actions and to develop appropriate proposals or recommendations relating to
pricing in general insurance business.
Syllabus topics
1. General insurance products and general business environment (20%)
2. Data, risks and risk management (30%)
3. Rating bases and methodology (35%)
4. Credibility, reinsurance and catastrophe modelling (15%)
The weightings are indicative of the approximate balance of the assessment of this subject
between the main syllabus topics, averaged over a number of examination sessions.
The weightings also have a correspondence with the amount of learning material underlying each
syllabus topic. However, this will also reflect aspects such as:
the relative complexity of each topic, and hence the amount of explanation and support
required for it
the need to provide thorough foundation understanding on which to build the other
objectives
the extent of prior knowledge which is expected
the degree to which each topic area is more knowledge or application based.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8: Study Guide
Detailed syllabus objectives
0. Introduction
0.1 Define the principal terms in use in general insurance. (Glossary)
1. General insurance products and general business environment (20%)
1.1 Describe the main types of general insurance product in terms
of: (Chapters 2 and 3)
the needs of customers
the financial and other risks they pose for the general insurer including their
capital requirements and possible effect on solvency.
1.2 Describe the main types of general reinsurance products and the purposes for
which they may be used. (Chapters 5 and 6)
1.3 Describe the implications of the general business environment in terms of:
(Chapters 7 and 8)
the main features of the general insurance market
the effect of different marketing strategies
the effect of fiscal regimes
the effect of inflation and economic factors
the effect of legal, political and social factors
the effect of the climate and environmental factors
the general effect of professional guidance
the impact of technological change.
2. Data, risks and risk management (30%)
2.1 Describe the major areas of risk and uncertainty in general insurance business
with respect to pricing, in particular those that might threaten profitability or
solvency. (Chapter 9)
2.2 Describe, with regard to the use of data in pricing: (Chapter 10)
the types of data that are used
the main uses of data
the requirements for a good information system
the possible causes of data errors
the effects of inadequate data.
2.3 Outline the major actuarial investigations and analyses of experience undertaken
with regard to pricing for general insurers. (Chapter 19)
2.4 Describe the Individual Risk Model and its applications in a general insurance
environment. (Chapter 11)
2.5 Describe the Collective Risk Model and its applications in a general insurance
environment. (Chapter 11)
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Study Guide Page 21
2.6 Analyse the derivation of the Aggregate Claim Distribution for the Collective Risk
Model, and its approximations using stochastic simulation. (Chapter 11)
3. Rating bases and methodologies (35%)
3.1 Analyse the various components of a general insurance premium.
(Chapters 12 and 13)
3.2 Describe the basic methodology used in rating general insurance business.
(Chapters 12 and 13)
3.3 Suggest the various factors to consider when setting rates.
(Chapters 12 and 13)
3.4 Evaluate appropriate rating bases for general insurance contracts, having regard
to: (Chapters 12 and 13)
return on capital.
underwriting considerations.
reinsurance considerations.
investment.
policy conditions such as self retention limits.
the renewal process.
expenses.
3.5 Discuss the burning cost approach to pricing. (Chapter 14)
3.5.1 Describe the burning cost approach to rating.
3.5.2 Determine the assumptions required when using this approach.
3.5.3 Outline the practical considerations when using this approach.
3.6 Discuss the frequency/severity approach to pricing. (Chapter 14)
3.6.1 Describe the frequency / severity approach to rating.
3.6.2 Determine the assumptions required when using this approach.
3.6.3 Outline the practical considerations when using this approach.
3.7.1 Describe how Original Loss Curves can be used in rating. (Chapter 15)
3.7.2 Determine the assumptions required when using this approach. (Chapter 15)
3.7.3 Outline the practical considerations when using this approach. (Chapter 15)
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8: Study Guide
3.8 Understand generalised linear models and multivariate modelling.
(Chapters 16 and 17)
3.8.1 Assess the applications of generalised linear models to the rating of personal lines
business and small commercial risks.
3.8.2 Evaluate the uses of multivariate models in pricing.
3.8.3 Outline the different types of multivariate models.
4. Credibility, reinsurance and catastrophe modelling (15%)
4.1 Outline the fundamental concepts of credibility theory. (Chapter 18)
4.2 Describe and compare the Classical and Bayes credibility models. (Chapter 18)
4.3 Describe the practical uses of credibility models in a general insurance
environment. (Chapter 18)
4.4 Outline the similarities and differences between pricing direct and reinsurance
business. (Chapter 20)
4.5 Describe how to determine appropriate premiums for each of the following types
of reinsurance: (Chapter 20)
proportional reinsurance
non-proportional reinsurance
property catastrophe reinsurance
stop losses.
4.6 Describe the data required to determine appropriate premiums for each of the
above types of reinsurance. (Chapter 20)
4.7 Outline the basic structure of a catastrophe model. (Chapter 21)
4.8 Describe the key perils that can be modelled in a catastrophe model. (Chapter 21)
5. Solving problems (Chapter 4)
5.1 Analyse hypothetical examples and scenarios in relation to the financial
management of general insurance companies.
5.1.1 Propose solutions and actions that are appropriate to the given context, with
justification where required.
5.1.2 Suggest possible reasons why certain actions have been chosen.
5.1.3 Assess the implications of actions within a given scenario.
5.1.4 Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of suggested actions, taking into
account different perspectives.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Study Guide Page 23
Core Reading
The Subject SP8 Course Notes include the Core Reading in full, integrated throughout the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8: Study Guide
2.3 Subject SP8 – the course structure
There are six parts to the Subject SP8 course. The parts cover related topics and have broadly
equal marks in the exam. The parts are broken down into chapters.
The following table shows how the parts, the chapters and the syllabus items relate to each other.
The end columns show how the chapters relate to the days of the regular tutorials. We have also
given you a broad indication of the length of each chapter. This table should help you plan your
progress across the study session.
No of Syllabus 3 full
Part Chapter Title
pages objectives days
1 Insurance companies 42
2 Insurance products – background 41 1.1
3 Insurance products – types 70 1.1
1
4 Problem solving 22 5
5 Reinsurance products – background 30 1.2
1
6 Reinsurance products – types 61 1.2
7 General insurance markets 30 1.3
8 External environment 51 1.3
2
9 Risk and uncertainty 36 2.1
10 Data 61 2.2
11 Aggregate claim distribution models 46 2.4-2.6
12 Rating methodologies and bases 43 3.1-3.4
3 13 Further considerations when rating 28 3.1-3.4
14 Rating using frequency-severity and burning 43 3.5, 3.6
2
cost approaches
15 Rating using original loss curves 51 3.7.1-3.7.3
4 16 Generalised linear modelling 72 3.8
17 Use of multivariate models in pricing 54 3.8
18 Credibility theory 61 4.1-4.3
5
19 Actuarial investigations 52 2.3
20 Reinsurance pricing 57 4.4-4.6 3
6 21 Use of catastrophe models 17 4.7, 4.8
Glossary 42 0.1
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Study Guide Page 25
2.4 Subject SP8 – summary of ActEd products
The following products are available for Subject SP8:
Course Notes
X Assignments – six assignments:
– X1-X3: 80-mark tests (you are allowed 2¾ hours to complete these)
– X4-X6: 100-mark tests (you are allowed 3¼ hours to complete these)
and X Assignment marking (Series Marking and Marking Vouchers)
Online Classroom – over twelve tutorial units
Flashcards
Revision Notes – seven A5 booklets
ASET – four years’ exam papers, ie eight papers, covering the period April 2014 to
September 2017
Mock Exam and marking (Series Marking and Marking Vouchers).
We will endeavour to release as much material as possible but unfortunately some revision
products may not be available until the September 2019 or even April 2020 exam sessions.
Please check the ActEd website or email [email protected] for more information.
The following tutorials are typically available for Subject SP8:
regular tutorials (three days)
block tutorials (three days).
Full details are set out in our Tuition Bulletin, which is available on our website at
www.ActEd.co.uk.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8: Study Guide
2.5 Subject SP8 – skills and assessment
Exam skills
Exam question skill levels
In the SP subjects, the approximate split of assessment across the three skill types is:
Knowledge – 25%
Application – 50%
Higher Order skills – 25%.
Assessment
The Specialist Principles examinations are in the form of 3¼-hour paper-based examinations.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Study Guide Page 27
2.6 Subject SP8 – frequently asked questions
Q: What knowledge of earlier subjects should I have?
A: The Course Notes have been written assuming that you have already studied, or been
exempted from, the Core Principles subjects (the CS, CM and CB subjects) or the equivalent
CT subjects.
The key material that you will need in studying Subject SP8 is that in Subjects CM2, CS1 and
CS2 (or the previous Subject CT6).
Q: What is your advice if I am simultaneously studying Subject SP7?
A: There is a fair amount of duplication between Subjects SP7 and SP8, particularly in the
early part of the course. We suggest you review the material in both subjects
simultaneously.
Q: What is your advice if I am simultaneously studying Subject SA3?
A: Subject SA3 builds on the common principles developed in Subjects SP7 and SP8, but
requires a much greater depth of knowledge and understanding. Consequently, there is a
degree of overlap between the subjects – both in the Core Reading and also possibly in
the types of questions that are likely to appear on the exam papers. It is therefore
important to assimilate the key ideas presented in Subjects SP7 and SP8 before tackling
the same ground in Subject SA3.
We suggest that you aim to cover the Subject SP7 and SP8 courses as quickly as possible,
so as to get a general feel for the principles underlying general insurance, together with
an overview of the course content. It also makes sense to quickly review the relevant
Subject SP7 and SP8 material prior to working through each chapter in Subject SA3.
From time to time over the study session, and particularly at the revision stage, it might
also be a good idea to review the Subjects SP7, SP8 & SA3 Course Notes at the same time,
along with the Practice Questions. In particular, it is always worth thinking about how
each idea or principle is presented in each of SP7, SP8 and SA1 and hence how it might
consequently be examined any exam.
Q: What should I do if I discover an error in the course?
A: If you find an error in the course, please check our website at:
www.ActEd.co.uk/paper_corrections.html
to see if the correction has already been dealt with. Otherwise please send details via
email to [email protected].
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8: Study Guide
Q: Who should I send feedback to?
A: We are always happy to receive feedback from students, particularly details concerning
any errors, contradictions or unclear statements in the courses.
If you have any comments on this course in general, please email to [email protected].
If you have any comments or concerns about the Syllabus or Core Reading, these can be
passed on to the profession via ActEd. Alternatively, you can send them directly to the
Institute and Faculty of Actuaries’ Examination Team by email to
[email protected].
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 1
Insurance companies
Syllabus objectives
There are no syllabus objectives specifically covered in this introductory chapter.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-01: Insurance companies
0 Introduction to Subject SP8
This chapter aims to give you a broad understanding of many of the key topics in general
insurance. Subsequent study of individual topics in the later chapters should then be clearer
because you will understand the importance of the topic in the context of the whole subject.
Because we cover so many fundamental topics in this chapter, we recommend that you work
slowly and carefully. If you are simultaneously studying Subject SP7, most of the material in this
chapter is covered there too.
The sections in this chapter are as follows:
Section 1: Introduction to general insurance
Section 2: A general insurer’s balance sheet
Section 3: Technical reserves
Section 4: Free reserves
Section 5: Premium rating
Section 6: Capital modelling
Section 7: Investments
Section 8: Profitability and cashflow
Section 9: Reinsurance
Section 10: Glossary items.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 3
1 Introduction to general insurance
1.1 Why do general insurers exist?
To meet a need
Centuries ago merchants were encouraged to hazard great journeys by the existence of
insurance: if they took the risk and disaster struck, then they would not be ruined if they were
insured. The same social advantage is still there today. The exciting ventures have changed
somewhat, but the ability to insure against various perils still enables individuals and companies
to take on risks that they would not otherwise undertake.
The ability to make a known, small outlay to insure against the risk of a potentially large loss is
justified by economists’ utility theory, empirical evidence and common sense. People will pay
more for insurance than the expected recovery from insurance (ie ‘the risk premium’), because
they are risk-averse and prefer the more certain outcome.
To make money
Most general insurance companies exist primarily to make money. Get this firmly in your mind at
this early stage. A moneymaking opportunity exists for Insurer A, because of the last sentence of
the previous section. The constraints on A’s profitability are how much the customer is prepared
to pay, any statutory controls on insurers and the competition from other insurance companies.
These concepts apply to most industries, not just general insurance. All companies weigh up the
potential risks of their business and invest their capital so as to maximise return to shareholders.
For most of Subject SP8 (and SP7 and SA3) you need very commercial, profit-driven thinking.
Question
Outline why some insurance companies might quote much higher premiums than other insurance
companies for car insurance for the same individual and period of cover. (Try to give several
different ideas.)
Solution
There are lots of possible ideas, including:
different estimates of the expected claim amount
different levels of expenses, commission, reinsurance costs, investment returns and profit
some insurers don’t want the business, so quote too high
others may undercharge, hoping the policyholder will stay for years and that they will
make money later
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-01: Insurance companies
different forms of cover may have been requested, eg:
– comprehensive or third party fire and theft only
– as the only named driver, or possibly with family / friends as drivers too
– different excess levels
quotations could have related to driving in different countries etc, etc, etc.
Welcome to Subject SP8. This sort of careful question reading plus common sense / lateral
thinking and the generation of a lot of relevant ideas is often just what is needed.
1.2 What is general insurance?
In simple terms, general insurance is any type of insurance that is not life insurance.
General insurance therefore encompasses a wide range of types of insurance. In most cases a
general insurance policy is a contract of indemnity, eg if a loss occurs of an insured article, the
insurer will reimburse the value of the insured article. Other policies might pay specified amounts
on specified contingencies only (eg £10,000 if you lose the use of an eye) or if the loss is unclear,
the amount might be determined by a court of law.
1.3 Risks, uncertainty and general insurance
Policyholders reduce their uncertainty by passing risks to insurance companies. It is not
surprising, therefore, that insurance companies themselves are subject to risk and uncertainty.
How to quantify and control this uncertainty is the underlying theme throughout this course. As
you work through the different areas of the course think about how product design, capital
requirements, pricing, reserving, reinsurance and accounts are influenced by the different risk and
uncertainties involved in writing insurance.
Most of the major uncertainties centre around how many claims will occur and how much the
insurer will have to pay to settle them. These uncertainties have a big influence on how much the
insurer will charge for the protection provided (covered in Subject SP8) and how much the insurer
needs to reserve for future claims payments (covered in Subject SP7). Other risks to the insurer
include:
failure to recover fixed expenses
failure of other parties (eg brokers or reinsurers)
falls in asset values
the insurance cycle (also known as the underwriting cycle).
The size of the free reserves will influence the ability of the insurer to cope with these risks, as will
the insurer’s reinsurance cover and investment policy.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 5
1.4 Actuaries and general insurance
That’s all very well, but what about actuaries?
It’s clear to us as actuaries that we should have lots to offer this industry, but the industry was
originally a little slow to recognise that. Actuaries have only become involved in general
insurance within the last 50 years.
The main actuarial roles have traditionally been in reserving and setting premiums. More
recently, some actuaries have moved into much wider areas within general insurance. For
example:
capital allocation
risk assessment, eg modelling catastrophic events
strategic management of the business
determining a suitable investment strategy
assessing reinsurance requirements
expense allocation
assessing the effectiveness of marketing campaigns
assisting with the early settlement of liabilities in the event of a wind-up.
Many of the topics that we study in general insurance are, in fact, areas where actuarial
involvement is increasing.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-01: Insurance companies
2 A general insurer’s balance sheet
The balance sheet of any organisation gives a snapshot of the finances of that organisation as at
the date of the balance sheet. The balance sheet of a general insurer is therefore a summary
(strictly an estimate) of the financial status of the company at a particular moment. The balance
sheet is summarised in the diagram shown below.
The right-hand side is a statement of everything the insurer owns, and the left-hand side is a
summary of what it owes. (Free reserves are ‘owed’ by the insurer to the owner(s).)
LIABILITIES ASSETS
Free reserves
Investments
Technical reserves
Fixed assets
Net current assets
Free reserves: The balancing item equal to the excess of assets over insurance (or
technical) liabilities. Discussed in Section 4.
Technical reserves: These are the amounts set aside in respect of expected claim payments to
or on behalf of policyholders, plus related expenses. Discussed in
Section 3.
Investments: These might be bonds, equities, property etc. Discussed in Section 7.
Fixed assets: For example, the office building and equipment. Not discussed much in
this course, but you should be aware that they exist.
Net current assets: Excess of current assets over current liabilities, eg money due from
brokers.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 7
2.1 Different types of balance sheet
The values placed on each of the items in the balance sheet are not always uniquely defined.
Firstly, there may be an element of judgement used in deciding the values, so that a balance sheet
based on a very prudent approach could be very different from a balance sheet produced with
less conservative assumptions. Secondly, balance sheets produced for different purposes will be
assessed using different approaches. For example:
Statutory accounts, if required, may be in a prescribed format or there may be certain
principles that must be applied.
Internal management accounts may be produced to assist internal decision-making.
These are likely to be on an on-going, realistic basis, although a variety of ‘what-if’
scenarios are also likely to be produced.
Question
Suggest reasons why the latest balance sheet of an insurance company (as given in the company
accounts) might not give a true indication of the financial strength of the company.
Solution
Some judgement is required in setting values for assets and liabilities. So, for example, when
assessing the financial strength of the company a prudent (not realistic) basis may be used.
Also, the balance sheet is a snapshot at a given moment. Circumstances may have changed since
the date of the balance sheet.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-01: Insurance companies
3 Technical reserves
The technical reserves are held to cover the liabilities relating to policies already written. The
technical reserves might also be called insurance reserves or insurance provisions because they
relate to the liabilities arising from writing insurance business.
These liabilities can be split into two main categories:
(a) Past: liabilities (claims plus expenses) in respect of accidents or losses from events that
have occurred prior to the accounting date. Liabilities for outstanding claims are
discussed in Section 3.2.
(b) Future: liabilities (claims plus expenses) in respect of future insurance cover from policies
for which premiums have already been received. Unexpired risks are discussed in
Section 3.3.
First, in Section 3.1, we explain how the claim characteristics of the major insurance classes
influence the degree of uncertainty in the reserving process.
3.1 Major claim characteristics
Claim characteristics refer to the ways in which, and speed with which, claims originate, are
reported, are settled and are, on occasion, reopened.
Imagine the rather extreme scenario in which insurance companies make claim payments as soon
as a claim event occurs. For example, the instant that a policyholder has a car accident, there is
an immediate transfer to the accounts of the affected parties. In this scenario, what is the
insurance company’s liability at any one time for outstanding claims?
The answer is zero. If all claims are settled the instant the event occurs, then the company never
has any outstanding claims liability. In reality, insurance companies do have outstanding claims
liabilities because there are delays between claims occurring and being settled. Hence insurance
companies will hold reserves for outstanding claims. Before looking at reserves, let’s consider the
delays more fully.
There are two main types of delays: reporting delays and settlement delays.
Reporting delays
The reporting delay is the time from when the event occurs through to the time that the
insurance company is notified of the event. Sometimes policyholders may be slow in getting
round to advising the insurer – possibly because the amount involved is quite small. Other times
the policyholders do not submit claims because they do not realise there is cause for claiming.
For example, in the case of a number of industrial diseases (eg asbestos-related diseases,
industrial deafness) it may be many years before the condition emerges. In these cases, reporting
delays are often considerable.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 9
The part of the delay that relates to the period between when the insured event happens
(eg original exposure to asbestos) and when the policyholder realises the event has happened
(eg the policyholder starts to develop signs of illness) is referred to as the event delay. In many
cases the event delay is minimal (eg car accidents). In practice however, the term ‘event delay’ is
not often used. Many people simply use the term ‘reporting delay’ to mean ‘reporting delay plus
event delay’.
Settlement delays
The settlement delay is the period between notification to the insurance company and the
payment of the claim. These delays are due to:
(a) initial administrative processing
(b) establishing whether the insurer is liable
(c) waiting for a condition to stabilise (eg will the injured party recover, or is the disability
permanent?)
(d) establishing how much should be paid.
In a few cases where the insurer and the claimant cannot agree, the case may go to court.
In general (but certainly not always):
property damage claims are settled more quickly than claims in respect of bodily injury
large claims take longer to settle than small claims.
Short tail and long tail
Different classes of business are referred to as ‘short tail’ or ‘long tail’, where:
short tail means that claims are generally reported quickly and settled quickly by the
insurer, and
long tail means that there is a sizeable proportion of total claim payments that take a long
time for the insurer to settle.
When looking at an individual class of business, or type of claim, you should make a point of
noting whether it is short tail or long tail (or in-between). This is important in developing your
understanding of an insurance class, and may influence your answer to a question in the exam.
The claim characteristics of the main insurance classes are detailed later in the course.
3.2 Reserves for outstanding claims
The outstanding claims reserve is the first of the two main components of the technical reserves.
It may be given as a total figure or, alternatively, it may be split into anything up to five separate
components:
(a) Reserve for outstanding reported claims: this is the estimated reserve needed to settle
the claims that the company knows about at the accounting date.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-01: Insurance companies
(b) Reserve for incurred but not reported (IBNR) claims: the IBNR reserve is needed to cover
the claim payments for incidents which have happened, but have not been reported to
the insurance company on or before the accounting date.
(c) Reserve for incurred but not enough reported (IBNER): the IBNER reserve is needed to
cover expected increases (or decreases) in estimates for reported claims.
(d) Reserve for re-opened claims: this is an additional reserve which may be explicitly shown
to allow for claims that the insurance company treats as being fully settled, but which
might one day require further payments. In practice, insurers differ significantly over
when they ‘close’ a claim.
(e) Reserve for claims handling expenses: in settling claims in each of the above categories,
the company will incur some additional expenses (eg legal fees). The reserve for these
expenses may be held separately.
Even if the reserves are not shown split into these categories, an insurance company should still
hold reserves to cover all of these items. For example, if the reserves are shown split into the first
two components only, then the reserve for re-opened claims might be within the outstanding
reported claims reserve, the reserve for IBNER might be within the reserve for IBNR and the
reserve for claims handling expenses would be split between the two.
Question
There are two main reasons for needing outstanding claims reserves: reporting delays and
settlement delays. List which of the components of the outstanding claims reserve is linked to
each type of delay.
Solution
Outstanding reported claims reserve is in respect of settlement delays.
IBNR reserve is in respect of reporting delays.
The IBNER reserve exists to cover expected increases (or decreases) in outstanding reported
amounts. Such changes could result from either reporting or settlement delays.
Re-opened claims are caused by premature closure of a claims file. The cause of the closure is
needed to determine whether a reporting or settlement delay is the reason.
Reserves for claims’ handling expenses can be in respect of both types of delay.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 11
Estimating outstanding claims reserves
There is great uncertainty about the payments an insurer will need to make in respect of
outstanding claims. The amounts which will be paid are not known, so the insurer must use
estimates when deciding how much to set aside in respect of these liabilities. Two distinct
approaches are:
(a) making estimates of the liability for each individual outstanding claim (‘case estimates’, or
‘case by case estimation’)
(b) using statistical techniques to estimate the total outstanding payments for the portfolio.
In practice, insurers use a combination of the two. We study this topic in detail in Subject SP7. In
the meantime, the following observations should be apparent:
individual estimates cannot be used for IBNR because the insurer does not yet know
about the claim
statistical techniques are more useful for classes of insurance where there are lots of
claims (eg private motor), and where there is stability in the numbers and amounts of
claims.
One important consequence of the uncertainty about the liability for outstanding claims is that
any aspect of the insurer which relies upon estimates for outstanding claims (eg profitability) is, as
a result, also subject to uncertainty. This is an important point that you should be aware of at all
times when working with figures that rely upon technical reserves.
The degree of this uncertainty will vary from class to class. Generally, there is much more
uncertainty with long-tail classes, where the reserves for outstanding claims are larger in relation
to premium income.
Question
An insurance company splits its outstanding claims reserves into two components: reported
claims and IBNR.
The company writes two classes of business. For each class, the outstanding claims reserve is split
as follows:
Class 1 Class 2
Reserve for reported claims 90% 50%
Reserve for IBNR 10% 50%
The reserves for Class 2 are a much bigger proportion of premium income than are the reserves
for Class 1.
Suggest two common classes of insurance this company might write.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-01: Insurance companies
Solution
Class 1 must be a short-tail class of business (because total claims reserves are relatively low),
with little in the way of reporting delays, eg household contents.
Class 2 is a long-tail class (because the total claims reserves are a much bigger proportion of
premiums), with extensive reporting delays. A class such as employers’ liability is possible, where
some illnesses may not emerge for many years which will make the IBNR significant.
3.3 Reserves for unexpired policies
We have discussed reserves in respect of claim events that have already happened. We now turn
to the other main component of the technical reserves, the liabilities in respect of existing policies
with some unexpired exposure, ie future claim events from policies with future periods of cover
remaining at the accounting date.
Unearned premium reserves
One basis for determining the reserves in respect of the unexpired exposure is to hold a portion of
premiums in respect of that exposure. For example, on a straight averaging basis, for a policy
with half of its term still to run, it might be reasonable to hold a reserve of half of the premium
that was charged. For an annual policy with one month to run, a reserve of one twelfth of the
premium might be held.
The name given to the portion of premiums held in respect of unexpired exposure is the unearned
premium reserve (UPR). The title is quite logical: the UPR is simply the premiums that have been
received which have not yet been earned. This is a retrospective assessment of the reserve.
The straight averaging approach used above has a number of fundamental weaknesses in
practice:
it ignores the fact that the risk from the policy may not be spread evenly over the period
of cover, eg seasonal effects
it ignores the fact that the expenses of setting up and servicing the policy may not be
incurred evenly over the period of cover.
For the purpose of this discussion, we will assume that risk is even over the period of cover.
However, a similar assumption about expenses would not be appropriate because there is clearly
a large element of expense that is generally incurred at the commencement of a policy,
eg commission paid to the sales outlet.
The expenses that are incurred by the insurer at the start of a policy are called acquisition costs.
Commission is generally the major component of acquisition costs. But how should these
acquisition costs be allowed for when setting the reserves in respect of unexpired exposure? The
best way to see this is through a simple example.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 13
Example
Suppose a policy has acquisition costs of 20% of the premium. Then 80% of the premium is
available to meet claims, on-going expenses and profit. If we assume that the risk and on-going
expenses are spread evenly over the period of cover, then the 80% of premium (ie after deduction
of acquisition costs) could also be spread evenly. If the policy were half-way through its life at the
accounting date, the UPR would be 40% of the premium (ie half of the 80% which is to be spread
over the life of the policy).
This approach to establishing the UPR can be extended to a more general formula:
UPR = proportion of risk unexpired (premium acquisition costs)
The UPR calculated in this way is the net UPR. The gross UPR doesn’t allow for the acquisition
expenses.
Question
An insurance company calculates its UPR using an individual, policy by policy approach. Calculate
the UPR as at 31 December 2018 for the following annual policies:
(a) Premium £1,000. Commission £120. Started 1 October 2018.
Risk is assumed to be uniform over the year.
(b) Premium £3,500. Commission 10%. Started 1 July 2018.
Risk starts at zero, and increases daily by a constant linear amount over the policy year.
(c) Premium £2,200. Commission £200. Started at 11.59pm on 31 December 2018.
Risk fluctuates throughout the policy year.
(d) Premium £10,000. No acquisition costs. Started 1 November 2018.
All risk is assumed to be in April.
Solution
(a) £660, ie 75% of (1,000 120)
(b) £2,362.50 (75% of risk is outstanding at year-end, so the UPR is 75% of 90% of £3,500)
(c) £2,000, ie 100% of (2,200 200)
(d) £10,000, ie 100% of 10,000
Unexpired risk reserve
So far, our assessment of the reserve to be held in respect of unexpired exposure has been
retrospective by looking at the premiums we have received in the past. We have set up a reserve
equal to the unearned premium net of acquisition costs, ie the net UPR. A prospective approach
should also be considered by thinking about possible future claim events. What reserve do we
think we need to hold to cover the unexpired risks?
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-01: Insurance companies
The unexpired risk reserve (URR) is the name for this prospective assessment. Again, the title is
quite logical. Remember that such a reserve would need to cover all the claims and all the
expenses that are expected to be incurred in the future from the unexpired portion of existing
policies.
We would normally expect the unearned premium reserve to be bigger than the unexpired risk
reserve. This is effectively the same as saying we expect the premiums to be big enough to cover
the claims and expenses – which is what a profit-seeking insurer would generally want. In the
cases where the UPR is greater than the URR, there is no need for the insurer to keep reserves
greater than the UPR for unexpired policies. Because of the accounting accruals principle we
would generally hold at least the full UPR. Here, holding a reserve equal to the UPR, we would
expect some profit to emerge over the coming months from these policies.
However, for cases where URR is greater than UPR, the calculations become more complex.
These cases imply that the company expects to make a loss on the unexpired policies because it
expects to pay out more in claims and expenses than the amount of premium held back for the
unexpired period. Therefore, the UPR will be insufficient to meet the expected payments, and the
insurer should set up additional reserves to meet this strain.
These additional reserves are known (again, quite logically) as the additional unexpired risk
reserves (AURR), or the additional reserves (or provision) for unexpired risks.
It should not surprise you that:
AURR URR UPR (minimum of zero)
You will need to be particularly careful with the expression unexpired risk reserve. In some
contexts practitioners use it to mean the total URR (as defined above), and others may use it to
mean the AURR. So:
stick to the definitions given in this chapter
be careful when reading unexpired risk reserve, and check which is meant in the context
be clear in your own work as to whether you mean total unexpired risk or additional
unexpired risk.
Question
State in layman’s terms the key difference between the UPR and the URR. Justify which of the
two calculations, UPR or URR, is open to most uncertainty.
Solution
Whereas UPR is the portion of premium set aside for unexpired risks, the URR is our estimate of
how much we need to cover the claims and expenses from unexpired risks.
The URR is probably open to more uncertainty. We know what premiums we charged, but we
don’t know what the claims experience will be next year.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 15
Note that since Solvency II came into force in the UK (and other EU countries), insurance
companies need to estimate their reserves for unexpired exposures using a prospective approach
(ie unexpired risk reserve) as opposed to a retrospective approach (ie unearned premium
reserves).
3.4 Other types of technical reserve
So far in this section we have looked at reserves in respect of outstanding claims and reserves in
respect of unexpired policies. We now look briefly at two further types of technical reserve which
do not fall easily into either category: claims equalisation reserves and catastrophe reserves.
Claims equalisation reserve
Because insurance business is volatile, the year-to-year profits of an insurance company can be
very volatile.
One way to reduce the volatility of profits over time is to hold a claims equalisation reserve. This
is a reserve that is used to smooth the profits from one year to another. In a good year when
profits are large, money is transferred to the claims equalisation reserve, thereby reducing the
initial assessment of profit. In a bad year, money is transferred from the equalisation reserve,
thereby increasing the initial assessment of profit.
Since Solvency II came into force, UK (and other EU) insurance companies no longer need to hold
claims equalisation reserves. However many other countries worldwide still hold them.
Catastrophe reserve
In the context of general insurance, a catastrophe is a single event that gives rise to an
exceptionally large aggregation of losses. Examples of catastrophic events range from natural
catastrophes such as floods, windstorms earthquakes, to human-made catastrophes such as
aircraft crashes, explosions or oil spillages.
An insurance company may choose to set aside an additional reserve to cover the losses that
might arise from a catastrophe. Whereas an insurer would expect to use other types of reserve
for, say, outstanding claims, an insurer would not expect to have to pay out from the catastrophe
reserve. It is genuinely a contingency reserve that would be held just in case something awful
were to happen.
If an insurer did hold a large explicit catastrophe reserve, there would be less need for the insurer
to hold extensive free reserves (ie the excess of assets over liabilities). Conversely, the free
reserves for a company that does not hold a catastrophe reserve need to be sufficiently big to
cover the possibility of a catastrophe (or two).
Question
A non-EU insurance company that recognises that it has been writing business unprofitably for
the last six months shows just three different types of technical reserve in its accounts. Suggest
what they might be. Explain how your answer would change if the question had said very
profitably instead.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-01: Insurance companies
Solution
Outstanding claims reserves (includes IBNR etc)
UPR
AURR (needed because URR is expected to exceed UPR as the business is unprofitable)
If the question had said that the company was writing business very profitably, then we would not
have needed an AURR. So the answer would have been:
Outstanding reported claims reserves
IBNR
UPR
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 17
4 Free reserves
The free reserves are the excess of the assets over the technical reserves (as shown in the
diagram of the balance sheet on page 6).
You need to be particularly careful here because lots of different expressions are used by
different practitioners in different circumstances to refer to the excess of assets over technical
liabilities. The following expressions are all commonly used as alternatives to free reserves:
free assets
solvency margin
shareholders’ funds
capital employed.
The word ‘solvency’ has several different possible interpretations for a general insurance
company. The most common is the concept that the assets exceed the liabilities. Hence the
excess of assets over liabilities may be called the solvency margin. Where a solvency margin ratio
is discussed in general insurance, it is the solvency margin divided by the written premiums, not
the solvency margin divided by total assets. This is another area where terminology sometimes
differs. Some practitioners use the term solvency margin when referring to the ratio defined
above.
4.1 Significance of free reserves
Without free reserves, an insurance company would not be able to operate.
Firstly, you may regard the free reserves as the pool of funds being used to provide the backing
for insurance risks. If the insurer did not have an adequate level of free reserves, policyholders
would have no reason to believe that the insurer would be able to meet claims in the event of
disaster. Meeting claims after adverse events is the whole purpose of insurance.
Secondly, there may be a legal requirement for an insurance company’s free reserves to exceed a
statutory minimum level. In the UK, this minimum capital amount is often called the Minimum
Capital Requirement (MCR), or Required Minimum Margin (RMM).
The extent of the free reserves is very important for the management of the insurance company.
For example, it is closely linked to the following:
The maximum amount of business the company should write: free reserves are required
to provide a cushion against unexpected adverse results. The more business that is
written, the bigger the required cushion. Conversely, there is a maximum amount of
business that a given level of free reserves should support.
The classes of business written: some classes of business have more variable claims
experience than others and some classes involve bigger risks. A higher level of free
reserves can support more variable and larger risks.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-01: Insurance companies
Question
Other aspects of the management of a general insurer are also influenced by the size of the free
reserves. Suggest what you think the effect of higher free reserves will be on an insurer’s:
reinsurance programme
investment strategy
pricing policy.
Solution
Higher free reserves result in:
less need for reinsurance
greater investment freedom, ie scope to mismatch
greater scope for competitive pricing.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 19
5 Premium rating
5.1 Introduction
The process of setting appropriate premium rates is key to the operation of a successful insurance
company, and is a major area of actuarial involvement.
Premium rating forms a core part of the syllabus for Subject SP8. Some of the topics covered will
be familiar to you from your study of previous subjects. However, Subject SP8 will require you to
apply your commercial awareness to specific scenarios, as well as to understand the more
technical aspects of the course.
5.2 Technical methods revisited
Throughout all areas of general insurance work, be it reserving, pricing or capital modelling,
actuaries will be interested in the frequency and severity distributions of claims. In particular, the
estimation of claim distributions will allow a pricing actuary to calculate the pure ‘risk premium’,
ie the amount of premium that is required to exactly cover the expected cost of claims alone.
Subject SP8 revisits some of the methods used to model aggregate claim distributions, and some
of the approximations that can be used where analytical methods are impractical. You should
recognise this from your earlier studies.
The pricing actuary will also wish to ensure that different types of policyholders are charged the
most appropriate premium given their own risk characteristics (subject to any legislative
requirements). For example, older drivers are considered on average to be lower risk and
therefore can expect to be charged a lower motor insurance premium than young drivers. The
actuary will therefore want to identify those characteristics of a policyholder that have the
greatest impact on the amount of risk taken on. Generalised Linear Models (GLMs) and
multivariate analyses are key tools in the identification of these risk factors. Again, you should be
familiar with much of this material from your study of previous subjects.
5.3 Other pricing techniques
A ‘burning cost’ approach is a simple method often used as a starting point to price certain types
of insurance and reinsurance. It calculates the risk premium as actual cost of claims during a past
time period, expressed as an annual rate, per unit of exposure. You might therefore like to think
of it as just an average claim cost per year, per unit of exposure.
The ‘frequency-severity’ approach to pricing calculates the risk premium as the expected average
claim cost multiplied by the expected average number of claims in the period.
Original loss curves are often used in general insurance to derive premium rates where past
claims data is too sparse to derive a credible price using more traditional techniques. They are
often used to price certain types of reinsurance arrangements. However, a key problem of
original loss curves is the difficulty of estimating and/or selecting appropriate curves, since the
resulting expected claim cost is often very sensitive to the specific model selected. This topic will
be covered in detail in Chapter 15.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-01: Insurance companies
5.4 Pricing methodology
A pricing actuary is likely to estimate the expected cost of claims based on past data. However, it
would be naïve to assume that past claims experience will always be an accurate predictor of
claims experience on a future policy. Adjustment may have to be made to allow for:
unusually heavy / light experience in the past data
large or exceptional claims the actuary may exclude these from the past data and then
make an explicit loading in the risk premium later for catastrophes and large claims
trends in claim experience which mean the past data will be out of date by the time the
new rates are in service
inflation between the date of the data and the date the policy will be in force
changes in the risk and/or cover provided
changes in environmental factors, eg legislative / technological changes
incomplete past data arising from the fact that these claims might not yet be fully
developed.
A corresponding analysis and projection of exposure data will also need to be made.
The premium actually charged to a policyholder will not only be based on the expected cost of
claims on that policy, however. Further adjustments are made, to arrive at the ‘office premium’
ie the actual market price for a policy. These adjustments include:
expected reinsurance costs and recoveries
expense loadings such as commission, policy administration costs, claim handling costs,
overheads, levies etc
loadings for profit
allowance for investment income.
Further adjustments will also be made for practical considerations such as:
the insurer’s business objectives eg desire to build up market share
competitive pressures
the level of brand or customer loyalty amongst the insurer’s target market
the state of the insurance cycle
market acceptability, ie the level of cross-subsidy between policies, for example between
new business and renewals business, and the likely reaction of policyholders to these
differences
the use of no-claims discounts.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 21
6 Capital modelling
6.1 Introduction
Capital modelling is a relatively new field in general insurance. Recent changes in regulation, and
the increasing focus on risk modelling in all sectors of the financial services industry has meant
that this is a growing area of actuarial work.
Any resources held by the company in excess of the value of its technical liabilities are called its
capital, and we saw earlier that a general insurer will hold capital well in excess of these liabilities.
In fact, it will hold enough capital to be sure of meeting all its obligations to policyholders with a
certain degree of confidence. The process by which this confidence level is obtained is called
‘capital modelling’. A capital model will also be used to help allocate capital between classes,
products and individual policies.
6.2 Structure of a capital model
A capital model will most often take the form of a cashflow model, and will project all aspects of a
general insurer’s business into the future, to assess the company’s ability to meet its financial
obligations. A range of assumptions will therefore be required, including:
future written premium income
future claims, on current and future business, and the timing of these claims
future reserving basis
future expenses
investment return
reinsurance arrangements, costs and recoveries, potential reinsurance exhaustion
economic variables such as future inflation and interest rates
likelihood / cost of catastrophes
the insurance cycle
operational losses
tax
dividends.
It may help when developing ideas on this in the exam, to think about the components of a
general insurer’s income statement.
A capital model will usually analyse the general insurer’s business in a considerable level of detail.
We would expect at least that each class of business will usually be projected separately, but
projections may also include separate analyses for different sources of business, locations, claim
types, asset types, asset categories etc. The level of detail, or granularity, built in to the capital
model will depend on the uses to which the model is put.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-01: Insurance companies
Given the degree of volatility in general insurance business, a range of methods will be used,
including stress testing and scenario testing. It is also likely that stochastic models will be used
since the tail end of an insurer’s claims distributions will be of particular interest in determining
confidence levels.
6.3 Allowance for risk in a capital model
The modern approach to assessing the level of capital that general insurers are required to hold is
to allow for the inherent riskiness of the insurer’s activities. The greater the risk taken on by the
insurer, the greater the level of capital that it is required to hold. Conversely, if an insurer is
considered to be less risky, this can be reflected in the capital model, and a lower capital level will
be required. Thus, companies can be rewarded for maintaining a sound risk management policy.
The types of risk that may be taken into account in the capital modelling process include:
insurance risks the uncertainty arising from the amount and timing of claims, expenses
and premiums
market risk risks relating to changes in investment market values or investment income
credit risk the risk of failure of third parties to repay debts, including the failure of
reinsurers
operational risk the risk of loss due to failures of people, processes and systems,
eg fraud or mismanagement within the general insurer itself
liquidity risk the risk that the company is unable to meet its obligations as they fall due
as a consequence of a timing mismatch between its assets and liabilities
group risk the risk that the company experiences as a result of being part of a group
eg from being a subsidiary of a parent company, as opposed to a stand-alone entity
other risks such as strategic risks, political risks and enterprise risk management risks
(ERM). You may have come across ERM in your earlier studies, it is sometimes also called
integrated risk management. ERM is discussed further in Subject SP7.
Insurance risks can be further sub-divided into:
reserving risk the risk that the level of technical reserves held in respect of risks already
written / earned is inappropriate
underwriting or premium risk – relating to risks yet to be written / earned.
An insurer’s required level of capital can be adjusted for the fact that some of the risks outlined
above will be negatively correlated. A good capital model will make allowance for this
diversification effect. Conversely however, should the insurer be exposed to accumulations of
risk, the level of capital will need to be increased.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 23
7 Investments
As with any investing institution, a general insurance company will want to achieve the maximum
possible return from its investments, without exposing itself to an undesirable level of risk.
Here’s a quick summary of the major factors influencing the company’s investment strategy.
7.1 Nature of liabilities
Some of the liabilities will be in fixed monetary amounts. Investments producing fixed monetary
returns are appropriate for these liabilities.
However, many of the liabilities will need to be settled in prices applicable at the time of
settlement. This means that there is an element of inflation underlying most of the liabilities. The
type of inflation the liabilities are exposed to varies by class and peril. This becomes important for
those classes of insurance where there are considerable reporting and settlement delays.
Investments that tend to maintain their real value are desirable for such liabilities.
7.2 Term of liabilities
Investments should have similar terms to those of the liabilities. The appropriate term of
investments is very dependent upon the classes of business written. Compared with life
assurance and pension funds, many liabilities tend to be short term, and the investments tend to
reflect this. For long-tail classes of business (eg employers’ liability), some medium-term and
even some long-term investments are appropriate.
7.3 Currency of liabilities
In some classes of insurance, for example, marine, travel, product liability, insurers may have
liabilities in several currencies. Assets should be held in appropriate currencies to match these
liabilities.
7.4 Uncertainty of liabilities
In general insurance there is often a great deal of uncertainty about the amounts that will be
necessary to settle claims and the timing of the claim payments. The proportion of the assets
held in a form that is liquid must be sufficient to cover this uncertainty.
7.5 Size of free reserves
The bigger the free reserves (relative to the size of the company), the greater the extent to which
the investment strategy can be aimed at maximising returns.
7.6 Legislative influences
The need to maintain the free reserves above a particular minimum solvency margin means that
insurers may be very wary of holding too many investments that have volatile market values. The
extent to which this is a concern depends on the size of the free reserves relative to any statutory
minimum solvency margin that may exist.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-01: Insurance companies
7.7 Taxation
Insurers will want to maximise their post-tax investment returns, therefore the taxation basis for
insurers is relevant to the choice of investment strategy.
Question
Suggest which two aspects of an insurance company’s operations will have the most impact on
the company’s investment strategy.
Solution
classes of business written, hence nature / term / currency and uncertainty of liabilities
size of free reserves
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 25
8 Profitability and cashflow
8.1 Basic measure of profits
In this section we will look at the items that make up profits.
Intuitively, it should be clear that:
post-tax profits = premiums claims expenses + investment return tax
(In case you are wondering why reserves are not explicitly shown in this equation, all is explained
below.)
With the premiums, claims and expense items, we need to be careful that the figures we use are
sensible and consistent. Suppose we are trying to calculate the profit earned in 2018. Then, if we
write £10,000 of new business on 30 December 2018, does this mean that the 2018 profits will be
bigger by £10,000? If we follow usual accounting principles, the answer is NO.
The accounting principle that matters here is accruals. Income and expenditure should accrue
over the period to which they relate.
Let’s consider various measures of premiums and claims and then select the measures that are
consistent with the accruals principle.
Written premiums
This is the total amount of premium income written in the year. So for policies starting in the
year, the whole premium will be included within written premiums (also expressed as premiums
written).
Earned premiums
This is the amount of premium income relating to insurance cover provided during the year (also
expressed as premiums earned). For example, if a new annual policy is started on
1 December 2018 for a premium of £1,200, the earned premium in 2018 from this policy would
be £100 (assuming that the risk and expenses are even over the policy year). This policy would
then contribute £1,100 to earned premiums in 2019.
So, which of these two measures of premiums is consistent with the accruals concept?
Hopefully, you will agree that it is earned premiums because this tells us how much premium has
accrued during the year.
Paid claims
This is the total amount of claim payments made by the insurer during the year (also expressed as
claims paid).
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-01: Insurance companies
Incurred claims
This is the amount of claims paid (as above) plus the increase in the total reserve for outstanding
claims (also expressed as claims incurred). For example, suppose that a claim for £1,000 is
reported on 20 December 2018, but payment is delayed until 2 January 2019. The effect of this
delay is to decrease the 2018 claims paid by £1,000 but the 2018 claims incurred is unchanged
(assuming that the reserve for outstanding claims as at 31 December 2018 is increased by
£1,000).
It’s claims incurred that is consistent with the accruals principle.
Question
An insurance company (which writes remarkably little business) writes six-monthly policies, each
for a fixed premium of £1,200. Policies commencing in 2017 and 2018 were written on the
following dates:
1/3/17, 1/4/17, 1/8/17, 1/10/17, 1/12/17, 1/1/18, 1/3/18, 1/5/18, 1/6/18, 1/8/18, 1/11/18.
At the end of 2017, the reserve for outstanding claims was £6,000. By the end of 2018, the
reserve for outstanding claims was £7,300. A total of £5,500 was paid in claim settlements in
2018.
Calculate (for the 2018 accounting year):
premiums written
premiums earned
claims paid
claims incurred.
Solution
premiums written 6 1,200 £7,200
premiums earned 1,200 6 (0 0 1 3 5 6 6 6 6 5 2) £8,000
claims paid = £5,500 (given)
claims incurred 7,300 6,000 5,500 £6,800
Expenses incurred
When policies are written the insurer pays commission and other initial expenses. The acquisition
costs already paid for unexpired policies at the accounting date are known as Deferred Acquisition
Costs (DAC).
To be consistent with the treatment of premiums and claims above, the expenses item will also
need to be based on an incurred basis rather than just showing expenses paid.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 27
Underwriting result
The underwriting result (or underwriting profit) is the term given to the excess of premiums over
claims and expenses:
Earned premiums
– Claims incurred
– Expenses incurred
= Underwriting result
Note that the whole of this account is based on the accruals concept. The underwriting result
shown in the revenue account of a general insurance company is analogous to the operating
profit of non-insurance companies. The issues covered in this section are discussed in more detail
in Subject SP7.
Question
The following data is available for a general insurance company for an accounting year (in
£ million):
premiums receivable: 165
unearned premium brought forward at 1 January: 75
unearned premium carried forward at 31 December: 83
claims paid: 103
outstanding claims reserve at 1 January: 124
outstanding claims reserve at 31 December: 133
expenses incurred: 31
Prepare the revenue account showing the underwriting profit (or loss) for the year.
Solution
Earned premiums 157 ( 165 75 83 or 165 (83 75) )
Claims incurred 112 ( 103 133 124 or 103 (133 124) )
Expenses incurred 31
Underwriting profit 14
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-01: Insurance companies
8.2 Cashflow diagram
When considering the mechanics of an insurance operation, it is often useful to consider all the
various cashflows that may take place. A simple diagram summarising the cashflows is:
PREMIUMS
TECHNICAL INVESTMENTS
RESERVES Equities
TAX
and Bonds
EXPENSES FREE Property
COMMISSION
RESERVES IL bonds
REINSURANCE Cash
SHAREHOLDERS
CLAIMS
Most of the expressions in this diagram should now be familiar to you, and the mechanics should
be self-evident. However, the following points are worth bringing out:
Reinsurance
This is the insurance company’s own insurance. That is, the insurance company pays out
reinsurance premiums to a reinsurance company and the reinsurer covers part of the risk the
insurer has taken on. The insurance company will, as a result of this insurance, sometimes make
reinsurance recoveries from the reinsurer.
Investments
The reason for the double arrow is to highlight that money may be lost on investments as well as
being gained. Hopefully the investment income and investment gains will far outweigh the losses.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 29
Shareholders
Shareholders will hope to receive dividends (hence the ‘out’ arrow). From time to time
shareholders may be asked to put more money into the company through rights issues.
Finally, thinking of the cashflow diagram and the parties involved in each cashflow is often useful
in helping to generate ideas in the exam.
Question
Determine what would happen to the post-tax profits of a general insurer if the company decided
to reduce the reserve it had been holding for IBNR by £20 million. Assume tax is charged at a rate
of 20%. Suggest (ie use some imagination and make something up) a single event which might
cause this to happen.
Solution
This year’s pre-tax profits would be increased by £20 million, so assuming that this goes straight
into the assessment of tax, we would pay an extra £4 million tax. Post-tax profits would be
increased by £16 million.
IBNR might be revised downwards if it included a big allowance for claims that might come
through from a particular cause, eg employees claiming against their employers for back-ache
from sitting at desks. If a court case has just gone through in favour of the employer, then the
insurer will give a big sigh of relief and reduce its IBNR.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-01: Insurance companies
9 Reinsurance
The final topic that we wish to introduce here is reinsurance. Individuals and companies take out
insurance when they perceive a need for it, so as to reduce risk to themselves. Insurance
companies do precisely the same.
Reinsurance is the name for the insurance of insurance companies.
We study reinsurance in some detail in later chapters, but it is helpful early on to look at a couple
of situations in which it may be useful.
9.1 Enormous risks
Insurers like to do business, but there are some risks, eg large industrial or commercial properties,
that are so large that no one insurer could possibly take them on, without endangering their own
solvency position. A way for them to do some business without taking on undue risk is to reinsure
the portion of the risk that they cannot cope with.
Proportional reinsurance or coinsurance can help with this situation.
9.2 Accumulations of risk
Accumulations of risk occur when the insurer has an unbalanced portfolio of risks. This imbalance
may be due to the nature of the classes of business written (eg too much exposure to liability
claims), the geographical areas covered or the types of policyholder attracted. The unbalanced
portfolio exacerbates the problems of non-independent risks. An example would be the severe
flooding in the North of England in late December 2015, leading to many domestic property
insurance claims.
The risk of accumulations can be mitigated, in certain circumstances, by the insurer arranging
some reinsurance to enable them to cope with the possibility of a catastrophic event occurring.
Question
Imagine you work for an insurance company specialising in selling travel insurance, through travel
agents, to parties of over 50’s going on skiing holidays in the US.
List some examples to explain why your company is likely to want to take out some reinsurance.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 31
Solution
It depends critically on how wide the cover provided is, but examples of some potentially scary
things, for which reinsurance may help the insurer sleep at night, are:
One or more whole parties could be affected by the same claim event, eg:
– delayed departure from airport
– no snow on arrival, or other sub-standard holiday features
– plane / coach crash
– avalanche.
Similarly, if one or more travel agents became bankrupt the insurer might, conceivably,
suffer a large loss from many claims.
One or more of the skiers may suffer injury, with potentially enormous medical expense
claims, especially with older skiers (where complications are more likely) and particularly
in the US.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8-01: Insurance companies
10 Glossary items
At the end of most chapters we will include a section like this one which lists the glossary items
that have either been introduced in the chapter or are related to the material in the chapter. You
will not have met all of the terms given here in the chapter, but it is a good idea to become
familiar with these terms at this early stage. To study actively you should attempt to explain each
of the terms that you have come across and then check your definition against the Glossary.
You should now read the definitions of the following Glossary items:
24ths method Coinsurance
365ths method Combined ratio
Accumulation of risk Cover note
Acquisition costs Deep pocket syndrome
Additional reserve (provision) for Deferred acquisition costs (DAC)
unexpired risk
Annual basis of accounting Dynamic financial analysis
Asset liability model Earned premiums
Atafs – Age to age factors Eighths method
Atufs –Age to ultimate factors Equalisation reserve and equalisation
provision
Average cost per claim method Event
Balance of a reinsurance treaty Expense ratio
Bornhuetter-Ferguson method Experience account
Break-up basis Franchise
Burning cost Free reserves
Case by case estimation Incurred but not reported (IBNR)
reserve
Casualty insurance Incurred claims (or claims incurred)
Catastrophe Indemnity, principle of
Catastrophe reserve Insurance certificate
Chain ladder method Insured
Claim Integrated Lloyd’s Vehicle
Claim ratio Knock-for-knock agreement
Claim size distribution Long-tailed business
Claims equalisation reserve Loss
Claims incurred Loss expense reserve
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 33
Clash cover Loss ratio
Loss reserve Reinsurer
Model uncertainty Reporting year
Non-technical account Reopened claim
No-claim discount (NCD) Retroactive date
One-year accounting Risk based capital (RBC)
Office premium Risk factor
Outstanding claims reserve (OCR) or Risk premium
outstanding claims provision
Operating ratio Run-off triangle
Partial payment Short-tailed business
Period of unexpired risk Solvency margin
Points rating system Solvency ratio
Rating Technical reserves (provisions)
Rating factor Unearned premiums
Recoveries Unearned premiums reserve (UPR) or
provision for unearned premiums
Reinsurance Unexpired risks reserve (URR) or
provision for unexpired risks
Reinsurance to close (RITC) Written premiums.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8-01: Insurance companies
The chapter summary starts on the next page so that you can
keep all the chapter summaries together for revision purposes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 35
Chapter 1 Summary
The existence of general insurance is good for society as a whole and for individuals.
On one side of the balance sheet are free reserves and technical reserves. On the other we
have all the assets.
Technical reserves (or insurance reserves) might be split into:
Past events: – outstanding reported claims
– IBNR and IBNER
– re-opened claims
– claims handling expenses
Future events: – UPR
– AURR
Insurers may also hold catastrophe reserves or other claims equalisation reserves.
The claims reserves might be shown as one amount for outstanding claims and one for
unexpired risks.
Claims reserves occur because there are reporting delays, settlement delays and premature
closure of claims files. Claims reserves are generally larger for long-tail classes of business.
Estimates for outstanding claims reserves are carried out by estimates of individual
outstanding claims or by using statistical methods for the totals. Individual estimates can’t
be used for IBNR.
Claims reserves are estimates. Therefore any work which is based on claims reserves should
recognise the uncertainty underlying the estimates. This uncertainty is generally greater for
long-tail classes.
UPR is the portion of premiums set aside to cover the claims and expenses for future
accounting periods for which premiums have already been received.
URR is a prospective assessment of the amount required as at the accounting date to cover
the claims and expenses from the unexpired risks.
AURR is the excess of URR over UPR, subject to a minimum of zero.
Free reserves are the excess of assets over technical reserves. They may also be referred to
as free assets, the solvency margin, shareholders’ funds or capital employed.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8-01: Insurance companies
Premium rating can involve techniques such as:
a burning cost approach
a frequency severity approach
modelling aggregate claims distributions
identifying appropriate rating factors eg using GLMs and other multivariate analyses
original loss curves, often used to price reinsurance contracts where past data is too
sparse to be credible.
Adjustments will be made to past data to ensure it remains a good predictor of future
experience. Further adjustments will be made to arrive at an ‘office premium’. For example:
allowance for reinsurance and investment income
loadings for profit and expenses
commercially-driven adjustments eg no-claims discounts, allowance for the
insurance cycle, policyholders’ reactions, the company’s strategic objectives and the
state of the insurance cycle.
Capital modelling is the process by which general insurers ensure they hold enough capital to
meet all their obligations subject to a given degree of confidence, and allocate this capital to
different areas of the business.
A good capital model will include assumptions on all aspects of the business which will affect
its future financial strength, and can be a considerably detailed exercise. It may include
stress testing, scenario testing and stochastic modelling.
The level of capital held by a general insurer will depend on the riskiness of the insurer’s
activities. Allowance should be made for the level of correlation between different risks.
The main influences on the investment strategy will be the currency, term, nature and level
of uncertainty of the liabilities (these factors are determined mainly by the classes of
business written), the size of the free reserves, and legislative factors.
The profit of an insurer is the excess of premiums and investment returns over claims and
expenses.
Earned premiums, rather than written premiums, should be used to determine underwriting
profit. Similarly, we should use claims incurred rather than claims paid.
Claims incurred is claims paid plus the increase in outstanding claims reserves.
Underwriting profit equals earned premiums less claims incurred less expenses incurred.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 37
The cashflow diagram is a useful way to study the mechanics of a general insurer. The
diagram includes all the main monetary flows:
premiums
claims
expenses (including commission)
investment (in and out)
reinsurance (in and out)
dividends (ie out to shareholders)
rights issues (ie in from shareholders)
tax.
Reinsurance can protect insurance companies from various risks that may otherwise be too
large for them to bear.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 38 SP8-01: Insurance companies
The practice questions start on the next page so that you can
keep the chapter summaries together for revision purposes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 39
Chapter 1 Practice Questions
1.1 List seven different types of reserve which, when added together, make up the total technical
reserves. Explain which of these is most likely to be zero.
1.2 Explain in layman’s terms what is meant by UPR.
1.3 State the two main approaches to estimating outstanding claims. Identify which of the two
should be used for estimating IBNR and which is more likely to benefit from actuarial input.
1.4 An insurance company produces provisional accounts, as at 31 December four days later on
4 January. These accounts do not include an AURR for its domestic household account.
When the draft accounts are drawn up two months later, the balance sheet does include an AURR
for household business. Assuming that there was no change in the reserving or accounting basis,
suggest reasons why the accounts might have been modified.
1.5 Insurance companies are described as ‘capital intensive’. Explain why they need so much capital
in relation to payroll, size of premises etc.
1.6 Complete the following statements by filling in the blanks:
AURR is the _______ of _______ over _____, subject to a _______ of ________.
UPR is the portion of __________ that relates to __________ cover.
Claims incurred is defined as the __________ __________ plus the __________ in outstanding
claims reserves.
The main determinants of the investment strategy will be:
the __________, __________, __________ and __________ of the __________
the relative size of the __________ __________.
A reserve used to smooth profits from year to year is called a claims _______ _______.
The excess of __________ premiums over __________ claims and __________ is called the
________ __________.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 40 SP8-01: Insurance companies
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-01: Insurance companies Page 41
Chapter 1 Solutions
1.1 The seven types of reserves are:
Outstanding reported claims
IBNR
IBNER
Re-opened claims
Claim handling expenses
Unearned premium reserve
Additional reserve for unexpired risks.
The AURR is most likely to be zero. If it is not zero, it indicates that we think that we have recently
been writing business on unprofitable terms.
1.2 UPR is the portion of premiums due or received in respect of policies already taken out that is set
aside for future accounting periods.
1.3 The two main approaches are:
estimates of individual outstanding reported claims.
statistical estimation of totals.
Use statistical methods for IBNR.
Actuarial input is more likely to be used in statistical estimation of totals.
1.4 Perhaps the accounts were modified because the company revised its view on the unexpired
risks. After two months of the new year, the company would know more. Perhaps there was a
run of large claims in January or February.
1.5 This is the same as asking why they need large free reserves:
it may be a legal requirement
to meet normal fluctuations in claims experience
to protect against unexpected adverse experience (catastrophes, large claims etc)
to support and attract new business
to protect against failure of a third party, eg a reinsurer.
We discuss these ideas in more detail later in the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 42 SP8-01: Insurance companies
1.6 AURR is the excess of URR over UPR, subject to a minimum of zero.
UPR is the portion of premiums which relates to unexpired cover.
Claims incurred is defined as the claims paid plus the increase in outstanding claims reserves.
The main determinants of the investment strategy will be:
the nature, term, currency and uncertainty of the liabilities
the relative size of the free reserves.
A reserve used to smooth profits from year to year is called a claims equalisation reserve.
The excess of earned premiums over incurred claims and expenses is called the underwriting
result (or underwriting profit).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 1
Insurance products –
background
Syllabus objectives
1.1 Describe the main types of general insurance products in terms of:
the needs of customers
the financial and other risks they pose for the general insurer including their
capital requirements and possible effect on solvency.
Covered in part in this chapter.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
0 Introduction
This chapter and the following chapter give an overview of the essential features that
distinguish the main types of general insurance products and so help to identify the crucial
aspects that influence the nature and extent of the risk to be covered by the insurance.
Reinsurance products are described in Chapters 5 and 6 and health products are covered
elsewhere in the syllabus (ie in other subjects).
More information on reinsurance products will be provided in chapters 5 and 6.
In this chapter we look at general insurance principles and introduce the broad categories of
insurance products. In the next chapter we look at the different general insurance products in
detail.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 3
1 General insurance principles
Before considering the main types of insurance and reinsurance, it is worth noting some
overriding features of all types of insurance.
You might recognise some of the following material from your earlier studies, however the
material here is slightly different.
1.1 Insurable risk
For a risk to be insurable:
the policyholder must have an interest in the risk being insured, to distinguish
between insurance and gambling
a risk must be of a financial and reasonably quantifiable nature
the amount payable by the insurance policy in the event of a claim must bear some
relationship to the financial loss incurred.
Ideally risk events also need to meet the following criteria if they are to be insurable:
Individual risk events should be independent of each other.
However, as we have seen in Chapter 1, reinsurance is available to help cope with
situations where risks are not independent. In practice we won’t often get strict
independence but a low correlation is desirable.
The probability of the event should be relatively small. In other words, an event that
is nearly certain to occur is not conducive to insurance.
For example, a house would not be insured if it stood on the edge of a crumbling cliff.
The premium to cover such a risk would be exorbitantly high.
Large numbers of similar risks should be pooled to reduce the variance (of the
average claim size) and hence achieve more certainty.
With a large enough number of similar risks, we can appeal to the law of large numbers,
and see that the insurer will benefit from more predictable claims experience than the
policyholders. The similar risks should still be independent.
There should be an overall limit on the liability undertaken by the insurer.
This would help the risk event meet the above criteria that it must be of a reasonably
quantifiable nature.
Moral hazards should be eliminated as far as possible because these are difficult to
quantify, result in selection against the insurer and lead to unfairness in treatment
between one policyholder and another.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
Question
Define moral hazard.
Solution
Moral hazard refers to the action of a party who behaves differently from the way that they
would behave if they were fully exposed to the circumstances of that action. The party
behaves inappropriately or less carefully than they would otherwise, leaving the
organisation to bear some of the consequences of the action. Moral hazard is related to
information asymmetry, with the party causing the action generally having more information
than the organisation that bears the consequences.
There should be sufficient existing statistical data / information to enable the insurer
to estimate the extent of the risk and its likelihood of occurrence.
We will see later in the course that there are a number of sources of data that might be
used if the insurer doesn’t ‘own’ any relevant data itself.
However, the fact that these ideal criteria are not always met in practice does not
necessarily mean that insurance cannot be found. Insurers may be prepared to underwrite
simply to generate income, to build a relationship or develop a new market
entrepreneurially. All risks were once insured for the first time.
1.2 Other terms
Other important general insurance terms you will come across are given in this section. Many
others are given in the Glossary – remember you will need to know the Glossary definitions for
the exam.
Uberrima fides
Latin for ‘utmost good faith’. This honesty principle is assumed to be observed by the
parties to an insurance, or reinsurance, contract. An alternative form is uberrimae fidei: ‘of
the utmost good faith’.
The principle of honesty underlies all insurance business. For example, misrepresentation or non-
disclosure of any material fact in the proposal can make the policy void. Each renewal of a
general insurance policy actually constitutes a new proposal, and the insured should disclose to
the insurer any material changes during the period covered by an insurance policy.
The insurer faces a variety of moral hazards because insureds may not abide by this legal principle
and, if they do not, it may be hard for the insurer to detect.
Multiple claims
Unlike life insurance policies, many general insurance policies allow the insured to claim as many
times as necessary during the period of cover, usually a year, provided by the policy.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 5
Nil claim (or zero claim)
A claim that results in no payment by the insurer, because, for example:
the claim is found not to be valid
the amount of the loss turns out to be no greater than the excess
the policyholder has reported a claim in order to comply with the conditions of the
policy, but has elected to meet the cost in order to preserve any entitlement to
no-claim discount.
Again, unlike simple life insurance policies, for which the claim event, eg death, is fairly clear cut,
a significant number of general insurance policies generate claims which are subsequently settled
by the insurer with no payment to the insured. This may be, for example, because the insurer is
not liable (eg the policy wording excludes that type of claim). However, nil claims still invariably
result in administrative expenses for the insurer.
Underinsurance
If the contents of your home are worth £30,000 then you should take out a home contents policy
with a sum insured of £30,000. However, you may choose a policy with a sum insured of only
£20,000 because you have under-estimated the value of your belongings, or because you think
the chance of losing more than £20,000 is very small. This is known as underinsurance.
Question
Explain why underinsurance is a hazard to the insurer.
Solution
An insurer will base its premium rates on the expected claim amounts. This will take into account
the expected frequency of claims and the expected size of the claims.
The higher the sum insured the higher the expected size of claims. Therefore if a policyholder
quotes a sum insured lower than the actual value of the contents, there is a risk that the
premiums will be inadequate.
Average
In order to prevent underinsurance, some property insurance policies, where premium rates are
based on the sum insured, contain an average clause. This provides that, if the sum insured is less
than the full value of the property at the time of a loss, the insurance payment will only be a
proportion of the value of the loss – the same proportion as the sum insured bears to the full
value. This is known as the principle of average.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
Example
If you insured the contents of your house for £20,000 but the actual value of the contents was
£30,000 then the principle of average may apply if you make a claim. A claim for £600 may result
in a payment of only £400 because the claim is scaled down by 20,000/30,000.
However, a word of warning; the term ‘average’ has different meanings in different contexts
within the general insurance world.
In non-marine insurance, the term relates to the practice of reducing the amount of a claim
in proportion to the extent of underinsurance.
In marine insurance, the term is generally used to describe damage or loss.
The word average derives from a Latin word havaria which broadly means ‘loss’. There are many
uses of this word within marine insurance. For example, a general average loss is a loss resulting
from a sacrifice or expenditure made by an individual for the benefit of others at a time of peril,
eg throwing cargo overboard from a boat to stop it sinking, thereby saving the remaining cargo
and the vessel.
Subrogation
The substitution of one party for another as creditor, with a transfer of rights and
responsibilities. It applies within insurance when an insurer accepts a claim by an insured,
thus assuming the responsibility for any liabilities or recoveries relating to the claim. For
example, the insurer will be responsible for defending legal disputes and will be entitled to
the proceeds from the sale of damaged or recovered property.
Subrogation means that the insurer replaces the policyholder in law and acquires all rights and
responsibilities in legal matters regarding the loss suffered, be it before or after the claim has
been settled.
Example
If you receive a payment from an insurer for replacement of your boat, following serious damage
or loss, then the original boat becomes the insurer’s property. The insurer may then be able to
recover a salvage value, for its own benefit.
Discovery period
A time limit, usually defined in the policy wording or through legislative precedent, placed
on the period within which claims must be reported. It generally applies to classes of
business where several years may elapse between the occurrence of the event or the
awareness of the condition that may give rise to a claim and the reporting of the claim to the
insurer: for example employers’ liability or professional indemnity.
Employers’ liability and professional indemnity insurance will be described in the next chapter.
The discovery period prevents claims being made to insurance companies many years after the
event that caused the claim. In principle it allows insurance companies to write off IBNR liabilities
from a contract once the discovery period has elapsed, although this has sometimes been
overridden by the courts.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 7
The discovery period is often defined in the sunset clause. Both terms relate to the same topic.
The discovery period is the actual time limit; the sunset clause is a clause that defines the time
limit.
Underwriting
The process of consideration of an insurance risk. This includes assessing whether the
risk is acceptable and, if so, the appropriate premium, together with the terms and
conditions of the cover. It may also include assessing the risk in the context of the other
risks in the portfolio. The more individual the risk (for example most commercial lines), the
more detailed the consideration. The term is also used to denote the acceptance of
reinsurance and, by extension, the transacting of insurance business.
Underwriting is the process of assessing the risk for individual policies. As well as setting premium
rates, underwriters will specify excesses or exclusions to cover or possibly required improvements
to the risk before cover is provided. For small and standard homogeneous risks, insurers will
often provide insurance automatically, without referring the individual risks to the underwriters.
1.3 The policy document
The policy document is important. It sets out the terms and conditions under which an
insurer is liable to pay insurance claims in specific circumstances and must, therefore, be
carefully worded to cover all possible circumstances under which payment will and will not
be made.
The relationship between the insured and the insurer is governed by the policy document. It is a
legal and binding contract and hence subject to contract law.
Policy forms are normally standard for all personal lines business and small commercial
policies, in the sense that an insurer will issue the same wording to all policyholders. Items
that vary between policyholders will be included in a schedule.
Examples of common items in a schedule are:
details of vehicle / property / people covered
excess applied
any limits to the cover
exclusions
time limits
whether or not any optional covers have been taken
details of insurance premium paid.
Larger commercial and London Market risks tend to have policies that are individually made
for the particular policyholder, possibly assembled from a library of standard clauses.
1.4 Exclusions
Exclusions are clauses in a policy that limit the circumstances in which a claim may be
made.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
Some examples of common exclusions are:
suicide or self-inflicted injury
dangerous pastimes
losses resulting from illegal activity by the policyholder
war, terrorism, civil riot.
Question
Suggest some more examples of common exclusions.
Solution
nuclear or radio-active risks
earthquakes
unseaworthiness of vessels
loss of money and documents
Exclusions can apply to certain perils (eg terrorism) or particular types of loss (eg cash, whatever
the peril).
Question
List the exclusions that are likely to be applied on a private motor policy.
Solution
certain specified uses, eg for business (unless explicitly allowed), racing
depreciation, wear and tear, or damage to car tyres
where there was an element of illegality, eg the driver did not hold a driving licence or
was under the influence of alcohol or drugs
where the insured did not take due care, eg left the keys in the ignition
insured’s personal accident benefits where the insured is very old
losses arising in consequence of earthquakes, war, riot or civil commotion
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 9
Exclusions are used to avoid payment by the insurer in situations where:
the policyholder is at an advantage through possessing greater personal
information about the likelihood of a claim
the claim event is largely under the control of the policyholder
the claim event would be very difficult to verify or
the loss occurs as part of the normal course of events and could be considered to
be depreciation.
Without an exclusion there would be a very high probability of a claim or that the risk could
not be reasonably estimated.
Exclusions might also be used in other situations where the risk cannot be reliably estimated by
the insurer, regardless of whether or not the policyholder has better information, or when the
probability of loss is very high. Remember from Section 1.2 that one of the criteria for an event to
be insurable is for the probability of the event to be relatively small.
Exclusions are also used where the risk is covered by a third party such as the government.
Terrorism is an example of such a risk in the UK.
Exclusions are also used to limit the scope of the policy to make it more appropriate for a
particular target market or to reduce the premium for competitive reasons.
Exclusions are sometimes used to reduce the risk of moral hazard and fraud. For example, theft
of a vehicle when the keys have been left in the ignition might be excluded from a motor policy.
This reduces the moral hazard of policyholders’ carelessness, which might result from the
existence of insurance cover.
Indemnity for loss of cash might be excluded from a household contents policy. This reduces the
risk of fraudulent exaggeration of loss amounts, as it would be very easy for a policyholder to
claim, but difficult to verify, that large sums of cash had been stolen when a burglary has taken
place.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
2 Types of product
The types of insurance cover provided by general insurance products can be classified
under four main headings:
liability
property damage
financial loss
fixed benefits.
This section gives a brief overview of these categories of insurance product. They are described in
detail in the next chapter.
2.1 Liability
The essential characteristic of liability insurance (also called casualty insurance in North
America) is providing indemnity where the insured is legally liable to pay compensation to a
third party.
Examples of liability insurance include:
employers’ liability – where the insurance indemnifies the employer against
compensation payable to employees for losses that they suffer as a result of negligence of
the employer
motor third party liability – where the insurance indemnifies the owner of a motor vehicle
against compensation payable to third parties for personal injury or damage to their
property (eg their vehicle)
product liability – where the insurance indemnifies a manufacturer against compensation
to a third party for losses that they suffer as a result of a product fault.
2.2 Property damage
The main characteristic of property damage insurance is providing indemnity to the insured for
loss of, or damage to, the policyholder’s own property.
Examples of property damage insurance include:
motor insurance
buildings insurance, which includes both residential buildings (houses) and commercial
buildings, such as offices, shops and industrial buildings
contents insurance.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 11
2.3 Financial loss
Financial loss indemnifies the insured against financial losses arising from certain causes.
Examples of financial loss insurance include:
creditor insurance (also called Payment Protection Insurance, or PPI) – where the policy
will make regular loan repayments if the policyholder becomes disabled (so that they
cannot work) or otherwise unemployed
business interruption cover (also called consequential loss insurance) – where the policy
will pay out to compensate the policyholder for not being able to conduct their business,
eg as a result of a fire in the building.
2.4 Fixed benefit
The defining characteristic of fixed benefit insurance is that the benefits are usually specified,
fixed amounts, payable on certain losses occurring.
An example is personal accident insurance, where the insured receives a fixed payment on
suffering a specified injury, eg the loss of a limb.
2.5 Combining categories of insurance
Insurance policies may comprise elements of one or more of these types of cover.
Example – comprehensive motor insurance
A typical comprehensive motor insurance policy will provide cover for:
compensation for personal injury to third parties and damage to their property
compensation for loss of or damage to the insured’s vehicle
fixed benefits in the event of defined categories of personal accident to the insured.
Therefore, a typical motor policy may comprise elements of liability, property damage and fixed
benefit cover.
Example – household contents insurance
A typical policy covering household contents will provide cover for the financial loss,
property damage and liability of the insured (and any member of the insured’s family living
at the same address) to third parties.
Therefore a household contents policy may comprise elements of property damage and liability
cover.
Question
Suggest examples of how, under a household contents policy, the insured may be liable to a third
party.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
Solution
Cover may be provided in respect of visitors’ belongings that may for example be damaged in a
fire.
The insured may also be indemnified for personal liability arising out of accidents to members of
the public somehow caused by the property of the insured, eg a garden wall falling on a
pedestrian.
Policies that are likely to be combined as a single product are described further in Chapter 3.
2.6 The customer
Personal lines and commercial lines business
General insurance may be sold to both individuals and businesses.
Insurance products sold to individuals are known as personal lines business. They include private
motor, domestic household, personal accident and travel insurance.
Insurance products sold to businesses are known as commercial lines or group business.
Package policies
Policies for businesses often include all types of cover that the business needs (apart from
motor, in the case of small businesses); appropriately, they are called ‘package policies’.
Question
List the types of cover a small retailer might require as part of a ‘package policy’.
Solution
Other than motor, which is not usually included in ‘package policies’, a small retailer might
require cover to:
compensate employees for accidents occurring due to negligence of the employer
(employers’ liability and personal accident)
compensate third parties, eg customers, for accidents occurring in the shop / on the shop
premises (public liability)
protect against damage to the shop (commercial buildings cover)
compensate for lost revenues should the shop be unable to trade (business interruption
cover)
protect against loss of or damage to stocks while in the shop (moveable property
(contents) cover)
protect against loss of or damage to stocks while in transit (goods in transit cover)
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 13
protect against bad debts by suppliers of goods / materials (credit insurance)
protect against bad debt by customers buying goods on trade credit (credit insurance)
protect against financial losses due to dishonest actions of employees (fidelity guarantee
insurance)
pay any legal expenses as a result of legal proceeding being initiated against the shop or
the shop needing to initiate legal proceedings against another party (legal expenses
cover).
Don’t worry if you didn’t get all (or even nearly all) of these points. However, hopefully by the time
you’ve finished reading the next chapter, it won’t seem like such a tall order.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
3 Cover provided
For each of the four main types of cover, the features will be discussed in the following
sections under six headings:
benefits
insured perils
basis for cover
measures of exposure to which premiums are related
claim characteristics
risk factors and rating factors.
In the next chapter, the products are discussed under the headings of the main types of
cover that they provide.
Any unusual words or phrases, for example risk factors used in the above paragraph, will be
explained fully later in this chapter.
The following general comments relate to these six headings.
3.1 Benefits
The benefits provided by an insurance policy will vary between types of insurance and
between insurers. Typically, the intention is to provide the insured with money to cover his
or her financial loss as a result of an insured event, although policies that provide benefits
in kind are also possible.
The provision of a courtesy car under a motor policy (while your car is being repaired) is an
example of a benefit in kind provided by an insurance policy.
Question
Describe the benefits you would expect to receive for each of the following claims:
loss of luggage whilst on holiday
loss of a finger
loss (to your vehicle and injury to yourself) as a result of a car accident.
Solution
Loss of luggage whilst on holiday
Your insurance is likely to cover you for the cost of the luggage, subject to any limits that may
apply. This is an example of the benefit being money to cover financial loss as a result of an
insured event.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 15
Loss of a finger
Your insurance is likely to provide a fixed benefit that is intended to go (at least) some way
towards compensating you for the loss. It is usually impossible to quantify exactly how much the
payment should be.
Loss (to vehicle and self) as a result of a car accident
Your insurance is likely to cover you for the cost of damage to your vehicle and will also
compensate you for your discomfort or inconvenience. The former should be fairly
straightforward to determine (as it is should cover the financial loss incurred). The latter may be
more complicated: the insurance policy may specify the amount of the payment, which would
depend upon the type of injury, or alternatively the payment may have to be determined by the
courts.
In some territories, certain insurance cover is compulsory.
3.2 Insured perils
A peril is a type of event that may cause losses, eg theft or flood.
In virtually all types of insurance, it would be difficult to list all possible perils against which
a policyholder might wish to be protected. Claims can result from a very large number of
perils; not all of them will be currently apparent and not all of them will be standard to every
insurance product on the market.
The perils are also likely to vary by country. For example, in some countries it is more likely (or
necessary) for perils such as volcanic activity or stampeding animals to be included in the cover.
The precise form of the cover provided in respect of any insured peril may vary between
insurers, and the benefits provided may be defined in any one of a number of ways.
Exam tip
The examiners will expect candidates to apply some common sense to extend the examples
or groupings given for the products mentioned in this chapter and the following chapter.
3.3 Basis for cover
This section describes the basis on which different types of cover may be written. Insurance
policies may be written as:
losses-occurring policies
claims-made policies.
Losses-occurring policy
A losses-occurring policy is a policy providing cover for losses occurring in the defined period, no
matter when they are reported. A losses-occurring policy may also be referred to as a
‘claims-occurring policy’.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
Claims-made policy
A claims-made policy covers all claims reported to an insurer within the policy period, irrespective
of when they occurred. A claims-made policy may also be referred to as a ‘claims-reported
policy’.
Question
An individual purchases a one-year motor insurance policy from Cars ‘R’ Us on 1 January 2018.
The following year, they buy another one-year policy from Cars 4 You.
On 27 December 2018, the individual has an accident, which causes significant damage to their
car. They decide to wait until the New Year to report the claim.
Identify which insurer the individual should contact if the policies are written on a:
(a) losses-occurring basis
(b) claims-made basis.
Justify which basis is more common for this type of insurance.
Solution
(a) The accident occurred when the individual was insured by Cars ‘R’ Us. Therefore for a
losses-occurring basis, the individual should contact Cars ‘R’ Us to report the claim.
(b) The individual is reporting the claim while the insurance cover is being provided by Cars 4
You. Therefore for a claims-made basis, the individual should contact Cars 4 You to report
the claim.
A losses-occurring basis seems more sensible, as this is not affected by when the individual
chooses to report the claim. In other words, under this basis, the individual cannot choose which
insurer should pay the claim.
3.4 Measures of exposure to which premiums are related
This section discusses the underlying principles involved in choosing exposure measures. More
specific comments on the various measures used for different insurance classes are given later in
the chapter. As you read the Core Reading think actively about how the practical choices made
have been influenced by the principles.
One of the objectives of the insurer when setting premium rates is to charge a premium which
accurately reflects the amount of risk. The pure risk premium is the premium required to cover
the expected claim amount only. No allowance is made for expenses or profit. For example, if a
particular policy gives rise to a claim of £1,000 with a probability of 10% and no claim otherwise,
the pure risk premium would be £100. The actual premium charged would then need to cover
this level of risk and also include an allowance for expenses, profit and investment income and
any other loadings.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 17
Selection, anti-selection
If an insurer does not charge premiums that accurately reflect the amount of risk, the insurer may
suffer from selection (strictly called anti-selection in this context). If in the example above the
insurer charged a premium based on a risk premium of £120, they may not get the business if
other more accurate insurers used a risk premium of £100. On the other hand, if they allowed for
only £80 they might get the business but make a loss.
In general, insurers who fail to charge premiums that reflect the amount of risk run the danger of
getting little business (premiums too high) or lots of loss-making business (premiums too low).
Assessing the amount of risk involved with a particular policy is a critical aspect of an insurer’s
work.
Question
Explain whether the dangers of selection still exist if all insurers charge the same premiums.
Solution
Yes. If insurance is optional, policyholders may select against the insurance market. Those least
likely to claim may choose not to purchase insurance and vice versa.
Exposure
In practice, insurance proposals do not come with neat little labels stating the probability of claim
and the expected cost per claim. The amount of risk underlying an individual policy is often
largely unknown. In fact, the amount of risk is never known exactly.
For the purpose of setting premiums, insurance companies try to determine measures which give
an indication of how much risk there is within each policy. These measures are called measures of
exposure.
In practice, the chosen measure of exposure should meet two key criteria:
(a) It should be a good measure of the amount of risk, allowing for both the expected
frequency of claim and the expected severity of claim (ie the average claim amount). In
other words, the total expected claim amount should be proportional to the exposure.
(b) It should be practical. This criterion embraces several aspects. The measure should be
objectively measurable and should be easily obtainable, verifiable and not open to
manipulation.
There are rarely perfect measures of exposure which completely define the amount of risk
underlying each policy. For most classes in fact, the exposure measure used is a basic principal
indicator of risk. Given a measure of exposure, risk can be further classified by rating factors.
These are discussed further in Section 3.6.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
In some types of insurance there is a degree of choice as to the measure of exposure, as it
will not be immediately obvious which reliable and measurable factor bears the closest
relationship to the expected claim amounts. Examples of measures used in some classes
are given in the next chapter.
An exposure measure isn’t just a factor that is used to calculate a premium. It is a measure, which
when added over all policies, gives an indicator of the ‘volume of business’ or the total amount of
risk. As such, the expected total claim amount should be proportional to the exposure. Clearly
the best measure of exposure is the expected claim amount on each policy, but exposure should
also be a simple measure that is verifiable etc. The number of policies always has this property
but there may be another quantifiable factor on each policy that works better.
Question
Suggest another possible exposure measure, other than the number of policies, that would give a
reasonable indicator of the total level of risk on any portfolio of business.
Solution
Premiums. The total premium should be a good indicator of the total risk on a portfolio of
business.
3.5 Claim characteristics
This topic was introduced in Chapter 1.
As well as the amount that becomes payable, the claim characteristics refer to the ways in
which and speed with which the claims:
originate
are notified
are settled and paid
are, on occasion, reopened.
Claim characteristics also refer to the frequency with which claims are made. For some lines of
business, such as private motor insurance, claims occur with a far higher frequency than other
lines, such as various liability classes.
When assessing claim characteristics, it is therefore necessary to consider:
delays (event, reporting, settlement etc) and hence whether claims are short-tail or
long-tail claims
claim frequency
claim severity / amount (allowing for accumulations, catastrophes etc).
Claim frequencies and claim costs are often discussed in terms of a claim frequency / claim cost
distribution. This is just a statistical distribution for claim frequency / individual claim cost.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 19
All these features have implications for the assessment of risk borne by the insurer.
3.6 Risk factors and rating factors
The fact that exposure measures are never perfect measures of the amount of risk means that
there is scope for refinement of the premium even after applying the exposure measure. An
example will help to illustrate the point.
Example
Consider a special class of insurance whereby policyholders who bang their heads on doorframes
or low ceilings of homes are entitled to an insurance payment. The worse the injury, the more
the payment.
What exposure measure should we use to determine premiums? There are several candidates,
but let’s suppose that we decide to use the policyholder’s height as the basis for setting
premiums. Our measure of exposure would then be centimetres. Exposure measures often
incorporate time units to reflect the fact that policies for two years should be charged twice the
premium of one-year policies. Hence our exposure measure is centimetre-years. If the premium
is £0.10 per centimetre-year, a policyholder of height 175cm would be charged an annual
premium of £17.50.
In actual fact, centimetre-year is probably not the best exposure measure to use. The reasons
why include:
The risk does not increase linearly with the exposure measure. For example, a child
whose height is 110cm is no more likely to hit their head than one whose height is 90cm
(and possibly less likely, if they are a couple of years older).
It is not very practical. It would not be easy to verify (cheaply) and will be continuously
increasing for the young.
A better measure of exposure is probably person-year. It is much more practical and when all
other factors are constant, it will be proportional to the expected claim amount.
In this example, our insurance company may still be exposed to the possibility of selection. The
premium rating structure has done nothing to incorporate allowances for the following factors:
the non-linearity of the relationship between height and risk
short-sighted people may hit their heads more often
clumsy people may hit their heads more often
people who move around quickly will hit their heads harder
people living in homes with low doorframes and ceilings will hurt themselves more often.
These further considerations of risk are called risk factors. Note that the exposure measure itself
is also a risk factor. Risk factors are any factors that have a bearing on the amount of risk.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
To prevent selection, the insurer must try to incorporate these factors into the premium rating
process. If our 175cm policyholder turned out to be short-sighted, clumsy, fast and the inhabitant
of a 16th Century cottage, the premium might be increased from £17.50 to, say, £40 each year.
Risk factors will depend on precisely the cover provided, but the factors applicable in most
cases are given in the next chapter.
Sometimes direct use of the risk factors in the rating process is not practical (eg the risk factors
may not be easily measured). In these cases, other factors that are more easily identified may be
used as proxies for the underlying risk factors. The expression for the factors actually used in the
premium rating process is rating factors.
Rating factors will be either objectively measurable risk factors or other factors that can be
used as reliable proxies for the risk factors. Where credible exposure and claims data exist,
experience rating can be used to take account of residual risk factors.
This is saying that we can use the actual claims experience of the insured in the past to help set an
appropriate premium for the future. For example, the number of claims you have made on your
motor policy is likely to affect your insurance premium. Experience rating is discussed in more
detail later in the course.
Note that in some countries, certain rating factors are not allowed to be used. For example, the
European Court of Justice ruled that, with effect from 21 December 2012, a person’s gender can
no longer be used to calculate insurance premiums.
You may hear the term underwriting factors used by some practitioners. There are some
differences in how this term is used with some taking it as synonymous with rating factors.
However most, (and importantly for Subject SP8, the Core Reading), take it to mean rating factors
plus subjective factors that, although they cannot be measured, the underwriter takes into
account in setting premiums or policy conditions. A subjective factor in our head-banging
example might be how accident-prone the person appeared to be.
3.7 Combining exposure measures, risk factors and rating factors
The following statements follow on from the discussion above:
(a) The more heterogeneous the class of insurance and the types of risk covered, the greater
the number of risk factors needed to identify or define the amount of risk.
If, for example, we were dealing with a class of business where all the risks were identical,
there would be a single premium rate that applied to all policyholders. In this case there
would be no additional rating factors.
At the other extreme is a class of insurance like commercial property insurance where the
risks are very heterogeneous. The amount of risk will vary from one insured to another
according to a number of risk factors. We will see later that for commercial property
insurance, many rating factors are used to calculate the premium.
(b) The better the measure of exposure in identifying the amount of risk, the lesser the
importance of other rating factors.
(c) The choice of rating factors will depend on the choice of exposure measure.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 21
Sometimes an exposure measure used in practice does not satisfy the ideal property of
proportionality exactly. The exposure measure can be used as a rating factor as well. A real-life
example that you will see is domestic property insurance in which the size of the property (ie the
sum insured) is taken as the exposure measure.
For contents insurance the main peril is theft, but the sum insured includes the value of items that
are rarely stolen, such as carpets, curtains, the toilet brush etc. If the value of the goods likely to
be stolen, as a proportion of the total sum insured, tends to decrease as the total sum insured
increases then the expected loss increases less than proportionately with the sum insured.
Therefore an insurer might use sum insured as a rating factor as well as an exposure measure.
It may do this by charging different rates for different bands of sum insured. An example is shown
in the following table.
Sum insured band Premium rate per 1,000 sum insured
0 – 10,000 18.6
10,001 – 20,000 17.5
20,001 – 30,000 16.9
> 30,000 16.7
In one sense, the exposure measure is always a ‘rating factor’ as it always affects the premium.
However, ‘rating factor’ is usually used to mean a factor that affects the premium rate, hence
these comments.
The rating factors used in practice will vary between different insurers as they attempt to
find a competitive edge. The more common rating factors, some of which have been
justified by statistical analysis, are given in the next chapter.
Question
Suggest circumstances when an insurer’s underwriters would not look at the risk and rating factor
details for new policy proposals.
Solution
the potential claim amount is very small
risks are very homogeneous, so standard book rates apply to all risks
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
4 How does the insurer’s risk vary by class?
Some classes of business cause insurers more risk and uncertainty than others because of
the nature of the risks involved and the claims that can arise from those risks.
4.1 Homogeneity of risks
Where there is a lack of homogeneity of risks within a class of business, there is greater risk to the
insurer.
Even within a given rating category, exposures can be very variable and dissimilar.
In commercial buildings insurance, for instance, properties can vary considerably by size,
construction and value. Moreover, you may have a mixture of properties, ranging from small
shops to large chemical factories.
You can therefore have policyholders with very different risk potential within the same rating
category. This will be reflected in the subsequent claims experience, and its inherent variability.
This will be particularly true for some of the liability classes.
For certain other classes, the risks within each rating category tend to be more homogeneous,
and the experience will therefore tend to be more predictable from year to year. Private motor is
an example of this, due to the large number of rating factors used to categorise risks. Some
insurers also insure vast numbers of (independent) cars, which reduces the relative variability of
the experience, and so also increases the predictability.
4.2 Non-independence of exposures
The variability is increased where exposures are not independent, as this can lead to an
accumulation of risk. For example, if the majority of policyholders in a household insurance
portfolio live in a certain area of the country, there will be a disproportionate claim cost if
there is a local catastrophe. If the book has exposures spread across the country (and so
more independent geographically), the claim cost will not be affected so greatly by a local
catastrophe.
Some classes will lend themselves more to independence than others. For example, a
personal motor insurance portfolio should have a reasonable spread of exposures, whereas
creditor insurance will be heavily linked to the state of the economy and unemployment.
The policyholders of a motor insurer are not generally concentrated in one geographical region
because business tends to be sold nationally.
Creditor insurance provides cover to insureds who are subject to obligations to repay credit
advances or debt. It is described in detail in the next chapter.
4.3 Changing risk
Another feature leading to risk uncertainty is that the nature of the risk may change, both
during a particular policy year and in succeeding years.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 23
Examples where changes should be notified include:
a change of fire precautions within a building
a change of drivers or location under a motor policy
a change in economic conditions under a mortgage indemnity policy.
In each example above, the insurer’s risk portfolio will change over time from that originally
written, leading to difficulties in pricing and managing that portfolio.
In some cases a change in the underlying risk should be notified to the insurer by the
policyholder. For example, a motor policyholder should inform the insurer if he or she
moves house; this is a rating factor.
In extreme cases, failure to notify the insurer could make the cover void.
Changes in background conditions, such as economic conditions, would not normally need
to be notified.
Some classes of risk vary more than others in this respect. Employers’ liability can also fluctuate
markedly in certain years, due to the turnover of employees, or through business acquisitions.
Other classes of risk can be fairly stable in the short term.
Question
Suggest how stable the risk would be for a typical simple industrial buildings and contents policy
(with no business interruption cover) for a manufacturing company.
Solution
Manufacturing companies are unlikely to change the nature of their business markedly during any
given year, although in the longer term they may do so. The value of the stocks and output may
vary, however, depending on the economic climate and the time of year.
Overall, the risk will be fairly stable unless stock levels are significant and variable.
4.4 How do claim characteristics affect risk?
Numbers of claims
In general insurance, as distinct from life assurance, there is often no limit to the number of
claims that can arise from a policy while it is in force.
Some classes, such as motor and household contents, have a relatively high claim
frequency, with sometimes 15% or more of policies having a claim each year. Other types
of cover can have much lower claims frequency, particularly commercial classes with high
excesses.
Examples of such commercial classes include public and product liability and commercial
buildings.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
Claim cost
The cost of a claim from any given policy cannot be predetermined except in a very small
number of classes – such as personal accident – and is often very variable.
This applies when the basis of cover is indemnity rather than fixed benefit. Personal accident is a
case where cover is generally on a fixed benefit basis.
While there will often be a maximum sum insured stated (or implied) in the policy, relatively
few claims will be settled for that maximum sum. The usual principle of general insurance
is to indemnify the insured for any losses or claims made upon him or her. Most claims will,
therefore, be for only a portion of the maximum cover, depending on the circumstances of
the incident.
For most classes, a large proportion of claims will be for small amounts and there will be
only a small number of large claims. The precise distribution of claim amounts will,
however, vary greatly by class, in particular between property and bodily injury claims, and
also year by year.
When a probability distribution is used to represent the distribution of the sizes of claims in
a class of business it is conventional to use highly skewed distributions with no theoretical
upper limit, such as lognormal or Pareto.
Exposures are not all identical, even within the same class of business, and each exposure
has its own claim cost distribution. Exposures are often too small to yield useful
information individually so their experience is aggregated to derive parameters of the claim
cost distributions when the risks are homogenous enough and attritional. The shape of
these claim cost distributions depends on risk characteristics demonstrated by different
classes of business and the insured’s risk profile, among other factors.
Claim inflation
Where a class is exposed significantly to the risk of inflation, any unexpected change in
inflation, for whatever reason, will affect the risk profile of that business.
Different classes of business are affected by inflation in different ways:
Property insurance responds mostly to the cost of property, and claims will tend to
increase in line with general inflation, although repair costs can be linked to
earnings.
A large proportion of motor claims cost is for the repair of vehicles, and will be
affected by the level of earnings since these determine labour costs.
Liability classes are often subject to higher levels of inflation, especially on personal
injury claims, as there is a trend to more generous compensation in many markets.
However, this may arise in steps rather than as a continuous process of inflation, as
landmark legal judgements are handed down or legal reform comes into effect.
Changes in the Ogden discount rate (for long-term disability claims) in the UK are
examples of this.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 25
Delay patterns
An insurer’s ability to manage a general insurance account is further complicated, and
hence the degree of risk increased, by the length of time that it takes for claims to emerge,
to be reported and to be settled.
Claim delays can arise for various reasons, for example:
a delay between the incident occurring and the policyholder becoming aware of it,
eg the time between a burglary occurring in a property and the policyholder returning
home to discover it
a delay between the insured becoming aware of the loss and reporting it, eg the
policyholder may be slow to report a claim if it is quite small
a delay before sufficient details of the incident can be gathered to assess the value
of the claim
a delay until an injured party’s condition stabilises to the extent that assessment of
damages is appropriate, eg to assess whether the injured party will recover or is now
permanently disabled
delay in agreeing the actual value at which the claim is to be settled, and the
payment of this amount to the insured.
The typical extent of such delays will differ according to the class of business.
Bodily injury cases tend to have the longest delay tails, owing to the contentious issues of
many of the claims involved, often with the need for legal proceedings. This may be
worsened by the greater likelihood of latent claims or claims for industrial disease where
the delay from event to reporting can be considerable.
For example, some liability claims relating to disease and pollution have taken decades to emerge.
In many cases, the insurers were largely ignorant of the potential risks at the time that cover was
given. Such claims are known as latent claims. The possibility of latent claims increases the level
of risk for insurers.
By contrast, property damage classes have a much shorter delay tail, and hence in this
respect a lower degree of risk, since the losses are more immediately apparent and can
usually be valued reasonably accurately by a competent assessor.
Until all claims have been settled from a given exposure period, the insurer is uncertain both as to
the number of such claims and, more importantly, their cost. This will have consequences for
setting reserves when drawing up accounts, and for evaluating future rating needs.
Also, while claims are outstanding they will be subject to increases in cost due to inflation, sudden
jumps in court awards, changing legislation and indirect taxes. This further complicates the
insurer’s ability to estimate future claim settlement costs.
Question
One of your student colleagues says that for motor third party cover, liability claims are long
tailed and property claims are short tailed. Explain whether you agree with the student.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
Solution
Not quite. Many liability claims involve property damage only (for example, if you accidentally
scrape against somebody else’s car in a car park). These claims will also be relatively short tailed
(although there may be some delay whilst you argue whose fault it was). The student has
therefore confused the term liability with bodily injury, a common mistake. This will be discussed
in more detail in Chapter 3.
Variability of experience
Depending on the class involved, the numbers of claims can vary according to such
features as unusually bad weather, the economic situation and catastrophes.
Some classes are more susceptible than others to individual claims that are large enough to
affect the results of the whole class.
The pattern of claims arising within a year for any given class will rarely, if ever, equate with the
theoretical claims cost distribution for that class. One or more very large claims can easily swamp
the normal cost.
Accumulations
The insurer can be exposed to accumulations of risk if the portfolio is unbalanced. There is a
possibility of many claims arising from a single event or a single cause.
Some classes of business are (particularly) subject to accumulations of risk.
Property classes are prone to catastrophes: external events that affect a large number of
policies at the same time, possibly causing mainly small claims, but in aggregate giving rise
to a very large total loss. The most important examples are extreme weather, earthquakes
and civil disturbance.
Such accumulations tend to be based on single events affecting a number of risks in the same
geographic region.
However, such accumulations need not be single incidents; for example, a very dry summer
may cause a large number of subsidence claims, although there is no single event to link
them.
Other forms of accumulation are not necessarily based on geographical concentration, eg for
creditor insurance, there may be many claims triggered by high unemployment.
Liability insurance is less susceptible to large single incident accumulation losses, but a
single cause may give rise to a large number of claims. The most obvious example is
exposure to asbestos, which has given rise to claims under liability policies that are
expected to exceed any single event catastrophe.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 27
Fraudulent claims
Certain classes are more exposed than others to the risk that the insured will make false or
invalid claims, or exaggerate the amount claimed following a loss. Often, it will be difficult
or uneconomic for the insurer to check whether the claims are genuine or not. At the
extreme such false claims could include arson and embezzlement. The rate of fraudulent
claims has been observed to increase in times of economic stringency.
Examples under personal lines cover can include:
Motor: a policyholder, with non-comprehensive cover, suffers non-claimable damage to
the insured vehicle. The policyholder then drives the vehicle to a remote spot, destroys it
by fire and claims under the fire and theft sections of the policy.
Household contents: claims are made for loss of fictitious articles, or the values are
exaggerated.
Buildings: claims are made for defective roofs, which are really due to natural wear and
tear.
Buildings: after a genuine insured loss, a builder may offer to add the amount of the
insurance excess to their invoice. The insurer then unwittingly pays the full amount of the
actual repair cost.
Under commercial lines of business, examples can include:
Buildings: the insured deliberately sets fire to the insured premises because the business
is losing money, and the insured stock is actually of little value.
Liability: malicious or extravagant claims are made by third parties because they have
seen people with valid claims receive substantial awards.
Financial loss: embezzlement, fraud or falsification of accounts is carried out by the
insured, in order to exaggerate a loss.
In all cases, these risks tend to be greatest during periods of economic downturn and depression.
The insured sees the insurer as an illegal means of recovering losses that may threaten the
insured’s own financial position.
Question
If you were the owner and manager of a general insurance company, suggest what you would do
to try to reduce the fraudulent claims against you.
Solution
Things that insurers have tried include:
making the policy wording as tight as possible, and reviewing it regularly in the light of
market and judicial changes
devising contracts which minimise the fraud risks, eg minimum and indexed sums insured
for household contents policies
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
working together with other insurers and industry bodies to try to identify and punish
persistent offenders
random spot checks on claims, even smaller ones
having repairs done by a small number of approved firms (rather than at the choice of the
claimant)
insisting on the police being involved before paying out on a theft claim
publicity to advise against it, eg ‘It’s a crime to …’ and ‘Look what happened to this
fraudster ...’.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 29
5 Capital requirements and impact on solvency
General insurers require resources beyond those needed to cover their technical liabilities
in respect of the business they have written. The excess of the value of the assets over the
value of the liabilities is known as the capital or solvency margin of the company.
You may hear it referred to as the free reserves of the company.
The amount of capital held is subject to minimum requirements if a company is to be
allowed to continue to trade. These requirements are laid down in legislation that varies
from one country to another, although all countries in the EU have a common minimum
solvency regime. This solvency margin will act as a safety margin against the uncertainty
surrounding the ultimate future cost of liabilities and the value of the assets supporting
them.
If the number or cost of claims is greater than the reserves held to meet the claims, then the
solvency margin (free reserves) will be needed to pay the claims. Unexpected claims may result in
the need to realise assets to pay those claims. Free reserves will guard against the danger of
volatile asset values.
Question
Suggest other reasons why a general insurer needs to hold free reserves.
Solution
it may have to by law
to guard against catastrophes / accumulations / latent claims
to guard against lower than expected investment return
to give more investment freedom
to guard against higher than expected expenses or expense inflation
to guard against failure of a third party, for example a reinsurer or broker
to reduce the need for reinsurance
to attract new business
to demonstrate financial strength, eg to regulators, shareholders, analysts
Determining the capital that a general insurer ought to hold to cater adequately for the risks
associated with the business it transacts is a complex issue. The longer the tail of the
business written the greater the uncertainty and hence, other things being equal, the more
capital will be required. In setting its capital requirements, beyond those specified by law,
the general insurer will need to take into account the uncertainty and variability of the
business it writes.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
Generally, for two classes where the same amount of business – measured by premium
income – has been written, the capital requirements should be larger for the class with the
greater uncertainty and variability in its future claims experience and in the run-off of
reserves.
Question
Write down the following classes in decreasing order of uncertainty and variability of future
claims experience:
employers’ liability
household contents
motor liability.
Solution
employers’ liability, motor liability, household contents
Motor liability has a longer tail than household contents because of the occasional bodily injury
claim.
When considering its capital requirements a general insurer will need to consider each
class of business individually. However, its overall capital requirement will be more
important. An insurer that writes a variety of classes of business with a good spread of
risks is likely to be exposed to less overall uncertainty than one that writes limited classes
of business in a limited market.
You will probably already be familiar with the principle of diversification of investments. Holding
equities, fixed interest bonds and property is usually considered less risky than just holding
property. This principle can also be applied to the liabilities too. An insurer that writes lots of
different classes of business is exposed to less risk compared with an insurer that concentrates on
one class.
An insurer will often be allowed to take credit for this diversification when determining its capital
requirements. However, the extent of this diversification benefit will be sensitive to the
groupings used by the insurer in its capital model.
Diversification in the context of capital modelling is discussed in detail in Subject SP7.
Example
An example of how classes may be subdivided for solvency purposes arises from the EU’s
approach within Solvency II:
Accident
This line of business includes obligations caused by accident or misadventure but excludes
obligations considered as workers’ compensation insurance.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 31
Sickness
This line of business includes obligations caused by illness, but excludes obligations
considered as workers’ compensation insurance.
Workers’ compensation
This line of business includes obligations covered with workers’ compensation insurance
which insures accident at work, industrial injury and occupational diseases.
Motor vehicle liability – Motor third party liability
This line of business includes obligations which cover all liabilities arising out of the use of
motor vehicles operating on the land including carrier’s liability.
Motor, other classes
This line of business includes obligations which cover all damage to or loss of land motor
vehicles, land vehicles other than motor vehicles and railway rolling stock.
Marine, aviation and transport
This line of business includes obligations which cover all damage or loss to river, canal,
lake and sea vessels, aircraft, and damage to or loss of goods in transit or baggage
irrespective of the form of transport. This line of business also includes all liabilities arising
out of use of aircraft, ships, vessels or boats on the sea, lakes, rivers or canals including
carrier’s liability irrespective of the form of transport.
Fire and other damage
This line of business includes obligations which cover all damage to or loss of property
other than motor, marine aviation and transport due to fire, explosion, natural forces
including storm, hail or frost, nuclear energy, land subsidence and any event such as theft.
General liability – third party liability
This line of business includes obligations which cover all liabilities other than those
included in motor vehicle liability and marine, aviation and transport.
Credit and suretyship
This line of business includes obligations which cover insolvency, export credit, instalment
credit, mortgages, agricultural credit and direct and indirect suretyship.
Legal expenses
This line of business includes obligations which cover legal expenses and cost of litigation.
Assistance
This line of business includes obligations which cover assistance for persons who get into
difficulties while travelling, while away from home or while away from their habitual
residence.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
Miscellaneous non-life insurance
This line of business includes obligations which cover employment risk, insufficiency of
income, bad weather, loss of benefits, continuing general expenses, unforeseen trading
expenses, loss of market value, loss of rent or revenue, indirect trading losses other than
those mentioned before, other financial loss (not trading) as well as any other risk of
non-life insurance business not covered by the lines of business mentioned before.
Note that the terminology and groupings given above are not always consistent with those used
later in the Course Notes. The types of cover provided by general insurers are vast and varied,
and no single set of definitions or groupings exist. It is much more important to understand the
cover provided, than to label it with any particular sub-heading.
Types of general insurance products are covered in detail in the next chapter.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 33
6 Glossary items
Having studied this chapter you should now read the following Glossary items:
Anti-selection Nil claim
Average No-claim discount (NCD)
Claim amount distribution Peril
Claim cost inflation Personal lines
Claim frequency Rating factor
Claim frequency distribution Recoveries
Claim size distribution Retroactive date
Claims made policy Risk factor
Claims reported Risk premium
Commercial lines Salvage
Discovery period Subrogation
Excess Sunset clause
Exclusion Uberrima fides
Expiry date Underinsurance
Exposure Underwriter
Exposure unit / measure Underwriting
Inception date Underwriting factor
Liability insurance Zero claim.
Moral hazard
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
The chapter summary starts on the next page so that you can
keep all the chapter summaries together for revision purposes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 35
Chapter 2 Summary
General insurance principles
For a risk to be insurable the policyholder should have an interest in the risk, it should be
quantifiable and the claim amount payable should be commensurate with the size of the
financial loss.
Ideally, risk events should:
be independent
have low probability of occurring
be pooled with similar risks
have an ultimate liability
avoid moral hazards.
In addition, there should be sufficient data to enable the insurer to estimate the size of the
risk and likelihood of occurrence.
Principles underpinning an insurance contract include assessing the insurable risk, the details
of the proposal form and contract itself, identifying an insurable interest and uberrima fides.
Exclusions are used to avoid payments by the insurer for a variety of reasons.
Types of product
The generic types of general insurance cover:
liability to third parties
property damage
financial loss
fixed benefits.
Cover provided
The benefits usually aim to indemnify the insured for any financial losses suffered as a result
of an insured event, although fixed benefits may sometimes be provided. A peril is a type of
event that may cause losses, eg theft, flood. Policies may be written on a losses-occurring or
a claims-made basis.
The exposure measure is the principal measure of risk for an individual policy. Premiums will
be set according to the measure of exposure.
The claims characteristics refer to the ways in which and speed with which claims originate,
are notified, are settled and paid and are, on occasion, reopened. Claim frequency and
amount are also relevant. Claims characteristics vary by class.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
Risk factors are any factors that have a bearing on the amount of risk. Rating factors are
factors that are actually used in the premium rating process. Rating factors are either
measurable risk factors or proxies for the underlying risk factors (ie where it is not practical
to use the true risk factor).
Underwriting factors are rating factors, together with subjective factors that cannot be
measured, but will still be taken into account when setting premiums / policy conditions.
Selection against the insurer may occur where an insurer’s premium rating structure does
not reflect the underlying risks, especially if premiums differ from those offered by the rest
of the market.
How risk varies by class
Some classes of business cause insurers more risk and uncertainty than others because of
the nature of the risks involved and the claims that can arise from those risks. Factors that
affect the level of risk and uncertainty include:
homogeneity of risks
non-independence of risks
changing risks
numbers of claims
claim cost
claims inflation
delay patterns
variability of experience
accumulations
fraudulent claims.
Capital requirements and solvency
General insurers are required to hold capital over and above their technical reserves. This
capital is known as solvency capital.
Generally, the capital requirements will be larger for a class with a greater uncertainty and
variability in its future claims experience.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 37
Chapter 2 Practice Questions
2.1 List the reasons for applying exclusions to an insurance policy.
2.2 Suggest claims characteristics that might make a claims-made basis appropriate.
2.3 Explain the key problem for an employer switching from an insurer providing cover on a
claims-made basis to an insurer providing cover on a losses-occurring basis.
2.4 Explain:
(i) the main criteria used in the choice of an exposure measure
(ii) the difference between a risk factor and a rating factor
(iii) why rating factors are needed
(iv) the difference between a rating factor and an underwriting factor.
2.5 (i) List the desirable properties of a measure of exposure.
(ii) State which measure of exposure you might you use for a professional indemnity policy,
and why.
(iii) State the disadvantages of your measure.
2.6 Explain the principle of average.
2.7 Give four examples of possible fraudulent claims within household insurance.
2.8 (i) Explain what is meant by commercial lines of general insurance.
(ii) Price competition is less important in many commercial lines than it is for many personal
lines. Give two factors, other than price, that are also important to a business, in
comparison to an individual, when choosing its insurer.
2.9 (i) Explain what is meant by indemnity.
(ii) Give four distinct examples of general insurance policies that do not provide indemnity for a
policyholder in the event of a claim.
2.10 Explain why rating factors are needed.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 38 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 39
Chapter 2 Solutions
2.1 Exclusions might be used:
to avoid payment by the insurer in situations where:
– the policyholder is at an advantage through possessing greater personal
information about the likelihood of a claim
– the claim event is largely under the control of the policyholder
– the claim event would be very difficult to verify
– the loss occurs as part of the normal course of events, and could be considered to
be depreciation
where the risk cannot be reliably estimated by the insurer, regardless of whether or not
the policyholder has better information
when the probability of loss is very high
the risk is covered by a third party such as the government
to limit the scope of the policy to make it more appropriate for a particular target market
to reduce the premium for competitive reasons
to reduce the risk of moral hazard and fraud.
2.2 A claims-made basis may be appropriate when it is not clear when the loss actually occurred. This
might be true for certain types of liability classes, where the loss emerges gradually over time,
eg deafness caused by continual exposure to loud noises at work under an employers’ liability
product.
2.3 There is the potential for a gap in the cover. For example, suppose, as an employer, we switch on
1/1/19 from a policy on a ‘claims-made’ basis to a policy on a ‘losses-occurring’ basis. Then on
2/1/19 we discover that our foreman, Bert, who suffered an injury at work last year which
appeared to have completely healed, has had a major relapse and is instituting proceedings for
compensation.
We cannot claim for this under our current policy, since the event occurred last year. We cannot
claim for it under our previous policy either, because the claim was not reported last year.
2.4 (i) An exposure measure should be:
a good measure of the amount of risk (eg doubling the exposure measure should
double the amount of risk)
measurable
easily obtainable and objectively verifiable
not capable of manipulation.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 40 SP8-02: Insurance products – background
(ii) A risk factor is a factor that affects the level of risk for a particular policy.
A rating factor is a factor used in the rating process, either because it is a measurable risk
factor or because it is a proxy for a risk factor.
(iii) Rating factors are needed because different policies have different levels of risk and
because the exposure measure is rarely good enough by itself to gauge the level of risk.
(iv) An underwriting factor is one that is used to determine the premium, terms and
conditions for a policy. It may be a rating factor or some other risk factor that is
accounted for in a subjective manner by the underwriter. Remember that rating factors
must be measurable, verifiable etc.
2.5 (i) Desirable properties of a measure of exposure are:
principle measure of the risk
practical
– obtainable / measurable
– verifiable
– objective / not manipulable
– acceptable to policyholder
helps avoid selection
(ii) A measure of exposure for a professional indemnity policy might be the number of
professionals (or staff by category of work) covered by the policy.
This is because it’s a measure of the amount of work being done, and hence related to the
amount of risk.
It also satisfies the other criteria in part (i). (Total fee income would also be appropriate,
as may staff salaries.)
(iii) It makes no allowance for the type of work being done and the likely financial implications
of the work. (Many other possible risk factors should also be incorporated.) Thus, it is
only a very crude measure of the amount of risk.
2.6 Possibly used with commercial fire insurance and other property insurance.
A policyholder may insure an agreed proportion of the value of a property. Claim payments for
losses suffered by the policyholder are then scaled down in that proportion.
It is not used in domestic property insurance, other than where the insurer discovers (after a
claim has been made) that the policyholder was underinsured.
The insurer could refuse to pay the claim, but instead would normally scale down the claim
payment (which is effectively an ex-gratia payment).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-02: Insurance products – background Page 41
2.7 Four possible fraudulent claims in household insurance:
claiming for more than the value of goods lost / stolen
claiming for fictitious goods that have not been lost / stolen
engineering ‘accidents’ to old / broken items and claiming full replacement
arson.
2.8 (i) Insurance sold to businesses, rather than to individuals.
(ii) The quality of the service is a more important form of competition on commercial lines,
eg a fleet manager with a large fleet will want efficient handling of the many claims likely
to be made in each year.
Also, businesses should pay more attention to the financial strength of the insurer to
ensure that claims will be paid.
2.9 (i) Indemnity is compensation for a loss that restores the insured to the same position as
before the loss occurred.
(ii) Four distinct examples are required, eg:
individual personal accident, where the insured is paid a fixed sum
new-for-old policies under domestic contents, where the insured has a more
valuable property than before the loss occurred
creditor insurance, where the benefit may be say 80% of the insured’s monthly
mortgage payment due
any insurance policy with an element of self-insurance, eg where there’s an excess
(or a maximum level of cover).
2.10 Rating factors are needed because the exposure measure alone cannot generally account for all of
the factors determining the risk from an individual policy.
They help to classify risks into more homogenous groups.
Failure to accurately account for all of these factors could mean that:
potential policyholders will take advantage of the insurer’s low inappropriate premium
rates leading to large amounts of unprofitable business (ie anti-selection)
competitors setting a lower more appropriate premium rate will attract the other potential
policyholders.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold
for the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is
owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a
subsidiary of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or
photocopy any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it
is not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through
the profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished
using the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 1
Insurance products – types
Syllabus objectives
1.1 Describe the main types of general insurance products in terms of:
the needs of customers
the financial and other risks they pose for the general insurer including their
capital requirements and possible effect on solvency.
Covered in part in this chapter.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
0 Introduction
The range of general insurance products is very wide and continually changing and
therefore it is difficult to set out the features of all types of product.
The sections below provide a general indication and examples of the knowledge that
examiners would expect a candidate to have in relation to the features of the major types of
general insurance product. However, the examiners will also expect candidates to apply
this knowledge to any other products that may exist.
This chapter is not intended to be an exhaustive description of all the main products available.
However, it should give you:
a sound introduction to the main product types
a good understanding of the framework within which any other product could be
analysed.
In this chapter, the products are discussed under the headings of the four main types of
cover that they provide. The candidate will need to bear in mind the possible effects of
combining different types of cover within a single policy. For example, the risk factors
relevant to the liability cover will not necessarily be the same as those that are relevant to
the cover for damage to property.
This chapter concludes with a discussion of how products may be combined or ‘packaged’ up.
As well as being a sound introduction, this chapter will be very useful to you in your revision.
This chapter is very long. You may therefore wish to use two or three study sessions to work
through it.
The examiners do not only examine the ‘basic’ products such as motor and household.
Sometimes, more unusual products are examined. If you would like to know more about some of
the more unusual products, you may want to have a look at the following book:
Insurance Law Handbook (4th edition)
ISBN: 9781847660930
By Barlow Lyde and Gilbert LLP
To order, call Tottel Publishing on +44 (0)1444 416119
This textbook is part of the recommended reading for the Chartered Insurance Institute. It gives a
comprehensive factual introduction to the legal and coverage sides of many classes of insurance,
and so would be useful for students who wish to find out more about the more ‘unusual’ classes
of business. It also covers other issues such as insurance markets (eg Lloyd’s) and regulation.
However, the book is quite UK-specific and is not part of the Core Reading for this subject.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 3
1 Liability
The essential characteristic of liability insurance (also called casualty insurance in North
America) is providing indemnity where the insured, owing to some form of tort (private or
civil wrong, such as negligence), is legally liable to pay compensation to a third party.
The main types of liability insurance are:
employers’ liability / workers’ compensation
motor third party liability
marine and aviation liability
public liability – often linked to other types of insurance such as property and
marine
product liability
professional indemnity and errors and omissions (E&O) liability
Directors’ and Officers’ (D&O) liability
environmental liability and pollution liability.
(Motor third party liability is a particular type of public liability insurance, but is treated
separately because of its importance in personal lines business.)
Other forms of liability cover are variations of one or more of these types.
Question
(i) Suggest an example of the sort of negligence that you think may result in a claim under a
professional indemnity contract.
(ii) Suggest what Directors’ and Officers’ insurance might cover.
Solution
(i) Incorrect actuarial advice.
(ii) Directors and Officers cover is a form of liability insurance which will indemnify directors
or senior managers of a company against them, or their company, being sued for acts that
they have committed. For example, they may have ‘unfairly’ dismissed an employee.
The extent of any legal liability may depend on the prevailing legislation. For marine and
aviation liability, international law prevails, depending on which jurisdiction applies and
how the contract is worded. For classes such as motor and employers’ liability, national
laws are likely to apply.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
1.1 Benefits
The basic benefit provided by any liability insurance is an amount to indemnify the
policyholder fully against a financial loss. However, subject to any statutory requirements,
this benefit may be restricted by:
a maximum indemnity per claim or per event (this may involve more than one claim),
or an aggregate maximum per year
an excess.
Subject to the details of any reinstatement clause, payment of any benefits may result in a
cancellation of cover or the need for a further premium.
Question
Suggest advantages of having an excess.
Solution
An excess:
reduces the amount of each claim (by the excess)
reduces the number of claims (all claims less than the excess are eliminated)
in particular eliminates the small claims just above the excess, where the policyholder
may feel it’s not worth claiming and thus results in expense savings for the insurer
arguably encourages policyholders to be more careful and so helps prevent claims
may allow the company to reduce premiums and so make them appear more competitive.
Any legal expenses relating to such liability are usually also covered. Note: an illegal act of
negligence will often invalidate the cover.
Example
An insurer is unlikely to pay out compensation if the insured caused a crash whilst drink driving or
whilst driving a stolen car. However, the insurer would pay out if the crash was due to a
punctured tyre or just a complete accident.
Employers’ liability
This insurance indemnifies the insured against legal liability to compensate an employee or
his or her estate for bodily injury, disease or death suffered, owing to negligence of the
employer, in the course of employment. Loss of or damage to employees’ property is
usually also covered.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 5
Employers are liable if they are negligent in providing their employees with safe working
conditions. Generally speaking the employer would be liable if failing to:
provide a safe working place with proper equipment in which the employee can work
properly maintain the working place, as well as tools and equipment
create and enforce proper working procedures and methods.
The benefit can be in the form of regular payments to compensate for disabilities that
reduce the employee’s ability to work, lump sum payments to compensate for permanent
injuries to the employee and benefits under the legal framework.
Legal costs will also be covered. Other costs such as care costs can also be included.
Compulsory cover
In many countries cover is compulsory.
Example
The Employers’ Liability (Compulsory Insurance) Act 1969 requires that every employer in
the UK (except some bodies such as local authorities) must maintain, with an authorised
insurer, an employers’ liability insurance policy covering all its employees. The policy must
have a minimum level of indemnity of £5m per event, but will usually provide a higher level
of cover. Most authorised insurers will provide cover of at least £10m.
Most countries have similar requirements to the UK, although the details vary from country
to country.
The most important distinction is between countries that have a system of employers’
liability (in which losses must arise from the employer’s negligence if they are to form the
basis of compensation, eg in the UK), and workers’ compensation (in which losses merely
have to be suffered in the course of employment, eg in the US).
In some countries, for example Australia, employers’ liability insurance is more frequently
referred to as workers’ compensation insurance.
Motor third party liability
This insurance indemnifies the owner of a motor vehicle against compensation payable to
third parties for personal injury or damage to their property.
The benefits will include compensation for loss of earnings, hospital costs and damage to
property costs, and can be paid in a lump sum or periodically to the injured party.
Compulsory cover
In most countries such cover is compulsory, although precise rules vary, for example in the
amount of cover required. The cover provided may or may not be limited to that required by
legislation.
Example
Third-party liability cover is required for all motor vehicles in the UK, under the Road Traffic
Act 1972. The cover must be unlimited in relation to personal injury claims, but is required
only up to £250,000 for damage to a third party’s property.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
In fact, the Core Reading is many years out of date here. The minimum cover for third party
property damage is now £1.2m, although most UK insurers provide unlimited cover.
Since motor liability insurance is a legal requirement for vehicle owners in most countries,
policies that provide liability cover only are widely available.
In South Africa, motor liability insurance is not compulsory unless the car has been bought on
credit, in which case comprehensive insurance is compulsory.
Marine and aviation liability
The insured is indemnified against the legal liability to compensate a third party for bodily
injury, death or damage to property arising out of operation of the vessel or aircraft. The
third parties include, but are not limited to, passengers.
A large proportion of marine liability insurance is provided not by commercial insurance
companies but through Protection and Indemnity Clubs. These are mutual associations of
ship owners that provide cover for their members on a pooled basis.
Protection and Indemnity Clubs are described in Chapter 7.
Public liability
The insured is indemnified against legal liability for the death of or bodily injury to a third
party or for damage to property belonging to a third party, other than those liabilities
covered by other liability insurance.
Example
Suppose you are a recently qualified actuary, married with young children, walking past a
construction site underneath the covered pedestrian pavement. Despite the overhead
protection, a brick falls through and knocks you on the head, causing instant death. Your
dependants could sue the building contractor for their loss of future support because of your
death as both spouse and parent. The contractor would then rely on public liability insurance to
meet the claim.
Compulsory cover
In some countries – and for certain individuals or institutions – public liability is compulsory.
Example
Statute requires public liability policies to be held by horse-riding establishments and
nuclear installations in the UK. However, there is no general requirement in the UK for
individuals or businesses to hold public liability insurance.
There are two main types of cover, namely:
the risk at insured’s own premises (eg a commercial premises such as warehouses)
the risk when work is carried out by the insured away from their own premises
(eg on the site where builders are working, away from their official place of work).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 7
Product liability
This insurance indemnifies the insured against legal liability for the death of or bodily injury
to a third party, or for damage to property belonging to a third party, that results from a
product fault.
The policy will usually also cover legal costs. Some policies will include the costs of
recalling faulty products that have not actually caused damage.
Professional indemnity
This insurance indemnifies the insured against legal liability for losses resulting from
negligence in the provision of a service, for example unsatisfactory medical treatment or
incorrect advice from an actuary or solicitor. The insured will be a professional person or a
professional firm.
You might often hear the term ‘E&O’ being used, which stands for ‘errors and omissions’ cover.
This is another term for ‘professional indemnity’, the two are used interchangeably.
Like companies selling products, enterprises offering a service may also be concerned to protect
themselves against possible liability claims.
In a company take-over, for example, considerable weight may be given to professional reports
from accountants, merchant bankers and even, where relevant, actuaries. Negligence by one of
the advisors could cause their client to suffer large losses.
There are several types of professional indemnity insurance. The fundamental cover is the same –
the difference is due to the parties that buy the cover. For example, the US is notorious for the
high cost of professional indemnity cover for medical doctors, because they can be sued for
millions of dollars by patients who are not satisfied with treatment. This has given rise to medical
malpractice insurance (which is often abbreviated to ‘med mal’).
Compulsory cover
Holding professional indemnity insurance is often a legal or regulatory condition of being
allowed to practise a profession or may be imposed as a condition by a professional body.
Directors’ and Officers’ liability
This is another important type of liability cover. E&O is primarily concerned with performance
failures and negligence with respect to products and services, whereas D&O is concerned with the
performance and duties of management.
D&O insurance indemnifies the insured against the legal liability to compensate third
parties owing to any wrongful act of the insured in his or her capacity as a director or officer
of a company. The insurance is personal to the director or officer, but is usually bought for
him or her by the company.
Deliberate fraud by directors and officers will typically be excluded.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
Environmental liability
The insured is indemnified against the legal liability to compensate third parties as a result
of bodily injury, death and damage to property as a result of unintentional pollution for
which the insured is deemed responsible.
The costs of cleaning up the pollution and regulatory fines may also be covered. Gradual
and sudden environmental pollution will generally both be covered.
1.2 Insured perils
Employers’ liability
The perils can be largely grouped into the following:
accidents caused by negligence of the employer or by other employees
exposure to harmful substances (eg chemicals, coal dust, asbestos)
exposure to harmful working conditions (eg loud noises or repetitive strain).
At any given time there is often a particular cause which gives rise to a large number of claims,
eg asbestos-related diseases, industrial deafness, repetitive strain injury (RSI) and stress have
each been common.
Motor third party liability
The perils for motor third party can be grouped into the following categories:
loss or damage to the property of third parties caused by the insured vehicle
bodily injury and death of third parties caused by the insured vehicle.
Marine and aviation liability
The perils can be grouped into the following:
loss of, or damage to, passengers’ property, including luggage
bodily injury and death of passengers either while on board the vessel or aircraft or
when boarding or leaving the vessel or aircraft
bodily injury caused by the vessel or aircraft
damage to property caused by the vessel or aircraft.
There are likely to be a number of exclusions on aircraft liability insurance, including perils
such as terrorism, war and illegal activities, although some of these may be covered under
extensions to cover and may be a legal requirement in some countries.
In December 2007, US law was changed to provide a transparent system of compensation for
insured losses resulting from acts of terrorism. Under the law, compensation would be shared
between the public and private sector.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 9
The insurance market in the US offers terrorism insurance coverage to the majority of large
companies that request it. Depending on the required level of coverage and the location of the
company, the cover may be expensive.
In France, it is mandatory for insurers to include terrorism coverage when insuring commercial
risks.
Public liability
As this type of insurance forms part of many types of insurance policy, the insured perils
will relate to the type of policy. For example, compensation for a dog bite may be covered
by a household policy, while compensation for injury from a falling object may be covered
by a commercial policy held by a builder.
In general the policy will not be restricted to named perils, although some perils may be
excluded.
Product liability
Here the perils depend greatly on the nature of the product being produced, but include:
faulty design
faulty manufacture
faulty packaging
incorrect or misleading instructions.
Examples could include:
An electrical appliance with faulty wiring which could injure people using it.
A pharmaceutical company concerned about future unwanted side effects emerging in
those taking a new drug. Two real life examples are:
– Thalidomide – in the early 1960s this sedative, known for its apparent lack of
toxicity was found to relieve the symptoms of morning sickness, and so was given
to pregnant women. The drug was later found to have caused the arrested
development of arms and legs in thousands of babies.
– Opren (also known as Benoxaprophen) was prescribed in the early 1980s to
relieve the symptoms of rheumatoid arthritis. Dozens of elderly patients died as a
result of its unpleasant side effects.
Professional indemnity
The perils here depend on the profession of the insured. Examples include:
wrong medical diagnosis
error in medical operation
error in an actuarial report.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
Directors’ and Officers’ (D&O) liability
The perils include the following:
allowing a company to continue operating in circumstances when it should have
been declared insolvent
any act resulting in the insured being declared unfit for his or her role
allowing false financial statements to be published.
Environmental liability
The insured perils can be regarded as any incident causing gradual or sudden
environmental pollution.
1.3 Basis for cover
Employers’ liability
Most classes of business are written on the basis of when the loss was incurred, ie cover relates to
the date of the accident rather than the date of reporting the accident. So if a policy provided
cover for 2018, say, the insurer would be liable for claims resulting from accidents in 2018.
With employers’ liability, this gives rise to a few problems:
Where an industrial disease results from prolonged exposure, it is hard to define the
‘accident date’. In practice, where the company has changed insurer over the period, the
claim is split between the insurers in proportion to the time span each provided cover
over the relevant period of exposure.
Because many diseases take a very long time to develop fully, there have been extensive
reporting delays with employers’ liability insurance. This makes it more difficult for the
insurer to manage the business.
To overcome these difficulties, several insurers devised policies on a claims-made basis whereby
the insurer was liable for claims reported in the period of insurance cover. This approach to
insurance has led to a number of difficulties (eg overlaps in insurance cover), so many policies are
still (currently) operating on the original losses-occurring basis.
In the UK, employers’ liability insurance cannot currently be written on a claims-made basis.
Motor third party liability
Cover is usually provided on a losses-occurring basis.
Marine and aviation liability
Policies are usually written on a losses-occurring basis.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 11
Public liability
This is likely to depend on the exact cover being provided, although is likely to be on a
losses-occurring basis.
Public liability insurance may be combined with other insurances, for example residential
buildings and contents products may include public liability cover. In such cases, the basis for
cover would be the same as for the other insurance cover provided.
Product liability
Policies are likely to be written on a claims-made basis.
Question
Explain why a claims-made basis might be an appropriate way of writing product liability cover.
Solution
Customers may not always remember exactly when they noticed a product fault, or when they
bought the product, and health problems caused by product faults (eg pharmaceuticals) may take
a long time to arise. In these cases it is likely to be easier for this business to be written on a
claims-made basis.
If a claims-made basis is used for certain products, such as motor insurance, the insured might
strategically choose when to report a claim, for example to retain the next year’s no-claims
discount. However, for product liability, it is the customer who will initiate the claim, but it is
actually the company that is the insured. The customer therefore has no personal interest in the
exact time at which the claim is reported.
Alternatively, an insurer could give cover relating to sales in a given year.
Professional indemnity
Professional indemnity is usually written on a claims-made basis.
Directors’ and Officers’ liability
D&O liability is usually written on a claims-made basis.
Environmental liability
Policies are likely to be written on a claims-made basis.
1.4 Measures of exposure to which premiums are related
Most policies that cover the various types of commercial liability will be underwritten on the
basis of the perceived risk with the premium adjusted in the light of the insured’s turnover.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
Employers’ liability
Person-hours worked could be the best exposure measure when assessing claim frequency.
However, claim settlements are often related to loss of earnings so, in practice:
The main measure of exposure for employers’ liability is payroll, or total wage and salary
costs.
This is appropriate because the compensation payable to employees who claim is often related to
salary. For example, if an employee is unable to work again due to injury, the main component of
compensation would be loss of earnings.
The premium rate for an employer will be agreed when a policy is taken out and a premium
will be paid on the basis of the estimated payroll for the year. At the end of the year an
adjustment premium will be paid or refunded on the basis of the actual total payroll for the
year.
This is because the annual payroll cannot usually be determined accurately in advance.
Motor third party liability
For motor third party liability the measure of exposure is the vehicle-year. In other words,
an agreed monetary premium is charged for the insurance of a single car for a year.
Marine and aviation liability
For marine and aviation liability insurance alternative measures of exposure can include:
passenger kilometres
passenger voyages
in-service seats
in-service vessels / aircraft.
However, turnover is still the most commonly used measure, although it is not an accurate
measure of the risk.
For example, a manufacturer could have zero turnover in a policy year and yet still have
significant exposure as coverage is based on accident year (ie on a losses-occurring basis),
irrespective of when the craft was made or sold. Therefore previous years’ turnover can
give rise to claims on the current year’s policy.
Additionally for marine liability, sum insured, feet drilled and turnover are used where
suitable. (Feet drilled might be an appropriate exposure measure for an offshore oil rig.)
Some underwriters see past production as a key exposure measure. A better measure
might be rolling average turnover. For example, if a craft or vessel spends an average of 20
years in service, the average turnover in the last 20 years might be used as an exposure
measure.
Or the historical annual turnover could be weighted by a risk profile. This could be derived
from the age of craft or vessels in accidents.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 13
The main problem with these exposure measures is their lack of uniformity. For example, a
jet engine as one of four on a wide-bodied airliner represents a very different risk to a
turboprop engine on a cargo aircraft. All of the exposure measures used need large
adjustments derived from rating factors before they can be of any use for rating.
Public liability
The most commonly used measure of exposure is turnover.
An alternative is payroll. The argument for this is that if you are a furniture maker paying
£200,000 pa in wages you would present a far greater public liability risk than if you paid wages of
only £50,000 pa because you will probably have a larger workforce.
Turnover is sometimes considered a better measure since the relative cost of materials and
equipment used is also indicative of the public liability risk.
For specific types of policies, such as for hospitals’ public liability, the number of beds may be a
more appropriate measure.
Product liability
The most commonly used measure of exposure is turnover.
Despite the problems with heterogeneity, annual turnover of the company is normally used
because no better alternative exists.
Professional indemnity
The most commonly used measure of exposure is turnover. However, alternatives can be
used in some situations such as amount of funds under management.
This would be appropriate if the insured is a fund manager.
Directors’ and Officers’ liability
As a type of professional indemnity insurance, the exposure measures will be similar, eg turnover.
Another measure that may be used is net assets and liabilities.
Environmental liability
The measure of exposure will depend heavily on the nature of the industry carried out by
the insured. For example, the number of power stations or the amount of energy generated
could be used for a power company.
Alternatively a measure related to the value of the land may be used.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
1.5 Claim characteristics
Several issues need to be resolved before a liability can be settled:
whether or not there has been a loss
whether or not the insured is liable
the quantum (amount) of the loss.
The loss may also be reduced if there is contributory negligence on the part of the victim.
Reporting delays
Reporting delays might arise because, say, an injury gets worse over time whereas the sufferer
had expected the problem to be only temporary, or because the seriousness of the condition only
comes to light in a later routine check-up.
Some liability claims remain undetected for some years and are often referred to as ‘latent
claims’. This means that a loss may not become evident until many years after it was
caused. A classic example of this is mesothelioma – a disease that arises from exposure to
asbestos – where the first symptoms are usually not evident for at least twenty years after
exposure and sometimes not for fifty years or more. This exacerbates the long-tailed nature
of the associated liability insurance if it was written on a losses-occurring basis.
Question
Suppose a liability class is written on a claims-made basis. Explain whether this would exacerbate
the long-tailed nature of the claims.
Solution
No – if the business was written on a claims-made basis, then the reporting delay would be
irrelevant, as the claim is effectively deemed to occur when the claim is made.
A further complication is that claims may arise over a long period; for example a storage
tank may leak contents into the ground, causing pollution, for some years before the
damage is discovered, and typically those with asbestos-related diseases were exposed to
asbestos for many years before their condition became manifest. This means that it may
not be clear which insurance should respond to the loss, and often some form of allocation
is necessary.
Settlement delays
Settlement delays may be due to the delays caused by establishing liability, or the time to
establish the extent of injuries and to assess the speed of recovery.
If the loss is personal injury, it may take some years before the victim’s condition has
stabilised and can be assessed for damages. Claim settlement will involve litigation for any
claim of significant size, even though most cases are resolved out of court before they go to
trial.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 15
Settlement for motor liability is often faster than for other types of liability claims, although
claims arising from serious bodily injury do typically take several years to settle. Even so,
motor liability claims, and particularly bodily injury claims, are significantly longer tailed
than other motor claims. In some jurisdictions, bodily injury claims can be settled as
regular payments for life to the victim, rather than lump sum amounts.
These are often called Periodical Payment Orders (PPOs), or structured settlements.
The legal environment has a significant effect on the settlement of claims, and this varies
from country to country. Therefore claims development patterns for similar classes of
business may vary significantly between countries.
These characteristics (both reporting and settlement delays) mean that most liability classes
of business are long-tailed, whether the cover is written on a claims-made or a
claims-occurring basis.
Claim frequency
Claim frequencies on liability classes of business tend to be low.
Motor liability claims tend to be more frequent and usually smaller than claims on other
liability policies, both for property damage and for bodily injury to third parties.
Amount of the claim
Claim cost distributions tend to be more widely spread than for property classes, and there
can be some extremely large individual claims that take many years to settle.
Accumulations of risk arise in many liability classes as a result of an unbalanced portfolio. For
example, almost by definition, employers’ liability insurance produces a concentration of risk.
Because one policy will provide cover for an employer, there will be groups of employees
together in the same office or factory so a single event (such as the Piper Alpha oil rig explosion)
can lead to many claims.
Accumulations can arise in other ways too:
If there is a court award in favour of a claimant, it may trigger a large number of similar
claims from individuals with the same complaint against their employer.
An insurer who provides cover for several employers in the same industry is exposed to
the possibility that a large number of claims will emerge from a common cause. Previous
examples of this are asbestos-related diseases, industrial deafness and repetitive strain
injury.
1.6 Risk factors and rating factors
Employers’ liability and public liability
For employers’ liability and public liability, the main factor influencing the risk is the type of
industry or the occupation(s) of the insured.
Another important factor is the extent to which the employer implements safety measures.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
The underwriting factors are as follows:
type of industry or occupation
exposure and claims experience
location of the workforce
frequency of visitors to the site
the materials handled
the processes involved
safety precautions in place, for example sprinklers in a factory or office
turnover
size of deductible
A deductible is a portion of a loss that is paid by the policyholder. It may be an amount or
a percentage. For example, a 5% deductible will restrict the size of any claim payment to
95% of the loss.
payroll
level of staff training (linked to quality of management)
provision of first aid facilities.
Question
Demonstrate by means of a simple numerical example, the difference between the operation of
an excess and a deductible on an insurance policy.
Solution
Suppose we have two policies. Policy A has an excess of $50 and policy B has a deductible of $50.
The policies are identical in all other ways. The policies have a sum insured of $1,000.
For any claim less than $1,000 then both policies pay the same amount to the insured, ie the
amount of the claim less $50.
However, the amount paid by the insurer on the two policies is different if the claim exceeds the
sum insured. Suppose the claim is $1,500.
Policy A pays $1,000. Policy B pays $950 (ie the amount of the claim paid by the insurer is
reduced by the deductible).
These are factors that underwriters will take into account, some quantitatively, some
qualitatively in assessing an appropriate premium. In addition, underwriters should vary
the premium according to a general assessment of the risk management standards of the
insured.
For very large companies, the previous claims experience will also be relevant.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 17
Motor third party liability
Since motor third party cover is usually provided in the same policy as cover for damage to
the insured vehicle, the risk factors and rating factors are discussed in the section below on
property damage.
In some European countries motor liability insurance and motor own-damage insurance are
sold as separate policies, but the rating factors are likely to be similar.
This is the case in Hungary, for example.
Marine and aviation liability
A wide range of different rating factors are used by insurers. Some form the basis of
actuarial rating models whereas other, more subjective, rating factors are used by
underwriters as part of the rating process.
Some of these are:
loss history
type of craft or vessel (as accident rates and types / sizes of claims will vary), for
example, jets, turboprop and rotor wing in the case of aircraft
commercial category (commercial, private, military)
satellites and missiles (these also attract separate rating structures)
use of craft or vessel (passenger / cargo / leisure / business)
geographic region (jurisdiction of litigation).
Product liability
The nature of the products produced by the insured will be an important factor in assessing
the level of premium. Other risk factors include:
the distribution channel of the product
how much US exposure the product has – in general, products sold in the US show
a different (higher) claims distribution (since there tends to be a different attitude to
claiming), and more claims are likely to be made
its usage
the general trade of policyholder
any potentially dangerous components within the product, and how quickly they
deteriorate.
However, each policy will be underwritten individually, and the underwriter will need to
assess the risks arising from a policy subjectively.
Professional indemnity
The nature of the profession is an important factor in assessing the level of premium.
However, each policy will be underwritten individually, and the underwriter will need to
assess the risks arising from a policy subjectively.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
The risks may also vary between size of professional firm, with sole practitioners presenting
a very different risk profile from large professional services firms.
Directors’ and Officers’ liability
The nature of the company will be an important factor in assessing the level of premium.
However, to a certain extent each policy will be underwritten individually, and the
underwriter will need to assess the risks arising from a policy subjectively.
Other than the type of business, a typical risk factor would be the past experience of the
company.
Environmental liability
Each policy will be underwritten individually, and the underwriter will need to assess the
risks arising from a policy subjectively.
This will take into account:
the processes carried out by the insured
the likely effects of any accident
the likely cost of clean-up
a general assessment of the risk management practices of the insured.
Question
You propose to market a new type of policy to small shopkeepers selling general groceries and
other goods in suburban neighbourhoods. You want to develop a package that will cover all of
their insurance needs. Suggest what types of peril your package would cover.
Solution
Assuming that the shopkeeper does not own the shop itself, the shopkeeper is likely to require
some or all of the following:
protection for the stock and fixtures and fittings against theft, damage from fire, flood,
lightning, hold up or malicious persons
consequential loss of profits insurance in case the shop suffers a major fire
plate glass insurance for the shop window
employers’ liability insurance if anyone else is employed in the business
protection for frozen food in freezers against spoilage as a result of freezer breakdown
product and/or public liability insurance to protect against claims from the public in
respect of faulty goods sold
insurance against theft of cash
protection for goods in transit.
In practice, most insurance companies would be able to offer the small trader a ‘package policy’
incorporating all of these benefits, together with a number of other ‘optional extras’.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 19
2 Property damage
The main characteristic of property damage insurance is indemnifying the policyholder.
However, here the indemnity is against loss of or damage to policyholders’ own material
property.
The main types of property that are subject to such damage are:
residential buildings (for example, houses)
commercial and industrial buildings (for example, offices, shops and factories)
moveable property (for example, the contents of a home or of commercial premises)
land vehicles (for example, cars, buses, taxis)
marine craft
aircraft
goods in transit
property under construction
engineering plant and machinery
goods insured under an extended warranty policy
crops.
Land vehicles can be further divided into:
private motor
commercial vehicle
motorcycle
motor fleet.
Policies are commonly available under these sub-headings.
A motor fleet policy provides cover for a number of different vehicles belonging to an individual
owner, eg a company. A small fleet might have five vehicles in it, a large fleet could have 500 or
more.
A motor fleet may extend beyond cars to include other types of commercial vehicle (eg lorries and
vans). In these cases, the fleets may be very heterogeneous.
Marine, aviation and goods in transit are often labelled as ‘MAT’: Marine, Aviation and
Transport.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
2.1 Benefits
The benefit is usually the amount needed to indemnify the insured against the value of the
loss or damage, subject to any limits or excesses.
Household buildings property
For buildings insurance, the benefit, by the principle of indemnity, will be the amount required to
fully reinstate the property, rather than the market value of the property.
The amount paid under the policy is usually the amount needed to restore it to its previous
condition, subject to any excess or deductible. Ancillary costs, such as the provision of
alternative accommodation while the insured property is uninhabitable, may also be
covered, but are not standard.
The policy will define precisely what is included within the definition of buildings. For example,
the fixtures and fittings, patio, drive, swimming pool, walls, garages, garden sheds, fences and
gates may all be included with the building covered by a household policy.
Household policies normally include insurance for liabilities arising from the insured
property.
For example, household insurance may also contain public liability cover in respect of the house.
Commercial buildings property
The cover is likely to be for the full value of the property, however, alternatively, it may be on a
first loss basis.
First loss is a form of insurance cover for which the chosen sum insured is restricted, with the
insurer’s agreement, to a figure less than the full reinstatement-as-new value of the property.
The insured therefore has to bear any loss in excess of the sum insured.
This may be appropriate in circumstances where:
the insured considers that a loss in excess of the sum insured is extremely unlikely
the item is effectively priceless, eg a stately home, for which there may be no possibility
of the building being reinstated
the insurance is against water damage (where only the ground floor areas may be
affected).
Moveable property
For buildings, the sum insured is based on the total cost of rebuilding the property. For contents,
it is based on the value of the contents.
The policy will define precisely what moveable property is covered by the insurance. For
example, under a household contents policy, the insured’s household goods and personal
possessions plus visitors’ personal effects may be covered.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 21
Household policies may have a number of extensions of cover, which may be optional or
may be used by companies to distinguish their own products; examples of these would
include food in a freezer spoiled during a power cut, pet insurance (which is also widely
available as a separate product), bicycles and the contents of sheds.
The amount paid on a claim can be:
the replacement value, which is the cost of a new item reduced to allow for the
depreciation on the lost item, or
on a ‘new for old’ basis, under which the cost of an equivalent brand new item is
provided.
The insurer may retain the right to provide a replacement item rather than provide monetary
compensation.
New for old cover would not be normal in commercial policies but is common in household
policies.
For commercial contents the cover is usually for pure indemnity, ie the full depreciated value of
the contents is covered. As with household insurance, the insurer may apply the principle of
average to scale down claim amounts in cases of underinsurance.
The effect of inflation
Insurers believe that, during times of high inflation, many policyholders become underinsured
because they fail to increase the total sum insured sufficiently from year to year. To help prevent
this, many insurers have introduced policies with automatic indexation of the sum insured. Each
year the level of cover is automatically increased in line with an appropriate inflation index. The
inflation index should reflect the increased cost in claims (eg an index of goods for contents and
an index of building cost inflation for buildings insurance). The indexation facility is detailed in the
escalation clause.
Motor property
The three main levels, or types, of cover usually available are:
(a) third party
(b) third party, fire and theft
(c) comprehensive.
However, in some countries there may be slightly differing levels of cover to this.
The most basic level is third party insurance described in Section 1. This basic level of cover is not
that commonly used.
The next level of cover is third party, fire and theft (TPF&T). This provides the same cover as third
party insurance plus:
losses or damage caused to the insured’s own vehicle from fire and/or theft.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
The highest level of cover is comprehensive. This gives the cover provided by third party, fire and
theft, and additionally:
accidental or malicious damage to the insured’s own car.
The maximum benefit is the depreciated value of the vehicle. In most cases of damage the
insurer will pay to have the vehicle repaired.
The vehicle is insured for its replacement value. However, if repair costs exceed the market value
of the vehicle at the time of an incident, it will be declared a complete ‘write-off’ and only the
second-hand market value at the time of the accident will be paid to the insured.
Comprehensive policies will also usually include cover for:
specific injuries to the insured and/or spouse, usually a defined payment (eg £2,500)
personal medical expenses (up to a defined amount, eg £150 per person)
the insured’s legal expenses in relation to any claim
loss or damage to personal effects that were in the car (up to a defined amount, eg £100)
replacement of locks after theft of the car
replacement / repair of broken windscreens.
Marine and aviation property
There is a wide variety of types of cover available for marine insurance risks. However, the
principal forms of insurance likely to be needed by a ship-owner are as follows:
loss of or damage to the craft (often called ‘hull insurance’)
loss of or damage to cargo (‘cargo insurance’ is for the actual contents, ‘freight’ covers the
money payable for shipment of the cargo).
In addition, other types of insurance cover could be included, such as:
compensation for loss of use of the craft
insurance against damage to a vessel still under construction.
In marine property insurance, definitions are used to define the extent of the loss. In particular,
the Marine Insurance Act defines actual total loss and constructive total loss.
Actual total loss is deemed to occur in one of three ways:
(1) the insured item is totally destroyed
(2) the item is so damaged that it can no longer be classed as the type of object
originally insured
(3) the insured is irretrievably deprived of the insured item.
Constructive total loss is where the insured abandons the insured item because an ‘actual
total loss’ is unavoidable or because the costs of preventing a total loss exceed the value
saved.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 23
Goods in transit
This is a commercial insurance cover against loss of or damage to goods whilst being transported
in vehicles specified in the policy (eg the company’s vehicles or perhaps also by a carrier). The
periods of loading and unloading are usually covered in addition to the journey. Losses due to
business interruption are not usually included and a special extension is usually required if
livestock are to be covered. The sum insured is likely to be the value of the goods.
Construction and engineering
Large construction and engineering projects can take up to five years (or longer), and the
associated policies will last until the end of the project. Since projects often overrun their
schedules the policies are usually extendible. A policy for a large project may continue for
some years after its completion to cover the late discovery of construction faults.
Since claims can arise over a number of years, and the value of the property under construction is
likely to vary significantly over the period, this is likely to have a material impact on claims
experience. CAR covers are adjustable for changes in the value of property and material, in
order to ensure that the cover continues to meet the insured’s needs.
Extended warranty
Extended warranty insurance covers losses arising from the need to replace or repair faulty
parts in a product (usually electrical goods, furniture or motor vehicles) beyond the
manufacturer’s normal warranty period. Policies may have a term of several years.
Crop insurance
This will indemnify the insured (eg a farmer or orchard owner) against losses to the crop due to
specified perils.
2.2 Insured perils
Household buildings property
In respect of buildings, fire is the principal peril insured against but policies can cover many
other perils such as explosion, lightning, theft, storm and flood.
Question
Explain why theft is listed as an insured peril on a buildings policy despite it being very unlikely
that someone will steal your house.
Solution
It refers to the damage done to buildings in the course of forced entry by thieves, eg windows
broken.
Subsidence is a peril that is commonly covered under household insurance.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
Subsidence has become a fairly big problem in the UK.
Damage to the insured property caused by measures taken to put out a fire is also covered.
More examples of perils covered are:
earthquake (not so important in the UK, but vital in many countries)
burst pipes (eg damage caused by water or oil leaking from pipes)
vandalism
impact (eg from falling branches, aircraft, cars, stampeding animals).
Commercial buildings property
Commercial buildings will be subject to the same sorts of perils as household buildings, eg fire,
explosion, lightning, theft, storm and flood.
Commercial property insurance is often referred to as ‘fire insurance’, but conventionally
covers other perils as well, such as weather-related losses and malicious damage. A
reference to ‘fire’ as an insurance class should not be taken to mean that the policy is
limited to fire risks unless the context clearly indicates that it is, but rather it should be
assumed to include other property damage perils.
‘All-risks’ policies are also common, especially for household policies; these cover all
causes of damage that are not explicitly excluded.
Moveable property
As with buildings insurance, the policy will set out the perils covered.
The most important perils covered under property insurance are fire and theft. Malicious
damage and damage arising from weather events are usually covered. Accidental damage
is often provided under household policies, but often as an optional extra.
Motor property
The perils include accidental or malicious damage to the insured vehicle, and fire or theft of
that vehicle.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 25
Marine and aviation property
The following perils relate specifically to marine hull cover, but similar perils are covered for
marine cargo and aviation insurance:
perils of the seas (or other navigable waters)
fire
explosion
jettison
piracy
sinking
damage etc.
Other sections included under marine property include:
energy (offshore, onshore and construction)
liability (third party property)
specie (more valuable items in transit)
war.
It should be noted that the traditional definition of marine insurance is anything that a
seagull can fly over.
Goods in transit
Damage, loss and theft are the main perils for goods in transit.
Construction
The main insured perils are damage, destruction, design defect, faulty parts and failure to
finish the construction project.
Engineering
Machinery breakdown, explosion and electronic failure are the main insured perils.
Extended warranty
The main peril is faulty manufacture.
Crop insurance
The main perils include disease, fire and weather-related perils (such as storms or drought).
2.3 Basis for cover
Property damage insurance is likely to be written on a losses-occurring basis.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
2.4 Measure of exposure to which premiums are related
Household property (buildings and contents)
For household property the exposure is frequently measured in sum insured years: the sum
for which a property is insured multiplied by the period at risk.
The sum insured should be the cost of rebuilding the property should it be destroyed,
including the clearing away of debris. This is usually less than the market value of the
property, since the value of the land itself is not normally impaired by the destruction of the
building and the loss of the land, such as through coastal erosion, is not normally an
insured risk.
It is generally accepted that the bigger the property, the greater the total amount of risk.
Exposure measures are therefore linked to the size of the property. The most commonly used
exposure measure, sum insured per year, can be used for both buildings and contents.
Other measures of the size of the risk have been used. For example, some insurers have used
number of bedrooms for both buildings and contents. The logic behind this is that both the
rebuilding costs and the value of contents are a function of the number of bedrooms.
Question
List the perils that might be covered by a home contents insurance policy.
Solution
fire, lightning, explosion, earthquake
storm, flood
burst pipes
theft, vandalism, civil commotion
subsidence or land heave
impact (eg from falling trees, aircraft)
damage caused by measures to put out a fire
accidental damage
Commercial property (buildings and contents)
For commercial property as with household property, the measure of exposure is usually
the sum insured year.
The sum insured should cover the full value of the property, unless first loss cover is
intended.
The sum insured for buildings should reflect the cost of rebuilding, not the market value.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 27
However, the sum insured year is complicated for two reasons:
The amounts of stock held may vary considerably over the period of the insurance.
Hence the stock may be covered on a declaration basis, determined retrospectively
with an adjustment premium.
There is no standard way of allowing for inflation in the policy. Hence policies with
different types of inflation treatment need to be considered separately to determine
the exposure.
However, the premium for large commercial property policies will often be determined by
reference to the maximum amount that the underwriter believes could feasibly be lost in a
single incident, either because complete destruction is an event so remote that it need not
be provided against or else because the policy covers a number of properties, sufficiently
far apart that the possibility of damage to more than one in a single incident is remote. This
amount is known variously as the estimated maximum loss (EML) or probable maximum
loss (PML).
Virtually every commercial property is unique, at least in respect of location, use, size and
construction. It is, therefore, almost impossible to group them in a homogeneous manner.
Motor property
For motor insurance, vehicle-miles would probably be the best measure of exposure for
damage claims, as the chance of an accident depends on the extent to which the vehicle will
be used. However it will be difficult to verify miles travelled as stated by the proposer.
Therefore the measure usually used is the vehicle-year, which has the advantage of ease of
calculation.
A motor policy that insures one vehicle for one year is exposed for one vehicle-year.
For a motor fleet, the amount of exposure will probably not be available in advance, since the
number of vehicles in the fleet may change during the year. At the end of the year an adjustment
will be made to the premium for the year just gone to reflect the number of vehicles actually
insured.
Example
Several motor insurers in the UK have launched a ‘Pay as you drive’ motor insurance product
under which policyholders have a ‘black box’ installed in their vehicle, which logs the details of
their journeys – in particular, the distance driven and the time of day.
Policyholders are charged a fixed basic monthly premium, based on the standard motor insurance
rating factors (such as age and vehicle make and model) plus a variable monthly premium based
on information provided by the black box. Lower premiums are charged to those with low
mileage clocked up during daylight hours.
Using actual mileage as a measure of exposure (for the variable part of the premium) has led to
significant premium reductions for many customers.
Marine and aviation property
For marine property, the insured value of the hull or the value of the cargo might be used as
exposure measures.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
Similarly, for aviation, the insured value of the aircraft or the value of the goods carried
might be used. Alternatively the number of take-offs and landings may be used as this is
when most losses occur.
Goods in transit
The consignment value is most commonly used. Specific types of cover can exist, for
example, relating to specie (high-value items), fine art, jewellery and so on.
Construction
The value of the contract may be used as an exposure measure.
Engineering
The sum insured value or value of the contract may be used as an exposure measure.
For both engineering and construction, the risk is not uniform along the timeline of the
project. For example, if the site is destroyed by a storm at the start of the project, little may
be lost. Whereas, just before completion, the value of the loss will be much higher (tending
towards the rebuild value). During the rating process, the risk profile will be taken into
account and a percentage rate will be loaded for this, before it is applied to the exposure
measure.
Extended warranty
The number of appliances, or appliance-years (number of appliances times number of
years), could be used as an exposure measure.
Crop insurance
Possible exposure measures include the value of crops, processed food or the sum insured.
2.5 Claim characteristics
Property claims are generally reported and paid quickly compared to liability claims.
Losses arise from incidents that are observed at the time and the value of the loss is usually
straightforward to establish. There are exceptions, and the reinstatement of a major
industrial plant after a major incident can be a long project, but generally the property
damage classes are among the shorter-tailed classes of insurance. Comments are included
below where there are specific features to note.
Household and commercial property
The event giving rise to a claim for damage to buildings or contents usually occurs
suddenly (as for fire or burglary) and the cause is easily determinable.
Notification is then also made promptly and a reasonably good estimate of the claim
amount can be made. (Subsidence claims are an exception to this.)
Settlement is in many cases by a single payment but larger claims can take longer and may
be settled with intermediate payments as the building project to repair or replace the
building proceeds. Delays may be greater, however, where it is necessary to verify the
value of stock held in a commercial property.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 29
Domestic property claims will tend to be fairly consistent in size and distribution, with a
small number of larger, total loss claims and occasional liability losses. Commercial
property claims have similar features, although they tend to have a more scattered cost
distribution, owing to the singular nature of the properties insured.
These classes are the ones that are most exposed to moral hazard.
Question
Explain the difference between ‘indemnity’ and ‘replacement’ cover. Justify which one would
expose the insurer to the greater risk of fraudulent claims.
Solution
Indemnity cover the insurer compensates the insured for the value of items as at the date
of loss.
Replacement cover the insurer pays for new replacement items.
The risk of fraudulent claims will be greater with replacement cover. Having shelled out their
(admittedly higher) premium, policyholders with replacement cover have more to gain from such
claims, eg it may save them going shopping to buy a new TV to replace their 20 year old set.
There is also the risk of exposure to catastrophes, for example after severe storms or
floods.
Question
List three other examples of how a household insurance portfolio could be exposed to
accumulations.
Solution
Subsidence, fire, explosions.
Motor property
Claims for damage to the insured’s vehicle are usually reported and settled quickly.
Claims for damage to the property of third parties may take slightly longer to settle than claims
for damage to the property of the insured.
There may be some delay in settling property claims while the liability for settlement is
established. Generally, delays for settlement of property claims should be in weeks or months
rather than years.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
As you might know from bitter personal experience, motor claims have a relatively high
frequency. The average claim frequency for different insurers will depend very much on the type
of business they write. As a rough indicator, many insurers will have claim frequencies of about
25% on a comprehensive portfolio, ie 1 claim for each 4 vehicles each year. Claim frequencies for
a non-comprehensive portfolio may typically be about 15%.
In general, private motor insurance does not give rise to extreme accumulations. Because
business is sold nationally, an insurer is unlikely to have a concentration of risks in one
geographical area.
Question
Suggest differences between the claims characteristics of a motor fleet portfolio compared with a
private motor portfolio.
Solution
The motor fleet claim frequency will be higher. Claim frequencies of 40% or more (per vehicle-
year) are not unusual on fleet policies. Fleet cars tend to be driven long distances by a variety of
drivers, some of whom may not be totally familiar with the vehicles they are driving. Some
people with company cars might also think ‘it’s only a company car so …’.
Many motor fleets will be subject to greater accumulations of risk than exists for private motor
insurance, eg vehicles may regularly be parked in the same place.
Marine and aviation property
Among the claim characteristics for this business, the following are important:
Claims are usually reported as soon as the vessel reaches a major port (or indeed
the event might take place in port) and reporting delays may be very long after the
initial occurrence of the incident.
The insured is likely to notify the insurer of an incident having taken place fairly quickly.
However repairs may be deferred until the vessel is scheduled for its next refit, when the
full extent of the damage and the likely costs incurred will be reported to the insurer. This
could be months, or even years later, so the delay before all information is received could
be significant.
Settlement delays might be long if there is a dispute over legal liability or the amount
that should be paid.
Minor damage is often repaired when the vessel goes into dock for routine
maintenance.
Claim amounts can vary from relatively small amounts for minor hull damage to
small vessels to very large amounts in respect of the complete loss of a large vessel
and its cargo.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 31
Accumulations of risk are quite possible with marine insurance:
Geographical concentration would make an insurer exposed to the possibility of lots of
claims arising from one incident. Storms or tidal waves could affect many ships in one
harbour. A good example of this would be where an insurer sells lots of policies to a
particular yacht club and a severe storm then damages all the yachts.
If a ship spills hazardous material in a populated coastal area, there may be many liability
claims.
Goods in transit
There may be reporting delays if claims are not reported until vehicles or vessels reach their
destination. However, these generally amount to months rather than years.
Construction and engineering
Property claims can generally be reported and settled quickly, although as with other
classes serious damage may take a relatively long time to repair. Liability claims will take
longer to settle as liability needs to be established before amounts of loss can be
determined. However, the claims from a single underwriting year can take many years to
emerge because of the long-term nature of the policies and the fact that policies often cover
a multi-year contract period.
It may be hard to determine the date of loss for a construction policy.
Extended warranty
Claim costs are fairly uniform by product, as they are related to the cost of the original
product. Where repairs are covered, there is a risk of multiple repairs being needed, which
may increase the claim cost above the original price of the goods.
Claims can arise because a proportion of goods sold turns out to have been faulty, which
may be stable, or there could be a large number of claims caused by a defective product
design. This would add some volatility to the reporting patterns.
Crop insurance
Most claims will be reported at the end of the growing season, although some may be notified
during the season. Most claims will be settled quickly, ie very soon after the growing season.
Claims size will be related to the size of farms insured. The claim frequency is likely to be low in
most years.
There will be significant accumulations of claims from adverse weather conditions / pest
epidemics. Accumulations might occur from the same geographic region or type of crop.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
2.6 Risk factors and rating factors
Household property (buildings and contents)
A measure of the scale of the risk (for example the amount of sum insured or number of
rooms) is the key risk factor. The remaining principal risk factor is location because such
risks as theft, subsidence and flooding vary by location.
In this class many risk factors have been used as rating factors. Regression analysis has
shown their suitability to differentiate between levels of risk.
Common rating factors include:
sum insured
number of rooms
location
the voluntary or compulsory use of excesses
whether there is any business use of the property
whether the policyholder owns or rents the property
if the property is normally unoccupied during the day
whether it is a house or flat or some other construction
type and standard of construction
age of the building
type of locks and/or burglar alarms fitted.
This might seem like enough but there are many more that are frequently used, for example:
whether smoke alarms have been fitted
high risk contents
type of cover (‘new for old’ or indemnity)
family composition
smoker / non-smoker
type of heating
age of policyholder.
By using a no-claim discount or other experience-rating system the insurer may be able to
make an adjustment for any other influences on the level of risk. This is, however,
comparatively rare in household insurance.
It is important to realise that the rating factors used may vary by country. For example, in
countries where the risk of burglary is relatively high, the insurer may ask prospective
policyholders if the windows of the property are barred, or if the homeowner is a member of an
armed response unit. (This is an armed unit that would come to the property in an emergency to
try to prevent the burglary and ensure that the residents were safe.)
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 33
Question
Consider the rating factor ‘whether the property is normally unoccupied during the day’. Justify
whether this affects the claim frequency or the claim severity or both.
Solution
It affects the claim frequency because a house that is unoccupied during the day is more likely to
be burgled than an occupied house. Also, a fire is less likely to be noticed at an early stage and be
put out to prevent a claim being made.
It also affects the claim severity. Burglars will have more time to steal more items, increasing the
claim size. A fire may have more time to spread and cause more damage. Also a burst water pipe
will cause more damage if not noticed and stopped immediately.
There may also be an impact on perils other than theft and fire.
Commercial property
Apart from the monetary value of the property and the surveyor’s report of the property, the
trade or business is the key risk factor.
Regression analysis has shown that the following rating factors might also be taken into
account:
estimated maximum loss
age of building
fire protection equipment
construction type
excesses
location of building
hazardous materials.
The estimated maximum loss is the largest loss that is reasonably expected to arise from a single
event. This may well be less than either the market value or the replacement value of the insured
property and is used as an exposure measure in rating certain classes of business.
For larger risks, the underwriters will take into account further factors:
qualitative impressions: the nature of adjacent buildings, how well the company is run
(there will be less risk in a tightly-managed factory with disciplined procedures)
previous claims experience, especially with smaller claims (large claims are so rare that
past experience of them is unlikely to be credible).
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
Motor property
Motor insurance is a good example of a class of insurance where possible risk factors can
be identified, but it is generally difficult to regard them as meeting the criteria needed to use
them as rating factors.
For example the following are all risk factors:
the number of miles driven
the density of the traffic where the car is driven
the ability of the driver
the speed at which the vehicle is usually driven and its general level of performance
the ease with which the vehicle can be damaged and the cost of repairing it
the theft risk
the weight of the vehicle
the fire risk.
These are generally not all measurable or quantifiable statistics.
Therefore, the insurer cannot depend on information on these risks received from the
policyholder as there is considerable scope for the policyholder to stretch the truth in his or
her favour or be too subjective about his or her own skills.
However, at the time of writing, there is in many countries a gradual increase in the use of
telematics, whereby the driving behaviour and other factors can be monitored through the
use of a black box installed in the insured vehicle. This makes some of the above factors
measurable, and the results can be used to help price the policy.
The term ‘black box’ here doesn’t refer to a box that is necessarily black (although it might be). As
explained earlier, it is a device or system that is placed in a motor vehicle to monitor the way in
which the vehicle is driven. It can measure speed, acceleration, braking, etc as well as monitoring
exactly when and where the vehicle is driven. It’s called a black box because we will generally
know very little about its inner workings.
Question
Suggest some other risk factors for motor insurance that can also be used as rating factors.
Solution
type of cover
excess
value of the car and its contents (eg car stereo)
Type of cover is the most important rating factor, as varying the type of cover can exclude
an entire class of claims.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 35
For example, third party cover will not include any claims for accidental damage to the insured’s
own vehicle.
Policy excess is also an important rating factor as it too will affect claim sizes.
Many small claims may be eliminated altogether leading to a reduction in claim frequency and
expense savings.
An excess may be compulsory (for example for a young driver) or optional to secure a
reduction in the premium. Typically insurers will offer proposers a choice of excess levels.
Other rating factors are proxies for those risk factors for which direct information is
unreliable. These include:
the use to which the vehicle is put (eg for business use)
the age of the vehicle
the occupation of the policyholder and other drivers
whether there are additional drivers of the vehicle as well as the policyholder
sex (gender) of main driver (note that current European regulations ban sex as a
rating factor)
age of policyholder and other drivers
whether or not driving is restricted to certain named drivers
make and model of vehicle
the extent of any modification to the engine or body
location of policyholder (eg postal code)
where the vehicle is kept overnight: on the road / on a driveway / in a garage etc
whether or not the driver has any driving convictions
past experience.
Question
State the risk factors for which the age of the policyholder and the address of the policyholder are
proxies.
Solution
Age of policyholder:
the ability of the driver (very young drivers tend to be more accident prone)
the number of miles driven (some age groups tend to drive more than others)
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
Address of the policyholder:
the density of the traffic where the car is driven
the number of miles driven
the theft risk
For fleet motor, the rating factors detailed above, other than those that apply to individual
drivers, are relevant. The important factors will be:
types of vehicles
type of cover
level of excess
types of use and goods carried.
Age of driver, used for private motor, would not be practical for anything other than the smallest
fleets. Insurers make use of the fleet’s own claims experience. In simple terms, the larger the
fleet, the more weight the insurer will put on the fleet’s own claims experience when setting
premiums.
For many larger fleets, experience rating will take the form of a profit-sharing arrangement,
whereby the insured receives a refund, if claims experience is good, or pays a further premium, if
claims experience is poor, at the year end.
Marine and aviation property
The main risk factors for marine and aviation property are the size, type and age of the craft
or vessel and the nature of the cargo.
There are no definitive rating factors. Factors used might well depend on the rating factors
deemed appropriate for any associated marine liability cover.
Important factors will usually include:
the type and value of the craft
the scope of the voyages
the areas covered or the destination
the number and experience of the crew
previous claims experience.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 37
Goods in transit
The main rating factors are:
mode of transport
nature of goods
type of storage used (for example refrigerated)
time period of transit and number of stages
length of time spent at warehouse.
Construction and engineering
The main rating factors are:
type of project (for example, block of flats, airport, tunnel)
term of project
contracting firm
materials and technologies used
location of project.
Extended warranty
The premium will depend on the:
make and model of the item being covered
the length of the manufacturer’s guarantee
the term of the warranty.
Crop insurance
Rating factors used may include:
type and mix of crops grown
geographical region
size of the farms
availability / method of irrigation
pest control techniques used
level of excess
claims history
sum insured.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 38 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
3 Financial loss
Financial loss insurance can be categorised as follows:
fidelity guarantee
credit insurance
creditor insurance
business interruption cover, also known as consequential loss
legal expenses cover.
3.1 Benefits
The benefit provided is indemnity against financial losses arising from a peril covered by
the policy.
Fidelity guarantee insurance
Fidelity guarantee covers the insured against financial losses caused by dishonest actions
of its employees (fraud or embezzlement). These will include loss of money or goods
owned by the insured or for which the insured is responsible and reasonable fees incurred
in establishing the size of the loss (paid to auditors or accountants, for example).
Fraud is wrongful or criminal deception intended to result in financial or personal gain.
To embezzle is to steal or misappropriate money or other assets placed in one’s trust or under
one’s control.
Credit insurance
Credit insurance covers a creditor against the risk that debtors will not pay their
obligations. The principal types are:
trade credit
mortgage indemnity.
Trade credit may cover uncollectible debts and be sold on an annual basis; cover may also
be for the length of a project, for example a ship built for a customer who does not pay for it
at the end of construction.
Mortgage indemnity covers the lender (mortgagee) in a mortgage loan against the risk of the
borrower (mortgagor) defaulting and the value of the property on which the loan is secured
not being sufficient to repay the loan. These policies may last for the duration of the
mortgage and have terms of many years.
The perils leading to default are not specified under credit insurance, so non-payment for any
reason is covered. Claim payments are usually single lump sums.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 39
When a lender (eg a building society) provides a mortgage to an individual for house purchase,
the lender will be worried that:
the borrower may default on the interest payments
in taking possession of the property, the proceeds from the sale of the property may be
insufficient to cover the amount of the mortgage and outstanding interest.
Mortgage indemnity insurance protects the mortgage lender against the risk that the borrower
defaults on the loan and a loss is made by the lender.
Where the amount of mortgage is low in relation to the value of the property, the lender should
be quite relaxed because the sale proceeds will almost certainly cover the mortgage and interest.
However, where the mortgage is a large percentage of the property value, then the lender will
want a mortgage guarantee insurance policy to protect against the risk described above.
Typically, lenders require this insurance when the mortgage exceeds 75% of the valuation of the
property at purchase. The lender takes out the policy and then sometimes makes the borrower
pay the insurance premiums. With most insurance policies, the beneficiary of the policy cover
pays the premiums. Mortgage guarantee is unusual in this respect because sometimes the
borrower pays the premiums but the lender is the beneficiary.
Question
Explain the unusual features of mortgage indemnity insurance compared to other insurance
classes.
Solution
The policy is usually single premium but the cover may last for say 25 years. The policy is of no
direct benefit to the person often paying the premium, ie the borrower. In other words the
beneficiary of any claim is the lender.
The risk of a claim is closely linked to the economic cycle, with its impact on interest rates and
employment levels.
The claim amount is the difference between the resale value of the property and the amount of
the loan outstanding, including any interest due. This should reduce over time, although this also
depends heavily on economic conditions (eg house prices).
Creditor insurance
Creditor insurance provides cover to insureds who are subject to obligations to repay credit
advances or debt. Most policies are made to individuals to cover personal loans, mortgage
loans or credit card debts.
The cover is usually against disability and unemployment, on the basis that these perils
may prevent the insured getting an income. The policy will pay the regular loan payments
until the borrower is recovered or obtains new work or until the loan is fully repaid or a
maximum number of payments made.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 40 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
Creditor insurance for personal loans and credit cards is normally sold alongside an
associated life assurance policy that will repay the whole outstanding balance of the loan if
the insured borrower dies.
Creditor insurance is also known as payment protection insurance (PPI).
Business interruption cover
The financial consequences of a fire to a company can be much more significant than the cost of
repairs to premises. If the company’s production lines are hit, income from customers will be
much reduced until alternative production arrangements can be made. If this income stream was
being used to pay off loans from a bank, the accumulating interest charges can put further
financial strain on the company.
Business interruption cover indemnifies the insured against losses made as a result of not
being able to conduct business.
Methods used to achieve this need to take account of the following factors:
Turnover will drop off dramatically after a major fire, but will (hopefully) start to build up
again as soon as production facilities can be restarted.
When the policy is taken out, the proposer will need to assess how long it would take to
rebuild the business in the event of a major disaster. This period will then be specified in
the policy, and is known as the indemnity period. The insured will then be indemnified for
loss of profit over this period.
Profit will depend on the proportions of fixed and variable costs incurred by the business.
Additional temporary costs may also be incurred as a result of the fire.
Assessing what the turnover figure would have been without the fire will also have to take
account of:
– any inherent seasonal variation in the business
– any organic growth (or shrinkage) in the business itself.
A fixed sum insured per day will normally be specified in the policy and the insured will
receive this until the property can be occupied again or until the term specified in the policy
has expired. There is usually a minimum period before a claim can be made. This cover is
also known as consequential loss and loss of profits.
Question
Define suretyship.
Solution
The Glossary defines suretyship to be a product ‘that provides a guarantee of performance or for
the financial commitments of the insured’.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 41
It is a specialised class of insurance where one party (known as the surety) guarantees the
performance of an obligation by another party (the insured). There are three parties to the
agreement:
1) the party that undertakes the obligation
2) the surety that guarantees that the obligation will be fulfilled
3) the obligee, who receives the benefit of the surety bond.
It is therefore a form of financial guarantee, although, unlike ‘normal’ insurance the party that
undertakes the obligation still retains the risk, because it’s the obligee that gets the benefit.
This product is not covered in detail by the Core Reading, however the examiners frequently use
uncommon or specialised classes of business as a basis for exam questions. Therefore it’s a good
idea to read a little about unusual classes whenever you come across them. For more information
about suretyship, you can visit:
http://smallbusiness.chron.com/definition-surety-insurance-43269.html .
Legal expenses cover
Legal expenses cover indemnifies the insured against legal expenses incurred as a result
of:
legal proceedings being initiated against the insured
the need for the insured to initiate proceedings.
Legal expenses policies will normally cover the payments made to legal representatives.
Personal legal expenses insurance is often sold as an optional add-on to a household policy.
Commercial legal expenses insurance can be sold as a stand-alone policy or as an add-on to a
policy such as employers’ liability or commercial property.
Such policies might cover legal expenses associated with a neighbourly dispute (personal) or
defending against a consumer complaint in respect of goods and services provided (commercial).
3.2 Insured perils
For financial risks the insured perils will depend on the precise cover. The perils might
include:
dishonest actions by employees (fidelity guarantee)
failure of third parties specified in the policy (credit)
accident or sickness resulting in loss of income with which to repay debt (creditor)
fire at the insured’s own property (business interruption cover)
fire at a neighbouring premises causing loss of access to own property (business
interruption cover)
legal proceedings being brought against the insured (legal expenses cover).
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 42 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
Business interruption cover is normally sold in conjunction with property insurance and will
cover the same perils: fire, weather losses and so on, and the business interruption claim
will follow a property damage claim.
3.3 Basis for cover
Financial loss insurance is likely to be written on a losses-occurring basis.
Legal expenses insurance is sometimes written on a basis combining losses-occurring and
claims-made. Claims must both occur and be reported within the policy period.
3.4 Measure of exposure to which premiums are related
Fidelity guarantee and credit insurance
For fidelity guarantee and credit insurance, the measure of exposure will depend on the
precise cover provided.
A possible, though imperfect, measure of exposure for mortgage indemnity guarantee
insurance is the excess of the amount of the loan over a certain percentage of the value of
the property.
This defined percentage is often referred to as the ‘normal advance’.
For example, if premium rates were £5 per £100 above the normal advance, a borrower had a
mortgage for £132,000 and the normal advance was £114,000 (75% of the property valuation of
£152,000), then the premium would be £900.
Creditor insurance
The exposure measure for creditor insurance on personal loans is normally the amount of
the loan or the total amount repayable. On a mortgage it will be the insured monthly benefit.
On a credit card it will normally be the outstanding balance at the latest monthly statement
date.
Business interruption cover
The exposure measure for consequential loss is the annual profit or turnover.
Obviously this cannot be known in advance so adjustment premiums are common.
The amount payable in the event of complete cessation of the business will normally be set
out in the policy. This should be set so that the insured has an incentive to get the
business running again as soon as possible.
Legal expenses cover
The number of policyholders or policyholder years are possible exposure measures for
legal expenses insurance.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 43
3.5 Claim characteristics
Financial loss insurance covers a wide variety of risks that can give rise to a financial loss.
Frequency and claim cost distributions tend to vary by class, but in general these risks tend
to be short tailed, even if the policies concerned have relatively long terms for general
insurance.
Fidelity guarantee insurance
It may take time to discover that there has been fraudulent behaviour by employees, so there
may be reporting delays for fidelity guarantee insurance. Settlement delays could be significant,
as it may take time to establish the size of the loss (including the resulting fees, eg to auditors).
The potential size of fidelity guarantee insurance claims could be large (especially for large
companies), however claim sizes may also depend on the level of regulation in the territory.
Credit insurance
The claims experience on mortgage indemnity guarantee insurance depends heavily on
economic factors, as was illustrated in the UK in the early 1990s when some insurers
incurred severe losses on this type of business.
Question
Suggest which economic factors claims experience is likely to depend on and how will it vary with
them.
Solution
Claims experience is likely to depend on:
interest rates – higher interest rates are more likely to lead to defaults on mortgage
payments (for variable rate mortgages)
house prices – falling house prices might lead to negative equity; if the insurer is forced to
take possession of the property, then the property value may be insufficient to cover the
amount of the mortgage and any outstanding interest
rising unemployment – individuals may be unable to afford mortgage payments.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 44 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
Creditor insurance
Creditor insurance claims will normally be a series of payments made until the insured
recovers or the limit on payments is reached:
The payments on personal loan policies will be the monthly repayment specified in
the loan agreement; these loans are normally made on a rate of interest that does
not vary after the loan is taken out.
The monthly benefit on mortgage policies is normally a set amount selected by the
insured when he or she takes the policy out and linked to the monthly repayment,
although it may sometimes be varied if interest rates change.
The monthly benefit on a credit card policy is usually the minimum monthly payment
on the balance as at the monthly statement date preceding the claim.
The frequency of claims depends on factors such as the rate of unemployment (higher if
there is a recession) and the likelihood of policyholders becoming sick or having accidents.
Business interruption cover
For business interruption cover claims, the reporting delays are directly linked to any
associated property claim. Settlement, however, is likely to be slower than for property
claims, owing to the greater need for verification, although once a loss is established
payments can be made regularly.
3.6 Risk factors and rating factors
The risk factors and rating factors for financial loss depend on the cover provided and the
nature of the policy.
Fidelity guarantee and credit insurance
Fidelity guarantee and trade credit are commercial policies that will be individually
underwritten, and the nature of the business and the size of the sums at risk will be taken
into account.
Mortgage indemnity insurance premium is usually based on the amount of loan in excess of
a certain proportion of the value of the property and will take into account the quality of loan
underwriting by the lender.
With mortgage indemnity insurance, in practice insurers do not incorporate the circumstances of
the individual borrower into the rating structure. They rely upon the lender to be prudent in
granting mortgages.
Also, the effect of house price falls will be factored into the premium rates on a global basis rather
than different rates for different houses.
The term of the mortgage might be used for rating. Otherwise, standard rates will apply for all
policies issued through particular mortgage lenders.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 45
Creditor insurance
Creditor insurance cover for personal loans is usually provided at a fixed price percentage
of the amount lent or the total amount repayable. Premium rates will vary with the term of
the personal loan. The premium will either be paid as a single amount at the start of the
loan (in which case it is usually financed as an addition to the loan) or as a monthly addition
to the repayment, in which case it will also be covered by the insurance.
The premium for mortgage cover is a proportion of the insured monthly benefit, payable
each month.
The monthly premium for credit card cover will be a proportion of the outstanding balance.
No allowance is made for the profile of the individual being covered.
In reality, the risk factors include:
age
sex (note that current European regulations ban sex as a rating factor)
employment status
occupation
state of health
amount of monthly benefit.
When setting the premium rates for a lender’s business the underwriter will consider the
composition of the lender‘s book of business in relation to these variables.
Business interruption cover
The risk and rating factors are likely to be similar to those for commercial property damage
insurance. Depending on the exposure measure, annual profits and/or turnover may also be
used.
The insurer may also want to incorporate the insured company’s dependence on the economic
cycle into the rating process, since companies that are dependent on the economy will face
significantly larger (smaller) claim sizes during a boom (recession).
Legal expenses cover
For legal expenses, the rating is normally based on the sum insured.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 46 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
4 Fixed benefits
Fixed benefit claims arise under personal accident insurance.
A personal accident contract may specify an amount to pay in the event of the insured suffering
the loss of a limb, £50,000 for losing an arm, for instance. It is very hard to quantify the value of
the loss of a limb and so a fixed benefit is provided.
There are also other fixed benefits insurance products, examples of which are described below.
4.1 Benefits
Personal accident cover
Benefits are usually specified fixed amounts in the event that an insured party (this may
include the policyholder’s family as well as the policyholder) suffers the loss of one or more
limbs or other specified injury, or accidental death. This is not indemnity insurance
because it is not possible to quantify the value of the loss, for instance, of an arm.
Cover may be offered on a group basis by an employer to all employees. Alternatively /
additionally, it might be combined with a sickness policy.
An individual is usually assumed to have an unlimited financial interest in his or her own
life, and this may be extended to personal injury, although an insurer should take care to
avoid moral hazard by granting large sums insured for relatively minor injuries.
Example
An individual is fairly unlikely to risk his life just because he is safe in the knowledge that death
will lead to a life insurance payout. Similarly, an individual is unlikely to take less care in a
particular activity and risk losing a limb. However, loss of a finger or toe might be considered to
be minor and so an individual may not take as much care not to lose one of these, especially given
that it might lead to an insurance payout of several thousand pounds.
Often a policyholder will be able to select his or her level of cover, which will be paid in full
if he or she suffers the complete loss of or loss of use of a major limb or permanent total
disablement. Often there is a reducing scale of benefits, known as a continental scale, for
lesser injuries, in which each specified injury is worth a set proportion of the full sum
insured.
Policies such as this are often sold as units of sum insured; for example a unit might be
£25,000 and the policyholder may select a number of units of cover, up to a maximum.
Other fixed benefits cover
Fixed benefits may also be granted for periods of disability through accident or injury or for
periods of hospitalisation. In this case the benefit is usually a fixed amount per day, week
or month until recovery, possibly after a waiting period for benefit.
4.2 Insured perils
Here the perils are any form of accident that results in the loss of limbs or other specified
injury.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 47
For example, some motor policies cover fixed personal accident benefits to the policyholder in
respect of injuries arising from the peril of motor accidents caused by the policyholder.
4.3 Basis for cover
Personal accident insurance will typically be written on a losses-occurring basis.
4.4 Measure of exposure to which premiums are related
For personal accident insurance the true measure of exposure is the person-year multiplied
by the sum insured.
This is because the cover is defined in relation to the level of cover normally required by one
person. However, in many cases, the member-year or employee-year may be all that is available.
In other words, if family members are covered under the group or individual plan then ideally we
would need more details of these members to calculate the exposure measure. However, in
practice this is often not available and so member-year is used instead.
The insurance may cover the whole family at a standard rate but the insurer may or may not be
made aware of the number of family members. The insurer charges a rate assuming an average
family unit size and, hopefully, gets it right on average.
Question
Describe the risk that the insurer will be exposed to as a result of using a standard rate to cover
the whole family.
Solution
The insurer will be exposed to the risk of selection. The policy might only be attractive to large
families. This would particularly be the case if other insurers do use the actual family details in
the rating process. The insurer would usually market the policy very carefully to minimise the
selection risk.
For group policies the number of people covered by a policy may need to be adjusted at the
year-end and the premium adjusted in line with their risk characteristics.
Under personal accident insurance if policyholders can select more than one unit of sum insured,
this too will need to be reflected in the exposure.
For group schemes, where the scale of benefits is linked to salaries, the exposure measure is often
the sum insured or total salaries.
4.5 Claim characteristics
Claims are usually reported quickly. The incidence of an event is usually very clear (so
reducing reporting delays), although with accidental death claims the insured’s dependants
may not always know the policy exists and may discover their entitlement after an extended
period.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 48 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
The claims may be settled quickly, although if a claim is for permanent total disability it may
be necessary to wait some years for a claimant’s condition to stabilise. As the claim cost is
known for these claims the settlement delays are reduced.
As well as paying out on specified injuries, many personal accident policies will make a payment if
the insured is ‘permanently and totally disabled’. It may, however, take several months or years
before establishing that this is the case for these claims.
The claim frequency tends to be reasonably stable.
Claims can be large: cover of several hundred thousand pounds per person is not
uncommon.
4.6 Risk factors and rating factors
Apart from sum insured, the prime factor affecting the risk is usually occupation. Those
employed in more dangerous occupations such as demolition work will certainly need to be
distinguished from those in safer occupations such as clerical work.
Other factors may be:
age – age is not usually a major determinant of risk until old age is reached, and this
cover is not normally sold to the elderly
sex – sex may be a factor: women tend to be less prone to accidents than men.
Note: current European regulations ban sex as a rating factor.
health condition may also be a determinant of risk– those in worse health may be higher
risk than average
dangerous pastimes – those following hazardous hobbies may also be higher risk
than average.
The rating factors are the same as the risk factors, because they can all be measured.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 49
5 How policies may be combined
5.1 Motor insurance policies
Recall that motor insurance cover may be for:
third party liability, or
property damage.
However, it is common for motor liability cover and cover for damage to the vehicle to be
provided in a single policy.
Example
In the UK, a motor policy that provides cover for liability and damage to the vehicle from all
perils including accident is known as ‘comprehensive’. In some other European countries it
is common for motor liability and damage policies to be provided separately.
Recall that the main perils for motor insurance are:
accidental or malicious damage to the insured vehicle
fire or theft to the insured vehicle.
In many countries, including the UK, this cover is typically provided together with motor
third party cover within a single policy, whilst in other countries it may be provided in a
separate policy.
For example, in some states in Australia, the three main types of policy are broadly similar to the
UK:
third party property damage
third party fire and theft
comprehensive.
However, none of the options include third party bodily injury claims. This is split into a separate
category and is sometimes insured by the state with the premiums forming part of the annual
registration fee.
Motor policies will usually also include public liability cover. A motor policy may also include
personal accident cover.
5.2 Marine and aviation policies
Aviation policies will usually also include public liability cover.
Commercial marine policies, however, usually exclude public liability cover, which is provided by
Protection and Indemnity Clubs.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 50 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
Marine and aviation are often considered separately from other forms of insurance because of
their wide range of cover, the other peculiarities they demonstrate and because historically,
market practice has been to deal with them separately. However, the types of cover are
essentially the same as for other forms of transport such as land vehicles.
5.3 Buildings and contents insurance policies
Household property insurance
Household policies are often sold as a package, covering both buildings and contents.
One advantage of this is that the separation between the two is sometimes not entirely
clear: which fixed items are part of the fabric of the property and which are contents?
However, tenants are not normally responsible for arranging buildings insurance and will
need only contents insurance.
Public liability cover may also be included in such policies. Buildings and contents insurance are
also provided as separate contracts.
Commercial property insurance
Small businesses are conventionally covered by ‘package’ policies, which include
buildings, contents and liability insurance. They may also include business interruption.
5.4 Contractors’ All Risks (CAR) policies
Construction risks are typically insured under a contractors’ all risks (CAR) policy. This will
include the contractor’s liability for losses caused to third parties.
The principle of ‘all risks’ policies is to cover all perils not specifically excluded. Examples of
possible exclusions for a CAR policy include:
liability to employees working on the project (as this would often be covered by a
separate employers’ liability policy)
damage to the work-in-progress resulting from faulty workmanship
damage to any property which existed on the contract site prior to the work commencing
(eg if an extension to an existing building was being constructed)
damage due to wear and tear.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 51
6 Emerging risks
Many industries have been facing a time of rapid change as technology changes what
people and companies are able to do, and industry disrupters have become a hot topic.
These changes can bring about new opportunities for the insurance market but also new
risks.
Industry disruptors are innovators that disrupt the marketplace. For example, aggregator
websites at one time disrupted the traditional personal lines insurance market.
6.1 Cyber risk
Cyber attacks are, at the time of writing, deemed to be one of the world’s top technological risks.
The topic is covered in more detail in Subject SA3.
Cyber insurance, one of the newer areas in insurance, presents the opportunity to sell an
additional product to cover a new need by policyholders that may be excluded from a
standard policy.
The insurer will indemnify the insured against losses incurred as a result of a specified
cyber or data loss event. This may include legal expenses.
For example, legal expenses could arise due to the need for a company to:
take legal action against hackers
defend its position against claimants, eg users of its services who suffered as a result of a
cyber attack.
Cyber and data risk insurance is designed to support and protect a business if it
experiences a data breach or is subject to an attack by a malicious hacker that affects its
computer systems.
Cover includes both liability and intellectual property losses for businesses that hold
sensitive customer data, use computer systems to conduct their business, or have a
website. Policies are likely to be individually underwritten to reflect the different needs of
the policyholders.
The main measures of exposure include:
company revenue for business interruption related cover
the value of IT equipment at risk.
Another possible exposure measure might be the volume of customer records held.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 52 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
The premium rate will depend on a number of factors, including the:
IT maturity of the insured
dependence of the revenue on IT
industry sector
volume and nature of data held by the insured
risk management of the insured, eg data security measures and back-up procedures
privacy policy of the insured.
Given the fast pace at which the cyber risk landscape is evolving, coupled with the lack of
ability to assess the IT maturity of each insured at the point of underwriting, underwriters
are increasingly using cyber security firms’ data and software to assess the potential for a
cyber-attack on an insured.
Loss events can occur from a wide range of perils. Common perils include:
virus damage, eg due to an employee opening an infected email attachment
hacker attack
A recent example of such an event is the attack on the telecommunications company
TalkTalk in 2015, in which thousands of customers’ details were stolen, including bank
account numbers and dates of birth.
infringement of intellectual property, eg a film studio may seek compensation if hackers
steal a digital copy of an unreleased movie and leak it online
slander or libel, eg if an employee unintentionally libels a third party in an email
online identity fraud, eg this could be covered by a personal cyber insurance policy and
may include the costs of restoring the policyholder’s credit record as well as
compensation for direct financial losses
personal data or privacy issues (eg loss of or disclosure of private data)
theft of corporate information and data
losses relating to breaches or actions by suppliers or business partners, eg an
insurer itself may need cover against the risk of a data breach at one of its brokers
ransomware (a type of malicious software that threatens to publish the victim's data or
block all access to it unless a ransom is paid)
A notable recent example of a ransomware event is the ‘WannaCry’ worldwide attack in
2017.
business interruption, eg due to a distributed denial of service (DDOS) attack
physical damage, eg if hackers seize control of infrastructure forming part of an electricity
grid and damage it.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 53
7 Glossary items
Having studied this chapter you should now read the following Glossary items:
Adjustment premium
All risks
Business interruption insurance
Cancellation
Consequential loss insurance
Deductible
Deposit premium
Escalation clause
Estimated maximum loss (EML)
First loss
Fleet
Latent claims
Loss of profits
New for old
Probable maximum loss (PML)
Replacement
Suretyship.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 54 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
The chapter summary starts on the next page so that you can
keep all the chapter summaries together for revision purposes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 55
Chapter 3 Summary
Liability
The essential characteristic of liability insurance is to provide indemnity – subject to
maximum levels of benefit and/or excesses – where the insured, owing to some form of
negligence, is legally liable to pay compensation to a third party.
The extent of any legal liability may depend on the prevailing legislation. Legal expenses
relating to the liability are usually also covered.
Significant reporting and settlement delays mean that most liability classes are long tailed.
Claims tend to be relatively infrequent and claim cost distributions tend to be widely spread.
The main types of liability insurance are:
employers’ liability / workers’ compensation
motor third party liability
marine and aviation liability
public liability
product liability
professional indemnity and errors and omissions (E&O) liability
Directors’ and Officers’ (D&O) liability
environmental liability and pollution liability.
Employers’ liability indemnifies the insured (the employer) against the legal liability to
compensate an employee / their estate for bodily injury, disease or death suffered, owing to
negligence of the employer. The benefit may be regular payments or a lump sum. The perils
include accidents and exposure to harmful substances or working conditions. The main
measure of exposure is payroll. The main risk factor is the type of industry.
Workers’ compensation is another name for employers’ liability. In some countries,
however, workers’ compensation may refer to losses suffered by employees during the
course of employment regardless of whether the employer has been negligent.
Motor third party liability indemnifies the owner of a motor vehicle against compensation to
third parties for personal injury or damage to their property. Cover is usually on a
losses-occurring basis. The measure of exposure is the vehicle-year. The risk and rating
factors are as for motor property damage.
Marine and aviation liability indemnify the insured against the legal liability to compensate a
third party for bodily injury, death or damage to property arising out of operation of the
vessel or aircraft. Exclusions are likely to include terrorism, war and illegal activities. Cover
is usually on a losses-occurring basis. Possible measures of exposure include passenger
kilometres / voyages and in-service seats. A wide range of rating factors is used in practice.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 56 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
Public liability indemnifies the insured against legal liability for the death of or bodily injury
to a third party or for damage to their property from any other cause. The perils will depend
on the type of policy. The most common measure of exposure is turnover.
Product liability indemnifies the insured against legal liability for the death of or bodily injury
to a third party or for damage to their property that results from a product fault. Cover is
likely to be on a claims-made basis. Perils include faulty design, faulty manufacture, faulty
packaging and incorrect or misleading instructions. The most common measure of exposure
is turnover. The nature of the product is an important risk factor, however each policy will
be individually underwritten.
Professional indemnity indemnifies the insured against legal liability for losses resulting from
negligence in the provision of a service. Cover is usually on a claims-made basis. Perils may
include wrong medical diagnosis, and errors in a medical operation or an actuarial report.
The most common measure of exposure is turnover. The nature of the profession is an
important risk factor, however each policy will be individually underwritten.
D&O liability is a type of professional indemnity cover that indemnifies the insured against
the legal liability to compensate third parties owing to any wrongful act of the insured
director. Cover is usually on a claims-made basis. Perils include wrongfully allowing a
company to continue operating, acts resulting in the insured being declared unfit for the role
and allowing the publication of false financial statements. The nature of the profession is an
important risk factor, however each policy will be individually underwritten.
Environmental liability indemnifies the insured against the legal liability to compensate third
parties for the death of or bodily injury to a third party or for damage to their property as a
result of unintentional pollution for which the insured is deemed responsible. Cover is
usually on a claims-made basis. Perils are any incident causing environmental pollution.
Each policy will be individually underwritten.
Property damage
The main characteristic of property insurance is to indemnify policyholders against loss of or
damage to their own material property.
The main types of property that are subject to such damage are:
residential, commercial and industrial buildings
moveable property (contents)
land vehicles
marine and aircraft
goods in transit
property under construction
engineering plant and machinery
goods insured under an extended warranty policy.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 57
Property claims are usually reported and paid quickly. They are often more predictable in
frequency and size than liability claims.
Residential, commercial and industrial buildings insurance usually pays the amount needed
to restore the property to its previous condition, subject to any excess / deductible. The
main perils are fire, explosion, lightning, theft, storm, flood, subsidence and damage caused
in putting out fires. The exposure measure is usually the sum-insured year. The sum insured
should be the cost of rebuilding / restoring the property. Subsidence claims may suffer
reporting delays. Many rating factors are likely to be used.
Moveable property can pay an amount equal to the replacement value of the item, or may
be on a ‘new for old’ basis. The main perils are fire and theft. Malicious and accidental
damage may also be covered. The exposure measure is usually the sum-insured year,
although this may be less appropriate for commercial covers, where the level of stocks is
very variable. Determining levels of stocks may lead to settlement delays. Many rating
factors are likely to be used.
Land vehicle insurance provides a benefit to repair the vehicle, subject to a maximum of the
replacement value of the vehicle. The exposure measure is the vehicle-year. Many rating
factors are likely to be used, including the level of excess.
Marine and aircraft may cover loss of or damage to the craft and the cargo. Perils include
fire and explosion. The exposure measure may be the insured value of the hull or aircraft
and may allow for cargo. Claims may not be reported until the vessel reaches a port. There
are no definitive rating factors.
Goods in transit is sometimes sold alongside marine and aviation insurance. The main perils
are damage, loss and theft. The exposure measure is typically the consignment value.
Claims may not be reported until the end of the journey. The main rating factors are mode
of transport, nature of goods, type of storage, time period / number of stages of journey and
length of time spent at warehouse.
Construction insurance may be provided for projects over the course of their lifetime (and
sometimes beyond), and so may last for longer than a year. The main perils are damage,
destruction, design defects, faulty parts and failure to finish the construction project. The
exposure measure may be the value of the contract, which is unlikely to be uniform over the
lifespan of the project, so allowance must be made for this. The main rating factors are type
and term of project, contracting firm, materials and technology used and location of project.
Engineering is similar in nature to construction. The main perils are machinery breakdown,
explosion and electronic failure. The exposure measure may be the sum insured value of the
contract, which is unlikely to be uniform over the lifespan of the project, so allowance must
be made for this. Claim costs are likely to be fairly uniform, although there may be
accumulations. Rating factors are similar to those for construction.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 58 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
Extended warranty covers losses arising from the need to replace / repair faulty parts in a
product beyond the manufacturer’s normal warranty period. Such policies may have a term
of several years. The exposure measure is usually the number of appliances or appliance-
years. The main rating factors include make / model of item, length of manufacturer’s
guarantee and term of warranty.
Financial loss
Financial loss insurance can be categorised as:
fidelity guarantee
credit insurance (trade credit and mortgage indemnity guarantee)
creditor insurance
business interruption cover (also known as consequential loss)
legal expenses cover.
The benefit provided is indemnity against financial losses arising from a peril covered by the
policy. Claims tend to be relatively short tailed.
Fidelity guarantee covers the insured against financial losses caused by dishonest actions of
employees. Contracts will be individually underwritten – the nature of the business and the
size of the sums at risk will be taken into account.
Trade credit covers uncollectible debts. The term of cover may be annual or may depend on
the length of a project. As above, contracts will be individually underwritten.
Mortgage indemnity guarantee covers the lender against the borrower defaulting on the
loan. The exposure measure may be the excess of the amount of the loan over a certain
percentage of the value of the property. Claims experience depends heavily on economic
factors. The premium will be affected by the quality of the lender’s loan underwriting.
Creditor insurance generally covers individuals who cannot make loan repayments due to
disability or unemployment. The loans may be personal loans, mortgages or credit card
debts. Benefits are usually limited to a maximum number of payments. The exposure
measure is usually the amount of the loan / the total amount repayable. Claim frequency
depends on the rate of unemployment and the likelihood of policyholders becoming sick /
having accidents. The premium will vary with the term of the loan. No allowance is made
for the profile of the individual being covered.
Business interruption cover indemnifies the insured against losses made as a result of not
being able to conduct business. Perils are similar to those for property damage. The
exposure measure is usually annual profit or turnover. Settlement may be slower than for
the associated property damage claim.
Legal expenses cover indemnifies the insured against legal expenses from court proceedings
being brought against / by the insured. The exposure measure may be the number of
policyholders. Premiums will depend on the sum insured.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 59
Fixed benefits
Fixed benefit claims arise under personal accident insurance.
Personal accident cover usually provides fixed benefits in the event that the insured party (or
parties) suffers one of a specified set of injuries / losses or death. The individual may be able
to select the level of cover. The exposure measure is the person-year multiplied by the sum
insured. Claims tend to be reported and settled quickly. The main rating factor tends to be
occupation, although age, sex (if this is permitted by regulation) and hobbies may also be
used.
Packaged products
Different types of general insurance products may be combined under a single policy. For
example:
motor third party liability and motor property
residential buildings and contents (with some public liability cover)
commercial buildings, contents and business interruption (with some public liability
cover).
Emerging risks
Cyber insurance will indemnify the insured against losses incurred as a result of a specified
cyber or data loss event. This may include legal expenses. Cover includes both liability and
intellectual property losses for businesses that hold sensitive customer data, use computer
systems to conduct their business, or have a website. Policies are likely to be individually
underwritten to reflect the different needs of the policyholders.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 60 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
The practice questions start on the next page so that you can
keep the chapter summaries together for revision purposes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 61
Chapter 3 Practice Questions
3.1 (i) List the different types of commercial liability insurance.
(ii) State which types of liability cover may be written as personal lines business.
3.2 State two different measures of exposure that might be used when rating industrial fire business
and outline the weaknesses of each one.
3.3 Explain whether each of the following statements about motor insurance is true or false.
A Insurers rarely ask proposers where their car will be driven, although it is one of the main
determinants of the risk underlying a policy.
B No-claims discount level can be used as a rating factor even though the premium that is
finally charged depends on it.
C A large majority of motor liability claims are for large amounts.
D There is no sum insured for bodily injury in a third party only motor insurance policy.
3.4 State whether the following risk factors are likely to affect the frequency of motor insurance
claims, the size of motor insurance claims, or both:
(i) where the car is driven
(ii) how expensive the car is to replace / repair
(iii) how fast the car is driven.
3.5 (i) Explain why mileage is not used as the exposure measure in private motor insurance.
(ii) State which of the primary rating factors may potentially act as proxies for mileage.
3.6 Give four examples of risks that may be excluded from personal accident policies.
3.7 State the main measure of exposure used in practice for the following types of insurance:
(i) employers’ liability
(ii) household contents
(iii) motor liability.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 62 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
3.8 State the usual measures of exposure for:
personal accident insurance
industrial fire insurance
employers’ liability insurance
extended warranty
creditor insurance
legal expenses
goods in transit
mortgage indemnity guarantee
business interruption cover
motor insurance.
3.9 For commercial motor insurance, list the risk factors that would be different to the risk factors for
private motor insurance.
3.10 Outline the main characteristics of property damage claims for the following classes of business:
(i) motor
(ii) marine & aviation
(iii) household.
3.11 List two possible measures of exposure, excluding ‘premiums’, which could be used for each of:
(i) motor
(ii) employers’ liability
(iii) industrial fire
(iv) household contents.
3.12 (i) List eight underwriting factors that might be used for employers’ liability insurance. (You
Exam style
should assume the exposure measure is payroll.) [2]
(ii) List possible stages of delay in an employers’ liability claim. [4]
[Total 6]
3.13 Describe the main characteristics of Directors and Officers (D&O) insurance. [6]
Exam style
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 63
3.14 (i) Give two distinct reasons why there may be an end-of-year adjustment to the premium
Exam style
for motor fleet policies. [2]
(ii) State what the first basis for splitting claims would be when analysing the claims from a
portfolio of motor fleet policies. [1]
(iii) State, with reasons, whether motor fleet business would be described as short tail or long
tail. [2]
(iv) State the main determinant of the extent to which the premiums for a motor fleet are
based on the fleet’s own experience (ie ‘experience rated’). [1]
[Total 6]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 64 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 65
Chapter 3 Solutions
3.1 (i) Commercial lines liability classes include:
employers’ liability
motor third party liability (individual vehicles or motor fleets)
marine and aviation liability
public liability
product liability
professional indemnity and E&O (errors and omissions) liability
D&O liability
environmental liability and pollution liability
(ii) Personal lines liability classes include:
motor third party liability
public liability (this is likely to be part of another type of insurance)
environmental liability (this may be part of another type of insurance,
eg household buildings)
3.2 Two different measures of exposure for rating industrial fire, with two weaknesses of each:
Sum insured year
– value of stocks unknown in advance
– changes over time due to stock levels
– uniqueness of properties means that there is no unique way of allowing for the
effect of inflation on the exposure.
Unit year
– the large variety of properties, by size, use, location and construction makes this a
poor indicator of the exposure.
Another possible weakness for both (and every exposure measure for industrial fire):
– poor measure of risk, so many rating factors needed.
3.3 A is true. Asking where the car will be driven would be impractical. Proposers could lie, or might
genuinely not know. Instead insurers use the policyholder’s address as an indication of where the
car may be driven.
B is true. The NCD level helps determine the premium charged, therefore it is a rating factor.
C is false. Most motor liability claims are for property damage. These do not cost a large amount
to settle.
D is true because no cover is given for bodily injury to the proposer and third party bodily injury
cover is usually unlimited.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 66 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
3.4 (i) Where the car is driven will have a big impact on the claim frequency.
(ii) How expensive the car is to replace / repair will have most effect on the claim size.
(iii) How fast the car is driven will probably influence both the frequency and the size of the
claims.
3.5 (i) It is administratively less convenient (eg there would be year-end adjustments). Verifying
mileage is deemed to be impractical.
(ii) Most of these factors might be acting as a proxy for mileage in one way or another:
drivers with ‘business use’ will probably do more miles than drivers with ‘social
and domestic use’
cars with very low rating groups tend to do fewer miles per year
new cars are usually driven further than older cars
young drivers may drive further than older drivers
drivers in rural locations may drive further
drivers with high mileage may have more claims and have worse NCD ratings.
3.6 Common exclusions for personal accident insurance are:
dangerous pastimes or occupations
aviation other than as a passenger
suicide or self-inflicted injury such as alcohol abuse
pre-existing conditions such as pregnancy
AIDS
illegal activities such as drug abuse.
3.7 (i) annual payroll
(ii) sum insured years
(iii) vehicle-years
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 67
3.8 personal accident insurance: person year or sum insured per year
industrial fire insurance: sum insured per year
employers’ liability insurance: annual payroll
extended warranty: number of appliances or appliance years
creditor insurance: amount of the loan or total amount repayable
legal expenses: number of policyholders or policyholder-years
goods in transit: value of consignment
mortgage indemnity guarantee: excess of the amount of the loan over a certain percentage
of the value of the property
business interruption cover: annual profit or turnover
motor insurance: vehicle year
3.9 Alternative risk factors for commercial motor insurance:
type of vehicle (eg lorry, as well as vehicle rating group)
nature of goods transported
vehicle weight and carrying capacity
area of operation (eg local, national, international etc)
vehicle maintenance procedures.
3.10 This question requires you to apply your basic product knowledge to claims characteristics.
Characteristics that you might have considered for each are:
size of claims
– large or small
– variability in size
number of claims
– high or low frequency
– variability in numbers
possibility of accumulations
length of tail
– reporting delays
– settlement delays.
We now translate out initial non-specific thoughts into specific comments about the three classes.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 68 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
(i) Motor
Average claim size is quite small and normally the maximum claim is limited by the
value of the car. However other cars or property can also be included increasing
size dramatically, eg motorway pile-up.
Claim frequency high but fairly stable for reasonably sized portfolio.
Accumulations possible, but only usually significant for fleet motor insurers.
Delays usually short, weeks rather than years.
(ii) Marine and Aviation
Claim amounts highly skew towards larger claims even though total loss is
uncommon.
Claim frequency variable from year to year, although big disaster claims are rare.
Geographical accumulations lead to possibility of many claims from one incident.
Reporting delays are usually short, weeks rather than months. May be slightly
longer than (a) and (c) though if minor incidents not reported until next port
reached.
Settlement delays can be longer than (a) and (c). Whilst major repairs may be
required immediately, minor repairs may be left until the ship returns to its home
port or until its next major refit. Hence, claims may not settle until several years
after the initial notification of the incident.
(iii) Household
Average claim size quite small, similar to motor. SI usually much greater than
motor. Total loss possible but much less common than smaller claims.
Claim frequency similar to motor. Can be quite variable from year to year due to
weather patterns.
Possibility of many small claims from the same event, eg windstorm, flood.
Accumulations sometimes enhanced by sale of many policies through a regional
building society.
Delays usually short in terms of weeks rather than years. Exception to this is
subsidence claims that can take years to recognise, stabilise and settle cost of
repair.
3.11 (i) motor: policy year, vehicle year, driver year
(ii) EL: wage-roll, man-hours, turnover
(iii) industrial fire: sum insured per year, floor space, turnover
(iv) contents: policy year, sum insured, number of rooms.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-03: Insurance products – types Page 69
3.12 (i) Eight possible underwriting factors for EL:
trade and occupations [½]
industrial processes and machinery used [½]
materials handled [½]
safety equipment installed [½]
medical facilities [½]
management practices, eg in regard to safety and training [½]
past experience of employer [½]
location. [½]
[Maximum 2]
(ii) Possible stages of delay in an EL claim include:
condition emerging [½]
condition being noticed [½]
reporting condition to insurer [½]
insurer processing the claim [½]
establishing when the claim was incurred, if change of insurer [½]
establishing liability (ie negligence by employer) [½]
condition stabilising [½]
assessing amount of settlement [½]
processing the settlement. [½]
[Maximum 4]
3.13 Directors and Officers (D&O) insurance is purchased by companies to protect against the directors
and officers of the company being sued for acts they have performed in their capacity as directors
and officers of the company. [1]
Deliberate fraud by directors and officers will be excluded. [½]
The perils include the following:
allowing a company to continue operating in circumstances when it should have been
declared insolvent [½]
any act resulting in the insured being declared unfit for his or her role [½]
allowing false financial statements to be published. [½]
Cover is likely to be on a claims-made basis. [½]
Typical exposure measures are turnover and net assets and liabilities of the company. [½]
Reporting of claims tends to be fairly quick. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 70 SP8-03: Insurance products – types
However settlement may take time, due to the high incidence of litigation. [½]
Therefore this tends to be a relatively long-tailed class of business. [½]
Typical risk / rating factors are:
nature of business [½]
past experience [½]
state of the economy. [½]
This type of cover tends to be distributed through Lloyd’s. [½]
[Maximum 6]
3.14 You may find this question a little tricky because we haven’t yet discussed experience rating (it’s
discussed in Chapter 13). However, motor fleet business is examined regularly so it’s useful to
start considering these issues early on in your studies.
(i) There may be an end-of-year adjustment for the actual exposure over the year, ie number
of vehicles covered. [1]
There may be a profit sharing type of arrangement, reflecting the actual claims experience
over the year. [1]
(ii) As with private motor, ie by property damage and bodily injury. [1]
(iii) It depends on the type of claim. The property damage claims are short tail, and the bodily
injury claims are long tail. The overall result depends on the mix of claims from the
particular portfolio. [2]
(iv) The size of the fleet (ie the credibility of the experience). [1]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-04: Problem solving Page 1
Problem solving
Syllabus objectives
5.1 Analyse hypothetical examples and scenarios in relation to the financial
management of general insurance companies.
5.1.1 Propose solutions and actions that are appropriate to the given context,
with justification where required.
5.1.2 Suggest possible reasons why certain actions have been chosen.
5.1.3 Assess the implications of actions within a given scenario.
5.1.4 Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of suggested actions, taking into
account different perspectives.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-04: Problem solving
0 What is expected of candidates?
The ability to look at a problem, solve it and then communicate the results clearly is a very
important skill that actuaries need in their day to day work, whichever field they work in. The
examiners will test your ability to solve such problems in the exam.
There is no explicit Core Reading for this objective.
Well, actually there is – but it’s not technical like it is in the other chapters.
All the material that is covered in the rest of the Core Reading for this subject also covers
this objective. The examiners will expect candidates to be able to apply the knowledge and
understanding that they have developed through the study of this Core Reading to produce
coherent advice and recommendations for the overall management of a general insurer.
Candidates should recognise that the exams will contain scenarios and situations that have
not been covered in the Core Reading, in order to test that candidates have understood the
material sufficiently to apply their understanding to a new situation. The Subject SP8
exams, however, do not require any knowledge beyond that contained in the Core Reading
(although there are often additional marks available for candidates with a broader
understanding). In so far as an exam question requires underlying knowledge that is not
contained in the Core Reading, this will be provided as part of the question.
Where candidates are preparing for the exam using broader educational materials (for
example, as provided by ActEd) which contain both the Core Reading and additional
content, we recommend that candidates aim for a greater level of familiarity with the Core
Reading elements. Only the Core Reading itself is directly considered by the exam setting
team and a higher quality of answer is generally required, particularly on bookwork
questions that are directly based on Core Reading. However, the additional content should
be of great value in interpreting the Core Reading and understanding ways to apply it.
Candidates will also be expected to solve problems that may be set in novel or unfamiliar
circumstances or for which there are no generally recognised solutions by:
drawing upon knowledge and understanding of similar products, situations and
current issues
applying actuarial techniques and concepts
exercising judgement
utilising the information provided in the question.
In Section 3, we illustrate how to put these techniques into practice by considering an unusual
product which is unlike any of the products you will have seen in Chapters 2 and 3.
Although there is significant overlap in underlying content between this exam and
Subject SA3, the level of understanding expected of candidates is different. Candidates are
expected to have a solid grasp of the technical aspects of general insurance work and some
understanding of the broader commercial, regulatory and operational context; the
non-technical elements are the focus of Subject SA3.
Broadly, we would expect a passing Subject SP8 candidate to be a mid-senior ranking
member of a function team (eg reserving, pricing, capital), depending on the size of the
organisation, who is able to operate with limited supervision for routine analytical work, but
would draw upon more senior expertise for complex or contentious situations.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-04: Problem solving Page 3
1 Examples
The problems candidates are expected to tackle may be of a similar level of complexity to:
calculation of an appropriate risk premium for a policy based on information
provided in the question
calculate, estimate or describe appropriate loadings to include for an office premium
describe how to design or carry out an analytical exercise to better understand a
risk
calculate outcomes for a reinsurance programme (both claims and additional
premiums) based on a loss situation described
demonstrate understanding of the relative merits of different pricing techniques and
apply them to a situation
demonstrate understanding of the risk, claims and standard coverage
characteristics of different products and relevant factors to consider in a pricing
exercise
show understanding of GLM techniques, practical challenges, data issues and
potential hypotheses to test
working with incomplete, distorted or unreliable historical data and understanding
the challenges and implications of this
managing necessary data adjustments for an analysis; for example, allowing for
inflation, exposure, earning distortions or time issues
applying actuarial insight to review of data provided in a question to identify any
features pertinent to the question, or any anomalies or errors
designing a suitable reinsurance structure given an insurer’s risk profile and
appetite or calculating outcomes for a reinsurance programme.
These are only some general examples, and past exam papers provide a good indicator of
the type of questions that might appear on an exam and how some of the generic questions
above might be examined in practice.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-04: Problem solving
2 Exam techniques
Stronger candidates (and indeed the exam setting team itself in generating the marking
schedule) will have a set of lists for each element of the course to remind themselves of the
points that are worth considering on a particular topic. These lists can be compiled from
the Core Reading, past exam papers and sample questions. Candidates can refine the lists
every time there is a relevant point that their lists did not pick up.
Where possible, lists should be supplemented by a general toolkit for idea generation that
can be applied flexibly to a variety of situations to generate a range of potential points.
The strongest candidates also accompany this with a good understanding of the situation
and the underlying concepts, which helps to identify points that are particularly salient, or
that are not relevant given the specifics of the way the question is constructed. Although
there are no negative marks given for providing incorrect or irrelevant answers, candidates
will create unnecessary time pressures for themselves if they do not filter their thoughts to
address the questions as set.
Below we provide some suggestions for idea generation or for compilation of useful
revision lists:
Consider the stakeholders in any situation, for example:
– regulators
– reinsurers
– rating agencies
– customers or claimants
– management
– investors and/or shareholders
– brokers
– underwriters
– competitors.
Consider the different functions within an insurance company which form a
necessary part of the infrastructure for any product or company to be effective, for
example:
– claims handling and reserving
– finance
– underwriting and pricing
– sales and marketing
– risk
– compliance
– IT and Operations
– data and management information
– capital modelling
– reinsurance purchasing.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-04: Problem solving Page 5
Visualise what is actually going on, for example:
– what a policyholder actually does
– what they are buying a policy for
– what the real world event is that triggers a claim
– how a claim is assessed and resolved etc.
Doing this as part of revision will help with the generation of examples.
Think what is likely to go wrong in practice; some of the questions you may ask
yourself are:
– Is there data?
– Is it of adequate quality?
– Is it representative?
– Can you get it out of the IT systems or process it?
– Are other stakeholders or colleagues being honest with you (or with
themselves)?
– Are there political constraints that will mean the analysis isn’t considered
fairly?
– Will your competitors or the regulators change the environment before you
can respond?
Use your knowledge of the Core Reading and any professional guidance.
Consider each of the areas of the course or use a ‘mega-list’ of all the key words in the
course.
Consider the steps involved in a process.
Consider the actuarial control cycle.
Use the clues in the question, and do a quick brainstorm of each detail.
Use ideas from your own experience (but avoid the temptation to go over the top if you
know a lot of detail about a particular subject).
Use ideas from similar questions (but make sure that you tailor them to the question
being asked).
Ask yourself questions such as: why, when, who, how, what for, etc.
The above is by no means exhaustive nor necessarily the best framework for all candidates,
but it is helpful to develop some form of toolkit for idea generation. Candidates can also
evolve and enhance that toolkit by working through practise questions, and, for any points
on the marking schedule that they didn’t think of, trying to identify a transferable question
they could have asked themselves which would have led to that point. This is most
effective if attempting the question under exam conditions, as many points which seem
obvious on reading a solution may not have been generated under exam conditions.
Candidates should also try to avoid thinking of questions as being confined to one topic
area, such as reserving, or capital, as this may lead to a lack of confidence in answering
questions they perceive to be outside of their area of professional experience. These
traditional practice areas are just purposes to which an actuary’s understanding and
judgment can be applied.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-04: Problem solving
If a candidate has a good understanding of the underlying product and of the practical
operation of an insurance company, they should be able to apply this to a variety of
purposes, and there is in any case significant overlap. Data issues, for example, will create
challenges in every area, and the same risk and uncertainty characteristics that a pricing
model would seek to capture with rating factors can lead to large loss or late development
characteristics that create reserving challenges, or to volatility and uncertainty issues that
need to be reflected in a capital model.
It is always useful, however, for candidates to engage with colleagues working in a different
practice area to understand their perspectives on the same underlying portfolios, for their
own professional effectiveness as well as for exam preparation.
The Examiners’ Reports also contain a significant level of recurring advice for each subject
(most notably a strong recommendation to make sure that you read the question properly).
For each paper, they also highlight the mistakes commonly made by candidates on each
question, which should be of use in avoiding similar errors when sitting the exam in future.
We recommend that candidates read this.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-04: Problem solving Page 7
3 Tackling an unusual product
3.1 Unusual classes of business
The Subject ST8 exam, the predecessor to Subject SP8, quite frequently covered unusual or
specialist classes of business, many of which only get a passing mention in the Core Reading, if at
all. Some notable examples include:
excess of loss cover for a fleet of seaplanes
insurance for a holiday firm hiring out leisure boats
insurance for a fleet of cruise ships
insurance for a charity fun run
insurance for players of a game using augmented reality
wind turbine insurance
power boat insurance
crop insurance.
It would take you months to read up on every conceivable type of insurance cover, and we don’t
suggest you try. When very unusual or innovative products are examined, the cover provided by
the product is usually described in the question.
You can find even more examples of questions on unusual general insurance products by looking
through past exam questions for Subjects ST3, ST7 and SA3. These questions could easily be
adapted to make future Subject SP8 exam questions.
The purpose of this section is to enable you to:
apply the principles covered in Chapters 2 and 3 to think of perils and risk factors for an
unusual product
recognise when these risk factors are usable for rating, underwriting or exposure
measurement.
Section 3.2 below covers a (very) unusual product by way of a question. To get the most from this
section you should attempt the question yourself before looking at our ideas.
3.2 Question
The National Football League is about to be rocked by a breakaway of the biggest 22 clubs. They
are going to form their own Ultimate League, with substantial extra finance promised to them by
a consortium of cable and satellite TV companies. At the end of each season the bottom three
clubs in the Ultimate League will be demoted to the top division of the remaining Football League
and replaced by the three teams who have finished at the top of that division.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-04: Problem solving
The chief executives of the 22 prospective breakaway clubs have approached the large general
insurance company that you work for. They are seeking to negotiate a new form of insurance for
the clubs against the risk of demotion from the Ultimate League to the (impoverished) Football
League, in which their share of the money from television fees is likely to be minimal.
A student actuary who is very keen on football has provided you with the following background
information:
‘There is a reasonably clear hierarchy of football clubs. The big ones (like Bigclub United, AC
Winsagain and Yeovil Town) have been winning trophies for years, while others of the breakaway
clubs (like Notsogood United, Real Trouble and Manchester City) are expected to struggle in the
new regime. Football is a funny old game though, and these expectations may not be fulfilled. At
the end of the day it’s just eleven players against eleven players, after all.’
You have been asked to prepare a report for the directors of your company on this proposed new
form of insurance.
Read the question
Reading the question carefully is an important skill that you must develop. As you read, you may
find it helpful to underline key words and annotate the question paper, or rough paper, with your
ideas. (If this seems a touch patronising we apologise, but a slightly different style is required for
the later exams and for some students this could be their first attempt at one of the later
subjects.) Having read it quickly a few moments ago, go back to the question again now before
reading our thoughts on the question, which are given below.
Thoughts on the information given
‘The National Football League is about to be rocked by a breakaway of the biggest 22 clubs. They
are going to form their own Ultimate League, with substantial extra finance promised to them by
a consortium of cable and satellite TV companies. At the end of each season the bottom three
clubs in the Ultimate League will be demoted to the top division of the remaining Football League
and replaced by the three teams who have finished at the top of that division.’
Note that 3 teams from 22 are demoted each season. All other things being equal this
would imply a claim probability of 3/22.
‘Substantial extra finance’ means that any club demoted will lose significant revenue for
the following year.
Can these TV fees be predicted at the start of the season?
Is there a schedule of who will be on TV and when, or would we need an end of year
adjustment to reflect actual exposure?
Do all clubs get an equal share of the fees or do some get more than others?
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-04: Problem solving Page 9
‘The chief executives of the 22 prospective breakaway clubs have approached the large general
insurance company that you work for. They are seeking to negotiate a new form of insurance for
the clubs against the risk of demotion from the Ultimate League to the (impoverished) Football
League, in which their share of the money from television fees is likely to be minimal.’
Note that your company is large. This may mean that you have the resources available to
consider such a one-off arrangement. On the other hand, it may mean that you are not
interested in odd one-off arrangements that will presumably imply considerable per
policy expenses. Conversely, there may be prestige and free publicity in being involved
with the project.
Note this is a new form of insurance. This means there is no direct historical data to use.
However we could consider league positions in the previous season as some indication of
the likelihood of demotion this season.
We need to decide what form the new insurance will take.
This is a niche market with a maximum of 22 policies per annum. We would want to know
how many clubs will take out the cover.
‘There is a reasonably clear hierarchy of football clubs. The big ones (like Bigclub United, AC
Winsagain and Yeovil Town) have been winning trophies for years, while others of the breakaway
clubs (like Notsogood City, Real Trouble and Manchester City) are expected to struggle in the new
regime. Football is a funny old game though, and these expectations may not be fulfilled. At the
end of the day it’s just eleven players against eleven players, after all.’
There is clearly a difference in the likelihood of demotion between the big clubs and some
of the others likely to struggle. This would imply that we cannot just treat all clubs as
equals.
A probable assumption, in the absence of better information, is that the big clubs appear
on TV more often and get a higher share of the money than the smaller clubs.
Now try some structured thinking
So far, all you have done is read the question, think about it and annotate the question paper.
But note how many initial points have been raised. The next stage is to do some more structured
thinking about the question. There are a number of valid approaches. The order in which you
apply them is not important.
Ask yourself as many basic generic questions as you can sensibly devise about the product
described. Then try to answer them.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-04: Problem solving
(a) Questions about the cover to be provided
Who is covered?
What perils are to be covered?
When does the cover apply, and when does it cease?
Why should the club purchase cover?
Are there any exclusions that should be applied?
What is the sum insured?
Are we providing indemnity cover?
Do we want to impose a maximum amount of cover?
Comments
Football clubs are to be indemnified against potential loss of TV fees following demotion.
The cover should be purchased before the start of the season, so a cut-off date may be
appropriate. The sum insured should be limited to a percentage, perhaps 100%, of the current
year’s fees.
The insurer needs to decide whether the claim period should be for one year only or if claims
payments should be made until the club regains promotion. The former is likely to be the only
option acceptable to the insurer. The latter option is too uncertain and open-ended. The risk to
the insurer is likely to be perceived as too large. There would also be the concern that the club
would have no incentive to regain promotion to the Ultimate League. This is an example of
potential moral hazard.
It may well be desirable to place a monetary maximum on the amount of cover provided. This
could provide protection against one of the big clubs, with a large share of the fees, being
demoted. This is an example of how the insurer could limit its exposure to large claims and
control the risks it writes.
(b) Questions about the method of sale
What is our distribution method and target market?
What commission is payable?
What likely business volumes can we expect?
Can we provide a bundled package of cover for other insurance too?
What implications are there for administration and computer systems?
Comments
The target market is clearly defined here as the 22 clubs of the Ultimate League. There is no
guarantee that all clubs will take out the cover, or that we are the only insurer that has been
approached to provide cover. Hence, our potential sales volume ranges from 0 to 22 policies.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-04: Problem solving Page 11
(c) Questions on modelling the business
What exposure measure should we use?
What are the risk factors?
Can these be used for rating or do we need to use proxies?
Will we need an end of year adjustment premium?
What allowance should be made for expenses, commission, investment income, profit
and contingencies?
Is experience rating (ie the system by which the premium of each individual risk depends,
at least in part, on the actual claims experience of that risk) applicable?
Comments
Possible exposure measures are:
TV fees
club season.
TV fees may not be known until the end of the season. Hence, if this is used, an end of year
adjustment premium will be required. The initial premium paid could be based on an estimate,
perhaps based on last season’s share of the TV money.
Club season is a simple measure, but would leave a lot of residual heterogeneity requiring the use
of further rating factors. Note that this is similar to the situation with private motor insurance.
Both these measures meet the criteria for exposure measures to be objective, measurable, simple
and practical. They are also related to the underlying risk, ie two club-seasons would be double
the risk of a one club-season.
Possible risk factors leading to demotion are:
poor performance
injuries
lack of finance
poor management
the sale of good players.
Note that the last item is another example of possible moral hazard against the insurer. We will
need to consider this when forming the policy conditions.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-04: Problem solving
None of these factors are easily measurable or verifiable, so we will need to consider possible
rating factors. These might include:
past experience, eg position last year, as affecting likelihood of a claim
recent share of TV fees, or number of TV appearances last season, as affecting the
severity of any possible claim.
We should expect per policy expenses to be high, and can load for any commission we expect to
pay.
Assuming premiums are received at the start of the season, and claims are paid after the end of
the season, we should allow for the investment income that we can earn on the premium net of
expenses, for that period.
Experience rating, in terms of position in previous years, is likely to be useful in predicting the
probability of a claim.
(d) Questions about the possible claim profile
What is the likely claim frequency and average amount?
What sort of reporting and settlement delays do we expect?
Is this a long- or short-tailed class of business?
Are claims fixed or unlimited?
What potential is there for large claims or accumulations?
Do we need to purchase any reinsurance protection?
What investigations are we able to carry out?
What potential is there for selection against the insurer?
Is there any potential for moral hazard?
Comments
Depending on the number of policies sold, the claim frequency suffered by the insurer could be
anything between 0% and 100%.
Claim amounts, assuming we limit indemnity to only one season’s loss of fees, will be no higher
than that of the largest club. We could reduce this amount further by imposing a monetary
maximum.
Delays should be short. Teams will soon know when they have been demoted. Indeed, we may
well be aware that this is likely several matches before the end of the season. Settlement delays
should also be short. Hence this will be a short-tailed insurance product.
There is potential for very poor experience. We may only sell three policies, and all three clubs
may be demoted. The insurer could use some form of non-proportional reinsurance to protect
itself from this risk. There is a risk that only the clubs likely to be demoted take out cover; the
insurer should consider how it can avoid being selected against.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-04: Problem solving Page 13
Question
The chief executive designate of the Ultimate League Executives is also, coincidentally, a director
of your company. They have unofficially proffered the following additional information:
(a) Taking out this insurance might be made compulsory for all clubs as a condition of joining
the Ultimate League.
(b) Given the poor international record of the National Football team, there is a growing
opinion amongst some of the players, managers and tabloid press in favour of a smaller
league. There may, as a result, be a gradual reduction in the size of the Ultimate league
from 22 to, say, 18 clubs over four seasons.
Comment on the implications for the insurance company, of these options in turn, assuming that
all other details of the new form of insurance are agreed between the company and the chief
executives.
Solution
(a) The big concern about selection is much reduced if all clubs have to take out this
insurance. However, we do not know if the cover is compulsory with this insurer, or
whether it has competition. If we have competition we may still be faced with the
situation of insuring three clubs and seeing them all relegated. Alternatively, if we are
insuring all 22 clubs we know that the claim frequency will be 3/22. The only uncertainty
for the insurer will be the claim amounts.
(b) We will need to know how this is to be accomplished, eg it could be by demoting three
and promoting two clubs, or demoting four clubs and promoting three for a period of
years. We should assess whether the expected claim frequency would be 3/18 if we
insured all clubs. At first glance it might be assumed that there is no effect on potential
claim amounts. However, if the same pot of money is to be shared amongst 18 rather
than 22 clubs then average claim amounts could increase.
Other valid approaches you could use to generate ideas here are:
Working from a checklist of ideas, to check that you have not missed a possible different
angle.
Role playing. Imagine you are trying calculate a premium for this policy. Think about the
questions you would want answers to, and ways in which the insurer could be selected
against. Alternatively, imagine you are the football club and think about your insurance
needs or things you might do for your own benefit.
What we have set out here is far more than you might expect to generate on the basis of what
you have seen so far. However, it does highlight the sort of thought processes required for the
exam.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-04: Problem solving
The task, then, is to present the ideas generated in the time allowed, and in a suitable form for
the examiner. This is a skill that you need to practise on Assignments, Exam questions and past
paper questions. Try to devise new forms of insurance, then think about how you would make
them work, what the perils are, how you would rate them, etc …
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-04: Problem solving Page 15
4 Suggested reading
We do not make any specific recommendations for additional reading for Subject SP8, and
as noted at the beginning of this chapter there is no need for any additional knowledge
beyond that contained in the Core Reading. There is a significant volume of information
available online for any candidates who wish to carry out further reading but we would
always recommend that candidates prioritise doing extensive practice on past exam papers
and sample questions, ideally under exam conditions as far as practical.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-04: Problem solving
There is no chapter summary for this chapter.
The practice questions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-04: Problem solving Page 17
Chapter 4 Practice Questions
4.1 Describe the features of travel insurance under the following headings:
cover available and perils insured
common exclusions
measure of exposure
risk factors
rating factors used in practice
usual forms of underwriting
major characteristics of claims.
4.2 A large hairdressing boutique is considering offering its clients ‘haircut insurance’. The clients
Exam style
would be entitled to a compensation payment if the resulting cut was unsatisfactory. You are an
insurer who has been asked to quote for a premium, which will be paid to you by the hairdresser.
Discuss how the insurance arrangement might be made to work sensibly in practice and whether
or not the premium should, at any given time, be the same in all cases. [7]
4.3 (i) State the ideal features of a risk that make it insurable for a general insurance
Exam style
company. [4]
It has been suggested that an insurance company should start selling people insurance to cover
them against being late for work due to delays on public transport.
(ii) In the light of the features set out in (i), comment on whether you agree with this
proposal or not. [4]
[Total 8]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-04: Problem solving
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-04: Problem solving Page 19
Chapter 4 Solutions
4.1 Note that travel insurance is not an unusual product in practice. However, since the Core Reading
does not discuss this class of business in detail, this is an ideal opportunity to practise the skills
discussed in this chapter.
Cover available and perils insured
Policies cover losses arising from incidents occurring during holidays or periods of business travel,
or from the expense involved in cancelling travel arrangements for certain specific reasons,
eg illness, bereavement.
A typical policy might have sections for:
loss of or damage to luggage
loss of personal money
medical expenses while travelling
scale of benefits for delays
cancellation costs
personal accident
personal liability.
Policies will usually specify monetary limits for claims.
Note that these policies are generally non-annual although many insurers do offer annual policies.
Cover will be limited to the duration of a trip, eg fifteen days. Vending machines in some airports
allow individuals to buy instant cover for a single journey.
Common exclusions
Policies may exclude some foreign destinations, eg those which are particularly politically
unstable, and exclude claims arising from circumstances that could reasonably have been
anticipated.
Other exclusions might be the accident benefits and/or the medical expenses resulting from:
drugs (unless medically prescribed)
intoxicants
attempted suicide
taking part in dangerous pursuits, eg pot-holing, motor racing.
Policies for high-risk sporting holidays will extend cover to the specified sports. Premiums are
correspondingly higher for these policies.
There may be a small excess on some sections of the policy, eg loss of or damage to luggage.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-04: Problem solving
Measure of exposure
Person-journey or person-week or, for annual policies, person-year.
Risk factors
The main factors affecting the risk are:
destination
level of cover
number, age and gender of persons in the party
duration of stay
reason for travel
current health
quality of the tour operator.
Rating factors used in practice
As policies are usually purchased ‘off-the-shelf’ through travel agents, they need to be quite
standardised. Premium rating is therefore driven by practical considerations.
Premiums may also be split by the time periods for the cover, eg 0–3 days, 4–7 days, 814 days
and so on. Most policies have a maximum of three months, although, as mentioned above, many
insurers are now offering annual travel insurance cover.
Age is also used for rating. Reductions are available for children in the party and some insurers
also impose a loading for older travellers, eg those over 60.
Health insurance is often a major part of the cover. Hence, the type of holiday is an important
factor if the holiday includes, for example, winter sports. The destination, eg US, is another factor
that could lead to expensive medical treatment.
Usual forms of underwriting
No direct underwriting takes place on standard travel policies.
Major characteristics of claims
Delays
This is a short-tail class. Reporting delays are not usually significant, although claims may not be
reported until the policyholder has returned from abroad. Insurers with a 24-hour telephone
helpline are likely to have fewer reporting delays. Claims will in general be paid quickly.
Claim frequency and severity
Often quite a high proportion of policies give rise to claims, eg 10%. Claim amounts are usually
very small. However, the tail of the claim amount distribution can be quite long, because the
insurer is exposed to the risk of the occasional large complex liability or medical expenses claim.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-04: Problem solving Page 21
Accumulations of risk
Concentrations of risk are quite likely. For example, where an insurer is providing cover for all
passengers in a single coach. This is quite possible where a particular tour operator offers
insurance policies from a single insurer.
4.2 We realise that this situation might seem a bit strange. However it’s important to test your ability
to apply your knowledge of other classes to this unusual class, by using a little common sense.
The discussion could take various directions. Some points that could be covered are:
Level of cover
One possibility is a refund of the charge; anything less would be too small. However, the
customer could still sue the hairdresser so more cover may be required. [1]
Compensating for ‘grief caused’ could lead to large claims, which would be hard to quantify.
For example, ‘I would have passed that job interview if my hair hadn’t looked so silly’. [½]
An alternative would be to offer immediate re-cut or re-style by someone else. [½]
This is fine as long as there’s enough hair left to play with after the first cut! [½]
Another alternative may be to offer use of a wig / toupee. [½]
Decision on ‘unsatisfactory’
Needs an independent arbitrator, acceptable to both sides
– not hairdressing employee / manager
– not client’s friend / mum. [1]
May need different arbitrator for certain styles, eg punk, mohican, gothic
– a video-phone link to a suitable style guru might be a possibility. [½]
Same premium
Simpler, but different ...
– difficulty of styles
– skill of individual hairdresser
– awkwardness of individual customers
– (there could be experience rating, eg NCD ‘no complaint discount’) [2]
Should collect data over time to confirm which rating factors would be best, if wanting
premiums to vary by risk. [½]
[Total 7]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-04: Problem solving
4.3 (i) Ideal features
The policyholder must have an interest in the risk being insured and an interest in its
consequences being minimised. [1]
A risk must be of a financial and reasonably quantifiable nature. [½]
The claim amount payable must be commensurate with the size of the financial loss. [½]
Individual risk events should be independent of each other. [½]
The probability of the event should be relatively small. [½]
Large numbers of potentially similar risks should be pooled in order to reduce the variance and
hence achieve more certainty. [½]
There should be an ultimate limit on the liability undertaken by the insurer. [½]
Moral hazards should be eliminated as far as possible. [½]
There should be sufficient existing statistical data / information to enable the insurer to estimate
the extent of the risk and its likelihood of occurrence. [½]
[Maximum 4]
(ii) Transport delay insurance
The policyholder does have an interest in the risk, although how much interest and in what form
will depend on the individual. [½]
The loss is not financially quantifiable. This rules out indemnity cover but a fixed benefit cover
would be possible. [½]
It will be difficult to ensure that claim payments made are commensurate with the size of the
financial loss because this loss is not quantifiable. [½]
There will not be independent risks, eg bad weather affects many policyholders. [½]
The claim frequency could be very high, depending upon the definition of ‘late’, exclusions and
quality of transport system. [½]
Pooling to reduce variability is limited by the non-independence of risks. [½]
To limit outgo use fixed benefits, but hard due to non-independent risks. [½]
Avoiding moral hazard will be very difficult, since it’s hard to verify claims. [½]
There will probably be a limited amount of data available giving information about delays on
public transport but the data is unlikely to be sufficiently detailed to be of any use. [½]
Therefore probably not practical due to non-independent risks, difficulty of verifying claims and
potentially high claim frequency. [1]
[Maximum 4]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-05: Reinsurance products – background Page 1
Reinsurance products –
background
Syllabus objectives
1.2 Describe the main types of general reinsurance products and the purposes for which
they may be used.
Covered in part in this chapter.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-05: Reinsurance products - background
0 Introduction
0.1 What is reinsurance?
Insurance companies provide insurance to individuals and corporations against many risks
(hurricanes, earthquakes, lawsuits, collisions, sickness and death, and so on).
Reinsurers, in turn, provide reinsurance to insurance companies and reinsurance companies
(retrocession).
Chapter structure
In this chapter, we discuss reinsurance in general terms. In particular:
Section 1: Insurance for insurers and reinsurers
Section 2: Other participants in the reinsurance market
Section 3: Reasons for purchasing reinsurance
Section 4: Ways of writing reinsurance business
Section 5: Traditional reinsurance – an overview
Section 6: Other types of reinsurance and alternatives to reinsurance – an overview
In the next chapter, we will consider the different reinsurance products in detail, as well as some
alternatives to traditional reinsurance.
0.2 Reinsurance language
There is quite a lot of specialist language used in reinsurance. Although you will soon get used to
it, you will find it useful to be familiar with the following terms immediately:
cede = ‘pass on’ or ‘give away’, as in ‘cede some risk to a reinsurer’
facultative = ‘individual’, as in an individually negotiated arrangement
treaty = covers a group of policies – reinsurance that the reinsurer is obliged to
accept, subject to certain conditions set out in a treaty
direct writer = the insurer with a direct contract with the insured (as opposed to a
reinsurer, who has a contract with the direct writer), also called the
primary insurer or cedant.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-05: Reinsurance products – background Page 3
1 Insurance for insurers and reinsurers
1.1 Reinsurance
Reinsurance is a form of insurance. It is a means by which an insurance company obtains
from other insurance companies (reinsurers) protection against the risk of losses.
Reinsurance is very important, both in practice and as part of Subject SP8. It is important that you
take your time over this chapter and the next chapter, to make sure you are comfortable with
what reinsurance is and why an insurer may purchase reinsurance, as well as the different types
of reinsurance product.
1.2 Retrocession
Retrocession is also a form of insurance. However, rather than being bought by individuals
(insurance) or insurers (reinsurance), it is bought by reinsurers.
Retrocession is reinsurance of reinsurance and is a very specialist area of the reinsurance
market. A retrocession protection is necessary where a reinsurer that accepts substantial
amounts of reinsurance business requires reinsurance protection itself.
The ceding reinsurer in a retrocession is called the retrocedant and the assuming reinsurer
is called the retrocessionnaire.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-05: Reinsurance products - background
2 Other participants in the reinsurance market
2.1 Brokers
Brokers primarily fulfil a sales role. Their purpose is to act for their client – the insurer – to obtain
reinsurance on its behalf.
Reinsurance brokers may specialise in the reinsurance markets only, or else deal with insurance,
reinsurance, retrocession and other financial products.
2.2 Direct reinsurance placements
Reinsurance need not only be handled by reinsurance brokers. In some international
markets, professional reinsurers often deal directly with insurers in placing their
reinsurance. These relationships could have come about historically based on business
culture, customs, practices or language.
Therefore, it is not uncommon for reinsurance intermediaries (ie brokers) to compete with
professional reinsurers who offer the service of a broker directly to the client.
2.3 Fronting
Fronting occurs when an insurer, acting as a mere conduit, underwrites a risk and cedes all
(or nearly all) of the risk to another insurer which is technically acting as a reinsurer. The
ceding or ‘fronting’ insurer will typically receive a fee for its involvement to cover its
expenses and profit.
Despite the additional fee, there are a number of reasons why the assuming insurer may use
a fronting arrangement rather than underwrite the risk directly. Here are some examples:
It may not be licensed to write a specific line of business in a particular country or
state of the US.
In some territories, it is a legal requirement for all classes, or for certain classes, of insurance
to be written by a local insurer. A fronting arrangement effectively allows insurers outside
the territory to cover risks in such a territory.
Sometimes, a single insured may have insurance coverage needs in many different states
and the insurer may not be licensed in all of them. Fronting arrangements could then be
used to ‘fill in the gaps’ in the states where the insurer was not licensed.
Its credit rating may be inadequate to satisfy the insured’s minimum requirements;
for example because the insurer suffered a downgrade just prior to renewal.
If the fronting insurer has a higher credit rating than the assuming insurer, then the
assuming insurer will be able to attract and retain more business.
There may be tax advantages in issuing the policy via the fronting insurer.
This could be the case if the fronting insurer operates in a different tax jurisdiction,
eg Bermuda (which has a favourable tax environment).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-05: Reinsurance products – background Page 5
Although the fronting insurer is not generally concerned with the profitability of the
underlying business it does remain legally liable to the original insured. If the assuming
insurer fails to meet its obligations as part of the reinsurance agreement, then the fronting
insurer would still be liable for any claims incurring to the policy.
The fronting insurer should assess the credit risk of the assuming insurer before entering
into the fronting agreement. The fronting company may require the risk-bearing party to
provide some form of collateral to help mitigate the credit risk, for example, a letter of credit.
Question
Suggest what other factors the fronting insurer might consider when assessing credit risk.
Solution
A fronting insurer might also consider the following factors relating to the assuming insurer:
size
solvency level
attitude / strength of management
existence of a parent company
types of business written
level of expertise / experience with different classes of business.
The Glossary defines a letter of credit as:
A financial guarantee issued by a bank that permits the party to which it is issued to draw
funds from the bank in the event of a valid unpaid claim against another party.
In some jurisdictions, regulators do not look favourably on fronting agreements. Prevailing
regulation should be considered before entering into a fronting agreement.
Question
Explain how fronting differs from selling insurance business through an intermediary.
Solution
A fronting insurer remains legally liable to the original insured, however an intermediary does not.
An intermediary may also provide expertise to the seller of reinsurance.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-05: Reinsurance products - background
2.4 Captives
A captive insurance company may be established to self-insure insurance risk. Captive
insurance companies are generally allowed more flexibility than traditional insurers in the
creation of their reinsurance arrangements, taking advantage of local regulatory or tax
regimes.
Captives will be described in detail in Chapter 7, General insurance markets.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-05: Reinsurance products – background Page 7
3 Reasons for purchasing reinsurance
We introduced reinsurance in Chapter 1 and mentioned a couple of reasons why insurers might
use reinsurance: to enable them to write large risks and to protect against accumulations. In this
section we will revisit these reasons and consider some additional reasons for using reinsurance.
This section mentions the different types of reinsurance, including facultative, proportional,
excess of loss (XL) and stop loss. You may have met some types of reinsurance (eg excess of loss
reinsurance) in your earlier studies, but if not, all will be revealed later in this chapter and in the
next chapter.
3.1 Why purchase reinsurance?
This section considers the following reasons for using reinsurance:
limitation of exposure to risk or spreading of risk
avoidance of large single losses
smoothing of results
increasing profitability
improving solvency margin
increasing capacity to accept risk
financial assistance
availability of expertise.
You may find it useful to come back and re-read this section after you have completed this
chapter and the next one.
3.2 Limitation of exposure to risk or spreading of risk (single risks, aggregations
of single risks, accumulations, multi-class losses)
An insurer with a portfolio of business faces an uncertain future. Even with the best
advanced statistical analysis and experienced underwriters, the claims outgo from any
period of risk cannot be predicted to any degree of accuracy. This is the reason for
insurance: to cover the unknown financial consequences of possible future perils.
In general, where an insurer fears a loss or combination of losses that would materially
(adversely) affect the results within its portfolio, it will consider reinsurance.
This adverse effect may be caused by a single event or from related events across
portfolios. It may arise because an insurer is particularly exposed to a particular peril or
has a concentration of risk in a particular territory.
These are the accumulations of risk described in Chapter 1.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-05: Reinsurance products - background
Accumulations may be:
geographic, eg as a result of floods, hurricanes, earthquakes, volcanic activity
by peril, eg asbestos-related claims from employers’ liability business.
Thus the geographic location of a risk or group of risks is an important consideration in
reinsurance purchases. An insurer must control its aggregations of many individual risks
in one specific area or zone, especially if those risks are subject to natural peril events.
An insurer might also accept business from different sources.
Different sources might include fronting and reciprocal arrangements, which are discussed in the
next chapter.
Therefore, an insurer could have an accumulation of different interests on the same risk and
reinsurance offers protection against these eventualities.
The above considerations could apply to any line of business.
Factors affecting an insurer’s appetite to limit risk
An insurer’s appetite for offsetting its risks through reinsurance is influenced by:
the size of the insurer
the insurer’s experience in the marketplace
Question
Describe briefly how the size of the insurer and the insurer’s experience in the marketplace are
likely to affect the amount of reinsurance a general insurer uses.
Solution
Size of insurer
Larger insurance companies will generally have larger free reserves and a relatively more
diversified portfolio of business and hence will be less exposed to random fluctuation of claims
experience. As a result they may require less reinsurance.
However, it could be argued that larger companies are more likely to write types of business that
‘need’ reinsurance – ie those with large and/or unusual risks. Also, large companies may be more
prone to accumulations.
Experience in the marketplace
If a company has a lot of experience in the marketplace then it will hopefully have sufficient
credible data to be able to make an objective estimate of the expected claims outgo when setting
premium rates and reserves. It should also be able to set sensible policy conditions to help
control the risk. As a result the company will be less likely to use reinsurance to help with these
areas as well as generally limit the claims exposure.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-05: Reinsurance products – background Page 9
the insurer’s available free assets
The larger a company’s available free assets, the bigger cushion it has to absorb claims
costs that are higher than expected. Hence the higher the free reserves, the less the need
for reinsurance.
the size of the insurer’s portfolio
Generally, everything else being equal, the larger the portfolio of business, the more
credible the past claims experience will be and the more predictable the business
outcome will be. Hence, the less the need for reinsurance.
the range within which the business outcome (or profit) can be forecast with
confidence.
Be aware that we have made some very sweeping statements here. There are many factors
affecting the amount and type of reinsurance used and they should all be considered together.
An overriding factor in one case may be a minor factor in a different case. For example, a
company with relatively large free reserves may use more reinsurance than a company with
relatively low free reserves because it writes business with very volatile claims experience.
Cost and availability of reinsurance
Against the above factors, the cost and availability of reinsurance has to be considered.
For some risks at certain phases of the insurance cycle or after particularly large losses (for
example, the terrorist attacks on New York and Washington on 11 September 2001),
reinsurance cover may be restricted or only available at unattractive terms. Reinsurers may
be reluctant to offer cover to an insurer because of its particular approach to underwriting
and claims containment.
Just like insurance companies, reinsurers are in the business to make money, usually for their
shareholders. They generally do not wish to write loss-making business. If there is great
uncertainty about the future claims cost then reinsurers may be inclined not to offer reinsurance
cover or at least charge much higher premiums than had previously been the case.
Question
Suggest when reinsurers might knowingly write loss-making business.
Solution
A reinsurance company may write loss-making business if it expects either to obtain
compensating higher future profits or profits from other connected business (from the same
cedant, or perhaps the same reinsurance broker).
At the bottom of the (re)insurance cycle, premiums across the whole market will be low and so in
order to retain market share reinsurance companies will be forced into accepting loss-making
business. Reinsurers will hope that premiums will soon start to increase and the business
becomes profitable once more.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-05: Reinsurance products - background
Also, it may write some products as a loss leader knowing that it will also be able to sell other
more profitable business on the back of the initial sales.
3.3 Avoidance of large single losses (for example, a liability claim)
The size of a particular risk is very important. Reinsurance can help an insurer to reduce its
involvement on very large risks to containable levels.
What is large to an insurer will depend on the size of the free assets available. Many risks in
insurance have very high payout limits; some may even offer unlimited cover. Many small-
to medium-sized insurance companies will cede a top layer of potentially large payouts to
reinsurers as cover against this eventuality. This is especially true in liability lines of
business where excess of loss reinsurance is commonplace.
We will introduce excess of loss reinsurance in Section 5.2. It is described in more detail in the
next chapter.
A simple example of such use of reinsurance is for bodily injury claims on motor insurance.
Liability claims can be very large, running to millions of pounds, euros, dollars etc. Insurance
companies may want to limit or cap their exposure to such claims to help control the impact on
the free reserves or profits.
3.4 Smoothing of results
By reinsuring the larger risks or accumulation of smaller risks above certain limits, the
development of financial results (or profit) can be smoothed year-on-year, especially when
the portfolio is relatively immature.
For a portfolio that is relatively immature, experience will be uncertain and potentially volatile.
Even for classes where claims are fairly stable and predictable, an immature portfolio may be
relatively small and so may lack diversification.
Reinsurance provides stability by reducing the potential for fluctuations or variations from
the planned result when losses are subject to variations in number and/or size. Purchasing
reinsurance will usually reduce profits, but it might also protect an insurer against severe
losses.
The insurer pays a premium to mitigate these fluctuations, and its net result (or profit) is
more predictable. This predictability may be more acceptable to shareholders and
regulators. Stop loss is a form of reinsurance that could be used for these purposes.
Stop loss will be described in more detail in the next chapter, but as its name suggests it reduces
extreme losses directly and hence helps to smooth profits. However, stop loss isn’t the only type
of reinsurance that will smooth results. Nearly all types of reinsurance will smooth profits to
some degree. This might be achieved by simply limiting claim amounts (as mentioned above)
using excess of loss, or by enabling the insurer to write a larger number of smaller risks and hence
achieve a greater diversification of risk.
3.5 Increasing profitability
Reinsurance can increase the opportunity for an insurer to make a profit and plan its
business more accurately.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-05: Reinsurance products – background Page 11
In the long term, reinsurance premiums are likely to be higher than the reinsurance recoveries
(payments from the reinsurer to the insurer in respect of claims) – the difference covering the
reinsurer’s expenses, profit margin etc. However, in any one year, the insurer’s profits might be
higher as a result of having reinsurance, eg in years where claims recoveries are high.
As discussed in the previous section, reinsurance should smooth results year-on-year by reducing
claim fluctuations. Increased certainty should enable the insurer to plan more effectively, which
may increase profits in the future.
Example
Increased certainty may reduce the amount of capital the insurer needs to hold, and so enable it
to write a greater volume of profitable business. Similarly, increased certainty might enable the
insurer to adopt a riskier investment strategy, and increase the expected return on investments.
3.6 Improving solvency margins
Solvency depends on the relationship between an insurer’s solvency margin and the total
premium income that insurers generate from all the lines of insurance business written.
Governments everywhere use financial regulation to protect consumers. Calculating an
insurer’s solvency margin is an important part of financial regulation and allowance is often
made for reinsurance in this calculation.
Reinsurance is an accepted management tool to improve an insurer’s solvency margin. It
helps an insurer to plan its operations more effectively and strengthen its balance sheet.
If we interpret ‘solvency margin’ as the excess of the value of the assets over the value of the
liabilities, then we can see that in order to improve the solvency position of the insurer, it is
necessary to either:
increase the value of the assets
decrease the value of the liabilities
decrease the regulatory minimum difference between the assets and liabilities
some (or all) of the above.
Reinsurance can help to achieve this.
Increasing the value of the assets
We shall see later that by obtaining certain types of reinsurance, the insurer may be able to
increase the value of the assets. This is described in Section 3.8.
Decreasing the value of the liabilities
By reinsuring the business, the insurer is reducing the value of its liabilities (as some if its liabilities
are ceded to the reinsurer). Therefore, as a result of the reinsurance, it will hold smaller reserves,
and so the solvency position of the insurer will improve, although of course assets will be reduced
by the size of the reinsurance premiums paid.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-05: Reinsurance products - background
Decreasing the regulatory minimum difference
The required solvency level is often calculated with reference to the proportion of business
reinsured. In other words, more reinsurance means a lower solvency requirement, and therefore
a stronger solvency position. However, this reduction may be subject to a limit, since there may
be a legal requirement for an insurance company’s free reserves to exceed a Required Minimum
Margin (RMM). (We mentioned this in Chapter 1.) In other words, you can only reduce the RMM
so far and there will be a minimum level that you still need to hold.
Question
Explain why the allowance for reinsurance might be limited.
Solution
The limit might exist to protect against the risk of reinsurer default. If the reinsurer was unable to
pay its claims then the insurance company would still be liable to pay the original claims to its
policyholders. Therefore, even if an insurance company reinsured all of its business, it would still
need to hold some free reserves in case things went wrong.
3.7 Increasing capacity to accept risk (that is, underwriting capacity: singly or
cumulatively)
Owing to insufficient capital backing, an insurer may be reluctant to accept, or be incapable
of accepting, particular risks by sector or by volume.
For example, an insurer may be unable to accept a risk that is larger than its financial
strength allows.
An insurer may also be reluctant to accept a particular risk if it would be exposed to an
accumulation of risk as a result.
In order to accept new business, the insurer must have adequate capital set aside to cover the
risk. Larger risks will require more capital to be set aside. Therefore very large risks may require
more capital than an insurer has available, in which case the insurer would be unable to accept
the risk.
Reinsurance cover can prevent this situation from occurring. The solvency requirements for a
particular line of business are normally reduced in line with the proportion ceded, although this
may be subject to a limit.
Reinsurance can increase the size of an insurer’s underwriting capacity, allowing it to
compete more effectively in the market.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-05: Reinsurance products – background Page 13
3.8 Financial assistance (new business strain, bolstering free assets,
merger / acquisition)
Reinsurance funds can assist financially with particular business propositions. Where a
particular distribution strategy would involve substantially more cash outflow in the initial
stages than premium income, reinsurance commission may be available in return for future
surplus streams. In effect, the reinsurer lends now (by paying commission) against the
predicted future flows of premiums less expenses and claims.
Proportional reinsurance allows this reimbursement. As companies grow and become
stronger, they tend to use more excess of loss and less proportional reinsurance.
Proportional reinsurance and excess of loss reinsurance are described later in this chapter. We
will also see that there are other types of reinsurance that can be used to improve the free asset
position that involve little or no risk transfer from the insurer to the reinsurer. Such contracts are
referred to as financial reinsurance or finite risk reinsurance and are described in the next
chapter.
An insurer could use a reinsurer as a partner to support its new operations. It can share
developmental and operational costs with the other party.
New business strain / financing projects
Here, the reinsurer is paying some money to the insurance company to improve its cash balance,
for example, to:
enable it to write more business (ie to help meet new business strain)
set up a new distribution channel or computer system (or both if using the internet).
This payment is effectively a loan but is ‘disguised’ as a commission payment for the reinsurance.
In return, the insurer will repay the loan out of the profits it makes on the underlying business.
This type of arrangement may be more attractive to the insurer than, say, a simple bank loan,
because the repayments will only be made if the company does well and profits are made. There
is also an accounting advantage, since the repayments are contingent on profits arising so that
such reinsurance arrangements do not appear as debt on the balance sheet, whereas a bank loan
does.
Bolstering free assets
Where a block of renewing business which is producing regular profits is identified, capital
can be found for the insurer to bolster the free asset position by reinsuring this portfolio of
profitable policies. The reinsurer would pay an initial commission in return for which the
reinsurer would be entitled to the future surplus of premiums over claims for as long as the
arrangement remained in place.
The arrangement mentioned here is identical to that described above except that it’s for a
different reason. The reinsurer still loans some money to the insurer and the loan is repaid out of
future profits. Because the insurer has no liability to repay the loan unless a surplus has been
made, it does not have to reserve for the future payments. So it has increased its assets by the
amount of the loan but not increased its liabilities and hence has improved its free asset position.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-05: Reinsurance products - background
However, the extent to which this is possible will depend on the precise requirements of the
supervisory regime concerned.
Merger / acquisition
In a similar way, reinsurance can be used to facilitate the acquisition of an insurance
company. In this case, a profitable subset of business (or all policies) is identified within
the company being acquired so that the reinsurer is prepared to advance funds in
anticipation of future surplus.
In these last two cases, quota share reinsurance is the usual choice, though any form of
proportional reinsurance might be used.
3.9 Availability of expertise to develop new markets and products
International reinsurers often have considerable knowledge and can provide technical
services and expertise in many insurance products in different countries around the world.
Sometimes an insurer wishes to enter a new insurance market at home or overseas. It
could use a reinsurer’s knowledge in the development and operation of any new insurance
products.
In addition, if an insurer is considering underwriting new risks, unusual risks, or risks in
new territories, the reinsurance broker can provide assistance.
Often it is the broker who is the first port of call for reinsurance expertise.
For example, when an insurer adopts a strategy that will take it into new risk areas where it
has little previous experience, the reinsurance broker can sometimes help with rating,
underwriting and claims management.
When monitoring the policy content, pricing, marketing, sales, sources of acquisition and
results of any new insurance product, it can obtain valuable knowledge to help future
development of its business.
In each of these cases, quota share reinsurance is the usual choice, though any form of
proportional reinsurance might be used.
3.10 Reasons for retrocession
Question
Without reading on, suggest which two of the reasons for purchasing reinsurance are most
relevant in the context of retrocession.
Solution
The most relevant reasons are:
limitation of exposure to risk (single risks, aggregations of single risks, accumulations,
multi-class losses)
increasing capacity to accept risk (singly or cumulatively).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-05: Reinsurance products – background Page 15
Since reinsurers tend to be larger than insurers:
they have less need to avoid large single losses completely
their business is likely to be more diversified, leading to smoother results
their solvency margin may already be adequate – in fact, it may be subject to different
regulations, so that solvency requirements are not as onerous
they are less likely to need financial assistance.
They are also likely to have a fair amount of their own expertise.
The retrocedant purchases the retrocession to gain additional capacity or to contain or
reduce its risk of loss on a specific or aggregate basis. In particular, a reinsurer would
require a retrocession protection if it has limited capital and is heavily exposed to specific
geographical regions and/or classes of business.
Typically, retrocession protections are written on an excess of loss basis. Retrocession
protections can protect the retrocedant’s facultative, proportional or excess of loss
business, or a combination of the three, which may lead to spiral of cover.
A spiral of cover can occur when reinsurers write retrocession business on risks that they already
have exposure to through other reinsurance arrangements. They can therefore (sometimes
unknowingly) end up reinsuring themselves.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-05: Reinsurance products - background
4 Ways of writing reinsurance business
How are insured risks reinsured?
individually, (that is, facultative reinsurance)
groups of similar risks, (that is, treaty reinsurance).
Insurers cede risks either facultatively or by treaty according to how they weigh up the
advantages and disadvantages of each arrangement.
4.1 Facultative reinsurance
Facultative reinsurance is the reinsurance of a single risk.
When each individual risk on which reinsurance is required is offered separately to a
reinsurer, the risk is said to be offered facultatively. There is no obligation for the ceding
company to offer the business, nor is the reinsurer obliged to accept it. Each case is
considered on its own merits and the reinsurer is free to quote whatever terms and
conditions it sees fit to impose for that risk.
For example, the direct writer may be asked to provide cover for a large risk. While negotiating
terms with the potential policyholder, the direct writer will seek out a willing reinsurer that is
prepared to accept a portion of the risk on the best terms.
Advantages and disadvantages
The main advantage of facultative reinsurance is the flexibility that both parties have within the
process. For example, the direct writer is under no obligation to use a particular reinsurer. The
direct writer can approach several reinsurers in search of the best terms for each risk individually.
Similarly, the reinsurer is under no obligation to accept risks.
The main disadvantages to the insurer of facultative reinsurance include:
it is a time-consuming and costly exercise to place such risks
there is no certainty that the required cover will be available when needed
even if cover is available, the price and terms may be unacceptable
the primary insurer may be unable to accept a large risk until it has been able to find
the required reinsurance cover. This means the insurer cannot accept business
automatically when it is offered, and consequently its standing in the market may be
reduced.
This form of reinsurance placing is, therefore, usually limited to large one-off risks, or to
risks that fall outside the scope of any treaty reinsurance arrangements available to the
primary insurer.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-05: Reinsurance products – background Page 17
4.2 Treaty reinsurance
Arranging reinsurance for each individual risk is administratively messy. Therefore direct writers
may instead set up treaties with reinsurers. This allows them to place business with the reinsurer
automatically. The terms and conditions of the treaty are carefully laid down so that both parties
know exactly where they stand. An insurer will also wish to use reinsurance to control its
solvency and growth requirements. This can be done more readily by treaty than by facultative
reinsurance.
Treaty reinsurance is the reinsurance of a group of similar risks under one reinsurance
agreement.
Treaties are usually arranged so that the ceding insurer is obliged under the terms of the
treaty to pass on some of the risk in a defined manner and the reinsurer is obliged to accept
it.
This is known as an obligatory / obligatory (oblig / oblig) basis: in other words, the insurer is
obliged to pass the risk on and the reinsurer is obliged to accept it. Such an arrangement is
common in quota share treaties, which are covered in the next chapter.
Occasionally, treaties may be written on a facultative / obligatory basis. Under such an
arrangement, for each risk, the insurer has the choice of whether to include it in the treaty,
but the reinsurer is obliged to accept all the requested risks. Such treaties are normally
associated with reciprocal arrangements, whereby each insurer reinsures a block of
business with the other.
Here, the direct writer is under no obligation to use a particular reinsurer to cover the risk, but the
reinsurer has to accept the risk if offered it, subject to the terms of the treaty. Potentially, with
fac / oblig treaties there is scope for a direct writer to select against a reinsurer because the direct
writer can pick and choose which risks to keep and which to reinsure. Such an arrangement is
common in surplus treaties, which are covered in the next chapter.
Question
Explain what is likely to happen if the direct writer manages to select against the reinsurer so that
the reinsurer’s experience is much worse than the direct writer’s experience.
Solution
The reinsurer is likely to increase premiums or change the terms of the treaty in favour of the
reinsurer at the next renewal date of the treaty.
The reinsurer may even decide not to reinsure the direct writer again.
Advantages and disadvantages
A treaty does not have the disadvantages mentioned above for facultative reinsurance and
insurers, therefore, tend to place the bulk of reinsurance cover on a treaty basis.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-05: Reinsurance products - background
The features of treaties are very much the reverse of the features of facultative reinsurance:
Efficient: Risks are reinsured automatically. This is administratively quicker and cheaper.
Certain: With a treaty, the direct writer knows that reinsurance is available (if the risk falls
within the limits of the treaty) and on what terms.
Inflexible: Once the treaty is set up, then both parties must operate within the terms of the
treaty (so each should ensure it is happy with the terms before it signs the treaty).
Terms within the treaty
It is essential for both the direct writer and the reinsurer that the treaty is absolutely precise in its
definition of:
what is and what is not covered
the financial arrangements (ie premiums, commissions, timing of payments)
the obligations of both parties.
The treaty document sets out all the relevant details and obligations under the arrangement,
though the wording differs for different types of reinsurance. There will also be wide
differences in wording between treaties in any one category.
Question
List 20 items that might be included in a reinsurance treaty.
Solution
Depending on the type of reinsurance contract, the details set out in the treaty will include some
of the following:
names of the parties to the treaty
period of cover
territorial limits
class(es) of business covered
exclusions to the cover
definition of loss occurrence
retention of the ceding company
cover granted automatically by the reinsurer
reinstatement provisions
a stability clause
premium rate
premium payment arrangements
ceding commissions payable
profit commission payable to the direct writer and the method of calculation
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-05: Reinsurance products – background Page 19
brokerage payable to reinsurance brokers
claim notification arrangements
claim payment arrangements, including special arrangements for large claims
rendering and settlement of accounts
a currency clause (if more than one currency is involved)
access by the reinsurer to risk details
terms for termination of the treaty (period of notice, etc)
sunset clause (specifies the discovery period)
an arbitration clause, in case of disagreements arising.
Check the Glossary if you are not familiar with any of the terms above.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-05: Reinsurance products - background
5 Traditional reinsurance – an overview
So far we have discussed facultative and treaty methods of reinsurance, ie the methods by which
reinsurers agree to accept risks. We have not discussed the mechanisms by which the premium
and claims payments under a reinsurance contract are passed to the reinsurer. These are now
discussed below.
There are two main methods of reinsurance:
proportional – whereby the direct writer cedes a proportion of the risk, passing on a
proportion of the premium, and the reinsurer pays that proportion of the claims
non-proportional – whereby the direct writer pays the reinsurer an agreed premium, and
in return the reinsurer pays out for claims between specified limits.
In each case, the reinsurer will usually obtain business through specialist brokers who will
receive commission for placing the business.
This commission is paid by the reinsurer and is usually called brokerage.
5.1 Proportional reinsurance
Under proportional reinsurance, the reinsurer covers an agreed proportion of each risk and
the reinsurance premium is proportional to this risk ceded.
The proportion may be constant for all risks covered (that is, quota share) or may, to some
extent, be at the discretion of the ceding insurer (that is, surplus).
Quota share and surplus reinsurance are discussed in detail in Chapter 6.
Proportional reinsurance reduces the size of the ceding insurer’s net account, and so it can
be used as a means of accepting a larger size of risk than would otherwise be possible.
By purchasing proportional reinsurance, the insurer can retain a smaller share of a larger
number of risks and hence increase the diversification within its portfolio, reducing the
volatility of the overall result.
5.2 Non-proportional reinsurance
Although proportional reinsurance can be used to spread risk and to reduce pro rata the
size of risk retained, it does not cap the cost of very large claims that occur.
Under non-proportional reinsurance, the reinsurer covers the loss suffered by the insurer
that exceeds a certain amount, called the attachment point, retention or priority up to the
policy limit.
Under excess of loss (XL) reinsurance, the cost to an insurer of a large claim is capped with
the liability above a certain level being passed to a reinsurer. However, if the claim amount
exceeds the upper limit of the reinsurance, the excess will revert back to the insurer.
Variations of this form of reinsurance cover exist to limit an insurer’s loss from a single
event or over a given period.
Non-proportional types of reinsurance include risk excess of loss, stop loss or aggregate
excess of loss reinsurance.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-05: Reinsurance products – background Page 21
With non-proportional reinsurance:
The limit might operate on individual claims (eg to cover against large individual risks), or
on aggregations of claims (eg to cover against widespread damage from one event).
There might also be an upper limit, above which the reinsurer’s liability ends.
The reinsurer might pay for all claims within the limits or perhaps a proportion of the
claims within the limits (eg 90%). This could also be expressed as having a deductible
of 10%.
The limits might be linked to inflation.
Question
Suggest what types of individual risks non-proportional reinsurance is likely to be particularly
useful for.
Solution
For classes where claims are potentially very large or even unlimited. Claims from liability classes
of business fall into this category.
5.3 Different reinsurance bases
The natural basis for writing proportional reinsurance policies is to provide cover for those
policies written by the primary insurer during the term of the reinsurance contract (that is, a
policies-incepting basis). Claims-made policies and losses-occurring policies may also be
written, although the latter in particular are more commonly used for non-proportional
reinsurance.
Claims-made and losses-occurring policies were discussed in terms of insurance bases in
Chapter 2.
Policies-incepting basis
With this type of arrangement the reinsurer provides cover to the direct writer for the claims
arising from all policies written under the treaty over a period, ie corresponding to an
‘underwriting-period’ cohort. This is the natural arrangement with all proportional types of
reinsurance: all policies written during the same period will be subject to the same proportion
ceded.
This is also known as a risks-attaching basis, or a risks attaching during (RAD) basis.
Question
Explain why proportional reinsurance is likely to be arranged on a policies-incepting basis.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-05: Reinsurance products - background
Solution
With proportional reinsurance the direct writer cedes a specified portion of a risk to the reinsurer.
It is natural that they provide cover in the defined proportions throughout the duration of the
risk. That way both the division of cover into different accounting periods and the dates when
any claims are reported become irrelevant.
Losses-occurring basis
This basis provides the direct writer with cover for any claim incident(s) under the treaty occurring
within a defined period, ie corresponding to an ‘accident-period’ cohort. This is commonly used
with non-proportional types of reinsurance: any claims occurring within a certain period will be
subject to the same retention level and upper limit.
Claims-made basis
This basis would provide the direct writer with cover for any claims reported under the treaty
reported to them within a defined period, ie corresponding to a ‘reporting-period’ cohort.
Question
Suggest the main issue that the reinsurer should consider before providing cover on a
claims-made basis.
Solution
Unexpectedly large numbers or amounts of claims may be reported in a given period. This could
be as a result of latent types of claim, eg asbestos-related claims and industrial deafness claims,
which have come to light some time after the claim incidents occurred.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-05: Reinsurance products – background Page 23
6 Other types and alternatives to reinsurance – an overview
Other reinsurance products include:
finite risk reinsurance
run-off reinsurance.
Capital market products may also be available as an alternative to reinsurance.
These are discussed in detail in the next chapter.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-05: Reinsurance products - background
7 Glossary items
Having studied this chapter you should now read the following Glossary items:
Broker
Captive
Ceding company (cedant)
Co-reinsurance
Direct business
Excess of loss (XL or XOL) reinsurance
Facultative-obligatory reinsurance
Facultative reinsurance
Fronting
Inwards reinsurance
Letter of credit
Net premium
Non-proportional reinsurance
Outwards reinsurance
Primary insurer
Proportional reinsurance
Reciprocity
Retrocession
Retrocessionaire
Treaty reinsurance.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-05: Reinsurance products – background Page 25
Chapter 5 Summary
Reinsurance
Reinsurance is a means by which an insurance company can protect itself against the risk of
losses by ceding the risk to other companies (reinsurers).
Retrocession is a means by which a reinsurance company can protect itself against the risk of
losses by ceding risks to other reinsurance companies (retrocessionaires).
Participants in the reinsurance market
Reinsurance business is often sold by reinsurance intermediaries, ie brokers. Their role is
primarily a sales role, using their specialist knowledge and their contacts in order to get the
best reinsurance price for their clients. They may also provide expertise.
An alternative to reinsurance intermediaries is professional reinsurers dealing directly with
buyers.
Fronting occurs when an insurer underwrites a risk and cedes it all (or nearly all) to another
insurer. The fronting insurer will receive a fee.
A captive insurance company may be established to self-insure risk. This often has
regulatory and tax advantages.
Reasons for reinsurance
The main reasons for reinsurance are:
limitation of exposure to risk or spreading of risk – the need for this will depend on
the size of the insurer, its portfolio, its level of free assets, its experience and the
type(s) of business written
avoidance of large single losses (eg liability claims) – what is ‘large’ will depend on
the size of the insurer and the free assets available
smoothing of results – reducing claim fluctuations
increasing profitability – reinsurance can increase the opportunity for an insurer to
make a profit and plan its business more accurately
improving solvency margin – reinsurance helps an insurer to plan its operations more
effectively and strengthen its balance sheet
increasing capacity to accept risk (singly or cumulatively) – this can enable the
insurer to compete more effectively in the market
financial assistance (new business strain, bolstering free assets, merger / acquisition)
– the reinsurer can lend the insurer cash now, which will be repaid out of the
insurer’s future profits
availability of expertise to develop new markets and products – expertise may be
needed if the insurer is entering a new market or writing new risks, unusual risks, or
in new territories.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-05: Reinsurance products - background
The benefits provided by reinsurance must be weighed up against the cost and availability of
the reinsurance.
The reasons for retrocession are to gain additional capacity or to contain or reduce risk of
loss (singly or cumulatively).
Ways of writing reinsurance business
Facultative reinsurance is the reinsurance of a single risk. There is no obligation for the
ceding company to offer the business and no obligation for the reinsurer to accept it. It is a
flexible way of writing reinsurance business, but is time consuming and uncertain in terms of
the availability of reinsurance and price.
Treaty reinsurance is the reinsurance of a group of similar risks under one reinsurance
arrangement. The reinsurer is obliged to accept risks that fall under the terms of the treaty.
The treaty document sets out all relevant details and obligations.
Traditional reinsurance
Reinsurance may be:
Proportional – the reinsurer covers an agreed proportion of each risk and the
reinsurance premium is proportional to the risk ceded
Non-proportional – the reinsurer covers the loss suffered above the insurer’s
retention, possibly subject to an upper limit.
Proportional reinsurance is usually written on a policies-incepting basis. Non-proportional
reinsurance is often written on a losses-occurring basis. A third option is a claims-made
basis.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-05: Reinsurance products – background Page 27
Chapter 5 Practice Questions
5.1 (i) List the reasons why an insurer might wish to become the fronting insurer in a fronting
Exam style
arrangement. [3]
(ii) State the main risk associated with being a fronting insurer and how this risk can be
reduced. [2]
[Total 5]
5.2 Describe the purposes for which a medium-sized insurance company, writing all lines of general
Exam style
insurance business, might use reinsurance. [6]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-05: Reinsurance products - background
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-05: Reinsurance products – background Page 29
Chapter 5 Solutions
5.1 (i) Reasons for becoming a fronting insurer
The fronting insurer:
will typically receive a fee to cover its expenses and profit [½]
may wish to retain a presence in a particular market while having limited risk there [½]
may benefit from a fronting arrangement with a well-known insurer, and so may build itself
a presence in the market [½]
may be able to keep a small amount of the risks taken on, which may be profitable [½]
may be able to build up expertise on a particular product or territory through the fronting
arrangement [½]
may benefit from tax advantages. [½]
[Total 3]
(ii) Main risk and ways of reducing it
The main risk to the fronting insurer is that the assuming insurer fails to meet its obligations to
the policyholder, in which case the fronting insurer is legally liable to the insured. [1]
In order to reduce this risk, the fronting insurer should assess the credit risk of the assuming
insurer before entering into the fronting agreement. [½]
The fronting company may require the risk-bearing party to provide some form of collateral to
help mitigate the credit risk; for example a letter of credit. [½]
Additionally, the fronting insurer could front for a number of different insurers to reduce the
concentration of credit risk with any one assuming insurer. [½]
[Maximum 2]
5.2 Reinsurance may be used to allow the company to write business that could lead to large claims.
[½]
Reinsurance may reduce or truncate these large claims and protect the solvency margin of the
insurer. [½]
Protection may be obtained for individual large claims or an accumulation of claims. [½]
Reinsurance may be used to help to diversify the portfolio of risk ... [½]
… perhaps with the use of a reciprocal arrangement. [½]
Reinsurance may be used to control or fine-tune the risk exposure without reducing market share.
[½]
This includes writing more risks through better use of capital. [½]
Reinsurance can reduce claim fluctuations and hence smooth profits and perhaps dividends. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-05: Reinsurance products - background
It may also be used to reduce any statutory required minimum margin. [½]
The company may wish to benefit from technical assistance offered by the reinsurance company
or broker. This may include help with setting premium rates, policy terms and conditions and
claims control. [1]
Reinsurance may be used to improve the financial position of the company, including the
cashflow position and the balance sheet. [½]
It may be a statutory requirement to use a minimum level of reinsurance. [½]
[Maximum 6]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 1
Reinsurance products – types
Syllabus objectives
1.2 Describe the main types of general reinsurance products and the purposes for which
they may be used.
Covered in part in this chapter.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
0 Introduction
In this chapter, we look in detail at the different types of reinsurance product.
We start by looking at traditional reinsurance products. Proportional and non-proportional
reinsurance were introduced in the last chapter.
Section 1: Quota share reinsurance (proportional)
Section 2: Surplus reinsurance (proportional)
Section 3: Excess of loss reinsurance (non-proportional)
Section 4: Stop loss (non-proportional)
We then go on to discuss other types of reinsurance products, which have been developed to
meet specific needs of insurers.
Section 5: Finite risk (or financial) reinsurance
Section 6: Run-off reinsurance
Reinsurers may not have the capacity to meet all an insurer’s needs in terms of limiting exposure
to risk and providing financial assistance, therefore the insurer may have to seek assistance
elsewhere. We conclude the chapter by looking at some alternatives to reinsurance, available
from the capital markets.
Section 7: Capital market products
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 3
1 Quota share reinsurance
1.1 How quota share operates
Quota share reinsurance is a form of proportional reinsurance where the apportionment of
claims and premiums between the insurer and reinsurer is constant for all risks covered by
the treaty.
Suppose the direct writer decides that for a particular class it does not want to retain all the
business it writes. So the direct writer enters into a quota share treaty with a reinsurer. Then a
constant proportion of each and every risk within the scope of the treaty is automatically passed
to the reinsurer. The treaty will specify the proportion to be ceded to the reinsurer, R% say. This
is often referred to as an R% quota share treaty.
However, in some markets, there is extensive use of quota share reinsurance to cover
single risks on a fully proportional but facultative basis.
In other words, quota share can either be written by treaty covering a number of risks or on a
facultative basis covering a single risk.
Premiums
The direct writer passes to the reinsurer R% of the policyholders’ premiums for risks covered
within the treaty. (In general insurance, under proportional reinsurance everything is shared with
the reinsurer in the specified proportion. Note that this is not always the case for life and health
products, where the premium may not be split in the same proportion to the claims.)
Claims
The direct writer recovers from the reinsurer R% of the claims from risks covered by the treaty.
Commission
The direct writer (the cedant in the reinsurance arrangement) will have suffered expenses in
order to sell the original policies (for example, commission to brokers). The reinsurer will
reimburse the direct writer with some percentage of the premium to help cover the acquisition
expenses. This payment is often called return commission.
For example, consider a policy with an original insurance premium of £100. If a 40% quota share
treaty is in place with a return commission of 4%, then the return commission (paid from the
reinsurer to the insurer) is £1.60 (4% of 40% of £100).
To compensate the direct writer for the extra work that it will have carried out in attracting and
administering the business, the reinsurer may pay a further commission payment to the direct
writer. The commission paid over and above the return commission is sometimes called override
commission. The sum of the return and override commission is often called the ceding
commission (although sometimes the return commission alone is called the ceding commission).
To add to the confusion, the Glossary states that sometimes the return commission is called the
override commission. Whichever terminology you use in the exam, be sure to define it.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
In practice, the ceding commission is rarely split up between return and override commission but
hopefully the total will be sufficient recompense for the expenses incurred by the insurer.
However, market forces (eg competition from other reinsurers) and the profitability of the
reinsurance contract will be the most important factors that influence the total amount of
commission that is paid.
There might also be a form of profit commission, which the reinsurer pays the direct writer as a
reward for passing on good business. This would be calculated (on a pre-agreed basis) at the end
of the year or end of the treaty when the claims experience is known.
In addition, brokerage would usually be paid out by the reinsurer if the reinsurance has been
arranged through a reinsurance broker.
Question
A direct writer has a 50% quota share treaty with a reinsurer.
For a risk with a gross premium of $10,000, the direct writer pays commission of 15% and receives
15% return commission from the reinsurer. The reinsurer also pays 5% override commission.
Calculate how much premium is received by the direct writer and the reinsurer after allowing for
commissions. Comment on whether these relative levels of premium look fair.
If there is subsequently a claim for $50,000, calculate how much the direct writer will be able to
reclaim from the reinsurer.
Solution
The first split of the premium is $5,000 to each of the direct writer and the quota share reinsurer.
But the direct writer pays commission of $1,500 (ie 15% of $10,000) and receives $1,000
(ie 20% of $5,000) from the reinsurer.
This leaves the net of commission premiums as $4,500 for the direct writer and $4,000 for the
quota share reinsurer.
This split doesn’t look unfair. You would expect the direct writer to have a bigger share to
compensate for the initial work.
The direct writer would be able to reclaim $25,000 from the reinsurer on a claim of $50,000.
Practical considerations
The administration of quota share is very straightforward.
Because each risk has the same proportion reinsured, there is no need for anything more than a
list of all the risks with total premiums and total claims. The premiums and claims payable
between the direct writer and the reinsurer are a straight proportion of the totals.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 5
1.2 Cedant’s claims experience
The cedant’s loss ratio for the account will be approximately the same before and after
reinsurance, since the premiums and claims are ceded in the same proportion, depending
on the treatment of commissions.
Note that the commissions paid by the reinsurer to the insurer can vary depending on, for
example, market practice and the relationship between the reinsurer and insurer. Therefore, the
reinsurer’s loss ratio can be different from the insurer’s loss ratio. However, it is common
practice to ignore commission (reinsurance or otherwise) when calculating loss ratios, in which
case the loss ratios would be identical.
1.3 Reinsurer’s claims experience
The cedant and reinsurer will have proportionately the same overall underwriting
experience on the business included in the treaty, apart from differences in expenses and
commissions. The reinsurer will, therefore, be concerned at the outset to establish:
the nature of the business being offered
the cedant’s attitude to underwriting and claims settlement
any previous experience of this business.
If the reinsurer is unhappy with any of these aspects, it can refuse to participate in the treaty
or ensure that the level of commission written into the treaty is low in expectation of poor
experience. On occasions, the reinsurer may reserve the right in the treaty to be involved in
the approval and settlement process for claims above a certain size. The reinsurer might
also negotiate for part of the commission payment to the cedant to be a profit commission
that is payable only if the business ceded meets specified profitability criteria.
Since the capacity of the reinsurer to write such business may be limited, the treaty may
specify a limit on the amount of business that may be ceded to the treaty. This limit will
normally be expressed in terms of the original gross premium income of the cedant for that
business.
1.4 Advantages of quota share
The main advantages of quota share to the direct writer are that:
It spreads risk, enabling insurers to write larger portfolios of risk and encourage
reciprocal business.
At one level, the principle is very simple. An insurer’s risks are better spread by retaining
50% of 1,000 risks than 100% of 500 risks.
Quota share can also help spread risks through reciprocity. This is where two insurers
agree to swap some business on a reciprocating basis.
For example, Company A may have a 40% quota share treaty with Company B for business
it writes directly, while Company B has a similar quota share treaty with Company A.
Provided the two portfolios are not perfectly correlated, both companies will have
achieved a better spread of risks. An example of this would be two household insurers,
covering different geographic areas, spreading risk to limit the impact of storms.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
A large, established insurer will be far less dependent (if at all) on quota share as a
means of spreading risk than a small, new insurer. However, large insurers often
employ quota share extensively for marine and some aviation business to spread
the risk, or reciprocate business in smaller classes.
It directly improves the solvency ratio and helps the insurer to satisfy the statutory
solvency requirement.
The solvency ratio is normally defined as free assets divided by net written premiums.
Using quota share will reduce net written premiums and hence increase the solvency ratio
in the short term.
Many statutory solvency requirements are based on net written premiums. The
legislation may require that the company has a solvency margin at least as great as a
defined percentage of net written premium. Quota share can be used to directly reduce
this type of solvency margin requirement.
In addition:
it is administratively simple
the commission may help with cashflow.
1.5 Disadvantages of quota share
The main disadvantages to an insurer of ceding business by quota share are that:
It cedes the same proportion of low-variance and high-variance risks.
It is often totally inflexible, since a set percentage of all risks must be passed to the
reinsurer, whether or not the direct writer wants to cede the particular risk.
It cedes the same proportion of each risk, irrespective of size. The insurer may,
however, wish to cede a greater proportion of the larger risks than the smaller ones,
owing to their greater loss potential.
It is not a good way of protecting against catastrophes or very large claims. Note that it
does not cap very large claims, since insurers are still liable for a percentage of that very
large claim.
It passes a share of any profit to the reinsurer.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 7
2 Surplus reinsurance
2.1 How surplus operates
Surplus reinsurance is a form of proportional reinsurance where the proportions are
determined by the cedant for each individual risk covered by the treaty, subject to
restrictions defined in the treaty.
The mechanics for operating surplus can at first be a bit confusing. However, if you take a
common sense approach, then it becomes much clearer. In the following explanation, the
principles are described without using the usual terminology for surplus reinsurance. We will
introduce these afterwards.
‘Common sense’ approach
Let’s start by imagining that there is a direct writer who specialises in industrial fire risks. The
company’s size and free reserves are such that risks greater than £200,000 are too big. A problem
faced by the company is that the number of buildings the company can insure is severely limited.
Without any form of reinsurance, the company would have to decline all risks over £200,000.
So it sets up a surplus reinsurance treaty which allows it to cede to a reinsurer the share of the
risk that it doesn’t want to keep.
Suppose that it insures a property with a maximum loss of £400,000. The direct writer might
choose to keep only 50% (so that the retained risk is limited to £200,000) and 50% of the risk is
ceded to the reinsurer. For this particular risk, the direct writer passes on 50% of the premium.
The reinsurer is then obliged to cover 50% of all claims from this risk.
The next property has a maximum loss of £1,000,000. The direct writer passes on 80% of the risk
to the surplus reinsurer, retaining 20%. In this way, the direct writer has effectively engineered
another property risk of size £200,000.
Note that the insurer is not paying all claims up to £200,000 and passing the excess to the
reinsurer since that would be excess of loss reinsurance. It is instead using the £200,000 to
determine the proportion of risk it wishes to keep. So in the second example, the reinsurer would
pay 80% of all claims, whatever their size.
For some risks, the insurer may choose to keep less than the maximum retention. With the
maximum loss of £1,000,000, it might choose to retain only 10% of claims and engineer the risk
down to £100,000. The retention does not have to be the same for all risks which differs from
the surplus reinsurance that you may have met in life reinsurance.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
Question
A direct writer has a limit of £50,000 exposure to any one risk. Assuming there is surplus
reinsurance that will absorb all the risks not wanted by the direct writer, and that the direct writer
retains the maximum for each risk, calculate the premiums due to and the claims due from the
reinsurer for the following risks:
Risk Size Gross premium Claim information
1 £300,000 £4,500 no claims
2 £450,000 £6,000 one claim for £80,000
3 £60,000 £1,500 no claims
4 £40,000 £700 no claims
5 £1,000,000 £12,000 no claims
6 £500,000 £7,200 one claim for £50,000
Solution
Direct Writer Reinsurer
Size Premium Claim Premium Claim
£300,000 £750 – £3,750 –
£450,000 £667 £8,889 £5,333 £71,111
£60,000 £1,250 – £250 –
£40,000 £700 – – –
£1,000,000 £600 – £11,400 –
£500,000 £720 £5,000 £6,480 £45,000
If you got the right answer to the last question, you probably understand the principles of surplus
reinsurance. Let’s now define surplus reinsurance using the correct terminology.
Measuring the risk: estimated / expected maximum loss (EML)
We have used the expression ‘size’ in the previous examples when describing different risks. But
how would size be measured?
It could be sum insured. However, this is not necessarily the basis a company would use when
deciding on whether a risk is too large. Consider two different risks:
Risk 1: 30 individual buildings spread around a site. Total sum insured of £15m.
Risk 2: One large office block. Total sum insured of £10m.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 9
A single insurer could conceivably insure all 30 buildings, but decline the office block on the
grounds that it was too big. So how can £10m be ‘bigger’ than £15m? The office block is bigger in
that there is a much more concentrated risk. The possible loss from one incident with Risk 2 may
be much greater than the possible loss from one incident involving Risk 1, which might typically
involve a loss of about £½m.
For the purpose of determining the proportion of each risk to be retained or ceded, the
ceding insurer needs to have a satisfactory measure of risk. For most classes this can
simply be the sum insured specified in the original policy. However, for certain classes
(and in particular for commercial fire), the full sum insured is very unlikely to be paid out in
the event of a claim under a large risk, especially if the sum insured is spread over several
sites. For such classes the EML is used as the measure of the risk.
Definition – Estimated maximum loss (EML)
The ‘estimated maximum loss’ is the largest loss that is reasonably expected to arise from a
single risk.
The EML will be based on the cedant’s view as to the maximum loss that could arise from a single
event (eg a fire or explosion). The EML could be considerably less than the sum insured for
policies that cover several buildings. Even for a single tower block, the EML might be based on
the value of several floors rather than the cost of rebuilding the whole block. This will depend on
the capability of the fire precautions, such as sprinkler systems.
Defining the limits
The treaty will specify the limits for any risk to be included in the treaty. In particular, it might
specify the:
insurer’s minimum retention
insurer’s maximum retention
reinsurer’s maximum level of cover.
Question
Explain why a reinsurer might require an insurer to have a:
minimum retention level
maximum retention level.
Solution
The reinsurer might require a minimum retention level in order to prevent the insurer from
having too little interest in the risk. Having too little interest in the risk could lead to poor
underwriting or claims management with respect to that risk.
The reinsurer might require a maximum retention level (in percentage terms) in order to prevent
very small proportions of individual risks being passed on, as these are likely to be
administratively expensive (compared to the size of the risk).
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
Minimum and maximum retentions also help the reinsurer to avoid anti-selection by the cedant.
Without them, the cedant could retain very high proportions of the risks it believes to be ‘good’
and very low proportions of those it believes to be ‘bad’.
Definition – Minimum retention
This is the minimum level of retention the reinsurer requires to prevent the insurer from
having too little interest in the risk. This requires the insurer to retain all risks that fall
below the minimum retention.
This is the minimum level of retention for the insurer.
Definition – Maximum retention (R)
This is the maximum level of retention for any risk to be included in the treaty and will be
specified in the treaty.
This is the maximum level of retention for the insurer.
Definition – Number of lines of cover (L)
This is specified in the contract and is used to calculate the maximum cover available from
the reinsurer. The maximum cover available from the reinsurer is calculated as L multiplied
by R.
This defines the maximum level of cover provided by the reinsurer. Reinsurers are typically much
larger than insurers and can usually withstand higher levels of risk. Therefore the reinsurer is
likely to be able to offer cover at a higher level than the insurer. This is why the reinsurer’s
maximum cover may be expressed as a multiple of the insurer’s maximum cover.
The maximum number of lines is the biggest multiple of the direct writer’s chosen retention that
the surplus reinsurer would accept, ie effectively this defines the cedant’s minimum proportion as
1 / (1 L) and the reinsurer’s maximum proportion as L / (1 L) .
The insurer’s maximum retention (R) plus the reinsurer’s maximum level of cover ( L R ) will
determine the maximum size of risk that can be placed on the treaty.
The maximum size of risk that can be placed on the treaty (including the cedant’s retention)
will be:
(1 L) R
It may help to visualise what’s going on here. The diagram on the following page shows the limits
that the treaty will specify.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 11
$m
Maximum level
of cover = (1+L)R
LR
Reinsurer's maximum
cover
3R
2R
Maximum
retention = R
Minimum Insurer's maximum
retention retention
Determination of proportion ceded
The treaty lays down a framework within which the insurer can select, for each individual
risk, the amount that will be ceded to the reinsurer and the amount that it wishes to retain.
So far, we have just looked at what the treaty will specify – we have not considered how much of
each risk the insurer will actually choose to retain, and how this will be specified in terms of lines.
Let’s look at this now.
Given any risk, E, normally measured by the EML, up to a maximum size of (1 L) R , the
insurer will analyse the nature of the risk and select a retention to keep (call this r ). Note
that r R and r is not less than any treaty-stipulated minimum.
Question
Draw on the diagram above:
an EML (E) which satisfies the condition in the previous paragraph
the region in which r may be chosen.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
Solution
$m
Maximum level
of cover = (1+L)R
LR
3R
2R
Maximum
retention = R
r
Minimum
retention
Note that if E exceeds (1+L)R then the insurer will probably have to arrange further reinsurance,
eg a second surplus treaty.
Note also that retentions will vary from case to case and indeed a number of risks, though
covered by the scope of the treaty, may not be ceded under the arrangement.
Question
Suggest two examples of risks that may not be ceded to the reinsurer.
Solution
Risks may not be ceded to the reinsurer if:
the EML (E) falls below the insurer’s minimum retention
the EML (E) is above the maximum size of a risk, ie (1 L) R (where R is the insurer’s
maximum retention). Therefore, the insurer will probably be unable to cede this risk
unless additional arrangements are made (eg a second surplus treaty).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 13
Where the risk does not exceed the capacity of the treaty, the balance of cover (E r ) will
be ceded to the treaty (ie the reinsurer). This will require (E r ) / r lines of cover, with each
whole line being of the same value (r) as that retained by the insurer. Call this number of
lines k (where k L ). The original premium and all claims for that risk will then be shared
between the insurer and the reinsurer in the proportion 1:k.
It’s often useful to remember that for a specific risk:
E r k 1
and also note that k does not have to be an integer.
Where, for example a treaty specifies: R $2 m , L 5 lines, the maximum that could be
written (retention plus full coverage provided by the treaty) would be (1 5) $2m $12m . If
a particular risk has an EML of only $6m, the insurer has a number of options available:
(a) retain the maximum of $2m and place the remainder by two lines of cover (each
$2m)
(b) use the maximum lines of cover, five, each $1m, and retain only $1m, provided that
this is not less than the minimum retention
(c) adopt any intermediate approach between the two extremes.
Question
With reference to the question on page 8, calculate the following:
(a) the direct writer’s retention
(b) how many lines of surplus reinsurance were used for each risk
(c) the ‘size’ of the largest risk that is covered by this surplus reinsurance treaty if the
maximum number of lines the reinsurer will accept is 12.
Solution
(a) The direct writer’s retention is: £50,000
(b) The number of lines used was (in the order given): 5, 8, 1/5, 0, 19, 9
(c) The largest allowable risk would be: £650,000 if 12 lines were available
Premiums
Surplus is proportional. (You must hang on to that fact, even if ‘EMLs’ and ‘lines’ worry you.)
Therefore, once a risk has been accepted under the treaty, the premiums for that individual risk
are shared in the specified proportion, ie 1:k, where k is the number of lines used for the risk in
question.
Unlike quota share, you will not be sure at the time the treaty is set up how the total premiums
will be split between the two parties. It will depend on what risks are actually written and what
proportion of each risk is ceded.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
Claims
For the individual risk, the claims are split in the same proportion as the premiums, irrespective of
the size of claim. Even if there was a disaster and the total loss was greater than the EML, the
claim would still be split in the specified proportions.
Because the proportions vary from risk to risk, there is no way of telling what the split of total
claims will be between the two companies. It is possible for the overall experience of the direct
writer and the reinsurer to be quite different.
Question
Explain the main difference between quota share and surplus reinsurance.
Solution
Whereas quota share has the same proportion of every risk ceded to the reinsurer, the proportion
ceded will vary from risk to risk with surplus reinsurance.
Commission
There may be return commission, override commission and profit commission in the same way as
with quota share reinsurance (and brokerage if the reinsurance was arranged by a broker).
Second surplus treaty
Some of the larger risks may exceed the capacity of the first surplus treaty, and therefore
need another reinsurance facility to protect them. It is common, therefore, to find a second
surplus treaty in place with another reinsurer, in order to accommodate automatically that
part of any risk exceeding the limit of the first surplus. There may also be a third, or even
fourth, surplus treaty for some of the larger accounts.
The second surplus acts concurrently with the first surplus for those risks that involve both
treaties. The size of line used under each treaty will be the same, both being based on the
cedant’s retention.
Therefore even if a claim does not exceed the capacity of the first surplus treaty, the risks will still
be shared in the pre-defined proportions between the cedant and the two reinsurers.
The usual practice would be to use the whole of the first surplus capacity for a risk, before
placing the balance on the second surplus treaty. Some treaties may require this, but in
other cases the treaty may stipulate that at least as much risk would have to be placed to
the first surplus treaty as to the second, to avoid selection against the second surplus
reinsurer.
Another option would be for the cedant to purchase facultative reinsurance for the risk in order
to reduce the size of the EML. Alternatively it may be able to cover the rest of the risk itself.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 15
Example
A direct writer has a 6 line surplus reinsurance treaty and has decided to use the maximum
retention of £100,000 for all risks ceded under the treaty.
The insurer writes a risk with an EML of £1,000,000. It can’t automatically cede this risk to the
surplus reinsurer because this would require 9 lines to be ceded, (ie £1m £100,000 (1 9) )
which exceeds the maximum number of lines available. The insurer must therefore choose one of
the following four options:
1. Arrange reinsurance to operate before the surplus reinsurance, to reduce the size of the
EML eg a facultative excess of loss arrangement could cap losses for this risk at £700,000.
2. Arrange a second surplus treaty of 3 lines (or more) to operate in parallel with the first
surplus treaty.
3. Cede the maximum number of lines into the surplus treaty and pay the remaining share of
any claims itself. (This option may not be available, depending on the terms of the
treaty.)
4. Decline the risk.
Question
For each of the first three options in the example above, calculate the amounts paid by the direct
writer and the reinsurer(s) in the event of a claim for £350,000.
Solution
Option 1
With the EML now reduced to £700,000, the number of lines k must satisfy:
£700,000 £100,000 (1 k ) .
It follows that k 6. Therefore all claims on the policy will be shared in the ratio 1: 6 .
For a claim of £350,000, the cedant will pay:
1
350,000 £50,000
7
and the reinsurer will pay:
6
350,000 £300,000 .
7
Option 2
With a second surplus treaty in place, the direct writer can now cede the 9 lines it requires.
Therefore all claims on the policy will be shared in the ratio 1: 6 : 3 , between the direct writer and
the first and second reinsurers respectively.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
For a claim of £350,000, the cedant will pay:
1
350,000 £35,000 .
10
The first surplus reinsurer will pay:
6
350,000 £210,000
10
and the second surplus reinsurer will pay:
3
350,000 £105,000 .
10
Option 3
If the direct writer is allowed to take this option, the surplus reinsurer will pay the same as for
Option 2, and the remainder will be paid by the direct writer. Therefore the shared proportions
1: 6 : 3 will become 4 : 6 . In other words, the direct writer will pay 40% of every claim and the
reinsurer will pay the rest.
For a claim of £350,000, the cedant will pay:
4
350,000 £140,000
10
and the reinsurer will pay £210,000.
2.2 The cedant’s claims experience
With surplus reinsurance the cedant can choose which individual risks it wishes to cede
and in what proportion. The cedant may retain varying proportions of each risk.
Therefore, depending on the claims outcome the cedant and reinsurer will have different
outcomes.
Question
An insurance company has a 10-line surplus reinsurance treaty.
Describe how the overall nature of the portfolio of retained risks will differ from the portfolio of
ceded risks.
Solution
The smallest risks may be retained in full. A large proportion of each of the risks in the next size
up will be retained. Only a small portion of the largest risks will be retained.
In contrast, the portfolio of ceded risks will have no exposure to the smallest risks and a much
higher proportionate exposure to the larger risks (eg it could have 10 times the direct writer’s
exposure for the biggest risks).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 17
2.3 The reinsurer’s claims experience
The smaller risks may not be ceded to the reinsurer because they are within the retention.
The cedant and reinsurer will not therefore share the same portfolio of risks. The risks that
are ceded to the reinsurer will vary with the proportion of risk reinsured. Hence the
underwriting experience of the risks to which the treaty applies will vary between the two
parties. As with quota share, there will also be differences in expenses and in interest
earnings between the two on their respective portions of the total portfolio.
2.4 Advantages of surplus
The main advantages to the direct writer are that:
It enables an insurer to write larger risks, which might otherwise be beyond its
writing capacity.
Surplus reinsurance is particularly suitable for large property risks, ie where the direct
writer feels that some risks are too ‘big’ to be retained fully, and that it is better to share
the risk with a reinsurer. The risks will be big enough to merit the additional individual
attention given to each risk.
It enables the insurer to choose, within limits, the size of risks that it will retain.
It allows the direct writer to increase its exposure by a chosen amount (within limits),
helping control overall business volumes, fine-tune its exposure and control potential
accumulations of risk.
It is useful for those classes where a wide variation can occur in the size of risks.
Insurers use surplus reinsurance, rather than quota share, extensively for those classes
where a wide variation can occur in the size of risks. For example, it is used with
commercial fire risks. It is also suitable for some marine and aviation insurance
(ie property cover, like hull and cargo losses, rather than liability cover).
It helps to spread the risks.
It helps the direct writer spread its exposure (ie diversify). Retaining a portion of lots of
risks is better than retaining all of a few risks.
The commission may help with cashflow.
2.5 Disadvantages of surplus
The main disadvantages to the direct writer are that:
The administration is more complicated than for quota share, owing to the need to
assess and record separately for each risk the amount to be ceded.
It is unsuitable for:
– unlimited covers, eg motor liability
– personal lines cover where potential losses are small compared to the
insurer’s resources.
In addition, the treaty terms may not be flexible enough, so that it may not cover the largest risks
without the need for extra negotiation.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
3 Excess of loss reinsurance
3.1 How excess of loss (XL) operates
With XL reinsurance, the reinsurer agrees to indemnify the cedant for the amount of any
loss above a stated excess point. More usually, the reinsurer will give cover up to a stated
upper limit, with the insurer purchasing further layers of XL cover – which stack on top of
the primary layer – from different reinsurers. The higher layer cover(s) come into operation
on any particular loss only when the lower layer cover has been fully used (or ‘burnt
through’).
The top layer of excess of loss reinsurance might be unlimited (ie have no upper limit).
The layers of reinsurance should be arranged so that there are no gaps, ie the lower limit of the
second layer of reinsurance starts at the upper limit of the first excess of loss reinsurance.
The expression generally used to describe the cover provided under an excess of loss reinsurance
treaty is:
Amount of layer in excess of lower limit
So a treaty that provides cover for claim amounts between an excess point of £50,000 and an
upper limit of £200,000 would be described as:
£150,000 in excess of £50,000, or simply as £150,000 xs £50,000.
Question
A direct writer has three excess of loss treaties covering its employers’ liability portfolio:
£140,000 in excess of £60,000
£300,000 in excess of £200,000
£2m in excess of £700,000
Explain what is silly about this reinsurance programme.
Calculate how much the direct writer will be able to recover in respect each of the following
claims.
(a) £80,000 (b) £280,000 (c) £2,400,000 (d) £4,000,000
(e) £680,000 (f) £50,000 (g) £500,000
Solution
There is a ‘hole’ in the cover between £500,000 and £700,000. The layers of reinsurance ought
generally to be arranged so that there are no gaps.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 19
Recoveries from the treaties are:
Claim 1st layer 2nd layer 3rd layer Total
(a) £20,000 – – £20,000
(b) £140,000 £80,000 – £220,000
(c) £140,000 £300,000 £1,700,000 £2,140,000
(d) £140,000 £300,000 £2,000,000 £2,440,000
(e) £140,000 £300,000 – £440,000
(f) – – – –
(g) £140,000 £300,000 – £440,000
Retention / deductible
This is the loss amount that is retained and paid by the cedant.
Working layer
Working layers refer to the layers above the cedant’s retention where moderate to heavy
loss activity is expected by the cedant and reinsurer. Working layer reinsurance
agreements often include adjustable features (for example, premiums that increase to some
extent with adverse claims experience) to reflect actual underwriting results.
An adjustable feature is one that changes with the experience of the contract. Profit commission
is an example.
Indexed limits
Where inflation has a significant effect on the cost of claims, a stability clause may be
applied to the excess point. This is so that the reinsurer does not receive a higher
proportion of the risks purely because of inflation. The cedant will normally be required to
pay an extra premium to compensate the reinsurer for the added risk if the excess point is
not indexed.
The upper limit (where one exists) may similarly be indexed to preserve the original real
value of the cover.
The basis for indexation should be a reliable inflation index that bears some relation to the
inflationary effects on the claim sizes.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
Question
A direct writer has two layers of risk XL cover. The first is 100,000 in excess of 100,000, the
second is 300,000 in excess of 200,000. All limits are indexed, and the chosen index starts the
treaty at a value of 100.
Two separate claims are made: one for 350,000 when the index was 105 and the other for
600,000. The index on the dates the claim amounts were agreed was 105 and 110 respectively.
Assuming that the treaties cover these claims, calculate how much the insurer and each reinsurer
pay in respect of each claim.
Solution
Claim of 350,000 (when index was 105)
When the index is 105, the layers of reinsurance cover become 105,000 in excess of 105,000 and
315,000 in excess of 210,000. Therefore:
Direct writer pays the first 105,000
First XL reinsurer pays the next 105,000
Second XL reinsurer pays the remaining 140,000.
Claim of 600,000 (when index was 110)
When the index is 110, the layers of reinsurance cover become 110,000 in excess of 110,000 and
330,000 in excess of 220,000. Therefore:
Direct writer pays the first 110,000
First XL reinsurer pays the next 110,000
Second XL reinsurer pays the next 330,000.
Direct writer is left with the remaining 50,000, ie paying 160,000 in total.
Note that in practice, the actual operation of stability clauses might vary, depending on the exact
policy wording, so any reasonable approach should earn you marks.
Commission
Return commission and override commission are not normally relevant to excess of loss
reinsurance. This is because the reinsurer charges the insurer a premium to cover the risk and so
a commission payment back to the insurer would be equivalent to simply charging a lower
premium.
Profit commission is possible, for example, for working layer reinsurance. However, profit
commission would be totally inappropriate for the very high layer excess of loss treaties, where
the reinsurer expects to pay out only in exceptional circumstances.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 21
Brokerage is very likely to be paid, since this type of reinsurance is usually arranged through
brokers.
Reinstatements
Under excess of loss reinsurance arrangements, the treaty will often include
reinstatements; that is, after a number of separate events have collectively exhausted the
XL treaty limit, the reinsurer will allow one or more reinstatements of the coverage. Often,
further premiums (reinstatement premiums), which may be more or less than the original
premium and may be scaled down for the unexpired risk term, are payable.
A reinstatement is the restoration of full cover following a claim. After a reinsurance claim is
made, the cedant may be required to pay an additional premium for the insurance cover to
continue. The reinstatement premium and the number of reinstatements allowed will be set out
in the treaty document once agreed, both parties are bound by the arrangement and there are
no options.
Limited reinstatements usually apply to higher layers of reinsurance cover. For lower layers of
cover, there may be a limited number of free reinstatements before an additional premium is
required. For very low working layers, there may be unlimited free reinstatements.
In practice, reinstatement premiums are often deducted from the claim recoveries, as this
simplifies the administration.
The precise way that reinstatements work in practice depends on the wording in the treaty. A
common approach would be to charge a proportionate premium according to the proportion of
the layer that has been burnt through (often known as pro-rata as to amount). The period of
cover remaining may also affect the premium (often known as pro-rata as to time).
Example
If a claim is made which uses half of the original layer and half the original period of cover is
remaining, a premium of a quarter of the full reinstatement premium may be deducted from the
claim recovery in order that cover can be restored.
Question
A $1.5m xs $1m excess of loss reinsurance treaty has the following terms and loss history in the
year it was written:
up front premium of $300,000
1 reinstatement at 140% additional premium.
In chronological order the only losses to potentially impact this treaty are:
1. $2.0m
2. $5m
3. $1.8m
4. $10.2m
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
Ignoring the issue of the period of cover remaining, calculate how much of each loss is
recoverable and the reinstatement premiums generated by each loss.
Also, calculate the ‘rate on line’ of this contract.
(Hint: You need to know your Glossary definitions to pass this subject)
Solution
Assume that the reinstatement premium will be calculated according to the proportion of cover
burnt through. We are told to ignore the issue of the period of cover remaining, although in
practice it could be a significant issue.
First claim: recover $1m (ie $2.0m less $1m excess) from the reinsurer. Note that $0.5m of the
reinsurance cover, ie a third, is yet to be used. Pay a reinstatement premium of $0.28m (ie two-
thirds of 140% 300,000). In practice this is likely to be offset from the reinsurance recovery.
Second claim: recover $1.5m from the reinsurer, and pay a further reinstatement premium of
$0.14m (the remainder of the reinstatement premium). Again this is likely to be offset from the
reinsurance recovery. This gives cover remaining of one-third of the layer, ie $0.5m in excess of
$1m.
Third claim: recover $0.5m (the remaining cover). No further reinstatement premium can be
paid.
Fourth claim: No reinsurance recoveries and no further reinstatement premium.
The rate on line is defined, for non-proportional reinsurance, as the total premium charged for
the reinsurance divided by the width of the layer covered. Note by total premium we are only
referring to the initial premium, the reinstatement premium should be excluded.
0.3
Hence the rate on line is , ie 20%.
1.5
Increased limit factors
These are factors that define the expected loss cost for a limit L as a multiple of the loss
cost for a loss with the basic limit B. For example, for a basic limit of B the factor is 1.0, for
a limit of 2B the factor may be 1.6 (must be ≤ 2) and for a 3B limit the factor may be 2.0
(must be ≤ 3). Thus the expected loss costs are 60% more and 100% more than the cost of a
basic limit respectively.
Question
Explain why increased limits factors are used rather than, for example, just calculating rates or
loss costs at every desired limit of insurance instead.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 23
Solution
An important reason is credibility. A larger volume of data generally leads to more reliable loss
cost estimates. There usually is not enough data at higher loss sizes to calculate higher limit loss
costs in a fine level of detail.
Increased limit factors (ILFs) are discussed in Chapter 15.
Proportional within non-proportional
For all forms of excess of loss, it is possible that the reinsurer will cover only a proportion of the
claims within the layer, by applying a deductible. For example, the cover might be set as 90% of
£150,000 in excess of £50,000. In this case, which has a 10% deductible, a claim of £120,000
would generate a recovery of £63,000 (ie 90% of £70,000).
The reason for this type of arrangement is to give the direct writer more incentive to keep the
claim settlements low. Otherwise the reinsurer may feel exposed to the ‘moral hazard’ of the
direct writer having sloppy settlement procedures for large claims.
Question
Explain why in practice the direct writer would be keen to handle claims above the excess point
prudently, even if 100% of the claim above the excess was being paid by the reinsurer.
Solution
The insurer will manage claims above the excess in order to:
reduce the risk of them exhausting the reinsurance layer and reverting back to the insurer
maintain a good long-term relationship with the reinsurer
benefit from any profit commission
reduce future reinsurance premiums (which will be related to past claims experience).
3.2 Cedant’s claims experience
The cedant’s experience will differ from the reinsurer’s experience and will be better or
worse depending on the distribution of large losses.
This is only to be expected, since (unlike proportional reinsurance) it is only once claims reach a
certain size that the reinsurer has to pay anything.
For an unlimited XL cover (although this is rarely available), the reinsurer is likely to suffer a
higher claims ratio than the cedant when more large losses occur than expected, and a
lower claims ratio when the account experiences a high frequency of low severity losses
that are less than the excess point. Note: for a limited XL cover (the more usual scenario),
the claim amount exceeding the upper limit of the reinsurance will revert back to the cedant.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
3.3 Reinsurer’s claims experience
Reinsurance claims can differ markedly in shape and size from those of the original writing office.
Typically on smaller claims, below the treaty limit, the reinsurer will not be liable at all. On larger
claims, the reinsurer may have to provide the majority of the loss, depending on the limits in the
arrangement’s wording.
The degree to which reinsurers can influence the underwriting and claims management will
depend on the wording of the treaty and the nature of the relationship between the parties.
3.4 Types of excess of loss (XL) reinsurance
The three main types of excess of loss reinsurance are:
risk XL
aggregate XL
catastrophe XL.
In practice the boundaries between different forms of XL reinsurance are not distinct. In any
given case the treaty will spell out exactly what is covered.
3.5 Risk (or individual) XL
This is a type of XL reinsurance that protects against large individual losses.
The reinsurer indemnifies an insurance company for the amount of an individual loss in
excess of the excess point.
Risk XL should protect an insurer adequately against losses that affect only one insured
risk, provided that the upper limit is sufficiently high.
The direct writer pays a premium to the reinsurer in return for protection against individual large
claims (eg a large liability claim on an individual motor policy).
Risk XL can be written facultatively or by treaty.
3.6 Aggregate XL
Aggregate XL is a very simple extension of risk XL. However, rather than operating on individual
large claims, the excess point and the upper limit apply to the aggregation of multiple claims. As
you will see, there are several different ways that the claims might be aggregated.
The reinsurer indemnifies an insurance company for a cumulative, that is, aggregate
amount of losses in excess of a specified aggregate amount.
As with risk XL, there will normally be an upper limit to this cover. This and the excess
point will usually be at a higher level than for the working layer. There will also be a limit on
the aggregate amount payable in the year from all events, usually by offering a strictly
limited number of reinstatements. The reinsurer will usually also require payment of a
reinstatement premium each time.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 25
There are several ways it can be written:
excess of a monetary amount (for example, $500,000 in the aggregate excess of
$500,000 in the aggregate)
excess of a percentage (loss ratio) amount (for example, 50 loss ratio points excess
of 75 loss ratio points)
with an interior deductible; that is, to apply only to losses in excess of a stated
dollar amount (for example, $500,000 in the aggregate excess of $500,000 in the
aggregate applying only to losses greater than $50,000 per loss).
This form of contract would usually be used to protect an account that would not normally
be exposed to major ‘event’ losses but could be subject to major attritional losses (that is, a
large number of small losses), for example, a medical expenses account.
Aggregation by event
Events can occur that cause losses to several insured risks at the same time. Depending
on the insurer’s risk portfolio, that event could lead to an aggregation of claims.
Individually, each claim might not be of an exceptional size, but collectively the aggregate
cost might be damaging to the insurer’s gross account.
In this situation, the conventional risk XL treaty, by treating each claim as a separate loss,
will fail to protect the cedant adequately against the aggregate cost of such losses, thus the
need for aggregate XL reinsurance.
In this case, all the claims arising from that event might be added together. If the total amount
exceeds the lower limit, then the direct writer can make a recovery from the reinsurer.
Usually an event covered by aggregate XL will be sudden and obviously identifiable.
Example
The event might be a motorway pile-up caused by a single driver. The insurer of this driver might
then be faced with dozens of individual injury claims, none of which in isolation is too worrying,
but which in total could damage the company.
A common form of reinsurance for motor insurers is ‘claim and event XL’, under which cover is
provided for a single large claim or all claims from a single event.
However, in some cases, the time span of the event may be less easily identifiable and,
therefore, require careful wording in the treaty definition.
For example, the event could be a major storm. In this instance, the event would need to be
defined very carefully so that there is no doubt as to whether particular claims are to be included.
This form of aggregation by event is generally known as catastrophe excess of loss. Catastrophe
excess of loss is described in the next section.
The boundary between aggregate and catastrophe excess of loss is not distinct.
Aggregation by peril or cause
Alternatively, cover may be defined in terms of a common cause or peril, rather than a
single event, over a particular period of time.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
For example, a direct writer may seek aggregate excess of loss reinsurance for all claims from
asbestos-related claims affecting its employers’ liability account.
Aggregation by class
The direct writer may obtain aggregate excess of loss reinsurance to cover all claims from a
particular class of business. This form of aggregate excess of loss is called stop loss. It is described
in Section 4.
3.7 Catastrophe XL
In its most extreme form, an event may be of catastrophic proportions, involving losses to
many hundreds, or even thousands, of different insured risks with a potential cost falling
beyond the normal capacity and intention of aggregate treaties and possibly even beyond
the finances of a large insurer.
The scope of aggregate XL therefore needs to be extended, to catastrophe XL, to cope with such
disasters.
Catastrophe XL is a form of excess of loss reinsurance which, subject to a specified limit,
indemnifies the ceding company against the accumulated loss. This is in excess of a
specified retention, resulting from a catastrophic event or series of catastrophic events.
Definition – hours clause
A clause within a catastrophe reinsurance treaty that specifies the limited period during
which claims can be aggregated for the purpose of one claim on the reinsurance contract.
Common examples are 24 or 72 hours.
How catastrophe excess of loss operates
The main difference between catastrophe XL and aggregate XL is that catastrophe XL
operates at a much higher level of aggregate cover. A catastrophic event also needs to be
defined carefully because the cause may not always be instantaneous, and it may be spread
over a wide geographical area. A severe windstorm, for instance, may last for several days;
it may even abate only to return to cause further waves of damage.
For this reason, the hours clause of a treaty usually limits windstorm claims to all losses
occurring within a consecutive period of 72 hours, whilst freeze claims are usually limited to
any period of 96 hours. The cedant is allowed to choose the starting point of the period to
which the reinsurance claim will apply.
The purpose of the hours clause is to prevent any disputes occurring in cases where, for example,
two different storms occur four days apart (in which case the two storms are treated as separate
events). The starting point will be chosen by the insurer in order to maximise the reinsurance
recoveries.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 27
Question
Apart from brokerage, suggest what types of reinsurance commission might sensibly apply for a
catastrophe excess of loss reinsurance treaty.
Solution
None. There’s no need for return or override commission because the reinsurer charges a
premium, so the commission would simply act to reduce this premium. Profit commission would
be silly because the reinsurer would expect claims rarely.
3.8 Advantages of excess of loss
The main advantages of excess of loss to the direct writer are that:
It allows an insurer to accept risks that could lead to large claims. ‘Large’ here
means large relative to the insurer’s solvency margin, annual premiums, expected
profits, or the results of the impacted classes.
It reduces the risk of insolvency from a catastrophe, a large claim or an aggregation
of claims.
It stabilises the technical results of the insurer by reducing claim fluctuations.
By reducing claim fluctuations (and hence the variance of the claims outgo), the annual
profitability of the direct writer will be less volatile. (Shareholders are not known for their
love of profit volatility.)
It helps make more efficient use of the capital by reducing the variance of the claim
payments.
High volatility of outgo means that the company must hold large free reserves. If the
volatility is reduced, lower free reserves are required. This means that the company can
write the same amount of business with less capital by using excess of loss reinsurance.
3.9 Disadvantages of excess of loss
The insurer pays a premium to the reinsurer that in the long run, if priced accurately, will be
greater than the expected recoveries under the treaty.
This is because the excess of loss reinsurer’s premium will load the expected claims for expenses,
profit and contingency margins.
From time to time, excess of loss premiums may be considerably greater than the pure risk
premium for the cover. For example, after reinsurers have had a few years of poor results, the
supply of reinsurance falls and premiums rise, as reinsurers attempt to restore their solvency
positions.
Excess of loss cover may be hard for the insurer and reinsurer to price.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
4 Stop loss
As the name suggests, stop loss reinsurance is designed to stop losses. In fact, it doesn’t actually
stop losses altogether, but it can help make bad losses a bit less dire. With stop loss reinsurance,
the aggregation applies to …
… all claims arising …
… in a defined account(s) (eg a specified class) …
… during a defined period (eg a year).
Stop loss is a form of XL reinsurance that indemnifies the ceding company against the
amount by which its losses incurred during a specific period (usually 12 months) exceed
either:
a predetermined monetary amount or
a percentage of the company's subject premiums (loss ratio) for the specific period.
Subject premiums are the premiums for the account that is being reinsured.
Sometimes a particular class of business gives rise to large variations in the levels of total
claims payable in any one year. Aggregate XL only provides cover for either one cause over
the year or one event. An insurer may therefore wish to protect the class of business by a
form of reinsurance that extends cover to all causes or all events during the year. Stop loss
does this by covering the total losses for the whole account, above an agreed limit, for a 12
month period. The whole account can be one or several classes of insurance.
The excess point and upper limit for stop loss are often expressed as a percentage of the
cedant’s premium income for that account. Cover might typically be given from an excess
point of 110% claims ratio up to an upper limit of 130% or 140%.
Question
Explain why stop loss cover is often quoted in terms of claim ratios rather than monetary
amounts.
Solution
If it was not, then the direct writer could, after taking out the cover, write loads more business, by
cutting premiums, and trigger the stop loss limits that way.
By using claim ratios, the limits (and the premium charged for the cover) rise in proportion to the
amount of business written by the direct writer.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 29
Example
A company that writes just one class of business has the following stop loss reinsurance treaty in
place for business written in a given year:
lower limit of 105% of earned premium
upper limit of 125% of earned premium
reinsurer covers 80% of the claims in the layer.
Suppose that the earned premiums for the year in question were £292m and the total incurred
claims were £333m (ie a loss ratio of 114%).
The reinsurance recovery would be 0.8 (333 1.05 292) £21.12m.
Question
(a) Explain why reinsurers are often not prepared to provide stop loss cover.
(b) If the reinsurer does provide stop loss cover, suggest what conditions they are likely to
impose on the business covered.
Solution
(a) Reinsurers are often not prepared to provide stop loss cover because:
● the reinsurer has only limited control over initial underwriting and claim
payments made
● historically some stop losses have been loss making.
(b) Conditions the reinsurer may impose before providing stop loss cover are:
● impose a deductible so that the insurer retains a proportion of the risk
● maintain some control over underwriting, premium rates and claims.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
5 Finite risk (or financial) reinsurance
5.1 Purpose of finite risk (or financial) reinsurance
Traditional risk transfer involves standard reinsurance contracts (proportional and
non-proportional). Risk financing moves away from this, however, the risk may still be transferred
to a reinsurer. Alternatively it may be transferred to the capital markets. This section and the
next one describe products that involve a reinsurer. Section 7 describes products that involve the
capital markets.
The aim of finite risk reinsurance tends to be risk financing rather than traditional risk
transfer. This is typically a multi-year contract aimed at reducing the cedant’s cost of
capital by means of earnings smoothing. The contract reduces year-to-year earnings
volatility but it provides limited risk transfer over the whole contract period.
A wide variety of financial reinsurance contracts exist, although all have been devised
primarily as a means of improving the apparent accounting position of the cedant.
5.2 Features of finite risk (or financial) reinsurance
The main feature of a financial reinsurance contract is that it involves only a small element,
if any, of transfer of insurance risk from the cedant to the reinsurer. The contract, however,
does involve investment type risks. Many forms of financial reinsurance are, in fact, often
viewed as being more similar to investment than to reinsurance. Usually the effective
‘return’ that the contracts provide is low in comparison to conventional investments.
Typical features might be:
limited assumption of risk by the reinsurer
multi-year contract term
explicit inclusion of investment income in the contract
sharing of the results with the cedant
risk transfer and risk financing are combined; for example, time and distance deals.
Time and distance deals are described in Section 5.4.
5.3 Types of finite risk (or financial) reinsurance
There are two types of finite risk reinsurance:
Pre-funded arrangements, whereby the insurer pays premiums into a fund held by the
reinsurer (which earns interest), and claims are paid from the fund.
Post-funded arrangements, whereby the reinsurer pays the losses and the insurer pays
back the losses over time.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 31
Question
Explain the main difference between these two arrangements as far as managing risk is
concerned.
Solution
With pre-funded arrangements, the insured bears the risk of the reinsurer’s default, and vice
versa for the post-funded arrangement.
Note that while the two of these may involve reinsurers, they may also be classed as capital
market products.
Specific types of finite risk (or financial reinsurance) include:
time and distance deals
spread loss covers
financial quota share
structured finance
industry loss warranties.
5.4 Time and distance deals
Time and distance deals are designed to discount technical reserves for the time value of money.
An insurer pays a single premium in return for a fixed schedule of future payments matched
to the estimated dates and amounts of the insurer’s claim outgo. The purpose of such
contracts was to achieve the effect of discounting in arriving at the reserves for outstanding
claims.
Example
For a payment of £10m on 1 January 2019 the financial reinsurer may agree to pay to the direct
writer £1.2m on 1 January from 2019 – 2028 inclusive. The reinsurance premium is £10m and the
reinsurance recoveries form an annuity of £1.2m pa, payable annually in arrears for ten years.
This does not at all look like a reinsurance policy. The insurer is effectively purchasing an annuity
from the reinsurer. The policy is more similar to an investment than a reinsurance policy.
However, this type of policy has been used in various parts of the world in order to improve the
apparent solvency position of the insurance company. You may be asking how.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
If the relevant authorities can be convinced that the arrangement constitutes reinsurance then
the annuity payments may be treated as reinsurance recoveries (ie negative claim payments)
rather than investment proceeds. If future claim payments and hence reinsurance recoveries can
be shown at face value in the balance sheet, ie the payments don’t have to be discounted (and
the present value shown), then in this example the payments would be taken into account at face
value, ie £12m. Hence, the company has swapped a cash asset of £10m (the reinsurance
premium) for an asset of £12m (the reinsurance recoveries) and its disclosed solvency position
appears to increase by £2m.
Please note that we have deliberately used the words ‘if’ and ‘may’ in the above paragraph.
There is no guarantee that the local supervisory authority will allow such contracts to be valued at
face value. If the insurer is obliged to calculate the present value of the future annuity payments
then there might not be any benefit to the insurer at all, depending on the discount rate used.
They were useful in the past to insurers who were not permitted to discount their reserves
(eg Lloyd’s syndicates).
Similarly, these contracts do not count as insurance contracts for the purpose of accounting in the
US, so they no longer achieve the desired effect on balance sheets.
Since Lloyd’s changed its rules so that the credit allowed for time and distance policies in a
syndicate’s accounts was limited to the present value, such policies have become less
popular.
However, some companies in certain countries still have these policies on their books.
A finite risk reinsurance contract has to have a reasonable level of risk transfer if it is to be
treated as reinsurance under most systems of accounting principles; otherwise it is treated
as an investment and may thus lose its appeal.
Few financial reinsurance policies are as simple as the one described above. Often they are
‘disguised’ to look like normal reinsurance contracts. If you come across a reinsurance policy that
seems to be transferring very little claims risk from the insurer to the reinsurer then it is probably
a financial reinsurance policy.
Example
Insurer A has the following aggregate excess of loss arrangement with reinsurer B.
This covers all claims due to storm and flood damage on any household property policies written
by A during the year 2019 in excess of £0.8m, with an upper limit of £2m (ie ‘£1.2m xs £0.8m’).
At the start of 2019, a reinsurance premium of £1.2m is paid by A. Return commission of
£200,000 is paid by the reinsurer – giving a net reinsurance premium of £1m.
A 98% profit share is payable to A at the end of 2022. This is calculated as 98% of profit, where
profit is calculated as the original premium of £1.2m less any recoveries made under the
reinsurance treaty.
At the end of 2022, the arrangement is then terminated. At this time, all reinsurance recoveries
and profit share must be paid to insurer A.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 33
What type of reinsurance arrangement is this?
In order to answer this question, we need to consider the cashflows that insurer A will experience.
In return for a net premium of £1m paid on 1/1/19, insurer A receives (on 31/12/22):
£1.176m (ie 98% of 1.2m), if no recoveries are made
£1.2m as recoveries, if recoveries exceed £1.2m (hence the profit is zero), or
between £1.176m and £1.2m, if the layer is partially burnt through.
You can see that claims experience has very little effect on insurer A’s finances, so there is very
little transfer of claims risk between the two parties. It is therefore actually a financial
reinsurance contract.
Question
Discuss the reasons why insurer A and the reinsurer may wish to take out this particular
arrangement.
Solution
The insurer may wish to take out this arrangement:
to improve its published solvency margin. Depending on local accounting regulations, it
may be able to show the expected return of (at least) £1.176m as an asset and this could
improve its published solvency margin by £0.176m.
as an investment. It will make between 17.6% and 20% return on the reinsurance
premium over 4 years, and this may be considered to be a good return.
The insurer will also need to consider whether or not four years is a good match to the term of
the liabilities covered by the arrangement.
The reinsurer will also want to benefit from the deal. Benefits for the reinsurer might include:
an improvement in the published solvency position
a good investment (if it can make a better return than it is giving the insurer)
tax efficiency
a good relationship with the cedant, giving the opportunity for cross-selling.
Note that here, the initial payment is from the insurer to the reinsurer. In the majority of other
financial reinsurance arrangements, the initial reinsurance commission is from the reinsurer to
the insurer.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
5.5 Spread loss covers
Spread loss covers involve the insurer paying annual or single premiums to the reinsurer
for coverage of specified claims. These accumulate with interest (contractually agreed) in
an experience account, the balance of which is settled at the end of the multi-year period.
These might be useful where the insurer is exposed to a potentially large risk that may occur from
time to time, for example an earthquake. A spread loss cover would help to spread the effect of a
possible big loss over several years.
Example
An insurer covering an earthquake risk may expect that in nine years out of ten there will be no
claims, but in the tenth year, there will be a very large claim. In that year (whenever it turns out
to be), there may be a severe adverse effect on the profits of the company. To deal with this, the
insurer may pay a series of premiums to a reinsurer, and in return the reinsurer will pay a claim
when it is needed.
The definition of the claim will be such that it cannot be much greater than the sum of the
premiums, while if low or no claims occur, the premium can be refunded. In this way the
reinsurer is only taking limited timing risk, and so can keep its charges down.
However, the reinsurer bears the credit risk of the insurer, if the balance on the experience
account turns negative.
These types of contracts involve very limited underwriting risk (limited practical risk
transfer), but provide the insurer with the liquidity and security of the reinsurer.
Again, there often has to be sufficient (but minimal) risk transfer in order for this contract to
count as ‘reinsurance’.
As well as liquidity and security, this arrangement helps reduce the volatility of the insurer’s
reported results, which may be important at least for presentation purposes.
Example
Suppose that when a claim in respect of this earthquake risk occurs (in one year in ten) it is for
$1m. Instead of reporting results that reflect claims outgo of $0m in nine years and $1m in one
year, an insurer may prefer its reported results to reflect claims outgo of $100,000 every year.
At a more strategic level, reduction in the volatility of reported results should reduce the
requirement for capital allocation and therefore improve return on the capital employed.
Less volatile results will reduce the buffer capital that needs to be held, thereby freeing up this
capital for other uses, eg in development of the business, that will earn better returns than would
be achieved by having to keep it invested as solvency capital.
5.6 Financial quota share
Financial quota share is an arrangement where the purpose lies in the commissions paid for
financing purposes, rather than the transfer of risk.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 35
This is a traditional quota share arrangement, but written for the primary purpose of a financial
arrangement involving the commission payment. Financing is achieved by overcompensating,
(ie paying more than a normal reinsurance commission), in the initial period and
undercompensating, (ie paying less than a normal reinsurance commission), over a period
thereafter.
It is therefore a type of financial reinsurance contract.
5.7 Structured finance
Structured finance is a broad term used to describe a sector of finance that was created to help
transfer risk using complex legal and corporate entities.
Reinsurers became involved in structured finance through their finite reinsurance business
and the increasing need of financial guarantee insurers and investment banks for additional
capacity.
The typical financing solution provided by the reinsurer is a credit enhancement in which
the reinsurer provides a financial guarantee or credit insurance wrap to the institution
borrowing from the capital market.
Credit enhancements involve insurance companies insuring loan portfolios or providing credit
protection to companies to improve the creditworthiness of debt instruments. These solutions
use derivative products available in the capital markets, in addition to variations on traditional
credit insurance.
Credit insurance wraps are insured or guaranteed by a third party. The third party may provide a
promise to reimburse losses up to a specified amount. Deals can also include agreements to
advance principal and interest or to buy back any defaulted loans. The third-party guarantees are
typically provided by AAA-rated financial guarantors.
Credit enhancement or financial guarantees lower the cost of borrowing.
5.8 Industry loss warranties (ILWs)
Industry loss warranties (ILWs) are a type of reinsurance where the basis of cover is not
indemnity, ie repayment of actual losses suffered.
Here one party will purchase protection based on the total loss arising from an event to the
entire insurance industry rather than their own losses.
The original size of the industry loss is used as a trigger for a recovery.
The contract pays a specified fixed amount to the insured if:
there has been an insured loss of a particular type, eg a hurricane, to the insurance
industry of a particular size, and
a second indemnity-based trigger is breached, based on the value of the losses incurred
by the insured.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
The ‘industry loss’ size referred to in the first bullet point is usually determined using a recognised
standard of some sort. For example, for US property events the common source is PCS (Property
Claim Services), which is an organisation in the US that collates and publishes industry
catastrophe loss information for US catastrophe events, such as tornadoes, hailstorms and floods
as well as hurricanes and earthquakes. The loss amount published by PCS is often used to
determine whether an event has breached the industry loss trigger for an ILW. In other regions a
cat model might be used, which calculates a model industry loss size based on wind speed,
earthquake magnitude etc.
The second condition is necessary to ensure that the insured has an insurable interest in the
cover.
The payout to the insured may be fixed, so there is a potential mismatch that works in favour of –
or against – the insured.
Typically, reinsurer payment should be quite quick once the insurer makes a claim.
Note that the name Original Loss Warranty (OLW) is sometimes used for the same concept.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 37
6 Run-off reinsurance
6.1 Run-off solutions
Run-off reinsurance is not a term generally used in the market place and so the meaning would be
described in any question. It could in practice involve any treatment or processing of any closed
book of business. The reinsurance of a closed tranche is just one possible run-off solution.
The aim of run-off reinsurance is the transfer of reserve development risks. It provides
cover against the insurer’s earnings volatility arising from past activities. It may be sought
in circumstances such as:
corporate restructuring
mergers and acquisitions
closing lines of business
economic changes in the value of the liability
regulatory, accounting or tax changes
legal developments, for example court decisions.
The ‘book’ is sold to the reinsurer who assumes all remaining premiums and all of the risk.
The claims reserves are also transferred from the insurer to the reinsurer.
For example, there have been many run-off solutions applied to accounts with exposure to
US asbestos-related claims, in view of the uncertainty (and deterioration) of that claims
experience.
There are two main types of run-off reinsurance:
adverse development cover
loss portfolio transfers.
6.2 Adverse development cover
Adverse development cover is a reinsurance arrangement whereby a reinsurer agrees, in
return for a premium, to cover the ultimate settled amount of a specified block of business
above a certain pre-agreed amount.
It protects the cedant from significant reserve deterioration on run-off business. This caps the
liability and protects the balance sheet from any further development on existing losses, and from
future losses in respect of old business.
The premium that is payable for the cover will depend on the risk appetite of the market.
Usually it is only possible to reinsure a layer above a specified amount. This specified
amount may be in excess of the current level of reserves. There could be an upper limit. If
the ultimate cost of losses is in excess of this, the insurer is liable for the excess. The
reinsurer may also insist that the insurer has a small participation in the layer.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 38 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
Claims are usually still handled by the insurer and hence there are the associated expenses.
Reserves are maintained by the insurer and it receives all investment income generated
from the investments backing these reserves.
There is no transfer of reserves from the insurer to the reinsurer. The insurer simply pays a
premium for the reinsurer to take on responsibility for the development of reserves beyond a
specified position.
Question
Identify a traditional reinsurance arrangement that would achieve this.
Solution
A non-proportional arrangement, eg a stop loss or excess of loss contract.
The insurer is exposed to the credit risk of the reinsurer. Legally, the insurer remains liable
to the insured parties for all claims within the block reinsured. Hence, some but not all of
the risk from adverse run-off of the reserves is removed.
6.3 Loss portfolio transfers (LPTs)
Although not a form of reinsurance, a loss portfolio transfer is an alternative to an adverse
development cover when considering run-off solutions and so is included here for
completeness.
LPTs are an arrangement whereby the liability for a specified book of business is passed in
its entirety from one insurer to another. Policyholders will be informed of this ‘novation’
and the deal may need to be approved by a court. This enables the original insurer to
concentrate on any remaining book of business.
The Glossary defines a ‘novation’ as ‘the transfer of the rights and obligations under a contract
from one party to another’. Note that this definition is strictly only part of the Subject SA3 Core
Reading.
Novation is not strictly reinsurance since the new insurer is responsible for the liabilities in
total from the date of the transfer.
The original insurer will transfer the reserves and the remaining exposure to the new
insurer. It is likely that there will be a premium in addition to the existing reserves. This
would normally include a claims handling service.
All adverse claims risks and the investment income will be passed to the new insurer.
Advantages of LPTs
They can improve the credit rating of the original insurer.
The new insurer will gain diversification if not already in this area and achieve a
larger client database. There are specialist players in the market that can possibly
run-off such portfolios more profitably than the original insurer.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 39
The original insurer will no longer have any remaining exposure to the book of business,
including any subsequent reserve deteriorations.
The deal may be good value for money for one of the companies. For example, the
reserves transferred, plus any additional premium payable and investment income
earned, may be more than sufficient to pay the remaining claims, so the new insurer may
end up making a profit.
The original insurer’s capital requirements will be lower and capital will be freed up for
other purposes.
The new insurer may gain access to historical data for the class of business.
An LPT is a quick method for exiting a line of business (and a quick way for the new
insurer to acquire a book of business).
The original insurer may no longer need expensive specialist resources, eg claims
handlers, to manage the liabilities.
Unlike with some forms of reinsurance arrangement (eg adverse development cover), if
the new insurer defaults on its liabilities they will not fall back on the original insurer.
Disadvantages of LPTs
Assets may need to be realised to pass across the value of the reserves to the
accepting insurer, which is particularly important if there is mismatching or if tax
gains / losses would be crystallised.
If the new insurer defaults, this could damage the reputation of the original insurer.
The transfer may require the buy-in of reinsurers where there are existing
reinsurance arrangements covering the portfolio.
There will be an associated cost to the original insurer of the risk transfer, which will
depend on the current risk appetite of the market. This cost would be any premium
payable plus the ‘lost’ investment income.
Any required court approval may be time-consuming and expensive, and may not
necessarily be obtained.
The new insurer may be exposed to the future emergence of new latent claims on the
portfolio which may not have been anticipated / allowed for in the LPT calculations.
The ‘premium payable’ referred to above is an amount to compensate the new insurer both for
taking on the risk and for expenses associated with the transfer. This would be paid on top of the
value of the reserves. The ‘associated cost’ referred to is therefore this premium plus the value of
any investment income effectively lost if the transferred value of the reserves uses a discount rate
which turns out to be too low.
Example
Suppose a general insurer has a block of business and the discounted value of expected future
claims in respect of this business is $100m. If the regulations prohibited the discounting of future
claim reserves, the regulatory provisions would be somewhat higher, say $150m.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 40 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
The general insurer could seek to reinsure this block of business. It would pay the reinsurer a
premium. This should be sufficient to meet expected claims (ie $100m in this case) plus the
reinsurer’s fee (say $10m). So, the insurer’s assets would decrease by $110m. However, its
liabilities would decrease by the amount of the provisions now passed to the reinsurer, ie $150m.
Therefore, the general insurer’s reported financial position has been improved.
If the actual claims experience is such that the $100m is more than is required to meet the actual
claims, the excess could be returned as a profit commission. If the $100m is less than the actual
claims, then (depending on the terms of the arrangement) the insurer might be required to pay
an additional amount to the reinsurer.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 41
7 Capital market products
7.1 Types of capital market products
In this section we discuss products where risk is transferred to the capital markets rather than
insurance markets. We will discuss the following products:
committed (or contingent) capital
securitisation
– insurance-linked securities
– credit securitisation
– motor securitisation
weather derivatives.
7.2 Committed (or contingent) capital
Committed capital or contingent capital is based on a contractual commitment to provide
capital to an insurer after a specific adverse event occurs that causes financial distress.
The insurer purchases an option to issue its securities at a predetermined price in the case
that the defined situation occurs, on the understanding that the price would be much higher
after such an event.
If the defined event occurs, leading to financial distress of the insurer, then the price of the
insurer’s securities will fall (ie it will be more expensive to raise capital by issuing securities). The
option will allow the insurer to sell its securities after the adverse event at a higher price than
their market price.
Example
If the securities might have a current market value of $100, then the insurer might fix the
predetermined price (ie the strike price of the option) at $100. Following the adverse event, the
market value of the securities might fall to $80, however, the insurer will still be able to issue such
securities at the higher price of $100.
There may be one or more triggers that have to occur before the option can be exercised, in order
to avoid moral hazard.
Contingent capital provides a mechanism of ensuring that, should a particular risk event happen,
capital will be provided. As such, it is a cost-effective method of protecting the capital base of an
insurance company. Under such an arrangement, capital would be provided as it was required
following a deterioration of experience (ie it is provided when it is needed).
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 42 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
7.3 Securitisation
Purpose of securitisation
Securitisation has two main purposes:
Risk management – to transfer insurance risk to the banking and capital markets.
It is often used for managing risks associated with catastrophes, as the financial markets
are large and capable of absorbing catastrophe risk.
It involves turning a risk into a financial security, eg as in a catastrophe bond.
Capital management – to convert illiquid, inadmissible assets into liquid admissible assets,
hence improving the balance sheet.
Almost any assets that generate a reasonably predictable income stream can in theory be
used as the basis of a securitisation. Examples of illiquid assets that could be securitised
are:
– future profits, eg on a block of in-force insurance policies
– mortgages (and other loans).
Each of these could be securitised into tradeable instruments (eg bonds), in order to raise
capital. The owner of the assets issues bonds to investors (eg pension funds, insurance
companies and banks) and the future cashflow stream generated by the secured assets is
then used to meet the interest and capital payments on the bonds.
There is typically risk transfer as the repayments on the bonds are made only if, for
example, the future profits emerge or mortgage repayments are made.
Example
A portfolio of mortgage loans owned by a bank could be pooled together and the cashflows from
these mortgages used to service the interest and capital payments on a bond. Securitisation of
this type that had been backed by sub-prime mortgages in the US, was the focus of much
attention during the sub-prime crisis and credit crunch.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 43
Operation of securitisation
In simple terms, a securitisation works as follows:
1. An investor purchases a bond from the insurance company and therefore provides a sum
of money to the insurer.
2. The repayment of capital (and possibly of interest) is contingent on:
– a specified event not happening, eg an earthquake measuring 6.5 on the Richter
scale not happening, or
– the portfolio of insurance business (upon which the bond is securitised) producing
adequate profits.
3. If the event does happen (eg the aforementioned earthquake occurs), or inadequate
profits are made from the securitised business, the insurer may default on the interest
and capital payments due under the bond:
– in the case of securitising a particular risk, the insurer can use the sum of money
provided from the investor (in purchasing the bond) to cover the cost of claims
arising from the earthquake
– in the case of securitising a block of business, the poor experience of the business
has been passed directly to the investor.
4. If the event does not occur or the business makes adequate profits, the investor gets their
interest and capital back in the normal way.
In practice, the direct link between the investor and the issuer is broken by a special purpose
vehicle (SPV), which is a separate legal entity that sits between the parties. Where it is a portfolio
of business that is being securitised, the securitised assets are transferred into this vehicle.
Question
Explain why a special purpose vehicle is used in practice.
Solution
The existence of a separate vehicle with separate ownership of the securitised assets provides
better security and greater transparency for investors in the securitisation.
This may seem like a particularly high-risk investment. It is. However, as long as the expected
return on the investment is commensurate with the investor’s required (risk-adjusted) rate of
return, then a market for such an investment will exist.
The rationale is that insurance catastrophe risk or the risk of underperformance of the securitised
business, is not correlated with investment market risks and so there is a benefit to the capital
market in the diversification of risk achieved in purchasing such investments.
The banking and capital markets are used because of capacity issues and because the risks
involved are ones with which the banking and capital markets are comfortable.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 44 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
A key point to note about securitisation is that it is making insurance products look much more
like banking products. The reverse, often called insuritisation, is making banking products look
more like traditional insurance.
We now look at three specific types of securitisation:
insurance-linked securities
credit securitisation
motor securitisation.
Insurance-linked securities (ILS)
Insurance-linked securities (ILS) are an innovative way of increasing (re)insurance capacity.
The valuation and performance of these financial instruments are driven by the occurrence
(or lack of occurrence) of insurance loss events. ILS offer acquirers (such as institutional
investors and pension funds) an opportunity to invest in instruments the returns from
which are largely uncorrelated with other financial assets and macroeconomic movements,
and allow them to exclude surrounding risks (such as the market risk in share prices) of
investing in reinsurance companies. For purchasers, who are typically insurers or
reinsurers, ILS provide an additional source of protection and insurance risk mitigation
instruments.
From the launch of the first securitisation in the 1990s, the ILS market has grown and
cemented its place as a complementary alternative to reinsurance, notably in the property
catastrophe reinsurance market. It has developed into what is now a reasonably liquid
catastrophe (cat) bond market. These catastrophe bonds allow (re)insurers to transfer high
severity low probability catastrophic risks to the capital market and spread them among
many investors: if the specified catastrophic risk is triggered, the bondholders typically
forfeit the interest and principal on the bond to the (re)insurer. If there is no catastrophic
event, or trigger event before the maturity date of the contract, investors receive back their
principal investment at maturity on top of the interest payments they have received.
You may be confused by the fact that the (re)insurers are referred to as ‘purchasers’ in the first
paragraph of Core Reading above. This is because an ILS involves a corporate entity called a
Special Purpose Vehicle (SPV) that sits between the (re)insurer and investors.
For example, a typical cat bond structure would be:
Floating rate +
Premiums spread
Insurer SPV Investors
Proceeds
Losses
Return of
principal
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 45
As shown in the diagram, the investors purchase the bonds but the (re)insurer pays premiums to
the SPV to purchase the protection afforded by the contract. It is more common to refer to the
(re)insurer as the ‘sponsor’ of the ILS rather than the ‘purchaser’, to avoid any confusion.
Cat bonds developed primarily in response to the hard market (ie high premiums) of traditional
catastrophe reinsurance in the 1990s.
There can be many variations, and many types of trigger event.
The basic advantages of ILS are that they:
increase insurance capacity by transferring risk to the capital markets
mitigate counterparty risk as funds are held in a secure independent vehicle.
Credit securitisation
Though not usually involving reinsurance, insurance companies have been active in the
credit securitisation markets.
Their main roles have been:
enhancing the creditworthiness of debt instruments
providing capital relief to banks by insuring loan portfolios
providing credit protection to companies.
Enhancing the creditworthiness of debt instruments / providing capital relief to banks
Consider a bank securitising some of its loan portfolios. The interest and capital repayments
under the loans will be securitised and used to pay the interest and capital repayments under the
debt instruments (ie bonds).
Investors will require a return on the bonds that is adequate to compensate them for the risk of
default. The bank may want to keep the return on the bond as low as possible, therefore it must
try to ensure that the bond is relatively secure. In order to do this, it must either securitise its
best quality loans (ie the loans with the lowest risk of default), or it must securitise a large number
of loans relative to the number of bonds issued (in which case, even if the loans default, there will
still be an adequate number of bonds left with which to make payments on the bonds).
The first of these options may not be available if the bank does not have (or has already
securitised) a portfolio of ‘safe’ loans. The second option may be undesirable, because
effectively, the bank is using up a lot of its business in the securitisation, which will reduce the
profits it receives from the loans that it does not securitise.
A third option is to use insurance to reduce the credit risk of the bonds. The bank insures the
bonds so that their return is guaranteed (as long as the insurer does not default). If the payments
under the loan portfolio are not sufficient to meet the interest and capital payments under the
bond, then the insurance will kick in and make the payments to the investors.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 46 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
Having insurance as an underlying guarantee will enhance the creditworthiness of the debt. This
will help to ensure that the bank does not need to pay a very high rate of return on the bonds, or,
equivalently, does not need to sell them cheap. It should therefore be able to sell the bonds at a
relatively high price, thus maximising the capital relief provided by the securitisation. This needs
to be weighed up against the cost of insuring the bad debt.
This type of arrangement falls into the category of capital management, as described above.
Providing credit protection to companies
There are numerous types of credit securitisation arrangements, although the basic contract is a
credit default swap, which is essentially an agreement to compensate the ‘insured’ (ie the buyer
of the swap) if a specified credit event occurs (eg bankruptcy or loan default of another
company).
Note that for each of these arrangements, the insurer is not usually one of the two parties
involved in the securitisation itself. Instead, it is a third party providing insurance against the risk
of default by another party.
These alternative risk transfer (ART) solutions use derivative products available in the
capital markets, in addition to variations on traditional trade credit insurance.
Motor securitisation
Another capital market product is motor securitisation (where certain aspects of a motor
insurer’s portfolio risks are passed to the investment market).
The insurer issues a bond where the coupon payments depend on the claims experience of the
insurer’s motor portfolio. If the insurer experiences poor claims experience, it may forego some
or all of its repayments. Thus, the insurance risk is transferred to the capital markets instead of to
the reinsurance market.
As with other debt issues, these bonds are tradable financial instruments.
7.4 Weather derivatives
Weather derivatives are another example of the insurance industry’s response to a hard and
uncertain insurance market. Strictly speaking, weather derivatives are insurance rather than
reinsurance.
This is where standard derivatives techniques, such as put and call options and swaps, are then
used to make a derivative contract based on the weather.
Example
Energy companies’ earnings are very dependent on the weather, and the companies are likely to
want to reduce the resulting volatility of their profits.
This can be achieved by using weather derivatives. The solution can be based on any
weather-related peril, but perhaps temperature is the most common.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 47
Here, the payment is based on heating degree days, or cooling degree days. A heating degree
day, for example, is the number of degrees by which the day’s average temperature falls below
some reference temperature. Payments from weather derivatives are based on the accumulated
value of degree days over a period of time.
The advantages of using a derivative approach as opposed to traditional insurance are:
there is no need for an insurable interest
there is no need to understand the underlying business for which cover is being
purchased
there is no need to prove the extent of the loss to a claims handler.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 48 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
8 Glossary items
Having studied this chapter you should now read the following Glossary items:
Adverse development cover
Aggregate excess of loss reinsurance
Balance of a reinsurance treaty
Catastrophe reinsurance
Excess and surplus lines insurance
Expected maximum loss (EML)
Financial engineering
Financial risk reinsurance, finite risk insurance or reinsurance
Hours clause
Increased limit factors
Line
Loss portfolio transfer
Original gross premium income (OGPI)
Over-riding commission
Possible maximum loss (PML)
Profit commission
Quota share reinsurance
Rate on line
Reinstatement
Retention
Return commission
Risk excess of loss reinsurance
Stability clause
Stop loss reinsurance
Surplus lines insurance
Surplus reinsurance
Time and distance reinsurance
Working layer.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 49
Chapter 6 Summary
Quota share
Quota share is proportional reinsurance whereby the premiums and claims for all risks
covered by the treaty are split in a fixed proportion. The reinsurer pays return and override
commission to the insurer. Profit commission may also be payable.
The cedant’s experience (in terms of loss ratios) will be the same before and after
reinsurance. The reinsurer will have proportionately the same underwriting experience as
the cedant.
Quota share:
+ spreads risk, increasing capacity and encouraging reciprocal business
+ directly improves the solvency ratio (without losing market share)
+ is administratively simple
+ may provide commission that helps with cashflow
– cedes the same proportion of low and high variance risks
– cedes the same proportion of risks, irrespective of size
– passes a share of any profit to the reinsurer
– is unsuitable for unlimited covers.
Surplus
Surplus is proportional treaty reinsurance whereby the proportion of risk covered varies
from risk to risk depending on the size and type of risk.
The EML for a risk is used in assessing the proportion of the risk to reinsure, defined in terms
of ‘lines’. If k lines are used for a risk then premiums and claims are split in the proportion
1:k.
The width of one line represents the amount the insurer would pay if a claim equal to the
EML occurred. This amount is called the retention (r). Therefore: EML (1 k) r .
A surplus treaty will usually specify a maximum number of lines and a minimum and
maximum retention. Higher levels of cover can be obtained by purchasing a second (and
third, and fourth) surplus treaty.
The cedant and reinsurer will have different experience: smaller risks may be retained in full
by the cedant, whereas larger risks may be covered primarily by the reinsurer.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 50 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
Surplus:
+ enables the insurer to fine-tune its exposure
+ enables the insurer to write larger risks
+ is useful for classes where wide variation can occur in the size of risks
+ helps to spread risks
+ may provide commission that helps with cashflow
– requires more complex administration
– is unsuitable for unlimited covers and personal lines cover.
Excess of loss
The reinsurer covers the risk (or a proportion of it) between defined layers, the limits of
which are often indexed for inflation (using a stability clause). The insurer may choose to
have a number of layers of cover with different reinsurers.
Once the layer of cover has been ‘burnt through’, it will need to be reinstated, which might
require a further reinsurance premium to be paid.
The cedant’s and reinsurer’s experience will be different and will depend on the distribution
of large losses.
There are three main types of excess of loss reinsurance:
Risk XL – this relates to individual losses and is usually written by treaty
Aggregate XL – this relates to cumulative losses, where the aggregation may be by
event, by peril or by class
Catastrophe XL – this is a form of aggregate XL covering severe losses within the
hours clause that result from a specified event.
Excess of loss:
+ allows the insurer to accept risks that could lead to large claims
+ reduces the risk of insolvency from a large claim, an aggregation of claims or a
catastrophe
+ reduces claim fluctuations (and so smooths results)
+ helps to make more efficient use of capital.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 51
Stop loss
Stop loss is a specific type of aggregate XL, which covers against very bad experience across a
whole account over a defined time period. The limits are usually defined as loss ratios (ie as
percentages of premiums).
Finite risk (or financial) reinsurance
The main feature of a financial reinsurance contract is that it involves only a small element, if
any, of transfer of insurance risk from the cedant to the reinsurer. Financial reinsurance was
devised primarily as a means of improving the apparent accounting position of the cedant.
The following are examples of finite risk reinsurance products:
time and distance policies – the insurer pays the reinsurer a premium and in return,
the reinsurer pays an agreed schedule of claim payments; this has the effect of
discounting the reserves of the insurer for the time value of money
spread loss covers – the insurer pays an annual or single premium to the reinsurer
for the coverage of specified claims; these may be used to provide liquidity and
security to the insurer and may be used for catastrophes
financial quota share – this is quota share (as described above) purchased in order to
obtain reinsurance commissions for financing assistance
structured finance – these often provide the insurer with a credit enhancement,
which lowers the cost of borrowing
industry loss warranties – these are a type of reinsurance that pay out based on
industry losses rather than losses to individual insurers.
Run-off reinsurance
Run-off reinsurance solutions focus on the full-scale risk transfer of reserve development
risks.
Adverse development covers involve the purchase of reinsurance cover for the ultimate
settled amount of a block of business above a certain pre-agreed amount. Reserves are
maintained by the insurer.
Loss portfolio transfers are not a form of reinsurance. They involve the transfer of liability
for a specified book of business from one insurer to another. Reserves are transferred to the
new insurer along with all remaining exposure to the business.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 52 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
Capital market products
Committed (or contingent) capital is a contractual commitment to provide capital to an
insurer should a specific adverse event occur that causes the insurer financial distress.
Securitisation may be used to manage risk or capital. Examples of securitisation include:
insurance-linked securities (ILSs) – often in the form of catastrophe bonds, where the
issuer can default on the interest and capital payments on the bond if the catastrophe
occurs
credit securitisation – these may enhance the creditworthiness of debt instruments
and provide capital relief to banks / credit protection to companies
motor securitisation – certain aspects of a motor insurer’s portfolio risks are passed to
the investment market.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 53
Chapter 6 Practice Questions
6.1 Define, briefly, quota share reinsurance.
6.2 Describe the main features of surplus reinsurance.
6.3 Describe briefly:
(i) spread loss covers
(ii) structured finance arrangements
(iii) industry loss warranties (ILWs)
(iv) committed capital arrangements.
6.4 Define reciprocity and describe briefly the advantages and disadvantages for the parties involved.
Exam style
[7]
6.5 (i) List the items that may be included in an excess of loss reinsurance treaty. [6]
Exam style
(ii) Define a stability clause and explain why one is often included in an excess of loss
reinsurance treaty. [4]
[Total 10]
6.6 Explain why stop loss reinsurance is normally arranged on a losses-occurring basis.
6.7 Explain the following terms:
(i) estimated maximum loss
(ii) expected maximum loss
(iii) probable maximum loss
(iv) possible maximum loss.
6.8 A general insurance company A writes only commercial property business. One risk which it
Exam style
coinsures with three other insurers B, C and D has a sum insured of $10m, but an expected
maximum loss (EML) of $500,000. Company A accepts 40% of this risk, with B, C and D accepting
20% each.
Company A reinsures with company X 5% of every risk under a quota share treaty. It is agreed
that A will not write business for which its gross share of the EML exceeds $250,000.
Company A also has a three line surplus treaty with companies Y and Z, each taking 50%, which
operates after the quota share, and is based on company X taking 5% of company A’s gross
business. The surplus treaty has a maximum retention of $50,000.
A single large claim gives rise to a loss of $750,000.
(i) Calculate the amount of the claim which Company A will pay, net of all reinsurance
recoveries due. State any assumptions you make. [4]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 54 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
(ii) Explain how your answer to (i) would differ if, immediately prior to this claim, companies
B and Y were declared insolvent. [3]
(iii) State the information you would expect Company A to provide to Company Z during the
handling of this claim. [3]
[Total 10]
6.9 Explain what an insurer could do if the risk exceeds the capacity of its surplus reinsurance treaty.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 55
Chapter 6 Solutions
6.1 Quota share is a form of treaty reinsurance whereby all the premiums and claims (for risks within
the terms of the treaty) are split in a fixed proportion.
6.2 Surplus reinsurance is a proportional reinsurance, ie premiums and claims are split in proportion
(although the premium paid to the reinsurer is net of reinsurance commission).
The proportion can vary from risk to risk with the choice made by the cedant within limits set out
in the treaty.
6.3 (i) Spread loss covers
Spread loss covers involve the insurer paying annual or single premiums to the reinsurer for
coverage of specified claims. These accumulate with interest (contractually agreed) in an
experience account; the balance of which is settled at the end of the multi-year period.
These types of contracts involve very limited underwriting risk (limited practical risk transfer), but
provide the insurer with the liquidity and security of the reinsurer.
(ii) Structured finance arrangements
Reinsurers became involved in structured finance through their finite reinsurance business and
the increasing need of financial guarantee insurers and investment banks for additional capacity.
The typical financing solution provided by the reinsurer is a credit enhancement in which the
reinsurer provides a financial guarantee or credit insurance wrap to the institution borrowing
from the capital market.
Credit enhancement or financial guarantees lower the cost of borrowing.
(iii) Industry loss warranties (ILWs)
Industry loss warranties (ILWs) are a type of reinsurance where the basis of cover is not
indemnity, ie repayment of actual losses suffered.
Here one party will purchase protection based on the total loss arising from an event to the entire
insurance industry rather than their own losses.
The original size of the industry loss is used as a trigger for a recovery.
(iv) Committed capital arrangements
Committed capital is based on a contractual commitment to provide capital to an insurer after a
specific adverse event occurs that causes financial distress.
The insurer purchases an option to issue its securities at a predetermined price in the case that
the defined situation occurs, on the understanding that the price would be much higher after
such an event.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 56 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
6.4 Reciprocity is an arrangement between two insurers who agree to reinsure risks with each other.
[1]
Advantages and disadvantages
+ Reciprocity increases net premiums, assuming that the alternative is to cede business to a
reinsurer and not to accept any business in return. [½]
+ It increases the insurer’s market share. [½]
+ Furthermore, it may improve the insurer’s reputation in the market. [½]
+ Reciprocity should increase diversification … [½]
+ … which will increase the stability of the results. [½]
+ The financial strength of the insurers may be improved, since they are effectively merging
resources. [½]
+/– The effect on the commission paid will depend upon the ceding commission
arrangements with the other insurer. [½]
+/– It may reduce the solvency margin requirement on one or both of the insurers, depending
on the supervisory regime and the insurer’s current financial strength. [½]
– If the insurers operate in the same field then they may not get a better spread of business
and the catastrophe position may not be improved. [½]
+/– The business ceded may be more profitable than the business received (or vice versa). [½]
– The exchange of business may result in disclosure of market knowledge. [½]
– The insurers may need to spend time and money underwriting the business received. [½]
– This may place unnecessary demands on management time, especially if there are several
agreements in place. [½]
– There may be new types of management problems, eg if insurers are dealing with insurers
in other currencies. [½]
– It will be necessary to consider the security of the other insurer and the standard of its
underwriting. [½]
[Maximum 7]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 57
6.5 (i) Items in an XL treaty
Eighteen items that should be included in an XL reinsurance treaty, from:
names of parties involved
type of treaty, eg oblig / oblig
cover period
class(es) of business
territories covered
exclusions, including restrictions on sizes of risks
precise interaction with any other reinsurance arrangements
excess point, size of layer, and proportion of layer covered
stability clause, dealing with indexation of excess point
definition of an event (depends on type of XL)
basis for determining premiums
basis for reinsurance commission
brokerage terms
basis for keeping and checking records
basis for paying premiums and commission and settling claims
sunset clause and any other claim notification arrangements
exchange rate basis, for foreign currency payments
reinstatement terms
arbitration basis
termination terms. [6 marks less ½ for each point less than 18, minimum 0]
(ii) Stability clause
A stability clause is a provision in an excess of loss treaty whereby the excess point and (usually)
the width of the band are automatically increased in line with inflation. [1]
It is used so that if claim amounts increase in line with the inflation index then the split of claim
costs between the cedant and reinsurer would remain constant over time. [1]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 58 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
Alternatively, if limits are fixed in monetary terms, then inflation, or an increase in inflation over
that assumed in the premium for excess of loss cover, hits the reinsurer much harder than the
cedant. This is because: [1]
some claims previously under the limit will come within the reinsurer's band [½]
claims that enter, but do not extend to the upper limit will increase by the amount of
inflation, but the increase will all fall on the reinsurer (unless the upper limit is
exceeded). [½]
[Total 4]
6.6 Stop loss cover protects the direct writer against many claims arising over an accounting period.
For a company using normal accident-year accounting the corresponding exposure period is the
accident year. Hence a losses-occurring basis would normally be used.
6.7 (i) Estimated maximum loss
The estimated maximum loss is the largest loss that is reasonably expected to arise from a single
event in respect of an insured property.
This may well be less than either the market value or the replacement value of the insured
property and is used as an exposure measure in rating certain classes of business.
(ii) Expected maximum loss
The expected maximum loss is the same as the estimated maximum loss.
(iii) Probable maximum loss
This represents an attempt to quantify exposure. It is used in rating or to judge requirements for
outwards reinsurance.
It may be used as another term for estimated maximum loss, depending on the class of business.
(iv) Possible maximum loss
The term ‘possible maximum loss’ implies the consideration of more remote scenarios than those
for probable or estimated maximum loss and therefore carries a higher value.
6.8 (i) Company A’s share of the claim
Initially, A takes 40% of the gross EML. B, C and D each take 20%. [½]
A then reinsures 5% with X. Therefore A is left with 38% of the gross EML (95% of 40%) and X
takes 2% of the gross EML. [1]
A’s share of the EML at this stage is 38% of $500,000 which is $190,000. [½]
There are then two options:
(1) Assume that A holds the maximum retention, $50,000, and only uses 2.8 lines in the surplus
treaty.
(2) Assume that A uses all three lines and retains less than the maximum retention.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 59
Note: You are not expected to carry out both calculations, but to select an option and state clearly
the assumption made. [1]
1 38% 10% of the original gross EML.
Under option (1), A would retain 3.8
X and Y would each take 14%.
Under option (2), A would retain 14 38% 9.5% of the original gross EML.
X and Y would each take 14.25%. [½ for either]
A single large claim of $750,000 would result in a payment by A of:
10% 750,000 $75,000 under option (1).
9.5% 750,000 $71,250 under option (2). [½ for either]
[Total 4]
(ii) B and Y declared insolvent
A would not have to pay B’s share of the claim because the risk is coinsured with B. [½]
However, as company Y is a reinsurer of A the insolvency will affect the recoveries A can make.
[½]
In the most extreme case, A will have to pay Y’s share. This is 14% under option (1) or 14.25%
under option (2). [½]
Total payment 24% 750 ,000 $180 ,000 under option (1).
23.75% 750 ,000 $178 ,125 under option (2). [½]
In practice, there will almost certainly be a partial recovery from the liquidators of Y, and so the
answer will lie between the answer in (a) and the revised amount above. [1]
[Total 3]
(iii) Information provided to Company Z
description of the insured property
date of claim event and date reported
type(s) of claim
peril
amount claimed
up to date estimates of total claim amount
dates and amounts of claim payments
any explanation why the claim is greater than the EML.
[½ each, maximum 3]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 60 SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types
6.9 If the risk exceeds the capacity of the surplus treaty, then the insurer may be able to find a
‘second surplus’ treaty to cover risks over and above the maximum covered under the first
surplus treaty.
Other options include:
not to cede the risk at all
purchase inuring facultative reinsurance to reduce the size of the EML, eg:
– non-proportional reinsurance on a facultative basis for amounts above the EML
– a quota share arrangement
retain the excess of the EML itself (provided the terms of the treaty allow this).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-06: Reinsurance products – types Page 61
End of Part 1
What next?
1. Briefly review the key areas of Part 1 and/or re-read the summaries at the end of
Chapters 1 to 6.
2. Ensure you have attempted some of the Practice Questions at the end of each chapter in
Part 1. If you don’t have time to do them all, you could save the remainder for use as part
of your revision.
3. Attempt Assignment X1.
Time to consider …
… ‘learning and revision’ products
Marking – Recall that you can buy Series Marking or more flexible Marking Vouchers to have
your assignments marked by ActEd. Results of surveys suggest that attempting the
assignments and having them marked improves your chances of passing the exam. One
student said:
‘The marker highlighted areas of weakness and gave good, helpful
feedback on what I considered a very difficult assignment. I now know
the key areas to focus on in this part of the course.’
You can find lots more information on our website at www.ActEd.co.uk.
Buy online at www.ActEd.co.uk/estore
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold
for the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is
owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a
subsidiary of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or
photocopy any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it
is not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through
the profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished
using the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
SP8-07: General insurance markets Page 1
General insurance markets
Syllabus objectives
1.3 Describe the implications of the general business environment in terms of the:
main features of the general insurance market
effect of different marketing strategies
effect of fiscal regimes
general effect of professional guidance.
Covered in part in this chapter.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-07: General insurance markets
0 The general insurance market
So far in this course we have looked at the different types of general insurance products. In this
chapter and the following chapter we consider some important features of the general business
environment and the implications that they have for general insurance business.
This chapter begins by discussing the market for general insurance, ie who are the providers of
general insurance?
Section 1 describes different types of insurance companies, and the role of the London Market,
which includes Lloyd’s syndicates. It also covers various forms of self-insuring groups.
The general insurance market is very diverse. World-wide, general insurance is provided by
insurance companies and Lloyd’s syndicates. A corporate entity may also manage its self-
insurance through a captive insurance company.
Cover is sometimes provided also by governments as insurers of last resort – though rarely
in these situations will there be prices, reserves and capital established as in the traditional
format.
In turn, insurance providers will wish to obtain reinsurance for some of their risks. This can
be obtained:
from the London Market
from Lloyd’s
from specialist reinsurance companies
from direct insurers who also write reinsurance
in some cases, from the capital markets.
Depending on the size of a risk, a combination of these options may be used.
Section 2, on marketing strategies, describes in more detail the methods used to obtain insurance
business. This section focuses on methods used by insurance companies and in Lloyd’s.
Sections 3 and 4 discuss the effect of fiscal regimes, and of professional guidance on general
insurance business.
The next chapter describes further external influences on general insurance business, such as
economic, legal, political and environmental factors.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-07: General insurance markets Page 3
1 The major providers
1.1 The companies
Direct insurance companies
Direct insurance companies provide insurance for individuals and companies.
In this context ‘direct’ means a company that writes insurance directly for an insured
person or company as opposed to one that writes reinsurance.
Direct market companies are very active in ‘personal lines’ insurance, which is business sold to
individuals. For example, you might be a user of private motor, household, medical insurance or
travel insurance.
In the context above ‘direct’ means ‘not reinsurance’. However, the term direct can be open to
some misinterpretation. It has historically been taken to mean that there is a direct contract
between the insurer and the policyholders, as distinct from reinsurance where the policyholder
may not even have heard of the ‘final insurer’. The term direct is also used these days to describe
insurance sold direct to the public, often by phone, without going through a broker.
The alternative meaning of a ‘direct’ insurance company – one that deals directly with its
customers rather than through an intermediary such as a broker – is not meant in this
context.
Direct insurers can be divided into the following three groups:
Composite insurance companies — insurance companies that write both general
insurance and life insurance.
(Pure) general insurance companies that write many classes of general insurance.
Insurance companies that specialise in writing business in a selection of classes of
general insurance (or even just a single class).
Writing both life and general insurance business
Many groups contain both life insurance companies and general insurance companies.
While these groups are conveniently referred to as ‘composite insurers’, the risk-taking
companies themselves will usually be pure life assurance companies or pure general
insurance companies.
Suppose Company X wishes to provide its customers with both life insurance and general
insurance. It may, for example, establish itself as a life insurance company and write life
insurance business, and set up an arrangement with a general insurer (or insurers) that will
‘underwrite’ any general insurance business that Company X sells.
Question
Discuss why Company X might want to do this, rather than write general insurance business
directly.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-07: General insurance markets
Solution
The company may prefer another company to underwrite its general insurance business because:
it does not need to establish itself as a general insurer, and thus avoids the administrative
expense of going through the authorisation process
there is less need for specific general insurance expertise, eg in underwriting, claims
control or pricing, if the general insurance risks are borne elsewhere
management can focus solely on life insurance risks, rather than spreading its expertise
too thinly
it may not be cost-effective to set up a general insurance operation if sales volumes are
uncertain or expected to be low
there may be tax or regulatory capital requirement advantages in this arrangement,
eg there is less need to hold capital if risk is transferred.
Alternatively, Company X may:
write general insurance but have its life insurance business underwritten by a life insurer
set itself up as a composite insurer so it can write both types of business (although new
composites haven’t been allowed in the UK for many years now).
Corporate structure of general insurers
General insurance companies may be:
proprietary (ie owned by shareholders in order to make profit)
mutual (ie owned by policyholders).
Most insurance companies are proprietary companies limited by shares. However, some
mutual insurance companies do exist; they are more common in some markets than in
others.
Reinsurance companies
Reinsurance companies provide cover for insurance providers. Again, some reinsurance
companies will specialise in only writing some types of reinsurance, while others write
many different classes of reinsurance. Some insurance groups write both direct insurance
and reinsurance.
1.2 The London Market
When UK general insurance is discussed you will often hear of ‘the London Market’. This does not
include all general insurance companies with London phone numbers. It does mean a specialised
group of insurers, writing business along broadly similar lines, which is based in an area within the
City of London.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-07: General insurance markets Page 5
You can simplistically think of it as ‘Lloyd’s plus company equivalents’. That is, Lloyd’s is an
important part of the London Market, and the rest of the market is made up of companies with
buildings near Lloyd’s offering insurance similar to Lloyd’s.
The London Market is that part of the insurance market in which insurance and reinsurance
business is carried out on a face-to-face basis in the City of London. These companies tend
to be physically located close to each other.
The London Market concentrates mainly on providing insurance and reinsurance cover to
companies. It specialises in:
the larger direct insurance risks – both property and liability – that are beyond the
capability of other direct insurance companies (for example, energy and aerospace
risks)
international risks
reinsurance.
Most UK insurers who transact this type of business, or foreign insurers who transact this
business in the UK, therefore operate within the London Market. Consequently, the
participants in the London Market would include:
Lloyd’s syndicates (see Section 1.3)
UK subsidiaries or branches of overseas insurance or reinsurance companies
the reinsurance departments of UK composite companies, or reinsurance
subsidiaries of such companies
small professional reinsurance companies set up by (or acquired by) large broking
firms for the specific purpose of transacting London Market business
captives (see Section 1.4)
P&I Clubs (see Section 1.4)
companies owned by a group of insurance or reinsurance companies
pools (see Section 1.4).
Over 100 companies operate within the London Market, as well as many syndicates in Lloyd’s.
Although the London Market concentrates mainly on providing insurance and reinsurance
cover to companies, Lloyd’s does also provide private motor insurance and some other
personal lines cover.
1.3 Lloyd’s syndicates
What is Lloyd’s?
Lloyd’s origins lie in a coffee shop run by Edward Lloyd in the late 1680s. Lloyd’s coffee shop
became an informal meeting place for merchants, ship owners and ships’ captains. The shop soon
became known as a source of reliable shipping news, coffee and as a place for merchants to find
private individuals who would share in the risks of proposed ventures.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-07: General insurance markets
Edward Lloyd did not carry out any insurance himself. His role was to provide the premises (and
the coffee) for his clients. Similarly today, Lloyd’s itself does not carry out insurance business.
Instead it provides the facilities for its members to carry out insurance.
Lloyd’s of London is a unique insurance institution. It began in Edward Lloyd’s coffee shop
in the late 1680’s before being incorporated by the Lloyd’s Act of 1871. It is not an
insurance company it is a marketplace made up of members who provide capital and
accept liability for risks that are underwritten in return for their share of any profits that are
earned on those risks.
Names
Historically, all the members of Lloyd’s were individuals, known as ‘Names’. However, in
1994, companies were allowed to become Names for the first time. This is called ‘corporate
capital’ and the companies themselves are known as ‘corporate Names’. A corporate Name
is a limited-liability company whose only business is to provide capital to Lloyd’s.
‘Limited liability’ means that the corporate member cannot lose any more than the capital it has
provided. This is discussed in more detail below.
Nowadays, corporate capital accounts for more than 90% of the capital in the Lloyd’s
market.
Some insurance companies and reinsurance companies are active in Lloyd’s through
corporate Name subsidiaries.
Syndicates
Lloyd’s members conduct their insurance business in ‘syndicates’, which are groups of
members who collectively co-insure risks. At the end of 2016 there were 105 syndicates at
Lloyd’s. The syndicates employ underwriters to write insurance and reinsurance business
on behalf of the members. Individual syndicates often specialise in particular types of
insurance. Each member who belongs to a particular syndicate will contribute capital to
that syndicate and will accept a portion of the insurance risks written by the syndicate; the
share of each member being predetermined according to the amount of capital they have
contributed. The profit or loss made by the syndicate is then shared among its members in
these proportions. The member’s share of a syndicate is fixed during an underwriting year
but may change from year to year.
Limited liability
Traditionally, individual Names could not limit their liability in respect of their exposures at
Lloyd’s: they were potentially liable up to the full extent of their personal wealth. However,
when corporate capital was admitted, this was on a limited-liability basis so that a corporate
member’s maximum loss was limited to the amount of capital it provided to Lloyd’s. It
subsequently became possible for individual Names also to limit their liabilities and many
have opted for this approach.
Size of syndicate
Lloyd’s members often spread their exposure by belonging to a number of different
syndicates. However, some corporate members only underwrite through a single syndicate
and some syndicates have only one Name; a corporate member that provides all the
syndicate’s capital.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-07: General insurance markets Page 7
Syndicates vary in size from just one Name to over a thousand. A syndicate is analogous to an
insurance company and the Names belonging to the syndicate are broadly analogous to
shareholders in the insurance company.
Question
From what we have covered on Lloyd’s so far, suggest the key difference between an individual
Name’s involvement in a syndicate and a shareholder’s involvement in an insurance company.
Solution
Many Names are liable for the whole of their personal wealth. If an insurance company has
problems, the shareholders may lose their original investment, but they will have no further
liability. However, Names would have to use their entire personal wealth to bail out their share of
the losses of a syndicate in trouble. Now that most individual Names have opted for limited
liability, there are fewer individuals in this position.
Access to global licences
One key advantage that operating a Lloyd’s syndicate has is access to Lloyd’s global
licences that enable Lloyd’s syndicates to write business almost anywhere in the world.
Lloyd’s is licensed or eligible to undertake insurance business in around 80 countries. This,
together with the strong international brand that Lloyd’s has, enables syndicates to start writing
business in new territories more easily than most insurance companies.
Capital efficiency
Another key advantage arises from the capital efficiency of writing business through
Lloyd’s (capital structure, FAL, Central Fund, etc).
Funds at Lloyd’s (FAL) is the capital fund of a member, ie the amount of capital, specified by
Lloyd’s, that each member must provide. This may be lodged either through physical assets or via
a letter of credit.
The Central Fund is a further layer of protection for policyholders. It is built up from contributions
by members and held centrally by Lloyd’s.
1.4 Self-insuring groups
Question
Define self-insurance.
Solution
Self-insurance is the retention of risk by an individual or organisation, as distinct from obtaining
insurance cover.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-07: General insurance markets
Some insurers are set up with the primary purpose of providing self-insurance for their
owners’ or members’ insurance risks.
Captives
A captive insurance company is an insurer that is wholly owned by an industrial or
commercial enterprise and set up with the primary purpose of insuring the parent or
associated group companies and retaining premiums and risk within the enterprise.
There is another use of the term ‘captive’ in the insurance market, but this is not what is meant
here:
The term ‘captive insurance company’ is often applied to an insurance company set up to
sell insurance to the parent’s customers. This usage is sometimes made, but cannot be
considered to be technically correct.
If you come across captives in the exam, you should assume the first interpretation, ie an insurer
set up for risk retention purposes, unless an alternative meaning is clear from the question.
Question
Without reading ahead, suggest conditions under which a company may consider setting up a
(correctly defined) captive.
Solution
cover required is not available in the traditional insurance market
large enough (by amount of premiums) to go to the effort of setting up a captive
large enough (by amount of capital) to bear some risk
insurance market isn’t satisfactory, eg too expensive, too restricted or tax-inefficient
able to obtain captive management and reinsurance, as required, at reasonable price
The usual reasons for setting up captives include the following:
To fill gaps in insurance cover that may not be available from the traditional
insurance market.
To manage the total insurance spend of large companies or groups of companies.
To enable the enterprise to buy cover directly from the reinsurance market rather
than direct insurers.
To focus effort on risk management.
To gain tax and other legislative or regulatory advantages.
To facilitate the last aim, captives are usually set up in a location where it is possible to gain
such advantages. There are a number of locations that host a significant captive-insurance
industry. However, this has now perhaps become a secondary consideration, with the
primary purposes being the other ones mentioned above.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-07: General insurance markets Page 9
In addition to accepting the risks of their parent companies, captives may also accept
external risks on a commercial basis. In some territories this is necessary in order for
insurance premiums paid by the parent to be tax-deductible.
An authorised captive is free to provide insurance to risks other than those of its parent, providing
this does not change its main purpose. Those who do, called ‘open market captives’, often
provide insurance to the parent company’s customers.
Reinsurance may be used by the captive to limit the extent of self-insurance. For example, the
captive may obtain reinsurance to cover very large losses whilst retaining most of the risk itself.
Alternatively, the captive may be set up in order to gain direct access to the reinsurance market
with all (or most) of the risks being passed to the reinsurer.
Growth areas, in volumes of business being put through captives, include professional liability,
extended warranty, mortgage indemnity, employers’ liability and product liability. Growth is
strongest in areas where the traditional market is:
expensive
volatile (the premiums are very variable)
simply not offering the cover, as with pollution, for example.
Protection and Indemnity (P&I) Clubs
P&I Clubs are mutual associations of ship owners that were originally formed to cover
certain types of marine risks (mainly liability), that could not be covered (at an acceptable
price) under a commercial marine policy.
Today, insurance for many of these risks may be found in the commercial market. However,
owing to their mutual nature and technical expertise, P&I Clubs still currently provide a
significant proportion of the world’s coverage against marine liability claims.
One of the main points here is that if a mutual can do the job just as well as an external
proprietary insurer, the mutual would usually be preferred since, other things being equal, there’s
no ‘insurer’s profit margin’ to pay for.
In addition to providing insurance, P&I Clubs also provide ship owners with technical
assistance in the marine market and advice on issues relating to the shipping industry.
Some of the largest P&I Clubs themselves mutualise in respect of very large claims.
The mutual organisation being referred to is the International Group of P&I Clubs which consists
of 13 P&I Clubs, representing approximately 90% of the world’s ocean-going tonnage. The
member clubs use the International Group as a mechanism to pool their larger risks and to
arrange reinsurance to help deal with very large claims. Not all P&I Clubs belong to the
International Group.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-07: General insurance markets
Pools
A pool is an arrangement under which the parties agree to share premiums and losses for
specific insurance classes or types of cover in agreed proportions. To some extent, all
insurance is pooling but specific pooling arrangements are sometimes used, particularly
where the risks are very large (eg atomic energy risks) or through mutual associations that
cater for an industry.
P&I Clubs, mentioned above, are a type of pool.
The critical difference between insuring with a conventional insurer and insuring with a pool
is that the insured’s liability to an insurer is limited to the premium charged, whereas the
liability to a pool will be related to the insured’s share of the total claims and other costs
that arise.
1.5 Insurance markets
All insurance markets tend to comprise the same participants: mutual and joint-stock
(ie proprietary) insurance companies. Pools are also found in a number of markets,
although not all.
The most developed insurance markets tend to be in large developed economies, notably
the UK, US, Japan, Canada, France, Germany, Italy and Spain.
Many markets have reinsurance companies, but reinsurance is more likely to be placed
internationally than direct business; notable reinsurance markets are the UK, US,
Switzerland and Germany.
The Bermuda market
One market that should be mentioned separately is Bermuda, which has become a major
international centre for insurance and reinsurance, despite not being a large economy in its
own right.
Question
Suggest reasons why this might be the case.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-07: General insurance markets Page 11
Solution
Reasons why Bermuda has become a major international centre for insurance and reinsurance,
despite not being a large economy in its own right, include:
a favourable tax environment
regulatory advantages – the aim is to have a regulatory environment that meets
international standards (eg on solvency standards) yet is attractive for (re)insurers based
in Bermuda, and so has relatively few restrictions (eg rules regarding authorisation,
investment and disclosure are relatively relaxed)
a government that actively encourages and promotes growth of the country’s financial
industry
as a major tourist location with (usually) good weather, it is an attractive place to live and
work
strong historical and cultural links with the UK (which can help attract business from
UK-based companies including Lloyd’s business)
relatively close to the US, with which it has strong business, cultural and tourist links (and
so it can gain access to this major insurance market).
A number of large insurance companies and groups are domiciled there, and some UK
insurance groups have moved their principal domicile there in recent years.
Bermuda had been the world’s most important domicile for captive insurance companies for
some decades; other important captive centres include the Cayman Islands, Vermont, the
British Virgin Islands, Guernsey, Barbados, Luxembourg and Dublin.
Insurance and reinsurance groups are not limited to a single market and many operate out
of multiple markets.
1.6 Non-traditional markets
The transfer of insurance risk to the banking and capital markets is known as securitisation. Some
examples of this were covered in Chapter 6.
The capital markets are increasingly involved in taking insurance risk through Industry Loss
Warranties (ILWs), catastrophe (cat) bonds, ‘sidecars’ and even traditional reinsurance
contracts. These often need more complex legal arrangements involving transformer
vehicles and interest rate swap arrangements.
Industry Loss Warranties, which were mentioned in Chapter 6, are types of reinsurance or
derivative contracts through which one party will purchase protection based on the total loss
arising from an event to the entire insurance industry, rather than their own losses.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-07: General insurance markets
Question
Explain how a catastrophe bond differs from a traditional bond, give examples of relevant trigger
events and explain how catastrophe bonds transfer risk from the insurer to the purchasers of the
bond.
Solution
A catastrophe bond is like a traditional bond issued by an insurance or reinsurance company
(usually via a separate legal entity known as a Special Purpose Vehicle), but where the repayment
of capital (and possibly of interest) is contingent on a specified event not happening.
The trigger event may be related to the insurer’s losses (eg flooding resulting in claims to the
insurer of over £100m), industry-wide losses (eg storm damage causing the insurance industry
losses in excess of $200m) or objective measures of the peril’s severity (eg an earthquake
measuring six on the Richter scale or a windstorm reaching a speed of 50 metres per second).
The company has effectively passed on the insurance risk to the purchasers of the bond because:
if the trigger event does happen, the investor does not receive the remaining coupon
payments, and so the insurer can use the sum of money provided from the investor (in
purchasing the bond) to cover the cost of claims arising from the earthquake
if the trigger event does not occur, the investor gets their interest and capital back in the
normal way.
A ‘sidecar’ is a financial structure that is created to allow investors to take on the risk of a group of
insurance policies. It is a means of allowing investors exposure to the reinsurance market without
having to invest in existing reinsurance companies, which may have losses from previous years. A
sidecar acts like a reinsurance company but it reinsures only one cedant and the investors need to
place sufficient funds in the entity to ensure that it can meet any claims that arise.
The above structures are commonly purchased by hedge funds and other investors.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-07: General insurance markets Page 13
Question
Outline possible advantages of using securitisation products, such as those mentioned in this
section, to cede insurance risk.
Solution
Possible advantages of using securitisation:
insurance risk may be uncorrelated with other risks that capital markets are exposed to,
and so capital markets are prepared to take on this risk
no reinsurance default risk
may be cheaper than conventional reinsurance
provides cover that reinsurers may not be willing to, or have the capacity to, accept
more effective or tailored provision of risk management
source of capital
tax advantages.
They tend to have a very high reliance on third-party models and as a result are
predominantly (though not exclusively) involved with catastrophe risk.
For example, the trigger event for a catastrophe bond may be linked to the extent to which the
modelled loss exceeds a specific threshold once the model’s parameters have been updated to
reflect the event (eg an earthquake), rather than being based on the insurer’s actual losses.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-07: General insurance markets
2 Marketing strategies
We now consider methods of acquiring insurance business.
2.1 Non-London Market business
Insurance business is obtained:
through intermediaries such as brokers, banks and so on
through staff directly employed by the insurance provider
through internet, telesales, post and off-the-page advertising.
If any of these terms are unfamiliar to you then read on – they will be explained below.
Intermediaries
Brokers
Brokers act as intermediaries between the seller and buyer of a particular insurance or
reinsurance contract without being tied to either party. They are likely to be paid by
commission (brokerage) from the insurer, but when placing business legally (under the ‘law
of agency’) they are the agent of the insured.
Brokers may also carry out some functions on behalf of insurers (for example, operating
binding authorities / line slips). When carrying out these functions they are legally agents
of the insurer.
Note the above distinction between when the broker is an agent of the policyholder and when it
is an agent of the insurance company.
Binding authorities (also called ‘binders’) are contractual agreements setting out the scope of
delegated authority, allowing cover holders to enter into contracts of insurance and to issue
insurance documents on behalf of Lloyd’s managing agents.
The contract will specify the period for which insurance can be placed, the classes of
business covered and the policy wordings that are to be used.
Many agencies are paid a percentage of premiums as commission. This causes a potential
conflict of interest for the agency because it has an incentive to increase premiums without
sufficient regard for the profitability of the business.
An agency can increase its commission income by writing a very high volume of business. This can
happen, especially for price-sensitive classes, when premium rates are too low and the business is
loss-making.
Underwriting agencies represent a very large source of London Market business. Many of
these agencies were formed by brokers. In some cases, a company may establish a
specialist agency to underwrite risks on behalf of an insurer. Some agencies have been
formed with specialist risk management functions in-house to write specialist business on
behalf of an insurer.
Outside of Lloyd’s, binding authorities can be used to allow a broker to enter into contracts of
insurance and issue insurance documents on behalf of an insurance company.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-07: General insurance markets Page 15
Similarly, a line slip is a facility under which underwriters delegate authority to accept a
predetermined share of certain coinsured risks on their behalf. The authority may be exercised by
the leading underwriter on behalf of the following underwriters; or it may extend to the broker or
some other agent authorised to act for all the underwriters.
Tied agents
Organisations such as banks and building societies are sometimes tied to a particular
insurer (perhaps part of the same group) and sell that insurer’s products alongside their
own. They are usually paid by commission for this service. They may also act as brokers
or have an insurance-broking subsidiary.
These options are not exclusive – some banks own insurance companies that write some
lines (for example, property and creditor), but act as broker or tied agent for other lines (for
example, motor).
Sale of a particular line of business through a tied agent is exclusive to a particular insurer. If
Insurer A sells motor policies through a tied agent, the tied agent will not also sell motor policies
from any other insurer. The tied agent may, however, sell property policies from Insurer B.
Staff directly employed by the provider
Staff employed by the provider may be paid a fixed salary, or entirely by commission, or,
more usually, by a mixture of these two methods.
Direct marketing
Some insurers employ staff in direct sales, where potential policyholders are invited,
through advertising, to make proposals by telephone or the internet, or are attracted
through cold-call selling by post or telephone.
Methods used
All of the above methods of acquisition are used to some extent across most lines of
business, although the main method varies by country and by type of insurance. Mass
advertising in the media tends to be used for personal lines and small commercial lines of
insurance. For larger commercial risks, personal contact through the insurer’s sales force
or specialist insurance and reinsurance brokers are the more usual methods of acquisition.
The type of intermediary will often depend on the class of business. With classes such as
domestic buildings insurance, mortgage guarantee insurance and travel insurance, insurance
brokers may not be the natural intermediaries. With buildings insurance and mortgage guarantee
insurance, much of the business is sold through the building society or bank that supplied the
mortgage for the house purchase. In the case of travel insurance, the travel agent who arranges
the travel will often sell the insurance. Some insurance companies have tried to develop this
principle for the motor market by arranging for car insurance to be provided on new car
purchases.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-07: General insurance markets
It is unlikely that the methods of sale of insurance will stay static. In the quest for improved
profitability, insurers constantly review their methods of selling business. In the UK within the
recent past there have been increased attempts to sell insurance directly to the public, avoiding
the intermediaries altogether. Direct sales to the public can be made through advertising in the
media (eg TV, newspapers), by direct mail, by phone or using the internet. Making direct sales
using the phone is often called telesales. Placing advertisements in newspapers, magazines or
phone books etc is called off-the-page. The main classes affected by the growth of direct sales in
recent years have been private motor and domestic property.
In some respects, the sale of insurance is quite different from the sale of, say, toothpaste. For
insurance companies, reviewing the efficiency of intermediaries extends beyond an analysis of the
number of sales made and the expenses incurred (ie commission). The insurer will also need to
keep a close eye on the quality of the business sold, eg what was the claim experience for
business sold through each of the sales outlets?
2.2 London Market business
The London Market insurance providers, including Lloyd’s, have traditionally acquired
business through specialist brokers and, in particular, international brokers using the slip
system (also called the subscription system).
Historically, Lloyd’s syndicates could only write risks that they received through Lloyd’s brokers.
However, for certain standard proposals in personal lines insurance a syndicate may now deal
directly with the insured or a non-Lloyd’s broker.
Under the slip system in the subscription market:
1. The insured approaches a London Market broker.
2. The broker prepares a slip that shows, in a standard format, the main features of the
risk to be insured.
3. The broker shows the slip to one or more quoting underwriters, who, on the basis of
the slip and further information as appropriate, quote a premium. The broker will
know which of the many companies and Lloyd’s syndicates are the experts in this
particular type of risk. Note the high level of trust that the underwriter places in the
broker by relying upon the details given in the slip, although they could sue if they have
been misled. The underwriters trust the brokers to have disclosed all the facts that will be
relevant in assessing the risk.
4. The cedant (with the broker’s advice) will then select a lead underwriter and a ‘firm
order’ price for the broker with which to approach the market. This firm order price
may be below any of the quoted prices.
5. The lead underwriter accepts a share of the risk by stamping and signing the slip.
On accepting a portion of the risk, the underwriters write their names (and the proportion
they are willing to accept) on the slip under the description of the risk, hence the term
underwriter.
6. The broker then approaches other underwriters (the following market) to accept the
risk on the same terms. The follow underwriters indicate the share that they are
willing to take by stamping and signing the slip under the lead underwriter line.
(Hence the etymology of the term underwriting.) All the underwriters act as
coinsurers with several liability.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-07: General insurance markets Page 17
Even though the underwriters share the risk, ‘several liability’ means each underwriter is
separately liable for its obligations, and so could be sued separately for any loss that it is
due. If one underwriter went bankrupt, the other underwriters would not be liable for
that underwriter’s share of the losses.
7. The broker continues until he or she has finished placing the risk (that is, received
offers for 100% or more of the risk).
Note the importance of the rate quoted by the lead underwriter. As all the underwriters
follow the premium rate set by the lead underwriter (except in exceptional
circumstances), it is important that the rest of the market respects the lead underwriter.
Also, it is important that the premium rate set by the lead underwriter is not so low that
no other underwriter is prepared to follow.
8. If the written lines exceed 100% then, in agreement with the insured, they are
reduced (or ‘signed down’) so that the signed lines total 100%.
The shares of the underwriters may total something in excess of 100%. (This assists in the
continuity of placing the risk in future years.) The total is then adjusted by reducing all
the percentage shares (often proportionately, but not necessarily so). The underwriter’s
acceptance of an initial percentage of the risk means that this is the maximum they are
prepared to accept on those terms.
9. If it is not possible to find capacity to place 100% of the risk, an additional shortfall
cover may need to be placed at different terms. So the premium rate is increased or
the cover or terms renegotiated.
If the risk is over-placed, this indicates that the firm order price was probably too high.
Conversely, if the risk is not fully placed the firm order price was probably too low. Not
placing the full risk, unless intentional, is usually a bigger issue for the insured and the
broker.
In general, all (re)insurers on the slip receive the same terms. However, there are some
markets where the lead underwriter may receive a higher rate to reflect the additional work
that they carry out on behalf of the following market.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-07: General insurance markets
3 Fiscal regimes
3.1 The need for supervision
Why should insurance business suffer more legislation than, say, umbrella manufacturers? One of
the reasons is that there is more scope for the purchaser to lose out financially. When you buy an
umbrella, you have a look at it, and if you like it, you pay the price. However, with insurance, you
pay the price at the start of the contract and you have to trust the insurer to pay valid claims as
and when they arise in the future.
The uncertainty underlying insurance business means that it is not just a question of trusting the
honesty of the insurer. The insurer may be very well meaning, but if the insurer’s business is not
soundly managed, you may find that the insurer has collapsed by the time you need to make a
claim.
In many countries, therefore, there are specific rules and regulations that apply to general
insurers. Different countries adopt different approaches to the regulation of insurers’ operations.
3.2 Effect of the regulatory regime
The following regulatory restrictions on the actions of a general insurer may be
encountered in one or more countries of the world:
A requirement to have an external audit of the general insurer’s accounts and to
release publicly certain information pertaining to the insurer.
Restrictions on the type of business that a general insurer can write or classes for
which the insurer is authorised. An authority could prevent an insurer from writing
volatile classes of business or classes where it has little expertise.
Limits or controls on the premium rates that can be charged.
For example, the authorities in some US states, eg Massachusetts, set the personal motor
premium rates that must be charged. Some states require that rates are filed (sent to the
relevant state department for approval) prior to an insurer using them. An authority
could also set a maximum or minimum premium or restrict the way in which the
premiums are calculated. For example an authority could set a maximum allowance for
expenses defined as a percentage of the gross premium.
Restrictions on the information that may be used in underwriting and premium rating,
perhaps to avoid unfair discrimination. For example, under the EU Gender Directive,
European insurers are no longer allowed to use gender as a rating factor. (This is discussed
further below.)
A requirement to deposit assets to back claims reserves.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-07: General insurance markets Page 19
A requirement that the general insurer maintains a minimum level of solvency,
measured in some prescribed manner, ie a minimum level of free assets. This might, for
example, be calculated as a proportion of premiums written.
Restrictions on the types of assets or the amount of a particular asset that a general
insurer can take into account for the purposes of demonstrating solvency. This might
be with the possible aim of avoiding risky investments or increasing diversification.
A requirement to use prescribed bases for calculating premiums or for valuing the
general insurer’s assets and/or liabilities when demonstrating solvency.
Restrictions on individuals holding key roles in companies.
Licensing of agents to sell insurance and requirements on the methods of sale and
disclosure of commission / broking terms.
A requirement to pay levies to consumer protection bodies.
Legislation to protect policyholders if a general insurer fails.
Question
Suggest possible legislation that could be used to protect policyholders if a general insurer fails.
Solution
A fund could be set up to pay claims from failed general insurers. It could be funded by the
government or by charging a levy on other insurers.
Companies could be required to deposit a large initial sum to a central governing body. This could
be used to pay claims on default.
EU Gender Directive
The EU Gender Directive was passed in 2004, being aimed at ‘implementing the principle of
equal treatment between men and women in the access to and supply of goods and
services’.
In its original form, the EU Gender Directive included an opt-out in respect of financial and
insurance products provided that certain conditions were met. In March 2011, the European
Court of Justice gave its ruling on the legality of the insurance opt-out provision, concluding
that it is not valid and should therefore be removed with effect from 21 December 2012. From
that point, insurance companies have no longer been able to use gender as a rating factor.
Insurance companies are careful to avoid the use of proxy rating factors (ie highly
correlated to gender) that might be deemed to be indirect discrimination and thus also not
permitted.
Clearly, the inability to differentiate between gender when setting premium rates is having
significant implications for insurance pricing, particularly for motor insurance where there
are material observed differences in claims experience according to gender at certain ages.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-07: General insurance markets
Each insurer is likely to set premium rates based on the expected mix of business by gender but
there is the risk that the mix of male / female policyholders turns out not to be as expected. The
introduction of this legislation has therefore increased the uncertainty of insurers’ claims
experience and profitability.
It is not yet clear how premium rates or underwriting practices have changed as a result of
the ruling. However it is likely that premiums have not simply ‘met in the middle’, but that
there have been additional contingency loadings for the risk of business mix by gender not
being as expected within the unisex pricing.
In other words, this legislation has also led to increased uncertainty in premium rates, at least in
the short term, and hence higher risk margins being charged by insurers.
Other possible regulations
Other regulations that could be imposed on general insurers include:
requirement to provide detailed reports and accounts at prescribed intervals
requirement to purchase reinsurance
requirement to hold a claims equalisation reserve
limits on contract terms
advertising restrictions
prescription to hold certain assets.
Regulation is considered further in Subject SP7.
3.3 Effect of the fiscal regime
In most countries the taxation of general insurers broadly follows that for other businesses
although there may be special features, such as allowing equalisation reserves to be held to
allow for the uncertain nature of general insurance business.
For example, in some countries, transfers to equalisation reserves or catastrophe reserves may be
allowable against taxable profit.
Some countries impose a tax on general insurance premiums for some or all classes of
business.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-07: General insurance markets Page 21
4 Professional guidance
When carrying out work for a general insurer or reinsurer an actuary should always bear in
mind any professional guidance relating to the work being carried out and the professional
body to which he or she belongs.
Institute and Faculty of Actuaries (IFoA) members practising in the UK need to comply with the
Technical Actuarial Standards (TASs) that are issued by the Financial Reporting Council. Although
the content of the TASs is not officially part of the Core Reading, a familiarity with them may help
you pass the exam.
An actuary should also bear in mind guidance on professional standards in addition to
guidance on technical issues.
All members of the IFoA are subject to The Actuaries’ Code. This gives general guidance on
professional conduct to which all IFoA members must conform in both the spirit and the letter.
In addition to formal guidance, the professional body may issue advice from time to time on
specific issues.
The details of all the latest professional guidance issued by the IFoA can be obtained via its
website: www.actuaries.org.uk.
Professional guidance is covered in more detail in Subject SA3.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-07: General insurance markets
5 Glossary items
Having studied this chapter you should now read the following Glossary items:
Benchmark Members’ agent
Binding authority Mutual insurer
Capacity Names (Lloyd’s)
Central fund (Lloyd’s) Open year
Closed year Pooling
Committee of Lloyd’s Premium income limit
Council of Lloyd’s Premiums trust fund (PTF)
Composite insurer Proprietary insurer
Funds at Lloyd’s Protection and Indemnity (P&I) Cubs
Going-concern basis Self-insurance
Lead underwriter Slip system
Line slip Syndicate (Lloyd’s)
Lloyd’s broker UK Guarantee Fund
Lloyd’s deposit Underwriting agent
Lloyd’s managing agent Underwriting ratio
Lloyd’s members’ agent Underwriting year
Lloyd’s special reserve fund Value at Risk
LMX on LMX Wind-up basis.
LMX spiral
London Market
London market excess of loss
Managing agent
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-07: General insurance markets Page 23
Chapter 7 Summary
General insurance is provided by insurance companies and Lloyd’s syndicates. A corporate
entity may also manage its self-insurance through a captive insurance company.
Reinsurance can be obtained from the London Market, Lloyd’s, specialist reinsurance
companies or direct insurers who also write reinsurance.
Direct insurers (as opposed to reinsurers) write insurance business for individuals and
companies. They may be composites or they may write general insurance only (either
specialising in certain classes or writing all classes of GI business). Most insurers are
proprietary, but there are some mutual insurers.
The London Market is that part of the insurance market in which insurance and reinsurance
business is carried out on a face-to-face basis in the City of London. It includes Lloyd’s and
the specialist companies who write business in the City. Much of this insurance is for large
and/or international risks and reinsurance, although Lloyd’s does provide certain personal
lines cover.
Lloyd’s, a major component of the London Market, is a special insurance market where
wealthy individuals and corporate bodies, known as Names, group together in syndicates to
collectively coinsure risks. Lloyd’s itself does not provide the insurance.
Most members are companies (corporate names) and have limited liability. Private
members may have unlimited or limited liability. Lloyd’s syndicates can write business
almost anywhere in the world.
A number of large enterprises have set up a captive insurance company to provide for their
own insurance needs, retaining premiums and risk within the enterprise. The main reasons
for captives include:
focusing effort on risk management
managing the overall insurance spend
providing direct access to the reinsurance market
providing insurance cover not available elsewhere.
Also, there may be tax or regulatory advantages. In addition to accepting the risks of their
parent companies, captives may also accept external risks on a commercial basis.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-07: General insurance markets
Protection and Indemnity (P&I) Clubs provide insurance to ship owners. They are a popular
way to cover marine liability claims due to their mutual nature and the provision of technical
assistance. Some of the largest P&I Clubs themselves mutualise in respect of very large
claims and the purchase of some reinsurance via the International Group of P&I Clubs.
Specific pooling arrangements, where the parties agree to share premiums and losses for
specific insurance classes or types of cover in agreed proportions, are sometimes used
particularly where the risks are very large (eg atomic energy risks) or via mutual associations
that cater for an industry.
Markets in different territories tend to differ in the concentration of insurers (by market
share), the sales methods used, the importance of mutuals and whether composites are
permitted.
Reinsurance tends to be placed internationally. Many reinsurers are based in the US,
Switzerland and Germany. Bermuda has become a major international centre for insurance
and reinsurance, with a number of captive insurers being based there.
Non-London Market business can be sold:
through intermediaries, such as brokers or tied agents (eg building societies or travel
agents)
by staff directly employed by the provider
via direct marketing methods (eg internet or telesales).
The main sales method varies by class of insurance.
Traditionally, business is placed in Lloyd’s and the rest of the London Market by specially
accredited brokers, using the slip system.
A regulator could restrict the actions of a general insurer in many ways including limiting
premium rates, restricting investments and requiring a minimum level of solvency on a
prescribed basis.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-07: General insurance markets Page 25
Chapter 7 Practice Questions
7.1 State the types of insurer that provide insurance in the direct insurance market and the ways they
may be owned.
7.2 Explain what a pooling arrangement is, and give one example.
7.3 Describe P and I Clubs.
7.4 (i) Define the term captive insurer.
(ii) State the advantages and disadvantages to a large multinational company of setting up a
captive insurer.
7.5 A large industrial corporation has recently acquired a general insurance company that has
Exam style
traditionally written personal motor business. The new management wishes to expand the
business into homeowners insurance, small commercial lines insurance, larger commercial risks
insurance and personal computer extended warranty insurance. The motor portfolio has
traditionally been written through independent brokers.
(i) List the various options that the insurer may have in distributing its products. [4]
(ii) Describe how the general insurance company’s choice of distribution channels may affect
its business and the decisions it must make, under the following headings:
volumes / market
expenses / set-up
risk premiums. [8]
[Total 12]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-07: General insurance markets
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-07: General insurance markets Page 27
Chapter 7 Solutions
7.1 The insurers within the direct market can be subdivided into:
mutuals and proprietaries
or into
composites, specialist insurers or multi-class insurers.
Mutuals are owned by its policyholders.
The proprietaries may be:
publicly owned (ie a listed company with many shareholders)
owned by other companies (eg a bank)
owned by a mutual life office
privately owned.
7.2 A pooling arrangement is where a number of similar organisations group together and agree to
share premiums and losses for specific insurance classes or types of cover in agreed proportions.
One example would be the members of a Protection and Indemnity Club in which ship owners
pool their risks.
7.3 P and I Clubs are Protection and Indemnity Clubs. These are mutual associations of ship owners.
Such clubs provide a pooling arrangement which covers risks not traditionally insured by a
commercial marine hull policy, eg damage to harbours, removal of wrecks, pollution, loss of life
and personal injury.
They also provide ship owners with technical assistance in the marine market, and advise on
issues coming before the shipping industry.
They can provide access to the International Group of P&I Clubs, which can be used to pool larger
claims and to arrange reinsurance for very large claims.
7.4 (i) Definition of a captive insurer
An insurer wholly owned by an industrial or commercial enterprise set up with the primary
purpose of insuring the parent.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-07: General insurance markets
(ii) Advantages and disadvantages
Advantages:
fills gaps in cover that may not be available from the traditional insurance market
helps manage the total insurance spend of the company and in particular to make
financial plans more predictable due to the increased stability of premiums
allows direct access to the reinsurance market
helps focus effort on risk management
retains profits that would otherwise have been passed to other insurers
may gain tax or regulatory advantages, eg if the captive is set up in low taxation offshore
location.
Disadvantages:
expenses of setting up a captive and hiring the insurance expertise needed
capital is required to set up the captive
regulatory approval may be required from all the countries that the multinational
operates in
risk is retained within the same group
risk of accumulations building up due to a lack of diversity in the business written
no access to insurers’ expertise, eg in dealing with complicated risks or claims
setting up a captive may divert management attention from the core business.
7.5 (i) Distribution channels
Possible distribution channels are:
independent intermediaries (brokers) … [½]
… which could be specialist brokers (for large commercial risks) [½]
intermediaries tied to a particular insurer, such as: [½]
– banks and other financial institutions [½]
– computer shops or manufacturers [½]
direct sales through staff directly employed by the insurance provider [½]
through direct marketing methods, such as:
– telephone sales [½]
– internet [½]
– post [½]
– off-the-page advertising [½]
affinity groups [½]
[Maximum 4]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-07: General insurance markets Page 29
(ii) Effects on business
Volumes / market
The choice of sales channel will affect the likely volume of business sold in each class; some
channels being more popular than others. [½]
Current customers and the brokers may not be happy if the motor business is also sold through
direct marketing. [½]
Homeowners insurance may be sold using direct sales techniques or the company may also team
up with a mortgage provider. [½]
Small commercial lines may be sold using mass advertising and direct sales or using brokers. [½]
Larger commercial risks are likely to be sold in smaller volumes via specialist brokers. [½]
Extended warranty will probably be sold via a tied agent, such as the shop selling the product
covered by the insurance. [½]
Different channels may give access to different segments of the market. [½]
Each channel is likely to experience different competitive pressures and hence could lead to
different profitability. [½]
Expenses / set-up
The level of commission (eg to brokers or tied agents) will depend on the distribution channel
used. [½]
However, ongoing expenses may be reduced since the broker or agent will be able to carry out a
lot of administration (eg endorsements and dealing with claims). [½]
Set-up costs for using brokers should be relatively low, whereas the use of any direct channel will
result in significant set-up costs associated with investing in the necessary infrastructure,
training etc. [1]
Any mass advertising used to accompany direct selling methods, eg newspaper adverts, could be
expensive. [½]
Mailing existing policyholders as a way of introducing new lines of business could be relatively
cheap. [½]
The company may charge different rates for different channels to reflect the different expense
levels and types. [½]
The persistency may differ by channel, which will affect the spreading of initial expenses. [½]
Risk premiums
Different types of policyholders are likely to buy insurance using different sales channels and
hence the claims experience will differ. [1]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-07: General insurance markets
If the company uses more than one distribution channel for a class of business then it must decide
whether to charge the same premiums for each distribution channel or to allow cross-subsidies.
[1]
[Maximum 8]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 1
External environment
Syllabus objectives
1.3 Describe the implications of the general business environment in terms of the:
effect of inflation and economic factors
effect of legal, political and social factors
effect of the climate and environmental factors
impact of technological change.
Covered in part in this chapter.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-08: External environment
0 Introduction
In this chapter, we continue our discussion of various features of the general business
environment and their implications for general insurance business.
This chapter discusses the impact of:
claims inflation and other economic factors, such as the underwriting cycle, investment
conditions and currency movements
legal, political and social factors – in particular, court awards, legislative changes, and
trends in society’s behaviour and attitudes
the climate and environmental factors, such as the weather, other catastrophic events
(both natural and human-made) and various classes of latent claims
changes in technology.
Question
Define a latent claim.
Solution
A latent claim is a claim resulting from a cause that the insurer was unaware of when it wrote the
policy, and for which the potential for claims to be made many years later had not been
appreciated.
In common parlance, latent claims are also those that generally take many years to be reported.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 3
1 Inflation and economic factors
1.1 Introduction
General economic conditions can affect insurance business in many ways. For example, in times
of low economic growth and high unemployment, the following effects can be observed:
a greater number of claims on mortgage indemnity guarantee insurance, as more homes
become repossessed
more claims for theft and arson, as crime rates increase
more attempts to make fraudulent or exaggerated claims
increased demand for pecuniary loss cover, as businesses become more concerned about
the risk of suppliers, debtors, etc becoming bankrupt.
This section discusses the following economic influences:
different types of claims inflation and how inflation (including expense inflation) affects
insurance business
the underwriting cycle – how it arises, influences on it and ways in which insurers deal
with it
investment conditions – in particular, the importance of investment income to insurers
and allowance for investment income in underwriting / pricing
currency movements – situations when this is and isn’t important and dealing with
exchange rate movements (eg by analysing business by currency and having an
appropriate investment strategy).
1.2 Claims inflation
The general levels of inflation in the economy affect the cost of providing insurance and are,
therefore, likely to be reflected in premiums.
Except for fixed benefit claims, inflation will affect the amount of each claim (severity). It will also
affect the level of expenses incurred by the insurer. This section focuses mainly on inflation of
claim amounts.
Different types of claims inflation
However, different types of insurance are affected by different types of inflation, and so the
overall cost may not be affected in the same way.
Question
Without looking ahead, list four different types of inflation and indicate how they might affect
insurance claims.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-08: External environment
Solution
Four different types of inflation that might affect insurance claims are:
price inflation, which will affect the replacement cost of goods
earnings inflation, which will affect repair costs and loss of earnings claims
medical inflation, which will affect medical expense claims
court inflation, which will affect claims where the claim amount is decided by a court,
eg on some liability claims.
Failure to anticipate appropriate levels of inflation can lead to insurers charging premiums
that are likely to be less adequate than they believe them to be. They can also lead to
under-reserving if reserving is done using methods that require an explicit assumption
about inflation.
The following discussion assumes that inflation is positive, ie increases claims costs, which is
usually the case. However, it should be borne in mind that there have been periods in some
territories where some types of inflation have been negative.
Household contents insurance
The most commonly quoted inflation indices are those for general consumer goods; these
are commonly known as retail-price inflation or consumer-price inflation. These may
reasonably be expected to affect the cost of claims of household contents policies,
although they may not be an entirely accurate predictor of claims costs since consumer
goods are likely to be the subject of claims whereas the inflation indices may include items
such as food and housing costs.
Buildings insurance
Private, commercial and industrial property claims will generally be for the repair and
rebuilding of property, particularly buildings. These costs will be linked to the cost of
building materials, but labour will be a major part of the claims costs. This cost is more
likely to be linked to wages than prices; wages tend to increase more than prices so the
cost of this insurance is likely to increase more than general prices. If wages change
differently in different industries, the link to an index may be less direct.
Another aspect of inflation is ‘loss amplification’ or ‘demand surge’. This arises where
there is a temporary increase in costs of labour or raw materials due to a large number of
claims being made at the same time, for example, as a result of a single large catastrophic
event.
Medical expenses
One area, important for general insurance, in which inflation has been persistently higher
than the most quoted indices, is medical expenses. A specialist inflation index is almost
certainly necessary for projecting this type of business.
This will apply to claims on medical expense insurance (ie private medical insurance) and bodily
injury claims (eg on motor insurance).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 5
In many territories medical inflation can be significantly higher than price or wage inflation
because it is a combination of several factors:
more advanced medical treatments are used, which are more expensive
better treatment means patients survive for longer, but still require medical care
in some cases, doctors’ and consultants’ salaries can rise in excess of average wage
inflation.
Motor property damage
Motor property damage claims are generally for repair. This will include the supply of parts,
but motor repair is labour-intensive and will be related to wage indices. Large claims will
generally be for the replacement of vehicles.
The cost of providing a replacement vehicle may vary quite differently from a general price
inflation index. It will be influenced by factors such as the competitiveness of the motor
insurance market, availability of cars from overseas and efficiencies in the manufacture of
vehicles. Specialist indices, or adjustments to a prices index, may be required. This may vary
according to the type of vehicle (eg car, van, bus).
Fixed benefits
A few types of insurance are immune from inflation because they provide fixed benefits.
These include some personal accident policies. We should expect sums insured to
increase in line with inflation, (either because policyholders will regularly reassess their needs,
thus without a link to a particular index, or because some insurers increase sums insured on
some policy types in line with an index, as a default); but as premiums will be proportional to
sums insured, premium rating would not be affected by inflation.
Under fixed benefit contracts, eg a personal accident policy providing a specified payout on loss of
a limb, the benefit amount is known throughout the period of cover. There is therefore no risk to
the insurer that the claim amount will be greater than expected.
Of course the number of claims might be greater than expected, but remember that this section is
just discussing inflation of claim amounts, rather than trends in claim frequency.
The sum insured may increase from one year to the next due to:
policyholders choosing a higher level of cover, or
the insurer increasing the benefit amounts.
In either case, the increase may be in response to the increasing cost of living, for example.
However, there could be other factors involved. These increases will also tend to be ad hoc.
Hence, the benefit level may not be increased for several years and might be expressed in round
figures.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-08: External environment
For example, the standard level of benefit for loss of limb on a personal accident policy might
progress as follows:
Year 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018
Sum insured ($) 25,000 25,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 40,000
Question
Outline other possible factors that could prompt a policyholder to increase the level of cover on a
personal accident policy.
Solution
The following factors could prompt a policyholder to increase the level of cover on a personal
accident policy:
a change in family circumstances, eg marriage or birth of a child
increasing salary, in particular due to a change in job or promotion
a response to marketing material from the insurer, eg promoting the benefits of, or
offering discounts on, an increased level of cover.
If the benefit amounts are increased on renewal, there will be a proportionate increase in the
premium (unless the pricing basis is also changed). There is a slight risk to the insurer that if it
increases the benefit amounts, and so demands an increased premium, this might discourage
policyholders from renewing. However, as the Core Reading points out, premium rates are often
expressed as a premium proportional to the sum insured. The premium rate would therefore be
unchanged, which may be more acceptable to policyholders.
However, if sums insured, and therefore premiums, did not increase over time then the cost
component of premiums would need to be increased from time to time.
This is referring to the allowance for expenses in the premium. As discussed below, expenses will
be subject to inflation, which is most likely to be salary-related inflation.
Liability insurance
Liability insurance presents a generally different relationship with inflation. Liability for
property damage may develop in line with the same indices as property damage claims.
However, claims for personal injury are more complex. They generally have several
components.
The components of personal injury claims are sometimes called ‘heads of damage’. The three
components that will be discussed here are:
compensation for loss of income
cost of medical and nursing care
awards for pain and suffering.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 7
There may be compensation for loss of income, which will be subject to the same inflation
indices as other income-related costs.
However, other factors may increase the cost of this component at a greater rate than general
wage inflation. Two examples from the UK are given below.
Examples
Structured settlements
Since 2005, UK courts have had the power to insist that claims for compensation of future
earnings are given in the form of a structured settlement (also known as a ‘periodical payment’).
This is where compensation is paid in the form of an annuity rather than a lump sum.
Paying claims as a structured settlement is expected to increase the cost of claims to insurers,
because:
annuities can be expensive to purchase, especially if the market for impaired life annuities
is limited
the courts might decide to increase the regular payment amount at a later stage
it will be more expensive to administer the regular payments compared to a lump sum.
The reluctance of insurers to have a structured settlement may encourage them to accept a
higher lump sum settlement than they would otherwise, and so increase their costs.
Changes to the Ogden tables
Claim payments that are intended to represent the future lost earnings of an individual following
an accident are likely to be based upon the present value of that future income. The courts may
from time to time change the rate of interest at which insurers are allowed to discount future
earnings.
The Ogden tables are actuarial tables that provide multipliers that are widely used by UK courts in
assessing the present value of future losses in personal injury cases. They are based on
assumptions for life expectancies, employment risk and a set of discount rates. The discount rate
actually used is set by the Government.
The discount rates to be used (and indeed other assumptions in the tables) will be changed from
time to time. Some changes could have a dramatic effect upon the overall claim payments. In
March 2017, a sharp reduction in the discount rates came into effect in the UK. Such reductions
have the effect of increasing lump sums awarded. However, the UK Government has since
announced a proposed change in the way in which the rate is calculated, which is expected to
partially reverse the reduction.
The unpredictability of these decisions makes it difficult to estimate inflation in the cost of
compensation for loss of income.
Question
Explain what is allowed for by the employment risk assumption in the Ogden tables.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-08: External environment
Solution
The employment risk assumption in the Ogden tables allows for the risk that the individual may
have been unable to work (and thus earn an income) in some future periods, assuming the
accident did not happen. For example, this may be due to sickness, unemployment or retirement.
A second component of personal injury claims is the cost of medical and nursing care, which
is more likely to develop according to medical expenses inflation, and may also be affected
by changing approaches to discounting.
Finally, awards for pain and suffering have tended to become more generous in many
countries and have grown at a faster rate than general price or wage inflation. These
awards tend to be set judgementally rather than according to fixed criteria. These and other
factors often called ‘social inflation’ or ‘superimposed inflation’ are further discussed
below.
These components of personal injury claims are discussed later in this chapter, in Section 2.1,
where we cover court awards.
Economic influences
The frequency of losses can also depend on economic factors.
Example
In times of recession, there might be increases in the number of claims on creditor
business, in respect of arson on property business and in theft generally.
Expense inflation
The cost loading for an insurance policy is also subject to inflation. Insurance is a relatively
labour-intensive industry (although technology may improve productivity and reduce unit
costs in the future). This suggests that this component of policy costs may be likely to
increase in line with wage inflation.
1.3 The underwriting cycle
The underwriting cycle (also known as the ‘insurance cycle’) is a cycle of high then low premiums.
When insurance premiums are high and profitable, competition tends to increase as more general
insurance companies want a share of the profits. The competition then drives down premiums.
Low, unprofitable premiums lead to insurers struggling to stay afloat. Some insurers become
insolvent and leave the market. The reduced competitive pressures then lead to an increase in
premiums, and so the cycle continues.
Although it might seem difficult to believe, there has been a surprisingly clear cyclical pattern of
insurance profits in the past. Despite this clear pattern the cycle is quite difficult to predict going
forwards.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 9
In the past it has been observed that insurance premium rates have varied in ways that do
not reflect the underlying cost of providing the insurance. This is most common in large
commercial and industrial insurance; for example that placed in the London Market, but it
affects all classes of insurance.
On many general insurance products there will be times when insurers can make a large
allowance for profit in their premiums and other times where they need to make a much smaller
allowance (if any). This is due to the effect of the underwriting cycle, which can often be
observed, not only on large commercial and industrial insurance, but also on many personal lines
products such as household and private motor insurance, particularly in competitive markets.
Stages of the underwriting cycle
In general, the cycle can be described in the following terms, although describing it as
starting from a position of general profitability is purely arbitrary: the sequence could be
entered at any point.
1. Insurance is generally highly profitable. This position is commonly known as a hard
market.
Insurance premiums are generally high (or ‘hard’) at this point. You can think of it as
being a time when it is hard for policyholders to buy insurance cheaply.
2. The level of profits attracts new entrants to the market and encourages existing
insurers to write more business.
These insurers are attracted by the prospect of good returns.
3. To fill the extra capacity, premium rates are reduced to attract business.
Premium rates start to ‘soften’ during this phase as insurers compete for market share.
4. Eventually premium rates fall to the extent that insurance is generally loss-making.
This position is commonly known as a soft market.
Insurance will often merely be less profitable rather than actually loss-making. This is the
bottom of the cycle.
5. Insurers leave the market in response to the level of losses, or reduce the amount of
business they write.
6. With restricted availability of insurance, premium rates increase.
7. Eventually premium rates rise to the extent that insurance is generally highly
profitable.
We’re back at stage 1 again, and so the cycle continues…
Question
Explain why companies don’t enter at the bottom of the cycle and leave at the top.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-08: External environment
Solution
It may be difficult for an insurer to act against the cycle because:
It is far from obvious when the peak and trough have been reached.
Even if it were known, such a policy is not practical for several reasons, eg:
– the insurer would need to get a large market share from a standing start, this may
involve offering very low premiums or spending lots on advertising
– the insurer would incur high expenses on closing down and starting up again
(acquiring new business incurs higher expenses than processing renewals).
Note that different classes of insurance business will tend to be at different points of the cycle at
different times. At any point in time, profits from one class of business will subsidise another, less
profitable, class.
It is important that an insurer is aware of the position in the underwriting cycle of each of its
classes of business when making strategic decisions.
Influences on the underwriting cycle
It should be noted that an insurer’s ability to write insurance is limited by the amount of
capital that it holds. While the prospect of an extremely profitable market will attract new
capital that may be subscribed to existing companies and new companies, a profitable
market in itself increases insurers’ capital bases as retained profits increase capital
holdings. Since the same effects apply to reinsurers, reinsurance is also likely to become
available on easier terms, which increases insurers’ ability to write business.
So stage 2 above (an expanding market) is a natural consequence of stage 1 (a profitable market).
The actual mechanisms that reduce the size of the market when it is unprofitable will be:
companies becoming insolvent
companies withdrawing as a reaction to unprofitability because of unwillingness to
accept continuing loss
reinsurance being less readily available.
In the past, soft markets have often ended when a major disaster triggered severe losses at
a time when premium levels would not support the normal level of claims. Examples of this
are Hurricane Andrew in 1992 and the terrorist attacks of September 2001 (as well as some
other substantial losses earlier in that year).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 11
Possible reasons why the underwriting cycle exists
The reasons for the existence of the cycle are much debated.
Four factors that encourage the cycle’s progress are now discussed:
the ease with which new entrants can join insurance markets
the delay between writing business and knowing how profitable it is
simplistic regulatory capital requirements that encourage insurers to write more business
when premium rates are falling and less business when they are rising
economies of scale, which encourage marginal costing.
Low barriers to entry
Insurance is an industry in which barriers to entry are generally low. Authorisation is a
significant process in most countries, but if a new company can demonstrate capital
sufficiency and technical competence, it will usually be authorised fairly quickly. Setting up
in business does not require the establishment of specialised plant and equipment or much
development of resources. This leads to a situation in which capital providers can quickly
move into the sector.
Delay until profitability of business written is known
Another key factor contributing to the existence of the cycle is the delay between writing
business and knowing how profitable it is.
Simplistic capital regimes
Simplistic capital regimes may exacerbate the cycle. In many jurisdictions, at least until
recently, the capital required to write an insurance policy depended on the premium.
For example, prior to 2016 the EU regulatory minimum capital requirement (MCR) for general
insurers (known as ‘Solvency I’) was approximately 16%–18% of annual premiums.
Question
Explain the rationale behind this approach.
Solution
The rationale behind the EU minimum margin was that the amount of capital an insurer holds
relates to the amount of business it writes. It is a simple measure and it is easy to calculate. It is
easy for a regulator to enforce and verify, and for third parties to make comparisons between
insurers.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-08: External environment
However, a disadvantage of this approach was that it required less commitment of capital to
write a policy if it was under-priced than it would have done if it had been overpriced, the
exact opposite of what risk-based considerations would merit. This means that companies
can write more business – in terms of the amount of risk taken on rather than the amount of
premium written – as premium rates fall. Conversely, as premium rates rise they must
restrict the amount of risk taken on unless they can raise more capital. This exacerbates
the difficulty of finding cover and will tend to drive premium rates even higher.
Although this approach was modified in some situations (eg if claims were very high),
nevertheless the Solvency I MCR formula was very simplistic compared to the risk-based
Solvency II regime, which became effective on 1 January 2016. (Solvency II is covered in more
detail in Subject SA3.)
Economies of scale
The economics of insurance business may also help to enforce the cycle. Insurers’
overheads tend to be, if not fixed, then less variable than premium rates. There may be little
or no cost saving (apart from commission) from an insurer not writing a policy. Therefore, if
business at least covers its claims cost it may be marginally profitable for an insurer to
write it, even if business overall makes losses. However, in the depths of soft markets, it is
common for business to fail to do even this. Insurers sometimes do not want to lose market
share because of the cost of acquiring the business again in the future, loss of reputation
and other reasons.
In a competitive market, an insurer may set premiums at a level that makes an insufficient
contribution to its fixed expenses. This may be justified on the grounds that there is still some
contribution to fixed expenses, as opposed to the zero contribution which would result from
trying (and failing) to sell an uncompetitive product with a ‘correct’ contribution built in.
So, it is important that an insurer is aware of the true underlying profit or loss of its business.
Otherwise it is all too easy for it to get carried away with making premium cuts in line with the
competition and end up in a position where premiums do not even cover claim costs, and this can
result in unprofitable business.
1.4 Investment conditions
Insurance companies take premiums from customers and hold them until they have to be
paid out in claims; these monies will be placed in financial investments during this period.
Most of their capital is also available for investment.
An insurance company needs to decide how to invest the money that it has at any one point in
time. It will be exposed to the investment conditions of the assets it invests in. For example
equity investments will be exposed to changes in the underlying market values (of the individual
shares or of the market overall).
The capital that the insurance company holds can be split into two broad categories:
that required to meet the liabilities, eg the statutory reserves, plus
the free assets, which is the excess of the company’s assets over its technical liabilities.
Generally, an insurer will try to hold assets to match its liabilities (by term, nature, certainty and
currency), but will have greater freedom over how it invests its free assets.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 13
In this, insurers are unlike non-financial companies, whose capital is usually tied up in
capital goods or stock. This means that income from invested securities is an integral part
of insurance business.
Only a small proportion of an insurance company’s assets is likely to be tied up in fixed assets,
such as the office buildings or machinery. Therefore, where the assets are invested, and the
investment return those assets make, are more important decisions for an insurance company to
make than they are for other companies, such as manufacturing firms.
Significance of investment conditions
Question
Suggest factors that might influence the significance of investment conditions for a general
insurance company.
Solution
The significance of investment conditions is influenced by:
the size of the company’s free assets
the amount of business the company writes (eg annual premium income)
the size of its in-force business (eg size of the reserves)
the length of claim delays (both reporting and settlement delays)
the term of the contracts (eg investment is less important for weekly travel insurance
contracts than for five-year extended warranty policies)
the premium payment method and distribution channels (premiums might be more
subject to delay under some methods / channels).
The amount of investment income that is generated by insurance business depends on the
characteristics of that business: the longer-tailed the business, the greater the amount of
investment income likely to be generated.
Some personal lines business, such as home contents, is very short-tailed, and premiums
may be paid monthly; very little investment income is generated in these circumstances.
Liability insurance will not pay claims, on average, until several years after premiums are
received; in this case the investment income will be a significant proportion of the
premiums.
Question
Explain why claim delays on liability business can be for ‘several years’.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-08: External environment
Solution
The claim may not be notified for some years after the claim event, eg the policyholder may not
be aware that he or she has been exposed to a harmful substance until symptoms of a disease
emerge many years later. Also, the exposure may be over a long time period.
There may be a significant delay before the claim is fully settled. It may take time to agree
whether the policyholder is liable or not, and to decide on the amount of compensation, which
may involve court proceedings and may be disputed. Some claims may be settled using partial
payments.
Allowing for investment return in pricing
Traditionally, underwriters of all lines of business aimed to achieve an underwriting profit
without taking the benefit of investment income, although in the 1990s an appreciation of
the high levels of investment income obtainable led to so-called ‘cashflow’ underwriting,
which was ultimately associated with high losses.
In simple terms, an insurer makes an underwriting profit if its premiums are sufficient to cover its
claims and expenses. In addition, the insurer will make investment returns on the assets that it
holds, which will contribute to its overall profit.
The rationale behind the ‘cashflow’ underwriting approach was that, although premiums were set
at a level below that required to cover claims and expenses, the underwriting loss would be made
up by the investment return earned on the premiums (before claims were settled). The insurer
should still make an overall profit. It was argued that, unless premiums were set at a competitive
level, no premiums would be received to make any investment return. As competitive pressures
increased, the allowance some insurers made for investment income became increasingly
significant.
In some cases, the investment return actually received ended up being much less than that
anticipated, and so overall losses were made.
These approaches reflect a lack of sophistication in the pricing and underwriting process.
A more sophisticated approach allows for the expected level of investment income under
current investment conditions.
Investment income can be allowed for in the pricing calculation by discounting expected future
claims and expenses to the date at which the premium is received. Under the approach described
here, the discount rate would reflect current investment conditions on the assets backing the
policy – for example, the current gross redemption yield for fixed-interest bonds might be used.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 15
However, a number of points should be made here:
A high rate of interest may indicate that expected inflation rates are high. If these
interest rates are allowed for in pricing then it is important that the projected claims
reflect a consistent level of inflation.
Insurance companies typically place funds at shorter durations than the term of their
longer-tailed liabilities. This is partly because they need to ensure liquidity and
partly because any reductions in the market value of assets, even if they do not have
to be realised, may be reflected in solvency margins. Therefore, current rates, if
high, may not continue to be available as funds are rolled over.
An alternative (more common) approach is to discount at a risk-free rate of return. This rate can
be defined as the rate at which money is borrowed or lent when there is no credit risk, so that the
money is certain to be repaid. In practice, the return on bonds issued by a (secure) government is
often used as the risk-free rate.
If investment income is taken into account in pricing it would be normal to use a risk-free
rate. Insurers may invest in riskier assets than risk-free, but since the insurers themselves
assume the investment risk it is appropriate that they receive the extra income associated
with it.
Question
An insurer is earning 6% pa return on its assets, and the risk-free rate of return is 4% pa. Explain
why it should use a discount rate of 4% rather than 6% in the premium calculation.
Solution
The insurer is earning higher than the risk-free rate because it is taking on some of the risks
associated with the assets it is invested in, such as the risk that the issuer of the asset defaults. If
it discounts at a higher rate (ie 6%), it will calculate a lower premium, which may be insufficient if
the risks do materialise. Using the lower discount rate of 4% allows an adequate premium to be
charged for the risks that the insurer is exposed to.
Pricing should also take account of the required profit loading. If calibrated to a return on
capital it should take into account that the invested capital will already earn the risk-free
rate. This may be done either by:
taking as a target return on capital the target in excess of the risk-free rate
taking account of investment income on the capital in the calculation of projected
profitability.
Also, target return on capital will generally be higher on long-tail lines of business because
they are generally riskier than short-tail lines. This is likely to reduce the effect of longer-
tailed lines’ greater investment income.
The mechanics of pricing, including allowance for investment return, is covered in more detail
later in the course, from Chapter 12 onwards.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-08: External environment
1.5 Currency movements
The impact of movements in currency exchange rates on an insurer partly depends on where in
the world its business is written and where claims are made.
Country where business is written and claims are made
Most small and many medium-sized insurers write business in only one country. All their
premiums are likely to be in that country’s currency and claims in other currencies are likely
to be few. The effect on these companies of movements in exchange rates is very limited.
As discussed below, the exposure to currency movements for these insurers will be limited to a
few overseas claims on certain policies, such as travel insurance.
The insurers that sell business in more than one territory tend to be the larger companies.
On the other hand, most large companies write business in a number of territories as do
many smaller companies, notably London Market and reinsurance companies. Where this
is the case, business may be written in a number of currencies, and the currency of a policy
may not be the currency in which all that policy’s claims are incurred.
Examples of where claims may be incurred in a country that is different from that in which the
policy was written are commercial property, marine insurance and some personal lines policies
(such as private motor and travel insurance).
A single policy may cover a company’s property in several countries, for example, or a ship
may incur claims in several currencies at it sails from country to country. This is not a
problem that is limited to major industrial and commercial policies; for example, motor
policies may lead to foreign claims and travel insurance will do so in obvious ways.
The exposure to currency movements will also depend on any territorial limits applying to
policies. For example, travel insurance that is restricted to journeys within Europe (where the
Euro currency dominates) will have less exposure to currency risk than worldwide travel
insurance.
Business written through Lloyd’s
Traditionally, Lloyd’s has accounted for its business in three currencies: sterling, US dollars
and Canadian dollars. The euro was added when it was launched. Most Lloyd’s syndicates
will analyse their business in these currencies, although there is no reason why other
currencies should not be treated separately if they are important to the syndicate concerned
and added to the appropriate reporting currency when drawing up official returns.
Analysing business by currency
Analysing business by currency avoids distortions that can arise if there are changes in
exchange rates. For example, if a company writes a policy in a foreign currency that
appreciates against its home currency then claims will cost more when measured in the
home currency and a profitable policy may appear to have been sold at a loss.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 17
Example
Suppose a UK insurer writes a policy in the US for a premium of $1,000, assuming that claims will
be 80% of premiums. If claims on the policy turn out to be $800, in US dollar terms, this would
leave the insurer with $200 towards expenses, profit, etc.
Suppose the value of the dollar increased from £0.50 when the policy was written, to £0.70 when
the claim was made.
If the values were converted into the insurer’s domestic currency, then:
the premium would be valued at 1,000 0.5 £500
the claims would be valued at 800 0.7 £560
and so the policy appears to have made a loss.
This policy would make a loss as shown in the insurer’s published (sterling) accounts. However,
this loss is due to exchange rate movements, rather than poor pricing or adverse claims, and so
this would not be a good reason to increase premiums. A better approach would be to have used
some form of currency hedging (we’ll discuss this later).
Currency movements can also cause problems when reserving.
Development factors will be distorted if the underlying claims are converted to home
currency at different rates of exchange within a single dataset such as a triangle.
You may recall from Subject SP7 how claims can be grouped according to the year of origin
(eg accident year) and year of development (eg claim payment) in a claim triangle. Statistical
methods, such as the basic chain ladder, can be applied to the triangle to project future claims.
Development factors are the ratios of claims in successive development periods from chain ladder
calculations. If different exchange rates apply at different times, this will distort the development
factors for each year of origin. This distortion can be removed if only one exchange rate is applied
to all the data.
For this reason the actuarial analysis of historical loss data is usually carried out with all
data converted at current exchange rates.
However, there are exceptions. In some international industries a single currency may
dominate worldwide.
Example
Major claims in the oil and aerospace industries may be determined in dollars because new
equipment and expertise in control and repair is bought in that currency, even though
claims may be paid in the currency of a local company.
Judgement needs to be used in deciding how exchange rates should be applied in any
analysis.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-08: External environment
Currency hedging
Insurers can make real profits and losses through currency movements. A basic
assumption is that an international insurer should hold assets in currencies that can match
its liabilities; in this way the value of both assets and liabilities move together and exchange
gains on one offset losses on the other, or a similar effect might be achieved through a
currency-hedging strategy.
For example, forward currency contracts could be used.
It is not possible to match currency precisely, since, as mentioned above, it is not always
possible to know in advance in which currencies claims will arise, and reserves may run-off
favourably in one currency and unfavourably in another. Insurers may also depart from a
matched position for strategic reasons.
Even a well-matched portfolio that performs as expected can give rise to profits or losses: if
the home currency strengthens, the profits and capital made and held in foreign currencies
will simply be worth less after the change in exchange rates.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 19
2 Legal, political and social factors
Insurance does not stand by itself in a country’s economy. It is affected by many factors in
the way society is ordered.
In this section we discuss:
court awards for compensation claims in liability insurance – how the legal basis of
‘negligence’ has arisen, how the size of a compensation award is decided, recent trends in
such awards, and the impact on liability insurance
the impact of changes in legislation on insurers – this could impact insurers directly (such
as making insurance compulsory) or indirectly, where legislation affects the cost or
frequency of claims
trends in society’s behaviour and attitudes, such as the propensity to claim, driving whilst
drunk, crime rates, fraudulent or exaggerated claiming, and organisations (eg claim
management companies) encouraging people to claim.
2.1 Court awards
Judicial decisions, or court awards, have most impact on claims under liability insurance business.
Consider an employer who is being sued for compensation by one of its employees claiming to be
ill due to working in hazardous conditions. If the claim goes to the courts, the courts can decide:
whether the employee is entitled to compensation, ie whether the employer is liable or
not
the amount of (any) compensation the employee is entitled to.
Courts determine liability and award compensation for wrongs suffered by organisations or
individuals.
Hence they can directly affect both the frequency and severity of liability insurance claims.
In many territories, a decision made by a court can set a precedent for future court awards, ie in
similar cases, and for cases where the parties involved agree to settle out of court. Most liability
claims are settled out of court.
Question
Explain why the parties involved might decide to agree a compensation case out of court.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-08: External environment
Solution
Reasons why the parties involved may decide to settle out of court include:
to avoid (or at least significantly reduce) legal and court fees
to obtain an earlier settlement
to avoid spending the time and incurring the emotional upset of a (potentially lengthy)
court case
to avoid possible adverse publicity (eg a high-profile product manufacturer)
to have more control over the final outcome, ie they can negotiate rather than leaving the
decision to the courts
it may be less risky – if the case goes to court, one party may end up with nothing
to avoid a structured settlement (as discussed in Section 1.2).
Claims are usually made:
on the basis of some breach of contract between the injured party and the allegedly
responsible party, or
(more usually) on the basis of negligence.
Negligence
A tort is a legal term to mean a civil wrong or injury, not arising out of any contract, for which
action for damages may be sought. Note that this is a civil wrong or injury, as opposed to a
criminal offence. Those that conduct such wrongs are known as tortfeasors.
The tort of negligence was developed in the 1930s in response to a case in which a
customer alleged that she had been made ill by drinking ginger beer from a bottle sold to
her that contained a decomposing snail. She could not sue the café owner under breach of
contract as she had no contract with him: the drink had been bought for her by a friend (the
drink was sold as he had received it and was in an opaque bottle, so he had no opportunity
to inspect it and the case might have failed on this also), and the case against the
manufacturer failed because she had no contract with him. The judge concerned defined
the new tort of negligence as a legal requirement not to harm a neighbour, defined as
‘persons who are so closely and directly affected by my act that I ought reasonably to have
them in contemplation as being so affected when I am directing my mind to the acts or
omissions that are called in question’.
This case (Donoghue vs Stephenson) took place in Scotland and it took almost four years from the
initial visit to the café before it was settled, in 1932.
It is now generally accepted that those who cause harm to others or to their property
(known legally as tortfeasors) are liable to compensate the victim. Negligence may arise
even where there is a contract; for example, an actuary who is negligent could be sued for
professional negligence even if there is a contract in place between the actuary and the
client.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 21
This has a direct effect on all types of liability insurance. Although most liability claims are
decided by negotiation between the insurer and the representatives of the victim and few
are decided in court, the decisions of courts set benchmarks for negotiators.
Jurisdiction shopping
One result of different legal systems and awards is ‘jurisdiction shopping’. This is where
the claimant will try to launch proceedings in the most claimant-friendly jurisdiction in order
to maximize any potential award. It is a particular issue in aviation insurance with changes
to the Montreal Convention.
The Montreal Convention is an international treaty which sets out airlines’ liabilities for
passengers (eg for death or injury) and their baggage. Changes to this treaty are thought to have
raised awareness of the fact that countries that have not signed up to the agreement may have
arrangements that are more favourable to claimants, and these are the jurisdictions that people
will tend to try and claim under.
Another example can be seen with the US asbestos litigation. As the law differs between
different US states, some states are notorious for being more plaintiff friendly than other states.
Asbestos claimants will often try to have their claim filed in one of these plaintiff-friendly states.
The ability of asbestos claimants to ‘forum shop’ by selecting the most beneficial locations to have
their claims heard, has to some extent, been abated by the enactment of tort reforms in the US,
discussed below.
Compensation
We now discuss factors that are considered when determining the size of a compensation award.
Compensation is supposed to put the victim in the position he or she would have been in
had there been no incident of negligence.
This is known as the principle of indemnity.
Property damage or loss
This may be straightforward in the case of the loss of some property: it is easy to replace
many things and their cost is easily found. However, even here complications arise:
how should depreciation be calculated?
to what extent should the inconvenience that results from the loss of the item be
compensated?
An example here would be compensation for the loss of luggage, which a passenger may claim
from an airline.
Bodily injury – ‘heads of damage’
Compensation for bodily injury is much more complicated: the tortfeasor cannot put the
victim right again, and a monetary award must suffice.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-08: External environment
Compensation for major injuries is divided into several ‘heads of damages’: different
amounts are provided for different aspects of the victim’s loss. For example:
loss of income
medical and nursing costs and
compensation for pain and suffering
are likely to be recognised separately in an award.
Loss of income is often split between loss of past income and loss of future income, with each
considered separately. Special heads of damage will apply in particular cases.
The courts will consider each head of damage separately and decide on the amount of
compensation for each. The total award is the sum of all the components. In some cases, new
heads of damage have emerged, such as ‘bullying’ and ‘post traumatic stress disorder’, each of
which contribute to the total award amount. This has contributed towards a general increase in
overall claim costs (see below).
Punitive or exemplary damages are intended to punish the tortfeasor over and above the
cost of compensating the victim; these are very rare in English or Scottish law, but quite
common in the US.
The increasing cost of compensation
In general it has been noted in many markets that compensation for negligence has become
more generous. There are two ways in which this is observed:
1. courts may be more willing to accept that there is liability for a victim’s suffering
(and even that suffering exists)
2. given that they decide there is liability, the courts may award larger amounts for
similar losses.
So, from a liability insurer’s point of view, this acts to increase both the frequency and the severity
of claims.
Whether or not this is a good thing is a matter of controversy that will not be discussed
here, but there seems to be general agreement that the trends are real. They may arise
through judicial decision or through legislation. In the US, tort trials are decided by juries
who are also responsible for setting awards; they are another source of this trend.
In other territories, judges may decide the amount of the award. One could argue that the people
on juries are more likely to be emotionally affected by the victim’s case and to decide in favour of
them. This is in comparison to judges, who might be more objective.
In some states of the US, there are ‘tort reform’ laws that constrain the amount of freedom that
juries can exercise. For example, the state may place a monetary limit on the amount of
compensation that may be payable (eg per head of damage or in total). However, some US tort
reforms have increased claims costs, eg in the 1980s when it became easier to claim
compensation for injury due to childhood vaccination.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 23
Examples
An example of an increase in awards that came about by judicial decision in the UK is the use of
the ‘Ogden tables’ for compensation for serious personal injury.
An example of legislation is the Courts Act in the UK, which empowered courts to impose
structured settlements (regular payments rather than lump sums) as compensation even
when both parties preferred lump sums.
The Ogden tables and the impact of structured settlements were discussed in Section 1.2.
The effects on insurance are to some extent obvious: if the cost of awards increases,
compensation will increase and liability claims will be more expensive. This will feed
through into increased premiums.
However, it is important to note that awards are made on claims that are covered by
insurance whose risk period has expired. An unexpected increase in compensation will
affect insurance for which no more premiums can be taken and so will, other things being
equal, cause loss.
While a general trend towards higher compensation can be included in premium rates, the
rate of change is hard to predict and unexpected changes may cause claims reserves to be
inadequate.
2.2 Legislation
Impact of legislative changes on claims experience
Changes in legislation may affect insurers in the same way as court awards.
In other words, the changes can directly affect the frequency or severity of claims on policies that
were written some time ago, and so there is no scope for the insurer to increase the premium of
these policies.
It is possible that legislation can be made to apply to events that occur only after the date of
the legislation, but if it concerns the way that amounts of compensation should be
determined in court this is rare.
A change in legislation that affects all claims that have not finally been settled at the date
the legislation comes into force will affect the adequacy of claims reserves in the same way
as an unexpected judicial decision, although as legislation takes some time to prepare and
enact, it may be less unexpected.
It is therefore important for insurers to keep abreast of relevant legislative proposals and
developments so that they can assess their expected impact, and allow for this in their pricing,
reserving, financial planning, etc. Insurers may also be able to influence governments in setting
legislation – for example, through industry bodies, such as the Association of British Insurers (ABI)
in the UK.
Legislation may affect the expected losses suffered by insurers.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-08: External environment
Example
Health and safety legislation might be expected to reduce the frequency and severity of
accidents, which should reduce claims costs, although if it reflects a higher expected level
of safety, courts may be more inclined to grant large awards to the victims of tortfeasors
who infringe the standards.
Insurers might expect to see fewer employers’ liability claims overall, but some third party liability
claims may be for higher amounts. In many cases the impact of new legislation is difficult to
predict.
Example
New noise regulations were introduced in the UK in 2006, which reduced the number of decibels
at which employers must provide hearing protection for their workers. Although this measure
has increased health and safety levels, it may have actually increased the number of employers’
liability claims. This is because some employees who are being exposed to a level of noise that is
below the old threshold may now be able to claim against their employer for negligence.
Other changes can affect the cost of insurance. For example the strictness of seatbelt
rules, drink-driving rules and motor speed limits – and the strictness with which they are
enforced – should affect the number and severity of road accidents. It is usually impossible
to estimate accurately the effect of any such changes before they come into effect.
The insurer could make use of some information, such as the experience of overseas countries
that have already introduced similar legislation, to estimate the impact on its business. However,
as the Core Reading says, any estimate is likely to be fairly crude.
In particular, it will be difficult to predict:
the degree to which legislation will be enforced, eg what proportion of cars are the police
going to check that people are wearing seatbelts and what penalties (if any) will they
impose?
the extent to which people will adhere to the new laws, which will depend on factors such
as social attitudes of people towards law enforcement or safety measures and the extent
to which the new laws are publicised.
Therefore, it will be important that insurers regularly monitor the impact of new legislation as
soon as it is introduced, so that they can reflect this in their business processes, eg premium
rates.
Legislation that affects insurance directly
Legislation may be aimed explicitly at affecting insurance.
One example is when insurance is made compulsory for people or organisations doing
particular things. Examples of this in most countries include:
motor third-party liability insurance for car owners
employers’ liability or workers’ compensation insurance.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 25
Question
Describe possible impacts on general insurers of making certain lines of business compulsory.
Solution
Possible impacts of making certain lines of insurance business compulsory are:
increased volume of business overall, which should lead to increased overall profits and
lower per-policy expenses
increased competitiveness due to more insurers joining the market, hence insurers need
to reduce premiums to maintain market share
less opportunity for anti-selection, if people are forced to buy a policy
possibly greater risk of moral hazard – eg if people are forced to buy a policy, they may be
tempted to claim fraudulently in order to get something back for their premiums.
A different example is the introduction of the Personal Injuries Assessment Board in the
Republic of Ireland. This was designed to make compensation amounts payable for
personal injury more predictable. It was intended that this would make legal action over
such injuries unlikely, thereby reducing the legal costs associated with them and ultimately
reducing the cost of insurance without reducing the compensation paid to injured people.
The impact on the Irish insurance market since the PIAB was introduced in 2005 has generally
been positive. Claims have been settled more quickly and at lower cost. Insurers have reduced
premiums as a result.
Impact of legislative changes on the litigation process
Legislation also affects the process of litigation. Reforms that make it easier or cheaper to
bring or defend litigation or that affect the payment of legal costs may affect people’s
willingness to bring cases for compensation, impacting the costs of liability insurance.
No-win-no-fee arrangements
An example is when lawyers in the UK were allowed to conduct cases on the basis of no-
win-no-fee, with an enhanced fee for success. This led, as might have been expected, to a
large number of extra legal cases seeking compensation for injuries. It also led to the
emergence of a new class of insurance – after-the-event legal cover – in which the legal
costs that are foregone when a case is lost are recovered through the policy.
Under a ‘no-win-no-fee’ arrangement, the lawyer will only charge the claimant (eg an injured
employee) a fee if the claim is successful. The fee charged is more than it would be otherwise to
compensate for the fact that the lawyer does not get a fee if the case in not successful. Lawyers
can take out after-the-event insurance to cover the defendant’s legal fees where the case is
unsuccessful. (Often the courts will make the losing party pay the other party’s legal costs.)
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-08: External environment
The claimant is therefore not subject to any financial risk:
if they lose the case, no fees are paid
if they win the case, they will receive the court award – the legal fees may be deducted
from the court award or may be recoverable from the defendant.
The introduction of no-win-no-fee arrangements has therefore increased the popularity of
claiming for compensation. This was particularly marked in the UK when changes in the law made
it possible to recover legal fees from the losing party so that the claimant is entitled to the full
court award, with no deduction.
2.3 Trends in behaviour and awareness
The behaviour of people and organisations directly affects the cost of insurance, and trends
in claims costs can often be traced to various trends in society. These may be in the things
people do or in the way they view their place in society, their rights and their obligations.
Increasingly litigious society
It has been observed that a large proportion of cases that might successfully be litigated are
never brought; possibly because victims:
are unaware of their rights
do not know how to go about the process
do not want to dwell on past miseries, or
are not sufficiently motivated to go through the process.
The risk of having to pay legal costs, which was the case in the UK before no-win-no-fee
arrangements were introduced, would also deter would-be claimants from attempting to obtain
compensation.
If the proportion of those eligible to seek compensation that do so is small, a change in the
proportion can have a significant effect on the amounts of claims paid. The general
tendency to seek compensation when it is likely to be available is known as propensity to
claim.
You may have heard this tendency referred to as an increasing ‘compensation culture’. It is
believed that it is becoming more acceptable for people to look for someone to blame for their
suffering and seek compensation from them. This is being seen more in some countries (eg US)
than in others.
Societal attitudes
Other societal attitudes are also important.
A societal attitude is the way in which we think of, and behave towards, others in our community.
Here we discuss changes in attitudes towards drink driving, crime and insurance.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 27
Drink driving
For example, driving while drunk has long been illegal in most countries but in others it was
long considered to be socially acceptable; those who were prosecuted being regarded as
unlucky rather than ill-behaved. In many countries attitudes have changed: this is generally
regarded in many countries as something that responsible people do not do. Consequently
drink driving may be less frequent now than before, with corresponding effects on
insurance claims.
There should be fewer, and less serious, accidents as a result of this change in attitude, reducing
the cost of claims on motor insurance policies.
This trend was reinforced in many places by legislative changes; for example:
a reduction in the level of alcohol in the blood that was permitted while driving
In some territories it is illegal to drive with any alcohol in your blood stream.
the introduction of random breath tests
the penalties for offending, which are generally being increased
the resources devoted to enforcement, eg more police checks are being carried out.
Insurers themselves may have helped in this trend; for example by introducing or enforcing
strictly policy clauses that removed the insurance cover (except what was required by law)
when a driver was drunk. This would have had a direct effect on claims. It would also have
reinforced the idea that driving while drunk was socially unacceptable and would have
raised the cost of so doing, further deterring people.
Crime rates
Crime rates are another obvious area in which societal trends have a direct effect on
insurance costs. Crime often leads to insurance claims since theft, burglary and malicious
damage are often insured perils.
Crime rates tend to vary greatly from year to year, and trends in crime rates will also vary
considerably between countries. General insurance companies might actively engage in trying to
encourage policyholders to take steps to reduce crime, in the hope of reducing claim costs.
Attitude of people towards insurance
The attitude of people towards insurance will always affect the cost of insurance. Surveys
have often suggested that people view fraudulent claiming of insurance as a minor offence,
if an offence at all, especially when it takes the form of exaggerating a genuine claim rather
than presenting a claim that is wholly fraudulent. (This is particularly relevant with certain
products like single trip travel insurance.)
Question
Exaggerating a genuine claim is an example of what sort of risk to the insurer?
Solution
This is an example of fraud, or moral hazard.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-08: External environment
This gives rise to claims cost, as it is often impossible to detect these claims and it
increases the cost of claims handling. While this is a normal cost of insurance any change
in public attitudes will change the general level of claims cost.
Suppose you are using claims data for pricing (eg own insurer data) that already contains some
level of fraudulent or exaggerated claims. If there is no reason to expect this to change over time,
then this data could be used for projecting future claims. If, however, you expect a change in the
extent of fraudulent or exaggerated claims (eg due to changing attitudes), then you should make
adjustments to allow for this.
Organisations encouraging the placing of claims
Some organisations encourage the placing of claims (ie they encourage people to make
claims); increases or reductions in their activity will affect the cost of claims.
These organisations are called claim management, or accident management, companies (or
sometimes, ‘ambulance chasers’). Their aim is to help individuals make compensation claims. For
example, they will arrange for lawyers, medical experts and expert witnesses on the claimants’
behalf. They will often actively encourage individuals to pursue compensation claims, although
the extent of this encouragement will depend on any marketing or advertising restrictions in
place.
In the US some firms of lawyers specialise in personal injury claims, advertising widely for
people who may be able to make claims. A number specialise in particular diseases or
allegedly harmful substances, such as asbestos or silicone implants.
In other countries similar roles may be taken by lawyers, trade unions or specialist firms set
up for the purpose, as happened in the UK after it became legal for lawyers to work on a
no-win-no-fee basis, as mentioned earlier. These organisations tend to concentrate on
liability for causing latent claims (ones that manifest themselves some years after the
cause), which means that the effect on insurance is on reserves, sometimes reserves for
years of account that were thought to be settled in full, rather than on current business.
We discuss latent claims later in this chapter, in Section 3.3. Reserving is covered in detail in
Subject SP7.
Staged accidents
There are also types of fraud that result in claims to insurance policies of innocent third
parties, for example, staged motor vehicle accidents.
An example of this would be where the car in front deliberately and suddenly brakes in order to
cause an accident. The owner of the car then pretends to have sustained serious, but difficult to
prove, injuries (such as neck whiplash or stress) and also fraudulently claims for damage to the
vehicle, which existed before the accident. The people committing staged accidents are often
part of organised crime gangs. Staged accidents are a big issue for motor insurers in many
territories, but this practice is gaining awareness among the general public.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 29
3 Climate and environmental factors
The natural environment leads to many insurance claims, including some of the most
spectacular ones. Recent concerns about global warming have raised the prominence of
this issue, but normal trends in weather and the incidence of spectacular events, means
that weather-related losses are inherently unpredictable from year to year. The
human-made environment can also be a cause of claims in ways that are not always
obvious in advance.
This section covers:
the impact of the weather, including seasonal effects (which will depend on
characteristics of the property being insured), and the possible implications of global
warming
catastrophes, including weather-related events (particularly hurricanes), and factors
affecting the financial impact of these; earthquakes and examples of human-made
catastrophes are also discussed
latent claims, giving lots of examples, and how insurers have tried to deal with latent
claims.
3.1 Weather
Seasonality
The most obvious way in which weather varies, in most countries, is seasonality. In
temperate climes there is the spring / summer / autumn / winter pattern; in tropical climes
there may be a dry season / wet season pattern or a monsoon season. The precise pattern
and the dangers associated with each phase will vary from country to country even within
geographic zones, with differences in weather patterns and building codes, among other
things.
Building codes are the standards to which houses, offices, bridges, etc must be constructed. For
example, in territories prone to earthquakes, such as California and Japan, there are regulations
to ensure that all new buildings are built to standards to withstand earthquakes of a specified
intensity.
In areas where the standard of building construction is high, insurers should bear lower losses.
In general, winter weather is harsher and for some classes is more likely to give rise to
claims: storm damage is more likely and driving conditions are likely to be more
treacherous, including the fact that there are fewer hours of daylight. This is rarely of
concern to insurers, since most policies are issued for a year and will be in force through all
four seasons. However, in extreme cases it may influence patterns used to earn premiums.
The unearned premium reserve (UPR) is usually calculated by taking a portion of premiums in
respect of the unexpired exposure period. Often, this is done on a straight averaging basis, eg for
an annual policy with six months to go it might be reasonable to take half of the premium.
However, if the risk is not uniformly spread over the year of cover, eg where the claim costs vary
according to the time of the year, the proportion of premium taken should reflect the expected
risk in the unexpired period.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-08: External environment
In calculating UPR, an allowance might be made for initial expenses. The calculation of the UPR is
discussed in detail in Subject SP7.
Subsidence and land heave
Although the weather in summer is generally more benign than in the winter, the problems
of subsidence and heave are generally more likely to arise in the summer, particularly when
it’s very dry and hot. The shrinkage of land on which houses are built as the ground
becomes desiccated (dries up) leads to damage to the houses, which is exacerbated when
the drought breaks and the ground expands again. This can lead to a large number of
claims for structural damage to property, especially domestic property, many of which can
be large. Also, when the damage is not caused over a short period of time, as it might be
with a storm, catastrophe XL reinsurance may not respond to these losses.
Heave is essentially the opposite of subsidence. Whereas subsidence involves a downward
movement of land due to a reduction in hydration, heave involves an upward movement due to
increased soil hydration. Heave could occur after trees are felled in an area because they will no
longer absorb moisture from the soil.
Question
Suggest why the catastrophe XL (excess of loss) reinsurance may not have covered many of the
subsidence claims.
Solution
Catastrophe excess of loss reinsurance covers catastrophic events. An event is defined as a
number of claims occurring within a short period of time (defined in the hours clause in the
reinsurance treaty). Many subsidence claims will have been deemed to occur outside of this
period, and so would not be counted in the total claim amount used to determine the reinsurance
recovery.
Location of property
Different areas are obviously subject to different climates, but the vulnerability of particular
properties to weather events will vary in ways that are not always obvious, and make
underwriting difficult for a mass product. Places close to each other will suffer almost the
same weather, but some locations are more sheltered than others, and some will be more
prone to being flooded. Obviously, properties built on flood plains are prone to flooding, as
are those on low-lying lands near the coast, but other vulnerable places may not be so
obvious: where water is channelled as it runs downhill it may make some hillside properties
vulnerable to flooding.
So two properties might be in the same small town but have a very different weather-related risk
because:
one is in a sheltered, dry spot under a hill
the other is in an exposed area, next to a river.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 31
Some insurers are dealing with this issue by, for example:
requesting more precise details about the location of the property and previous claim
history
rating according to a more precise measure of location – eg using full postal code, rather
than just the first few characters.
Global warming
A number of serious weather losses have been linked to global warming.
The theory behind ‘global warming’ is that increased carbon emissions is leading to increased
temperatures. This, in turn, is leading to climate change. Melting of the polar ice caps may also
lead to increased sea levels. Many experts now expect an increase in claims due to severe
weather-related events, such as floods, hurricane, storms and droughts, as a result.
Whether or not this is the true explanation is debatable, and there is some evidence that
major storms in the Caribbean and the Gulf of Mexico have fluctuated in number and
intensity as long as records exist.
In any case, quantifying the rate of climate change is a difficult challenge and open to debate.
The problem for insurers is two-fold:
Firstly, it is not possible to be sure that long-term trends exist or, if they do, where
they will lead.
Secondly, the effect on insurance is unclear.
It has been suggested that even small changes in climate can have a more than proportional
effect on insurance losses, but this is impossible to prove.
Some people consider that global warming will increase the volatility / unpredictability of
weather-related claims, which will impact insurers (even without a change in the mean).
Again, the nature of general insurance as an annual contract means that companies will be
able to adapt gradually to changes in the claims environment.
Question
Climate change is seen as a long-term effect. Suggest some short-term measures that general
insurers could take each year in response to the resulting adverse claims experience.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8-08: External environment
Solution
A general insurer could respond to adverse claims experience by:
increasing premiums, either overall or for certain risks
changing its benefits, eg exclude specific perils
strengthening underwriting or claims control measures
no longer selling certain products
restricting or attracting a different target market, eg stopping marketing activities in
certain locations
strengthening its reinsurance programme.
However, if changes mean that some properties become substantially more vulnerable to
loss, it may affect their insurability and this can lead to political issues.
Many people feel that governments have a moral obligation to protect householders from
flooding. This is demonstrated through state-funded construction of flood defences, such as the
Thames barrier in London. In some territories, such as France and the United States, flood
protection is provided through government insurance or pooling arrangements. In others, such as
the UK, if flood defences fail or are inadequate, the householder may be left paying, and so will
need to buy private insurance.
A concern in the UK has been that those on low incomes may be unable to afford home
insurance, eg if they live in low lying properties or coastal areas.
Therefore, the UK government and the insurance industry have set up a fund called Flood Re, to
provide affordable flood insurance to high risk policyholders by taking the flood risk element of
home insurance from an insurer in return for a premium based on the property’s Council tax
band.
In other words, the policyholder buys home insurance from an insurer as normal, but the flood
risk element of the policy is covered by Flood Re.
Flood Re is financed by a levy on all insurers relative to their share of the home insurance market.
3.2 Catastrophes
Catastrophic losses can take the form of one immense loss, such as an oil-rig explosion.
Alternatively, there may be many smaller insured losses, all stemming from a common,
identifiable event such as a hurricane.
One way to reduce the impact of catastrophic losses is to write business in a wide range of
geographical locations and across many classes. Catastrophe reinsurance will also help.
Catastrophes may be either natural or human-made in origin.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 33
Examples
Natural catastrophic losses include:
Ice, snow, frost: Widespread property damage may arise from water damage caused by
burst pipes. There will also be many more claims for accidents from a
motor account.
Storms: Severe storms (eg wind, hail or rain) can cause extensive damage to
property. There may be a large number of claims from agricultural or
motor policies in a region hit by a hailstorm or household property
damage from wind storms or flooding (eg parts of the UK in the winter of
2015).
Earthquake: Potentially massive damage to property classes (eg Los Angeles
earthquake in 1994).
Human-made catastrophic losses include:
Fire: A large fire especially in hot, dry territories (eg Australian bushfires in
2017).
Air crash: Eg Shoreham Air Disaster (UK) in 2015. This could affect the aviation or
public liability classes. If the problem is a design fault, claims could fall on
the manufacturer’s product or public liability cover.
Explosion: Eg oil depot at Buncefield (UK) in 2005, the Piper Alpha oil rig in 1988.
Losses could hit property, employers’ liability, public liability and/or
consequential loss policies.
Terrorism: Eg terrorist attacks on the World Trade Centre in New York on
11 September 2001.
Hurricanes, storms
Although the US is cited for having the most expensive weather incidents, more recently,
events in New Zealand, Australia and SE Asia have reminded us that ‘weather’ is a
worldwide phenomenon.
The pre-eminence of the US in this regard is partly because of the concentration of high
insured risks (ie properties with high values) and partly because of the vulnerability of the
coast of the Gulf of Mexico and the Atlantic states’ littoral area to hurricanes.
Littoral means pertaining to the coast.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8-08: External environment
As mentioned before, the high total cost of insurance claims from weather-related events in the
US compared to other countries can be partly attributed to:
the large number of properties in certain areas, particularly in cities along the eastern
coast
the high proportion of properties that are insured
the high average value of these properties.
In addition, the US states of Alabama, Florida, Georgia, Louisiana, Mississippi, North Carolina,
South Carolina and Texas are particularly prone to hurricanes.
It is normal seasonal behaviour for tropical storms to form over the Atlantic Ocean and
track in an easterly direction; some forming hurricanes in the Caribbean, the Gulf of Mexico
and on the US’s south-eastern coast. They tend to cause damage – sometimes very serious
damage – in Caribbean states, but the concentration of insured values there is low; whether
or not they are serious events in global insurance terms depends partly on their strength,
but more on whether they affect the US and where in the US they land.
The most expensive weather incident ever recorded (at the time of writing) is Hurricane
Katrina, which hit Louisiana in the autumn of 2005. Although it was a very strong storm it
was not uniquely strong, and not in fact the strongest storm to hit the US in 2005 (that was
Hurricane Wilma slightly later that year). However, Hurricane Katrina passed almost
precisely over the city of New Orleans, which proved to be particularly vulnerable. This type
of effect adds to the uncertainty of underwriting property insurance in loss-prone areas.
Part of the reason for there being such extensive damage was that Hurricane Katrina weakened a
main levee (breakwater) protecting New Orleans. Six days later the levee broke, resulting in
flooding to approximately 80% of New Orleans and subsequent loss of lives, damage to property
and much looting in and around the city.
Rising cost of major losses
It has been observed that the cost of major losses has risen substantially. This is largely
due to economic development: some of the areas in the US most vulnerable to storm losses
have been at the forefront of development. In particular, Florida is a major holiday
destination, which has led to a great deal of development near the coast; it is also a
low-lying state which makes it vulnerable to hurricanes.
Another cause of increases in the cost of disasters is a general trend towards insurance.
Insurance cover is not universal even in developed economies; in less-developed
economies it can be the exception rather than the rule. However, in almost all countries
property is more likely to be covered by insurance than it was some years ago. This means
that the proportion of economic loss covered by insurance in any catastrophe is higher than
it used to be. An obvious consequence of the difference in the proportions of properties
insured in various places is that a catastrophic event in a less-developed country can cause
only modest insurance losses, whereas a similar event in a developed country can give rise
to very heavy losses.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 35
Earthquakes
Earthquakes are occasional events that may lead to heavy insured losses. Geological
structures determine an area’s vulnerability to earthquakes in general, and the most
vulnerable areas are well known, although small events are not unknown elsewhere. Most
areas of greatest vulnerability are areas of low insurance intensity, but there are important
exceptions; notably Japan, including Tokyo, and the San Francisco and New Madrid areas
of the US.
On the other hand, the Asian tsunami of December 2004 – caused by an offshore
earthquake that was one of the largest ever recorded – caused about 230,000 deaths and
widespread devastation, but relatively little insured loss. In March 2011, an earthquake hit
the northeast coast of Japan, causing a 10-metre tsunami; over 20,000 lives were deemed
dead or missing and over 100,000 buildings were totally destroyed.
Other natural perils
Other natural catastrophe perils include flood, typhoon, hail and volcanic eruption.
In the UK the most important catastrophe perils are extra-tropical cyclones (windstorms) and
flooding (including coastal surge, riverine and drainage related).
In some countries there are nationally-administered insurance schemes that may effectively
provide some or all of the cover for certain catastrophe perils.
Human-made catastrophes
Human-made catastrophes consist mainly of terrorist incidents, industrial accidents and
conflagrations.
A conflagration is a large destructive fire, which can be difficult to control.
Terrorism may or may not be covered by insurance, depending on local practice and law.
Terrorist incidents give rise mainly to property damage claims, but may give rise to liability
claims if security measures are found to have been inadequate.
In some territories, such as in the UK, claims arising from terrorist attacks are covered by
government-backed arrangements. In these circumstances, insurance contracts tend to
specifically exclude claims resulting from terrorism. (In some cases, such as in the UK prior to the
2001 WTC attacks, insurers would cover claims up to a specified monetary limit, and the
government-backed arrangement would pay claims in excess of this.)
3.3 Latent claims
Latent claims derive from perils that were unforeseen when the policy concerned was
signed. Students should note, however, that the term is also applied to any insurance
claims that become known about some years after the cause of loss. Most of these arise
from diseases caused by products or industrial processes, but faulty construction of
buildings is another possibility. Claims arising from the sexual molestation of people,
particularly children, is another example.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8-08: External environment
Most latent claims will therefore arise under product liability and employers’ liability insurance.
This is not necessarily the case however. Faulty building construction could probably be covered
under architect’s professional indemnity insurance or a contractor’s construction all risks (CAR)
cover. Child sex abuse claims may arise under public liability insurance.
Examples of types of latent claim
The most notorious classes of claims of this nature are those arising from asbestos.
Claims arising from exposure to asbestos in the US alone have been projected to cost insurers
$200 billion.
Numerous employers’ liability (and some product liability) claims are arising in respect of workers
that handled asbestos materials and products. Although some of those affected were exposed to
asbestos from as early as the 1940s, the resultant lung conditions (eg asbestosis and
mesothelioma) did not begin to materialise until about 1980.
Some other latent claim classes are listed below. These include claim causes that appear to
have run their course, others that are still in the process of manifesting themselves and
others that have caused concern, but may or may not develop into significant sources of
loss:
Agent orange.
This was a chemical defoliant that was sprayed over Vietnam by the US army in the 1960s.
Many of the soldiers based there have sued against the manufacturers of the chemical for
consequent health problems to themselves and their families (ie for birth defects). Most
of these claims were made in the 1980s. More recently (2006), Vietnamese victims have
tried unsuccessfully to make claims.
Radiation from mobile phones.
It has been suggested that this might be linked to an increased risk of some cancers
(particularly in children), headaches or sleeping problems. To date, no definite link has
been proven, but research continues.
Benzene.
Exposure to benzene can cause serious health problems, including some cancers. The
chemical has been found in some carbonated soft drinks, which were, of course,
immediately withdrawn from sale.
Diethylstilbestrol (DES).
This is a drug that was given to millions of women in the US in the middle of the 20th
century to reduce the likelihood of premature births. However, it has been linked to
genital abnormalities in daughters, and even potentially in granddaughters.
Electromagnetic fields.
These are linked to the increased risk of leukaemia and other cancers.
Pollution.
Exposure to pollution may last several months or years. The impact on health of being
exposed to polluted conditions may not be apparent for many years.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 37
Guns.
In the US, there have been attempted claims for compensation against gun
manufacturers:
– by victims of accidental shootings
– by city councils, for the increase in gun crime
– by gun users, where accidental injury has been caused.
To date, most of these claims have been unsuccessful.
Noise-induced deafness.
Most commonly, this is due to working with, or being exposed to, noisy machinery
(eg with pneumatic drills or beside aircraft).
Blood products infected with HIV or hepatitis.
During the late 1970s and early 1980s, large numbers of haemophiliacs became infected
with HIV or hepatitis after receiving tainted blood-clotting substances.
Sick-building syndrome.
The building people work in can be blamed for a range of illnesses, such as irritation to
the nose, throat and eyes, fatigue or headaches. This could be attributed to
micro-organisms within the air conditioning or the humidity of the building, but the
specific causes of these conditions are generally difficult to prove.
Latex gloves.
Some people are severely allergic to latex rubber. Examples of compensation claims are:
– under employers’ liability coverages, from hospitals sued by workers that have
been made to wear latex gloves
– under product liability coverages, from glove manufactures sued by customers
wearing, or patients treated by medical staff wearing, latex gloves.
Lead paint.
Lead is added to some paint to improve its performance, eg in drying quickly. It can be
damaging to health, in particular hindering the development of young children. Now that
the dangers are known, it should only be used in certain circumstances, eg for painting
road surfaces. There are potential product liability claims against paint manufacturers,
and some public liability claims, eg against landlords.
Bovine spongiform encephalopathy (BSE).
BSE is commonly known as ‘mad cow disease’ as it affects the brains of cattle. It was first
found in the mid-1980s, mainly in parts of Europe. However, 10 years later a brain
disease (known as vCJD) was found in humans, causing several deaths, and there is
evidence to suggest that some victims may have caught the disease by eating meat from
BSE-infected cattle.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 38 SP8-08: External environment
Toxic mould.
There have been houses and other buildings in the US, particularly in Texas, where types
of mould that emit toxins have been claimed to cause health problems and damage to
property. Among the parties being litigated against are builders, architects and owners of
buildings (such as schools).
Dalkon shield.
This is a contraceptive intrauterine device that was found to cause severe injury to a
disproportionately large number of its users.
Repetitive strain injury (RSI).
RSI is a generic term used to describe a range of painful conditions of the muscles,
tendons and other soft tissues. It can affect the upper limbs, neck, spine, or other parts of
the musculoskeletal system. They are generally caused by performing work-related,
usually repetitive, tasks, and so they can lead to employers’ liability claims. Vibration
white finger (from using vibrating machinery, such as pneumatic drills) is a traditional
example, although conditions related to computer use (eg poor posture) are more
prevalent nowadays.
Silica dust.
A fine silica dust can be produced when certain types of rock are cut, drilled, etc, which
can cause lung diseases if inhaled. Foundry workers and people working with the
products produced (eg potters and sandblasters) are most at risk unless proper
precautions are taken. It can take, say, 10 to 15 years following exposure before
symptoms develop.
Tobacco.
Smokers and their families have taken tobacco companies to court for illnesses, injury or
death caused by long-term smoking. Most cases have been in the US, where some
medical insurance providers have also claimed compensation from the tobacco
companies.
Year 2000 computer systems.
Towards the end of the 1990s, there was a huge fear that many computer systems and
products that relied on microprocessors would fail in the year 2000. This concern arose
because early computer programs often use a two digit code for the year component of
dates and the ambiguity of the date ‘00’ may lead to incorrect calculations. Products that
may have failed include computers, machinery, lifts and safety equipment. Failure on
safety equipment may also have led to employers’ liability claims. Companies and
organisations all over the world checked and upgraded their computer systems in
preparation for the ‘millennium bug’, and no significant computer failures occurred when
the time came.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 39
Nanotechnology.
Nanotechnology is the ability to work with materials on an extremely small scale, eg 100
billionths of a metre or less. This is still a developing field, but nanomaterials are already
being incorporated into many products worldwide, including cosmetics, paints, medicines
and food products. However, there is very little knowledge about how nanomaterials
may affect the long-term health of workers and consumers.
Any toxic tort litigation arising from nanomaterials could impact manufacturers,
distributors, secondary users (ie producers who incorporated nanomaterials into other
products) and retailers. Insurers writing employers’ liability, general liability and product
liability could therefore be affected.
Problems with latent claims
One problem with latent claims is that it is impossible to know where the potential claim is
lurking. Also, if the claim does materialise, the future claim cost is completely unknown.
For example:
Will there be future employers’ liability claims for damage to people’s eyes from using
computers too much?
If so, how much will the claim amounts be and how many people will be able to claim?
There is also the problem of identifying when exactly the claim event occurred, especially if
exposure (eg to the harmful substance or working conditions) was over many years.
Most latent claims arise in liability insurance. The normal form of these policies was the
occurrence basis in which a claim would always be paid from the year of account in which
the damage was caused. This leads to problems of definition: if a person who worked with
asbestos for a number of years, possibly with several different employers, contracts
mesothelioma some decades later, how can it be traced to a particular year of insurance?
The answer is that a legally-imposed or industry-agreed method of allocation must be
found.
It may be difficult to identify the claim event date. However, the claim notification date should be
readily identifiable and objective.
Partly as a response to this, the claims-made policy was developed in the 1980s. This is
now the standard form of policy for professional indemnity insurance and some other
liability classes. It is intended to cover all claims that were first notified in the year of
insurance. However, the cover granted may be unsatisfactory from the claimant’s point of
view, and even more so from the point of view of a claimant who depends on the
tortfeasor’s insurance to obtain redress. When a claim arises the tortfeasor may no longer
exist, and if latent claims are emerging he or she may have trouble obtaining continued
cover.
So, for example, say an employer took out liability insurance on a claims-made basis. If it is
known that the employer exposed its workers to hazardous conditions, it will be difficult for it to
get cover that is either affordable or comprehensive enough to cover future claims. This is
because insurers will fear a large number of claims being notified in the coming year.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 40 SP8-08: External environment
For reasons such as this occurrence cover may be required in areas where insurance is
compulsory, such as UK employers’ liability.
Liability insurance is intended to protect the insured against the cost of having to pay
compensation, rather than to protect the third-party victim. However, such insurance is
compulsory to ensure that victims can be compensated. It is, therefore, common for
victims to be able to claim directly from insurers where the tortfeasor no longer exists,
having ceased to trade for example.
Latent claims are covered in more detail in Subject SA3.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 41
4 Technological change
The business world changes at an accelerating pace. For insurers and their customers, it
has brought about increasing efficiencies but, as yet, it does not seem to have reduced the
need for human input, nor indeed hastened the arrival of the mythical ‘paperless office’.
It is now possible to do more complicated analysis than ever before, using vast quantities of data.
But however powerful the computers have become, they can’t (yet) do the thinking, and still need
to be operated by people who have an understanding of the problems to be solved.
Among the evolutions that are currently taking place, one might cite:
increased computer power, enabling much more complex models to be processed
reduced cost of data storage, allowing more and more detailed information to be stored
and hence improving the accuracy of predictive models
increasing availability of external data
better strategy, planning and capital forecasting
growing market in modelling software solutions, including the increasing
sophistication of natural catastrophe models
Catastrophe models are covered in Chapter 21.
increasing technological awareness of customers, enabling different methods of
sales, including web-based data transfer and social networking
the growth in, and acceptance of, the electronic broker, the comparison websites
These comparison websites are commonly known as aggregators.
the growing ability to handle claims online
new risks emerging, such as ‘cyber risk’ from criminal activities relating to
technology
Insurance of cyber risks was discussed in Chapter 3.
increasingly complex rules and responsibilities around handling customer data
the potential in telematics, the insurer’s ‘eye’ in the insured vehicle, which can
transfer personal underwriting information on driving skill and usage
This is where an electronic device is installed in an insured vehicle in order to monitor the
location, movements and behaviour of a vehicle and its driver. The data received by the
device can be used in pricing the insurance risk more accurately.
the growing ability to invest and switch, where not only are the products more
complex but even the decisions to buy and sell are generated electronically
the impending arrival of driverless cars, where deciding whether the occupants or
the car’s manufacturers are liable for accidents will be among the challenges faced.
An insurer will need to embrace these new technologies and their associated implications
because their competitors will be doing the same. Any insurer that fails to do so is likely to be at a
competitive disadvantage very quickly.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 42 SP8-08: External environment
Technological change does not always mean increasing costs. The ‘information super
highway’ puts detail, data and comparative analysis at the fingertips of supplier and
end-user, often at zero cost, including some of the software solutions mentioned above.
In the exam, you will be expected to be able to give examples of technological advancements and
also describe how these might impact the operations and experience of an insurer.
For example, price comparison websites have increased the transparency and competitiveness of
the market and the sensitivity of consumers to changes in the rating structure.
Question
Suggest three more examples of how the technological advances listed above might affect an
insurer.
Solution
Increased computer power and more complex models could lead to:
more accurate pricing
higher costs, eg relating to IT costs and the hiring of expertise
spurious accuracy and an over-reliance on the model’s output.
Better strategy, planning and capital forecasting could lead to more accurate reserves being held,
thereby increasing consumer protection and/or reducing the cost of capital.
The ability to handle claims online might tend to:
accelerate claim settlement patterns
reduce claim handling costs, eg stationary and postage costs
improve customer satisfaction.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 43
5 Glossary items
Having studied this chapter you should now read the following Glossary items:
Hard premium rates
Insurance cycle
Losses-occurring (losses occurring during [LOD]) policy
Ogden tables
Risk attaching basis
Soft premium rates.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 44 SP8-08: External environment
The chapter summary starts on the next page so that you can
keep all the chapter summaries together for revision purposes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 45
Chapter 8 Summary
Among the economic factors affecting insurance business are claims inflation, the
underwriting cycle, investment conditions and currency movements.
Different claim types are affected by different types of inflation, eg:
household contents – mainly price inflation
buildings and motor damage repair costs – mainly wage inflation
medical expenses – medical cost inflation
liability for personal injury – court award inflation (split into components).
Expense loadings are also subject to inflation – mainly salary-related. Failure to anticipate
appropriate levels of inflation can lead to inadequate premiums or reserves.
The underwriting cycle is a continuous cycle of hard (profitable) premiums, then increased
competition, followed by soft (less profitable) premiums, and then insurers leaving the
market. Soft markets have often ended when a major disaster has triggered severe losses.
Low barriers to entry, the delay until profitability of business written is known, simplistic
capital regimes and marginal costing have facilitated the cycle.
The significance of investment conditions depends on the characteristics of the business
sold, eg greater for long-tailed business. If significant, investment return should be allowed
for in pricing, often using a risk-free rate.
The impact of currency movements depends partly on where business is sold and where
claims are made. Analysing business by currency can avoid distortions where there are
changes in exchange rates, although judgement needs to be applied in deciding how to apply
exchange rates in any analysis. Currency hedging can be used.
Among the legal, political and social factors affecting insurance business are court awards,
legislative changes and trends in behaviour and awareness.
Court awards have most impact on liability insurance claims. Claims may be on the basis of
breach of contract but are more usually on the basis of negligence. Although most cases are
settled out of court, court decisions set benchmarks for the negotiations.
Compensation awards for major bodily injuries can be complicated, and are split into several
‘heads of damage’. Punitive or exemplary damages are quite common in the US. In many
markets, compensation awards are becoming more generous, leading to increases in liability
insurance premiums. Unexpected increases in claims may lead to inadequate reserving.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 46 SP8-08: External environment
Legislative changes can directly impact insurers, eg making certain types of insurance
compulsory. Changes in regulations to improve health and safety (eg at work or for
motorists) or the litigation process (eg introducing no-win-no-fee arrangements) will also
affect insurance claims.
Changes in the attitudes and behaviour of people and organisations directly affect the cost
of insurance. Examples of this are a greater propensity of people to seek compensation
(helped by the encouragement of the placing of claims for compensation with claim
management companies, for example), lower social acceptance of drink driving and a greater
tendency towards fraudulent or exaggerated claiming.
Among the climate and environmental factors affecting insurance business are the weather,
catastrophes and latent claims.
The seasonality of weather-related claims, if significant, may need to be allowed for in
earned premium payment patterns. Subsidence can be a problem in very dry, hot summers,
and can lead to large property damage claims, arising over a long period of time. A number
of serious weather losses have been linked to global warming.
An individual property’s location may need to be considered in some detail to be able to
assess its exposure to weather conditions accurately. However, if insurers fully reflect the
risk in their premiums, this could cause political difficulties, eg leading to some properties
being insurable against flood damage.
Major natural catastrophes include hurricanes and earthquakes. The largest insurance losses
tend to be in the US. This is due to the concentration of high insured risks and the
vulnerability of some areas to hurricanes. The cost of these claims is rising due to economic
development and greater use of insurance.
Human-made catastrophes consist mainly of terrorist incidents, industrial accidents and
conflagrations.
Latent claims are insurance claims that become known about some years after the cause of
loss. Most of these arise from diseases caused by products or industrial processes, and so
arise in liability insurance. The most notorious classes of claims of this nature are those
arising from exposure to asbestos, but there are many other examples.
It can be difficult to identify the occurrence date of a latent claim. Claims-made policies can
make it difficult to obtain continued cover, and so the claim-occurring basis is usually
required for compulsory types of liability business.
There are also technological factors affecting insurance, largely arising due to the increasing
capacity of computers and widespread use of the internet.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 47
Chapter 8 Practice Questions
8.1 Describe briefly the effects on an insurer of being at the bottom of the underwriting cycle.
8.2 Describe the impact of different types of inflation on private motor insurance claims and
Exam style
expenses. [7]
8.3 Describe how judicial decisions can exacerbate the uncertainty surrounding latent claims. [6]
Exam style
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 48 SP8-08: External environment
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 49
Chapter 8 Solutions
8.1 The effects on an insurer of being at the bottom of the underwriting cycle are:
premiums are low, and so profitability is low
some business may even be loss making
insurers may leave the market or reduce the amount of business that they write
loss of business affects insurers’ ability to cover fixed expenses
loss of business also affects insurers’ future growth prospects
solvency margin may reduce, with some companies becoming insolvent
insurers will require additional capital support from other activities
reinsurance may be less readily available
reinsurance terms will be less attractive.
8.2 In general, the importance of inflation depends on when and for how long the policies are in
force, and the type of claims that arise. [½]
Property damage claims
These claims are usually reported and settled quickly, and so inflation is not so important. [½]
The appropriate inflation measures affecting such claims would be:
● inflation of motor mechanics’ wages (ie related to standard earnings inflation), being a
major part of repair costs [½]
● inflation of car component costs (to replace damaged spare parts) [½]
● car price inflation, as an indication of the cost of total replacement (eg in a major crash
resulting in a write-off) [½]
● for cars where there is a large element of imports (either of parts or of the whole car), the
local currency strength would also be relevant. [½]
Bodily injury claims
These claims may have significant reporting and settlement delays, so inflation can have a big
impact. [½]
Court award inflation is important since settlements are often guided by court awards, even if the
litigation does not go through the court process. [½]
Earnings inflation is also important because bodily injury claims are usually related to loss of
earnings, since the injury can prevent the ability to work. [½]
Medical expense inflation may also be relevant since the cost of rehabilitation will be accounted
for in bodily injury claims. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 50 SP8-08: External environment
Bodily injury claims will also be affected by judicial decisions, or legislation that changes the
method used to calculate compensation amounts (eg changes to the Ogden tables in the UK). [½]
General office expenses
The main influence is salary inflation, since salaries normally form the bulk of a general insurance
company’s expenses. [½]
There will also be some effects due to price inflation, for example inflation appropriate to the cost
of office equipment (eg stationery and furniture). [½]
The inflation of expenses may be offset by improvements in efficiency over time. [½]
Claim expenses
For expenses associated with claims, again salary inflation will be the most important. [½]
Also, legal fee inflation will have an influence, particularly on larger claims. [½]
[Maximum 7]
8.3 The development of latent claims is often uncertain: one court judgement can act retrospectively
over many policies, which can result in large losses for the insurer. [½]
The effect of judicial decisions is very similar to that of inflation. In fact, the effect of judicial
decisions is often simply referred to as ‘court inflation’. [½]
Court inflation results from court awards. The differences between court inflation and price
inflation are as follows: [½]
court inflation, historically, has been higher than price inflation [½]
court inflation tends to remain level for a period, then increase in sharp jumps when new
precedents are created [½]
court inflation is less predictable than price inflation. [½]
From time to time, judicial decisions will set new precedents for the admission of certain claims,
and the amounts at which they will be settled. [½]
Decisions relating to imprecise policy wordings can lead to the admission of new types of claim
that had not been allowed for in the original costings. Liability claims are particularly exposed to
this type of risk. [1]
Courts also periodically set new levels of award or compensation for existing categories of claim.
[½]
The effect of such awards will be to increase immediately the average amount at which all future
claims of a similar nature are likely to be settled … [½]
…including those that have already been reported. [½]
Such awards are very hard to predict, so it is even harder to allow for this form of inflation than
normal claim inflation. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-08: External environment Page 51
Claim payments that are intended to represent the future lost earnings of an individual, following
an accident, are likely to be based upon the present value of that future income. [1]
The courts may from time to time change the rate of interest at which insurers are allowed to
discount future earnings. [½]
This change could have a dramatic effect upon the overall claim payments. Court awards can be
impacted by decisions made in other countries too. [½]
[Maximum 6]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold
for the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is
owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a
subsidiary of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or
photocopy any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it
is not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through
the profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished
using the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 1
Risk and uncertainty
Syllabus objectives
2.1 Describe the major areas of risk and uncertainty in general insurance business with
respect to pricing, in particular those that might threaten profitability or solvency.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
0 Introduction
Insurance contracts transfer elements of risk and uncertainty from customers to insurers. The
insurers accept these risks and uncertainties and therefore it is important that they are able to
control these if they are to survive and be profitable.
There are a number of risks surrounding the management of the insurance business
written, which are discussed in this chapter. As well as profitability, volumes of business
and capital must also be carefully managed such that the insurance company remains able
to support the business it has written, as well as that which it is writing – that is, staying
solvent.
There is a risk that volumes of business may be lower than expected which could lead to lower
profits than expected and a failure to cover fixed expenses. There is also a risk that volumes may
be higher than expected. This would lead to strain on available resources (eg staff to handle
policy applications and claims) and higher capital requirements to back the expanding business
volumes. If capital held is insufficient, there is a risk of intervention by regulators or, in extreme
cases, insolvency.
0.1 Uncertainty
Uncertainty is the inability to predict the future with confidence. Because of the presence of
uncertainty, we need to consider the effects of possible deviations from the projected figures.
0.2 Risk
Risk is the possibility of variations in financial results, positive or negative.
It is important that a general insurer is able to identify the risks that it faces and assess the
suitability of methods available for managing those risks.
The greater the uncertainty, the greater the risk.
0.3 Premium rating
An insurer (or reinsurer) intends the premium to cover all cash outgoes (including claims,
expenses, reinsurance premiums, commissions and so on), net of all inflows (including
reinsurance recoveries, subrogation and third party recoveries, profit commissions,
investment income and so on), and produce an eventual surplus that meets the profit
targets.
There is substantial uncertainty about the quantum and timing of the income and the outgo.
To decide on an appropriate premium to charge, insurers tend to analyse past experience of
similar relevant business, while adjusting the resulting figures to reflect the commercial
realities of the prevailing market conditions.
0.4 Allowing for risk in premium rates
When it sets a premium, the general insurer should assess the level of risk being accepted
and decide a suitable premium to cover this risk.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 3
Therefore the insurer should assess the expected cashflows and ensure that the premium covers
the expected net outgo. It is very unlikely that the insurer will get these estimates exactly right
and so the premium should also allow for any uncertainty surrounding the estimate of the net
outgo.
We can summarise the risk in this context as the risk that the cashflows into and out of the
company do not match those expected when it determined the premium.
In some theoretical approaches to pricing, we include a risk loading in the premium, so that
two insured risks with the same expected outcome may be charged different premiums,
with a higher premium for the risk with the greater variability of outcome.
We can express this mathematically in terms of the variance or skewness, for example. We
can achieve this in other ways, such as by setting a return on capital employed target,
which will also result in higher premiums for more risky lines of business.
There are many possible ways to subdivide the risks and uncertainties facing a company at
this point, for example:
Random error: This covers the fundamental uncertainty (the insurable risk) that is
insured. ‘Random error’ may also be called ‘process error’.
Parameter error: This covers the uncertainty arising from the estimation of
parameters used in a model. It often arises from inadequate / incomplete data.
Data errors from systems and procedures: This covers the uncertainty arising from
the way past claims are reported and stored.
Model error: This covers uncertainty in the selection of the model and how it is used.
Adjustment factors: It is necessary to make a number of assumptions about how to
adjust observed data to reflect the future experience, each of which is uncertain.
Market conditions: Insurance is not written in isolation. Legal, regulatory and
competitive effects can all influence the risk and uncertainty.
Portfolio movements: Unexpected changes in the volume and mix of business can cause
an insurer uncertainty.
(The word ‘error’ is used interchangeably with ‘uncertainty’ throughout this chapter.)
The remainder of this chapter gives examples of how risks and uncertainties arise, under the
broad categorisations given above. Note however that there can be overlaps between these
categories, and some sources of risk may lead to uncertainties arising under more than one
heading.
If you are studying Subject SP7, you may notice a significant overlap with the material in the
equivalent chapter in that subject. In fact, the Core Reading in this chapter sometimes mentions
the effects on reserving and capital modelling rather than the effects on pricing. Remember,
however, that the two are closely related, and will be impacted by similar factors.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
Another way to subdivide the risks facing a company is to split them into different items of
experience, for example:
claim frequencies
claim amounts
expenses and commission
investment income
new business volumes
lapses.
Question
Suggest how these categories fit into the categories listed in the Core Reading above.
Solution
Data errors from systems and procedures – This is defined as relating to claims.
Model error – Modelling could be used for any of claims, expenses (and commission), investment
income, business volumes and lapses. (In fact modelling can be used for pretty much anything!)
Random error – This primarily relates to the number and amount of claims.
Adjustment factors – These will be needed whenever we are setting assumptions for future
business. Assumptions may be needed for claims, expenses, investment income, business
volumes and lapses.
Market conditions – Market conditions may affect:
claim frequencies, eg from time to time, new claims will emerge, which will increase claim
frequencies
claim amounts, eg through inflation
expenses, eg through inflation, regulation
commission, eg through the power of brokers
investment income, eg during a recession
new business volumes and lapses, eg through levels of competition.
Portfolio movements – This certainly relates to new business volumes and lapses, since these will
affect the volume and mix of business. However it may also be linked to:
expenses, eg through per policy expense loadings
commission, eg through broker deals.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 5
However, there are many possible areas of overlap between different subdivisions, and no one
correct way of organising your thoughts.
The examiners would expect students to be able to describe all significant risks and uncertainties
relevant to an exam question, no matter which subdivisions or structure you choose.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
1 Process uncertainty effect on claims
Process error refers to the inherent randomness underlying a book of business.
An insurer’s specific process uncertainties stem from:
general claims uncertainty relating to the specific business written
internal influences, eg changes in reserving philosophy or mix of business.
In Sections 1 and 2, we discuss a number of sources of process uncertainty. These are
complexities that arise as a result of the inherent uncertainty in statistical estimation.
Note: this is not intended to be an exhaustive list and other sources of process uncertainty
exist.
1.1 External sources of claims uncertainty
The amount and timing of an individual claim is always going to be uncertain. Similar
historical claims may give some idea as to how an individual claim may develop, but there
is no guarantee that the emergence will be similar.
General insurance claims are extremely unpredictable. Even with a reasonable quantity of
reliable, relevant past data, it is impossible to predict claims accurately. Uncertainty exists over:
claim frequency
claim amounts
claim payment patterns.
Claim frequency
Claim frequencies may be subject to random fluctuations, and may also change over time.
Changes over time may be due to a changing attitude of policyholders to claiming. In the United
States for example, policyholders have shown an increase in the propensity to submit claims.
This change in attitude could lead to a spiral effect. If an individual manages to make a successful,
but unusual, claim then due to the publicity that this is likely to attract, other policyholders in the
same position are also likely to claim.
It is often not clear if it is the attitude of policyholders that is fundamentally changing, or whether
the actions of lawyers, in encouraging people to make such claims, is the underlying cause of the
trend.
The interpretation of policy wordings can also affect claim frequencies.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 7
Question
Suggest how policy wordings might affect claim frequencies.
Solution
Misinterpretation of policy wording leads to claims that the insurer had not intended to cover
under the policy and hence claim frequencies will be higher than expected.
If the insurer is required to meet the claim payment, it may set a precedent for many other
claims, further increasing claim frequency.
(Even if the insurer does not pay the claim, it may be involved in lengthy and costly litigation – this
will not affect claim frequencies, but will affect claim amounts and/or expenses.)
The policy document is a legal agreement between the insurer and the insured. Amongst other
things, it describes the events and circumstances under which losses are or are not covered. It is,
therefore, important to word the policy as precisely as possible, if it is to give the cover intended
and to prevent claims from being paid that were never intended to be included in the cover given.
There may nevertheless be some residual uncertainty as to whether certain types of event could
give rise to a legitimate claim.
Claim amounts
Claim amounts may also be subject to considerable variability.
For some types of business the size of possible claims covers a very wide range, and there is
consequent uncertainty as to whether the claims that have actually occurred can properly be
regarded as typical of what might be expected to occur.
Question
Give an example of how one class of business can give rise to claims of very different sizes.
Solution
In private motor business, the variability of property damage claims is relatively small, even
allowing for the possibility of a number of cars being damaged in, say, a motorway pileup.
However, the size of injury claims could range (in the UK) from a few hundred pounds to a few
million pounds.
The variance of aggregate claim amounts will also increase if there is non-independence of risks.
Therefore accumulations of risk will increase the uncertainty relating to the variability in claim
size.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
Accumulations of risk may occur due to the insurer’s business acquisition strategy (eg it might
target policyholders of a particular type) or they may arise inadvertently (eg there may be a large
concentration of policies taken out by individuals living close to the insurer’s head office).
Accumulations may also arise as a result of a catastrophe event.
Due to the variability in the size of claims, there may be uncertainty as to whether changes in
claim costs from year to year are due to changes in underlying risks or are simply the result of
random variation.
The level of random variation will be higher, the smaller the portfolio of business. This problem is
therefore greater for small companies (or small classes of business) where we would expect a
larger variation from year to year.
Claim payment patterns
There are typically delays between:
the date of the claim event
the date of reporting the claim
the final settlement of the claim.
In addition, the date of the claim event itself may be uncertain. For example, for claims such as
subsidence or industrial disease, it is very hard to pinpoint the exact date of the claim occurrence.
In fact, it is likely that the claims arose over a period of time.
The delay between the claim event and the reporting of the claim will depend on the type of
claim and the speed at which policyholders report potential claims.
The delay between the claim being reported and settled will also vary by type of claim. Large
claims are likely to suffer the longest settlement delays, especially in liability classes where the
claims may need to be settled by the courts. Large claims are discussed later.
Changing development patterns
Claims development patterns can be expected to change over time. This may be due to a
number of factors.
For example, there may be political pressure on insurers to speed up the payment of claims
following a natural disaster, or payment / recording of claims may slow down due to staff
shortages.
It is important that these types of change are understood when determining pricing levels,
to ensure premiums are adequate to cover the future emergence of claims.
Question
Suggest two examples of factors that the insurer would be unaware of, but that could change the
development pattern.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 9
Solution
Examples include:
a change in the propensity of individuals to report claims quickly – this may be a gradual
change, eg due to longer working weeks (and so less free time to report claims)
changes in processes of brokers regarding claims processing / reporting, for business sold
through brokers.
Demand surge
Following a major catastrophe, there will be increased demand for goods and services in
the affected areas.
For example, the demand for builders may increase following a flood. This increase in
demand could force up the price for such goods and services to an unpredictable extent.
Higher prices could mean higher claim amounts.
Climate change
Over the last decade, global weather patterns have changed significantly from an insurance
point of view.
For example, global temperatures are slightly higher and severe weather events are
becoming more frequent. Various agencies have produced climate models that predict
further volatility in global weather patterns. This will result in the expected outgo from
future events also becoming more uncertain.
Bodily injury claims
Some governments have introduced legislation concerning the payment of bodily injury
claims. The idea is that to indemnify the policyholder, the claim payment should be in the
form of income replacement, in addition to any lump sum. This effectively places a life
liability on the insurer, which introduces additional uncertainty.
Incorporating the future incidence and quantum of these types of awards will lead to
additional uncertainty in the setting of premiums.
Differences in third party behaviour (eg lawyers actively seeking out
asbestos claimants)
The behaviour of third parties may also impact claim characteristics for certain classes.
For example, lawyers may actively seek out people affected by asbestos-related illnesses.
This would increase the claim frequency, and may also have an effect on severity.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
Question
Suggest how claim severity might be affected by this.
Solution
If lawyers seek out people who have been affected by asbestos-related diseases, there may be a
general increase in awareness and/or an increase in publicity over asbestos cases. As a result,
there may be an increase in awards made by courts over asbestos-related claims.
Government legislation
Legislative actions can be divided into three main types:
fiscal changes, such as increases in tax on insured items – many claims are settled on a
replacement basis (ie the insurer replaces the damaged item), so if the sales tax on that
item increases, the cost of replacing that item will increase and the claim cost will
increase
changes in the law that increase the amount of cover being provided, such as removal of a
legal limit on compensation levels
changes in the law that restrict or forbid the use of certain factors in underwriting.
In the first two cases, an insurer is unlikely to have foreseen such changes; therefore there may be
a sudden change in the reserves that need to be held. Furthermore, since premiums cannot be
changed retrospectively, the changes will adversely affect profits until some time after the
premiums or cover can be adjusted. The third type of change will be known about in advance, but
may expose the insurer to anti-selection for which the cost cannot be accurately assessed. This
may result in the need for higher reserves.
For example, the introduction of new legislation, such as ‘Treating Customers Fairly’, may
reduce an insurer’s ability to use certain rating factors / levels of price change, which may
lead to a reduction in ability to charge adequate premiums for the risk being accepted.
The effect of economic conditions on claims
Changes in economic conditions could influence claim propensities, particularly within
Personal Lines.
Economic conditions can also affect the timing and severity of claims. There is therefore a
continuing uncertainty as to the number and cost of the claims that will occur when conditions
change.
Mortgage indemnity is one class that is heavily affected by economic conditions.
A number of economic variables could have a direct impact on claims. For example:
inflation – this will directly affect claim amounts
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 11
Question
Outline three types of inflation that can affect claim amounts.
Solution
1. price inflation, which will affect the replacement costs of goods
2. earnings inflation, which will affect repair costs and loss of earnings claims
3. court inflation, which will affect claims that are settled in the courts
unemployment – this could lead to certain sections of society being unable to afford
insurance, and so produce a different mix of business
economic growth – this could lead to more sections of society being able to afford
insurance (and higher levels of cover in some cases), and so produce a different mix of
business
exchange rates – there will be additional uncertainty as a result of future exchange
rate movements, if it is likely that claim payments would be in a different currency
from the premium payments.
For business transacted in a currency other than that of the country in which the insurer is
based, there is a risk that the insurer’s results will be adversely affected by changes in the
exchange rate between the two currencies; there will also be uncertainties stemming
from currency mismatching between assets and liabilities, and because it may be
impossible to predict the currency in which a claim will have to be settled.
Question
Give three examples of general insurance classes in which there is likely to be a high level of
uncertainty relating to the currency of the claim payments.
Solution
Marine, aviation and travel.
These are probably the most obvious but you could also mention product liability, commercial
motor etc.
In addition, the economic conditions can have a wider impact on the environment; for example,
crime rates may increase during recessions.
The rates of crimes such as theft and arson have shown considerable variation from year to year
and from country to country. General insurance companies might actively engage in trying to
encourage policyholders to take steps to reduce crime, in the hope of reducing claim costs.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
1.2 Internal sources of process uncertainty
Planned or unplanned changes in mix
Different risks will exhibit different claims characteristics, eg claim frequency, severity, volatility,
timing of payments etc. The degree of uncertainty inherent in the business will therefore depend
on the mix of risks that have been written.
In addition, any changes in the mix of business will increase this uncertainty.
Question
(i) Suggest possible strategies that might lead to a change in business mix.
(ii) Suggest other reasons why the business mix might change.
Solution
(i) Strategies leading to a change in business mix
strategic change in target market
change in distribution channels used
change in marketing method
change in pricing structure
introduction of new rating structures
change in underwriting processes
change in claims handling procedures
(ii) Other reasons why the business mix might change
increase in anti-selection by policyholders
change in the attitude to claiming
change in fiscal regime, eg tax relief on certain groups of policyholders buying insurance
change in regulatory regime, eg certain types of insurance becoming compulsory
change in company reputation, eg a company becoming seen as a budget provider
New markets
Entering a new market or territory will incur expenses for the insurer, including set-up fees,
accommodation costs, fees to the regulator and legal costs. It may not be acceptable within
the market to pass on these fees directly to the policyholders, if other insurers have a lower
expense base.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 13
New distribution channels
Claims frequency, severity and development may be expected to vary by distribution
channel.
If a business acquisition or renewal strategy tends to attract policyholders with different
characteristics from those of the existing clientele, the resulting claims experience may differ from
that of the past.
For example, direct sales may be expected to develop more quickly than broker sales if
claims from broker sales are reported through the broker. They may also be less frequent if
the broker has a facility to filter out any fraudulent claims.
The internet is now the dominant sales channel for personal lines and smaller retail
products. The lack of a face-to-face meeting or a telephone call when buying a policy
certainly increases the possibility of fraud, which will affect frequency and severity of
claims.
The number of distribution channels is likely to increase in the future, as insurers pursue
ever more innovative ways of attracting new business and reducing costs.
New channels may also create a knock-on effect on existing channels. For example, if the
internet channel increases, the broker channel may shrink to compensate, resulting in
brokers offering incentives to attract business.
New claims handling procedures
An example of a new claims handling procedure is reflected by the fact that some insurers
offer an online claims reporting service. This may increase policyholders’ propensity to
claim, thereby increasing claim frequency. It may also cause an increase in fraudulent
behaviour; for example, policyholders reporting non-existent claims, or exaggerating
existing claims, which would increase both frequency and severity.
Both of these increases are unpredictable and introduce additional uncertainty into the
setting of future premiums.
Increased use of profit share arrangements
Profit share arrangements may incentivise the broker to pass on better quality business to
the insurer. If the use of profit share arrangements increases and no adjustments are made
to reflect this, this may reduce the expected profitability of the business being written.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
2 Process uncertainty effect on other areas of the business
Process uncertainty can also affect other areas of an insurer’s business, besides claims. Some
examples are discussed below:
2.1 Aggregators
During the last few years, a number of ‘aggregator’ companies have been set up, dealing
mainly with personal lines business. These companies find the best price for the customer
from a pre-selected panel of insurers.
This has resulted in more transparency in pricing levels across the market, which could
lead to more instances of anti-selection for under-priced segments of a portfolio.
Examples that operate in the UK include Compare the Market, Money Supermarket and Go
Compare.
Insurers may have to pay a fee or satisfy certain conditions to be a member of this panel, which
can have an uncertain effect on expenses.
There may also be different commission arrangements to those of a traditional broker, for
example, a per policy charge as opposed to a percentage of written premium.
2.2 Off-shoring
During the last few years, there has been a trend for insurers to relocate some of their back office
functions to different countries to access a cheaper labour market.
Back office functions include functions such as call centres and policy administration. In recent
years, India has been a popular place to off-shore functions to.
Question
Suggest a reason for this.
Solution
India has a large pool of English-speaking people, who are technically proficient. It also met the
criterion of ‘cheaper labour market’.
Such a move is likely to have high set-up and redundancy costs.
The insurer also faces the uncertainty of currency fluctuations, assuming the off-shoring
agreements are arranged in the off-shore currency.
2.3 The effect of economic conditions on investments and expenses
The general economic cycle is difficult to predict and has a significant effect on investment
markets, most notably on investment returns.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 15
Question
Describe how the government or central bank can impact investment returns.
Solution
The government or central bank may use various policies to control economic variables, such as
inflation and economic growth. These economic variables then influence investment returns.
During recessions, the value of many asset classes falls. This is due to a fall in demand for the
assets, and an increase in the uncertainty of risky assets.
In order to stimulate economic activity, the government might reduce interest rates in order to
increase spending (by reducing saving and increasing borrowing). Lower interest rates will affect
the value of many different asset classes.
Lower interest rates might increase inflation, which would then impact returns from various asset
classes.
Poor investment returns include:
lower than expected investment income, which can lead to the reserves that are held
being inadequate to meet the liabilities
movements in asset values, which can jeopardise an insurer’s solvency, (since solvency is
measured by comparing the value of assets and liabilities).
Movements in asset values can impair solvency if there is:
a fall in certain sectors of the market in which investments are held, such as Japanese
equities
a failure or adverse performance of individual assets or investments
an adverse movement in currency rates, such as the rand versus the euro.
Investment return can sometimes be an important source of income for an insurer, especially if it
writes long-tailed classes of business.
Question
Explain why this is the case.
Solution
For long-tailed classes a considerable time will pass after the receipt of premiums before claim
payments are made. Therefore for investment income has a significant impact.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
The best way to minimise asset risks is to ensure that the assets match as closely as is practical to
the corresponding liabilities, eg by nature, term and currency. Unfortunately, with general
insurance business, this is usually impossible due to the uncertainty surrounding claim timings
and amounts.
General economic conditions will have an effect on expenses.
For example, an increase in inflation will have an effect on the average level of expenses.
Question
State which index (or indices) expenses are likely to increase in line with.
Solution
Expenses are likely to be linked primarily to wage inflation. To some extent they may also be
related to price inflation.
2.4 Competition
The level of competition can be affected by a number of factors. Two such factors are:
globalisation of insurance markets
changes / differences in regulation.
Any changes in the level of competition will have an uncertain effect on a general insurer’s mix of
business and claims experience.
Insurance markets are becoming far more globalised and insurers are more willing to write
business originating outside their home territory. This can lead to increased competition
between insurers, so similar business may not be as profitable as it has been in the past.
This can also have an uncertain effect on the insurance cycle.
2.5 The insurance cycle
The insurance cycle is the observed tendency of insurance prices and hence profitability to
vary in a cyclical fashion over a period of several years. It can be very difficult to predict, as
the frequency and amplitude of the cycle can change every time the market turns.
How the insurer reacts to the cycle can also be an important factor.
For example, an insurer may decide not to follow the market down during a softening period
of the cycle, instead opting to lose some business and hopefully retain profitable business.
If this is the case, the insurer’s historical experience may not be a good indicator of future
outturn.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 17
2.6 Expenses uncertainty
Specific influences on expense uncertainty stem from:
uncertainty over commission and other sales-related expenses, eg for existing and new
distribution channels
uncertainty arising from changes in operations, eg new markets and off-shoring.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
3 Parameter uncertainty
Parameter uncertainty refers to the uncertainty arising from the estimation of parameters
used in a model. Given that any model is an artificial representation of a real life situation
there will always be a certain degree of parameter uncertainty in the pricing model.
One of the requirements of a good model is that the parameter values used should be accurate
for the classes of business being modelled. However this is easier said than done. Indeed, there
might be several possible selections for a parameter, each appearing to be equally reasonable, yet
a judgement has to be made as to which to select.
Other requirements of a good model are discussed in Subject SP7.
In this section, we discuss a number of sources which come under a broad heading of
parameter uncertainty. Note: this is not intended to be an exhaustive list and other sources
of parameter uncertainty exist.
3.1 Uncertainty arising from the data used
Data may be:
of a poor quality
internally inconsistent
incomplete
non-existent.
Poor quality data
There will be occasions where the raw data is poor; for example, claim/policy details may be
inaccurate, with perhaps claim dates recorded as being prior to policy inception.
Inconsistent data
Data may also have inconsistencies, for example, changes in claim recording procedures.
Incomplete and non-existent data
In some instances, data may be incomplete or even non-existent, for example, when a new
class of business is being written.
Insurers may also write business in new territories where they have relatively little
experience. This will lead to uncertainty in setting prices.
Question
Suggest other reasons why data might be non-existent.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 19
Solution
Data might also be non-existent for:
unusual risks
business that is not new, but has changed its terms and conditions to such an extent that
past data cannot be used.
Uncertainty at extreme values
Data may not be non-existent for a whole class of business – an insurer may have a significant
body of good quality data for the majority of risk cells, however it may lack adequate data in the
tails of any distribution.
When fitting a particular distribution to a set of data, it is usually very difficult to fit the tails
of the distribution. This may be because there is no data at these extreme values, or the
data that exists is too volatile to be usable. Assumptions will therefore have to be made
from what is available. This will give rise to uncertainty in the model output. Care should
be taken when interpreting the model’s output.
Certain events have little / no data
Certain claim events have insufficient data to build a reliable pricing or capital model, or
historical data may be deemed to be inappropriate.
Note the increasing use of the term ENID (events not in data).
Global weather patterns may be changing at such a pace that renders historical weather
data obsolete.
On all of these occasions, assumptions will have to be made. These may be based on
similar classes of business, benchmark statistics or the modeller’s subjective judgement.
In any case, inadequate data will lead to uncertainty within the model.
Format of data
Claims data can be stored in a number of different ways; for example, gross or net of
reinsurance, or inclusive or exclusive of claims handling costs. It is important to have an
understanding of exactly what is and what is not included in the data.
If there is any change in data storage protocols in the historical data, it should be
considered whether adjustments will have to be made, since this may have an effect on the
claims development pattern.
The example below shows how several of the problems described in this section can arise.
Example: Inadequate data supplied by third party claims handlers
There may be occasions when an insurer outsources its claims handling function, either to
a broker or a specialist claims handling firm. On these occasions, data recording will be out
of the hands of the insurer, and there may be some difficulty in checking data validity.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
If different claims handlers are employed for different classes / sources of business, the
way in which data is recorded may be inconsistent.
There may also be delays in passing the data to the insurer and these delays may also differ
between claims handlers.
This will make it difficult to establish claims development patterns.
Question
Suggest how third party claims handlers may distort an insurer’s data in terms of:
claim frequency
claim severity
claim delays.
Solution
Claim frequency
Third parties may not inform the insurer of claims until some time after the claim has occurred.
Effectively, the insurer may hold a lower outstanding reported claims reserve and a higher IBNR
reserve.
Claim amount
Third parties may not spend as long validating claims as an insurer might. For example, they may
accept claim amounts submitted by the insured, without checking for reasonableness / getting
several estimates of the claim size. This could lead to higher ultimate claims and thus higher
premiums.
Claim delays
There are likely to be delays in passing claims information to the insurance company. These
delays are likely to vary between different claims handlers.
3.2 Change in case estimate reserving philosophy
The reserving philosophy within a company will change from time to time.
For example, if claims handlers have under-reserved a case in the recent past, they may be
inclined to overestimate future claims to compensate.
There may also be changes in reserving philosophy following a change in senior personnel.
This could involve a change in reserving methods, or a change in the basis used for the reserve
estimates (within an acceptable range).
If changes in reserving philosophy are known, it may be possible to make adjustments
when setting future premium rates.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 21
3.3 Large and exceptional claims
Large claims
Large claims can be expected to have different frequency and severity distributions to
attritional and catastrophe claims.
There will be additional uncertainty when setting large claims provisions within pricing
models
On some occasions, there may be an absence of large reported claims, and the pricing actuary
may wish to add a loading to reflect this fact. This will give rise to additional uncertainty.
Catastrophes
Catastrophic losses can take the form of one immense loss, such as an oil-rig explosion.
Alternatively, there may be many smaller insured losses, all stemming from a common,
identifiable event such as a hurricane.
Catastrophes are typically hard to predict, so are hard to allow for when pricing. Catastrophe
modelling is discussed later in the course.
One way to reduce the impact of catastrophic losses is to write business in a wide range of
geographical locations and across many classes. Catastrophe reinsurance will also help (more of
this later in the course).
Latent claims
Catastrophic claims can also result from sources that were unknown, or for which a legal liability
was not expected, at the time of writing the business. The cost of such claims cannot be
calculated with any accuracy for the purpose of setting premiums.
The first problem with latent claims is that it is impossible to know where the potential claim is
lurking. Secondly, if the claim does materialise, the future claim cost is completely unknown.
3.4 Claims inflation not as expected
Inflation assumptions will be required when setting premiums for future periods of
insurance.
The actual inflationary experience could be a significant determinant of price adequacy.
3.5 New distribution channels
Different distribution channels will have different expense profiles.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
Question
Comment on whether the main expenses are fixed or variable for:
broker sales
internet sales.
Solution
Broker sales may have a high variable cost and a low fixed (setup) cost.
This is because commission is incurred every time a policy is sold.
Internet sales may have a high fixed cost, ie setting up and testing the website, and very little
variable cost.
Some expenses are relatively predictable. Commissions paid to brokers and other intermediaries
are almost invariably expressed as a percentage of the premiums payable. As such, they do not
give rise to uncertainty in assessing the outcome of business already written. However, other
expenses are less certain, eg underwriting costs will depend on the level of, and time spent on,
underwriting.
Expense uncertainty also arises through a change in the relative proportions of business coming
from existing distribution channels. If the mix of sales differs from what was expected (either
between classes or between distribution channels), so that a higher proportion of business is sold
on higher commission terms, the average commission rate will increase.
Also, if different brokers are paid different levels of commission, there might be a risk that the mix
of business by broker changes.
While – on the whole – expenses for existing channels should be relatively certain, the expenses
for new distribution channels, including the set-up costs, will be far less so.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 23
4 Model (specification) uncertainty
In this section, we discuss a number of sources of uncertainty in the area of model
specification. Note: this is not intended to be an exhaustive list and other sources of
uncertainty in relation to model specification exist.
4.1 Model uncertainty
Model error arises from the choice of or specification of the model. This topic is discussed
again in Subject SP7.
Model error arguably gives rise to a greater degree of uncertainty than parameter error, as it
is less easy to detect.
Question
Explain why this is the case.
Solution
Parameter error may be identified using sensitivity tests on individual parameters. Insight can be
gained into the effect of varying different parameters, enabling the user to pinpoint the
parameters that have the biggest effect. Model error may be misinterpreted as a combination of
parameter errors, and hence is harder to detect.
4.2 Programming error
There is also the risk that errors can creep into the actual programming of the model; for
example, typing errors during model construction. This risk can be greatly reduced through
thorough checking and peer reviewing of the pricing model.
4.3 Incorrect distributional assumptions in modelling claim distributions
It is sometimes necessary to calculate a range of possible values for a claim or contract, in
which case distributional assumptions will be required.
Setting distributions for claim frequencies and claim amounts may be tricky (for the same reasons
as discussed above), and there is scope for both the distributions and the parameters used to be
wrong.
4.4 Other sources of model error
Other sources of model error include:
not using enough simulations in a stochastic model
incorrect correlation assumptions (which could also be viewed as a type of parameter
error).
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
Question
Describe the correlation between interest rates and claims inflation.
Solution
Higher interest rates tend to lead to lower levels of price inflation through:
reduced demand-pull inflation, as borrowing becomes more expensive and saving more
attractive, which is likely to reduce demand from consumers and firms
reduced cost-push inflation, as higher interest rates are likely to increase the value of the
domestic currency, making imports relatively cheap.
However, higher interest rates can also exert an upward pressure on price inflation. For example,
companies will tend to pass on the higher cost of borrowing to their customers, ie cost-push
inflation.
Other types of inflation, eg wage inflation and medical cost inflation, are often correlated with
price inflation as they may also be affected by these factors.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 25
5 Glossary items
Having studied this chapter, you should now ensure that you are able to explain the following
Glossary items:
Act of God
Agents’ balances
Bonus-malus
Events not in data (ENIDs)
Model uncertainty
Parameter uncertainty
Process uncertainty
Protected NCD.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
The chapter summary starts on the next page so that you can
keep all the chapter summaries together for revision purposes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 27
Chapter 9 Summary
The premium charged by a general insurance company needs to cover the risks being
accepted by the insurer.
The risks and uncertainties faced by a general insurer can be classified as:
errors from systems and procedures
model error
random (process) error
adjustment factors
market conditions.
Process uncertainty
Claims uncertainty relating to process error stems from:
external sources, such as:
- inherent uncertainty in individual claims (amount, frequency and timing)
- demand surge
- climate change
- legislative changes
- third party behaviour
- economic conditions
internal sources, such as:
- changes in business mix
- booked reserves different to best estimate
- new markets
- new distribution channels
- new claims handling procedures
- use of profit share arrangements.
Process error also affects other areas of the business, and arises from:
development of aggregator sites
off-shoring
economic factors (exchange rates, inflation, investment returns, new types of
investment etc)
competition and the insurance cycle
uncertainty over expenses.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
Parameter uncertainty
Parameter error results in reserving uncertainty, and stems from:
the data used
– poor quality data
– inconsistent data
– incomplete and non-existent data
particularly large / unusual risks:
– large claims
– catastrophes
– latent claims
format of data
inadequate data supplied by third party claims handlers
change in case estimate reserving philosophy
claims inflation not as expected
new distribution channels
Model risk
Uncertainty in a models specification arises from:
model error
programming error
simulation error / too few simulations
incorrect correlations in the model.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 29
Chapter 9 Practice Questions
9.1 State the principal differences in the risk features of a general insurance policy compared with a
life assurance policy.
9.2 Explain why some classes of business are considered more risky than other classes of business.
9.3 List the problems associated with a rapid growth in premium income, for an insurance company.
9.4 (i) Give examples of two parties, external to a general insurance company, whose failure
might cause the insurer to suffer financial losses.
(ii) For each example, suggest actions the managers of the insurer could take to minimise the
risk to their company.
9.5 List the areas of greatest uncertainty for a general insurer when producing estimates of its claims.
9.6 Outline the main risk and uncertainty features of property damage and liability classes of
business.
9.7 A rich friend of yours is a Lloyd’s Name. They have joined a syndicate that writes only marine
insurance. List sources of risk and uncertainty that will affect the return that they make from
their capital outlay.
9.8 A general insurance company has an established book of commercial property insurance policies.
Exam style
(i) State, giving examples, the three broad categories of claim size that the insurer might
face. [3]
(ii) Describe how each type of claim might be modelled. [5]
(iii) Suggest how the risks posed by each type of risk may be mitigated. [5]
[Total 13]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 31
Chapter 9 Solutions
9.1 Differences between the risks of general insurance and life insurance include:
General insurance (GI) policy terms are usually one year, whereas life assurance (LA)
terms are typically much longer. (This leads to greater competitive pressure to attract
new business every year and greater importance of recovering fixed expenses each year.)
GI claims verification is usually more difficult than LA (ie dead or alive) …
… hence settlement delays tend to be longer for GI.
Similarly we can generally only claim once on a LA policy, whereas multiple claims are
possible (and often expected) on commercial GI policies.
Also the payout for a LA policy is fixed upon the event, whereas GI claim amounts are
often highly uncertain.
GI polices are subject to more policy endorsements (alterations) than LA.
For most LA policies the level of risk, ie mortality, increases over time. This is not usually
true of GI policies which may have level, increasing, decreasing or seasonal risk incidence.
There tends to be better quality data in LA than GI and it tends to be easier to quantify
the risks in LA.
9.2 Classes that are highly uncertain have high levels of risk.
This uncertainty may be caused by:
large variance in claim amount (ie possibility of very large claims)
large variance in claim frequency (ie volatile claim numbers from year to year)
possibility of accumulations or multiple claims from one event.
For some classes, there is great uncertainty regarding the claims, based on lack of knowledge or
data.
Long-tail liability classes are generally considered to have high uncertainty. Short-tail property
classes are generally less ‘risky’.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
9.3 Problems that may be associated with very rapid growth in premium income include:
if the increase is due to low premium rates, the increase may indicate future losses
it could indicate deteriorating experience because of anti-selection or reduced quality of
underwriting
administration strains could cause service standards to brokers and policyholders to fall,
leading to bad publicity
the solvency margin could be reduced to close to the statutory minimum level if the
minimum is based on premium income
internal controls may be weakened, eg risk management, expenses.
9.4 (i) External parties
Two examples of parties whose failure might cause the insurer to suffer financial losses are:
a reinsurer, because the direct writer is fully liable for any claim payments due, even if it is
unable to make the anticipated reinsurance recoveries
an intermediary, because they may be holding premiums due to the insurer.
(ii) Reasons for losses
The insurer could minimise the reinsurer risk by spreading reinsurance business over a
number of different financially sound reinsurers.
The insurer could minimise the intermediary risk by insisting that brokers’ balances are
kept to a minimum (especially if a broker is not soundly financed) and diversifying, ie not
relying too heavily on a small number of large brokers.
9.5 Areas of greatest uncertainty for a general insurer when producing estimates of its claims are:
frequency and severity of claims emerging from the latest period of exposure, ie IBNR
claims
the possibility of new types of latent claims emerging from liability classes
inflation of the longest-tail liabilities
catastrophe claims, eg the uncertainty surrounding huge floods due to climate change
claims arising from unexpired risks, eg the potential for aggregations of claims.
Note: Many other uncertainties exist.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 33
9.6 Property damage
Short tail, so shorter time period, hence less time for events to go against the insurer.
Geographic accumulations are possible. Potentially lots of claims from weather-related
incidents.
Reasonably homogeneous risks.
Amounts limited by SI or value of building.
Liability classes
Claims frequency lower on average but more variable.
Amounts much more uncertain too, possibly unlimited cover.
Long tail so more exposure to unexpected inflation, asset inadequacies and reinsurer
failure.
Varied heterogeneous risks.
Possible accumulations due to concentrations of products or employees.
Exposure to court awards and judicial inflation.
Exposure to latent claims.
9.7 Premiums may not be enough to cover the expected claim cost.
This may be due to:
the underwriting cycle leading to lower rates
anti-selection if the rating structure is incorrect
inadequate data upon which to price the risks.
Premiums could be too high, leading to lower than expected volumes of business and a failure to
adequately cover fixed expenses.
Claims experience may be higher than expected.
This could be due to:
catastrophes
latent claims
aggregations of risk
poor policy wording
higher than expected claims inflation
unfavourable judicial decisions.
Higher than expected expenses, commission or expense inflation.
Low investment income, falls in assets values or increased taxation of returns.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
Other possibilities:
adverse currency movements
failure of third parties, eg reinsurers
changes in legislation
mismanagement of the syndicate.
9.8 (i) Types of claim
The general insurance company is likely to face:
attritional claims – these are typically unremarkable claims, which make up the majority
of the claims by number (although not necessarily by cost) [½]
large claims – these will be larger and less frequent than attritional claims [½]
catastrophe claims – these are rare by nature, but could be very large. [½]
Examples:
attritional claims may include minor damage to buildings (or contents), eg as a result of a
fire in part of the building, or theft [½]
large claims may include the complete destruction of a large building (and its contents),
eg a large fire [½]
catastrophe claims may include an earthquake or a bomb, which destroys many insured
buildings in one particular area. [½]
[Total 3]
(ii) Modelling the claims
Attritional claims
Attritional claims are likely to be modelled using the general insurance company’s own past data.
This may be sufficient in quantity, since the insurer is established in the market, and attritional
claims (by their nature) are relatively homogeneous. [½]
It may be necessary to adjust the data before modelling to remove large and catastrophe claims.
[½]
From the past data, the insurer should be able to find reasonable estimates of both the expected
claim frequency and the expected claim severity … [½]
… and also variances around these rates. [½]
Large claims
Large claims are harder to model, as they tend to occur less frequently. Therefore there may not
be a sufficient number of them to model in the same way as attritional claims. [½]
If there is sufficient volume to model large claims based on past experience, it might still be
necessary to adjust the historical frequency to reflect anticipated experience. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty Page 35
If not, then the insurer may have to use a more broad brush approach, eg using loss ratios. [½]
If excess of loss reinsurance has been purchased, then an alternative approach would be to cap
large claims at the excess of loss threshold and allocate the reinsurance cost back to individual
policies. [½]
In order to do this, it is necessary to make an assumption about the relative propensity for a claim
to be large between different groups of policies. [½]
Catastrophe claims
Catastrophes present similar problems to large claims. By their nature, they are rare and there is
unlikely to be adequate data volume to enable us to price or reserve accurately for the future risk.
[½]
The insurer could use a proprietary catastrophe model to understand the impact of extreme
events on a portfolio. [½]
However, the actual effect of a catastrophe often differs from that predicted and uncertainties
will always remain about the frequency, timing, size and location of such events. [½]
[Maximum 5]
(iii) Mitigating the risks
Attritional claims
Pooling of a large number of similar risks can help to mitigate the risks for attritional claims. [½]
Effective underwriting can also help to ensure that the premium is sufficient to cover the risks
being written. [½]
Reinsurance, eg surplus treaty and/or aggregate XL may also be effective. [½]
Large claims
The insurer may not have a sufficient enough volume of large risks for risk pooling to be effective.
In this case, the company is at risk of there being an unusually high number of large claims in a
single year, or the (expected) large claims could be for unusually large amounts. [1]
This risk can be mitigated by the purchase of reinsurance. [½]
Surplus treaty or risk excess of loss reinsurance will be appropriate for this purpose. [½]
In addition, the reinsurer may be able to assist the insurer in modelling the large claims. [½]
Catastrophe claims
The insurer may be able to mitigate catastrophe risk through the purchase of appropriate
catastrophe reinsurance contracts. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8-09: Risk and uncertainty
Alternatively / additionally, it could mitigate catastrophe risk using:
● a spread loss treaty, which may be effective at spreading the cost of a catastrophe over a
number of years [½]
● an industry loss warranty, which will be effective if the experience suffered by this insurer
is in line with market experience [½]
● a securitisation of the book of business (ie issuing catastrophe bonds), which will transfer
(some of) the catastrophe risk to the capital markets [½]
● weather derivatives, which may be effective for weather-related catastrophes. [½]
[Maximum 5]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 1
Data
Syllabus objectives
2.2 With regard to the use of data in pricing:
– describe the types of data that are used
– describe the main uses of data
– describe the requirements for a good information system
– outline the possible causes of data errors
– understand and analyse the effects of inadequate data.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-10: Data
0 Introduction
The availability of quality data is critical to the operation of an insurance company. Many of the
functions of an insurance company have a clear and direct need for data.
Quality here refers to the extent of any errors or other problems arising from the data
collection, grouping or final dataset used for the assessment of risks.
Actuaries need data for three main purposes: premium rating, capital modelling and reserving.
Premium rating is covered in this chapter. Reserving and capital modelling are covered in
Subject SP7.
It is important to have data of sufficient quality and detail to form robust premium rates.
Reliable data is essential for the calculation of technical premium rates. However other factors,
such as the stage of the insurance cycle, are also considered when determining the actual
premium charged by the insurer.
In both pricing and reserving, policy and claim details covering many years will be needed. In
trying to project future events, an actuary will need previous years’ data in order to establish
enough data for credibility and to identify trends and patterns. So the quality and quantity of
reliable data is very important for the general insurance actuary. The analysis is pointless if the
data is not reliable and relevant.
Whilst this is true for all actuarial investigations, the lack of adequate data seems to be more of a
problem in general insurance than it is in other areas. There are probably two reasons for this.
Firstly, actuaries are relative newcomers to general insurance, so there have been fewer years to
establish appropriate data collection for actuarial applications. Secondly, the range and scope of
the data needed is greater, in particular given the rapidly changing and competitive nature of
general insurance.
Data of sufficient quality is also necessary for the uses described in Section 2.
The structure of this chapter is as follows:
Section 1 describes the main sources of data. An insurer may have its own internal data.
However it might also make use of external data, in particular data from industry-wide
data collection schemes.
Section 2 identifies the main uses and users of data. The exact use to which the data will
be put is a key determinant of the level of data required. There may also be restrictions
on the use of data. There are a number of users of data. Our discussion focuses on the
actuary.
Section 3 considers the data available from an existing data system. Quality and quantity
of data will be influenced by a number of factors, many of which may be outside the
control of the insurer.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 3
Section 4 considers how to set up a data collection system from scratch. Since the data
acquired under such a system may be used for many years to come, it is important that all
relevant data is captured (ie relating to both premiums and claims) at an appropriate level
of detail.
Section 5 discusses errors, omissions and distortions that may arise in the claims data.
Consideration is also given to ways of preventing such errors occurring.
Section 6 identifies and discusses the specific data requirements for pricing. Note that
while similar data will be needed for both reserving and pricing, each has its own specific
requirements.
Section 7 discusses the use of internal and external data for pricing. While internal data is
usually preferable, there may be circumstances under which external data is the best
option.
Section 8 discusses why and how data may be grouped. Examples of the data used for
some of the more common general insurance products are given.
Section 9 discusses the situation in which data is limited.
Section 10 concludes the chapter by describing the effect and consequences of using
inadequate data for the purpose of pricing.
You should be aware that, although parts of this chapter are similar to the data chapter in
Subject SP7, there are significant differences. The main differences are from Section 6 onwards.
There is also less material on data protection in Section 2 of this chapter than in Section 2 of the
data chapter in SP7.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-10: Data
1 Sources of data
Companies may analyse either their own internal data and/or external data from industry
sources.
Internal data is primarily the insurer’s past experience of business sold.
Industry-wide (or industry-source) data is collected and compiled by member offices of
particular organisations, for example, the ABI (Association of British Insurers) and Lloyd’s of
London in the UK. The use of such data will increase the quantity, but not necessarily the
quality, of the data available for analysis. Industry-wide data is discussed in further detail
below.
Other sources of external data exist, eg reinsurer’s data and published accounts.
1.1 Internal data
Question
Describe briefly what a company’s internal data will include.
Solution
Internal data will include:
policy information collected from the proposal form
premium information
claims information.
The majority of this chapter focuses on the quality and quantity of internal data. Industry data is
discussed below. This material may be familiar to you from your study of other subjects.
1.2 External data from industry sources
What are industry-wide data collection schemes?
In some countries, there are organisations that collect data from their member offices and
then make available summaries of all the data to their members.
For example, in the UK, the ABI collects and collates a wide variety of insurance data.
Question
Explain why such schemes exist.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 5
Solution
Managers of insurance companies use the data to confirm or refute suspicions from their own
data. Also, anybody managing any business should be aware of what is going on in the market
place.
Companies may also be required by regulators to publish data in a standard form. These
can be collected to form an industry-wide database.
Examples of industry-wide data include catastrophe model datasets, UK flood maps,
CRESTA zones, credit ratings and premium rates.
CRESTA stands for Catastrophe Risk Evaluating and Standardising Target Accumulations. The
global CRESTA zone data is used to help assess risk relating to natural hazards, particularly
earthquakes, storms and floods.
Potential benefits from using industry-wide schemes
An insurer participating in an industry-wide scheme can compare its own experience with
that of the industry as a whole (or that part of it represented by the participating insurers)
both at the overall level and at the level of the categories into which the data is classified.
Any significant differences should be explained. Since an insurer usually seeks to expand
by attracting business from its competitors, it may be important to understand the ways in
which the characteristics of the business it is seeking may differ from those of the business
it already has.
Industry-wide data provide a benchmark for insurers to assess their position compared to
their competitors. Industry-based development factors may be valuable for reserving,
especially for small insurers and insurers that have been established only a short time.
Basic problems with such schemes
There is potential for distortions within industry-wide data, particularly owing to
heterogeneity.
Question
Before reading on, list as many reasons as you can why data might differ between different
organisations.
Solution
different geographical or socio-economic sectors
different target markets or sales methods
different cover, exclusions, sizes of excess, policy conditions
different underwriting and claim settlement practices, reserving methods
differences in the nature and quality of data stored by different companies.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-10: Data
Possible reasons for heterogeneity
The data supplied by different companies may not be precisely comparable because:
companies operate in different geographical or socio-economic sections of the
market
the policies sold by different companies are not identical
the companies will have different practices; for example, underwriting, claim
settlement and outstanding claim reserving policies
the nature of the data stored by different companies will not always be the same
the coding used for the risk factors may vary from company to company.
This means that you must be very careful when interpreting industry-wide data. It may well not
be relevant for your company.
Further problems
Other problems with using industry-wide data may be:
The data will be much less detailed and less flexible than those available internally,
hence it will be more difficult to manipulate.
External data is often much more out of date than internal data. The data takes quite
a while to collect, collate and then distribute to the insurers.
The data quality will depend on the quality of the data systems of all its contributors.
If one company makes a mistake (eg entering a figure in millions instead of thousands)
then this invalidates the whole set of data. The more companies that contribute, the
more likely that one will make a mistake!
Not all companies contribute.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 7
2 Uses and users of data
2.1 Uses of data
The main uses of policy and claims data by a general insurer are:
administration
accounting
statutory returns
investment strategy and performance analysis
financial control and management information
risk management
reserving (including unexpired risk assessment)
experience statistics
premium rating and product costing
marketing
capital modelling
catastrophe modelling.
Interactions and conflict between different uses
The interaction between these functions can be very complex and will vary from insurer to
insurer. However, the underlying data requirements will normally be similar in each case.
Ideally all these functions would be controlled through one single integrated data system.
This is not often achieved in practice, especially where insurers have developed through
mergers of companies whose systems were not compatible with each other.
Question
Give reasons why, ideally, all functions should be controlled by ‘one single integrated data
system’.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-10: Data
Solution
If data is controlled by one single, integrated system then:
there is reduced chance of existing data being corrupted
there is reduced chance of inconsistent treatment of information, between products or
over time
there is likely to be a better level of control over those who may enter information or
amend information
information will be easier to access, eg it will not involve collating information from
several systems
time will not need to be spent reconciling data from different systems.
High level data
For some purposes, data may only be required on a ‘big picture’ basis. Here, data will be
publicly available in published accounts and statutory returns. In some instances – for
example, merger and acquisition work undertaken by a consulting firm – only public data
may be available.
However, for the purpose of management information, the data will be needed in more detail so
that strategic decisions can be made, such as deciding which classes and territories to expand.
Data on individual risks
Insurance organisations also need data relating to the individual risks for which they
provide cover. The quantity and quality of this data is closely related. Without sufficient
quantity, data groupings will either be non-homogeneous or lack credibility. However, even
where there is plenty of data available, poor-quality data will not produce results that are
reliable.
Data groupings are discussed further in Section 8.
2.2 Restrictions on the use of data
Customer information
Sufficient information will be needed to identify the policyholder of each policy and to
provide basic details. However, customer information can be used for cross-selling,
customer relationship management and the estimation of customer lifetime value, among
other things.
To do these things it may be necessary to cross-reference different customer databases, for
example, to determine which motor policyholders also have household policies. This may
not always be straightforward, and if details are not recorded in exactly the same way, it
may not be possible to establish these connections.
To do this, additional data may be needed that are not required for administration purposes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 9
Obtaining information on policyholders with different products should be made easier if all lines
of business are administered on the same integrated data system.
Data should be used carefully in these ways. Data protection laws may limit the use of data.
Contravening these laws can lead to criminal prosecution and extremely unfavourable
publicity. Permission may need to be obtained for use of personal data when a policy is
issued.
Data protection
The security of data is of paramount importance.
It may be important to both personal and commercial customers that data is protected.
It is subject to explicit law in many countries, usually to protect people’s personal
information. However, many commercial insureds provide data to insurance companies
that is commercially sensitive, so any concern that an insurer’s systems are not secure can
be highly damaging to the insurer.
Data protection laws may cover what data a company may hold and for what it may be used.
The laws may allow access to personal data by the subject. The subject may have a legal
right to have incorrect data corrected. This will normally be to the benefit of the insurer,
which will not want incorrect data on its system in any case.
Laws may also require that specified people are appointed to be responsible for certain
aspects of data gathering, processing or use, or for the correctness of data held. Third
parties, such as consultancies, should adhere to certain guidelines when using personal
data provided by an insurer. Such guidelines include providing details of how the personal
data will be used and destroying all personal data after use.
Insurers should have procedures in place to ensure that data is secure and is used only for
appropriate purposes. These procedures will include limiting the use of systems to
specified people, who need to identify themselves to the computer using passwords, and
rules for the secure storage and transmission of data.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-10: Data
2.3 Users of data
Full development team
The full development team for a computer system should include representatives from the
following departments:
senior management
accounting
underwriting
claims
marketing
investment
actuarial / statistical
computing
reinsurance
risk management
catastrophe modelling.
Question
State the main uses of data for each of these potential users.
Solution
Senior management: making business decisions
Accounting: collecting premiums; paying intermediaries, claimants etc,
preparing summaries
Underwriting: premium rating, identifying improvements, evidence of selection,
portfolio monitoring
Claims: processing and settling claims
Marketing: assessing marketing performance and identifying opportunities
Investment: monitoring investment performance and opportunities
Actuarial: premium rating; reserving; assessing solvency and capital
requirements and investment and reinsurance strategies;
management information
Computing: writing and implementing the IT system
Reinsurance: monitoring reinsurance performance and adequacy
Risk management: monitoring the size and nature of risks written, identifying
aggregations of risk, implementing risk controls
Catastrophe modelling: assessing and quantifying catastrophe risks.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 11
The different users of data within a general insurer will usually have different needs in terms
of the quantity and quality of the data.
In developing a system, it should be noted that different departments will have different
requirements.
For example, the marketing department may want data only at a very high level for their
promotional material. The actuarial department, on the other hand, will want very detailed
information when they undertake a rating review.
This may lead to conflict as some departments may be reluctant to bear the costs of a
system that goes beyond their immediate needs and may be less attentive in supplying and
supporting data which is not directly for their own purposes. Such conflicts could result in
a system that does not contain data at the desired level of detail for actuarial analyses.
The role of the actuary
Actuaries are likely to be involved in the technical aspects of all the functions listed above.
Ideally they should be involved in developing the information systems that support these
areas.
The extent of their involvement in developing such systems will depend on the extent to
which they are actively involved in each area.
For example, an actuary may be heavily involved in building and designing a database for
storing a history of policy and claims information for the assessment of risks. On the other
hand, actuaries may only be asked to provide verbal advice on developing a new
information system for marketing purposes.
In general, the actuary must work with whatever data is available. A new insurer will not
have its own historical data.
The appropriate response to data being of poor quality is discussed elsewhere in this
chapter, which will depend on the nature of the task in hand.
Example
In the UK, an insurer should have kept at least enough data to be able to compile the
statutory returns to the PRA (Prudential Regulation Authority) and its predecessors. There
are similar requirements in some other countries.
The PRA is one of the successors to the FSA (Financial Services Authority). Amongst other things,
it is responsible for the supervision and regulation of insurance companies in the UK.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-10: Data
3 Quality and quantity of data in existing data systems
3.1 Factors that influence the quality and quantity of data
The availability of data of good quality and quantity will vary greatly:
between organisations, which will depend on:
– the size and age of the company
– the current data system in use, including the use of legacy systems, the integrity
of the data system(s)
– the management and staff responsible for collecting and maintaining data
– the nature of the organisation, eg direct insurer vs reinsurer
within organisations:
– depending on the distribution method of the business.
between the different classes of business.
These influences are discussed in more detail below.
3.2 Reasons for variation by organisation
Impact of size and age of company on data quantity
Large companies will have much more data available than smaller ones. They are likely to
make more use of their own data, rather than rely largely on industry-wide data.
A newly established company may find that it has insufficient historical data for pricing
purposes. It may need to supplement its historical data with data from industry sources.
Impact of size and age of company on data quality
The size of an organisation can also have a more direct influence on data quality, as a large
company may have better data systems in place than a small one. However, a large well-
established company may have an outdated computer system that is difficult to amend. A
new small company may have a modern system that can be readily adapted to change.
Building a new data system is a major project. It is expensive and uses up considerable
management time. The old system also has to be operated and maintained until the new
one is ready and it may be difficult to transfer historical data from the old system to the
new.
Section 4 below describes the information that would be kept if a new system were to be set
up from scratch. In practice, the only insurers that can achieve this level of data system are
new companies and those that are prepared to invest significantly to upgrade their data
systems. In general, the older the insurer is, the more its data system may differ from what
is ideal.
Larger companies, resulting from the merger or acquisition of other companies, can also
experience legacy system difficulties. These arise from the integration of two or more data
systems with different data items, and the data captured being structured in different ways.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 13
Legacy systems
The ability to input, manage, extract and analyse data depends fundamentally on the quality
of the systems. Many data analysts will be hampered in their research by legacy systems.
These are systems which, for a variety of reasons, have not been updated or upgraded.
Legacy systems may affect the whole company or may be limited to particular product lines
(or even generations of a particular class). The problem is often at its most difficult in areas
relating to portfolio transfer or company acquisition. Quite often there is an additional
difficulty with systems incompatibility and communication.
As mentioned above, a common problem is that an insurer is formed from a merger of two
or more insurers with their own systems. It is rare in such circumstances for it to be
possible to transfer all historical data from one system onto the other. In general, we would
prefer to use only the better system after the merger, but the other system is likely to lack
some of the data items that the better system recorded. This is one of the things that is
likely to have made it better. Usually a merged insurer will move to one of its legacy
systems, but it is likely to retain the old business on the other system, and may keep
renewals of the business on the other system, at least for a time.
In an insurance company, an actuary is likely to be able to influence the gathering of data
and design of systems. This is especially true in a new company.
Considerations when designing systems are covered in Section 4.
However, while an actuary may be able to influence systems so they are more useful for
actuarial work, it is usually not possible to enter historical data onto a new system if they
were not previously collected and processed automatically. Therefore, it may be some time
before a new system becomes fully useful to the actuary. In the meantime, using two
systems can be problematic.
We should allow for any approximations made as a result and may need to allocate more
time to particular pieces of research involving data stored on legacy systems.
Integrity of systems
The quality of data depends on the integrity of the systems. In other words, checks are
needed to ensure that all data is entered onto the system, entered once only, and entered
correctly. Data should also be backed up regularly and securely, and have safeguards
against accidental corruption. Some of these safeguards will be built into the system itself
while others will be part of administrative procedures.
Checks that may be performed are discussed in Section 5.5.
Management and staff
Problems of data quality and quantity can result from poor management control of data
recording or its verification processes, or from poor design of the data systems.
Management should make staff aware of the importance of maintaining good quality data
records. If the administrators are not aware of this, the data input may be of a lower quality.
Management will have control over cost as well as design. Poor quality data systems may be due
to cutting corners with the budget as well as bad design. The extent to which actuaries have been
involved in the design of the system will also influence the quality of the data.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-10: Data
This may not necessarily be a reflection on the current management, as good-quality data
cannot necessarily be obtained quickly. After implementing a process for maintaining
extensive records, it may take many years to collect enough data for analysis purposes.
This is especially true for long-tailed classes.
Reinsurer vs direct insurer
A reinsurer (especially one writing non-proportional reinsurance) will often receive
aggregate (or bulk) data relating to all of its risks coming from a particular cedant. It is
virtually impossible to check the accuracy to any great extent, without going through the
expensive process of accessing the original records of the cedant.
For treaty reinsurance business, sometimes only grouped bordereau data may be available.
Third parties, such as binding authorities or cedants may provide this information.
The Glossary defines the term bordereau as:
A detailed list of premiums, claims and other important statistics provided by ceding
insurers to reinsurers (or by coverholders to insurers in direct insurance), so that payments
due under a reinsurance treaty can be calculated.
There are two distinct problems for the reinsurer here:
If grouped bordereau data is all that is available then the reinsurer may not be able to
check and/or analyse its experience data to as high a level as it would like as there may be
insufficient detail provided.
The data may be out of date by the time the reinsurer obtains it.
In the case of excess of loss reinsurance, a cedant may fail to recognise that a claim may
exceed the retention and may therefore fail to notify the reinsurer. Thus claims that have
been reported to the cedant may remain IBNR for some time from the point of view of the
reinsurer. In an attempt to reduce this problem, it is customary to ask cedants to notify the
reinsurer of all claims that they think may exceed, say, half of the retention.
3.3 Reasons for variation by different distribution methods
Insurers write their business:
through brokers (intermediaries)
through agents (eg banks or building societies that sell a certain insurer’s buildings and
contents insurance)
directly with customers.
The data needs will vary between the various distribution channels, which will not in any
case be homogeneous.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 15
Brokers and agents
Different brokers and agents will differ in:
the role they play in the sales, administration and claims processes
their level and form of remuneration
the manner and speed with which they process policies / claims.
Role played in sales, administration and claims processes
Organisations that obtain large parts of their business through intermediaries, or those that
delegate underwriting and/or claims handling authority, may have similar problems to those
described in the section above on reinsurers.
For example, some brokers will retain funds on behalf of insurers in order to pay
straightforward claims while others will not be involved in claims administration. The
former will provide claims details to be entered onto the insurer’s systems or onto
bordereaux, while claims from the latter will be entered by the insurer’s own staff.
Even among brokers who have authority to administer claims, the levels of authority will
vary.
Question
Give an example of this sort of arrangement (with the intermediary or agent taking responsibility
for most of the administration).
Solution
A large block of policies, such as mortgage indemnity business, sold through a building society, or
travel policies sold through a travel agent. (In each case the insurer may only receive summarised
data.)
Note that in this case the building society is only likely to do the policy administration. Since the
building society is the actual recipient of claim payments, the insurer would do the claims
administration.
Remuneration
Different brokers will have different remuneration conditions. The system needs to identify
them and calculate payments appropriately.
The remuneration conditions may also affect the willingness of the broker to provide good quality
data to the insurer in a timely fashion. This may also depend on the state of the market.
The insurer may receive bordereau data in different formats and at varying levels of quality.
The level of detail may also differ.
Both premiums and claims information may be bulk figures, and thus underlying policy and
claims details are hard to access.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-10: Data
The brokers may also have requirements (eg on the level and form of data collected) that may
impact the insurer’s own data systems and processes.
Manner / speed of processing information
Brokers and agents may provide information on paper. The insurer’s staff will need to enter
this onto the systems or in a medium ready for computer entry or through the internet.
It may be time consuming for staff to enter such data into a computer system and so only
major losses may be broken out from claims bordereaux, with the residual being entered as
a bulk item. It is quicker to integrate data received electronically into the system.
The system should provide appropriate management information to brokers to enable them
to compile their own management information and the information they need to support
their own clients.
Direct sales
For business sold direct to the policyholder, the insurer needs to enter all the data. This will
be done by staff from telephone and in-branch sales, but internet sales may be processed
directly into the system without human intervention.
3.4 Reasons for variation by different classes
Data can vary between classes for a number of different reasons, principally due to the different
nature of risk, which leads to the following:
big variations in claim frequency between classes
the length of the tail of some classes means that it takes considerable time to collect the
necessary claims data
for some classes the underwriting is subjective, so it is difficult to store the details of the
risk.
Claim frequencies
The more frequent the claims, the larger the available quantity of claims data.
Question
Give an example of a class of business where claim frequency tends to be very high.
Solution
Motor insurance claims tend to be fairly frequent. 25% on private fully comprehensive policies
would not be unusual, and up to 40% for motor fleet.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 17
Length of tail
There is a difference between the number of years of past data required for long- and short-
tailed business. For longer-tailed classes of business, there may be significant delays until
there is sufficient data available to support an analysis of the business. This is particularly
true of classes that are subject to significant delays in claim notification or slow loss
development.
Subjectivity of underwriting
There is a difference in data quantity and quality for classes that use different forms of
underwriting. Underwriting may be based on statistics or on judgement. The range and
volume of data held will be greater for a class where underwriting has been largely based on
statistics than for a class where the underwriting has been largely based on subjective
judgement.
This does not mean that the underwriting process is haphazard. The underwriting of
individual deals may be supported by excellent information. But the fact that the
information will vary from risk to risk does not lend itself to systematic data capture; often
this is the case with London Market data.
For example:
Private motor business is generally rated by reference to a large number of
underwriting variables, which must be held in the policy database.
M&A insurance may be underwritten based on judgement on a policy-by-policy
basis, so that large amounts of systematic underwriting information are not stored.
Therefore, there will be more data available on private motor insurance business than for, say,
marine insurance, which is more subjective. Also, for some classes (eg marine), the rating factors
are qualitative, and therefore are more difficult to store on a computer. Industrial property is
another class of business for which this may be true.
Problems can also arise if an insurer reorganises its class structure, and it cannot assemble
historical data in the new classes. One consequence of a reorganisation of this type is that
claim development triangles may comprise only the most recent diagonals and the interiors
of the triangles are missing or available only in a different class structure.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-10: Data
4 Establishing a good information system
4.1 Introduction
The primary objective of the wider information systems is usually that the computer systems can
be used effectively. For example:
Data capture forms (eg proposal and claim forms) should be designed to provide precisely
the information required for the computer, in the right order and with as little ambiguity
or subjectivity as possible.
Staff should be trained so that they know precisely how to use the computer and
understand the importance of the data they enter onto it.
Any new computer system should be run in parallel with existing systems for a trial
period, until its reliability has been checked and optimised.
Procedures should be set in place to monitor the performance of the systems regularly,
and to improve them where necessary.
The following stages are required in the establishment of a good information system to ensure
that good quality data is captured and stored:
consideration of the users’ requirements
careful design of appropriate proposal and claim forms
ensuring that features of premiums and claims can be recorded
consideration of policy and claim information to be collected
adequate training of staff.
4.2 Users’ requirements
The first stage in establishing a good information system is to determine the priorities and
requirements of the system for all potential users. Many of these will overlap because many
of the items of data will be needed by various departments, but some may conflict, and the
resultant system may have to be a compromise to some extent. The important points,
however, are that the system should achieve the essential requirements, be compatible
throughout the organisation and integrate the different functions within the organisation.
4.3 Policy and claim information
Information on individual risks is obtained primarily from the proposal form and the claim form.
Proposal form
The prime information source will be the details given on the proposal form. Therefore, it is
important that it produces relevant and reliable information for the system. Questions
should be well designed and unambiguous, so that the proposer will give the full correct
information and the underwriting department can process the application readily, adding
any coding that is necessary.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 19
For example, storing date of birth is more useful than storing age.
However, an excessive number of questions on either the proposal form or the system may
lead to poor quality data if the individuals answering the questions provide inaccurate
responses in order to complete the form quickly.
This information should be held (together with any subsequent changes) so that it can be
cross-checked against the claims information at the time of any claim, or for rating or
accounting purposes. This should enable the automatic checking of the validity of the
claim and the updating of the basic policy information (for example, the termination of cover
in the event of a total loss). The cross-checking is likely to be achieved by the storage of
claim reference numbers with the policy information.
When information is changed then a history of the previous information should be retained.
Question
Explain why.
Solution
It is necessary to keep a history of policy and claim records so that accurate experience analyses
can be carried out. In particular, it is necessary to ensure that claims and exposure data
correspond.
Clear links are needed between underwriting and claims databases, eg via policy reference
numbers.
In many policies, information is taken over the phone or through the internet. However, in
these cases it is normal for the insurer to set the information out in a completed proposal
form for the insured to sign as a legal contract.
Question
For a household insurance contract (covering both buildings and contents), list three pieces of
information that will be required for all contracts, and six pieces of information that may only be
required for some policies.
Solution
Information that would be required includes:
policyholder name
policyholder address
some indication of the type of property, eg house or flat
some indication of the size of the house, eg estimated rebuild cost or number of
bedrooms
the level of excess required.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-10: Data
Examples of information that may also be needed:
estimated sum insured for contents
list of valuable items to be covered
whether the property is used for business
whether the property is normally unoccupied during the day
type and standard of construction
age of the building
types of locks / burglar alarms / smoke alarms fitted
whether there are pets at the house
family composition of residents
age of residents
whether residents are smokers / non-smokers
type of heating
whether claims have been made in recent years.
The precise information will vary from class to class and from contract to contract, since
almost all policies have some optional elements. If the options are taken, details of the
cover provided will be needed, such as a list of valuable items. However, all proposals will
need the name and address of the proposer. Other items will vary, such as the sum
insured, which may not be needed in some cases.
The sum insured may not be needed where the amount of cover that must be provided is dictated
by legislation.
For example, in the UK, legislation requires unlimited cover for third party motor bodily
injury cover.
Claim form
The main information source will be the details given on the claim form. Like the proposal
form, it is important that this is designed with the aim of producing information that can be
transferred easily to the computer system. The system should refer to the corresponding
policy record and verify the existence of cover.
Again, the questions should be clear, unambiguous and objective.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 21
4.4 Features of premium information
Premium information is necessary for reserving, pricing and monitoring. Hence it is
important that the premiums received (and paid) are recorded accurately.
The features of premiums that should be recorded are:
amounts
timings
adjustments to premiums, such as premium discounts and commission paid
cross-selling information.
Written and signed amounts
Written premiums are the premiums an insurer expects to receive over the duration of the
policy. Written premiums may be before or after commission. The insurer should calculate
the net written premiums by deducting any reinsurance premiums from the gross
premiums.
Within the context of the London Market, Signed Premiums are the written premiums at the
signed share of a risk.
In practice, the terms ‘written premium’ and ‘signed premium’ are used interchangeably and in
fact the two figures are often the same. The difference comes when a risk is more than 100%
placed. For example, let’s say that a risk is 105% placed. Then the written premium is the total of
all the insurers’ combined premium, before the risk is signed down and the signed premium is the
total after the risk is signed down. The insurer’s share of the signed down amount is also
sometimes called the signed premium.
Payment times
Premiums may be paid annually, monthly or at another frequency. The data system should
record the date premium payments are due, the premium amount due and the date
premiums are actually received. The system should be designed so that it is easy to check
for any overdue premiums.
Premium adjustments
The data system should be flexible enough to allow for premium adjustments to be made.
For example, the system may have to record an adjustment to premiums because of
endorsements, such as changes in policy limits or exclusions.
Policy limits may need to be changed on a contents insurance policy if the policyholder buys a
new item of high value contents, eg a new television. Exclusions may need to be removed, for
example if a household insurance policy previously did not cover the contents of outbuildings but
the policyholder wanted to remove this exclusion.
Some endorsements may leave the premium unchanged. Others may result in an increase
or decrease in the premium. The data system should be able to record the premium
adjustment (and date).
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-10: Data
If the policy is written under an NCD system, a discount may be applied to the renewal
premium if the policyholder made zero claims in the previous year. The system should
store both the original and discounted premiums for future reference.
The premium rating part of the system should also know (via a link) how many claims have been
made in the previous year so that it can accurately calculate the renewal premium.
For treaty reinsurance business, the system should also record the dates and amounts of
any reinstatement premiums (either due to be paid or already paid) for the treaty.
The system should similarly record any facultative insurance premiums with respect to
individual policies.
Commissions
The system should record commissions paid to brokers and other intermediaries. The
commission may be a fixed percentage of premiums. In this case, the system should record
the correct percentage and update it when necessary for future reference. It should record
details of the relevant broker or intermediary.
It should record ceding commissions and profit commissions payable by reinsurers to the
ceding company.
Other deductions
It should record any other increases or reductions to premiums.
For example, insurers may award premium discounts to policyholders who pay their
premiums in a timely manner.
Cross-selling
Collecting information on cross-selling may help in seeing if a particular loss-leader
strategy is working.
A loss leader is an insurance product sold at a low price (usually below the technical price
so that it is sold at a loss) to generate profitable sales for another insurance product.
Cross-selling is the selling of similar insurance products or the selling of products that can
be incorporated with the actual insurance cover being sold.
For example, selling home contents insurance, as a loss leader, to existing buildings
insurance customers (or to new customers applying for buildings insurance) may help
increase the number of home contents insurance policies sold to new policyholders.
Loss leaders may also be sold with a view to establishing the insurer in a new territory or
new product class.
The system should record cross-selling information for the loss-leader product, such as
type of product, actual premium charged, technical price and number of policies sold, to
assess the effectiveness of the sales strategy.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 23
4.5 Features of claim information
General insurance claims may have a number of features that must be captured by a data system
and the data collection process. These include:
the definition of a claim
the estimated outstanding claim amount, claims paid to date and type / cause of claim
multiple claim payments
reopened claims
claims handling expenses
reinsurance recoveries
class-level adjustments.
Definition of a claim
Setting up a claim record
Insurers will have certain rules governing when a claim record should be set up, following
an alleged loss by a policyholder.
For example, a claim record could be set up on the system when:
a request for a claim form is received
the claim form is received back from a policyholder
the claim form has been assessed by a member of the claims department staff who
decides that it appears likely to be valid
the claims manager concludes that there is sufficient information to set a reserve.
Changes to this rule and/or office procedures could affect:
the numbers of claims recorded
the numbers of nil claims (claims settled at no cost to the insurer)
the speed of notification.
Any such variations could affect subsequent analyses of claims experience for the classes
concerned. They will certainly affect the development of numbers of claims reported and
closed, and may affect the development of incurred claims.
For example, if the insurer changed the definition of a nil claim mid-way through the year and we
were analysing average claim amount and average frequency, the analysis would be distorted by
this change in definition (assuming nil claims are included in the number of claims for frequency
and amount calculations).
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-10: Data
Closing a claim
Comparable variations can exist for the definition of the settlement of a claim. Some
insurers go through their claims files periodically (for example, at each year end) and only
then declare claims as settled. Others close the claim record as soon as it appears that the
last payment has been made. Some insurers may even close a claim file when a payment
will or may be paid at some relatively distant future date (for example, where a payment is
due on attainment of majority by the recipient or when a provisional damage award has
been made).
An attainment of majority is where a payment is made once the claimant reaches a certain age
that is pre-specified by the courts.
An insurer may also close claims following a one-off review with respect to a particular
book of business.
Estimated outstanding amounts
Insurers’ attitudes towards recording estimated amounts outstanding on each open claim
vary widely, as do the frequencies with which these are updated.
So there may be differences in:
when the estimates are first set up
the method used to determine the amount
how often these amounts are revised.
We should allow for these facts in designing the information system in order to advise
users what information to input and what the information held means.
Setting the initial estimate
Outstanding amounts may be estimated in different ways:
At one extreme, an initial estimate will be put on file when the claim is first notified.
This may be updated whenever a payment is made or periodically, whether or not an
intervening payment has been made. The revised estimate may be the earlier
estimate written down by any payments made or a completely revised amount,
based on the latest known facts of the case.
At the other extreme, the insurer may not attach a case estimate to any one claim
individually, relying instead on a total estimated value for the risk group, based on
statistical methods. However, such insurers are very rare.
A more common approach is to set a standard reserve for claims that are not large
until they are settled or to set a reserve based on the claim’s characteristics.
Question
Explain why insurers bother with outstanding amounts, given that the analysis would be more
accurate if they waited until all claims were settled.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 25
Solution
If they waited until all claims were settled then the data would be out of date, in particular for
long-tailed classes.
An insurer whose only reserves are bulk reserves for the risk group will not be able to
record individual outstanding claim estimates. In all other cases, the reserve amount
should be recorded on the system and the date when it was set. To compile loss-
development statistics, they should be retained, even when they are superseded by revised
estimates. It is possible to compile development statistics by retaining only the latest
reserve amount and adding a further diagonal to old triangles. In the past this was
sometimes done partly because of the cost of data storage. For the same reason, only an
inception-to-date paid amount might be kept. However, this precludes new investigations
into historical data and is much less useful to the actuary. Because of low modern data-
storage costs and increased capacity, this is usually no longer an issue.
Triangulation methods are discussed in Subject SP7.
If the reserves are set separately by type of payment (eg indemnity, compensation), the type
should be recorded. The currency should also be recorded.
Determining the amount to hold
Each company will have its own case estimate philosophy and guidelines for the claims
assessor to follow. For example:
one company may require estimates to be as realistic as possible
other companies may prefer to have an element of prudence in each estimate to
avoid later deterioration in the overall reserve amount.
In the London Market, policies are often coinsured by a number of different insurers. In
these cases, the lead insurer will normally be responsible for handling the claim (although
the second on the slip may also be involved) and will advise reserves to the following
insurers. It is common for following insurers to use the reserve advised by the leader,
although some insurers do alter the reserve for contentious claims where there are issues
such as policy coverage.
Large claims are often managed by loss adjusters: specialist companies that manage
claims on behalf of insurers. They will usually advise the insurer on the expected ultimate
amount of the claim and most insurers will adopt the adjuster’s advised reserve as their
reserve for the claim.
Some insurers record expected amounts to be recovered from subrogation or recovery as
negative reserves attached to individual claims.
Revising amounts
Reserves should be reviewed from time to time to ensure that they remain valid. A number
of claims are advised but not pursued (by the claimant), and the insurer may not hear further
from the claimant. In such instances it may be necessary to contact the claimant to assess
the current status of the claim; otherwise these reserves may remain on the books
indefinitely. However, there is often a reluctance to contact the claimant, as the act of
reminding him or her of the claim can be costly to the insurer.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-10: Data
Multiple claim payments
Some claims will involve two or more payments, made at different times. Further, the
insurer may be able to recover part of the gross cost of the claims through salvage,
subrogation or reinsurance. This is likely to occur some time after the original claim
payments are made and the amounts are normally recorded as negative claim payments
with a code to identify the type of receipt so that claim severities can be better assessed.
Separate details should be kept for each payment made or received under a particular claim,
including details of the dates, amounts, currency and type of payment involved.
Different types of payments will include:
indemnity payments made to policyholders
compensation payments made to third parties
payments to claimants’ solicitors
payments to loss adjusters and payments of interest.
This is not an exhaustive list. An equivalent list of amounts recovered from reinsurers will
also be needed, and it may be necessary to distinguish between different types of
reinsurance recovery.
It should be noted that payments on a single claim may be made in different currencies.
For example, a UK insurer might insure a ship for a European client, with the premium being
set in euros. The indemnity amount might then be payable in the currency of the country
where a claim occurred and the loss-adjusting costs in sterling if a UK loss adjuster were
engaged.
Even where all a company’s business is done in one country, claims in a foreign currency
are often possible, so it is usually desirable to be able to record currency.
This will subsequently give more scope to analyse claims experience in detail, and to
establish correct run-off patterns of the claim payments. It is important to keep the
approach consistent over time if data is to be useful for actuarial analysis.
This is an important general point. If you hold more detail, you will be able to perform many
different, detailed analyses on the data.
The problems of inadequate and incomplete data for pricing purposes are looked at in more detail
in Section 10.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 27
Reopened claims
Some claims that the insurer regarded as settled may have to be reopened at a later date for
various reasons:
it may be purely due to the closure definition used by the insurer
it may be because a further liability for payment, possibly of costs rather than of
indemnity, has come to light
the insurer has made some recovery against a third party involved
an error was made in closing the claim originally
the claim was made by a minor who can reclaim on attaining the age of 18.
It is important that the system does not regard these as new claims, as this would cause
errors in recording of claim frequency and errors in allocation of the claim by year of origin.
This is particularly a problem if there is a sudden change. If the method of recording reopened
claims has suddenly changed, the distortion will be more serious than if the allowance for
reopened claims has been the same for many years.
A note should also be kept of the original date of closure.
Question
Explain why.
Solution
To allow the insurer to analyse the percentage of claims that will be reopened and also to
calculate the average time from closure to reopening.
Claims handling expenses
Some systems will record claim payments and claims handling expenses separately, whereas
others will combine the two items.
Reinsurance recoveries
We should record reinsurance recoveries that have been received from reinsurers. In many
cases, reinsurance recoveries can be linked to particular claims, for example, when the
recoveries arise from proportional reinsurance or single risk XL. Recoveries from
catastrophe XL are not usually in respect of an individual claim. The data system should
still record these recoveries in some way. Inwards claims are likely to have a catastrophe
indicator and recoveries may be proportional.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-10: Data
It is normal for insurers to set up a reserve for recoverable reinsurance when a recovery is
expected against a gross claim. However, there is always a delay between the payment of
the claim and the recovery of the reinsured amount. If this can be significant, there may be
a need to distinguish between reserves for recoveries on paid claims and reserves for
recovery against gross reserves. When analysing data, it may be important to understand
how these have been treated. The difference may be important for accounting purposes
since recoveries on payments already made will be a debtor and recoveries on reserves will
be an accounting provision.
When risk XL or catastrophe XL cover has been used, it may be useful to record paid or
expected amounts of reinstatement premiums against individual claims.
The amount of the reinstatement premium would therefore be allocated to the claim(s) that had
necessitated the use of the reinstatement cover.
It is unlikely that one will allocate IBNR and paid claims to individual risks except for large
London Market contracts.
Indeed, it is very difficult to allocate IBNR to an individual claim because, by definition, we don’t
yet know about it and therefore can’t know which claim to allocate it to.
Class-level adjustments
It may be necessary to make adjustments at a total class level such as adjustments for IBNR
claims. We should allow for reserves for pure IBNR claims at the total class level. Similarly,
we should adjust for profit commission at the total class level.
We should design the system so that these class-level adjustments can be entered and
updated when required.
4.6 Information to be recorded
The data requirements for each policy or claim record include:
risk definition and details of cover
The risk definition will include the class and subclass of business, and, together
with the details of cover, will identify the cover granted. This may consist of a
number of items of information.
For example, in a household policy there is usually a range of optional covers, such
as garden equipment, bicycles, accidental damage and specified valuables. There
may be separate sums insured under some or all of these categories and they may
have different excesses. All these should be recorded.
Commercial policies may similarly have a menu of items that may or may not have
been selected.
details of claim (if it is a claim record)
The details of a claim will normally include a claim cause code.
status of present record
The status of a record is normally in-force / expired / cancelled for a policy and open
/ closed / reopened for a claim.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 29
control dates (start and end dates of each record, dates of claims, and so on)
relevant amounts and currencies (exposure, sums insured, premiums, claims
payments, and so on)
administrative details.
Administrative details may be in narrative form for the use of the administrative
departments.
The history of policy and claim records should be held, ideally, indefinitely. However, you
should always be aware of local data protection laws that may place restrictions on what
customer data can be held and for how long.
This, together with the frequency of changes of information, implies holding a vast amount
of data. It may, therefore, be necessary to strike a balance between:
the capacity of the system
the cost of data storage
the amount of data stored
the level of detail at which it is stored.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-10: Data
5 Errors, omissions or distortions in claims data
5.1 Claim estimation methods
Claims take some time to be settled from when they are incurred. Some claims may be
settled very quickly, some may take longer to settle and others may take longer still.
The following terminology is commonly used:
We refer to the claims incurred in the same period as a cohort. For a particular
cohort, in theory, a graph can be plotted of accumulated claims settled (or reported)
against time from the date of occurrence.
We sometimes refer to the total accumulated claims (when all have been settled) of a
cohort as the ultimate claims.
The rate at which accumulated claims are settled or reported for the cohort is
sometimes referred to as the claims development.
The graph may sometimes be referred to as the claims development pattern. In
many of our reserving methods, we rely on the claims development pattern to be
stable for different cohorts.
The errors that we discuss in Section 5.2 can distort the claims development pattern and,
therefore, the results of the valuation. These points are discussed in more detail in
Subject SP7.
Whatever method is used to estimate ultimate claims, a large degree of detail is required. The
results are, therefore, highly dependent on the quality of the claims data available:
any significant claims data errors will be projected forward, distorting estimates
errors in claims data will also distort development patterns used for projections.
These would lead to incorrect estimates of future liabilities and to incorrect premiums being
charged, the consequences of which could be serious, as explained later in this chapter.
The same is also true of wrongly grouped data or unusual data (such as a £2 million motor liability
claim), which may be correct but would still distort projections, unless taken into account.
5.2 Sources of data error
There are many potential sources of data error.
Some examples are given below:
Wrong claim number
Details of the claim could be allocated to the wrong record, and hence to the wrong claim
risk group.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 31
Wrong policy number
If the claim record picks up its risk details from the wrong policy record, these are likely to
be wrong. Again, the claim details may be allocated to the wrong claim risk group, claim
year and so on.
Wrong risk details
This could happen if the current in-force details are entered, rather than those as at the date
of claim. For example, a claim might be registered on the file before changes in risk factors
that occurred before the date of claim.
This might happen if the policyholder has changed their car or their address in the meantime.
An error could also occur if the policy conditions have changed, but the new policy
continues to be stored in the original rating group.
Wrong claim date
This could cause the claim details to be allocated to the wrong claim year, distorting both
the apparent numbers of claims for those years and their development.
A wrong claim date could also mean that the claim will relate to the wrong risk details (if these
have changed).
A common cause of this is entering the date when the claim was notified, rather than the
original incident date, or vice versa.
Question
State why both of these dates would be required.
Solution
To allow for analysis of reporting delays.
For liability claims and some property claims (for example, for subsidence), where a precise
date of event cannot be determined, there need to be very clear rules and procedures for the
allocation of such cases to a claim year.
Wrong payment dates
Some claims are settled by several payments, made on different dates. If these are not each
identified separately, then development patterns may again be distorted.
Wrong claim type
Usually an analysis of the different claim types for a particular risk group will be required,
since they behave differently (that is, they may have different claims distributions or be
settled over longer or shorter periods). If the claim types are not identified correctly, this
distorts the separate development patterns and average values.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8-10: Data
So in an analysis of the motor account, for example, the insurer would separate property damage
and bodily injury claims.
If the different claim types are not separated, a change in the mix of types of claim also
distorts the development patterns and average values.
These problems may extend to cause of claim (for example, fire, theft, explosion and so on),
as claims from different causes may also behave differently.
5.3 Sources of data distortion
There are other factors that, whilst not exactly errors, can still distort an analysis.
Some examples are given below.
Changes in claim handling procedures
Changing practices regarding the point at which a notified loss is formally accepted as a
claim on the company and is marked as such on the claim file, may distort the claim
characteristics for the risk groups affected.
Similarly, the failure to mark claim records as settled on a consistent basis may affect the
apparent development of claim cohorts.
Case estimates
If these are not updated correctly over time, or as payments are made, the values will be
unreliable.
Similarly, the system may fail to keep a historical record of the estimates (at each calendar
year-end or quarter-end, say). This will inhibit the use of this information for statistical
purposes.
A change to the basis for calculating case estimates – for example, a change from prudent
estimation to realistic – may distort run-off patterns (when based on reported claims).
Processing delays
If the rate at which claims are processed alters through backlogs, changes in procedures
and so on, this will distort the claim development patterns and hence the analysis of them.
This leads to problems when pricing.
Large claims
The presence, or indeed the absence, of unusually large claims is likely to distort any
analysis unless a suitable adjustment is made. To make adjustments in the analysis, large
claims should be identified separately.
For example, an adjustment might be made which truncates claims above a certain amount and
spreads them across similar policies.
Large claims are often the subject of reinsurance recoveries. If the system does not
recognise these automatically, the insurer may fail to claim recoveries that are due from
reinsurers.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 33
Return premiums
Return premiums can be recorded as a claim on occasion. This may depend on the
accounting principles of the insurer. However, there is a significant danger that such
practices will distort all manner of analyses.
Claims inflation
Inflation of claim payments may distort the monetary amounts being used in claims data
analysis unless the raw data is adjusted or the estimation method can make a suitable
allowance. If the unadjusted chain ladder method is used, the claims may not have to be
adjusted for inflation, since the unadjusted chain ladder method is based on the assumption
that future inflation will be similar to past inflation.
The different chain ladder methods should be familiar to you from earlier exams. They are also
described in detail in Subject SP7.
Question
List the possible sources of error in a claim analysis.
Solution
wrong claim number
wrong policy number
wrong risk details
wrong claim date
changes in claim handling procedures
wrong payment dates
wrong claim type
case estimates
processing delays
large claims
claims inflation.
5.4 The consequences of erroneous claims data
The consequences of wrong data being entered include false accounting, inappropriate
reserving, pricing wrongly, failure to make recoveries and general management mistakes.
The effect of inadequate data will be discussed further in Section 10.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8-10: Data
5.5 Prevention of errors
Integrity of systems
The key here is the avoidance of errors.
Data input should be thoroughly screened and checked. Data management in this regard
will include check digits, data field integrity checks, mandatory fields and error reports (fatal
and warning). It is important to maintain consistent practices over time and over different
sectors of the business.
Ways of minimising input errors should be considered. This may include the use of check
digits in file numbers, numeric minimum and maximum values, and so on.
Check digits
Policy numbers are often designed so that the last digit is a check digit: it is defined by a
mathematical formula based on the other digits so that the wrong entering of a policy
number is likely to result in the rejection of the transaction being processed rather than it
being processed to the wrong policy. The check digit might be alphabetical rather than
numeric to reduce to a minimum the probability of a wrong but valid number being entered.
The check digit could work by an algorithm that generates a final letter from the policy number. If
the final letter of the policy number does not tie in with the check digit then the policy number
has been input incorrectly.
Similar checks can be used for other data entered, such as agent numbers and postcodes.
The policy number is often used as a link between different databases, eg claims system,
policy issuance system, reinsurance system, etc.
A check could also be made that the postcode agrees with the address.
Minimum and maximum values
The maximum and minimum values could apply to the premium size, sum insured, policyholder’s
date of birth, street number etc.
These checks improve the overall data quality.
It will also be important to ensure that, although more than one department may be
responsible for use of raw data, only one department at a time is allowed access for
updating the information.
Culture and training
Senior management should emphasise to employees the importance of data systems.
Managers should ensure that employees receive adequate training before handling any data
and that further training is undertaken if any changes are made to the systems or
processes. Monitoring of staff and/or random checks may also help to ensure that high
standards are maintained.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 35
6 Data requirements for pricing
6.1 The importance of data
Setting premiums on the basis of inadequate or inaccurate data is dangerous. It is important,
therefore, for the insurer to consider carefully how it can make the best use of the available data.
Possible pricing errors
If the data is inadequate or inaccurate, false conclusions would be made, and premiums could be
set incorrectly. Examples of pricing errors are:
Premium rates too high. The company will lose market share through high lapse rates and
attracting too little new business. The company would make losses if it did not sell
enough business to recover its fixed costs.
Premium rates too low. Significant losses could be made since a large volume of business
might be sold on unprofitable rates.
Wrong premium structure. This could result in selection against the company, leading to
losses.
Missed opportunities. By having inadequate data, the company might miss opportunities
to make profits from particular niches of the market.
So we must have good data (ie accurate data and plenty of it) to be confident of conducting an
appropriate product pricing exercise. Using sophisticated pricing techniques on poor data is next
to useless.
Using data effectively
In setting premium rates, the aim is to estimate future claim experience from past claim
experience. It is therefore important that the past data to be used is reliable, credible and
relevant as a basis for estimates of the future.
Reliability is established by having a sufficiently large body of data to outweigh random variation
in past experience. To ensure relevance, we need to identify all possible differences between
past and future experience. Sources of difference may include:
inflation of claim amounts
changes in claim frequency
differences in policy conditions
differences in mix of business
changes in underwriting standards.
As far as possible, problems caused by differences in mix of business should be eliminated by
analysing the different risk groups separately.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8-10: Data
Dealing with differences in policy conditions needs special care, especially if we are basing our
analysis on external data.
6.2 Data required
Before carrying out any form of rating exercise, we must determine the information (both
quantitative and qualitative) that is relevant and establish its availability. We will need both
policy data and claims data and the means of relating them to each other in a consistent
manner.
Policy data
We need these to calculate the exposure within each risk group. For direct insurance and
facultative reinsurance, we need the following for each policy:
dates on cover
policy limits and excess points (current and historical)
company share of total risk (for London Market business)
The proportion of the total risk taken by a company is referred to as that company’s
signed line.
all other rating factor and exposure measure details
details of premiums charged, unless they can be calculated by reference to the
details on rating factors and exposure
The premiums charged are needed if we want to assess the profitability of previous
premium rates.
type of coverage and details of any exclusions
policy number to link to claims information.
We should be careful to identify where the rating factors for an individual policy have
changed over the period of an investigation.
Question
Explain why we should be careful to identify where rating factors have changed.
Solution
The aim is to calculate the exposure within each risk group. When the rating factors change, the
policy exposure will be in respect of a different risk group. The correct exposure for each risk
group is required to ensure correspondence between the claims and exposure.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 37
For treaty reinsurance pricing, we need information in addition to the above, such as:
type of reinsurance; eg proportional and non-proportional
basis of cover; eg claims made and losses occurring
treaty limits and excess points
details of aggregate limits and excess points, including number of reinstatements
and reinstatement terms
other treaty terms; eg hours clause, sunset clause and stability clause
reinsurer’s share of loss or limits; eg with respect to quota share treaties.
Note: for a treaty, the exposure for the reinsurer will be a specified part of the underlying
exposure. The data concerning rating factors may often be of poor quality if these details
are not provided to the reinsurer. The exposure may also change, as the underlying
policies expire and new underlying policies are written.
Claims data
This will include:
date of claim event
whether the claim is open, closed or reopened
date closed (if applicable)
date reported
dates and amounts of payments
payment type; eg indemnity cost, lawyers’ fees and adjustors’ fees
dates and estimates, if they exist, of amounts outstanding – these may include
estimates of dates of settlement
currency of payments and outstanding claim amounts
rating factor details
type of claim (eg in motor, bodily injury or property damage)
type of peril (eg in household, storm damage or burst pipes)
unique claim identifier
policy number / code to link to policy information.
As with the policy data, care must be taken where the rating factors for an individual policy have
changed over the period of investigation. The details should be as at the date of the accident or
event.
The data on the type of claim and the type of peril are useful if the insurer wants to get a
better understanding of what exactly is causing changes to claims experience. Also, the
peril data are necessary for costing policy options and changes to cover.
For example, we could assess by how much premiums would be reduced if we excluded theft
claims from motor insurance cover.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 38 SP8-10: Data
However, peril data is often unreliable. The reason for this is that it is very difficult to convince
staff and policyholders that this data is important and necessary. If those processing the data
believe that the data is of marginal use, then the data is less likely to be reliably stored.
The insurer also needs some means of relating the claims to the correct policies via policy
numbers and claims numbers. The use of check digits may help to ensure accurate
recording.
Check digits were discussed earlier.
We can split the above data into:
required data (claim reference number, date of loss, loss description and loss
amount)
useful data (open claim indicator, split of loss amounts between indemnity costs
and legal expenses, and date reported [useful if cover is on an occurrence basis,
required if on a claims-made basis], date settled, codified cause of loss, codified
type of loss, transactional development history for individual losses).
6.3 Database principles
We discussed the requirements for a good information system in Section 4.
To price the business, we should capture as much data as possible on the system since the
pricing methodology used in future may change or may become more advanced.
The data system should ensure that all entries made are of a consistent format. The system
could achieve this by placing error checks to highlight entries that are in an incorrect format
or by not permitting entries with invalid formats to be entered into the system.
To trace back premiums to rating factors and to see how changing the parameters impacts
the premium calculation, the system should store the different rating factors, the parameter
values, the calculated model price and the underwriter’s price.
Only authorised individuals should have permission, after consultation with other key team
members, to alter rating factors or other stored data. We should design the database so
that it gives warnings and confirmations before changes can be made to the rating factors
or other key data. This may help prevent accidental changes from being made.
6.4 The importance of history
It is important that the system keeps an accurate history of all policy and claims information
in order that we can make appropriate analyses and adjustments to rate the insured risks
appropriately. Analyses may include:
an analysis of claims development in order to project claims to ultimate
an experience rating exercise to help set premiums
an investigation into changes in the mix of business within a class.
We may make adjustments including incurred but not enough reported (IBNR) adjustments
to historical data and adjustments for trends, for example, inflation.
We discuss such analyses and adjustments in the rating methodologies chapters.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 39
7 Use of internal and external data
7.1 Internal data
An insurer that has been writing a class of business for some years should have a bank of
past experience from which to derive the base values.
An appropriate base period should be selected for which relevant data is available. The factors
that will be considered when selecting a base period are:
Volume: The period should be long enough to include sufficient volume of data to
be credible. Whether this means looking at one year, five years or ten
years will depend on the class of business (in particular, claim frequency
and tail of class).
Detail: For a class of business where the risks are very heterogeneous, a lot of
data (and hence a longer period) will be required so that we have
sufficient data for each of the different risk groups.
Trends: The period should be long enough to indicate trends in claim frequencies
and claim amounts.
Relevance: The further back we go into the past, the greater the danger that the
experience is less relevant for the future. Changes in policy conditions
over the period are one obvious problem.
Unknowns: To be most relevant to future experience, we ideally want the most recent
claims experience. However, this is also the experience with greatest
uncertainty because we will need to rely heavily upon estimates of
outstanding claims. This can be a real nuisance, especially for IBNR within
long-tailed classes.
Ideally, we will use the most recent year’s experience, as this is likely to represent the
current situation. However, we may have to adjust this for unsettled claims and IBNR
claims. It may also lack credibility if used alone. As an alternative, we can use older, more
complete years of experience, although this may be inappropriate if there have been
significant changes in the risk, cover, types of claims, and so on. We will need to allow for
past inflation.
In any event, we will need to examine the experience of each of the most recent years’ data
to detect any trends that there might be in the different elements of the experience.
7.2 External data
Where an insurer has insufficient or unsuitable internal data, we will need to use external
data. These may take the form of aggregate market statistics.
We could also look at competitor’s rates for a similar product.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 40 SP8-10: Data
Alternatively, we may obtain data from third parties, such as reinsurers or brokers. The
reinsurer, which is providing reinsurance cover for the product, may be prepared to supply
data and other information about the market.
For data obtained from external sources or from third parties, we should compare with the
corresponding details for the policies the insurer intends to write, as far as possible:
the terms of policy cover offered
levels of risk underwritten
the loadings included for expenses and profit in the premium.
The insurer should also be aware of socio-economic differences.
We should establish the time period of the data so that we can make an appropriate
allowance for inflation. It will be difficult to obtain much of this detail for many products.
Internal data is generally more likely to be relevant than external data. However, external data is
especially useful in some circumstances:
for a company writing a new or modified class of business
where the company’s own data is sparse (eg for a detailed rating group analysis)
to provide confirmation of results derived from internal data.
Question
List reasons why accurate past claims data might not be suitable for premium rating.
Solution
Accurate past claims data might not be appropriate for premium rating if future conditions are
expected to be different from those in the past. Examples of possible differences are:
past data is not from the class(es) we now wish to set premiums for
we wish to change the premium structure and the past data is not credible enough to use
the volume of past data is inadequate
there have been sudden changes in the court treatment of certain types of claim
policy conditions have changed.
Past data would be useful for some of these, but would need adjustment before it would be
suitable.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 41
8 Data grouping and reduction of heterogeneity
8.1 What is the aim of risk classification?
The insurer will analyse the in-force data for its classes of business at regular intervals. For the
purpose of such analyses the insurer will want to ensure that there is sufficient data so that the
results are credible, but not so much data that heterogeneity is a significant issue.
We separate the insured risks into different groups suitable for our investigation, bearing in
mind that we will not distinguish between risks in the same group. The main consideration
in data grouping (or risk classification) is to obtain homogeneous data. By reducing
heterogeneity within the data for a group of risks, we make the experience in each group
more stable and ensure that the risks within each group have similar characteristics, so that
we can use the data appropriately for projection purposes.
This is important when we monitor claims experience, review rating levels, and estimate
outstanding claim values. Any heterogeneity in data groups will distort the results because
the average risk within the group may change in the future. This may cause understating or
overstating of the reserves and hence understating or overstating of the premiums.
For example, in motor insurance, property damage and bodily injury claims should be treated
separately for reserving purposes. For pricing purposes they should also be treated separately in
case there is a change in the mix of business, from fully comprehensive to third party cover.
8.2 You must consider the level of detail required very carefully
We should be careful when we classify risks to ensure that there is sufficient detail for all
users. Management will perform many analyses, which may require separation of
departments or intermediaries in order to assess performance.
As part of the rating process, actuaries and underwriters will need to:
compare actual experience, by risk factor, with that included in the premium rates
calculate and apply revised premium rates to each risk
introduce new rating factors, from time to time.
Because of the last point, we should collect and record data that may become useful for
rating in the future, although not used for current rating factors. Until such data are
available, we cannot test statistically their appropriateness for rating. There is also the
danger that administrators will take insufficient care to keep accurate data that are not
currently used in determining premiums.
This process of comparing actual to expected, reviewing premium rates and refining the rating
structure is an example of the use of the actuarial control cycle.
As an example, many years ago the number of vehicle rating groups used in the UK for private
motor insurance was increased from 7 to 20. Some insurers were only holding the rating group
(not make and model) on their system. Consequently, they were at a disadvantage to those who
were storing vehicle make and model, since they could not fully analyse their data to allow for the
20 new groups.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 42 SP8-10: Data
A general point worth noting is that the higher the level of detail that you are holding, the better.
For example, it is easy to add together similar makes and models to get seven rating groups. It
would be impossible to disaggregate the data from rating group to give the make and model.
8.3 Examples of ways in which claim data could be grouped
Below, we give some examples of how we may group the claims data. Many of the items
listed are also risk or rating factors for the particular class.
Example – personal motor
We could, if the database were big enough, group personal motor claims under the
following categories:
claim type; eg property damage, bodily injury, fire and theft, and windscreen
size of claim; eg large and non-large
past claims experience; eg number of claims in the past year
no claims discount status
policyholder age
policyholder gender
vehicle group
vehicle age.
Example – household
We could, again if the database were big enough, group household claims as follows:
claim type; eg storm, subsidence, flood, theft and fire
size of claim
property type; eg detached, terraced and house / flat
number of bedrooms
location of property
age of property
past claims experience; eg number of claims in the past year
sum insured.
Other considerations
Personal lines classes tend to have standard policies and coverage. Hence it is usually
easier to group the claims into homogeneous groups, whilst ensuring sufficient volumes of
claims within each group.
Commercial lines business may include risks with tailor-made policies and coverage. In
comparison to personal lines business, it may be more difficult to group claims into
homogenous groups whilst ensuring sufficient claims volumes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 43
9 Pricing with limited data
For some classes, where there is little internal data available (for example, new lines of business
or high layer excess of loss reinsurance) specific techniques have to be used.
9.1 Use of other data
If the insurer’s own data contain an insufficient volume of claims, we may consider using its
data from similar lines of business or data from third parties. Third-party data may include
databases or publicly available data curves. We could adjust historical data – for example,
for claims inflation – and use them for rating purposes in order to increase the volume of
claims.
In summary, other data may include:
own data for a similar line of business
historical data (internal or external) – adjusted
external data from third parties.
9.2 Margins
One way of dealing with less than ideal data is to apply loadings to outputs from the rating
model. Alternatively, we could use assumptions that are more conservative than usual, or
we could apply larger loadings in the calculation of technical premium rates.
However, this may not be possible in a very competitive market.
9.3 Use of ILFs
If the low claims volume is due to the insurer writing higher-layer business, we could apply
increased limit factors (ILFs) or first loss curves to the premium rates calculated at a lower
layer with credible experience to estimate the higher-layer premiums.
Increased limit factors and first loss curves are explained elsewhere in the course.
9.4 Qualitative methods
For some types of business, we cannot determine appropriate premiums using quantitative
(numerical) data only, so we use a mixture of qualitative and quantitative information.
We may use this approach when quantitative data are:
incomplete (for example, because some data are held by a third party administrator)
inaccurate (for example, if risk codes or classifications have not been correctly
assigned)
sparse (that is, only a few claims available for analysis)
where risk perception plays an important element in price determination.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 44 SP8-10: Data
9.5 Other methods
We use alternative methods of pricing for some types of business to deal with the above issues.
Below are some examples of situations where we use more unusual methods of pricing:
London Market business, which can often comprise unique risks with limited historical
data.
We may need to perform pricing for London Market business quickly since underwriters
may need to accept and decline risks in a short timeframe. We use the underwriter’s
judgement for assessing all risks, especially the larger complex risks. The analyses
performed by actuaries are also considered. An actuary analyses larger risks individually
using a mixture of experience and exposure rating. Actuaries are likely to assess smaller
risks using an exposure rating model only.
Exposure rating is a method of calculating a premium that is based on external data or
benchmarks. The premium of each individual insured does not depend on the actual
claims experience of that insured, but on the amount of exposure that the insured brings
to the insurer. Experience for comparable risks is then used to calculate a premium rate.
Lines of business with more complex risk structures, such as extended warranty and
creditor insurance.
We may perform pricing by pooling risks and charging similar premium rates to a wide
range of policyholders.
Reinsurance contracts
There are usually less data available for pricing reinsurance than there are for pricing
direct business. For example, there could be limited information with respect to the
frequency and severity of extreme events. There may also be issues regarding the
credibility of models, especially since models may be recalibrated after the occurrence of
losses from new events.
Methods used for pricing reinsurance are discussed later in the course.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 45
10 The effect of inadequate data on pricing
When pricing, it is important that we monitor the progress of existing experience as it
develops, in order to assess the need for a review.
This again refers to the actuarial control cycle.
Thus, one effect of inadequate data is that we might make a wrong decision on the rate to
be charged.
When we carry out the actual projections of the new rating requirements, inadequate data
may distort the calculations. This may be due to errors in:
the apparent size of the business in force, and its value expressed in exposure units
and premium
the apparent claims experience and its trends, on which the projected future costs
are being based.
Moreover, the errors may distort the true distribution of the business between risk groups.
This could have consequences if we decided to adopt a differential rating increase for each
risk group. It could also affect the marketing strategy if certain risk groups appeared to be
more attractive risks than they actually were.
If we adopt a deficient set of rates as a result of faulty data, the insurer might:
suffer underwriting losses if rates are too low
suffer loss of market share if rates are too high
attract undesirable risks, causing deterioration in underwriting experience if rates
for such risks are too low.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 46 SP8-10: Data
11 Finally
11.1 Glossary items
Having studied this chapter, you should now read the following Glossary items:
Bordereau
Claim cohort
Credibility
CRESTA zones
Exposure rating
Product costing
Risk group.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 47
Chapter 10 Summary
Sources of data
General insurance companies may make use of both internal and external data sources.
Industry-wide data collection schemes allow insurers to compare their own experience with
industry experience. Relying on industry-wide data, when available, has several problems with
its use, for example: lack of detail and flexibility, differences in policies sold, different target
markets and sales methods.
Uses and users of data
Availability of a large quantity of good quality data is critical to a general insurance company. It
is also critical for actuaries working in general insurance. Actuaries need data mainly to help
make premium rating and reserving decisions.
Ideally, all data in a general insurance company should be controlled through one single
integrated data system, although in practice this may not be possible. The actuary should be
involved in technical aspects of data collection and systems design.
Customer information will be used primarily to identify policyholders. However it may also be
used for cross-selling, relationship management, etc. Data protection is of paramount
importance regarding both personal and commercial customers.
The full development team for a computer system should include senior management,
accountants, underwriters, claims managers, marketing, investment, computing staff, risk
management staff, catastrophe modellers and reinsurers, as well as actuaries.
Quality and quantity of data
The quality and quantity of data varies between different insurance organisations, and, within
different organisations, between different classes of business. The key factors affecting the
quality and quantity of data are:
size and age of company
existence of legacy systems
integrity of data systems
management and staff
nature of the organisation
method of sale
class of business.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 48 SP8-10: Data
Establishing a good information system
The system should hold a large amount of detail from the policy and claim records.
Questions on the proposal and claim forms should be clear, unambiguous and objective. It is
necessary to capture key features relating to both:
premiums (including written amounts, payment times, premium adjustments,
commission, other deductions and cross-selling information)
claims (including the definition of a claim, estimated outstanding amounts, multiple
claim payments, reopened claims, claims handling expenses, reinsurance recoveries
and class-level adjustments).
The data to be recorded includes:
risk definition and details of cover
details of claim
status of record
control dates
relevant amounts and currencies (sums insured, premiums, etc)
administrative details.
A history of records should be held (ideally) indefinitely. A balance will need to be struck
between the amount (and level of detail) of data held and the cost of the data system.
Errors, omissions and distortions in claims data
There are a large number of potential errors and distortions that must be overcome to allow
accurate analysis of the data. These include: wrong policy or claim number, wrong risk
details, wrong dates, wrong claim types, claims inflation, changes in procedures, case
estimates, delays, large claims and return premiums.
Errors can be avoided through appropriate use of check digits, data field integrity checks
(eg minimum and maximum values), mandatory fields, error reports and the training of staff.
Data requirements for pricing
To price policies appropriately the company needs data that is reliable and relevant. Policy
and claim data is needed, along with additional data to allow adjustments and loadings to be
decided. Treaty reinsurance pricing will require additional information to that needed for
direct insurance and facultative reinsurance.
As much data as possible should be captured on the system since the pricing methodology
used may change in the future.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 49
Internal and external data
In order to be ideal, internal data should be credible, relevant and in appropriate detail. The
latest three to five years’ worth of data may be used in order to achieve these requirements
and so that trends can be ascertained.
External data (eg from reinsurers) should be used to supplement internal data (or may be
used if the insurer has no internal data of its own). The insurer will usually need to make
adjustments to such external data to make it relevant.
Where data is limited, other rating techniques must be used, eg using ILFs.
Data grouping
Data should be grouped into homogeneous cells, but consideration should also be given to
ensuring that there is enough data in each cell for it to be credible enough for all users.
The effect of inadequate data on pricing
If the premium rates calculated from the data are incorrect, this could lead to unprofitable or
uncompetitive rates, or anti-selection.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 50 SP8-10: Data
The practice questions start on the next page so that you can
keep the chapter summaries together for revision purposes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 51
Chapter 10 Practice Questions
10.1 List the factors affecting the number of rating factors selected when modelling experience for
pricing purposes.
10.2 Explain why it is very important to reduce heterogeneity in data for premium rating purposes.
10.3 State the factors limiting the usefulness of industry-wide data.
10.4 List the controls an insurance company might implement to ensure that policyholders’ personal
data is protected.
10.5 Describe the problems that might prevent an ideal data system being maintained.
10.6 State the main reasons why different insurance companies are likely to have a different quality of
data.
10.7 Explain why the policy and claims data for a commercial fire account may not be fully captured in
an automated system.
10.8 List the steps that could be taken to ensure that an insurance company’s policy data is accurate.
10.9 (i) State the issues that data protection laws might cover. [4]
Exam style
(ii) Suggest the possible consequences to an insurance company of contravening such
laws. [3]
[Total 7]
10.10 A new general insurance company is being set up to specialise in private motor insurance.
Exam style
List the data you would expect to see held on the individual policy files, explaining why the data
would be maintained. [8]
10.11 You have taken over responsibility for a poorly designed and administered claims database. State
Exam style
the types of errors or distortions that you may find in that database, and give examples of how
they might have arisen. [10]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 52 SP8-10: Data
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 53
Chapter 10 Solutions
10.1 Factors affecting the number of rating factors include:
● the exact purpose of the exercise, eg actually setting prices, repricing, or comparing prices
with competitors’ prices
● the number of rating factors currently being used in the rating
● the number of rating factors used for pricing by competitors
● the capacity of the model being used
● the time available to perform the investigation
● IT (or other) restrictions on how many rating factors can be incorporated into rating
algorithms
● the quantity of data available
● the level of detail of the data available
● the judgement applied by the modeller
● sales channel (may affect the level of complexity required)
● level of competition in the market for the class of business being modelled
● adjustments made to data either in cleaning, trending or developing.
● legislative restrictions (eg Treating Customers Fairly)
10.2 If heterogeneity exists in the data, then the premium rates set for each group will be an average
of premium rates for each group, rather than an exact rate for each risk.
This could lead to the company setting rates that are too low for some risk groups (so that the
company would make losses) …
… and too high for others (so that they might be uncompetitive).
On average, premium rates may be acceptable, but the portfolio will be more sensitive to the mix
of business written.
10.3 The main problem is the potential for distortions within the data (heterogeneity).
The data supplied by different companies may not be directly comparable because:
● it relates to different socio-economic or geographical areas of the market
● policy conditions may differ
● other practices may differ, eg underwriting, claims settlement
● the nature of the data stored may differ
● the coding used for the risk factors might vary.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 54 SP8-10: Data
Other potential problems are:
● data usually less detailed and less flexible than that available internally to a company
● often more out of date than internal data
● quality may be suspect if some contributors have poor quality data systems or supply
incorrect information
● not all companies contribute.
10.4 Controls include:
● regular training of staff on:
– data protection regulation
– procedures relating to handling data
– consequences of breaching data protection rules
● employing specialists for roles relating to:
– data gathering
– data processing
– data use
● limiting the use of certain items of data to specified people through password protection
● providing guidelines to third parties (eg consultancies) that have access to the data, eg:
– on use of the data
– requirement to destroy data after use
● employing a compliance department, that will monitor data protection legislation
● following rules on storage and transmission of data
● allowing the subject access to the data and then the right to have it corrected
● monitoring of data handling procedures
10.5 Problems might include:
● age – over time, the system will gradually become out-of-date
● mergers and acquisitions could lead to the existence of legacy systems …
… or data being migrated on to one of the systems, leading to potentially empty data
fields
● new rating factors being added, leading to potentially empty data fields for historical data
● a reorganisation of class structures, with the insurer being unable to assemble the historical
data into the new classes
● human error, which is inevitable (eventually at least!)
● conflicts between users, which could lead to a lack of data for some users …
… and too much data for others, resulting in a slower and more unwieldy system.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 55
10.6 Biggest influences on data quality from different companies:
● age of company
● size of company
● age of computer and information system
● existence of legacy systems
● integrity of systems, eg automated checks
● quality of managers
● quality and training of staff
● nature of organisation, eg direct insurer vs reinsurer
● sales outlet(s) used
● classes of insurance sold
● type of insured, eg large commercial risks vs small personal risks
● product design
● rate of change in products
● simplicity and ease of use of computer systems.
10.7 Commercial fire insurance data may not be fully captured in an automated system because for
this class policies often vary a great deal in terms of:
● the cover provided
● the risk factors.
Claims data may also be variable and depend on subjective reports by specialists.
It may not be practical to have a sufficiently flexible system to deal with all the variations.
An automated system may deal with most ‘mainstream’ cases but, even then, data may not be
fully computerised. Special codes may be needed to refer to paper records for individual
non-standard cases.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 56 SP8-10: Data
10.8 Steps to try to ensure that an insurance company’s policy data is accurate (but you can never
ensure total accuracy):
● original form design: clear design that collects the correct information from policyholders
● original form design: clear and unambiguous questions
● data entry: should be typed straight from forms and input only once
● automatic validity checks on data entry
● use of unique policy numbers with check digits
● spot checks on sample data to trace any global errors
● spot checks that procedures are being correctly followed
● check key distributions of data for consistency
● subsequent monitoring and cross-checking
● checking totals are consistent with movements of policies
● individual checks on extreme data
● individual checks on empty fields
● ensure consistency with data from other sources, eg accounts
● give staff incentives to keep data accurate.
10.9 (i) Data protection laws
Data protection laws may cover:
● what data a company may hold on its customers … [½]
… both personal and commercial [½]
● what a company may use its data for [½]
● rights of access by a customer to its own personal data [½]
● rights of a customer to have incorrect data corrected [½]
● which parties are authorised to handle data at different stages, eg:
– data gathering stage [½]
– data processing stage [½]
– subsequently [½]
● guidelines for third parties (such as consultancies) to adhere to when dealing with data [½]
● requirements to destroy personal data after use [½]
● requirements on the security of data when it is being:
– stored [½]
– transferred to other parties. [½]
[Maximum 4]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 57
(ii) Consequences of contravening laws
There may be the following consequences:
● criminal prosecution of the responsible parties [½]
● legal actions against the company [½]
● fines to the company [½]
● requirements to compensate the customer [½]
● restrictions on the future activities of the company [½]
● more frequent monitoring of the company [½]
● negative publicity for the company (and the individuals involved) … [½]
… which could impact business volumes. [½]
[Maximum 3]
10.10 Administration data
Policy number to define policy uniquely and provide link with related files,
eg to claims file [½]
Name and address of policyholder for correspondence, etc [½]
Broker / branch / commission for accounting use, and also for management and
marketing information [½]
Dates on risk defines exposure period, and when renewal notices needed
[½]
Original year of issue for statistical and management information [½]
Endorsement data indicates a change to the policy; prior data needed so that
claim analyses are accurate [½]
Premiums (amounts / timing) needed for reserving, pricing and monitoring [½]
Commission to check that correct payments are made [½]
Rating data
The following data items will be needed so that premiums can be determined. This data will also
be necessary for subsequent claims experience or rating exercises. [½]
Cover comprehensive, third party fire and theft, third party only
[½]
Type of use SDP (ie ‘social, domestic or pleasure’) or business [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 58 SP8-10: Data
Details on driver(s) name
date of birth (if age is allowed as a rating factor)
sex (if allowed as a rating factor)
accidents
convictions
other policies held by principal driver
occupation [½ each, maximum 1½]
NCD for this policy No. years no claims, or protected NCD [½]
Excess compulsory, or voluntary [½]
Details on car make, model and engine capacity
vehicle rating group
area where kept
year of manufacture / registration
value
garaged / off-street parking / street parking
modifications [½ each, maximum 1½]
Claims data is not required here, but students should mention that they assume that the claims
data is stored in a separate file, with file references / links from the policy file. [1]
[Maximum 8]
10.11 Types of errors
Policy / claim numbers and linking
● wrong claim number – claim details allocated to wrong claim number initially [½]
● wrong claim number – claim details allocated to wrong claim number reopened [½]
● no policy number to link to [½]
● link to non-existent policy number [½]
● claim allocated to wrong policy number [½]
● reinsurance linking wrong [½]
Dates
● wrong claim date [½]
● wrong payment dates [½]
● wrong (or no) reported date [½]
● wrong processing date [½]
● reopened date not recorded [½]
● settled date not completed [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 59
Amounts
● case estimates not systematically updated [½]
● case estimates not consistently updated [½]
● case estimate history not recorded – gives current position only [½]
● incorrect amounts recorded [½]
● amounts in wrong currency [½]
● wrong exchange rates used [½]
● inconsistent treatment of nil claims [½]
● catastrophe claims missing [½]
● recoveries information missing [½]
● type of payment not recorded [½]
Header fields
● wrong insured name [½]
● wrong policy year [½]
● wrong branch [½]
Detail fields
● wrong risk details [½]
● wrong peril code [½]
● claim description wrong / insufficient detail [½]
● poor description of large claims [½]
● poor / missing catastrophe code [½]
● no claim status flag [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 60 SP8-10: Data
How errors may have arisen
Processing delays
● paper records not yet input [½]
● claim settled but not input on the system [½]
● reinsurance collected but not booked [½]
Control errors
● no use of check digits [½]
● no use of validity limits [½]
● no consistency checks [½]
● no use of compulsory fields [½]
● no warning messages [½]
Others
● poor training [½]
● high staff turnover [½]
● poor management / supervision [½]
● changes in claim handling processes [½]
● changes to basis for calculating case estimates [½]
[Maximum 10]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-10: Data Page 61
End of Part 2
What next?
1. Briefly review the key areas of Part 2 and/or re-read the summaries at the end of
Chapters 7 to 10.
2. Ensure you have attempted some of the Practice Questions at the end of each chapter in
Part 2. If you don’t have time to do them all, you could save the remainder for use as part
of your revision.
3. Attempt Assignment X2.
Time to consider …
… ‘learning and revision’ products
Face-to-face Tutorials – If you haven’t yet booked a tutorial, then maybe now is the time to
do so. Feedback on ActEd tutorials is extremely positive:
‘I find the face-to-face tutorials very worthwhile. The tutors are really
knowledgeable and the sessions are very beneficial.’
‘Forces me to study material and keep progressing. Without them there is
no/little incentive to make use of early study days.’
‘The ActEd tutorials are kept to the point and the tutors work you far
harder than you would be motivated to alone, plus they're on hand to
answer/explain any questions or difficult concepts. They are always happy
to do so in a variety of ways so I think by the end of the day most of the
class have grasped the main concepts.’
You can find lots more information in our Tuition Bulletin, which is available on our website at
www.ActEd.co.uk.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold
for the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is
owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a
subsidiary of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or
photocopy any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it
is not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through
the profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished
using the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 1
Aggregate claim distribution
models
Syllabus objectives
2.4 Describe the individual risk model and its applications in a general insurance
environment.
2.5 Describe the collective risk model and its applications in a general insurance
environment.
2.6 Analyse the derivation of the aggregate claim distribution for the collective risk
model, and its approximations using stochastic simulation.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
0 Introduction
This chapter extends the ideas relating to aggregate claim distributions. You may be able to
remember some of these ideas from your study of compound distributions in earlier subjects. For
example, you may remember questions there that involved the compound Poisson distribution.
We start this chapter by reminding you about the basic structure of the collective risk model and
the individual risk model, and give you some standard results relating to these models, with which
you should already be familiar.
We then look at various methods for calculating probabilities associated with the collective risk
model. The first method is a recursive formula, which allows us to calculate the probabilities
exactly. The other two methods are both approximations. The first of these assumes that the
distribution of the total claim amount S is normal, and therefore symmetric. The second assumes
that S has a translated gamma distribution, and is therefore positively skewed.
Finally, we look at methods for simulating values from compound distributions, and discuss the
likely level of error involved in using a simulation approach.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 3
1 The individual risk model
Under this model, we consider a portfolio consisting of a fixed number of risks. This model
has been covered in detail in Subject CS2. Here we give a high-level overview of the
assumptions underlying the individual risk model.
We will assume that:
risks are independent
claim amounts for risks are random variables, but are not (necessarily) identically
distributed
the number of risks does not change over time.
Under the individual risk model the total claim amount S payable during a specified period
in respect of a block of policies is:
S X1 X 2 X n
where X i is the claim amount payable during the period in respect of risk i and n is the
number of risks.
It is possible (and hopefully likely) that many of the risks will not give rise to claims at all. So many
of the Xi s may be zero.
In the individual risk model, we consider separately the claims arising from each individual risk
that makes up the portfolio.
For each risk the following assumptions are made:
the number of claims from the i th risk, Ni , is either 0 or 1
the probability of a claim from the i th risk is qi .
It follows that each Xi has a compound binomial distribution.
For all risks, j , that do not have a claim, X j 0 .
The individual risk model is very restrictive since a maximum of one claim from each risk is
allowed for in the model. Most general insurance policies do not have a restriction on the
number of claims that could be made in a policy year.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
2 The collective risk model
Under the collective risk model the total claim amount S payable during a specified period
in respect of a block of policies is:
S X1 X 2 X N
where X i is the claim amount payable during the period in respect of the i th claim and N
is the (random) number of claims during the period.
Note that the subscripts i now relate to claims, rather than risks as they did for the individual risk
model.
The model assumes that:
the claim amounts X i are independent and identically distributed
the X i s and N are independent of each other.
Note three important differences between this model and the individual risk model:
(1) The number of risks in the portfolio was specified in the individual risk model. In the
collective risk model, there is no need to specify this number, nor to assume that it
remains fixed over the period of insurance cover.
(2) The number of claims from each individual risk was restricted in the individual risk model.
There is no such restriction in the collective risk model.
(3) It was assumed that individual risks were independent in the individual risk model. In the
collective risk model it is individual claim amounts that are independent.
2.1 The mean and variance of S
To calculate the mean and variance of S , we use conditional expectation results,
conditional on the number of claims, N .
The mean
To find E (S ) , apply the identity:
E (S) E E (S | N ) E NE ( X ) E (N )E ( X )
That is, the expected aggregate claim amount is the product of the expected number of
claims and the expected individual claim amount.
The variance
To find Var(S) , apply the identity:
Var(S) E Var(S | N ) Var E (S | N )
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 5
We can find Var(S | N ) by using the fact that individual claim amounts are independent:
Var(S | N ) NVar( X )
Hence:
Var(S) E (N )Var( X ) E ( X ) Var(N )
2
2.2 Moment generating function (MGF)
We find the MGF of S using conditional expectations. By definition, MS (t ) E e tS , so:
MS (t ) E E (etS | N )
This equals:
N N
E[exp(t Xi )] E[ exp(tXi )]
i 1 i 1
N
which equals E e tX i for all i , since X i are independent random variables.
i 1
Also, since X i are identically distributed, they have a common MGF, M X (t ) , so that:
E etX X
M (t ) M X (t )
i N
Hence:
E etS | N M X (t )
N
and
MS (t ) E M X (t ) E e N log M X (t ) MN log M X (t ) .
N
The middle equality above holds because, for any real number a , we can write:
aN exp(N log(a)) (2.1)
To see that this is true, just takes logs of both sides of equation (2.1)!
Thus, we can express the MGF of S in terms of the MGFs of N and of X i .
2.3 Uses
This model is more useful than the individual risk model in general insurance. For example,
for a motor insurance portfolio, we could use a collective model with Poisson parameter
equal to the average number of claims in the preceding years, adjusted for the trend in the
number of policies.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
3 Exact calculation of G(x) for the collective risk model
3.1 Introduction
In the remainder of this chapter, we consider calculations of and approximations to G ( x ) ,
the distribution function of aggregate claims for the collective risk model.
This section first considers the exact calculation. The following two sections will consider the
approximations.
Recall from early subjects that the aggregate claim amount random variable is:
S X1 X2 XN
where N is the claim number random variable and Xi denotes the amount of the i th claim. The
distribution function of S is:
G( x ) P S x .
It is possible in some cases to find the distribution function G ( x ) very simply, for example if
all claims are for the same amount. However, the assumptions made in these cases will
usually be too restrictive for them to be of practical interest.
Question
In a particular portfolio, all claims are for a fixed amount of £10,000. There are 100 policies, and
the probability of a claim arising on any policy is 0.01, independently of the other policies.
Calculate the value of G(20,000) .
Solution
P(S 20,000) is equivalent to saying that the number of claims is 0, 1 or 2. But the claim number
distribution is Bin(100,0.01) . So:
100
P(N 2) 0.99100 100 0.9999 0.01 0.9998 0.012 0.9206
2
In Section 3.2 we derive a recursion formula for the calculation of G ( x ) . In Section 4 we
approximate G ( x ) by a normal distribution fitted by moments. In Section 5 we approximate
G ( x ) by a (translated) gamma distribution fitted by moments. Finally, in Section 6, we
approximate G ( x ) using Monte Carlo simulation.
In Section 3.2 and in Section 6, we assume that the distributions of claim numbers and of
claim amounts are known. In Sections 4 and 5 we assume that only the first two or three
moments of these distributions are known.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 7
3.2 A recursion formula for G(x)
Throughout this subsection we assume that the distribution of individual claim amounts,
F ( x ) , is a discrete distribution on the positive integers. This means that the possible
values for an individual claim are 1, 2, 3, … and hence that the possible values for the
aggregate claims are 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
This method works best when there are only a small number of possibilities for the individual
claim sizes. These claim sizes may well be measured in units of say £5,000, so that claims of 1, 2,
3, … actually correspond to £5,000, £10,000, £15,000, and so on.
On this assumption, the distribution function for individual claim amounts does not have a
density function (because each X i is a discrete random variable).
Discrete random variables have probability functions instead of density functions. An example of
a discrete random variable and its associated probability function is given below.
x 100 200 500 1,000
P(X x) 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.2
Recall that the probabilities must sum to 1.
We will use the following notation for the probability functions for individual claim amounts
and aggregate claim amounts, respectively:
fk P ( X i k ) k = 1, 2, 3, …
gk P (S k ) k = 0, 1, 2, …
If, as may well be the case, the distribution of individual claim amounts is not discrete on
the positive integers, we can always approximate it by a distribution that is.
We would do this by computer, dividing the area under the continuous distribution into
strips centred on the values 1, 2, 3, and so on. The areas of each strip become the
corresponding probabilities in the discrete distribution.
We say that the distribution has been discretised.
The problem of calculating G ( x ) on the above assumptions is equivalent to calculating gk
for k x . We assume that:
the distribution of claim numbers is known
the distribution of individual claim amounts (that is the fk s) is known.
Before proving, or even stating, this formula we need an assumption concerning the
distribution of N , the number of claims. Let us denote P (N r ) by pr and assume there
are numbers a and b such that:
b
pr a pr 1 for r = 1, 2, 3, … (3.1)
r
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
The binomial, Poisson and negative binomial distributions all satisfy assumption (3.1).
You might think that this is a rather arbitrary requirement to impose, but in fact any discrete
distribution defined on 0, 1, 2, … that satisfies assumption (3.1) must be Poisson, binomial or
negative binomial.
The formulae for gr are:
g 0 p0 (3.2)
r
gr (a bj / r ) f j gr j for r 1, 2, ... (3.3)
j 1
We know this result as Panjer’s recursion formula.
These formulae are given on page 17 of the Tables and we will prove these results in this chapter.
They can also be written in more familiar notation as follows:
(3.2) P S 0 P N 0
s
bx
(3.3) P S s a P X x P S s x for s 1, 2, ...
x 1 s
Equation (3.2) follows from the fact that the minimum claim size is one. The aggregate
claims will be zero if and only if no claims occur.
To prove equation (3.3), we will use the following three formulae: for n = 2, 3, …
n
E X 1 X i r r / n (3.4)
i 1
n r
E X 1 X i r j f j fr(n j 1)* / frn * (3.5)
i 1 j 1
r 1
pn frn * (a bj / r ) f j pn 1 fr(n j 1)* (3.6)
j 1
Before you worry about where these equations come from, note that frn* is just shorthand
notation for the probability:
frn* P X1 X2 Xn r .
Both equations (3.4) and (3.5) hold for any value of r for which frn * is not zero; equation
(3.6) holds for r 1, 2, ... , whether or not frn * is zero.
Note that P X1 X2 Xn r 0 for r n , since each Xi 1 .
We will now explain why equations (3.4) to (3.6) hold.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 9
Equation (3.4) follows by symmetry: X 1, X 2 , , X n are identically distributed so if their sum
is r , the expected value of any one of them must be r / n .
To see why equation (3.5) holds, note that f j fr(n j 1)* / frn * is the (conditional) probability that
n
X 1 equals j given that Xj equals r . (In equation (3.5) we assume that the probability
j 1
n n
that X j equals r , that is frn * , is not zero.) Given that Xj equals r , the value of X 1
j 1 j 1
cannot be greater than r . Hence, the right hand side of equation (3.5) is the sum, over each
value X 1 can take, of the value multiplied by the probability X 1 takes this value, conditional
n
on Xj equalling r . This then equals the left hand side of equation (3.5).
j 1
Using the more familiar probability notation, the argument is as follows. The conditional
expectation on the LHS of (3.5) is given by:
r
E X1X1 X2 Xn r j P X1 j X1 X2 Xn r
j 1
Now using the conditional probability formula:
P( A and B)
P A| B provided that P (B) 0
P(B)
we can write:
E X1X1 X2 Xn r
r P X1 j and X1 X2 Xn r
j
j 1 P X1 X2 Xn r
r P X1 j and X2 X3 Xn r j
j
j 1 P X1 X2 Xn r
r P X1 j P X2 X3 Xn r j
j by independence of the Xi
j 1 P X1 X2 Xn r
r
j f j fr(nj 1)* / frn*.
j 1
As the Core Reading remarked above, we are assuming that the probability term in the
denominator is non-zero.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
Now to derive equation (3.6). First of all note that (3.6) holds if frn * is zero since, in this case,
for any value of j 1, 2, ..., r , either f j or fr(n j 1)* , or both, must be zero. Hence, if frn * is
zero, both sides of equation (3.6) are zero.
All the terms f (with various subscripts and superscripts) denote probabilities and so are either
zero or positive. If there were a value of j for which both f j and fr(nj 1)* were positive, then their
product f j fr(nj 1)* would also be positive. Since frn* is the sum of all such products, it would
follow that frn* was positive. Therefore, the fact that frn* is zero means that there can be no
value j for which both f j and fr(nj 1)* are positive.
Now suppose that frn * is not zero. Then:
pn frn * = pn 1 (a b / n) frn * using equation (3.1)
n
b
pn1[a E ( X1 Xi r)] frn* substituting for n using equation (3.4)
r i 1
n
= pn 1 E a bX 1 / r X i r frn *
i 1
r
pn1afrn* pn1 (bj / r) f j fr(nj 1)* using equation (3.5)
j 1
r r
= pn 1 (a bj / r ) f j fr(n j 1)* since frn* f j fr(nj 1)*
j 1 j 1
r 1
= pn 1 (a bj / r ) f j fr(n j 1)* (since f0(n 1)* = 0).
j 1
Recall that f0(n1)* P X1 X2 Xn1 0 , and this must be zero since each X j 1 .
Finally, we can now derive equation (3.3).
That is, we can now establish the result:
r
gr (a bj / r) f j gr j for r 1, 2, ... (3.3)
j 1
For r = 1, 2, …
gr pn frn *
n 1
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 11
Writing this in probability notation, we have:
PS r P N n P X1 Xn r
n1
This result follows from the independence of the random variables N and X j .
Then splitting the sum into two parts, so that the first term in the summation is separate, we
have:
P S r P N 1 P X1 r P N n P X1 Xn r
n2
and setting m n 1 :
P S r P N 1 P X1 r P N m 1 P X1 Xm1 r
m1
So:
g r p1fr pn 1 fr(n 1)*
n 1
Now using assumption (3.1), we have:
p1 a b p0
and using result (3.6), we have:
r 1
pn1 fr(n1)* (a bj / r) f j pn frn*j for n 1, 2, ...
j 1
Substituting these results into the Core Reading equation above gives:
r 1
gr (a b) p0 fr (a bj / r ) f j pn frn*j
n 1 j 1
Now, using the fact that:
p0 P N 0 P S 0 g0
and changing the order of summation, we get:
r 1
gr (a b)g0 fr (a bj / r ) f j pn frn*j
j 1 n 1
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
But:
pn frn*j P N n P X1 Xn r j P S r j gr j
n1 n1
So:
r 1
gr (a b)g0 fr (a bj / r ) f j gr j
j 1
r
(a bj / r ) f j gr j
j 1
and this proves equation (3.3).
In the important special case where N has a Poisson distribution, a 0 and b .
For a Poisson distribution:
pr e r / r!
r 1 .
pr 1 e /(r 1)! r
Hence pr pr 1 and so a 0 and b .
r
The formulae therefore simplify to:
g0 e
r
gr j f j gr j
r j 1
In probability notation, the last formula is:
r
P(S r) j P(X j)P(S r j)
r j 1
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 13
The Poisson case
Question
Under a recent issue of Premium Bonds in the UK, the allocation of small prizes can be
approximated by assuming that, in each monthly draw, each bond has:
a probability of 15/320,000 of winning £50
a probability of 1/320,000 of winning £100.
Calculate the probability that, in any given month, a holder of 1,000 bonds will win:
(i) nothing
(ii) exactly £50
(iii) exactly £100
(iv) exactly £150
(v) at least £200.
You may assume that the Poisson distribution provides a reasonable approximation to the
distribution of the number of prizes won.
Solution
The holder’s total winnings during a month can be represented by:
S X1 X2 XN
where Xi denotes the amount of the i th win. The probability function of Xi is given by the set of
conditional probabilities (given that there is a win).
Since the probability that a given bond will win is 16 / 320,000 1 / 20,000 , this gives:
P(X 50) (15 / 320,000) / (1 / 20,000) 15 /16
P(X 100) (1 / 320,000) / (1 / 20,000) 1 /16
(This should be intuitive since, given that you’ve won a prize, you’re 15 times more likely to get £50
than £100.)
The Poisson parameter is the total ‘rate of winning’ for all the bonds in one month:
1,000 1 / 20,000 1,000 / 20,000 0.05
Using the formula for S 0 :
P(S 0) e e 0.05 0.951229
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
Using the recursive formula then gives:
50
P(S 50) P( X 50)P(S 0) 0.05 15 / 16 0.951229 0.044589
50
50 100
P(S 100) P( X 50)P(S 50) P( X 100)P(S 0) 0.004018
100 100
50 100
P(S 150) P( X 50)P(S 100) P( X 100)P(S 50) 0 0.000156
150 150
(Note that the term corresponding to X 150 is zero, since there are no £150 prizes.)
So: P(S 200) 1 0.951229 0.044589 0.004018 0.000156 0.000008
So the probabilities are:
(i) 95.1%
(ii) 4.5%
(iii) 0.4%
(iv) 0.02%
(v) 0.001%
The non-Poisson case
Sometimes, in exam questions on Panjer’s formula, the number of claims will not follow a Poisson
distribution. The following question deals with this situation.
Question
(i) Derive the recursive formulae for calculating the probabilities for the aggregate claims
distribution where the individual claim size distribution takes positive integer values and
the number of claims has a negative binomial distribution.
(ii) Individual claims from a portfolio are either for 1 unit or for 2 units with probabilities 0.4
and 0.6 respectively. The number of claims is negative binomial with parameters k 2
and p 0.4 . Determine the aggregate claim distribution up to P ( S 2) .
Solution
(i) We first need the values of a and b for the negative binomial distribution. Using the
‘type-2’ version given on page 9 of the Tables, we have:
k r 1 k r
r p q
pr / pr 1
k r 2 k r 1
r 1 p q
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 15
Expanding the binomial coefficients gives:
(k r 1)! (r 1)!(k 1)! k r 1 (k 1)q
pr / pr 1 q q q
r !(k 1)! (k r 2)! r r
So for the negative binomial distribution the values are a q and b (k 1)q .
So the recursive formulae are:
P(S 0) pk
s
x
P(S s) q 1 (k 1) s P(X x)P(S s x), s 1, 2,
x 1
(ii) Using the recursive formula we have just found with q 1 p 0.6 :
P(S 0) pk 0.42 0.16
1
P S 1 q 1 P( X 1) P(S 0)
1
0.6 2 0.4 0.16
0.0768
1 2
P(S 2) q 1 P( X 1) P(S 1) q 1 P( X 2) P(S 0)
2 2
3
0.6 0.4 0.0768 0.6 2 0.6 0.16
2
0.1428
4 The normal approximation to G(x)
The recursion formula for calculating G ( x ) discussed in Section 3.2 is a very useful tool,
but it does have some drawbacks. First of all it can still, in some applications, require a
considerable amount of computer time to calculate values for G ( x ) . Secondly, we cannot
use it unless we know the distributions of both N and X i , or at least can estimate them
fairly precisely.
In this section we suppose that all that is known about S , or can confidently be estimated,
are its mean and variance. Since many different distributions have the same mean and
variance, we cannot calculate G ( x ) from just this information. One way to approximate
G ( x ) in this situation is to assume S is approximately normally distributed.
More formally, let z be the distribution function of a normally distributed random
variable with mean 0 and variance 1, so that:
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
x
2
1 z
z exp dx
2
2
Now let and 2 denote the mean and variance of S . We assume in this section that S is
approximately normally distributed with mean and variance 2 so that for any x :
S x x
G ( x ) P (S x ) P
It is easy to obtain probability values for a normal distribution.
You’ll find them in your Tables on pages 160 and 161.
S is the sum of a random number of independent and identically distributed random
variables. The Central Limit Theorem suggests that a normal approximation may be
reasonable. The larger the (expected) value of N (the number of random variables being
summed), the better this approximation is expected to be.
‘Suggests’ is used here because the Central Limit Theorem really only applies to situations where
the number of terms in the sum is known. However, if the random variable N does not vary too
much from its expected value, we might expect the normal approximation to carry over.
Question
An insurance company has sold 10,000 personal accident insurance policies to men aged between
25 and 30. These policies provide a lump sum payment of £25,000 on death during the coming
year. The probability that any individual dies during the year is 0.0015 and the mortality of different
policyholders can be assumed to operate independently. Use a normal approximation to estimate
the probability that the insurance company’s total payout will fall in the range £300,001 to
£399,999. Compare your answer with the exact answer.
Solution
Using the formulae for the compound binomial distribution where the number of claims is
Bin(10000,0.0015) , the mean and variance of the total claim amount S are:
E (S) E (N)E ( X ) 10,000 0.0015 25,000 £375,000
var(S) E (N)var( X ) E ( X ) var(N)
2
E ( X ) var(N) since X is constant
2
25,0002 10,000 0.0015 1 0.0015
(£96,752)2
(These formulae are given in the Tables on page 16.)
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 17
So we can approximate the distribution of the aggregate claim amount using a normal distribution
with the same mean and variance ie S ~ N(375,000, 96,7522 ) approximately.
Since we are approximating a discrete distribution by a continuous one, we should use a continuity
correction. The aggregate claim amount goes up in steps of £25,000, and we want to include all
amounts between £325,000 and £375,000, inclusive. The continuity correction means that we take
the values half way between £300,001 and £325,000, and half way between £375,000 and
£399,999.
So:
P (300,001 S 399,999)
P [312,500 N(375,000, 96,7522 ) 387,500]
312,500 375,000 387,500 375,000
P N(0,1)
96,752 96,752
(0.1292) (0.6460)
0.551 0.259 0.292
The exact probability can be found by noting that the aggregate claim amount will be between
£300,001 and £399,999 if the number of deaths is 13, 14, or 15. Since the number of deaths has a
binomial distribution Bin(10,000, 0.0015) , the exact probability is:
15 10,000 10,000k
k
k
0.0015 (1 0.0015) 0.301
k 13
So, in this case, the normal distribution gives a good approximation.
Question
S has a compound Poisson distribution with Poisson parameter , and the claim size random
variable X has a Pareto distribution with parameters 4 and 3 . Assuming S is
approximately normally distributed, calculate the values of x such that:
(a) P(S x) 0.95
(b) P(S x) 0.99
for the two cases:
(i) 10
(ii) 50 .
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
Solution
For a Pareto distribution with parameters 4 and 3 , we have E ( X ) 1 and E X 2 3 .
(i) 10
If 10 , then:
E (S) 10E ( X ) 10
and:
var(S) 10E X 2 30
So:
x 10 x 10
P (S x) P [ N(10, 30) x ] P N(0,1)
30 30
(a) From the Tables we know that (1.645) 0.95 . So:
x 10
1.645
30
which gives x 19.01 .
(b) Since (2.326) 0.99 , the same procedure gives:
x 10
2.326
30
So x 22.74 .
(ii) 50
For 50 , exactly the same method can be used. The mean and variance of S are now 50 and
150, respectively.
x 50
(a) 1.645 x 70.15
150
x 50
(b) 2.326 x 78.49
150
We’ll have some comments to make on these results when we look at the translated gamma
distribution in the next section.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 19
5 The translated gamma approximation to G(x)
Now suppose that we know the first three moments of S , rather than just the first two, or
that we can estimate them with reasonable confidence. Another way we can approximate
the distribution of S is by a translated gamma distribution.
The ordinary gamma distribution takes values on the range (0,) . A translated gamma
distribution is the same except that it is shifted k units to the right, so that the range of values
becomes (k ,) . The number k can be positive or negative.
Let , 2 and denote the mean, variance and coefficient of skewness of S , respectively.
For the translated gamma approximation, we assume that S has approximately the same
distribution as the random variable k Y , where k is a constant and Y has a gamma
distribution with parameters and . We choose the parameters k , and so that
k Y has the same first three moments as S . Note that k Y is just a gamma random
variable, Y , whose values have been translated by a positive or negative amount k .
One reason why the translated gamma distribution generally gives a better fit than the
normal approximation is that a gamma distribution has positive skewness as does the
distribution of S in many practical situations.
In contrast, the normal distribution is of course symmetrical, and so cannot reflect any asymmetry
in the distribution of S .
Question
Explain why you would expect the distribution of S to have positive skewness.
Solution
S cannot take negative values, which constrains the left hand side of the distribution, whereas
the right hand side can extend a long way out if there are some large claims included, or if there is
a large number of claims.
The coefficient of skewness, , of a gamma distribution with parameters and is
2/ .
Question
Show that, if X ~ Gamma( , ) , then skew( X ) 2 / 3 .
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
Solution
Direct method
The k th moment of the Gamma( , ) distribution is:
1 x
E(X k ) x k x e dx
( )
0
1 ( k ) k k 1 x
( ) ( k )
k x x e dx
0
1 ( k )
k P [0 Gamma( k , ) ]
( )
1 ( k )
k
( )
since the probability that a gamma random variable takes a value between 0 and is 1.
So:
skew( X ) E ( X 3 ) 3E X 2 E ( X ) 2E ( X )
3
3
1 ( 3) 1 ( 2) 1 ( 1) 1 ( 1)
3 3 2 2
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
3
( 2)( 1) ( 1)
3 2
3 2
3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 3
3
2
3
Using CGFs
Recall that the cumulant generating function (CGF) of a random variable is defined as the natural
log of its moment generating function. We can calculate the mean, variance and skewness of a
random variable by evaluating the first, second and third derivative of its CGF at the point 0.
So we have:
K X (t) log MX (t) log(1 t / )
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 21
Differentiating this three times with respect to t , we get:
K (t) (1 t / )1
K (t) 2 (1 t / )2
2
K (t) 3 (1 t / )3
Setting t 0 , we get:
2
skew( X ) K (0) 3
From this result we can confirm that the coefficient of skewness of the gamma distribution is
2 / , since by definition the coefficient of skewness is given by:
skew( X ) 2 / 3
2/
var(X )3/2 [ / 2 ]3/2
By equating the coefficients of skewness, variances and means of S and k Y , we obtain
the following three formulae:
2/
2 /2
k /
from which we can calculate , and then k from the known values of , 2 and .
These results are given on page 12 of the Tables.
Alternatively, we can just use skewness, rather than coefficients of skewness for the third
equation. If we equate the means, variances and skewnesses of S and k Y , we will get the
same answers. However in this case you will need to solve two simultaneous equations to find
and .
The reason for approximating the distribution of S by a translated gamma distribution, or
indeed by a normal distribution is that it may be easier to obtain values for quantities such
as P a k Y b than for P a S b . We can readily obtain probabilities for gamma
distributions from many computer packages, including spreadsheet packages and specific
statistical packages.
For example, in Excel you can use the GAMMADIST ( ) function, and in R you can use the dgamma
and pgamma functions.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
An alternative approach is to use the chi-square distribution. We can use the connection
between a gamma distribution and a chi square distribution to calculate some translated gamma
probabilities. You may recall this technique from your previous studies.
If S has a translated gamma distribution with parameters , and k , then S k has a gamma
distribution with parameters and , and so 2 (S k ) has a 22 distribution.
Question
Calculate an approximate value, using a translated gamma distribution, for the probability that the
total claims in the question on page 15 exceed £600,000. Compare your answer with the exact
answer.
You are given that the skewness of a compound binomial random variable S is:
skew(S) nqm3 3nq2m2m1 2nq3m13
where n and q are the binomial parameters and mk E X k .
Solution
We have already found the mean and variance of S . The skewness is:
skew(S) nqm3 3nq2m2m1 2nq3m13
10,000 25,0003 0.0015(1 3 0.0015 2 0.00152 )
(£61,563)3
and the coefficient of skewness is:
61,5633
0.25762
96,7523
So, we can approximate the distribution of the aggregate claim amount using a translated gamma
distribution with the same mean, variance and coefficient of skewness. This requires:
2
k 375,000 , (96,752)2 and 0.25762
2
The third equation then gives:
2
2
60.27
0.25762
The middle equation then gives:
0.00008024
96752
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 23
The first equation then gives:
k 375,000 376,122
So S Gamma(60.27, 0.00008024, 376,122) approximately.
Using the relationship with the chi-square distribution, and using a continuity correction as before,
we get:
P (S 600,000) P [2 (S k ) 2 0.00008024(612,500 376,122)]
2
P ( 120.54 158.7)
120 degrees of freedom is beyond the end of the chi-square values given in the Tables. However, if
we extrapolate the column for 1% (the values of which are increasing by about 12 for every 10
degrees of freedom), we can estimate that the value for 120 DF would be just under 160. So, the
required probability is roughly 1%.
The exact probability can be found by noting that the aggregate claim amount will exceed £600,000
if there are more than 24 deaths. So, the exact probability is:
24 10,000
1 0.0015k (1 0.0015)10,000k 0.0111
k 0
k
(We worked this one out using a computer package.)
So, in this case, the translated gamma distribution gives a reasonable approximation.
Question
S has the compound Poisson distribution given in the question on page 17. For 10 and 50 ,
calculate the parameters of the translated gamma approximation to S and use the table of 2
values in the Tables to estimate the values of x such that:
(a) P(S x) 0.95
(b) P(S x) 0.99
Reconcile any differences in your answers compared with the ones you found using a normal
approximation.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
Solution
The first step is to calculate m3 , the third moment about zero of Xi . This is given by the formula:
4 34
E(X ) x3
3
dx
0 (3 x)5
This integral has the form of the PDF of a generalised Pareto distribution (ie the three-parameter
version on page 15 of the Tables) with parameters k 4 , 3 and 1 . But:
(5) 3x3
(1)(4) (3 x)5 dx 1
0
So that:
(1)(4)
E(X 3 ) 4 34 27
(5) 3
(i) 10
If 10 , the formulae for the parameters of the translated gamma distribution are:
2
270 30 k 10
3
2
Solving these, we obtain:
1.481 0.222 k 3.333
Since 2 2.962 3 , 2 (S k ) has approximately a 32 distribution. So:
P(S x) P 2 (S k ) 2 (x k )
P 32 0.444(x 3.333)
(a) From the Tables, P( 32 7.815) 0.95 , so that 0.444( x 3.333) 7.815 , which gives
x 20.93 .
(b) Similarly:
P( 32 11.34) 0.99
so that 0.444( x 3.333) 11.34 , or x 28.87 .
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 25
(ii) 50
If 50 , the formulae for the parameters of the translated gamma distribution are:
2
1350 150 k 50
3
2
Solving these, we obtain:
7.407 0.2222 k 16.6667
Since 2 14.81 15 , 2 (S k ) has approximately a 15
2
distribution. So:
P(S x) P 2 (S k ) 2 (x k )
P 15
2
0.4444(x 16.6667)
(a) From the Tables, P( 15
2
25.00) 0.95 , so that 0.4444( x 16.6667) 25.00 , which gives
x 72.92 .
(b) Similarly:
P( 15
2
30.58) 0.99
so that 0.4444(x 16.6667) 30.58 , or x 85.47 .
For the 5% points, the answers are pretty similar to those using the normal approximation. In the
1% point case, the translated gamma gives bigger answers. This is because the Central Limit
Theorem does not work well in the tails of the distribution. The actual distribution is skewed, and
the normal distribution does not take account of this.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
6 Using stochastic simulation to approximate the aggregate
distribution
Suppose that we know the distributions for X i and N . Then we can approximate the
aggregate distribution S using Monte-Carlo simulation as follows:
Simulate the number of claims, n , from the claim frequency distribution.
For each simulation of n , generate x1, x 2 , x 3 , , x n at random from fk , where fk is
the claim size distribution from the ground up.
Apply the policy terms and conditions to each x i , for example, limits and
deductibles.
Sum the x i s together.
Apply further policy terms and conditions as appropriate, for example aggregate
deductibles and reinstatements.
We often use discrete distributions to simulate the number of claims, including the Poisson
and negative binomial distributions. In many applications, we find the parameters by fitting
them to historical claim data that have been adjusted to be representative of the aggregate
claim experience S that we are trying to model. Adjustments include allowances for IBNR
and claim inflation or other factors related to the class of insurance being modelled.
Question
You are given the following information:
(1) The claim number distribution is Poisson(2) .
(2) The claim amount distribution is Pareto with parameters 5 and 1,000 .
(3) An excess of 50 applies to each individual claim.
(4) A set of values from a U(0,1) distribution:
0.27 0.82 0.44 0.66 0.81 0.88 0.51 0.02 0.66 0.98
(i) Use simulation to generate two values from the aggregate loss amount distribution for the
insurer, allowing for the excess. Use as many of the random numbers above as you need.
(ii) Repeat the process using the given random numbers to calculate the next simulated value
of the aggregate claim distribution.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 27
Solution
(i) Generating two values
First we need to generate a value for the number of claims. Using the distribution function method
from earlier subjects, we need the probabilities for a Poisson(2) distribution. These are:
e 2 21
P(0) e 2 0.1353 P(1) 0.2707
1!
e 2 22 e 2 23
P(2) 0.2707 P(3) 0.1804 and so on.
2! 3!
So if we generate values from a U(0,1) distribution, then we find the corresponding values from a
Poisson(2) distribution by assigning:
values between 0 and 0.1353 to the Poisson value zero
values between 0.1353 and 0.1353 + 0.2707 to the value 1
values between 0.1353 + 0.2707 and 0.1353 + 0.2707 + 0.2707 to the value 2
and so on.
Using the first random number, ie 0.27, we find that this corresponds to a Poisson value of 1. So we
assume that we have one claim.
To find the simulated claim amounts we invert the distribution function of the Pareto distribution:
F ( x) 1 u
x
1,000
x 1/
1,000
1 u 1 u 1/5
Substituting in u 0.82 , we find that we get a claim amount of 409.11. Applying the excess, we
have a net payment of 359.11.
(ii) Next simulated value
The next random number is 0.44. This corresponds to a number of claims equal to 2 from the
Poisson(2) distribution.
So, generating the two individual claim amounts, we have:
1,000
x 1/
1,000
1 u 1 u 1/5
1,000
1,000 240.81
(1 0.66)1/5
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
Similarly:
1,000
x 1/
1,000
1 u 1 u 1/5
1,000
1,000 393.96
(1 0.81)1/5
Applying the individual excesses, we have an aggregate claim amount of:
240.81 393.96 100 534.77 .
A wide range of distributions is available to model the ground-up claim size distribution. As
this distribution is often positively skewed, we most commonly use distributions with this
shape. These include Pareto, lognormal and gamma distributions.
It is common to parameterise the claim size distribution by using methods such as
Maximum Likelihood Estimation to fit parameters to historical claims adjusted to be
representative of S , the aggregate claim distribution being modelled. We should be careful
if the dataset is too small to be fully credible or if we believe the data is censored in some
way. A common consideration in this respect is how to fit large claims to the tail of the
distribution of the data, where there will typically be fewer data points.
We should repeat this process a large number of times to reach satisfactory convergence.
Simulation error will occur as we can only carry out a finite number of runs of the model.
Therefore the distribution produced by the simulation will necessarily differ from the true
underlying distribution but it can form a good approximation.
6.1 Reducing simulation error
We can reduce the simulation error by increasing the number of simulations. The number
required will depend on the variance of the underlying distributions and the purpose for
which the simulation is to be carried out. For example, we will require a larger number of
simulations when we estimate extreme percentiles than when we estimate the mean or less
extreme percentiles of the aggregate distribution. However, the number of simulations that
we can run may be limited by the available computer power and time constraints. In
general, as the model becomes more complex, the number of simulations required for
convergence increases, as does the time each simulation takes.
An alternative method to reduce the simulation error is to adjust the method used for
generating the realisations of the random variables. We can use low discrepancy points
(LDPs), also known as the Latin Hypercube, to do this.
Low discrepancy points attempt to generate the random numbers in a systematic fashion
such that the multi-dimensional space (hypercube) of uniform numbers is filled out with as
little discrepancy as possible given the number of iterations. This is a method particularly
useful in practical applications as the approach leads to a quicker convergence of the
approximated distribution to the true underlying distribution.
Latin Hypercube is an example of what is often called a stratified sampling technique.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 29
The general principle is to generate more targeted samples from across the range of the
distribution. The result is that we require fewer iterations in order to bring about
convergence.
Let’s see how we might apply this to taking samples for the Pareto distribution given in the
example above. Instead of just taking points at random from the distribution, we might proceed
as follows:
(1) Use the 10th, 20th, 30th, etc percentiles to subdivide the distribution into 10 ranges of
values, each of which contains one tenth of the probability distribution.
(2) Create a simulated sample value from each of these ranges, using the appropriate Pareto
model within the range.
This will ensure that we have a sample that reflects the shape of the Pareto distribution, but
which will create sample results that converge more quickly to the desired distribution.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
The chapter summary starts on the next page so that you can
keep all the chapter summaries together for revision purposes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 31
Chapter 11 Summary
Individual risk model
The individual risk model considers the payments made under each policy (risk) separately.
The risks are assumed to be independent and the number of risks is fixed over the period of
insurance cover. The aggregate claim random variable S may be written as
S X1 X2 Xn
where Xi denotes the claim amount under the j th risk and n denotes the number of risks.
The number of claims from the j th risk is either 0 or 1 and the probability of a claim arising
from the j th risk is qi . Hence each Xi has a compound binomial distribution.
Collective risk model
Under the collective risk model the total claim amount S payable during a specified period
in respect of a block of policies is:
S X1 X2 XN
where Xi is the claim amount payable during the period in respect of the i th claim and N
is the random number of claims during the period.
We assume that the claim amounts are identically distributed and that they are independent
from each other and from the number of claims.
The mean and variance of S under the collective risk model are given by:
E (S) E (N)E ( X ) var(S) E (N)var( X ) var(N)[E ( X )]2 .
The moment generating function of S under the collective risk model is given by:
MS (t) MN [log MX (t)] .
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
Recursive formula
If claim amounts take discrete values and there exist a and b such that:
b
P N n a P N n 1 , n 1, 2, ...
n
where N denotes the claim number random variable, then the following recursive formula
can be used to calculate the probability function of the aggregate claim amount random
variable S :
P(S 0) P(N 0)
s
bx
P(S s) a P( X x)P(S s x) , s 1, 2,
s
x 1
Normal approximation
If we know only the mean and variance of the random variables N and X , then we cannot
use the recursive formula. However, if E (N ) is large, then we can approximate probabilities
involving S assuming that it is normally distributed.
Translated gamma distribution
If we know the mean, variance and skewness of S , then we can approximate the
distribution of S using a translated gamma distribution. We assume that there exist k ,
and such that S k ~ Gamma( , ) . The values of k , and can be calculated using
the equations:
E (S) k
var(S) 2
2
skew(S) 3
In place of the third equation given above, we could use the fact that:
2
Coefficient of skewness
Gamma probabilities are not listed in the Tables. However, they can be calculated using a
computer package or by using the relationship between the gamma and chi-squared
distributions:
Y ~ Gamma , 2 Y ~ 22
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 33
Stochastic simulation
Simulation can also be used to approximate aggregate claims distributions.
Although simulation error occurs due to the finite number of runs of a model, we can reduce
this either by performing more simulations, or by using a Latin Hypercube approach.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
The practice questions start on the next page so that you can
keep all the chapter summaries together for revision purposes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 35
Chapter 11 Practice Questions
11.1 Find the parameters of the translated gamma distribution that would be used to approximate a
compound Poisson distribution with Poisson parameter 50 , where the individual claim sizes have
a lognormal distribution with parameters 6 and 2 1 .
11.2 The random variable S represents the annual aggregate claim amount from a risk. S has a
compound Poisson distribution with Poisson parameter 4 . Individual claim amounts are
assumed to be independent and identically distributed. The claim amount distribution is as
follows:
x 1 2 3 4
PX x 0.35 0.30 0.20 0.15
The insurer of this risk arranges individual excess of loss reinsurance with a retention limit of 2.
The random variable SR denotes the annual aggregate claim amount paid by the reinsurer.
Calculate P SR s for s 0,1, 2 .
11.3 S has a compound Poisson distribution with Poisson parameter 4. The individual claim amounts
are either 1, with probability 0.3, or 3, with probability 0.7. Calculate the probability that S 4 .
11.4 A general insurance actuary is modelling the size of individual claims X arising from shipping
Exam style
accidents.
From past data he has estimated the mean, variance and skewness of the individual claims
distribution to be $5m, ($3m)2 and ($4m)3 .
He has also assumed that claims arise as a Poisson process with a rate of 2 per annum.
(i) Calculate estimates of the mean, variance and skewness of the aggregate annual
claims S. [4]
(ii) The actuary wishes to approximate the aggregate claims distribution by assuming that
S a
has a chi square distribution with n degrees of freedom, for some constants a , b
b
and n .
(a) Find appropriate values for the parameters a , b and n .
(b) Hence estimate the probability that the insurer will experience total losses on its
shipping portfolio exceeding $30m in any given year. [6]
You are given that the mean, variance and skewness of the n distribution are n , 2 n and 8n ,
2
respectively.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
(iii) The actuary has also applied the method described in (ii) to two other types of claims. For
these, the estimated values of n (based on similar volumes of past data) were found to
be 2 and 50. State briefly what this tells you about the loss distributions in these cases. [2]
[Total 12]
11.5 An insurer has a portfolio that contains policies of two different types, Type I and Type II. The
Exam style
characteristics of the claims (in £000s) arising from these policies are as follows:
The number of claims arising from Type I policies has a Poisson distribution with parameter 5.
The claim amounts have a Gamma(15,2) distribution.
The number of claims arising from Type II policies has a Poisson distribution with parameter 10.
The claim amounts have a Gamma(20,4) distribution.
(i) Assuming independence between claim amounts and claim numbers, find the mean,
variance and third central moment of the distribution of the aggregate claims from this
portfolio. State any assumptions that you make. [7]
(ii) Determine the parameters of the translated gamma distribution that would be used to
find an approximation to this claim distribution, and estimate the aggregate claim amount
that will be exceeded with probability 2.5%. [6]
[Total 13]
11.6 The number of claims per year on an individual policy is negative binomial with parameters k 2
Exam style
and p 0.3 . The individual claim sizes are lognormally distributed with parameters 5 and
2 . You may assume that claim frequency and claim severity are independent. Find the mean
and variance of the risk premium. [3]
11.7 The random variable S has a compound Poisson distribution with Poisson parameter 45. The
Exam style
individual claim amounts are exponentially distributed with exponential parameter 0.002 .
(i) Derive a formula involving m! for the mth moment about zero of a random variable with
an exponential distribution with parameter . [3]
(ii) A normal distribution is used to approximate the aggregate claim distribution.
(a) Estimate the aggregate claim amount that will be exceeded with probability one
in twenty.
(b) Estimate the aggregate claim amount that will be exceeded with probability one
in a hundred. [5]
(iii) A translated gamma distribution is used to approximate the aggregate claim distribution.
(a) Estimate the parameters of the approximation that would be used.
(b) Find the corresponding figures for the 95% and 99% points of the translated
gamma approximation.
(c) Comment on your answers. [8]
[Total 16]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 37
Chapter 11 Solutions
11.1 First we find the moments (mean, variance and skewness) of the compound Poisson distribution:
m1 50 e ½ 50 e6.5
2
m2 50 e2 2 50 e14
2
m3 50 e3 4½ 50 e22.5
2
So, equating these expressions to the formulae for the moments of the translated gamma
distribution, we have:
2
k 50 e6.5 50e14 50e22.5
2
3
Solving these equations, we obtain:
9.9574 4.069 10 4 k 8,788
and these are the parameter values we require.
11.2 Let Z denote the amount paid by the reinsurer on an individual claim. Then:
0 with probability 0.65
Z 1 with probability 0.20
2 with probability 0.15
and P Z 0 0.35
Now let W Z | Z 0 . The distribution of W is:
w 1 2
P W w 4 3
7 7
Furthermore, if NR denotes the number of annual claims involving the reinsurer, then NR is
Poisson with parameter 4 0.35 1.4
So:
P SR 0 P NR 0 e 1.4 0.24660
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 38 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
We can calculate the other probabilities using the recursive formula (with a 0 and b 1.4 ):
s
1.4w
P SR s P W w P S s w , s 1, 2, ...
w 1 s
This gives:
1.4
P SR 1 P W 1 P SR 0
1
1.4 74 e 1.4 0.8e 1.4 0.19728
Also:
2
1.4w
P SR 2 P W w P SR 2 w
w 1 2
0.7P W 1 P SR 1 1.4P W 2 P SR 0
0.7 74 0.8e 1.4 1.4 73 e 1.4
0.92e 1.4 0.22687
Alternatively, you could work from first principles as follows:
P SR 0 P N 0 P N 1, claim amount is 1 or 2
P N 2, both claim amounts are 1 or 2
P N 3, all claim amounts are 1 or 2
where N denotes the number of claims from the risk in a year, which is a Poi (4) random variable.
So:
42 e 4 4 3 e 4
P SR 0 e 4 4e 4 0.65
2!
0.652
3!
0.653
4 0.65
2
4 0.65
3
4
e 1 4 0.65
2! 3!
e 4 e 40.65
e 1.4 0.24660
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 39
Also:
P SR 1 P N 1, claim amount is 3
P N 2, one claim amount is 3 and the other is 1 or 2
P N 3, one claim amount is 3 and the others are 1 or 2
Using the given claim number and claim size distributions, we obtain:
42 e 4 2
P SR 1 4e 4 0.2
2!
0.2 0.65
1
43 e 4 3
0.2 0.652
3! 1
42 0.652
0.8e 4 1 4 0.65
2!
0.8e 4e40.65
0.8e 1.4 0.19728
Finally:
P SR 2 P N 1, claim amount is 4
P N 2, one claim amount is 4 and the other is 1 or 2
P N 2, both claim amounts are 3
P N 3, one claim amount is 4 and the others are 1 or 2
P N 3, two claim amounts are 3 and the other is 1 or 2
P N 4, one claim amount is 4 and the others are 1 or 2
P N 4, two claim amounts are 3 and the others are 1 or 2
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 40 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
Using the given distributions we have:
42 e 4 2
P SR 2 4e 4 0.15 0.15 0.65 0.22
2! 1
43 e 4 3 2 3 2
0.15 0.65 0.2 0.65
3! 1 2
4 4 e 4 4 3 4 2 2
0.15 0.65 0.2 0.65
4! 1 2
Summing the first terms in the square brackets:
42 e 4 2 43 e 4 3
4e 4 0.15 0.15 0.65 0.15 0.652
2! 1 3! 1
4 0.65
2
4
0.6e 1 4 0.65
2!
0.6e 4e40.65
0.6e 1.4
Summing the second terms in the square brackets:
4 2 e 4 4 3 e 4 3
0.22 0.22 0.65
2! 3! 2
4 4 e 4 4
0.22 0.652
4! 2
1 4 3! 4
2
4!
0.82 e 4 0.65 0.652
2! 3! 2!1! 4! 2!2!
0.82 e 4 4 0.65 2
1 4 0.65
2! 2!
0.32e 4e40.65
0.32e 1.4
So:
P SR 2 0.6e 1.4 0.32e 1.4 0.92e 1.4 0.22687
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 41
11.3 Using the recursive formula:
pS (0) e 4
4 4
pS (1) [ pX (1)pS (0)] [0.3 e 4 ] 1.2 e 4
1 1
4
pS (2) [ p X (1)pS (1)] 0.72 e 4
2
4
pS (3) [ p X (1)pS (2) 3p X (3)pS (0)] 3.088 e 4
3
4
pS (4) [ p X (1)pS (3) 3p X (3)pS (1)] 3.4464 e 4 0.0631
4
(Alternatively, you could calculate the probability directly by summing the different possibilities.)
11.4 (i) The mean, variance and skewness of the aggregate annual claims are (working in millions
of dollars):
E(S) E(X) 2 5 10 [1]
var(S) E ( X 2 ) 2 [32 52 ] 2 34 68 [1]
Skew(S) E ( X 3 ) 2 [43 3 5 34 2 53 ] 648 [2]
[Total 4]
Sa
(ii)(a) We are assuming that ~ n2 . If we equate the first three moments, we get the
b
simultaneous equations:
E (S) a 10 a
n ie n Equation (1)
b b
var(S) 68
2
2n ie 2n Equation (2)
b b2
Skew(S) 648
3
8n ie 8n Equation (3)
b b3
[2]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 42 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
By dividing Equation (2) by Equation (3), we get:
b 2.382 n 5.991 6 [1]
Equation (1) then tells us that:
a 4.272 [1]
S a S 4.272
(ii)(b) We are assuming that ~ n2 ie ~ 62 .
b 2.382
So the required probability is:
S 4.272
P(S 30) P 14.39 P( 62 14.39) 0.025 [2]
2.382
[Total 6]
(iii) The n2 distribution is the same as Gamma ( 12 n, 12 ) . When n 2 , this is just an
exponential distribution, indicating that the individual claims distribution is very skew.
For large values of n , such as n 50 , the gamma distribution (being the sum of n
independent exponentials) approximates to a normal distribution, indicating that the
individual claims distribution is almost symmetrical. [2]
11.5 (i) Moments
The aggregate claims arising from each type of policy have a compound Poisson distribution. Let
S1 be the aggregate claims arising from Type I policies, and let S2 be the aggregate claims arising
from Type II policies.
S1 X1 X2 XN where N is Poisson(5) and X is Gamma(15,2) .
S2 Y1 Y2 YM where M is Poisson(10) and Y is Gamma(20,4) .
The aggregate claim amount from all policies is S S1 S2 , which will have a compound Poisson
distribution with Poisson parameter 15. [½]
From the Tables, the mean, second and third non-central moment for the gamma distribution are
given by:
( 1) ( 1)( 2)
E(X ) and E ( X 2 ) and E ( X 3 ) .
2
3
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 43
So for S1 we have:
15
E (S1 ) E ( X ) 5 37.5
2
15 16
var(S1 ) E ( X 2 ) 5 300
22
15 16 17
skew(S1 ) E ( X 3 ) 5 2,550 [2]
23
where skew(S1 ) denotes the third central moment of S1 . Similarly, for S2 we have:
20
E (S2 ) E ( X ) 10 50
4
20 21
var(S2 ) E ( X 2 ) 10 262.5
42
20 21 22
skew(S2 ) E ( X 3 ) 10 1,443.75 [2]
43
If we assume that all the risks are independent, then the means, variances and skewnesses of S1
and S2 are additive, and we can now find the first three moments of S : [1 for assumptions]
E(S) E(S1 ) E(S2) 87.5
var(S) var(S1 ) var(S2 ) 562.5
skew(S) skew(S1 ) skew(S2 ) 3,993.75 [2]
So the mean, variance and third central moment of the aggregate claims distribution are £87,500,
(£23,717)2 and (£15,866)3 . [Maximum 7]
(ii) Parameters
To find the parameters of the translated gamma distribution, we need to equate means, variances
and skewnesses. The mean, variance and skewness of a translated gamma distribution with
parameters , and k are k / , / 2 and 2 / 3 respectively. So the equations are:
k / 87.5
/ 2 562.5
2 / 3 3,993.75 [1]
Solving these simultaneous equations, we find that 0.281690 , 44.634 and k 70.9507 .
So these are the parameter values we require. [1]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 44 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
We now need to find the value of such that:
P(S ) 0.025
This is equivalent to the following gamma distribution probability:
P Gamma(44.634, 0.281690) 70.9507 0.025 [1]
We now use the result that if X is Gamma( , ) , then 2 X is 22 . So the probability can be
written:
P 2 Gamma(44.634,0.281690) 2 0.281690 ( 70.9507) 0.025
2
P( 89 2 0.28169( 70.9507)) 0.025 [1]
Using tables of the chi-square distribution (and using 90
2
as the closest tabulated function), we
find that the upper 2½% point is 118.1. So the equation for is:
2 0.28169( 70.7507) 118.1 [1]
Solving this, we find that 138.677 . So the aggregate claim amount that will be exceeded
with probability 0.025 is £139,000. [1]
[Total 6]
11.6 Denoting N as the number of claims, X as the individual claim size and PP as the pure risk
premium for the individual risk:
kq 2 0.7
E N 4.667 , [½]
p 0.3
kq 2 0.7
var N 2 15.556 , [½]
p 0.32
12 2 5 12 22
EX e e 1,096.63 and [½]
var X e2 2
2
2
e 1 8,028.54 . [½]
So:
E PP E N E X 5,118 , and [½]
var PP E N var X var N E 2 X 17,8752 . [½]
[Total 3]
11.7 (i) mth moment
The m th non-central moment of the Exp( ) distribution is:
E ( X m ) x m e x dx [1]
0
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models Page 45
Since the total probability for the Gamma( , ) distribution is 1, we know that:
1 x
( ) x e dx 1
0
Rearranging this gives:
1 x ( )
x e dx
[1]
0
Using this relationship with m 1 and , we find that:
(m 1) m!
E ( X m ) x me x dx m1
[1]
0 m
[Total 3]
(ii) Normal distribution
The mean and variance of the aggregate claim amounts are:
1
E (S) m1 45 22,500 [1]
0.002
2
and var(S) m2 45 22.5m (4,743)2 [1]
0.0022
If we approximate the aggregate claim amounts with a normal distribution with the same mean
and variance, we have that S is approximately N[22,500,(4,743)2 ] . [1]
S 22,500
So has an approximately N(0,1) distribution.
4,743
The upper 95% and 99% points of the N(0,1) distribution are 1.6449 and 2.3263
So the critical amounts using a normal approximation are:
(a) 95% point 22,500 1.6449 4,743 30,300 [1]
(b) 99% point 22,500 2.3263 4,743 33,500 [1]
[Total 5]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 46 SP8-11: Aggregate claim distribution models
(iii)(a) Parameters
The parameters , and k for the translated gamma distribution can be found by equating the
mean, variance and skewness (using the result in part (i)) of the aggregate claim amounts:
E (S ) k 22,500 [1]
var(S) 2 22.5m [1]
2 6
skew(S) 3 45 33,750m (3,232)3 [1]
0.0023
Solving the last two equations, we find that:
22.5m
2 0.001333 22.5m 2 40 [1]
33,750m
From the first equation, we then get:
40
k 22,500 7,500 [1]
0.001333
(iii)(b) 95% and 99% points
The critical amounts can be found using the result that 2 ( X k ) has a 22 distribution.
From the Tables, the upper 95% and 99% points of the 80
2
distribution are 101.9 and 112.3.
So the critical amounts using a translated gamma approximation are:
101.9
95% point 7,500 30,710 [1]
2 0.001333
112.3
and 99% point 7,500 34,610 [1]
2 0.001333
(iii)(c) Comment
The 95% point is similar using both approximations. However, the 99% is higher using the
translated gamma distribution. This is because the aggregate claims distribution is positively
skewed, with coefficient of skewness 3,2323 / 4,7433 0.32 . The translated gamma
distribution, which is also a skewed distribution, can give a better approximation in the upper tail
than the normal distribution, which is symmetrical. [1]
[Total 8]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 1
Rating methodologies and
bases
Syllabus objectives
3.1 Analyse the various components of a general insurance premium.
3.2 Describe the basic methodology used in rating general insurance business.
3.3 Suggest the various factors to consider when setting rates.
3.4 Evaluate appropriate rating bases for general insurance contracts, having regard to:
– return on capital
– underwriting considerations
– reinsurance considerations
– investment
– policy conditions such as self retention limits
– the renewal process
– expenses.
The above objectives are covered in part in this chapter.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
0 Introduction
An appropriate pricing model is critical to the long-term profitability and success of a
general insurance company.
There are many possible ways of calculating premiums. These range from a simple
approach, to sophisticated rating models dealing with many different parameters and
variables for each rating group.
The methodology that we use will depend on:
the class of business being priced
the availability of relevant data, and
the market in which the company is operating.
0.1 Categories of pricing
In 2005 the General Insurance Board of the UK IFoA established a working party to investigate
issues relating to the actuarial aspects of pricing general insurance business.
The General insurance premium Rating Issues working Party (GRIP) outlined five broad
categories of pricing:
Tariff – where the regulator has significant influence over the rates – for example, in
Germany.
This may be through the regulator setting the premium rates, or through ‘rate filing’
where insurance companies are required to provide details of their premium rates, and
may have to justify any changes in premium levels to the regulator. Rate filing is common
in the US.
Qualitative – where we cannot determine the ‘correct’ price purely by numerical
analysis and so we must take account of subjective factors.
This might be used where the numerical data is sparse, incomplete or inaccurate or where
subjective factors are important in determining the price.
Cost plus – where we set the price based on a statistically driven analysis, using the
expected cost of claims, appropriately loaded for expenses, profit and so on.
This is the approach we describe in detail in this chapter.
Distribution – where we set the price allowing for non-cost elements such as the
customer’s propensity to shop around. This occurs in markets where we manage
the pricing strategy across multiple distribution channels.
This approach could be seen as an extension of the cost plus approach, where we
additionally consider the price sensitivity of different customers. This may result in
charging different premiums according to the distribution channel used, with the aim of
maximising the insurer’s profits.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 3
Industrial – where we focus on operational efficiency and economies of scale.
Currently this is done only by the very large personal lines insurers who are
operating multiple brands across multiple channels, and possibly across many
countries.
Subject SP8 concentrates on the cost plus approach to pricing. However, some features of the
distribution approach are also considered; for example, Chapter 13 discusses practical
considerations such as profit optimisation.
If you are interested in the other approaches (particularly if you are studying Subject SA3), more
detail is available from:
the GRIP report, which is available from the Actuarial Profession (www.actuaries.org.uk)
the pricing wiki website that was established by the working party (wiki.ratemaking.org).
0.2 Purpose of this chapter
In this chapter, we will concentrate on the basic principles of deriving the risk premium and
adjustments made once we have calculated a theoretical risk premium.
The adjustments will include additions to the risk premium and explicit loadings to cover
other items.
Question
(i) Suggest what you think is allowed for within the pure risk premium.
(ii) Suggest what the ‘other items’ are that are covered by explicit loadings.
Solution
(i) The amount of premium required to cover the expected claim amounts only.
(ii) The explicit loadings cover the (net) cost of reinsurance, expenses (including commission),
the cost of capital (ie margin for profit), and investment income.
(There are other considerations to be made, such as the impact of competition, in determining the
premium to be charged, but these are usually not allowed for through explicit loadings.)
Section 1 of this chapter gives an overview of the cost plus approach, including the steps involved
in determining the pure risk premium.
Section 2 covers the data used in pricing.
Sections 3 to 5 cover, in much more detail, the process of deriving the pure risk premium.
Section 6 then describes the various loadings that are added to arrive at the technical (or office)
premium.
The following chapter will discuss rating factors and practical considerations.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
We consider the principles of rating based on the cost plus approach and pricing for
relativities between different policies.
We will also consider some practical issues.
Pricing for the relativities between different policies is all about deciding which rating factors
should be used and what effect these should have on the policyholder’s premium. This is covered
in Chapter 13, as are practical issues.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 5
1 Cost plus pricing overview
1.1 Components of the premium
A technical premium is one that reflects all of the expected costs and profits arising from
the policy based on technical analysis. It consists of the following elements:
Risk premium
the pure risk rate
including a loading for catastrophe and/or large loss claims
Office premium
a loading for the cost of reinsurance
a loading for expenses including commission
a charge to reflect the cost of capital or volatility
investment income
Any allowance for investment income would normally act to reduce the premium, ie it is a
‘negative’ loading.
The capital charge to reflect the cost of capital is sometimes referred to as a profit loading.
Loadings for tax and contingencies might also form part of the office premium. The loading for
contingencies contributes to the insurer’s capital whereas the profit loading contributes to the
servicing of the insurer’s capital, ie achieving the required return on capital. Many practitioners
combine the profit and contingency loadings because normally there would be a high profit
loading for a risky line of business.
Other considerations
rating factors
practical considerations concerning policy conditions, underwriting process,
competition and so on.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
1.2 Steps involved in calculating the pure risk premium
The pure risk premium is the amount of premium required to cover the expected cost of
claims. We may express it as a nominal amount or as a rate per unit of exposure.
Deriving the expected claims cost is often the major part of the work in deriving the risk
premium. In establishing the overall level of claims costs, we would use an estimation or
modelling process such as are used for reserving purposes.
We have to:
collect the relevant data
adjust and group the data
select the most appropriate rating model or estimation process for the specific case
analyse the data
set the assumptions required by the model or process
test the assumptions for goodness of fit or likelihood probability
run the model or process to arrive at an estimate of future claims costs
perform sensitivity and scenario testing, or apply other methods, to check the
validity of the estimate.
There is a variety of statistical approaches that we can use to derive a risk premium. We will
discuss these in later chapters.
For example:
The frequency-severity approach, where statistical distributions are fitted to the
frequency and severity of claims separately. These are then combined to give risk
premium. This approach is described in Chapter 14.
The simple burning cost approach to premium rating, using aggregate claims data, which
is also described in Chapter 14.
The ‘original loss curve’ approach to premium rating, which is covered in Chapter 15.
Generalised Linear Models and multivariate models can be used to rate premiums. These
are described in Chapters 16 and 17.
The detail of how to calculate the pure risk premium under each specific approach will be
discussed in the relevant chapters. This chapter covers general points that apply to any approach.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 7
2 Data to collect for pricing
2.1 Data requirements
To price policies appropriately the company needs data that is reliable and relevant. Policy data is
needed to calculate exposure and identify characteristics of each risk group. Claims data is
required to estimate the ultimate cost of claims. In particular, data by type of peril is required to
cost policy options and make further adjustments (eg to allow for atypical events or changes in
cover). Some data items are required (eg claim reference, loss date, description and amount) and
others are useful.
Data requirements for pricing were discussed in detail in Section 6 of Chapter 10. It would be a
good idea to go back and review Section 6 of Chapter 10 at this stage.
2.2 Choice of internal or external data
Internal data, where available, is generally more appropriate than external data. However,
market claims data, publicly available information (eg areas prone to flood) and competitors’
rates are also invaluable. Reinsurers may help provide this.
This was discussed in detail in Section 7 of Chapter 10. It would be a good idea to go back and
review Section 7 of Chapter 10 at this stage.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
3 Subdivision of data
Where possible and statistically relevant, we split the data into risk cells; that is, we
subdivide the total available data into homogeneous subsets. This will have the following
outcomes:
It will enable us to understand better the risks being handled and will help us to
avoid unintentional cross-subsidies.
Hence, profitability will not depend on a particular cross section of risks, and so the
company will be less exposed to changes in the business mix. However, we will need
sufficient data in each risk cell for credible analysis.
It may be necessary to gain market acceptance when launching particular risk
divisions.
For example:
the market may not like or accept the use of genetic testing as an additional rating factor
regulation may allow only a limited number of rating factors to be used (as is the case in
South Africa).
The way in which we express premiums per risk should accommodate distributors’
(sales channels / brokers) interests.
As a general rule, we analyse the data with as many subdivisions as possible and
regroup with care when calculating premiums.
In the analysis, we should adjust subdivided data to allow for changes in insurer’s practice
or relevance of past data.
We should also assess the validity of other risk groupings by stochastic analyses to test for
differential results.
Question
Explain the meaning of the last sentence of Core Reading.
Solution
We need to investigate whether the use of alternative rating factors would improve the risk
classification and create more homogenous risk cells. Stochastic modelling using generalised
linear models might be used.
Note that more detail is given about this topic later in the course.
We should adjust the theory for practicalities, including the availability of information and
the applicability of systems.
If we can’t get the data in a reliable easy-to-use format, we may need to compromise our
calculations.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 9
The claims data included in the subdivisions must be recent. It should include up-to-date
case estimates or other accurate information, projected amounts and/or reserves. It should
be based on consistent approaches to claims recording, claims payment and claims
settlement. It should include both the number of claims and the amounts.
It is very important to match the historical claims cost with a suitable exposure measure for the
in-force business, which might simply be the number of policies exposed or an alternative
measure, eg sum insured. The exposure measure used must be consistent with the claim
amounts. The basic exposed-to-risk principles introduced in earlier subjects will apply. An
inappropriate calculation of the exposure could easily lead to an inaccurate risk premium being
calculated.
We often split the expected claims cost for a policy between smaller (attritional) and larger
claims. We often use separate cost estimates, frequency-severity models or curves of ILFs
to price for these elements.
Frequency-severity models are covered in Chapter 14. The use of original loss curves to produce
ILFs (Increased Limit Factors) is explained in Chapter 15.
We discuss a variety of approaches to dealing with large losses in Section 5.
We may apply different trends (including inflation) to smaller and larger claims.
We may use different methods of projection to ultimate for the two elements, because of the
different claims development patterns they are likely to have.
Adjusting for trends and projecting to the ultimate position are discussed further in Section 4.
The attritional cost may well be easier to estimate because the volume of data available is
likely to be higher and the claims experience less volatile.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
4 Adjusting for trends, etc
4.1 Adjusting the base values
A key question that we must ask ourselves is:
‘In what way might the base values not be appropriate as the basis for setting new premium
rates?’
Many different factors may cause the base experience to be different from that expected
during the new rating period. In each case, we will need to make a suitable adjustment to
both the exposure and the claims data.
Identifying the reasons why the base values may need adjustment is the first half of the task; the
second half is making the adjustments. However, the difficulty here is that there is rarely any
uniquely correct solution. There will inevitably be a level of subjective judgement in the
adjustments.
Unusually heavy / light experience
Claims experience tends to fluctuate over time. For certain classes, experience in a single
year can be unusually heavy or light, particularly where the risk is affected by the climate.
Another source of unusually heavy / light experience on some classes of business is the presence
of a claims experience cycle. A claims experience cycle isn’t the same as the insurance cycle,
which can be explained by movements in premium levels. An example of a claims cycle is the
frequency of motor vehicle theft, which is linked to the economic cycle.
If the experience in the ideal base period does not appear to be typical, we should:
choose another base year that is more typical
aggregate more years’ experience or
apply an adjustment factor to the affected base year. Such a factor will be rather
subjective, although market figures may be available.
To help assess what, if any, adjustment may be needed we could:
gather information on the results of other insurers, to establish whether the deterioration
was industry-wide
establish whether there are any global climatic or economic factors that would explain the
unexpected experience (and how they are expected to affect future experience)
look at previous years’ results to try to identify trends or cycles.
The experience of claims frequency and claim severity should be analysed separately for trends or
distortions.
Depending on the results of these further investigations, the base values might be scaled up, left
alone or scaled down through careful judgement.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 11
Large or exceptional claims
We discuss this in detail in Section 5.
Trends in claims experience
If we detect trends in the base data for any of the components of the risk premium, we
should give more weight to recent experience or adjust the earlier years’ experience.
We should investigate any trends that we have detected in the base data to see if they are
likely to continue into the future or if they are a result of a one-off change – for example, in
office or market practice. If we expect them to continue, we will need an assumption to
allow for them in the projection of the risk premium.
As mentioned previously, ideally claim frequency, claim severity and exposure per policy should
all be analysed separately in order to identify trends.
Adjusting for inflation
To project future claims costs, we should allow for the effect of claims inflation. We discuss
how we do this in Section 4.5.
4.2 Adjusting for changes in risk and/or cover provided
Reasons for changes in risk
Changes in the risk over time can be very awkward to deal with. Changes in the risk may
arise because of changes in:
the mix of underlying risks
cover / policy conditions
claims handling / underwriting strategy
the method of distribution
the level of reinsurance coverage.
Dealing with changes in risk
The changes in risk over time may show up as trends in the overall claims experience. We
could project the trend forward.
Alternatively, we may try to separate the major elements of risk in the base data, project
them separately, and then combine them with explicit assumptions about the future mix of
these risks. We may also do this for significantly different types of claim if the relative mix
of claims arising is changing.
The policy conditions under which insurance or reinsurance is written will have implications
for the premium rates to be charged. For example, the premium rate for a policy that
excludes particular risks should, all other things being equal, be lower than that for a policy
that covers those risks.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
This should be obvious to you. A home contents policy that includes accidental damage should
have a higher premium than a policy (from the same insurer) that excludes it but has no other
differences.
If an insurer tightens up underwriting or claim settlement procedures, this will also have
implications for the premium rates.
Relevance of the historical data
The insurer will use the historical claims data to estimate the expected claim amounts that will be
incurred during the risk period for which the premiums are to apply.
It is important to ascertain the consistency or otherwise of historical data with the risk
period ahead for which the premiums are to apply. Significant inconsistencies (which
distort the risk premium if suitable adjustments are not made) may arise in such matters as:
policy acceptance – the basis on which proposals are accepted, the scrutiny or
‘harshness’ of underwriters
For example, the data may come from a period during which more stringent rules (such as
exclusions or high excesses) applied.
policy coverage – the risks covered under the contracts in question relative to the
period ahead
For example, a new peril or claim type may have been introduced.
method of distribution – the influence of the selling process on the nature of risks
insured or policyholders covered
For example, the internet may be used for more sales in the future, leading to different
claims experience.
claims settlement procedures – the internal practices that may affect the timing and
possibly the amount of claims paid to policyholders.
The company must investigate how any of the above factors have changed or how they might
change in the future and make suitable allowances when calculating the risk premium.
Changes in policy conditions
The major changes in the policy conditions are likely to be in the perils covered and limits
or excesses applied to any claim.
Changes in the perils covered
In the case of perils that are no longer insured, we may be able to exclude from the base
data all types of claim that would not be covered under the new rating series. However, if a
new peril (or indeed any new aspect of cover) is to be introduced, we will need to use
external data such as market statistics, consumer or manufacturers’ statistics, scientific
data or government statistics to approximate the likely cost of the claims for this additional
cover.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 13
Changes in self retention limits
If there are limits on the amount of cover provided by a policy – for example, a policy
excess, a self-retention limit or a maximum sum insured – then the required premium
should be lower than that for a policy without any such limitations.
If the limit has been reduced or the excess point has been increased, we can normally
truncate the past claims experience to approximate the future costs. However, the insurer
would need a detailed database, so that we can identify each individual claim separately,
and allocate it to a policy.
However, it is more difficult to estimate the effect of lowering the excess point because
many insureds will not inform the insurer of losses below the excess point. We have to
estimate the increase in both the frequency and size of the future claims. Data may be
available from other similar risks, or from external sources. Otherwise, we must use more
approximate adjustments, based on any knowledge available regarding the claim cost
distribution. Either way, the information is likely to be incomplete.
Question
A company introduces a £50 excess on a policy.
(i) Company A introduces a £50 excess on a policy. Describe the effect on the:
claim frequency
aggregate claim amount
average claim amount.
(ii) Company B is carrying out a premium rate review. Since the period from which its base
data was derived, the levels of excess have been increased. Explain briefly how the base
values might be adjusted to allow for the new, higher level of excess.
Solution
(i) Effect of an excess
The claim frequency will reduce (since policyholders will not claim for losses less than £50 and
may not even bother claiming for losses of, say, £60).
The aggregate claim amount will reduce. All claims will be £50 lower than before, or zero.
The average claim amount (net of the excess) is likely to fall because the vast majority of claims
notified will be above the excess. If all claims notified were above the excess, the average claim
amount would fall by £50. There will probably be a small number of claims below the excess
which are notified, so the reduction will probably be a little less than £50.
(ii) Adjusting base values
The safest method is to convert the original claim payments into gross amounts by adding back
the excess. Then we project the base values for inflation and subtract the new levels of excess.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
4.3 Adjusting for environmental changes
Claim experience can be affected by a variety of environmental factors. The new premium
must reflect these expected changes in claims experience. A few examples of such factors
include:
legislative factors
advances in technology
medical advances
changes in the construction of property.
Legislative factors
These can have a significant impact on claims cost, particularly liability claims that might be
expected to increase in line with an inflation index such as a salary index. In practice the
size of many claims awarded via the court process increase at a rate far in excess of salary
inflation. This is a phenomenon known as ‘court award inflation’.
This was discussed in detail in Chapter 8.
Advances in technology
Advances in technology can lead to safer measures and better practices used in certain
industries. They can also cause property to be more complex and so more costly to fix.
An example is in the motor industry over the last few years where the technology behind the
construction of side-view mirrors has improved greatly. This could improve the view that
drivers have of other vehicles and obstacles, and so reduce the number of vehicle
collisions.
It is hoped that both the number and average size of claims will be reduced as a result of this
safety feature.
Medical advances
Medical practice and knowledge can improve greatly over time, which may have a positive
or negative effect on expected claims levels for medical-related claims. Improved practices
enable some problems to be identified more quickly and treated before they become too
serious. Alternatively, early diagnosis could lead to claim payments being made much
earlier than anticipated.
New medical treatments can also be very costly. This could lead to increases in expected claim
amounts, if medical expenses are included in the cover.
Changes in construction of property
In a similar way to advances in technology, changes to the construction of property can
have an effect on expected claim cost.
For example, there has been a trend in recent years for lightweight materials to be used in
UK property building as opposed to the traditional heavyweight brick constructions. This is
an attempt to counteract the effects of subsidence.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 15
However, the use of such materials has made these buildings less able to withstand flood
damage and has led to increased claims costs over recent years where there have been a
number of severe floods.
4.4 Time periods involved in the projection
It is important to remember that there may be a significant time delay between the period of
exposure on which the claims data is based and the time to which projections are made for
the new period of exposure.
Hence we need to adjust for claims inflation and other trends to ensure the new premium
charged is appropriate for the new exposure.
We should investigate any trends detected in the base data to see if they are likely to
continue before incorporating an allowance into the risk premium.
Reasons for delay
Time delays that may result in adjustments to the data may occur because of:
time taken for sufficient claims experience to develop from the historical data
time taken to analyse the claims experience
time taken to reach and agree the new premium rates and premium structure
time taken to administer and implement the new rates
time delay between the risk period and the payment of claims.
There is often a delay between occurrence and payment of a claim. This differs depending
on the length of the tail of the portfolio.
time taken for any approval needed from a regulatory body.
This projection is surprisingly tricky. Many students will get this projection wrong through not
giving the process enough attention. To illustrate this trickiness, consider the following question.
Question
You have carried out an analysis of claims occurring in 2017. Your aim is to set premium rates for
2019. State, with explanation, how many years’ inflation must be applied to the base claims data.
Solution
Most quick answers to this question will be ‘2017 to 2019 is 2 years ... the answer is 2’.
However, the answer is not 2.
The key to getting the right answer to these types of questions is to treat each question on its own
merits and to think very carefully about the mechanics of what is going on. The development of
the correct answer to this question is as follows.
The mid-point of 2017 is the average date at which claim events took place. (This assumes that
claim events were evenly spread over the year.)
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
For the new premium rating series, the average date on which policies will start is the mid-point
of 2019. (This assumes that new policies are written evenly over the year.)
If we assume that policies are annual, and that risk is evenly spread over the policy year, then the
average date of any claim event will be six months into the policy year. So for the average policy,
this is the end of 2019.
The projection period is therefore 2½ years (mid-2017 to end-2019).
In solving this question we have also assumed that the run-off of claims from occurrence to
settlement can be ignored. This is reasonable if both the run-off pattern and the rate of claims
inflation are the same for the two cohorts of claims.
Diagrammatically, this example question looks like this:
2017 2018 2019 2020
write
base exposure
mid-point mid-point
Question
For policies that provide 6 months’ cover, you have carried out an analysis of claims for accidents
in the period 1 June 2016 to 30 November 2017. You plan to set new premium rates to apply for
the period from 1 December 2018 to 1 August 2019.
Determine the number of years for which you will need to project claims inflation. State your
assumptions.
Solution
The mid-point for claim events in the base period is 1 March 2017. The mid-point for new policies
to start is 1 April 2019, and 1 July 2019 would be the mid-point for accidents.
Therefore the projection period is 2 years 4 months.
This assumes:
claims spread uniformly over the base period
policies incept uniformly over the new rating period
risk is even over the calendar year.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 17
Most analyses of claims experience will be on an accident-year basis. If they are not, we will need
to be careful that our projections for inflation are consistent. Again, if we treat each case on its
own merits, we should be able to deduce the correct projection period.
Question
You have conducted a claims experience investigation using a policy-year analysis, ie you have
analysed the claims emerging from policies written in 2017. Your new premium rating series is to
apply to annual policies written throughout 2020 and 2021. Determine the number of years for
which you will need to inflate the claims.
Solution
Policies in the base period are written on average in the middle of 2017. Claims from these
policies will occur, on average, 6 months’ later, ie at the end of 2017. Policies under the new rates
will be written on average, at the end of 2020. Claims on these policies will occur 6 months later,
ie in the middle of 2021. The projection period is therefore 3½ years (end-2017 to mid-2021).
4.5 Projecting the base values
Projecting claims for inflation
We will express the total claim cost and exposure values produced from the initial analyses
in the money terms of the base period. Therefore, as well as allowing for future trends and
any proposed risk or cover changes, we need to allow in our projections for the expected
effect of inflation on claims between:
the mean payment date of claims in the base period and
the mean payment date of claims arising during the new exposure period.
If claims occurred evenly over each period and were not subject to any delays, we could
take these mean dates as the mid-points of each exposure period. However, this will very
rarely be the case in practice, and so we should allow for inflation during the run-off of
those claims.
The above simplification may be appropriate for very short-tailed business, but in practice, we
would usually allow for the settlement delay of claims.
As the future inflation is likely to be different from that experienced (or projected) in the
base claims data, we should inflate the claims cost in the base period to current-day terms
before the projection.
In other words, we should express our prior data in real terms before projecting.
We should consider the actual nature of the costs before we decide a suitable index of
inflation. Ideally we will be able to adjust claim values by reference to an index specific to
the particular loss. In the UK, the ABI maintains some such indices.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
The rate of inflation to use will depend on the type of inflation that claims are subject to. For
example, for damage to motor vehicles, we need to consider estimates of:
motor spare parts inflation (a primary component of car repair costs)
mechanics’ charge-out rates inflation (another primary component of car repair costs)
new car price inflation (relevant where a car is written off).
We can expect all these elements to inflate at different rates.
For liability claims, we need to consider:
earnings inflation, because many liability settlements are based on loss of earnings
the inflation of court awards over the appropriate period.
Court award inflation appears to be only very loosely correlated with other forms of inflation, and
some practitioners believe that the rate is now a constant 10% pa regardless of economic
conditions. It tends to increase in steps. One judicial decision may increase court awards by 20%
but then the court award inflation may be zero for a couple of years.
Past and future
In practice, when revaluing base values for future premium rates, there are two parts to the
calculation:
inflating base values to the present day using (broadly) known inflation rates
projecting from the present day to the future using estimated future inflation rates.
The published indices can be used for the past inflation, although some judgement must be
applied in estimating, for example, future mechanics’ wage inflation.
Projecting to the ultimate position
We discussed earlier in this chapter how the claims data used should be adjusted to include
unsettled claims and IBNR claims. We need to make sure that this is done.
As some of the past claims may not be fully developed, we need to project current claims
data to the ultimate position. We may need to include reserves for those claims reported
but expected to increase in size or for additional claims not yet reported.
Alternatively, we could use only years where the data are believed to be fully developed for
analysis but then the data are based on less recent experience.
Example
Previous examples have ignored the complications caused by the delay from claim event to
ultimate settlement. At the same time as incorporating this feature in an example, we will also
see how to build in an allowance for investment income.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 19
Let’s say that we first want to find the risk premium applicable for new annual policies written in
2019 for a particular insurance class where premiums are expressed as £x per policy, and then
incorporate an allowance for investment income.
Let’s suppose that our starting point is an accident year investigation for claims occurring in 2017.
Suppose also that:
(a) we are working with a homogeneous group of risks (so we won’t get distracted by
discussions about different risk groups)
(b) the claims data we are using incorporate best estimates of IBNR and outstanding reported
claims
(c) all possible distortions have been eliminated.
Suppose that we have also produced the following data from our analysis of 2017 claims:
average delay from occurrence to settlement was 10 months
average claim payment per policy was £267
and we have made the following estimates:
settlement delays will stay at 10 months on average
there will be a deterioration in claims experience from the base period to the future
exposure period, increasing claim frequency by 2% pa compound
claims inflation from the mean payment date in the base period to now, and also in the
future, averages 10% pa
investment return will be 8% pa.
Question
Derive a suitable risk premium and then incorporate an appropriate allowance for investment
income.
Solution
For this sort of question there are often many acceptable ways in which a suitable answer could be
calculated depending on how you interpret the data given, and depending on any further
assumptions you make. One answer can be derived as follows.
The average claim amount as at the mean payment date of the base period is £267.
We know the projection period here is 2½ years (mid-2017 to end-2019), so we need to inflate
the £267, allowing for the deterioration in claim frequency and also for claims inflation.
Therefore the risk premium (ie the monetary amount of the average claims payment in the new
rating era) will be:
267 1.022.5 1.102.5 £356.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
Now we want to allow for investment return of 8% pa. To do this, we discount back to the
average date at which the premium would be received, ie for 16 months (10 months settlement
delay and 6 months from inception to accident date).
This risk premium for the new rating series, after allowing for investment return, should therefore
be:
£356 / {1.08(16/12) } £321.
This assumes that the insurer receives the premium the day that the policy starts. In practice
there is often a delay of up to a few months.
4.6 Projecting exposure values
In order to arrive at a risk premium rate, we must divide the projected claim cost by a
corresponding projected value of the exposure.
Previous examples in this chapter have been based on policies where the premium is stated as an
amount per policy as, for example, with private motor insurance where the premium is quoted
per vehicle-year.
Where these exposure units are expressed in terms of monetary units, we need to project
the base exposure values at an appropriate rate of inflation. This may not be the same as
that applied to the claim cost. Here, the projection is only to the mid-point of the exposure
period arising under the new rates.
For example, in many forms of property insurance, the premium is quoted per £1,000 sum
insured. You will sometimes see this is written as ‘per mille’. In these cases, high inflation does
not necessarily mean that the premium rate must be increased. If the exposure measure inflates
as quickly as the average claim amounts, then premium rates might stay constant.
For example, a premium rate of £2 per mille set in 1980 might still be appropriate in 2020. But,
we very much doubt whether a premium of £15 per vehicle-year in 1980 would still be acceptable
in 2020!
Impact on calculations
We will look back at the previous worked example, and suppose on this occasion that the
premiums for these policies are expressed as £y per mille.
Suppose that the average sum insured for the policies within the base period was £16,000.
Because the sum insured is fixed at the inception date, we need to work from average inception
date rather than average date of accident.
Now the average inception date for the policies giving claims in 2017 was 1 January 2017. The
average inception date in the new rating period will be mid-2019, giving a 2½ year inflation
period. If we assume that the inflation of the sum insured will be 8% pa, then the average sum
insured in the new rating series will be £19,395.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 21
Question
Calculate the new risk premium rate and the original risk premium rate, stating any assumptions
that you make. Comment on the difference between them.
Solution
We calculated the risk premium in the new rating period to be £321. Dividing this by 19.395 gives
the new risk premium rate as £16.57 per mille. Assuming that the investment return was always
8%, the original risk premium must have been:
£267 / {1.08(16/12) } £241
corresponding to a risk premium rate of £241/16 £15.06 per mille.
It makes sense that the new rate should be higher because the inflation of claims has exceeded
the inflation of sums insured over the period.
The inflation rate to be used for the exposure measure might be the same as the claims inflation
rate, although it would not necessarily be the same. For example, in household contents
insurance, the inflation of the exposure measure will be based on changes in the prices of
household goods. The inflation of claim amounts would be greater than this if burglars were
gradually getting better at stealing more items or if the prices of ‘thievables’ were rising faster
than those of household goods in general. So, in this instance, the average cost per claim would
be rising more rapidly than the sum insured.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
5 Catastrophe and large claims loadings
In addition to the attritional (normal) claims experience, the premium should also reflect the
expected loss due to catastrophic and large claims.
We often remove these claims from the base attritional data to enable a reliable analysis.
However, we should still reflect the actual (expected) cost of these claims in the premium.
We can estimate the required loading from the insurer’s own data, provided sufficient
experience is available.
Otherwise we use external data for such claims, or a catastrophe model.
Own data
Unless the particular class of business is new, we would have a ‘feel’ for the relative frequency of
unusually large claims or catastrophes. If we know that we generally experience a couple of freak
claims each year, our premiums need to allow for these. Such claims should not be removed from
the base values (although they should perhaps be truncated and the excess re-spread over the
whole portfolio).
However, if there was an exceptional claims event, like an earthquake, we would need to decide
how often that event would generally occur (say once every n years) and then include 1/nth of
the cost of claims from that exceptional event within our base values. In this case n years would
be known as the return period.
Similarly, if there were no exceptional events in our base period, we might decide to load the base
values to allow for the fact that such events do tend to occur every n years or so. Alternatively, if
such claims will be covered by a reinsurance agreement, the reinsurance cost can be included
within the premium calculation (see Section 6.2).
Catastrophe modelling
Catastrophe modelling has a significant advantage over historical data analysis in the case
of low frequency, high severity risks. This is because the observed historical losses may
not reflect the true underlying risks, as the period over which losses have been observed
may be much shorter than the return period of the losses under consideration – for
example, a ten-year burning cost model is unlikely to be a reliable method of pricing for an
earthquake risk where a likely return period is 100 years.
Use of a burning cost model is a simple example of a cost plus approach to pricing. It uses
historical aggregate claims, expressed as an annual rate per unit of exposure. It does not make
use of the number of claims. It is covered in more detail in Chapter 14.
The models estimate the cost of numerous possible future events based on latest research
in areas such as seismology, meteorology, hydrodynamics, structural and geotechnical
engineering. They also allow for changes in the risk exposure and factors such as changes
in building codes, construction types, engineering surveys and loss mitigation.
As a result, we usually omit catastrophe claims from the analysis.
We discuss this in more detail in Chapter 21 (and in Subject SA3).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 23
Large (non-catastrophe) losses
Several approaches are possible for large non-catastrophe losses (which may arise in
liability classes or on properties with high EML):
We can omit them from the analysis and allow for them separately in the risk
premium.
We can truncate large claims at a set point and spread any cost above this level
across the larger portfolio of risks.
We can leave large claims in the data, although we rarely do this because this would
implicitly assume that future occurrences will replicate those seen in the past.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
6 Calculation of the office premium from the risk premium
6.1 Loadings
The risk premium reflects the expected claims cost, including allowances for large and
catastrophic losses. However, this is not the premium that the insurer will charge. We will
make additions to cover some or all of the items below.
The additions are commonly called ‘loadings’. The loadings that will be described in this section
are:
reinsurance premium
expense loadings
profit loading
investment income.
The office premium is the risk premium adjusted for the above loadings. There are further
considerations that should be made, such as competitor influences, before arriving at the actual
premium charged. These more pragmatic considerations will be discussed in the next chapter.
6.2 Reinsurance premium
Allowing for the cost of reinsurance
We can incorporate the cost of reinsurance into a premium rate in one of two ways, either:
as the net cost of reinsurance in a premium rate based on a gross risk premium, or
as the gross cost of reinsurance in a premium rate based on a net risk premium.
When we talk about gross and net here, we mean gross and net of reinsurance recoveries.
Example
The gross risk premium for a policy is equal to £50. The cost of reinsurance applicable to
this policy is £12 and the expected reinsurance recoveries from this cover are £10.
If we allow for the cost of reinsurance in the first way described above, then we have:
Net cost of reinsurance = £12 – £10 = £2
plus
Gross risk premium = £50
equals
Total premium = £50 + £2 = £52.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 25
If we allow for the cost of reinsurance in the second way described above, then we have:
Gross cost of reinsurance = £12
plus
Net risk premium = £50 – £10 = £40
equals
Total premium = £40 + £12 = £52.
In situations where only a small proportion of the gross premium is passed to the reinsurer,
it is normal for the first approach to be used. The net cost will arise because the reinsurer
will want to cover its own expenses, profit margin and so on.
When there is a high level excess of loss or catastrophe reinsurance, we expect the claim
frequency to be low but the claim amounts to be high. In these cases, it is common to
calculate a net premium allowing for reinsurance recoveries and then add the cost of the
reinsurance to the premium as an expense loading.
In other words, it is common in these situations for the second approach to be used.
In some short-tailed classes, the reinsurer’s risk premium may be lower than the insurer’s,
for example where the reinsurer has a larger pool of experience. In these cases the ‘net’
reinsurance cost will be negative. It would be unusual, except in circumstances of
aggressive competition, for the insurer’s risk premium to be reduced to reflect this.
Effect of trends in the cost of reinsurance
It may also be necessary to allow for the effect of trends in the cost of reinsurance. As with
normal insurance, the cost of reinsurance is driven by the capacity and demand in the
market. Reinsurance capacity in particular is sensitive to the recent claims experience and
the sentiment of reinsurers. If we believe that the cost of reinsurance is likely to change in
the future, we should incorporate this into the premium rates of the insurer.
Capacity is the insurance term used to describe the level of supply available in the market.
Question
Comment on the suggestion that insurers who use lots of excess of loss reinsurance should have
to charge higher premiums because their reinsurance premiums will, on average, exceed the
recoveries they make.
Solution
Although an insurer should charge premiums which reflect the risk, an insurer who charges a
higher premium than competitors just because they use more reinsurance is likely to lose out on
business volumes.
The reinsurer will aim to make a profit. Balancing this, the reinsurance should reduce the
riskiness of the insurer’s business, enabling it to reduce its contingency margins.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
If two insurers charge the same premiums then, all other things being equal, the insurer using
more reinsurance will have lower profit margins per policy (unless the reinsurer’s risk premium is
lower than the insurer’s). However, higher reinsurance may require less capital to back the
policies and allow higher volumes of policies to be written.
6.3 Expense loading
Expense loadings are required in the rating formula to ensure that sufficient premium is charged
to cover not only the expected claim costs, but also the costs of expenses related to
administration and claims handling for the business written under these rates and to provide a
contribution to the general fixed costs of the company.
For most insurers, the expenses, in roughly descending order of amount, might be:
staff salaries, pensions costs, national insurance contributions, etc
commission payments
office rent and related costs
office equipment (eg computers)
office consumables (eg stationery).
Analysis of expenses by different sources and types is required to ensure that suitable expense
allowances are made in the rating calculation.
The assessment of expenses will be explored in detail in Chapter 19.
You may be able to cover some of the material in this section relatively quickly or use it for
revision purposes.
The stages involved in determining the required expense loadings are:
to allocate the expenses by class or product and, possibly, by major rating factor groups
to allocate expenses by function
to decide on how to allow for each expense type in the rating formula.
Types of expenses
The expenses of a general insurer can be split into groups of expenses that occur at different
stages throughout the lifetime of an insurance policy. Other expenses called indirect expenses (or
overheads) will not be directly attributable to any particular policy. Examples of overheads are
general management costs and office rent.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 27
Theoretically we may divide expenses into:
underwriting and brokers’ commission
policy administration
claims handling
overheads
levies to insurance guarantee schemes, such as the Financial Services
Compensation Scheme (FSCS) in the UK.
The FSCS is the compensation fund of last resort for customers of financial service products in the
UK. It is funded by annual levies on insurers and other financial service providers.
Each of the elements above, apart from overheads, will probably be directly allowed for in the
premium rating formula. Methods may be used to allocate overheads between the other
elements. Alternatively, overheads may be implicitly allowed for in the profit loading. This
loading would then be to cover profit and a contribution to overheads.
Question
A general insurer that writes only one class of business wishes to split its general management
costs and its office rent between the initial, alteration and claims handling expenses. Describe
how the split might be made.
Solution
The general management costs may be split in proportion to the number of employees in the new
business, servicing and claims departments.
The office rent may be split in proportion to the floor space occupied by the three departments.
Each element should be clearly identifiable within the rating basis, so that when expenses
change, we can adjust the rates accordingly.
For example, the expenses associated with a particular product, say, and a particular function
could be explicitly allowed for in the premium formula. We give some example premium rating
formulae at the end of this section so that you can see this for yourself.
Direct / indirect expenses
Direct expenses are those that can be identified directly as belonging to a particular class of
business.
However, a detailed breakdown of the expenses associated with a particular product in a
particular class of business is often not available. In such instances, we might make broad
assumptions about the general overall level of expense and incorporate these within the
rate.
Indirect expenses, or overheads, will need to be apportioned to different classes of business or
products using some sensible method.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
Question
Suggest methods that can be used to allocate indirect expenses to different classes of business or
products.
Solution
Indirect expenses can be allocated to classes of business or product by:
floor space occupied by staff
charge out basis (eg for computing costs)
in proportion to policies in force, premiums received, funds under management, etc
in proportion to all other expenses.
Fixed / variable expenses
Expenses may be further split into those that are fixed and those that vary depending on the
volume of business or the size of the premium.
For example:
For a class of business, the amount of commission paid varies by the size of the
premium and the type of risk covered.
The cost associated with staffing tends to be a relatively fixed amount.
In practice, all expenses can vary in the long term, so the concept of fixed expenses makes most
sense if we confine it to the short term.
Examples of variable costs that might be related to one or more different measures of the amount
of business are:
amount of premium income (eg commission)
number of policies sold (eg postal costs for policy documents)
amount of claim payments (eg legal expenses)
number of claims (eg postal costs for claim forms).
There is no fixed rule as to the boundary between fixed and variable costs. Some costs could
easily fall into either category. For example, the cost of processing a new policy might be
described as a fixed cost because you would not pay higher salary costs as a result of the new
policy. On the other hand, if marginal sales of policies meant paying staff bigger bonuses or
making overtime payments, then the cost of processing a new policy is a variable cost.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 29
Allowing for expenses in the rating formula
Insurers have many different ways of charging for commissions, expenses and other
margins:
Some do no more than add an overall percentage to the risk premium, based on the
evidence of the previous year’s underwriting results.
Others go a little further and take into account the split between fixed and variable
expenses and likely volumes of business in the future.
The danger of using an overall percentage approach is that it may not accurately reflect the
actual expenses if there are changes in the volume and nature of the business written.
Some expenses, such as the commission, vary with the business volume. Other expenses,
such as the company overheads, are relatively fixed and need to be shared in a reasonable
distribution across the lines of business.
Sometimes we charge a policy fee explicitly rather than add loadings into the rating
structure. This can impact smaller policies more than larger ones.
The idea here is that the policy fee would represent the per-policy expense costs. However, the
policy fee may need to be reduced from its theoretical level in order to make the total premiums
for small policies more competitive or, indeed, reasonable.
However, to avoid the risk of not covering expenses, the reduction will need to be compensated
for elsewhere – for example, by an expense loading that is expressed as a percentage of
premiums. The insurer would need to model future assumed business mix and volumes to ensure
that the total expense contribution received by the company would be the same as what it would
have been, had the theoretically correct premium rates and policy fee been used.
Question
Describe the risk to the company in reducing the policy fee, even if compensated for elsewhere.
Solution
The risk here is in selling more smaller-sized policies than anticipated (either more in absolute
terms, or as a proportion of the new business portfolio). If this happens the company might not
recoup the marginal expenses. In addition, the contribution to fixed expenses would be smaller
than expected.
New business vs renewals
In theory, the loading for expenses should be higher for new business than for renewals.
However, for competitive reasons, this is often not the case.
The cost of assessing a new proposal for cover and the subsequent processing of that risk
if it is accepted is relatively high compared to the expenses associated with renewing an
existing piece of business. Therefore, there is at least a theoretical case for charging a
higher premium for new business than for renewals, with a specific (per new policy) loading
being made for this within the rating formula.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
In practice, however, we rarely do this in the UK. The short-term nature of contracts and the
relatively low levels of persistency are likely to cause the absolute level of the policy fee to
appear unacceptably high to the policyholder, relative to the amount being paid for the risk
element. We generally incorporate the additional cost of writing new business into the
overall level of expenses, based on an assumed level of future new business and its
average expected duration before lapsing.
One approach would be to make an assumption about the number of years for which new policies
are expected to be renewed; the excess of the initial costs over the renewal costs is spread over
this number of years. Adding this annual (amortised) initial expense to the expected renewal cost
for the year gives the total per-policy administration expense assumption.
6.4 Profit loading and risk
An insurer will need to incorporate a profit loading in its premium rates to give a reasonable
return to the providers of the capital required to support the risks underwritten. The size of
the profit loading for a particular class of business should reflect the underlying variability
and uncertainty of the risks being covered, after the effect of reinsurance protection.
The required return should be appropriate to the shareholders’ risk/return appetite.
Insurers need a large amount of shareholders’ capital to support the business. We should
therefore make allowance within our premium formula for an appropriate return on
shareholders’ funds.
In the rating process the profit loading may be set as an agreed percentage of the gross office
premium (or possibly the risk premium). This seems sensible for two reasons:
Firstly, the more business that is written, the greater the total variance of the risk and the greater
the capital needed to support it. However, if more business is written, the variance in percentage
terms reduces, which results in lower risk. This implies a lower return on capital (or percentage
profit loading) may be needed.
The second reason for expressing the profit loading as a percentage of premium is that as free
reserves (and hence shareholders’ funds) reduce, the degree of risk of capital inadequacy
increases. For a given percentage profit of office premium, the return on capital will be higher if
the free reserves are lower, which makes sense.
For example, a company that has £100m free reserves sets a profit target of 10% of written
premium. If it writes £100m of premiums then the expected return on capital is 10% of the
shareholders’ funds ((10% of 100) / 100 = 10). If its free reserves are reduced to £50m, then the
expected return to shareholders is 20% ((10% of 100) / 50). The expected return has increased to
reflect the extra risk.
In theory, the required return on capital should also vary between insurance classes. A higher
return will be required for the higher risk classes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 31
Question
State characteristics that make an insurance class high risk.
Give an example of a class that would be described as low risk.
Solution
High risk classes usually have:
long tails
high variation in claim frequencies and claim amounts
high exposure to catastrophes, accumulations and latent claims
little past experience on which to base premium rates.
An example of a low risk class is household contents insurance.
In practice, however, uncertainties are such that many companies combine products and lines of
business and attempt to achieve a target return over all of the combined business.
One commonly used method is to set the profit loading to achieve a target return on capital
Although the amount of capital (as a proportion of premium) held by the insurer varies
according to the riskiness of the underlying business, it is common to have the same
required return on capital (built into the premium) across many or all classes of business,
as, quite often, the capital allocation to classes is notional rather than explicit.
Question
A small general insurer writing only private motor insurance through independent brokers wishes
to use a profit loading of 15% of gross office premium. Explain why the company might decide
not to use this loading.
Solution
Competitive forces are likely to influence the profit loading that can be achieved. The company
may use the profit loading to come up with a preferable office premium, but will then consider
competitors’ rates when deciding whether to charge an actual premium that is higher or lower
than the theoretical office premium.
The position in the insurance cycle may heavily influence the loading that is used.
It should be noted that there are other approaches for setting profit loadings based on risk
metrics other than capital; eg Wang’s Proportional Hazards approach.
The ‘proportional hazards transform’ is one of a family of methods that attach an artificially
inflated probability to the worst outcomes. Hence, this approach will impose a higher profit
loading for policies that have heavier tail probabilities.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
We discuss how to incorporate the return on capital into the premium calculation in more
detail in Subject SA3.
6.5 Investment income
Investment is an integral part of the insurance process. Insurers will be able to invest the
premiums for a period of time until the claims and expenses are paid out. We can allow for
investment income on the premiums by discounting the projected claims and expense
cashflows at a suitable rate of interest to the date at which the premium is paid.
We need to decide whether a gross or net rate is applicable.
By this the Core Reading means whether the investment return used should be gross or net of tax.
This depends on how the insurance company is taxed.
In the UK, mutual general insurers are taxed on the investment return, in which case the
investment return assumption should be net of tax. However, UK proprietary general insurers are
taxed on profits, in which case an investment return assumption that is gross of tax would be
appropriate.
In general, we will assume a conservative rate of return. However, the return will also
depend on:
the duration for which the funds are invested and
the form of the liabilities (whether they are fixed, increase in real terms and so on).
For long-tailed classes, the effect of discounting will be significant. For short-tailed
classes, discounting will be a minor and in some cases a negligible factor in the rating
process. Hence, for short-tailed classes and highly volatile long-tailed classes where the
uncertainty is much more significant than the effect of discounting, it may be more suitable
for the actuary to adjust the profit loading than to discount.
The premium formula should recognise, either explicitly or implicitly, that the insurer can expect
to earn some investment income on the premiums received during the period from receipt of
premium through to final settlement of claims.
In short-tailed classes, the assumption regarding investment income is not critical. It might be
several months before the premiums are received for investment (because intermediaries like to
hang on to the premiums for as long as possible). Also, for these classes, claims are reported and
settled relatively quickly. Premiums might be invested for just six months on average.
However, the situation is very different for long-tailed classes, where premiums may be invested
for many years before being needed to settle claims. The assumption regarding investment
returns is then significant. (Note also that the inflation assumptions are far more significant for
long-tailed classes.)
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 33
What rate is suitable?
The following factors will be considered when selecting an assumed rate of investment return:
the likely investment conditions at the time when the premiums are receivable
the assets likely to be held (which should be matched to the nature of the liabilities)
consistency with the inflation assumption used to project expected claims and expenses.
Question
An insurance company sells a particular annual contract through brokers. The probability of a
claim is 0.2 and all claims are for 400. There is no inflation but a return of 5% is earned on
investments. Brokers hold premiums for an average of two months and all claims are settled six
months after the end of the contract. Expenses and commission are 25% of the gross premium
and are all paid at the start of the policy.
Calculate an office premium for this contract.
Solution
Equating NPVs at the time the premium is received:
P 0.25P 1.052/12 0.2 400 1.0516/12
0.2 400 1.0516/12
P
1 0.25 1.052/12
P = 100.22
6.6 A sample premium rating formula
When calculating an office premium in an exam, or in practice, it is usually best to work from first
principles, because there are many, many different ways in which the situation could be set up
and loadings could be applied. You are much more likely to go wrong if you learn formulae.
The equation of value to start from is:
PV of gross premium PV of claims costs + PV of expenses and loadings
(here, PV stands for present value.)
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
Example 1
For example, suppose that CF is our expected claim frequency per policy, CA is the expected
average claim amount and we want to calculate a gross premium GP incorporating the following
allowances:
commission as a proportion, c, of gross premium
a contribution to fixed expenses of FE per policy
variable expenses, other than commission, as a proportion, ve, of gross premium
other per policy variable expenses of VE
claims handling expenses of CE for each claim
profit as a proportion, p, of gross premium.
Assume, for the sake of clarity, that all amounts have been converted already to present values,
so the equation of value becomes:
GP CF CA c GP FE ve GP VE CF CE p GP
GP(1 c ve p) CF (CA + CE) + FE + VE
CF ( CA + CE ) + FE + VE
so GP
1 c ve p
Example 2
We will derive a premium formula where:
CF' is the expected claim frequency net of reinsurance
CA' is the expected average claim amount net of reinsurance
commission is a proportion, c, of gross premium
contribution to fixed expenses is a proportion, f, of gross premium
non-commission variable expenses are a proportion, ve, of gross premium
other per policy variable expenses of VE
claims handling expenses are a proportion, h, of each net claim settlement
gross profits are a proportion, p, of gross premium
reinsurance premium is a proportion, r, of gross premium
premium income is immediately invested in cash securities at i% per month gross
ignore tax.
Equating present values gives:
GP CF ' CA' (1 h) (1 i )6 VE GP (c f ve r p)
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 35
Rearranging the premium formula becomes:
CF ' CA ' (1 h) (1 i)6 VE
GP .
(1 c f ve r p)
This assumes that:
all policies are annual
claim events occur and payments are made on average mid-term, ie after 6 months
reinsurance recoveries are made instantaneously.
Question
Derive a formula for a gross premium per mille sum insured where:
CF and FE relate to a whole class
CF is the expected claim frequency net of reinsurance
CA is the expected average claim amount net of reinsurance
the contribution to fixed expenses per policy is FE
c is commission expressed as a proportion of gross premium
the expected sum insured for the class is SI (expressed in £000s)
CA incorporates the cost of claim handling expenses
variable expenses are ve expressed as a proportion of risk premium plus claim handling
expenses
all fixed expenses and the loadings for profit, contingencies and reinsurance are
incorporated within FE and ve
all amounts above are expressed in present value terms.
Solution
Let GP now be the premium rate per mille sum insured, then:
pv of gross premium pv of claims costs + pv of expenses and loadings
ie GP SI CF CA + c GP SI + FE + ve (CF CA)
GP SI ( 1 c ) CF CA ( 1 + ve ) + FE
CF CA ( 1 + ve ) + FE
so GP .
SI ( 1 c )
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
7 Glossary items
Having studied this chapter you should now read the following Glossary items:
Product pricing
Profit testing
Rating basis.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 37
Chapter 12 Summary
An appropriate pricing model is critical to the long term profitability and success of a general
insurance company. There are many possible ways of calculating premiums, ranging from a
simple approach to sophisticated rating models dealing with many different parameters and
variables for each rating group.
The methodology actually used will depend on:
the class of business being priced
the availability of relevant data
the market in which the company is operating.
Five broad categories of pricing are: tariff, qualitative, cost plus, distribution and industrial.
The process may start with a calculation of the pure risk premium (ie the expected future
claim amount), before loadings are added to give the office premium. This is the cost plus
approach.
The pure risk premium can be expressed as a nominal amount, but usually as a rate per unit
of exposure.
To price policies appropriately the company needs data that is reliable and relevant. Policy
data is needed to calculate exposure and identify characteristics of each risk group. Claims
data is required to estimate the ultimate cost of claims. In particular, data by type of peril is
required to cost policy options and make further adjustments (eg to allow for atypical events
or changes in cover). Some data items are required (eg claim reference, loss date,
description and amount) and others are useful.
If the experience underlying the data includes anomalous events or untypical experience, we
should remove claims arising from such sources. Alternatively, we can choose a more typical
base period, collect more years’ data or apply an adjustment factor.
Internal data, where available, is generally more appropriate than external data. However,
market claims data, publicly available information (eg areas prone to flood) and competitors’
rates are also invaluable. Reinsurers may help provide this.
The base period needs to be chosen to balance the conflicting requirements of relevance
and credibility. Data from the most recent years may need adjusting for IBNR and unsettled
claims.
Data should be split into homogeneous groups for analysis, usually considering claim
frequency and average cost separately, over time. In general, the sub-division should be in
as much detail as possible, subject to there being sufficient data in each risk cell to allow
credible analysis. Small (attritional) and large claims may be considered separately.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 38 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
The proposed premium rates must allow for the conditions appropriate to the dates of cover.
In particular, unusual features in the base period data, trends that are expected to continue,
changes in risk (eg mix, cover, underwriting or reinsurance), claims inflation and
environmental changes must be allowed for.
A loading may be applied for catastrophe or large loss claims. This can be estimated using
own data, external data or a sophisticated catastrophe model.
Further loadings would be applied for:
the cost of reinsurance, including trends in this cost
expenses (including commission), eg by applying a simple overall loading or a more
detailed approach allowing for the different expense types (such as fixed or variable)
the cost of capital (or profit loading), reflecting the underlying variability of the class
of business (net of reinsurance) and shareholder risk appetite.
The premium may also be reduced to allow for investment income on the premiums for the
period until claims and expenses are paid out. This is more important for long-tailed
business.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 39
Chapter 12 Practice Questions
12.1 When choosing the base statistics from which to calculate the risk premium, state the advantages
and disadvantages of using:
(a) the most recent years’ experience
(b) older years’ experience.
12.2 The claim frequency (cf) and the average cost per claim (acpc) have been determined for claims
occurring in 2017 for a homogeneous group of policies. Both figures have been adjusted to allow
for outstanding claims and IBNR. Give a formula for an office premium for annual policies sold to
this group in 2019, defining the terms you use.
12.3 You are an actuary working for a general insurance company. You have been asked to review the
premium rates for a class of business. An underwriter has provided you with the total claims paid
in each of the last three years and the amount of premiums written in each of those years.
Suggest reasons why this information is unlikely to be sufficient for determining the revised risk
premiums.
12.4 Each policy in a certain class covers two types of peril. Peril I occurs for 5% of policies and results
in losses which are uniformly distributed between £250 and £850. Peril II occurs for 15% of
policies and results in losses that average £40 and are all under £100.
Calculate the reduction in the risk premium for these policies if an excess of £100 is introduced.
(You should assume that the two perils are independent and that introducing an excess would
have no effect on loss frequencies or distributions.)
12.5 You are the pricing actuary for a large proprietary general insurer that writes personal lines
Exam style
business.
You are considering introducing a compulsory excess on its comprehensive private motor
business for all new business.
Explain how you would calculate the percentage change in the premium rates from the
previous calculation, in order to allow for the excess. [8]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 40 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 41
Chapter 12 Solutions
12.1 (a) The most recent years’ experience is most likely to represent the current situation, and so
be the most relevant.
However, since the experience is likely to be incomplete, you will probably have to make
adjustments for outstanding claims and IBNR, particularly for long-tailed business.
(b) The experience of older years has the advantage that it will be more complete.
However, it may not be appropriate to the current situation due to trends in frequency /
severity, and changes in risk, cover, type of claim, etc.
12.2 The formula given here assumes that acpc includes the expected payments for outstanding claims
in nominal amounts (ie allowing for any inflation). The office premium per policy, OP, is given by:
cf 1 t acpc 1 inf
2.5 2.5
OP EXP1 EXP2 OP PROF OP
1 i 0.5d
t the annual expected change in claim frequency from 2017 to 2019
infl the expected annual rate of claims inflation
i the assumed rate of investment income on technical reserves
d the expected delay from accident to settlement
EXP1 the assumed amount of expenses per policy
EXP2 the expenses per premium (eg commission plus a bit)
PROF the loading for profit and contingencies
We are given 2017 claims information and we assume that claims in our base data occur
mid-year, on average. We also assume that policies are written evenly over 2019 and that claims
occur on average after 6 months. Claims from policies written in 2019 are therefore expected to
occur on average at the end of 2019. Hence we project from 01/07/17 to 31/12/19, ie for 2½
years.
12.3 The claims data should be incurred as well as paid, in order to be able to analyse outstanding
amounts separately.
There is no allowance for IBNR, outstanding claims, reopened claims and partially settled claims.
Even claims incurred are unlikely to be sufficient; a triangulation of claims by year or month of
accident would be preferable.
The claims data and the premiums data would not correspond. We need earned premiums not
written premiums and claims on an accident year basis.
We cannot adjust the data for large or exceptional claims or one-offs, such as catastrophes.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 42 SP8-12 Rating methodologies and bases
There is no allowance for inflation of past claims. Also we need to allow for different claim types
(eg property damage and liability) and maybe also different claim sizes having different inflation
indices.
The past might not be a good guide to the future.
There might be changes in policy conditions, levels of cover, underwriting, target market, product
mix, perils covered etc.
We would need exposure data as well as premium data.
There is no information from which to judge the premium adjustments for different rating factors.
We also must consider interactions and correlations between different rating factors.
We cannot allow for trends in claim amount and claim frequency separately.
Data is not split between smaller (attritional) and larger claims. This split may be useful as
different trends might apply.
We would also require information on environmental factors affecting claims experience, such as
economic conditions, legal influences and technical changes.
We need information regarding the reinsurance arrangements. Also, we need to know whether
the amounts are net or gross of reinsurance.
12.4 Peril I has an average loss size of £550, so the risk premium without excess is given by:
RP 0.05 550 0.15 40 27.50 6 33.50
With the excess, claims are for lower amounts: £450 on average for Peril I, £0 for Peril II, so:
RP 0.05 450 0.15 0 22.50
Hence the reduction in risk premium is £11.
Alternatively, you can also use: 0.05 100 + 0.15 40 = 11. If you use this method then make sure
that you explain yourself clearly.
12.5 To calculate the percentage change in premiums
Data needed:
claims over the last, say five years, from the ground up
exposure over the same period
claim handling expenses and their inflation. [½ each]
First assess how much the risk premium changes as a result of introducing the excess. [½]
For every, say 100 policies, we can work out our total expected claims cost assuming no excess
(ie from the ground up), by multiplying the expected frequency by the expected severity. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-12: Rating methodologies and bases Page 43
We then work out the frequency and average severity of claims that are beneath the proposed
excess, and the frequency and average severity of claims that are above it. [1]
The new total claims cost will reduce by:
excess amount number of claims expected above the excess [½]
plus
avg. severity of claims beneath the excess expected no. of claims beneath the excess [½]
The percentage reduction in risk premium can therefore be calculated by comparison with the
risk premium prior to the introduction of the excess. [½]
However, the office premium rate may not decrease by this percentage. [½]
For example, we may expect expenses to be lower due to the lower number of small claims. We
would therefore adjust the office premium to allow for this change in expected expenses. [1]
We may also expect policyholders’ attitudes to claiming to be different some may not now
bother claiming if they know there’s an excess (eg on claims that only just breach the excess
level), particularly if there is an NCD system in use. [½]
On the other hand, we may get people exaggerating claims in order to ‘recover’ the excess. [½]
We may also need to change the allowance for reinsurance, if any. [½]
The profit loading may also change in particular because on average we will now have smaller
premiums. [1]
[Maximum 8]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold
for the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is
owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a
subsidiary of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or
photocopy any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it
is not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through
the profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished
using the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
SP8-13: Further considerations when rating Page 1
Further considerations when
rating
Syllabus objectives
3.1 Analyse the various components of a general insurance premium.
3.2 Describe the basic methodology used in rating general insurance business.
3.3 Suggest the various factors to consider when setting rates.
3.4 Evaluate appropriate rating bases for general insurance contracts, having regard to:
– return on capital
– underwriting considerations
– reinsurance considerations
– investment
– policy conditions such as self retention limits
– the renewal process
– expenses.
The above objectives are covered in part in this chapter.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-13: Further considerations when rating
0 Introduction
The last chapter discussed the rating process and the items that make up the office premium.
This chapter considers some of other considerations that should be allowed for when calculating
the premium to charge.
Section 1 covers underwriting and the selection of rating factors.
Section 2 discusses practical considerations.
Section 3 describes systems of experience rating.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-13: Further considerations when rating Page 3
1 Underwriting considerations / rating factors
The work involved in the underwriting and acceptance of risks varies greatly from one class
of business to another and from insurer to insurer.
For personal lines business such as motor and household, risks are accepted and rated
almost entirely by reference to rating factors determined directly from answers to questions
on proposal forms. Reference to an underwriter is only made in exceptional cases or for
very large risks.
This is because risks are relatively homogeneous in nature and the cost of individual underwriting
is not usually justified.
For fire insurance on a large industrial complex, on the other hand, underwriting will be a
skilled job based on detailed reports from brokers, surveyors, fire officers and so on. The
underwriter might also visit the site and may make recommendations that help reduce the
level of risk, for example, the introduction of sprinklers and burglar alarms. Therefore, the
rating will be based on much more than a set of objective rating factors.
Recall that fire insurance is another term for commercial property insurance. The considerations
for pricing risks on an individual basis are discussed further in Section 2.1.
1.1 Purpose of rating factors
We should establish the pricing structure to give equity between policyholders. The
primary function of the rating structure is to categorise policyholders into broadly similar,
homogeneous risk groups, so that premium rates are appropriate to the relative risk of each
such sub-group. A fair structure will reduce the likelihood of anti-selection by policyholders
where a higher proportion of policies are taken up within the risk cells that are relatively
under-priced.
The choice of rating factors is heavily constrained by the rating factors currently used in the
market and the reliability of data to support alternatives.
Let’s suppose that a company wants to extend its portfolio to an additional class of business.
Because the company is new to the class, it will not have its own data on which to base a rating
structure. The dangers of selection would make the company very reluctant to move away from
the rating structures already established within the market.
Even if a company believed that a different rating structure was appropriate, the company would
be nervous about moving away from the market structure unless it was certain (ie from reliable
data) that an alternative structure was appropriate.
However, we will require new rating structures from time to time. We may base these purely
on subjective views or may follow a detailed analysis after a period of collecting relevant
data.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-13: Further considerations when rating
(a) Subjective views. This process will start with an underwriter (or someone) having a hunch
that a further rating factor will have a material impact on defining the risk more precisely.
Because the company has a relaxed view on risk, it decides to rely upon the underwriter’s
judgement and whatever scant data it can put together to adopt the new rating factor
immediately, without collecting the data as above. In the view of this company, the
possibility of enhanced profits outweighs the risk of selection.
(b) Detailed analysis. This process could start in the same way, with a ‘feeling’ that a
particular factor is relevant. The company then starts to collect as much information as
possible on this new factor. It is quite plausible that no reliable past data exists, and that
the company will need to collect data gradually over the next two or three years.
Assuming that the data is collectable, the company will eventually have enough data to
test statistically whether the new factor helps define the risk.
Rating factors are often initially introduced with very small differentials in price between the new
risk groups. The rating differentials could then be adjusted over time in line with the actual
experience.
1.2 Requirements of rating factors
The most important requirement of a rating factor is that it helps to provide a good definition of
the risk.
Good rating factors will satisfy the following requirements:
define the risk clearly
In quantitative terms, this means that the rating factor should be correlated with the
expected claims.
do not correlate too closely with other rating factors
This ensures that they add value to the underwriting process.
are practical to obtain and record
We would not ask policyholders for their claims history over their entire lifetime as they
may be unable to recall all the information.
are objective
This avoids disputes between the insurer and policyholder over the truth of the
information provided.
are verifiable and preferably factual
This helps to prevent fraudulent behaviour.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-13: Further considerations when rating Page 5
are acceptable to the policyholder
Otherwise, the insurer may lose potential customers or renewals. For example, requiring
genetic test results to be disclosed might be unacceptable to policyholders.
are non-manipulable
For example, we would not ask policyholders how many claims they expected to make!
are acceptable to the market, eg brokers may object to a proposed new rating factor.
For example, in car insurance, the insurer would really like to know whether the insured is a
good driver, but answers would be subjective and hard to monitor. Therefore, we use
objective proxies, such as the number of years since the last claim or the level of no-claim
bonus that has been earned.
If the insurer cannot obtain and, if need be, verify the data, it would not be reliable as a rating
factor. One exception regarding objectivity is for larger risks where underwriters make their own
judgements. This is perfectly acceptable. However, it would not be acceptable to leave the
judgements to the policyholders.
Hence, we should choose each additional rating factor to remove as much of the residual
heterogeneity as possible.
Rating factors are considered in more detail in Chapters 2 and 3.
1.3 Selection of rating factors
The rating factors chosen should have as much explanatory power as possible and remove
the heterogeneity within each risk group. In selecting the rating factors to be used, we
usually do an analysis of variance (ANOVA) exercise. This ANOVA can be a one-way
analysis, two-way analysis or multivariate analysis.
ANOVA was introduced in an earlier exam. Each of the above types of analysis is explained in
more detail in Chapter 17 (multivariate analysis) of this course.
In the case of one-way ANOVA, we investigate the amount of variability explained by each
factor without taking into consideration the correlation between factors.
We may find that when we split policyholders into different age groups, for example, the
variability of claims experience within each age group is small relative to the variability in the
overall portfolio of risks. Hence the factor ‘age’ helps to ‘explain’ the variability because, after
grouping the policyholders by age, there is little residual variability left within the groups.
In a two-way analysis of variance, we investigate each factor and the correlations between
any two of the factors. This can explain the variability better than a one-way analysis.
For example, the one-way analysis may show that the size of a household claim is highly
related to both the number of bedrooms and the value of the contents. A two-way analysis
may reveal that these two factors are in fact highly correlated, so that only one should be
included in the pricing factors.
Multivariate analysis, such as generalised linear models (GLMs), is an extension of this. It
allows all factors, as well as the correlations between any numbers of the factors, to be
investigated.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-13: Further considerations when rating
Generalised linear models are covered in detail in Chapter 16.
We need to achieve a balance between the number of rating factors and the homogeneity of
the risks. We should choose each additional rating factor to remove as much of the
residual heterogeneity as possible. If the factors do not sufficiently distinguish between
different levels of risks, insurers are likely to attract the under-priced risks and lose the
over-priced ones. However, if too many factors are chosen, insurers may experience
difficulty due to high administrative costs and resistance of the market and brokers.
Furthermore, the factors may be reflecting noise in the data sample, rather than a true
differential in risk.
Question
State, with reasons, whether the following suggested rating factors could be used in private
motor:
(i) Level of driving ability: excellent / good / OK / poor / dreadful
(ii) Colour of your car: white / black / red / blue / other
(iii) How often you drive on high risk roads: very often / sometimes / rarely
(iv) Car garaged at night: yes / no
Solution
(i) Driving ability No. It is subjective and not directly verifiable.
(ii) Car colour Possibly, although it might be argued to be irrelevant, and
shades may not be easily measurable.
(iii) Risky roads No. It is subjective and impossible to verify.
(iv) Night garage Yes, although it would be impractical to check that an
available garage was actually used.
There is little value in having a rating factor that is fully correlated with another rating factor. In
case you find this concept hard to follow, we have set out a simple illustration below.
Illustration of how rating factors reduce heterogeneity
Suppose that for an imaginary class of insurance business for children, policies have one of ten
different levels of risk. Grade 1 is the lowest risk and grade 10 is the highest. Suppose also that,
on initial inspection of each individual policy, it is not possible to tell the grade of risk.
We happen to have a sample of thirty different policies (of which there are three at each grade,
although of course, we don’t know that).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-13: Further considerations when rating Page 7
For premium rating purposes, we believe that height is a primary rating factor. A division of our
sample of thirty by height generates the following two cells:
Short Tall
1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, 5, 5, 6, 7, 7, 9 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 6, 7, 8, 8, 8, 9, 9, 10, 10, 10
By inspection, we can see that height has been very effective in defining the amount of risk.
However, there is still some residual heterogeneity within each risk group (eg the grade 9 risk in
the short cell and the grade 2 risk in the tall cell).
Let’s try to make more homogeneous cells by introducing age as a further rating factor:
Short Tall
Young 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 4, 4, 5, 5, 7, 7, 9 4, 5, 8
Old 3, 6 2, 3, 6, 6, 7, 8, 8, 9, 9, 10, 10, 10
Age and height for children are closely correlated, so this additional rating factor has not helped
us much. There is still some heterogeneity within each cell.
We therefore try another factor, which is less closely correlated with the original rating factor.
Let’s try gender:
Short Tall
Boy 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 6, 8
Girl 4, 5, 5, 6, 7, 7, 9 7, 8, 8, 9, 9, 10, 10, 10
With these two rating factors we have started to generate relatively homogeneous cells.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-13: Further considerations when rating
2 Practical considerations
There’s an old joke that running a general insurance company can be likened to driving a car:
the chief executive controls the steering wheel
the actuary looks out of the back window shouting to the chief executive about which way
to steer.
(In the original joke, there are other people in the car, like marketing and sales managers, but let’s
stick to our own discipline for now …)
So far, this and previous chapters have presented a very ‘actuarial’ approach to pricing. That is,
you get the past data, adjust it and project it, and as a result get a set of premium rates to charge
going forward.
However, in the real world, things aren’t always so pragmatic, and the price actually charged by
an insurer can be very different from the theoretical office premium.
This section explains some additional considerations when pricing general insurance.
2.1 Individual risk rating
The approaches that we have discussed (in this and the previous chapter) may equally be
applied at class or individual insured level. In both cases we need good quality and
adequate data and we need to allow for trends and inflation. In reality data may be sparse at
an individual insured level.
An example here would be if you were asked to provide premium rates for a risk where there
simply is no experience. This often arises when the risk is unique and there is no vast database of
claims experience that the actuary can reliably analyse using the techniques we have discussed so
far.
Here experienced underwriters can assist. Using their knowledge of similar risks, we can
estimate appropriate assumptions for the particular perils (and amounts) that apply to the
specific case in question.
This was mentioned in Section 1, where we discussed underwriting considerations. There will
inevitably be a certain amount of judgement (or gut feel) involved.
2.2 Terms and conditions and other coverage changes
We will need to adjust premiums when an individual policyholder alters the basis of risk.
We will assess the degree to which the risk potential has changed and its statistical impact
on claims experience. We can then decide an appropriate premium adjustment.
An example of this is a commercial property policyholder upgrading the fire prevention system in
its insured building. As the risk has probably changed, the policyholder would normally be obliged
to tell the insurer, and the insurer then has to decide how to deal with it. In this example, notice
that the adjustment in premium would be downward (assuming that the upgrade in fire
prevention system reduces the likelihood of claims).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-13: Further considerations when rating Page 9
Not all changes in risk have to be notified to the insurer during the period of cover. The policy
document will state which events should be notified. If a notifiable event is not reported, the
insurer usually has the right to not pay any claims on that policy, or to cancel the policy
retrospectively.
2.3 Market considerations
The prices actually charged by the insurer will reflect the company’s market share objective
and the competitive environment. There are a number of reasons why the rate charged by
the underwriter might differ from the theoretically correct premium. These include:
Business objectives
For example, if the insurer is attempting to increase market share it may charge premiums
that are lower than the technical premiums. This may be a short-term measure to satisfy the
objectives of the management and shareholders.
Competitive pressures
Most general insurance policies are renewable annually. It follows that policyholders have
the opportunity to review the market and move to another insurer if they feel that the insurer
will sell them insurance on better terms. Therefore, in setting its premium rates, the insurer
must have regard to commercial market considerations. If a company tries to charge what it
considers to be the theoretically correct premiums, and if these premiums are well above
those its competitors charge, it may obtain or retain only a small amount of business.
On the other hand it may not want such loss-making business.
Some segments of the market are highly competitive. Insurers have to adopt market rates
to maintain market share.
Once new business and loyalty has been won, it may be possible to increase premium rates in
order to restore profitability, as long as persistency is not harmed.
Conversely, in some circumstances, companies may be able to charge a higher premium due to
customer loyalty or a strong brand. Some customers may have a lower tendency to ‘shop around’
and so, in these cases, the insurer may seek to maximise profit by charging the largest amount
each policyholder is willing to accept.
In these cases, insurers might charge a higher premium to customers who renew compared to
new customers (who are often much more price-sensitive). This is called inertia pricing.
Competitors’ rates are more important for classes with homogeneous risks and large volumes
than those with very large and heterogeneous individual risks.
Question
List factors other than the premium that may influence a policyholder when deciding whether or
not to renew the contract.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-13: Further considerations when rating
Solution
Other factors that might influence a policyholder are:
the level of service
the policy conditions
the reputation of the company
the ability to pay out claims
the reluctance to pay out claims
any loyalty discounts
any advertising campaign
inertia (ie it’s convenient not to have to shop around)
payment method (eg if paying by direct debit, no effort is required to shop around).
Difficulty in establishing the technical price
In some classes, experience is extremely volatile and significant judgement is required in
pricing the business. In these classes, it is more likely for the price to be market supply and
demand driven rather than precisely reflecting the underlying risks.
This is often the case for high layers of reinsurance, for example, or for marine and aviation
insurance, or for insurance covering nuclear power stations.
Market conditions
Market conditions can be determined by the stage of the insurance cycle that the product being
considered is at. The insurance cycle, also known as the underwriting cycle, was described in
Chapter 8.
Question
Explain what is meant by the ‘soft phase’ of the insurance cycle.
Solution
The ‘soft phase’ of the insurance cycle is the stage when there is more competition in the market,
and so premium rates are generally low and therefore less profitable.
During the soft phase of the insurance cycle, some insurers are willing to follow the market
downturn to some degree to maintain a minimum volume of business to support the fixed
overhead costs. In addition, the cost of renewal business is lower than for new business,
given the lower levels of costs associated with renewals, and so the company may be
willing to reduce the premium to maintain its customer base.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-13: Further considerations when rating Page 11
As discussed above, the insurer may charge renewing customers a higher premium than that
charged to new customers. If this is the case, it will make more profit from each renewal,
compared to new policies. On the other hand, if premiums are getting cheaper due to increased
competition, renewing customers may be more tempted to switch insurers. The insurer may
decide to reduce premiums, particularly on renewal, in order to encourage customer loyalty.
Similarly, in the hard market, insurers will charge a higher rate than is required to cover the
technical risks.
They can make more profit because there is less competition.
The importance of the insurance cycle in pricing is discussed more fully below, in Section 2.5.
Market acceptability
As mentioned above, the theoretical premium for renewal business may be lower than that
for new business.
This was discussed in the previous chapter in the section on expense loadings.
For some classes of business, for example motor insurance, the claims experience for new
business can also be significantly worse than for renewal business.
The theoretical premium should therefore be higher for new business than for renewals.
However, charging these different premiums in practice is unlikely to be acceptable to
consumers. As a result, the insurer usually charges the same premium for both new
business and renewals, with the total costs spread over all contracts.
The renewal process
We are saying that the expenses associated with writing new business are generally much higher
than those for renewing business. This means that, in most cases, established insurers will incur
lower expenses than new insurers because a lower proportion of their business will be for new (as
opposed to renewing) policies. Therefore established insurers could charge lower premiums.
Whilst this is generally true, there are reasons why new insurers may not necessarily have higher
expense levels than their more established competitors.
Because of the difference in costs between new and renewal business, it does not
(necessarily) follow that an established insurer with a stable portfolio and a high renewal rate
can charge lower premiums than one with a low renewal rate. A new entrant to the market
will have relatively high expenses until its business matures and its renewal rates stabilise.
Question
A student having read the above paragraph told a friend:
‘There won’t ever be any new motor insurers. They wouldn’t attract any business because the
rates they would have to charge are higher than those charged by an established insurer.’
Comment on this statement.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-13: Further considerations when rating
Solution
The statement is almost certainly not true.
A new company may be able to subsidise its premium rates until it has a mature portfolio.
The new company may accept a lower profit margin, especially if it entered the market at the top
of the insurance cycle.
The brand name of the company may be attractive to potential customers.
The company may introduce innovative product designs, eg new scales of NCD.
A new company may employ good managers and use efficient new processes that result in lower
expenses than the established companies.
Innovative product design or services may attract customers.
A new company will not need to have its profits depressed by the need to fund any prior year
deficits which some established insurers might have.
On the other hand, the newer entrant may have lower overheads to be spread per policy.
Furthermore, the newer entrants are unlikely to be burdened with or benefit from possible
prior years reserve deficiencies / surpluses; that is, the need to increase / release reserves
for business already on the books.
Use of no-claims discounts
A no-claim discount (NCD) system is where an individual policyholder may be granted a discount
from the relevant base premium depending on his or her claims experience. They are common on
private motor insurance, but can be applied to other personal lines products, such as household
insurance.
These are often set by market practice rather than being statistically justifiable.
2.4 Profit optimisation
Insurers can optimise the total profit by accepting a lower profit margin on individual
policies in return for a higher total business volume. Although a lower profit is achieved by
each policy, the business volume generated by the lower level of premium may result in a
higher total profit to the company.
In other words, the profit per policy will be lower, but the total profit across all policies may be
higher as a result of selling a greater number of policies. Hence, price elasticity is a key
consideration when considering a change in premium rates.
This needs to be balanced against the potentially increased risk of a larger, lower margin
portfolio.
We’re not talking about price elasticity here. Even if the company succeeds in increasing profit by
reducing prices, the resulting portfolio will be more risky (ie the profit margin only needs to drop
by a small amount to result in a loss).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-13: Further considerations when rating Page 13
2.5 Pricing and the insurance cycle
The insurance cycle is a phenomenon that affects all forms of insurance and reinsurance. It
is driven by the changing levels of profitability in the market arising from changes in market
capacity.
Stages of the insurance cycle
When premium rates are profitable (hard), new entrants are attracted to the market. This
increased capacity causes rates to fall until they may even become loss making. At this
point some market participants will leave the market, or reduce their market share. This
effect may be exacerbated by catastrophes and economic factors. This reduction in market
capacity leads to rates increasing once more until we reach our starting point of the cycle
and it begins again.
This was also discussed in Chapter 8.
Reasons for insurance cycles
The cyclical nature of premium rate movements is a very real market challenge, perhaps the
most challenging aspect of managing a portfolio of risks for many lines of business.
It is important that the insurer is aware of the stage of the insurance cycle that the market is in
when deciding on the final premium.
There are many causes of underwriting cycles, including:
a delay in the understanding of the emergence of higher claims costs, which leads
to under-pricing of current risks
inflows and outflows of capacity to the market, often as a result of large-scale
catastrophes
Catastrophes may jolt prices higher due to providers leaving the market hence causing a
reduction in supply.
deliberate under-pricing (or the use of expense advantage) by key players in an
attempt to drive out competitors
an attempt to grow in volume in order to cover high fixed expenses (or to achieve
market share)
pricing strategy being determined by chasing market prices (upwards or
downwards) rather than being based on sound technical prices, with no player in a
given market willing to be the first to break the cycle
the level of investment return available to offset underwriting losses.
Different markets are impacted to a greater or lesser extent by these factors, and certain
markets tend to exhibit more or deeper cyclical trends than others.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-13: Further considerations when rating
Importance of knowing the current stage of the insurance cycle
We should know the stage of the insurance cycle that the market has reached in order to
assess how to allow for business objectives and competition. While we should evaluate
every risk on its available information (or that pertaining to its class), the tide and optimism
of the market can often affect judgement; and indeed, the data itself may be less reliable at
certain stages of the market.
Example
In a rapidly rising market, the insurer might give priority to the new business area in the
allocation of systems and administration time, with the result that claims information might
be less up-to-date.
In addition, we might be less prudent in our claims estimation and reserving, if we believe
that the business currently being written is more profitable than it really is.
Dealing with the insurance cycle
Market cycles are a feature of the insurance market, but arguably we can reduce the
associated risk, if we base prices on a model with a sound technical cost base and
communicate this clearly to the pricing decision-makers. Everyone then clearly recognises
and understands departures from the technical price. Actuaries can have a key role to play
in both of these areas.
Question
‘There is no point in offering an actuarial theoretical premium rate if the rest of the market is
undercutting you’. Discuss whether you agree with this comment.
Solution
There is certainly no point in offering higher premium rates than everybody else, if the higher
price means that you attract no business and the business would have been profitable at the
lower rate.
However, if the business would be unprofitable at the lower rate, then it may be best not to take
on the business (although a view will have to be taken on the long-term impact of turning down
business – for example, it may in the long run be more expensive not to sell business and suffer
the later cost of trying to rebuild market share).
There are also differentiators other than price. A more attractive product may still win business
despite being more expensive if the added benefits outweigh the extra cost to the policyholder.
Further practical considerations in rating are discussed in the next chapter, when we consider the
frequency-severity and burning cost approaches.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-13: Further considerations when rating Page 15
There can be a correlation between investment markets and insurance cycles. The
circumstances found in many territories in the world during the six or so years following the
economic downturn in 2007/8, meant that corrective cycle strategies were often difficult to
implement. Features of this period were typically: general financial pessimism, very low
financial return available from almost all asset classes, and the need to invest in
non-correlated implements such as hedge funds.
2.6 Other influences on rating
These will include the following issues:
Competition and the need to maintain or build market share.
For example, many new companies offer artificially low premium rates in order to build a
customer base. This has been discussed above.
The availability of capital to support new business.
A large capital base means that riskier products or larger volumes of business can be
written. The downside is that, in return for offering greater capital, the providers of that
capital will probably require a greater return, which means higher loadings for profit are
needed in the premium rates.
The impact of reinsurance capacity.
If reinsurance is not readily available at an acceptable price, the original insurer may have
to increase its premium rates to compensate for the extra risk it retains. In the extreme,
it may not be able to offer the product at all.
The sophistication of sales and quotes systems.
Complicated flexible sales and quotes systems cost money, which probably has to be
recouped from premium rates eventually.
The demands of regulators in the rating area.
In some countries, there are regulatory restrictions on premium rates. This could simply
be a requirement to file rates with the regulators (as in parts of the US), or could be
restrictions on rates (maxima or minima) or rating factors used (as in some parts of
Africa).
Relationships with particular distributors or brokers.
For example, in order to appease a particular broker that brings in large volumes of
profitable business, a company might wish to tweak prices so that they favour that
broker’s target market.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-13: Further considerations when rating
Differences between the ‘direct’ approach and more traditional routes.
The direct approach refers to the relatively new approach of selling via the internet and
via direct telesales, the traditional routes being other channels such as using brokers and
company representatives.
The method of sale, as discussed in Chapter 7 (General insurance markets), will impact
premium rates. For example, selling over the internet should mean cheaper premium
rates as the ongoing expenses should be lower (although the initial development costs
will be high).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-13: Further considerations when rating Page 17
3 Experience rating systems
Although there is no specific Core Reading on this topic, experience rating systems are mentioned
several times throughout the course and are defined in the Glossary. We explain how they work
here, so that you can understand the material. This may also prove useful in the exam.
3.1 Description
An experience rating system is one in which the premium for each individual risk depends, at least
in part, on the actual claims experience of that risk.
The prospective rating factors that are used to define a rating structure can go only so far in
distinguishing between high and low risks. Thus, within any rating cell there will be a mixture of
different levels of risk. The concept underlying experience rating systems is that high-risk
policyholders tend to remain high-risk policyholders and low-risk policyholders tend to remain
low-risk policyholders. It follows that the more claims a policyholder has made in the past the
more likely they will be to make claims in the future. It therefore makes sense for an insurer to
charge relatively higher premiums in the future to policyholders who have frequently submitted
claims and relatively lower premiums in future to those who have been claim-free. Indeed, if they
do not adjust their premiums in this way, they may find that the low-risk policyholders are
identified and attracted away by competitors and they are left with the high-risk cases for which
the premiums will be inadequate.
Question
State the type of risk that this phenomenon is an example of.
Solution
Anti-selection.
Some experience rating systems are based on simply the occurrence of claims regardless of their
amount, whilst others take account of the cost of the claims. Either type of system may be
applied prospectively or retrospectively. It may be more advisable to try to ascertain the risk
factors that identify or cause the higher propensities to claim and rate the policy more accurately.
3.2 Prospective vs retrospective basis
With prospective rating, the premium at the renewal date depends on the experience of the risk
prior to that renewal. The insurer takes on all the underwriting risk in such an arrangement.
Prospective rating uses the past experience as a rating factor. NCD in private motor is a
prospective system of experience rating, because if you make a claim now it will affect your next
premium. The underwriting risk is that poor risks may not renew their policies so that the insurer
is unable to recoup its losses. Note how this contrasts with retrospective rating below.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-13: Further considerations when rating
With retrospective rating, the premium for the current policy period is adjusted, based on the
experience of that period of risk. A deposit premium, paid at the inception of the policy, will
usually be followed by an adjustment premium, or refund, at the end of the period.
Retrospective rating uses the experience during the exposure period as a rating factor. The
underwriting risk to the insurer is reduced here because a further premium may be charged
following poor experience by a risk during a particular year.
3.3 Number-based systems
This is where the premium adjustments (whether prospective or retrospective) are based on the
number of claims paid in respect of the policyholder, and the amounts of the claims are ignored.
The most common examples of experience rating systems based solely on the occurrence or non-
occurrence of claims, regardless of their amount, are the bonus-malus or NCD systems commonly
used in motor insurance for policies covering a single vehicle. Relating the future premiums to
the cost of claims would scarcely be practical in view of the time that may elapse before claims
are settled, and it is doubtful whether the additional information would significantly enhance the
predictive value.
You should have already come across NCD systems in earlier subjects. A bonus-malus system is a
type of NCD system in which the premium paid by a policyholder after a claim has been made
may be higher than the original premium paid when the policyholder first took out the policy.
You could think of the system as having negative as well as positive discounts. The term is used
throughout Continental Europe and elsewhere.
Systems based on claim frequency are generally used for small individual risks with relatively low
expected numbers of claims, as the variability of the actual claim cost in any one policy year
would be too great to judge the relative severity of the underlying risk.
3.4 Cost-based systems
This is where the premium adjustments (whether prospective or retrospective) are based on the
total amount of claims incurred in respect of the policyholder over a defined period.
Systems based on the cost of claims tend to be used for larger risks or groups of risks where the
aggregate cost of claims experienced within a year may be a more suitable indicator of the
relative level of the underlying risk.
Examples of classes that might use cost-based systems include motor fleet (for larger fleets) and
employers’ liability.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-13: Further considerations when rating Page 19
Question
State whether or not the following arrangements are examples of experience rating.
(i) Profit sharing, where the insurer charges a higher initial premium, and returns some profit
to policyholders whose claims are lower than expected.
(ii) The policyholder pays an end of year adjustment premium to reflect the amount of
exposure during the year (eg as in employer’s liability).
(iii) As for (i), but the adjustment is based on the insurer’s overall experience for all policies of
this type.
(iv) A system where a policyholder’s next premium is the average of the insurer’s book rates
and the policyholder’s average claims cost over the last year.
Solution
(i) Yes. This is a typical retrospective arrangement based on claim amount.
(ii) No. This adjustment is nothing to do with claims experience.
(iii) No. The adjustment is not based on the claims experience of the individual risk.
(iv) Yes. This is a simple prospective arrangement based on claim amount.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-13: Further considerations when rating
4 Glossary items
Having studied this chapter you should now read the following Glossary items:
Bonus hunger
Experience rating
Fleet rating
Loss sensitive
Swing rated.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-13: Further considerations when rating Page 21
Chapter 13 Summary
The work involved in the underwriting and acceptance of risks varies greatly from one class
of business to another, eg commercial property risks may be priced on an individual basis,
based on the underwriter’s subjective assessment of the risk.
Risks should be separated into homogeneous sub-groups for premium rating. An equitable
pricing structure will reduce the likelihood of anti-selection. However, the choice of rating
factors is constrained by those used in the market and the reliability of data to support
alternative rating factors.
Rating factors should define the risk clearly, not correlate too closely with other rating
factors, be practical, objective, verifiable and acceptable to the market.
An analysis of variance (ANOVA) can be undertaken to help determine the rating factors.
This might be a one-way, two-way or multivariate analysis (eg GLMs) – the allowance for
correlations between factors depends on the approach taken.
Each additional rating factor should be chosen to remove as much of the residual
heterogeneity as possible. However, too many rating factors can be expensive and be
unpopular with the customers and brokers.
The premium actually charged will differ from the office premium, as it should reflect the
company’s market share objective and the competitive environment. This might be the
case:
to meet business objectives, eg to increase market share
to maintain market share in highly competitive markets or in certain market
conditions (such as the ‘soft phase’ of the insurance cycle)
if it is difficult to establish the technical premium
if insurers can charge certain loyal customers more (inertia pricing)
if the market does not accept different premiums (eg between new business and
renewal premiums)
where no-claim discounts apply.
Theoretically, premiums for new business should be higher than those for renewals.
However, this is rarely the case due to market pressures. This means that an established
insurer with a stable portfolio and a high renewal rate can usually charge lower premiums
overall than one with a low renewal rate, although this might not always be the case.
Insurers can optimise the total profit by accepting a lower profit margin on individual policies
in return for a higher total business volume, which may result in a higher total profit to the
company.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-13: Further considerations when rating
It is important to know the stage of the insurance cycle the market is currently facing in order
to understand how business and competition should be handled. We can try to reduce the
risk of the insurance cycle by accurately modelling the theoretical price and communicating
this to the pricing decision-makers.
There are other practical considerations affecting premium rates, which include:
competition and market share
capital availability
reinsurance capacity
sales and quotes systems
regulations
relationships with sellers
the method of sale.
Adjustments to premiums will also be required when an individual policyholder alters the
basis of risk.
Experience rating is where the premium a policyholder pays depends on their individual
claims experience. It can be applied prospectively or retrospectively, using claim numbers or
claim amounts.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-13: Further considerations when rating Page 23
Chapter 13 Practice Questions
13.1 (i) Define experience rating.
(ii) Briefly describe the various types of experience rating system.
(iii) State the two most common types of experience rating.
13.2 You are about to assess the premium rates for a class of business. List, under appropriate
headings where possible, the information you would require to do this.
13.3 Give arguments supporting the use of experience rating in general insurance.
13.4 A firm advising on the design and construction of commercial and industrial properties has asked
Exam style
your company to provide professional indemnity insurance. The firm wants to pay a single
premium to your company for each property it designs.
Discuss:
(i) the principal characteristics and potential difficulties of the proposed scheme [9]
(ii) possible measures of exposure and rating factors that might be appropriate [7]
(iii) any other factors that will affect the premiums you propose. [3]
[Total 19]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-13: Further considerations when rating
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-13: Further considerations when rating Page 25
Chapter 13 Solutions
13.1 (i) Definition
Experience rating is a system whereby the premium of each individual risk depends, at least in
part, on the actual claims experience of that individual risk.
(ii) Types of experience rating systems
Experience rating can be applied either retrospectively or prospectively.
Prospective rating: premium at renewal depends on the experience prior to the current renewal
date.
Retrospective rating: an initial premium is adjusted at the end of the period of cover to reflect
claims experience in the year of cover.
The system can be based either on the number of claims or on amounts.
For amounts-based systems a credibility rating is used.
The credibility of claims experience is the measure of the weight to be attached to the experience
of the particular risk compared with the experience of the insurer’s portfolio of similar risks.
(iii) Most common types of experience rating
Trick question: we don’t think anyone can say which of the two splits is the main one:
ie numbers vs amounts, or retrospective vs prospective.
If asked to give examples of the two types in practice you could use the same pair whichever your
split, ie private motor NCD (prospective, numbers) vs a large motor fleet (retrospective, amounts).
13.2 Market
existing rates
usual rating structure
trends in premium rates
Risk premium
exposure measure and rating factors
full analysis of recent claims experience by rating factor
estimates of outstanding claims
likely delays in reporting / settlement
inflation assumption
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-13: Further considerations when rating
Expenses
claim frequency and handling costs
commission rates
per policy costs
contribution required to fixed costs (dependent on the number of policies)
expense inflation
Profit
required profit (or return on capital)
contingency margin
expected investment return
tax rates on investment and profit
13.3 Arguments supporting the use of experience rating in general insurance include:
premiums better reflect the risk
encourages better behaviour by policyholders
discourages small claims and associated admin costs
might be wanted by policyholders.
13.4 Professional indemnity insurance
Comment
A question about an unusual class of insurance may well come up in the exam. So this question is
included to get you thinking about exposure measures and rating factors outside the more usual
sphere of motor, employers’ liability etc. A good way to generate the necessary ideas is to think
about similar classes of insurance and adapt the ideas to this class. Also in the first part of the
course, the Core Reading sets out the ideal features of a risk (to make it insurable). Intelligent
application of that list could be useful here.
(i) Principal characteristics and potential difficulties of the proposed scheme
Characteristics
Cover not fully defined in the question: presumably the firm wants to be indemnified in
the event of any claim, irrespective of when the claim is made. [1]
Claims would be against inappropriate advice on design and construction. [½]
Infrequent claims. [½]
Large average amounts and high variability of claim amount. [1]
Possibility of latent design faults with lengthy notification and settlement delays. [1]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-13: Further considerations when rating Page 27
Claim inflation and trends in court awards might be significant. [1]
Difficulties
Very little data from which to establish appropriate premiums. [½]
Difficulty in establishing liability and date of loss: possibility of protracted legal battles. [½]
Have to calculate lots of single premiums (rather than one amount for the whole year),
which may be onerous. [½]
Building experts required to assess each risk. [½]
Each building is unique, and will require a detailed report to assess the risks involved. The
individual nature of buildings makes it difficult to assess the quality of the advice given on
each. [1]
Trends in building design and construction may make it difficult to assess the risks
involved. [½]
It will be difficult to assess the competence of the firm. [½]
Obtaining a suitable spread of risks. There is a danger that we are exposed to only one
firm, which could give poor advice. [½]
Reinsurers will be wary of providing cover on such uncertain business (except at a high
price). [½]
[Maximum 9]
(ii) Possible exposure measures and rating factors
Possible exposure measures
fees charged
cost of building property
sum insured (value of building)
size of building (floor area) [½ each]
Rating factors
general experience of the firm and experience of employees, eg number of years trading,
payroll, number and qualifications of staff, etc [1]
type of building [½]
construction materials [½]
use of building [½]
occupation of occupier [½]
type of design [½]
deductibles, if any [½]
number of floors or size of floor space [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-13: Further considerations when rating
past claims experience, if any [½]
location (eg UK, Europe, US) [½]
[Maximum 7]
(iii) Other factors affecting premiums
expenses (high initial and high claim settlement costs)
investment income (long periods before claims)
profit (return on capital) required
competitors’ premiums
desire to gain business
possibility of anti-selection (less likely if it is a professional requirement to have such
insurance cover)
regulatory constraints, eg maximum or minimum premiums
currency risk, if business is located overseas. [½ each, maximum 3]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 1
Rating using frequency-
severity and burning cost
approaches
Syllabus objectives
3.5 Discuss the burning cost approach to pricing.
3.5.1 Describe the burning cost approach to rating.
3.5.2 Determine the assumptions required when using this approach.
3.5.3 Outline the practical considerations when using this approach.
3.6 Discuss the frequency / severity approach to pricing.
3.6.1 Describe the frequency / severity approach to rating.
3.6.2 Determine the assumptions required when using this approach.
3.6.3 Outline the practical considerations when using this approach.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
0 Introduction
So far, we have covered the general principles employed in rating general insurance business. We
now discuss two specific techniques that are used under the cost plus approach to calculate the
risk premium (ie the expected cost of claims in the period that the premiums will apply):
the frequency-severity approach
the burning cost approach.
The loadings described in Chapter 12 would then be applied to this risk premium, together with
further considerations, such as rating factors and practical considerations (discussed in
Chapter 13), to arrive at the premium to be charged.
Question
List the loadings that would be applied to the risk premium to derive the office premium.
Solution
Loadings would be made to allow for the cost of reinsurance, expenses (including commission),
profit and return on capital. Allowance may also be made for investment income (as a negative
loading), tax and contingencies (to the extent not allowed for in the profit loading).
Even though both of these approaches are commonly used in rating general insurance, the
precise meaning of these terms can sometimes be a little ambiguous.
At a very high level, the term ‘frequency-severity’ can be used to describe any rating technique
that projects frequency and severity separately, and then combines the two in order to calculate
the risk premium.
This contrasts with a burning cost approach, which (pretty much) ignores the number of claims,
total claims
but rather projects to obtain the risk premium directly.
total exposure
In practice, there are variations within each method. The Core Reading in Section 1 of this
chapter describes a specific frequency-severity approach in detail, which is mainly used for rating
a single commercial risk. The discussion of the burning cost approach in Section 2 is more
general, and covers various approaches.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 3
In each part, we cover some or all of the following topics:
a description of the method
advantages and disadvantages (relative to the other approach)
a description of the data required
adjusting for trends
developing loss values to their ultimate level
fitting distributions to trended and developed losses (first part only)
the use of simulation models (first part only)
practical considerations.
The premiums derived in this chapter are risk premiums. We would then convert these into office
premiums as discussed in the previous two chapters.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
1 Frequency-severity approach
1.1 Description
In general, we use the frequency-severity approach to calculate premiums for commercial
risks.
When we use this approach, we assess the expected loss cost for a particular insurance (or
reinsurance) structure by estimating the expected claim frequencies and severities for that
structure and combining the results.
The material in this section mainly covers a specific statistical approach, involving fitting
distributions to frequency and severity. We shall see later that this approach is particularly useful
where excesses, deductibles or limits apply. This material is written mainly in the context of
rating liability insurance on a single commercial risk, eg a large company, although it can be used
for rating other forms of business, eg excess of loss reinsurance.
The key assumption is that the loss frequency and severity distributions are not correlated.
The analysis and projection of frequencies is separate from the analysis and projection of claim
amounts.
Advantages and disadvantages
We list below some advantages and disadvantages of the approach that will be described in this
section relative to the burning cost approach, which is described in Section 2.
Note that the burning cost approach is based on aggregate claims, and so does not make use of
the number of claims or individual claim amounts.
Advantages of the frequency-severity approach are that:
This approach mirrors the underlying process – a number of losses are generated,
each with its own ultimate value – and so is readily understood by underwriters.
In other words, the model tries to reflect what happens in practice, in that claims occur
and each of these claims has a value. The burning cost approach simply looks at the total
claims, so takes no account of the underlying process.
We can use the approach for complex insurance structures.
In particular, the impact of deductibles or limits can be allowed for appropriately.
By separately assessing information on loss frequency and severity, we gain
additional insight into aggregate loss amounts.
It helps us to identify trends.
Trends in frequency and severity can be allowed for separately. These trends may not be
apparent if only the burning cost was considered. For example, an increasing frequency
may be offset by a decreasing severity, and so no trend would be observed if we were
only looking at the overall claims per exposure.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 5
Disadvantages of the frequency-severity approach are that:
Assessing the compound frequency-severity loss distribution has more onerous
data requirements (both quality and quantity) than assessing aggregate amounts.
For example, you do not need information on claim numbers to use the burning cost
approach.
A sufficient volume of data is required to:
– derive appropriate development factors with which to calculate ultimate claim
amounts
– fit statistical distributions to the data with an acceptable goodness of fit.
These processes will be covered in Sections 1.4 and 1.5 respectively.
This approach can be time-consuming for a single risk and requires a high level of
expertise.
We will see that it is much more complex than the burning cost approach. For example, it
often requires simulation techniques.
As a consequence, frequency-severity approaches are more usually found in commercial
lines (liability) classes of business.
This is because single risks can give rise to a large number of claims in commercial lines liability
classes, unlike in personal motor for example.
1.2 Data
As mentioned above, we require more data to parameterise separate frequency and severity
distributions than we do to assess aggregate amounts.
Information required
Chapter 12 covered the data requirements for rating using any cost plus approach. We now look
at the specific case of using the frequency-severity approach for rating liability insurance for a
single commercial risk, eg a large multi-national company.
The information required for frequency-severity rating of commercial risks is usually
provided by a broker, although for renewal business an insurer will usually have some
information on its own systems.
The broker will usually provide the following items:
Submission document
This provides background information about the insured as well as details of the cover
sought. This document is likely to be of a qualitative nature and written from an
underwriter’s viewpoint. However, information on the countries and industries in which the
insured operates may be useful as rating factors where an insurer has compiled benchmark
information.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
Exposure information
This shows the insured’s historical exposure as well as that projected for the prospective
policy period.
To allow for the actual future exposure turning out differently to that projected, we usually
express the final premium as a rate per unit of exposure so that it is adjustable (in line with
the exposure).
A deposit premium will be paid at the inception of the policy. This will usually be followed by an
adjustment premium, or refund, at the end of the period. This is because the size of the exposure
(eg number of staff employed during the policy year) is unlikely to be known with certainty at the
start of the period.
Individual loss information
This provides details on each historical loss. Large insureds may provide information on
several thousand past losses so should provide this information in electronic format rather
than hard copy for it to be of use.
So for a single commercial risk, the broker will provide qualitative background information (in a
submission document), plus details of the risk’s exposure (past and present) and claim history.
The suggested data requirements can be found in Chapter 10.
Common data issues
Form of data
We should obtain individual loss information gross of reinsurance and ideally ‘from the
ground up’ (FGU) for all claims.
Question
Define the term ‘from the ground up’.
Solution
‘From the ground up’ claims data shows all claims, no matter how small they are, and shows the
original claim amount. It is often used in reinsurance to refer to data which shows all claims, even
though reinsurance is only required for large claims.
If we only obtain losses above a certain threshold, the analysis may be complicated, and we
may need to make an assumption about the distribution of losses below this level. One
possible source of data for this sort of adjustment may be the insurer’s own databases.
Consistency between claims and exposure
The individual loss information must be consistent with the exposure information provided.
In particular, where we have adjusted exposure information to reflect corporate acquisitions
or disposals, we should adjust the treatment of individual loss information in a similar way.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 7
Adjustments for changes in risk were described in Chapter 12.
Choice of base period
We should obtain loss and exposure information for as many historical years as is possible.
Five years’ data are often suggested as a minimum requirement when we apply
frequency-severity approaches to liability classes, but more is desirable. (This volume of
information is generally available in the UK market but may not be in other countries.)
The period of historical data required for other classes would depend on the length of
reporting delays and typical claims frequency.
Question
Explain whether the base period required would be longer or shorter if the class of business had:
a shorter reporting delay
a lower claim frequency.
Solution
If the class of business had a shorter reporting delay, there will be more claims data available, and
so the base period required could be reduced.
If the class of business had a lower claim frequency, there will be less claims data, and so a longer
base period may be necessary.
1.3 Trending
When we use frequency-severity methods, we should apply separate frequency and severity
trends to losses.
Chapter 12 described, in general terms, the factors that would be allowed for to make the data
from the base period relevant for the period for which the new premium rates will apply. The
process of determining and applying these adjustments to the base data is often called ‘trending’.
Note that trending does not include developing the claims to ultimate values. That part of the
process is covered in Section 1.4.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
Question
List some of the adjustments that would be made to the base data in the trending process.
Solution
The base data would be adjusted to allow for:
unusual features in the base-period data
large or exceptional claims
trends and inflation
changes in the risk and/or cover (eg mix, cover, underwriting or reinsurance)
environmental changes.
We now explore in detail how these adjustments are actually applied when the frequency-
severity approach is being used. Under this approach, frequency and severity are considered
separately. For each, the combined impact of all the relevant adjustments is usually summarised
by constructing a series of index figures.
General considerations
We should:
first project historical frequencies and severities in line with assumed trends to
current values and
then project them to the mid-point of the future exposure period.
As such, the assumed trends will contain both past and future components.
Rather than applying a constant past annual trend rate, a more realistic approach is to apply
an index, which can reflect periods of high and low trend and incorporate discontinuities
caused by one-off changes in the legal environment.
For simplicity, some exam questions on rating have used a constant rate, eg 3% pa. Other
questions have provided an index showing figures for each year, for example:
Year 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015
Index 100 105 110 108 114
Although trends are typically thought to increase over time, decreasing trends can occur as
well. For example, a company that has strengthened its health and safety procedures may
show a decreasing incident frequency trend.
Having obtained a trend, be it increasing or decreasing, you should ask yourself whether it is
reasonable, and whether it is likely to continue in the future.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 9
We usually consider catastrophic losses separately, as we have mentioned in Chapter 12. It
is usual to use the output from one of the many catastrophe modelling systems rather than
take the average of past experience.
Catastrophe modelling will be discussed further in Chapter 21 (and in Subject SA3).
Frequency
The causes of frequency trends include changes in:
accident frequency
the propensity to make claims and other changes in the social and economic
environment
legislation
the structure of the risk.
Environmental influences, including social (which includes the propensity to make claims),
economic and legislative effects were discussed fully in Chapter 8.
Changes to the structure of the risk could include (in the case of employers’ liability insurance)
changes in the employee profile, working practices, policy conditions or underwriting.
The term ‘structure’ is sometimes used to specifically refer to changes in the policy conditions and
in particular, excesses/deductibles, limits or experience-rating arrangements. Examples of some
complex structure features are given later, in Section 1.6.
Question
State which of the above four causes of frequency trends are likely to be ‘one-off’ changes and
which are likely to be continual trends.
Solution
Changes in legislation and changes to the structure of the risk are likely to be one-off changes.
Changes in accident frequency, the propensity to make claims and the social and economic
environment are more likely to happen gradually over time, and so be continual trends.
For each historical policy year, we can calculate the frequency of losses as:
ultimate number of losses
frequency
exposure measure
The way in which the ultimate number of losses can be obtained from the number of losses
reported to date will be explained in Section 1.4. However, for now, you just need to recognise
that the number of claims divided by the appropriate exposure measure is calculated for each
year of account. For example, for employers’ liability insurance, this would be the number of
claims per employee. These observed frequencies would be analysed year-on-year.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
Although the pattern of historical frequencies by year for the individual risk provides an
indication of the frequency trend to apply, we rarely rely on this. More often we apply a
standard trend, which may be based on:
an analysis of all risks within an insurer’s portfolio, or
external information, such as industry surveys.
However, if there have been changes specific to the risk involved, the standard trend index should
be adjusted to allow for these if possible. Examples of such changes would be changes to the
policy conditions, to the employee profile, or to the health and safety measures employed.
If the exposure measure is expressed in monetary terms – for example wage-roll or turnover
– then it is important that, when we apply trends to the historical frequencies, we also allow
for inflation of this exposure measure.
When we have projected the frequency for each historical year in line with trends to the
prospective policy period, we can apply these to the projected exposure to produce a range
of estimates of the number of losses for the future period.
So, for each year in the base period, an estimate of the expected number of losses during the
rating period will be obtained.
Severity
The drivers of severity trends include:
economic inflation
changes in court awards and legislation
economic conditions
changes to the structure of the risk.
The first three of these were covered in Chapter 8.
We usually apply severity trending at the ground-up individual loss level (the whole loss
without deductions for excesses or deductibles), whereas we apply frequency trending to
the claim frequencies for each historical policy year.
This is an important difference. We end up with:
an estimate of the number of claims for each year in the base period, so we would obtain,
say five estimates if there were five years in the base period
an estimated claim amount for each individual claim in the base period, and there could
be lots of these!
As part of the process of deciding what trend should be applied to the claim amounts, the losses
may be grouped, eg into years. However, the trend adjustments would apply to each individual
loss. The adjusted claim amounts should then be relevant to the future rating period.
For each historical policy year, we can calculate the average severity of losses as:
ultimate cost of losses
average severity
ultimate number of losses
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 11
As with the frequency trend, we can use the observed pattern of historical severities for the
risk as an indication of the severity trend to apply but it is more common to apply a
standard trend.
For the UK, this may be based on the insurer’s whole portfolio or publicly available sources
such as the Association of British Insurers (ABI) or Office for National Statistics (ONS).
Although we apply trends at an individual loss level, it can be useful to review the pattern of
past severity values by policy year both:
before we apply the trends – as an indication of the historical trend to apply; and
after we apply the trends – if the projected severities are similar for each policy year,
this indicates that an appropriate trend has been applied.
Question
For employers’ liability insurance, give examples of possible drivers of:
frequency trends
severity trends.
Solution
Possible drivers of frequency trends include:
increasing compensation culture
propensity of no-win-no-fee arrangements
growth of claims management companies (placing of claims)
changes in health and safety regulations
court decisions
changes in economic conditions
emergence of latent claims
changes in policy terms, conditions, excesses, limits, etc.
Possible drivers of severity trends include:
salary inflation
court decisions / inflation, eg their assessment of compensation for pain and suffering
medical advances / medical inflation
inflation of legal costs
legislative changes (eg structured settlements)
interest rate changes (eg affects discount rate used for Ogden tables)
changes in policy terms, conditions, excesses, limits, etc.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
Split by size of claim
We may consider losses in aggregate or banded into two or more size-based groupings. If
we follow this approach, we will also need to split the frequency.
We usually apply the same severity trend to all claims irrespective of their size. It is
generally believed, however, that inflation affects different sized claims differently and that
the inflationary trend will be depend on the size of the claim. For example, small losses are
likely to have a relatively small legal expense component and so be less exposed to legal
cost inflation than large losses.
We can increase the accuracy by applying a severity trend that is a function of the size of
loss. Against this, the approach is more complicated and is rarely used for primary or low
excess layers.
For pricing non-proportional reinsurance contracts, the need to accurately estimate the individual
claim amounts becomes greater at high levels of excess.
Large losses
We should consider the impact of large losses. If we do not adjust for the impact of large
losses, we may obtain a misleading severity pattern and assume inappropriate severity
trends. Approaches include:
capping large losses (although the selected capping level will itself affect the
resulting trend)
basing the trend on the historical median rather than mean values
A few very large losses may distort the mean significantly but will have little effect on the
median if we have a large number of attritional claims. However, this approach might not
give enough allowance for large losses.
assessing large losses separately from smaller losses.
Any large losses that are removed from the severity analysis must also be removed from the
frequency analysis. They would then be allowed for separately, as discussed in Chapter 12.
Results of trending
Following trending, an estimate of the amount of each claim in the base period, had it occurred
during the future rating period, will be obtained.
When we have projected each individual loss in line with trends to the prospective policy
period, we can fit a claim size distribution to these observations.
After trending the losses, we would then develop them to their estimated ultimate values before
fitting a claim size distribution. We discuss how to obtain ultimate claim amounts in the next
section.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 13
1.4 Developing losses
Adjustments required
The claims data collected at any one point in time will have some claims that:
have been reported but have not been fully settled, ie outstanding reported claims
have occurred but have not been reported yet – these will not be included in the
database, but may arise on policies that were written during the base period.
Standard reserving techniques, such as the chain ladder or Bornhuetter-Ferguson methods, could
be used to calculate the ultimate overall claim amounts for each development year. These
methods are described in other exams. However, for the frequency-severity approach, we need
to consider the following two components separately:
the ultimate cost of outstanding reported claims
the number and ultimate cost of incurred but not reported claims.
Outstanding reported claims
For outstanding reported claims, the insurer will normally have data on any claim payments made
plus estimates of each outstanding claim amount (known as the ‘case estimate’). The sum of the
two is called the reported incurred claims, and so we have:
reported incurred claims claims paid case estimates .
The calculated risk premium should allow for expected differences between the current reported
incurred claims and the ultimate claim amounts expected to be paid. This will reflect any over- or
under-reserving in the case estimates. This adjustment is sometimes referred to as the ‘IBNER
(incurred but not enough reported) development’.
When we have obtained the data, we should increase individual loss amounts in line with
development factors to their estimated ultimate level.
Methods of doing this for the frequency-severity approach are discussed in detail below.
Incurred but not reported (IBNR) claims
We should also develop the reported loss count for each historical policy period to its
ultimate level. This will depend on the reporting delays experienced.
Methods for calculating the allowance for IBNR explicitly include:
simple ratio methods, where the IBNR is taken to be a percentage of a figure in the
accounts (eg annual premiums or claims)
using a delay table of reporting delays to estimate the number of outstanding claims and
multiplying this by the expected average IBNR claim amount
a projection method, which uses the historical development of claims by origin year to
project the IBNR.
A delay table is also known as a claims run-off analysis.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
These methods are not discussed further here, but are described in Subject SP7.
Note that the term ‘incurred claims’ is sometimes used to refer to the reported incurred claims
and sometimes used to refer to the reported incurred claims plus IBNR and IBNER. It is therefore
important to clarify the intended meaning of ‘incurred claims’ before using data with this label.
Developing individual losses
When we apply frequency-severity methods it is important to develop each individual loss
to its likely ultimate level, instead of only developing the aggregate loss amount for a cohort
of claims. We tend to use the latter approach for burning cost methods.
Methods used
We may develop individual loss amounts in a variety of ways:
1. We could apply an incurred development factor to each individual loss (that is, open
and closed claims), reflecting its maturity, to estimate its ultimate settlement value.
The development factors could be obtained from a chain-ladder type projection of a
development triangle of incurred claims.
2. A more realistic approach is to only develop open claims using ‘case estimate’
development factors. These case estimate development factors will usually be
higher than incurred development factors at the same maturity to offset the effect of
not developing closed claims.
A comparison of the above two methods is given in the example below.
3. For losses not in the data set, we will need to assume an ultimate size, usually based
on the known losses from this cohort.
This is referring to the IBNR claims. The number of IBNR claims could be derived using the
delay table method mentioned above, for example.
4. We could use stochastic development methods to allow for the variation that may
occur in individual ultimate loss amounts around each of their expected values.
Stochastic claims reserving methods are covered in Subject SP7.
Excesses and limits
For commercial lines policies, it is common for the insured to retain the first part of the loss
amount and for there to be a policy limit. In these situations, it is critical to estimate
accurately the loss amounts that are below the insured’s retention and those that are above
the policy limit. To do this, we need a good understanding of the likely distribution of
ultimate losses. The need for this accuracy is the reason for the increasingly complex
methods listed above.
The following simple example illustrates why it is particularly important to accurately determine
ultimate claims on an individual loss basis in the situation where excesses, deductibles and/or
limits apply.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 15
Example
The table below is a simple example and illustrates the difference in estimated ultimate FGU
and layer loss costs as a result of developing case estimates (Method 2) rather than
incurred claim amounts (Method 1).
We assume the four claims are of the same maturity so that the same development factors can be
applied to each claim.
Under Method 1, an incurred development factor of 2 is assumed to apply to each claim, and so
we have:
estimate of ultimate claims incurred claims 2
Under Method 2, a case estimate development factor of 3 is assumed. This only applies to the
open claims, and so we have:
estimated ultimate claims claims paid case estimate 3
Data Estimated Ultimate Loss Cost > 50,000
Loss Paid Case Incurred 1. Incurred 2. Case 1. Incurred 2. Case
1 5,000 - 5,000 10,000 5,000 - -
2 5,000 - 5,000 10,000 5,000 - -
3 10,000 - 10,000 20,000 10,000 - -
4 - 20,000 20,000 40,000 60,000 - 10,000
Total 20,000 20,000 40,000 80,000 80,000 - 10,000
(This table is part of the Core Reading.)
The case estimate development factor (of 3.00) is consistent with the incurred development
factor (of 2.00) in that both methods project a total ultimate cost for the four losses of
£80,000. However if the insured were to retain the first £50,000 of each loss, the case
estimate development method would project an excess loss cost of £10,000 whereas no
cost would be projected by the incurred development method.
Using case estimate development factors (Method 2) is more accurate than applying incurred
claim development factors (Method 1). Of course, if data and available resources permit, a
stochastic reserving method may be preferable.
If a deductible is being reduced then both the frequency and severity of losses to a contract
may increase. This makes it especially important to use information on claims from the
ground up.
Source of development pattern
Ideally, we would base the development patterns on the insured’s own experience and so
take account of its particular mix of claims. However, development triangles may not be
available for an individual insured, or may lack credibility, in which case we may apply
benchmark patterns.
Even when a development triangle is available for the insured’s own experience, it is
important to be aware of the different insurers that have held the risk over the period being
considered. The claims departments of different insurers may have quite different case
reserving philosophies, We should allow for this in our analysis.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
The accuracy of the case estimates may therefore vary over time, and by type of claim.
It is important to apply a development pattern that is appropriate for the losses being
developed. For example, it would not be appropriate to apply a ground-up development
pattern to losses relating to an excess layer.
When pricing a layer of excess of loss reinsurance, the usual approach is to:
trend each loss at each development period (using ground up data)
apply the excess and limit to each claim at each development period
aggregate the claims for each origin year to create a triangle of trended claims to the layer
(ie no longer ‘ground up’)
develop the claims based on this triangle, using one of the above methods.
Question
Explain why it is more accurate to use a development pattern based on claims to the excess layer
rather than one that applies to the ground up claims.
Solution
By definition, the excess layer will only consist of claims greater than the excess point. Larger
claims may show different development patterns to claims in general. For example, larger liability
claims may take longer to report and to settle than average. This should be allowed for when
developing the claims.
However, care should be taken when using triangulated data of excess of loss business that the
excess limits have remained constant over each origin year.
Furthermore, we could apply different development patterns to losses within different size
bands. However, as when we apply trends, the resulting increased accuracy is usually
outweighed by the increased complexity of this approach and we therefore rarely do this for
primary or low excess layers.
1.5 Fitting distributions
If there is a sufficient number of historical claims, we may estimate the expected loss cost
for the future policy period directly from the historical experience.
This would be the traditional approach to pricing, ie of multiplying the projected claim frequency
and severity to obtain the risk premium. This may be appropriate for simple structures where
there is sufficient data to calculate the risk premium with certainty.
However it is more usual to fit frequency and severity distributions to the losses after we
have adjusted them for trends and development and then estimate the loss cost for the
particular structure being considered from these.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 17
This approach is now discussed in detail. The stages involved are:
decide on an appropriate base period from which to collect the (trended and developed)
data
choose a suitable distribution (or density function) for each of frequency and severity
estimate the required parameters for the chosen distributions
check that the goodness of fit are acceptable and, if not, attempt a fit with different
distributions.
Choice of base period
An important step in the fitting process is the choice of base period (that contains the
historical claims and exposure data to be analysed) on which the fit is to be based.
Estimated ultimate losses for older policy years will be more reliable. However, these will
be less relevant to the prospective policy period than more recent years.
Question
Explain the above sentence.
Solution
Estimated ultimate claims for older policy years will be more fully developed. The claims incurred
figures will depend more on actual claims paid amounts rather than on estimates of outstanding
claims, and so should be more reliable.
However, claims for older policy years will be less relevant as these are more likely to be based on
different risks, external conditions, policy conditions, mixes of business, underwriting, etc.
Practical approaches include:
excluding information from the most recent historical year
excluding information from any year less than a specific percentage developed
including all years but giving more weight to the more developed years (the Cape
Cod approach is an example of this).
The Cape Cod approach is an objective way of deriving a weighted average, where the weight
applied to each year depends on the expected proportion of claims developed (based on chain
ladder cumulative development factors) and the proximity of each year to the origin year
concerned.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
The approach chosen will possibly depend on:
the extent of changes affecting the relevance of the data
the development pattern (ie type of business and length of tail)
the credibility of the data available (ie volatility and volume of data)
the base period used in previous rating exercises
subjective judgement.
Choice of distributions
One way to choose a suitable distribution for claim severity would be to plot each of the observed
claims in a bar chart, or equivalent, by size of claim:
number of
observations
size of claim
Now convert the left-hand scale so that the total area under the curve is 1, ie by dividing through
by the total number of observed claims.
Then select a function, y = f(x) which has a similar shape to our plotted data. This is the
probability density function (pdf).
The following loss distributions are often used:
Severity: log-normal, Weibull, Pareto, Generalised Pareto, Gamma
Frequency: Poisson, negative binomial.
For frequency, a negative binomial distribution is commonly used in practice, because it allows for
dependencies between claims, whereas the Poisson distribution assumes successive claims are
independent of each other.
Remember that key information on many statistical distributions is given in the Tables.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 19
The fitting process
Choice of distribution
We need to select a method of fitting to find parameter values for our chosen distribution.
Proprietary software packages are available, which help to fit a wide variety of distributions
to the observed loss data. However, fitting routines can be developed in-house.
Whichever approach is used, it is important to be aware of the underlying fitting algorithm
(to choose the parameters of the distribution). Common methods are:
maximum likelihood estimation
method of least squares
method of moments.
We may use different methods (eg method of moments or method of maximum likelihood) and
then select the one that gives the best fit to our data.
When fitting parameters of distributions to data, one should be aware of:
the estimation error around the parameters, due to only having a finite sample, and
the potential impact this can have on the results.
This ‘estimation error’ is another term for ‘parameter error’, which was discussed in Chapter 9.
Methods for assessing this parameter uncertainty include:
bootstrapping
asymptotic approximations for maximum likelihood estimates
Bayesian methods.
Question
Give a brief description of these three methods.
Solution
Bootstrapping
Bootstrapping is a simulation technique that involves sampling multiple times from an observed
data set in order to create a number of pseudo data sets. We can then refit the model to each
new data set to obtain a distribution of the parameters. This is discussed further in Subject SP7.
Asymptotic approximations for maximum likelihood estimates
Maximum likelihood estimators are asymptotically normally distributed (subject to certain
technical conditions). In other words, the maximum likelihood estimates are equal to the true
parameters plus a random error that is approximately normal (given sufficient data), and the
error's variance decays as the sample size increases.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
Bayesian methods
Under the Bayesian theory framework, parameters are treated as random variables. The prior
distribution of the model parameters is first chosen based on judgment or experience. Then the
posterior distribution of the parameters variable is calculated using Bayes’ Formula.
Alternatively, simulation-based techniques can be used to obtain a distribution of parameters.
This approach is an alternative to bootstrapping to obtain the distribution of parameters
(ie parameter uncertainty).
You may have met Bayesian theory in earlier subjects. It is also discussed in Subject SP7.
Testing fit
By plotting the density functions of the observations and fitted distribution, we can quickly
assess the goodness of fit by eye.
However, the statistical goodness of fit tests are more robust. As with the fitting algorithm,
it is helpful to be aware of the features of any statistical tests that are used.
The following tests are commonly used:
Chi-Squared statistic
A chi-squared test, also referred to as a chi-square test or 2 test, is any statistical
hypothesis test in which the sampling distribution of the test statistic is a
chi-squared distribution when the null hypothesis is true, or any in which this is
asymptotically true, meaning that the sampling distribution (if the null hypothesis is
true) can be made to approximate a chi-squared distribution as closely as desired by
making the sample size large enough.
Chi-squared tests were covered in an earlier exam.
Kolmogorov-Smirnov statistic
The Kolmogorov-Smirnov Goodness-of-fit (K-S GoF) test is a test of whether a
one-dimensional sample comes from a specified probability distribution. The
Kolmogorov-Smirnov statistic quantifies a distance between the empirical
distribution function of the sample and the cumulative distribution function of the
reference distribution.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 21
Therefore, the K-S statistic tests the significance of the area between the two distributions in the
graph below:
The null distribution of this statistic is calculated under the null hypothesis that the
sample is drawn from the reference distribution. The distributions considered under
the null hypothesis are continuous distributions but are otherwise unrestricted.
In its basic form, the test assumes that there are no parameters to be estimated in
the distribution being tested, in which case the test and its set of critical values is
‘distribution-free’.
However, the test is most often used in contexts where a family of distributions is
being tested, in which case the parameters of that family need to be estimated and
account must be taken of this in adjusting either the test-statistic or its critical
values.
Anderson-Darling statistic
The Anderson-Darling Goodness-of-Fit test (A-D GoF test) is another statistical test
for whether a sample can be modelled as being drawn from a specified distribution.
Similarly to the K-S statistic, the A-D statistic measures the distance between the
empirical distribution function and the CDF of the reference distribution. However,
the A-D statistic places more weight on differences in the tails of the distribution.
As in the case of the K-S GoF test, the most basic form of the A-D GoF test assumes that
the parameters have not been estimated from the data.
Comparison of K-S and A-D goodness of fit tests
The K-S GoF test is more sensitive to deviations from the reference distribution around the
centre of the distribution.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
The A-D GoF test is:
more sensitive to deviations in the tails, due to the weighting applied to these points
in the calculation of the statistic
typically more powerful than the K-S GoF test, in that it is more likely to correctly
reject the null hypothesis when the null hypothesis is false (ie if the data do not
come from the reference distribution, the A-D test is more likely to pick this up)
more powerful for testing for normality than the Kolmogorov-Smirnov statistic, according
to various studies.
Both tests have non-parametric (ie distribution-free) versions for comparing whether two (or
more) samples can be modelled as coming from the same population distribution.
Although goodness of fit tests provide a strong indication of the distribution that should be
used, it is also good practice to consider whether the chosen distribution makes theoretical
and practical sense.
Question
An excess of loss contract provides cover of £250,000 in excess of £50,000 for any one claim.
Assuming that the underlying gross claims have a claim frequency of c and a claim size distribution
of f(x), derive the equations for calculating:
(a) the claim frequency, and
(b) the average cost per claim,
under the excess of loss contract.
Solution
(a) Claim frequency under the contract is given by the claims frequency multiplied by the
proportion of claims in excess of £50,000,
ie overall frequency proportion of claims over £50,000 = c f (x)dx
50,000
(b) The average cost per claim is given by the total payments divided by the number of
claims. Considering each element in turn:
300,000
payments if the upper limit is not exceeded (A): x 50,000 f (x)dx
50,000
payments where the upper limit is exceeded (B): 250,000 f (x)dx
300,000
proportion of claims over £50,000 (C): f (x)dx
50,000
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 23
Hence, the average cost per claim = (A + B) / C
300,000
x 50,000 f (x)dx 250,000 f (x)dx
50,000 300,000
ie
f (x)dx
50,000
Combining severity distributions
When an insured has a sufficient volume of losses, we may fit a number of different severity
distributions to different parts of the overall loss range. For example, we may fit separate
distributions to:
the smallest attritional losses, say those below £5,000
losses greater than £5,000 up to a large loss threshold, say £500,000
losses over the threshold
catastrophe losses.
Question
Suggest distributions that may be fitted to losses in these categories.
Solution
It is common to use distributions with a heavier tail for more severe losses. Thus:
for attritional claims a lognormal distribution may be used
large losses may be modelled with gamma / Pareto distribution, or perhaps a skewed
Weibull distribution (ie with second parameter 1 )
a Pareto distribution may be used for very large losses
catastrophe losses are likely to be simulated using the distributional assumptions
underlying a catastrophe model.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
Other variations are possible, depending on:
the family of distributions used
the relative parameter values
the results of goodness-of-fit tests.
We can justify this approach in terms of the different nature of incidents that underlie the
overall claim severity distribution. The overall distribution reflects the particular
combination of different types of incidents (slips, falls, vehicle accidents, and so on)
experienced by a particular company. Each type of incident may produce a quite distinct
severity distribution and we would ideally fit a separate severity distribution to each
incident type. However, data shortcomings often prevent this and we adopt the approach
described in the bullet points above as a practical approximation.
1.6 Simulation approaches
Although we can derive a formula for the aggregate loss distribution for certain
combinations of frequency and severity distributions, in practice we often derive the
aggregate loss distribution through simulation.
You may recall from various compound distributions from earlier subjects, such as the compound
Poisson and compound negative binomial. We can derive formulae for the moments of these
compound distributions. This can give exact results but the calculations can become unwieldy (or
impossible) if the method used, or the product structure, is complicated. For this reason,
simulation approaches are often used.
Structure terminology
It is essential to use simulation approaches when we estimate the loss cost likely to be
borne by the insurer under more complex structures.
Before illustrating how simulation can be used, we define some features (or ‘components’) of a
complex structure.
Some of the more common components found in insurance arrangements are:
Aggregate deductible – The maximum amount that the insured can retain within their
deductible when all losses are aggregated.
Non-ranking deductibles – The non-ranking component of a deductible (applied to
each individual loss) does not contribute to an insured’s aggregate deductible.
Ranking deductible – The ranking component of a deductible does contribute
towards an insured’s aggregate deductible.
Trailing deductible – The amount that is retained by the insured for each individual
loss once the aggregate deductible has been fully eroded.
Per occurrence limit – The maximum amount that the insurer can retain for each
individual loss.
Annual aggregate limit – The maximum amount that the insurer can retain when all
losses for an annual policy period are aggregated.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 25
Don’t worry if you didn’t get your head around all of these at the first reading! The example and
question that follow demonstrate how these features apply. Working through these may help
you to remember them.
Example: Simulation model
Simulation approaches were covered in Chapter 11.
The figure below illustrates the layout of a simple frequency-severity spreadsheet
simulation model.
For the particular iteration shown below:
17 losses have been simulated from a Poisson(10) frequency distribution.
Each ground-up loss was generated from a log-normal (10,000, 30,000) distribution.
The insured retains the first £1,000 of each loss within its deductible.
The aggregate deductible limits the insured’s total retention from £16,474 to £15,000.
Of the original total ground-up loss of £264,912 an amount of £249,912 is borne by
the insurer.
Frequency Distribution Structure
Mean Simulated Deductible 1,000
Poisson 10 17 Agg Ded 15,000
Severity Distribution
LogNormal 10,000 30,000
Simulation
Ground Up W ithin Deductible W ithin Agg Ded Loss to
Loss Loss Incremental Cumulative Cumulative Incremental Insurer
1 9,410 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 8,410
2 1,876 1,000 2,000 2,000 1,000 876
3 3,063 1,000 3,000 3,000 1,000 2,063
4 4,930 1,000 4,000 4,000 1,000 3,930
5 7,174 1,000 5,000 5,000 1,000 6,174
6 3,874 1,000 6,000 6,000 1,000 2,874
7 31,269 1,000 7,000 7,000 1,000 30,269
8 4,744 1,000 8,000 8,000 1,000 3,744
9 2,210 1,000 9,000 9,000 1,000 1,210
10 38,329 1,000 10,000 10,000 1,000 37,329
11 1,814 1,000 11,000 11,000 1,000 814
12 123,523 1,000 12,000 12,000 1,000 122,523
13 10,304 1,000 13,000 13,000 1,000 9,304
14 4,587 1,000 14,000 14,000 1,000 3,587
15 3,484 1,000 15,000 15,000 1,000 2,484
16 13,848 1,000 16,000 15,000 - 13,848
17 474 474 16,474 15,000 - 474
18
19
20
…
TOTAL 264,912 16,474 16,474 15,000 15,000 249,912
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
These tables are part of the Core Reading. The data shown represents just one simulation. Of
course, thousands of simulations will be carried out, each producing its own estimate of the
number of claims and a corresponding set of claim amounts.
As well as assessing the expected loss cost to the insurer, we can use simulation models to
assess the distribution of other components of the particular structure being considered. In
particular, actuaries often comment on the adequacy of aggregate deductibles.
In this case, the simulation model can be used to ascertain the impact on total expected claims of
various levels of aggregate deductibles.
Simulation models are essential for assessing loss sensitive or swing-rated (or
experience-rated) premiums.
Question
Define loss sensitive or swing-rated premiums, and explain the form that such a premium usually
takes.
Solution
Loss sensitive (or swing-rated) premiums are a form of experience rating. These are premiums
that depend, at least in part, on the actual claims experience of that risk in the period covered.
They will usually be applied in the form of a deposit and adjustment premium.
1.7 Practical considerations
Where simulation is used, we should run through enough iterations of the simulation model
to ensure that the results are stable:
We will require more simulations if investigating the tails of the resulting loss
distribution than if investigating the mean.
Few simulations will result in values at, say, the 99.5th percentile. If we are investigating
such very large losses, more simulations will therefore be needed to ensure a sufficient
sized sample of values in the tail.
We will require more simulations if assessing an excess layer than if assessing the
underlying primary layer.
A very high excess layer might cover claim sizes rarely seen. Running too few simulations
could result in no simulated claims observed hitting the layer or so few as to lack
credibility.
Because of the speed of modern computers, the time required to run a simulation model for
a sufficient number of iterations should rarely be a problem.
Other, more general, practical considerations to bear in mind when pricing were discussed in
Chapter 13.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 27
2 Burning cost approach
2.1 Description
The discussion in Section 1 on the frequency-severity approach has mainly considered a specific
method where frequency and severity are considered separately.
The comments on the burning cost approach in this section are more general. These cover
approaches that range from the very crude, such as ones that do not allow for inflation, to
methods that make various adjustments. This section focuses on:
points additional to those covered in Chapters 12 and 13
differences between this approach and a frequency-severity approach.
In general, the burning cost approach is based on aggregate claims, expressed as an annual rate
per unit of exposure, and so does not make use of the number of claims.
One definition of the burning cost approach is:
This is an experience rating approach. We define the burning cost as the actual cost of
claims during a past period of years expressed as an annual rate per unit of exposure. We
use a simple regression model, based entirely on historical data.
We may use the burning cost approach to rate an individual risk (or insured) or a portfolio
of similar risks.
In either case, we may adjust the historical data to allow for inflation, IBNR, and so on. We
may calculate the burning cost using either unadjusted data (effective burning cost) or
indexed data (indexed burning cost).
Notice the word ‘may’ appears twice in the above paragraph. In some cases the burning cost
approach can be very simple and crude, with no allowance for:
future inflation
development of losses to obtain ultimate claims (IBNR and outstanding claims)
past inflation or other trending adjustments.
These adjustments have been covered in Chapter 12 (and also in Section 1 of this chapter in
relation to the frequency-severity approach). Other considerations specific to the burning cost
approach will be discussed later in this section.
This approach is sometimes used for pricing excess of loss reinsurance contracts. It can be
particularly hard to assess changes in contract structure given the lack of claims data.
A frequency-severity approach would ideally be used for these contracts, but lack of data may
prohibit this.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
Advantages and disadvantages
The following advantages and disadvantages are relative to the frequency-severity approach.
Hence, many of these were also discussed in Section 1.1.
Advantages of a burning cost approach include:
simplicity
needs relatively little data
quicker than other methods to perform
allows for experience of individual risk or portfolios.
Disadvantages of a burning cost approach include:
harder to spot trends so it provides less understanding of changes impacting the
individual risks
adjusting past data is difficult
adjusting for changes in cover, deductibles, etc, may be hard as we often lack
individual claims data
it can be a very crude approach.
This final point partly depends on what adjustments are made (eg for trending) and how accurate
these adjustments are.
The use of this method has been heavily criticised where it is applied to current figures
without any adjustments. This is because:
we would ignore trends such as claims inflation, and
more importantly, by taking current exposure (often premiums) and comparing this
with current incurred claims, we will understate the ultimate position.
As a result, if we price using this approach, we will often end up with loss ratios higher than
planned.
Losses will be higher than expected if our expectations are based on analysis which has not
allowed for inflation, other trends, IBNER and IBNR.
2.2 Data
Data requirements
Chapter 10 covered the data required for rating using any cost plus approach. Section 1.2 of this
chapter covered the data requirements for rating a single commercial risk using a
frequency-severity approach. We now discuss requirements specific to a burning cost approach.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 29
We need policy data to calculate the overall exposure or the split within each risk group.
We, therefore, need the following information for each policy:
dates on cover
all rating factor and exposure measure details.
We often use the burning cost method where less data is available. Often only aggregated
claims data by policy year are available. Even if this is the case, it is often possible to get
details of large and catastrophic claims included within the aggregated claims data, so we
can remove these and treat them differently.
We also need claims data. The claims data requirements can be found in Chapter 10.
Estimating outstanding claims
If aggregate claims data has been obtained, there will be occasions where individual case
estimates of outstanding claims have not been made or are not available. For example, statistical
methods (such as a chain ladder model) may have been used to calculate reserves, rather than
individual case estimates.
Sometimes, for particular groups of data within a class of business, the data records may
not contain estimates of amounts outstanding for individual claims.
Where this is the case, we must find a way of dividing the total reported outstanding amount
for the class of business between groups. One method is to make case estimates for
specimen policies within each group. We then extrapolate to find the total claims
outstanding for the whole group. We should be careful to ensure that the total for the whole
class of business obtained by this method is consistent with the total obtained by statistical
methods.
2.3 Calculation of premium
Premiums are usually quoted in relation to a unit of exposure so we should calculate the
risk premium in the same terms.
The burning cost premium
In terms of formulae, the burning cost is defined as:
The burning cost premium BCP Claims / Total Exposed to Risk
As discussed above, we should increase the claims to allow for past inflation and for IBNR.
Analysis of experience: frequency, severity and burning cost
We may lose much of the information on trends being experienced by not considering
frequency and severity separately.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
As discussed above, the advantages of these elements being analysed separately are so that:
distortions in the data can be identified and allowed for
trends in experience can be spotted and projected into the future.
In terms of equations:
Pure risk premium per unit of exposure = Expected claim amount per unit of exposure
The basic elements of the pure risk premium can be derived by expanding the claim amount per
unit of exposure as follows:
Total claim amount No. of claims Total claim amount
Exposure Exposure No. of claims
This gives the usual formula for the pure risk premium:
Pure risk premium = Expected claim frequency Expected cost per claim
For example, in private motor insurance, if the expected claim frequency is 25% per vehicle-year
and the expected cost per claim is £1,200, then the risk premium per vehicle-year is £300
(ie 0.25 £1,200).
For some classes (eg household contents) it does not make a lot of sense to express the claim
frequency in terms of the exposure measure. For example, a claim frequency of 2% per £1,000
sum insured per year feels odd. In these cases we can break down the risk premium into three
factors:
Total claim amount No. of policies No. of claims Total claim amount
Exposure Exposure No. of policies No. of claims
This could be expressed as:
Total claim amount No. of claims Exposure Total claim amount
Exposure No. of policies No. of policies No. of claims
On this basis, the three basic elements of the risk premium per unit of exposure are:
claim frequency per policy
average unit of exposure per policy
average cost per claim
and the pure risk premium is then:
Expected claim frequency per policy
Expected cos t per claims
Average exp osure per policy
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 31
Question
For a domestic household contents policy, calculate the risk premium per £1,000 sum insured per
year, given that:
expected claim frequency per policy = 15%
average sum insured is £18,000
expected cost per claim = £1,200.
Solution
Expected claim cost per policy: 0.15 1,200 = 180.
The average policy has sum insured of £18,000, so the risk premium per mille sum insured is:
180
£10 .
18
2.4 Trending
Chapter 12 described general factors that would be allowed for in order to make the data from
the base period relevant for the period for which the new premium rates will apply. Section 1.3
of this chapter discussed these adjustments in more detail, particularly for the frequency-severity
approach. We now consider trending where we are unable to consider frequency and severity
separately.
Different approaches can be taken to trending, and the level of accuracy will vary. In the extreme,
no adjustments may be made at all!
Question
List the two stages of trending.
Solution
The two stages required when trending are:
restate historical claims to current values
project them to the midpoint of the future exposure period.
We should adjust both exposure and claims to current values.
An index would apply to the historical aggregate claims, rather than having separate indices for
frequency and severity (and possibly exposure per policy). Alternatively, a constant past annual
trend might be assumed. For either approach, an index (or constant trend) may also be applied to
the exposure if the latter is expressed in monetary terms.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
As individual claims data may not exist, we may have to make more assumptions about type
of loss, date of occurrence, date of payment and so on.
Under the frequency-severity approach, the precise date that a loss occurred could be used to
project this loss to the mid-point of the exposure period. However, if only aggregate data is used,
an average loss occurrence date will need to be assumed. For example, we could assume all
claims for a particular accident year occurred mid-way through that year.
We have to decide whether to leave large and exceptional claims in the data, or truncate
them at a cap and spread the excess over the cap, or remove them altogether. Our decision
will depend on the extent to which we expect such claims to recur during the exposure of
the new rating series.
Factors that can affect the trends in the amounts of historical claims for a policy are the
same as for the frequency-severity approach, and include:
economic – inflation, economic conditions
legal – legislation, court rulings
technical changes – workplace hazards, structural changes
insurance – policy conditions, policy structure, underwriting and claims controls
changes in business – volumes, structure, splits of business.
These have been discussed in previous chapters as well as earlier in this chapter.
2.5 Developing losses
Unless a very crude approach is being taken, the claims information should be developed to
ultimate values. Standard reserving techniques, such as the chain ladder or
Bornhuetter-Ferguson methods, could be used to calculate the ultimate overall claims for each
development year.
As individual loss information is not available, any assumptions will be less detailed than in
the frequency-severity method. We are likely to calculate IBNR factors from either the
individual risk data, or the aggregated results of a book of business. We should also allow
for inflation and consideration should be given to the results of any recent reserving
exercise if appropriate.
We might allow for inflation by using a reserving method such as the inflation-adjusted chain
ladder method. The inflation assumptions used might be those derived from the trending
analysis.
2.6 Practical considerations
Practical considerations when pricing were discussed in Chapter 13.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 33
3 Finally
3.1 Glossary items
Having studied this chapter you should now read the following Glossary items:
Cape Cod method
Claims run-off analysis
Delay table
Development factors
From the ground up
Grossing-up factor
Incurred but not enough reported (IBNER) reserve
Link ratios.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
The chapter summary starts on the next page so that you can
keep all the chapter summaries together for revision purposes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 35
Chapter 14 Summary
This chapter describes the additional considerations to be made when deriving the risk
premium using:
the frequency-severity approach
the burning cost approach.
The frequency-severity approach involves analysing and projecting frequency and severity
separately, and then combining the two to calculate the risk premium.
A burning cost approach ignores the number of claims, but takes the actual total cost of
claims during a past period of years, expressed as an annual rate per unit of exposure. This
could apply to a single risk or to a portfolio of similar risks.
Advantages and disadvantages
The frequency-severity approach mirrors the underlying process, allows complex structures
to be modelled more easily, provides a better understanding of the data, and enables
frequency and severity trends to be identified separately. It can be more accurate than the
burning cost approach. However, it requires more data (by volume and detail) and is more
time consuming and complex.
Data
For frequency-severity rating of commercial risks, the broker will usually provide a
submission document, plus details of the risk’s exposure (past and present) and claim
history.
Individual loss data is required for the frequency-severity approach. Less data is required for
the burning cost approach, which uses aggregate claim data and may not have individual
case estimates.
Data should be gross of reinsurance and from the ground up.
Trending
Historical data needs to be adjusted to make it relevant to the period for which future
premium rates will apply. For the frequency-severity approach, separate frequency and
severity trends will apply. For the burning cost approach, both the exposure and the claims
data should be adjusted.
Standard indices will normally apply for trending, although analysis of past loss trends for the
risk will also be useful. The severity trend might vary according to claim size. Large losses
(and catastrophes) may require special treatment.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
Developing losses
Claims need to be developed to their ultimate level and allowance made for IBNR.
For the frequency-severity approach, each individual loss should be developed, eg by
applying development factors or by using stochastic methods. An accurate method is
particularly important where there are deductibles or limits. The development factors used
should be appropriate to the data and may vary by size of claim.
The burning cost approach should allow for trending (past and future) and/or claim
development (including IBNR), but often this is not done in practice.
Fitting and simulation using frequency-severity
For the frequency-severity approach, frequency and severity distributions are usually fitted
to the trended and developed loss data. The choice of base period should allow for the
relevance and development of the data, and weights may be applied. It is important to be
aware of the fitting algorithms and goodness of fit tests being used.
The following loss distributions are often used:
Frequency : Poisson, negative binomial
Severity : log-normal, Weibull, Pareto, Gamma.
Separate distributions may be fitted to different parts of the overall loss range.
Simulation techniques are commonly used to assess the expected loss to the insurer, and
also to assess the impact of components of a particular structure being considered – for
example, deductibles (aggregate, non-ranking, ranking and trailing) and limits (per
occurrence and annual aggregate).
The number of simulations should be sufficient to ensure the results are stable, eg more
simulations will be required when examining claim tails or claims to excess layers.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 37
Chapter 14 Practice Questions
14.1 An investigation has been made of claims and exposure for a portfolio of policies over the period
1st January 2016 to 31st December 2017. The data from this base period is to be used to produce
premium rates applicable for policies sold in the new rating period 1st November 2018 to 30th
June 2019.
You are given that:
the risk is not seasonal with reference to the calendar year
the level of risk is constant over the policy year
the claim frequency has been found to increase at a steady 0.25% simple per month for
many years and is expected to continue to do so.
Calculate how much the average claim frequency observed during the base period should be
increased to give the best estimate of the claim frequency for policies sold in the new rating
period.
14.2 You are given the following estimates of an insurer's claim size and frequency distribution for a
Exam style
class of business:
Average claim amount: £500
Claim frequency: 20%
Total claims, by amount, from claims less than £100: 5% of the total claims
(i) Estimate the revised risk premium if an excess of £100 is introduced for this class of
business. [4]
(ii) Based upon your initial estimate, a company director has asked for a detailed
investigation into how much the risk premium would reduce by as a result of introducing
this excess. Describe how you would investigate this, assuming you had full access to the
company’s claims data. [6]
(iii) The director is considering offering the policyholder a choice of two policies, one with the
excess and one without the excess. If the policyholder opts for the policy with the excess
then the director intends to offer the same discount as you have calculated above. Give
reasons why, in practice, the discount would not be the same. [4]
[Total 14]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 38 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
14.3 Consider a simulation of the following seven (trended and developed) claims that occur in the
order shown:
Claim Amount
1 £11,392
2 £4,976
3 £128,676
4 £9,381
5 £613
6 £34,815
7 £6,210
Calculate the expected loss to the insurer of each claim under the following structure:
Aggregate deductible of £5,000
Individual deductibles of £1,000 (ranking), £500 (non-ranking) and £500 (trailing)
Per occurrence limit of £100,000
Annual aggregate limit of £150,000.
14.4 Explain what is mean by the term burning cost. [2]
Exam style
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 39
Chapter 14 Solutions
14.1 The mid-point of exposure for the base period is 1 January 2017.
The mid-point of sales for the new rating period is 1 March 2019.
The mid-point of exposure from the new rating period is 1 September 2019.
Hence, increase is for 2 years 8 months at 0.25% per month, ie 8%.
14.2 The first part of this question is quite tricky and a bit unusual. Therefore it is important that you:
take the question slowly and steadily and state the obvious
look at the data given and ask yourself why
state any assumptions
score well on the later parts of the question, which are quite easy.
(i) Calculation
Three marks are available for producing an appropriate numerical answer using an appropriate
method.
The revised risk premium is equal to:
the probability that a claim is above £100 ( the average claim size given that the claim is above
£100 minus the £100 excess ) original claim frequency. [½]
Now, the total number of claims below £100 represents 5% of the total claims amounts.
So if there is a claim:
(Prob that the claim is less than £100 Ave amt of those less than £100)
0.05
Ave amount of all claims
Assume that the average claim size of those less than £100 is £80.
Therefore if there is a claim, the probability that it is less than 100 is 31.25% [1½]
The probability that a claim is less than £100 Average claim for those less than £100 plus
probability a claim is more than £100 Average of those above £100 = £500.
So:
500 = 0.3125 80 + ( 1 – 0.3125 ) Average amt of those above £100. [½]
So the average of those above £100 is £691.
The revised risk premium is 0.6875 591 0.2 = £81.25. [1]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 40 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
Reasonableness check: we would expect the reduction in premium to be a little less than 20%
(ie £100 for each £500) because we do not save £100 on all claims. [½]
This calculation assumes that the introduction of an excess will have no impact on the types of
policyholder and the claims experience. [½]
[Maximum 4]
(ii) Collect and project data
We need to collect a number of years’ past data to calculate the probability of a claim and the
claim amount distribution. [½]
Hence we collect claim numbers, claim amounts and exposure. This should allow for IBNR,
partially settled claims and reopened claims. [½]
The data should be projected from the date of claim to the current date. The projection should allow
for factors such as changes in policy conditions, underwriting, target market, changes in perils
covered and possibly very large claims and seasonality. [1]
The claim amounts should be inflated to the current date using suitable inflation indices. Claims
might be split into different claim types and size bands, since different claim types / sizes might
have different inflation indices. [1]
Decide upon an excess
A suitable excess should be chosen, which should reflect the excess that is expected to be
charged. This has initially been set at £100. However we might vary or sensitivity test this
later. [½]
Consider future inflation and trends
Attention should be paid to the length of time for which the rates will be in force and a projection
must be made to the midpoint of the period of exposure. This is because claims will continue to
inflate in the future, but the excess will be a fixed amount. [1]
Trends in claim frequency should also be projected up to the midpoint of the period of
exposure. [½]
Fit distributions for frequency and amount
Distributions should be fitted for both the claim frequency and claim amount, without any excess.
[½]
For claim frequency, a Poisson model might be used. [½]
For claim amount, a distribution that best fits the data will be used – this might be a gamma or a
log-normal distribution. [½]
We then combine the claim frequency and claim amount distributions to obtain the insurer’s
expected payout. This is most easily done using simulation. [1]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 41
The process is then repeated having allowed for the excess, the ratio of the two figures will give
the required reduction in risk premium. [½]
[Maximum 6]
Credit should also be given if a stochastic approach has been described.
(iii) Why this would not apply in practice
The reduction, in practice, would apply to the office premium not the risk premium. Therefore,
the allowance for expenses should also be considered. [1]
Consider how policyholders’ behaviour might change as a result of introducing the excess. For
example the policyholders might inflate claims if an excess is applied. Also the policyholder may
not bother claiming for amounts just above the excess. [1]
Also the average sum insured or target market might be different for those with the excess. [1]
Consider the price sensitivity of the market and also competition and how much we need to
reduce the premium by, if we offer the excess. [1]
[Total 4]
14.3 The loss to the insurer can be summarised in the following table:
Loss Ground up Ranking Non- Trailing Loss to insurer Loss to insurer
loss deductible ranking deductible (max £100k net of annual
deductible each) agg. limit
1 11,392 1,000 500 9,892 9,892
2 4,976 1,000 500 3,476 3,476
3 128,676 1,000 500 100,000 100,000
4 9,381 1,000 500 7,881 7,881
5 613 613 0 0 0
6 34,815 387 500 33,929 28,751
7 6,210 500 5,710 0
Total 196,063 160,887 150,000
The ranking deductible of £1,000 per claim is limited to £5,000 in aggregate. Claim 5 is below
£1,000, and so the ranking deductible is limited to the claim amount of £613. At this point the
cumulative aggregate deductible is £4,613, and so only the remaining £387 applies to claim 6.
In addition, the non-ranking deductible applies to each claim (except claim 5, which is too small),
until the aggregate deductible is reached (on claim 6). For subsequent claims (ie claim 7), the
trailing deductible applies.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 42 SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches
The loss to the insurer for each claim is then the ground up loss less the sum of the deductibles.
However, each loss to the insurer is limited to £100,000 (the per occurrence limit), and so claim 3
is reduced accordingly.
Finally, we need to check to see if the annual aggregate limit is breached. As you would expect in
an examination question, it is breached, and so we need to limit the total claims to £150,000.
Hence, claim 6 is reduced so that the sum of the losses to the insurer up to this point is £150,000.
The insurer will not pay any subsequent claims.
(Note that the trailing deductible has no impact in this question since the annual aggregate limit is
breached before it has any effect.)
14.4 The actual cost of claims paid or incurred during a past period of years expressed as an annual
rate per unit of exposure. [1]
This is sometimes used (after adjustment for inflation, incurred but not reported (IBNR) and so
on) as a method of calculating premiums for certain types of risks or monitoring experience, for
example, motor fleets and non-proportional reinsurance. [1]
[Total 2]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-14: Rating using frequency-severity and burning cost approaches Page 43
End of Part 3
What next?
1. Briefly review the key areas of Part 3 and/or re-read the summaries at the end of
Chapters 11 to 14.
2. Ensure you have attempted some of the Practice Questions at the end of each chapter in
Part 3. If you don’t have time to do them all, you could save the remainder for use as part
of your revision.
3. Attempt Assignment X3.
Time to consider …
… ‘learning and revision’ and ‘revision’ products
Flashcards – These are available in both paper and eBook format. Students have said:
‘The Flashcards are perhaps the most useful thing I have bought from ActEd.
Loving your work on this!’
‘I find Course Notes and exam questions supplemented with Flashcards the most
efficient way of learning.’
‘I think the Flashcards have been very useful. Would definitely buy the
Flashcards again for other modules.’
You can find lots more information, including samples and demos, on our website at
www.ActEd.co.uk.
Buy online at www.ActEd.co.uk/estore
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold
for the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is
owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a
subsidiary of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or
photocopy any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it
is not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through
the profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished
using the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 1
Rating using original loss
curves
Syllabus objectives
3.7.1 Describe how Original Loss Curves can be used in rating.
3.7.2 Determine the assumptions required when using this approach.
3.7.3 Outline the practical considerations when using this approach.
For this topic, the Core Reading also gives some ‘wider objectives’, which are as follows:
Use original loss curves to price policies with different limits and attachment points.
(i) Understand and use appropriate terminology.
(ii) Show how original loss curves are related to original loss distributions.
(iii) Understand and explain the key properties of original loss curves.
(iv) State and explain the main assumptions relating to the derivation and use of original
loss curves.
(v) Derive prices for direct and facultative business and treaty excess of loss business.
(vi) Describe important considerations, limitations and uncertainties associated with the
practical use of original loss curves.
(vii) Understand how original loss curves can be constructed from claims data and the
practical difficulties associated with their construction.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
0 Introduction
We commonly use original loss curves in general insurance pricing to infer prices for layers
at which the data are too sparse to derive a credible experience rate. We frequently use
them for excess of loss pricing, although we can also use them to obtain large loss loadings
on full-value covers, or consistent prices for different primary limits (ie direct insurance which
is subject to different limits).
You may have come across original loss curves in other disguises (such as increased limit factors)
already, as the terminology varies greatly amongst practitioners. This is discussed further in
Section 1.
Question
List further circumstances for which you think using original loss curves would be useful.
Solution
In addition to those mentioned in the Core Reading, original loss curves might be useful for:
small companies or lines of business where data is sparse, non-existent or unreliable
pricing when changing the limits within the policy conditions.
The overall process used to obtain a loss cost for a high layer cover is to take the known loss cost
at a lower layer cover (for which there is plenty of data) and then use the curve to estimate the
losses at the higher layer.
Very broadly, the methodology is usually as follows:
(i) We obtain a loss cost estimate for a full value cover (ie ground-up, limited only at the
sum insured) or a primary layer with a relatively low limit. This will usually be from
an exposure-related method but could be an experience rate.
Note that:
in experience rating, we derive the premium rates from the data of the
insured (internal data)
in exposure rating, we derive the premium rates from benchmarks or data
which are external to the insured.
(ii) We use original loss curves (which are derived from the probability distributions of
the underlying losses) appropriate to the risk (or group of risks) concerned to infer
from this loss cost what the cost should be for different layers of cover.
The curves we use depend on the class of business we are pricing. In Section 2 we will
look at curves for property business and in Section 3 we will look at curves for liability
business (more often called casualty business in the US).
We will see how the curves are derived (constructed) in Section 4, and in Section 5 we
look at examples of curves used in practice.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 3
(iii) We then load the cost for the required layer for expenses and risk / profit to obtain a
premium estimate.
Frequently, premiums calculated for excess of loss layers using this method are credibility
weighted with experience rates.
In Section 6, we will look at some more complicated uses of original loss curves, and Section 7
gives some closing remarks.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
1 Terminology and different types of curves
1.1 Terminology
The term ‘original loss curves’ is rarely used in general insurance markets.
Instead, we use the terms described below.
The curves used are related closely to loss severity distributions and the terminology that is
used in practice:
depends on the precise definition of the curves
varies from market to market, and even between practitioners within the same
market.
The most commonly used forms of original loss curves are as follows:
(i) First loss scales / exposure curves: Usually seen in property business, these curves
give the proportion of the full value premium allocated to primary layers limited at
different values. An alternative way of looking at this is that they give us the value
(expressed as a percentage of the full value premium) of imposing deductibles at
different levels. We usually express the limits as a fraction of the sum insured,
maximum probable loss (MPL) or EML. We also sometimes refer to these curves as
loss elimination functions.
In the Glossary, the Core Reading refers to the MPL as the PML (Probable Maximum Loss).
EML is the estimated (or expected) maximum loss.
We will see an example of this curve in more detail in Section 2.
(ii) ILFs (increased limit factors): We choose a ‘basic limit’; this is usually a relatively low
primary limit. We construct a table of multiplicative factors (increased limit factors
or ILFs) giving the ratio of the premium for higher limits to the basic limit premium.
We usually use this terminology and format for casualty business.
Table 3.1 in Section 3 gives an example of a table of ILFs.
(iii) XL scales (excess of loss scales): Similar to a first loss scale except they give the
proportion to be allocated to the excess layer rather than the primary layer.
In a sense, excess of loss scales deal with the section of the curve beyond the limit,
whereas first loss scales deal with the section of the curve below the limit.
The terminology is sometimes used loosely and some practitioners use the above terms
interchangeably.
1.2 What is allowed for in the curves?
We mentioned above that the original loss curves describe the ratio of pure loss cost at different
levels of deductible or excess.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 5
In addition to the pure loss cost, we sometimes construct curves to allow for:
expenses; that is, allocated loss adjustment expenses (ALAE) and possibly
unallocated loss adjustment expenses (ULAE) at each limit
Question
Explain what is meant by ALAE and ULAE.
Solution
ALAE are claims handling expenses that are directly attributable to a particular claim, for example,
legal defence costs.
ULAE are claims handling expenses that are not directly attributable to a particular claim. They
may have resulted from an array of claims or from some other general process involved in
handling claims. For example, if an insurer pays a consultancy to perform a review of case
estimates and IBNR held, the fees charged would be part of the insurer’s ULAE.
a load for risk at each limit.
This load could allow for contingencies, and would normally be greater for higher limits.
If we already allow for such loadings in the curves, this will have implications for the
approach followed (for example, what we should include in the ‘full value’ or ‘basic limits’
estimate; what loads we should add at the end).
How the curves are constructed and applied should depend on the coverage included in the
policy. For simplicity, the theory that follows is on the assumption that the curves cover
indemnity costs only.
Question
Explain what indemnity costs are.
Solution
Indemnity costs are the pure claims costs.
An additional consideration is whether the curves are on a per-claim (paid) or
per-occurrence basis. Clearly, any curves used should be appropriate for the cover being
granted.
A per-claim basis means that curves are based on the amounts that will be paid to each individual
claimant (plaintiff) for losses that arise from one incident. A per-occurrence basis means that
curves are based on the total amounts paid to all plaintiffs for losses that arise from one incident.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
1.3 Properties of the curves
This section explains the mathematics behind the curves’ creation.
The curves, however they are expressed, are closely related to the original loss distribution.
They are usually proportional to the limited expected value (LEV) function. So the
properties of the LEV function carry forward to the curves. We will start by looking at some
of the properties of the LEV function. Let:
X be the random variable representing the loss severity,
FX x be the cdf (cumulative distribution function) of X
SX x 1 FX x be the survival function.
If your memory of statistics is rusty, FX x is the cumulative distribution function of the claim
size, and is related to the underlying probability function (noticing that losses cannot be negative).
Hence:
x
Fx x f y dy Pr X x and Sx x Pr X x .
0
Then
EX xdFX x SX x dx
(1.1)
0 0
The first equality follows from the fact that:
dFX (x) dF (x)
f ( x) and so E ( X ) xf (x)dx x X dx.
dx dx
0 0
To prove the second equality in (1.1), use integration by parts to show that:
E ( X ) SX (x)dx
0
dv
by choosing u S(x) 1 F (x ) and 1.
dx
We now define the LEV function to be the expected value of X but where X is limited to x. This is
denoted by LEVx x E X x . In other words:
x x
LEV X x E X x ydFX y SX x x SX y dy
(1.2)
0 0
where the last equality in each of equation (1.1) and (1.2) applies because loss distributions
are non-negative.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 7
The equalities mentioned here can be proven using integration by parts with the same choice of
dv
u and as suggested for the integration by parts above.
dx
We can see from the definition of the LEV function that, in insurance terms, it represents the
expected value of the losses limited to a primary layer of size x.
We will make an important assumption here.
The curves should actually represent the expected indemnity cost at the various limits. However,
cost is made up of frequency as well as severity. So, if we assume that the underlying frequency
of claims is independent of both the severity and the limit, then we can ignore frequency, and
take the curve to represent just the limited expected severity.
This is why the first paragraph in this section said that ‘the curves are closely related to the
original loss distribution’.
Differentiating we get:
LEV X x SX x (1.3)
From equations (1.2) and (1.3), two properties of the LEV function are clear:
LEV x is an increasing function (or, strictly speaking, non-decreasing)
it increases at a decreasing rate (since S x is itself non-increasing), that is, it is a
concave function.
Both of these properties should be intuitively obvious because as the limit x increases, so will the
expected value of X limited to x, but by a decreasing rate.
Hopefully these properties will also be obvious when we look at graphs of the curves, which we
will see later in this chapter.
Since the different forms of original loss curves (eg ILFs) are really just expressions of the
LEV function, they also share these properties (with the exception of XL scales that are
related to E x LEV x , so these are non-increasing and convex).
This exception is because the excess of loss scales are effectively the same curve but expressed
from the ‘other end’, and so the properties above are reversed.
Although the basic pricing methodology is the same for both property and casualty rating,
some of the assumptions and considerations are specific so we will look at them separately.
In the next section we look at curves used in property business, and in Section 3 we will look at
curves for casualty (liability) business.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
2 Property XL rating using exposure curves
In this section, we look specifically at the use of original loss curves in property business.
Remember from earlier that, in this case, the curves are often referred to as first loss scales or
exposure curves.
2.1 Outline theory
Continuing with the definitions from the introduction (ie Section 1), we now consider a single
property risk. Let:
M be a measure of the size of the risk; this could be sum insured (SI), MPL and so
on.
Y be the random variable representing the size of loss as a proportion of M (so
X
Y ). We will call this the relative loss severity.
M
For example, if the loss X is half of the sum insured, then Y would take the value of ½.
FY x be the cdf of Y.
SY x 1 FY x be the survival function of Y.
Note: depending on the definition of M, Y could take values greater than one.
Question
Explain why this could be the case.
Solution
A claim can be bigger than the PML. The PML (probable or possible maximum loss) is an estimate
of the biggest loss, not the absolute maximum.
The cover could be on a ‘first loss’ basis, which the Glossary says is:
‘A form of insurance cover in which the sum insured is less than the full value of the insured
property, and average will not be applied.’ This means that the policyholder has to bear any loss
in excess of the sum insured. It is appropriate in circumstances where the policyholder considers
that a loss in excess of the sum insured is extremely unlikely or the item is effectively priceless. It
is commonly used in fire business.’
We then define an exposure curve as:
LEVY x
Gx (2.1)
E Y
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 9
The exposure curve G y can be thought of as a graphical representation of the ratio of the
claims cost below a certain point y to the claims cost in total, where y is the chosen proportion of
the maximum claim.
For example, let’s suppose that for a household policy the sum insured is £10,000 and the pure
risk premium to cover claims up to that level is £100. Let’s also suppose that we’re interested in
knowing the pure claims cost for claims up to £5,000. Then y is 0.5 and G 0.5 will tell us the
proportion of the £100 to use as our pure risk premium for the lower limit.
Notice that G 1 1 because the pure risk premium will be the same if the sum insured is
unchanged, and that G 0 0 because the claims cost is zero if the sum insured is zero.
The more the risk is concentrated towards the lower end of the sum insured spectrum, the
steeper the curve. This makes intuitive sense we would normally expect, all else being equal, a
policy with sum insured £1,000 to have a greater risk premium (per unit sum insured) than a
policy with sum insured £10,000, since losses at the lower end are more likely (ie loss distributions
are normally positively-skewed).
Some examples of what exposure curves look like are shown in the graph below. Note that
the values given are arbitrary and should not be used for pricing anything.
The steepness of the curve is related to the severity of the loss distribution. The closer the
curve is to the diagonal the greater the proportion of large losses (relative to M). So in the
examples below, curve A is the most severe and curve C the least.
In the above, ‘severe’ means that a large proportion of the losses are for large amounts.
G(y)
A
0.5 B
C
0
0 0.5 1
y
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
Now we consider a simple pricing example:
Assume we have a risk size M and cover is required for a layer of L excess of D,
where 0 D L D M .
This could be, for example, an excess of loss reinsurance policy with limits D and L + D.
Let N be the random variable representing the annual number of losses to the risk
(ground up) with X and Y as previously defined.
X is the original claim size distribution, and Y is the size of loss as a proportion of the maximum.
Let S be the random variable representing the total annual ground-up losses to the
risk.
This will be the product of the frequency and the severity.
Let SL be the random variable representing the total annual losses to the layer.
Now we find the loss cost to the layer in terms of the exposure curve function. Remember that
the sign means ‘limited to …’. Also, we introduce the sign which means the reverse, ie ‘of a
minimum size …’.
C Ground-up loss cost E S E N E X (2.2)
CL Layer loss cost E SL
E N E X D L 0
E N E X L D X D
E N E X E X L D X D
E X
C E Y L M D M Y D M
E Y
C E Y L M D M E Y D M
E Y
LD D
C G G
M M (2.3)
Example
A policy has a sum insured of £10,000 for which the risk premium is £100.
You are about to purchase excess of loss reinsurance for £5,000 xs £2,500 and want to calculate
the reinsurance risk premium.
Your exposure curve gives G 0.75 0.9 and G 0.25 0.7 .
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 11
Then, using equation (2.3), the reinsurance risk premium is £100 0.9 0.7 £20.
So to estimate the loss cost to the layer we need to have an estimate of the full value loss
cost. For direct and facultative business the company is likely to have analysed full value
loss cost and have rates for different types of property for different perils and covers (treaty
pricing is covered in Section 2.4).
There then remains the problem of deriving or selecting an appropriate exposure curve.
This is discussed in the following section.
2.2 Selecting exposure curves
Notice that the exposure curve works with the variable Y, which is the relative loss size
distribution, and not the original loss size distribution X. This is because, if we used X directly, it
would be more likely that the curve would depend on the size of the risks giving rise to the claims
distribution X, and so we would need a different curve for each size of policy.
The key question when using exposure curves is:
‘To what extent is the relative loss size distribution Y, and hence the exposure curve,
independent of the individual characteristics of the risk?’
The motivation behind switching to Y (in equation (2.3)), rather than staying with the original
loss in absolute values X, is the belief that, in some circumstances at least, Y can be
considered independent of the size of the risk.
Thankfully, research on homogeneous home insurance business in the US has indicated that this is
indeed the case:
Ruth Salzmann, in a 1960s study of fire losses (buildings only) on US homeowners’ policies,
concluded that this assumption was a reasonable approximation within each construction
type for her, reasonably homogenous, data. In this study, the buildings sum insured was
used as the risk size measure. Other authors have supported this conclusion for
reasonably homogenous sets of US homeowners’ data.
However, problems arise when the data is less homogenous (including wider ranges in risk
size). Salzmann and Ludwig both showed that the distribution of Y is very much dependent
on the peril, and Ludwig, when he extended the analysis to a set of data relating to small
commercial business, showed that the assumption was not valid across the full range of
sums insured for any of the causes of loss studied. He found that, for his data, smaller
risks have a higher proportion of severe losses (relative to the sum insured) than larger
risks. Other authors have supported this finding.
If you are interested, details of the above are given in the following Casualty Actuarial Society
papers, which are not part of the Core Reading:
Salzmann, R.E., Rating by Layer of Insurance, PCAS, Vol. L, 1963, pp. 15-26
Ludwig, S., An Exposure Rating Approach to Pricing Property Excess of Loss Reinsurance,
PCAS, Vol. LXXVIII, 1991, pp. 110-145.
Some other sources of heterogeneity that are highly likely to alter the distribution of Y are:
differences in jurisdiction and claims environment
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
different sub-classes (eg retail vs manufacturing vs warehouse)
different coverages (buildings only, contents and degree of business interruption
cover).
In theory, at least, we should derive separate exposure curves wherever these differences
become significant, for each peril and by banding of risk size. We should then apply these
to the ground-up rate for each grouping / peril. However, deriving these curves would
require an enormous amount of quality data, which is unlikely to be available to most
practitioners. In practice therefore, in many circumstances, we are likely to use judgement
to reduce the number of groups or to adjust exposure curves for different groups.
In summary then, we can use published exposure curves for property business, but we need to be
aware that the more specific our business is, the greater the need to look for specific curves or to
treat the curves we are using with some caution or adjustment.
2.3 Effect of claims inflation
We now consider the effects of claims inflation on exposure curves. Practitioners often refer to
claims inflation as ‘trend’, and the practice of adjusting for claims inflation as ‘trending’.
If we believe that the effect of claims trend is uniform across all loss sizes, and that the
sums insured are being adjusted appropriately for trend, then we require no adjustment to
the exposure curves for trend since the loss distribution X and risk size M increase in
proportion, leaving Y (which is X/M) unchanged. Where this is not the case, we will need to
adjust the exposure curves by considering the relative effects of trend on different loss
sizes, or by reworking the entire analysis.
There are several reasons why the effect of inflation on different loss sizes may differ, as
the components of the loss are likely to change as size increases.
For example, consider firstly a commercial property fire which results in total loss the claim cost
could include property reinstatement as well as consequential loss. Secondly, consider a small
fire which resulted in minimal damage to stock in this case, the claim cost would cover simply
the replacement of stock. As the two claims represent quite different types of loss, they would be
affected differently by inflation.
2.4 Using exposure curves in risk XL treaty rating
We now consider the use of exposure curves when pricing reinsurance treaties. In particular, we
consider property reinsured under an excess of loss (XL) arrangement.
We frequently use exposure curves in property per risk excess of loss rating. We usually
refer to the method in this context as ‘exposure rating’.
To exposure rate a risk XL treaty the reinsurer requires detailed information on the sizes of
risks written by the cedant (may be in the form of SIs or MPLs, and so on) and the premium
income. The cedant often presents a risk profile in the form of a table of original premiums
by sum insured band (see example below).
Alternatively, the cedant may provide an entire download of the risks written, with the risk
size and premium for each one. Note: both the risk profile and the risk download will
probably relate to the past (usually in the previous year) and will not necessarily be
representative of the prospective period covered by the treaty.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 13
The outline approach is illustrated by an example shown in Table 2.1. Note: the values
shown in the table are completely arbitrary and are only for the purposes of illustrating the
general principles.
Table 2.1: Outline of treaty exposure rating Arbitrary units and values
A B C D E F G H I J K L M O
Sum Banding Average Original Original Original Treaty Treaty Selected Treaty Treaty Exp % Exp % Loss
insured upper in band premium loss loss attachment exit curve attachment exit % attachment exit cost to
lower limit ratio cost point % layer
limit
- 5 2.5 10,000 60% 6,000 96.2 480.8 A 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%
5 10 7.5 9,000 60% 5,400 96.2 480.8 A 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%
10 20 15.0 8,000 60% 4,800 96.2 480.8 A 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%
20 30 25.0 7,000 60% 4,200 96.2 480.8 A 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%
30 40 35.0 6,000 60% 3,600 96.2 480.8 A 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%
40 50 45.0 5,000 60% 3,000 96.2 480.8 A 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%
50 100 75.0 4,000 60% 2,400 96.2 480.8 A 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%
100 150 125.0 3,000 60% 1,800 96.2 480.8 B 76.9% 100.0% 94.8% 100.0% 94
150 200 175.0 2,000 60% 1,200 96.2 480.8 B 54.9% 100.0% 85.0% 100.0% 180
200 250 225.0 1,000 60% 600 96.2 480.8 B 42.7% 100.0% 76.0% 100.0% 144
250 300 275.0 500 60% 300 96.2 480.8 B 35.0% 100.0% 68.4% 100.0% 95
300 400 350.0 600 60% 360 96.2 480.8 B 27.5% 100.0% 59.1% 100.0% 147
400 500 450.0 400 60% 240 96.2 480.8 B 21.4% 100.0% 49.8% 100.0% 120
500 1,000 750.0 1,000 60% 600 96.2 480.8 B 12.8% 64.1% 33.6% 89.9% 338
Sum 57,500 1,118
Loss cost rate 1.9%
Referring to Table 2.1:
Columns A, B and D are data provided by the cedant.
A and B show the sum insured band, and D gives the cedant’s premium income for
policies sold within each band.
Column C is used where a banding is provided of sums insured. A single value is
required to apply to the exposure curve. Here the midpoint of each interval has
been chosen. The loss cost derived can be quite sensitive to the assumption here,
which is discussed in a little more detail below.
For example, if the average loss cost is towards one end of each band, quite different
results will be obtained.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
A reinsurer is unlikely to have the detail to estimate ground-up rates from the
original exposures so usually will have to estimate the full-value loss cost from the
premium data provided by the cedant. To do this, the reinsurer estimates the
cedant’s (ground-up) loss ratio. Ground-up loss data may be available to estimate
the loss ratio, otherwise an assumption may be required.
The loss ratio would be expected to vary with the insurance cycle. It need not be the
same for each banding although in Table 2.1 we have assumed it is (column E). If
we use different curves for different perils and risk groupings, we should split the
original loss cost between these perils and apply the different curve to each element
of the loss cost. In some cases cedant data will be available to estimate this split.
We then derive the original full value loss cost estimate (column F) using the
original premium and loss ratio.
So E is the cedant’s loss ratio assumed for the band, and F is the product of D and E.
Columns G and H are derived from the treaty limits. The treaty here is 400 xs 100,
but the limits have been adjusted for trend. This is because the profile is, in this
example, a year out of date. Rather than inflate all the sums insured in the table for
a year’s trend it is simpler to deflate the treaty limits from the middle of the
prospective period to the date of construction of the risk profile; the result is the
same. In this example the data is from the middle of the current treaty-year so one
year’s inflation (at 4%) has been used. So column G = 100/1.04; H = (100 + 400)/1.04.
In column I the reinsurer has selected the appropriate exposure curve to use for
each banding. In this case a different curve has been selected for the larger risks.
The possible curves that are used in practice are discussed later in this chapter.
Columns J and K show the treaty attachment and exit points as a proportion of the
sum insured for use with the exposure curve ie J
G C . Similarly for column K.
C
Note: here we have assumed that the values given in the profile genuinely cannot be
exceeded. If this is not the case the values in columns J and K should be allowed to
exceed 100% and the loss cost associated with losses that are greater than M
reflected in the exposure curve.
So, for example, in the first few rows, column J shows 100% because the attachment point
in column G is greater than column C. Once column C reaches 125.0, then column J is
96.2 76.9% .
125.0
Columns L and M are read from the selected exposure curve and give the
proportions of the loss cost estimated to relate to ground-up layers with the limits
given in G and H. So using the notation from equation (2.1) we have L G J , (and
similarly for M).
We cannot work out the figures in columns L and M manually since we have not been
given the exposure curve used.
In column O the loss cost to the layer is estimated using equation (2.3). Continuing
to use the column references from the table we have O M L F .
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 15
The final loss cost rate (as a percentage of the original premium) is 1.9% and is
calculated by: Rate
O .
D
As previously noted, in column C we have taken the arithmetic average of the edges of the
band as a measure of the average sum insured within the band and allocated the entire
band’s premium to the calculated average risk size. If the banding widths are not small
compared with the layer priced, this assumption can have a significant impact on the
resulting loss cost estimate. For bandings that straddle the attachment point, an average
value within the band is likely to be inappropriate.
In this example, simply taking 75.0 to represent the band 50–100 would be inappropriate, as this
would assume that all these claims would be beneath the layer, whereas in fact any claims greater
than 96.2 will contribute to the cost of the layer (once inflation has been applied).
If more information is not available on the distribution of risk size within the bandings, it is
sensible to test this assumption for sensitivity (say by assuming that every risk is at the top
of the band). It is not unheard of for risk profiles to be presented to reinsurers in such a
way that a band that exposes the layer has its mid-point just below the attachment point of
the treaty.
This would of course, look as if claims are unlikely to hit the layer of reinsurance, and so result in a
lower premium for the cedant. It is important for a reinsurer to question the validity of any data
presented by the cedant or broker.
If the cedant provides a complete download of risks, then this problem is alleviated. We can
do the analysis as in Table 2.1 but with an individual line for every original risk.
Alternatively, if this is computationally too intensive, the full risk profile at least allows us to
investigate the banding and look at the distribution of risk sizes within important bands.
We have assumed that the risk profile provided will be representative of the one for the
prospective treaty year (subject to a uniform adjustment of sums insured for trend).
Material changes in the shape of the profile are likely to cause a material change in the
premium. If material changes are likely and we cannot predict the impact of them, then this
approach is not appropriate. Risk profiles can change quite dramatically during the
insurance cycle.
Another point about the example in Table 2.1, which is really more a feature of treaty
structure rather than of the pricing methodology itself, is how sensitive the rate can be to
changes in the volume of premium exposing the treaty. In this case, the treaty premium is
expressed as a rate on the entire original premium. But 85% of the subject premium
(ie 49,000, which is the sum of the original premium from 10,000 down to 4,000) is in respect of
risks that are thought not to expose the treaty to losses. This can make the treaty loss cost
rate sensitive to apparently small changes in the volume of business that exposes the
treaty. Note: treaties can be structured to alleviate this problem (sometimes by removing
blocks of business from the treaty base that cannot expose the treaty).
Treaty exposure rating additional considerations
When we use exposure curves for treaty pricing, there are a series of considerations and
problems additional to those we encounter when we price direct and facultative business.
The main problem is lack of data.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
Choice and availability of exposure curves
One major problem with using benchmarks such as exposure curves is simply their lack of
availability, at least at a suitable level of detail or applicability.
The reinsurer is very unlikely to have the full range of exposure curves available (or even
enough detail from the cedant) to allow division into completely homogenous subgroups.
So we must exercise considerable judgement to select the best curves and groupings
possible. Clearly this leads to greater uncertainty in the estimated loss cost.
Also, where commercial business is being reinsured, the original insurance is likely to
cover properties at several locations. Sometimes the risk profile (against which the full
premium for the whole risk is allocated) may show just the largest value property (called the
top location). The relative loss distribution here will depend on the distribution of the
values for all the locations. We can construct curves on this basis, but in using them, we
rely on the assumption that the distribution of values for the reinsured risks is similar to
those underlying the exposure curve selected. In recent years it has become more common
for information detailing the distribution of insured values to be supplied for large
multi-location risks.
The values shown in the risk profile could be insured values or could be MPLs (or EMLs and
so on). We should derive the exposure curves used on a consistent basis.
Estimation of original loss ratio
As explained in Section 2.4, we usually require an estimate of the cedant’s loss ratio. There
may be limited data with which to do this, adding another level of uncertainty to the
process.
Although each loss ratio will include an estimate of the outstanding claims and hence be subject
to a particular reserving basis, this should not be too subjective for property business because it is
largely short-tailed (although for some weather-related perils, loss ratios can vary considerably).
However, it is more the level of detail to which loss ratios are recorded that may be lacking, eg for
each location, sum insured band, etc.
Treatment of original deductibles
In many situations, the original business will be excess of underlying deductibles (or
excesses). These may be small working deductibles (eg £100 for each household contents
claim), or they may be much larger (for example, where the original insured retains large
primary layers via a captive, or where the cedant is writing excess business). We derive
some exposure curves already allowing for deductibles, in which case the methodology is
unchanged providing we are comfortable that the deductible structure underlying the treaty
is sufficiently similar to that underlying the derivation of the exposure curves.
Where the exposure curves are based on ground-up data, we should adjust the
methodology.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 17
Instead of:
LD D
CL Layer loss cost C G G
M M
equation (2.3) then becomes:
LD d D d
G G
M d M d
CL Layer loss cost C (2.4)
d
1 G
M d
Here, the notation is the same as for equation (2.3) but with C representing the loss cost for
the original risk (no longer ground-up) and d representing the original deductible.
Note: the introduction of original deductibles has a proportionately greater impact on the
original insurer’s loss cost than the reinsurer’s. All other factors being equal, therefore, we
would expect the presence of original deductibles to increase the reinsurance rate when
expressed as a percentage of the original premium.
This makes intuitive sense, since the insurer will not be liable for the original deductible.
Treatment of inuring reinsurances
Reinsurance X is said to inure to the benefit of another reinsurance arrangement Y if X acts before
Y, and Y acts on the net retained amount after X has been applied.
There may be other (facultative or proportional) reinsurances that inure to the risk XL treaty.
For example, there may be a quota share treaty on a property account (which may have been
arranged for reciprocity purposes) that acts to reduce all gross claims by a fixed percentage
before the risk XL treaty is applied.
Similarly, some or all of the original business may have been written on a coinsurance
basis.
Coinsurance is an arrangement whereby two or more insurers enter into a single contract with
the insured to cover a risk in agreed proportions at a specified premium. Each insurer is liable
only for its own proportion of the total risk. Coinsurance is defined in the Glossary and is
discussed in more detail in Subject SP7.
We should adjust the risk profile and methodology to take these into account. The exact
details of the adjustments required depend on the nature of the inuring covers.
Treatment of stacked limits
If a policyholder is insured over multiple periods, each with its own claim limit, or has multiple
policies, then normally only one limit would apply to a particular claim. However, in some
territories, policyholders have the option to add all the limits. This means that if a loss occurs that
causes damage over more than one policy period or against more than one policy, the policy
limits can be added up for the purposes of assessing the maximum claim, even though the loss is a
single occurrence. This is known as stacking.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
If reinsurance of a large commercial book is being priced, the cedant may have written
shares on different layers. These layers may not be adjacent and the shares on the layers
may be different. It is likely that losses to these layers from a single event will be summed
for the purposes of applying the limits of the treaty. We should obtain details of stacked
limits and adjust the methodology accordingly.
The recoveries from the reinsurance contract will differ depending on whether the different
layers (of the same risk) written by the cedant are regarded as stacked or independent within the
terms of the XL reinsurance treaty. For example, suppose that layers 400k xs 100k and 1m xs
500k are written by the cedant and a reinsurance contract for 500k xs 500k covers these
contracts. If the layers are stacked, then the underlying contract is essentially 1.4m xs 100k and
the reinsurance covers the range [600k,1.1m]. If they are independent, the reinsurance only
affects the 1m xs 500k contract, covering the range [1m, 1.5m].
Catastrophe XL rating
Finally, it is worth pointing out that we could, in theory at least, apply this method to
catastrophe XL pricing. In practice the curves would be very sensitive to the geographical
distribution of the cedant’s insured values. Also the insured events have long return
periods, making the curves difficult to estimate. Usually we use different exposure-based
methods for cat XL rating (for example, catastrophe models or, where a model is not
available, we consider zonal aggregate exposures, ie the aggregate sum insured or number of
policies within each geographical zone).
Even within risk XL treaty rating, it is common to model the ‘nat-cat’ element of the loss
cost separately (for example, using a cat model) and add this to the cost of other perils
modelled on the relevant exposure curves.
‘Nat-cat’ is short for natural catastrophe, such as earthquakes and floods. Catastrophe models
will be covered in Chapter 21 (and further in Subject SA3).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 19
3 Casualty XL rating using ILFs
So far we have looked at how original loss curves are used in property business, where they are
called first loss curves or exposure curves. Now we look at how they can be used to rate casualty
(ie liability) business, where are they often called increased limit factors (ILFs).
Many of the considerations in casualty rating are similar in nature to those outlined for
property in Section 2. However, the terminology and some of the issues are different.
These differences are outlined in this section.
3.1 Outline theory
The main difference arises from the assumption used in constructing property exposure
curves that, within certain homogenous groups at least, the relative loss size distribution Y
can be considered to be independent of the size of the risk. This assumption is based on
the belief that the sum insured (or MPL and so on) gives genuine information about the
ground-up unlimited loss severity distribution for the risk in question (that is, the degree of
under-insurance is limited).
The last part of Core Reading in brackets just means we are assuming that the insureds choose
appropriate sums insured for themselves, neither overestimating nor underestimating the
amount required.
Remember that the relative loss size distribution Y represents the original loss X as a proportion of
X
the size of the risk M, ie Y .
M
In casualty there is no real equivalence. There is no easily definable upper limit on the
possible severity of loss to the original insured, which will often depend on court awards.
Many factors influencing the limit actually purchased may not be connected with the
potential loss severity (such as the insured’s insurance budget, costs of cover, insured’s
risk aversion, market practice, cover purchased historically).
The two points in the paragraph above are connected. Just as it is not easy for the insurer to
estimate the probable maximum loss on a particular liability policy, it is also not easy for the
policyholder concerned. Hence their choice of limit may just be based on their insurance budget,
risk aversion, what other companies do or what they did last year. If the limit purchased is too
low, it does provide a ‘definable upper limit’ on the possible severity of loss. The problem is that
it will often be unrealistically high and so not reflective of the probable maximum loss.
So for casualty business, the limit purchased does not provide much information about the
potential loss severity in the way that the insured values do for property treaties. Thus we
gain nothing in the analysis by switching from the original loss distribution X to the relative
loss size distribution Y, as there is no reason to believe that Y will be the same for different
risks.
For casualty business, therefore, we select risk groups, and within these, we make the
following assumptions:
the (ground-up) loss frequency is independent of the limit purchased
the (ground-up) severity is independent of the number of losses and of the limit
purchased.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
These assumptions will often be reasonable. However, we should not accept them without
question. For instance, we could argue that those who buy higher limits have a greater
propensity to higher losses (perhaps because they have ‘deeper pockets’).
Question
Explain what ‘having deeper pockets’ might mean.
Solution
Having deep pockets means that the defendant is relatively wealthy, and so there’s a lot of money
to be had if someone decided to sue them, and succeeded. The Glossary says that deep pocket
syndrome is:
‘A situation where claims are made based on the ability of the defendant to pay rather than on
share of blame. An injured party will try to blame the party with the greatest wealth (ie deepest
pocket) where there is more than one potential defendant.’
Alternatively, we could argue that they have better risk control, leading to a reduced
frequency (and possibly severity) of losses.
The argument is that wealthy companies tend to be large ones and larger companies tend to have
better risk control systems in place, eg better enforcement of health and safety standards in the
workplace.
Once again, it is important that we select risk groupings for which these assumptions are, at
the very least, plausible.
Increased limit factors (ILFs)
For casualty business, we use original loss curves in the form of ILFs.
We usually express ILFs with reference to the loss cost for a relatively low limit (the ‘basic
limit’).
So, for example, the ILF at level x, relative to basic limit b, is:
Expected loss cost x
ILF x
Expected loss cost b
Expected frequency x Expected severity x
Expected frequency b Expected severity b
where the term in brackets indicates the limit.
However, earlier we assumed that the frequency is independent of the limit, so the first term on
the numerator and denominator cancel.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 21
Based on similar notation to the preceding sections (and considering, as per Section 1.2,
only the loss cost) with basic limit b, we define:
LEV X x
ILF x (3.1)
LEV X b
Note: for x b , the ILF will be greater than one.
This makes intuitive sense, because the expected value of an amount limited to x must be greater
than the expected value of an amount limited to an amount less than x (unless something very
strange indeed is going on with the claim distribution).
Also note that here we have not switched to a relative loss size distribution Y, but have
remained with the original loss distribution. Therefore, ILFs are usually functions of a
monetary amount, represented by x in equation (3.1). It is easy to see from equation (3.1)
that the ILF represents the ratio of the loss cost for a primary limit x to the loss cost for the
basic limit b.
Example
For a particular line of business, losses are as follows:
Original loss (£) Limited at £1,000 Limited at £2,000
100 100 100
500 500 500
1,500 1,000 1,500
3,000 1,000 2,000
The ILF taking the basic limit of £1,000 to the limit of £2,000 would be calculated as:
100 500 1,500 2,000
ILF 1.6
100 500 1,000 1,000
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
ILFs are often presented in the form of a table. An example is shown in Table 3.1; the
example is for illustration only (it is actually based on a log-normal distribution).
Table 3.1: Example ILFs
Arbitrary units and values
Limit ILF
100,000 1.000
200,000 1.432
300,000 1.717
400,000 1.927
500,000 2.092
1,000,000 2.600
1,500,000 2.877
2,000,000 3.058
3,000,000 3.288
4,000,000 3.431
5,000,000 3.530
10,000,000 3.771
Question
In the table, the ILFs are increasing as the limit increases, but at a decreasing rate. Explain why
this is expected.
Solution
This is because the LEV is increasing at a decreasing rate.
The treatment of ALAE is usually a much more important consideration for casualty
business than for property business as this can often represent a very significant
proportion of the claims cost. We can derive ILFs to include the ALAE component.
However, it is important to understand the treatment of ALAE in the policy before deciding
on the nature of the ILFs to use and how to allow for the ALAE cost. For simplicity we
continue to ignore ALAE in the theory below.
The theory below could also be extended to add in ULAE and risk loads as discussed for property
business in Section 2.
The following derivation is for a layer of L excess of D.
To derive XL prices using ILFs, similarly to Section 2, we have the following equation:
Cb Basic limits loss cost E N E X b (3.2)
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 23
CL Layer loss cost
E N E X D L 0
E N E X L D X D
E N E X b E X L D X D
E X b (3.3)
Cb E X L D X D
E X b
Cb E X L D E X D
Cb ILF L D ILF D
E X b
The formula above makes intuitive sense. Let’s denote the layer between x and y as [ x , y ] . The
cost to the layer [0,L D ] is Cb multiplied by ILF (L D) and the cost to the layer [0,D ] is Cb
multiplied by ILF (D) . Hence the cost to the layer [D,L+D] is the difference between them.
So we require an estimate of the loss cost at the basic limit (analogously to the full-value
loss cost in property rating). From this, we estimate the loss cost to the layer using ILFs.
Question
The expected loss cost for a layer at a basic limit of £100,000 is £100. Use Table 3.1 to calculate
the expected loss cost for a layer at a limit of £1,000,000.
Solution
Using the table:
ILF1,000,000 2.600
Cost £100 £100 £260 .
ILF100,000 1.000
3.2 Selecting appropriate tables of ILFs
As for property rating, the key consideration when pricing using ILFs is to select risk
groupings such that the assumptions in Section 3.1 are valid. Clearly, given the
dependence of liability claims on the legal and social environment, the jurisdiction and the
nature of the coverage offered will be key considerations here.
Additional considerations are:
The treatment of ALAE in the coverage offered.
The treatment of ULAE and loadings for risk.
The nature of the limits offered. It is common in the US for split limits to be offered
(a per-claimant limit and per-occurrence limit). Insurers construct ILF tables taking
these split limits into account (although the theory in Section 3.1 needs some
modification).
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
Effects of trend and secular changes in the claims environment are very important
for casualty business and are discussed briefly in the following section.
Remember that trend is another word for inflation. Here, secular means long-term.
3.3 Effect of claims inflation
If we expect claims inflation to affect the loss distribution uniformly across all loss sizes,
the adjustment to ILFs is quite easy. If we expect losses to have increased by a% between
time t and time t then a little thought shows that:
x
ILFt x ILFt (3.4)
1 a
However, it is often the case that trend will not impact the loss distribution uniformly in this
way. (In many jurisdictions large liability losses have been shown to be subject to higher
inflation than smaller ones.) In this case, we should consider the change in shape of the
original loss distribution and re-work the ILF table.
Problems with the inflation allowance arise due to what is termed the ‘leveraged effect of
inflation’ on excess of loss rating. Inflation will not affect lower layers very much as most claims
are capped at a low limit, but it affects higher layers in a big way because most (or all) of the claim
is increased by the inflation factor.
Legal reform can affect different parts of the loss distribution in very different ways.
Example
For instance, a reform that reduces the overall ground-up loss cost may have a much
greater impact on smaller claims than larger ones. In this case, we should rework the ILFs.
Note that, in this example, since the reform has a greater proportionate impact on ground-
up loss costs than excess loss costs it is likely to lead to higher reinsurance rates (as
expressed as a rate on original premium) as competitive pressures (and/or regulators) lead
cedants to reduce original rates to reflect the reduced original loss cost.
3.4 Using ILFs in XL treaty rating
The approach for exposure rating XL treaties using ILFs is similar to the approach for
property rating outlined in Section 2.4.
However, the theory in Section 3.1 starts with an estimate of the basic limits loss cost. For
the treaty pricing, we start with an estimate of the loss cost for the original limit issued (the
equivalent of column F in Table 2.1). Therefore, we need to make an adjustment in the final
calculation (column O in Table 2.1). From our ILF tables we have (with l as the original
limit):
Cl Original limit loss cost Cb ILF l (3.5)
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 25
Substituting into equation (3.3) we have:
ILF L D ILF D
CL Layer loss cost Cl (3.6)
ILF l
Therefore, in order to calculate the layer loss cost, you take the difference between the ILFs at the
upper and lower limit, and ‘normalise’ by dividing by the ILF at the original limit.
The treatment of the cedant’s ALAE is an important consideration in much casualty treaty
rating. We require different adjustments to the methodology and ILFs, depending on the
coverage of defence expenses in the original policies and on the coverage of ALAE in the
treaty (for example, costs inclusive, pro rata costs in addition, and so on).
Because ILFs are expressed in absolute values, we should be careful to adjust them
appropriately for trend between the date of their derivation and the prospective treaty
period.
This was discussed in Section 3.3.
Treaties on a cessions basis
In addition, the dangers of using an out-of-date risk profile are probably more pronounced
for casualty rating, as original limits offered and purchased can vary very significantly with
the insurance cycle. For this reason, it is common in some markets to structure treaties on
a cessions (or ceded) basis.
A cessions basis is also known as a cessions-made basis, or a cessions schedule.
In these treaties, the premium ceded to the treaty depends directly on the limit for each
original risk, and the premium is determined from ILF tables set out in the treaty.
ILF tables can be used because that’s in effect what they do transfer limits from original risks to
higher layer risks.
In this case the ILFs must make full allowance for the treatment of ALAE, and for the
reinsurer’s expenses and risk / profit.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
4 Constructing original loss curves from claims data
In this section, we outline a methodology that can be used to construct exposure curves
and ILFs. Unfortunately, many practitioners will not have access to sufficient data of
sufficient quality to derive curves from data with any confidence. Those working for very
large insurers or with access to quality market data will have fewer problems. However,
even with large data sets, credibility is a significant problem for high value losses.
4.1 Deriving exposure curves
In principle, the derivation of property exposure curves from claims data is fairly
straightforward. A numerical example is shown in Table 4.1. (This example is not based on
real data and should not be used in any genuine pricing exercise.)
Table 4.1 Constructing exposure curves Arbitrary units and values
A B C D E
% of risk Total value of losses First x% of losses > Total accumulated Empirical
MPL x% of MPL x% of MPL loss cost 1st x% exposure
(x) (B+C) curve
1% 1,094,420 3,558,600 4,653,020 18.3%
2% 2,761,098 4,821,600 7,582,698 29.8%
3% 4,205,991 5,475,600 9,681,591 38.1%
4% 5,501,414 5,805,600 11,307,014 44.5%
5% 6,700,305 5,919,000 12,619,305 49.6%
6% 7,784,211 5,918,400 13,702,611 53.9%
7% 8,712,070 5,896,800 14,608,870 57.4%
8% 9,536,582 5,860,800 15,397,382 60.5%
9% 10,291,052 5,788,800 16,079,852 63.2%
10% 10,974,633 5,712,000 16,686,633 65.6%
15% 13,656,782 5,292,000 18,948,782 74.5%
20% 15,727,450 4,668,000 20,395,450 80.2%
30% 18,601,541 3,474,000 22,075,541 86.8%
40% 19,830,064 3,216,000 23,046,064 90.6%
50% 21,131,685 2,550,000 23,681,685 93.1%
60% 21,679,543 2,448,000 24,127,543 94.9%
70% 22,144,739 2,352,000 24,496,739 96.3%
80% 22,501,070 2,304,000 24,805,070 97.5%
90% 23,061,721 1,998,000 25,059,721 98.5%
100% 23,519,291 1,740,000 25,259,291 99.3%
110% 25,429,757 - 25,429,757 100.0%
120% 25,429,757 - 25,429,757 100.0%
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 27
The process works as follows:
We collect large volumes of claims data. For each claim, we obtain details of the
amounts paid, date(s) of payment, risk size (M = SI / MPL / EML), cause of loss,
classification of risk and territory.
We express each claim as a percentage of the risk size.
We divide the data into risk classifications/groupings, different perils and bandings
of risk size such that we think they are reasonably homogenous groups. There is
trade-off here between the statistical credibility of the data and the homogeneity of
the classification.
We construct a table of accumulated loss costs (in monetary amounts) by
percentage of risk size. We calculate the value at x% (x is shown in column A) by
summing the full claim amount for those claims less than or equal to x% of M
(column B). In column C, we include all claims above x% of M, but each taken at a
value equal to x% of M. (Note that M here differs for different risks.) We sum over
all claims within the selected risk grouping. We repeat for values of x at selected
intervals.
We construct empirical exposure curves (column E) for different groups by dividing
accumulated loss cost at each value of x (column D = B + C) by the total value of the
losses for the group (the maximum value in column B).
We combine groups for which there is no significant difference in the empirical
exposure curve (we need to use judgement here and consider carefully the
credibility of each curve, particularly for larger loss amounts).
We smooth the empirical curves ensuring that the resultant curves display the
properties outlined in Section 1.3.
So, for example, in Table 4.1, we can see that there are £4,653,020 of losses below 1% of the MPL,
which accounts for 18.3% (ie divided by the last figure in column B) of the total losses. Of these,
£1,094,420 is in respect of losses that are less than 1% of the MPL, and the other £3,558,600 is in
respect of bigger losses but only the part that lies beneath 1% of the MPL.
We should consider the problem of open claims.
The problem here is that we do not know the ultimate claim cost for open claims. Usually, it
would be simply a case of projecting our claims data to ultimate using, for example, standard
triangulation methods on aggregate claims data. However, for exposure curves and ILFs this is
not straightforward as we are more concerned with the growth of a distribution of losses. We
therefore also need to address changes in the shape of the loss distribution.
We can usually minimise this by excluding data from the most recent accident years.
Settlement delays are much more of a problem for liability business and are discussed
further in Section 4.2.
Additional problems are caused where policies have significant deductibles or are limited at
values below M.
Information on the total loss size will not be available if all we have is claims that have already
been subject to a deductible or have been capped at a certain level.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
These problems are discussed further in the following section.
4.2 Deriving ILFs
Constructing ILFs for casualty business also has its problems.
There are problems of volume and credibility of data when we attempt to derive ILFs. There
are also some additional problems:
Because of policy limits, we can lose information about large losses. This is a more
acute problem for liability losses since the limit purchased is not closely related to
an estimate of the maximum possible size of loss.
The impact of original limits will affect the distribution of losses to a greater extent than
for property business.
Losses must be adjusted for trend (which itself needs to be estimated).
Many claims will not be closed.
These last two problems are more significant for casualty business (compared to property) due its
long-tailed nature.
Note: the following two naïve approaches to the problem of open claims are not
appropriate:
Ignore open claims and just perform the analysis from Section 4.1 on the claims that
have closed. This is inappropriate because there is frequently a relationship
between the loss size and the settlement delay (larger claims can take longer to
settle).
Therefore ignoring the open claims will underestimate the losses and skew the ILF curve.
If we thought that open claims were completely independent of size then it wouldn’t be
such a problem.
Use the current reported claim amount (paid + case reserve) for open claims and
proceed as in Section 4.1. This is inappropriate because claims are often settled for
very different values from the case reserves. Even though the case reserves may be
sufficient or even conservative, on average a small number of losses may be settled
for values well in excess of the case reserve. Using the current reported value, we
will tend to understate the volatility of the loss distribution and can underestimate
the loss cost at higher layers (and overestimate the cost at lower layers). Note:
applying average ground-up development factors to individual claim amounts does
not solve this problem.
These problems make the construction of ILFs from underlying data a difficult process.
Here we will briefly outline a methodology designed by the Insurance Services Office (ISO)
in the US.
ISO is an organisation that provides a wide variety of insurance and risk-related services to the
insurance industry in the US. It employs many members of the Casualty Actuarial Society (the US
equivalent of the IFoA).
Only a brief outline of the methodology will be given.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 29
Further details, including numerical examples, can be found in the Casualty Actuarial Society
study note by Joseph Palmer entitled Increased Limits Ratemaking for Liability Insurance (2006).
In essence, the method applies survival functions to the closed claims (ie settled amounts). The
process is:
We trend (ie adjust for inflation) the individual losses from the experience period to
the period for which the ILFs will be applied.
We consider only closed claims (but from several accident years) and group these
claims by payment lag (time in years from accident year to settlement). Where
multiple payments are made, we use the average lag weighted by amount paid.
For each lag, we construct an empirical survival function for the claim size (see
below). In practice, lags beyond a certain period, say five years, are grouped.
Beyond this the loss distributions are thought to be similar for all lags, and so
grouping increases the credibility of the estimates.
We estimate the proportion of the number of loss occurrences for an accident year
that are settled at each lag.
We combine the empirical survival functions at each lag using the estimates or
proportions settled at each lag to estimate the combined survival function for all
claims.
We smooth the tail of the combined survival function (often by fitting a truncated
Pareto distribution above a selected threshold).
Fit a parametric distribution to the smoothed curve (ISO use a mixed exponential).
We can derive limited average severities (and hence ILFs) from the fitted loss
distribution.
Estimating the empirical survival function (required above)
This section describes how the third bullet point above is done in practice. The process is as
follows:
For each payment lag, we select discrete loss-size intervals (typically > 50 adjacent
intervals).
For each interval, we estimate the conditional survival probability (CSP). This is the
probability of a loss exceeding the upper bound of the interval, provided it exceeds the
lower bound. So, for the ith interval (with upper bound ui and lower bound li ) we have:
CSP i P X ui X li (4.1)
To estimate this probability, we consider only those policies whose attachment point is less
than or equal to li and exit point (attachment point + policy limit) is greater than ui . This
means we only consider policies where we can potentially observe losses at both the
bottom and the top of the interval. Within this group we count the number of occurrences
( Nli ) with (ground-up) loss size greater than li and the number of occurrences ( Nui ) with
(ground-up) loss size greater than ui .
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
The estimate of the conditional survival probability is then given by:
ˆ i Nui
CSP (4.2)
Nli
We can then estimate discrete points on the survival function for the ground-up losses by
multiplying the conditional survival probabilities together:
n
Sˆ un CSP
ˆ i (4.3)
i 1
Again, the Palmer paper describes this in good detail.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 31
5 Some curves used in practice
We mentioned earlier that one of the major problems with original loss curves is that they are not
particularly widely available, mainly due to data scarcity.
This section introduces some of the curves that are available throughout the insurance world,
both in the UK and the US.
The possibilities discussed here are:
to fit statistical curves to data that we have
to use Riebesell curves (described below), based on an assumption for the original loss
cost
to use a published curve available on the market.
5.1 Curve fitting
We often derive both exposure curves and ILFs and show them in the form of tables giving
values at discrete intervals. We often use interpolation methods or parametric curve fits to
find values at intervening limits. Parametric curve fits have the advantage that we can
choose curves that have the properties from Section 1.3 so the fitted curve is automatically
valid.
Question
Without looking back to Section 1.3, state the properties being referred to here.
Solution
The two properties of the LEV function are:
it is an increasing function (or strictly speaking non-decreasing)
it increases at a decreasing rate, ie it is a concave function.
If we use a different interpolation or graduation method, it is important that the final curves
retain the properties derived in Section 1.3. Otherwise, pricing between layers can become
inconsistent or irrational. We can then program the full (interpolated or graduated) curves
into a pricing model for ease of use.
One family of parametric curves that has been shown to be a good fit to a wide range of
exposure curves are the MBBEFD curves. These are so called because of their use within
statistical mechanics; the letters stand for Maxwell-Boltzmann, Bose-Einstein, Fermi-Dirac.
These curves have the advantage of having a small number of parameters (two) and the
flexibility to fit a range of exposure curves used in practice.
MBBEFD distributions are defined on the interval [0,1] and used to model losses relative to some
MPL or SI, with a value of 1 corresponding to a total loss.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
Whereas the MBBEFD curves are useful for constructing exposure curves, the following list of
distributions is useful for constructing ILFs.
Distributions that have been used as a basis for ILFs are:
log-normal
Pareto
Both the lognormal and Pareto distributions have two parameters. You will find the
distribution functions in your Tables.
truncated Pareto
mixed exponential (a weighting of two or more exponential distributions with
different parameters).
An advantage of representing curves in parametric form is that it is often possible to adjust
the parameters to derive new curves with slightly different properties (for example, if the
nature of the risks being priced requires a curve with properties somewhere between two
standard curves, it may be possible to adjust parameters to give a curve with these
properties).
Whichever curves are used, it will be important to test the goodness of fit to any data you might
have. However, in the industry, certain curves are already well known to be a reasonable fit for
particular types of claim.
5.2 The Riebesell curves
Often a reinsurer will not have sufficient data to derive ILFs for the original business that it
is reinsuring. In this case, we must use judgement to select ILFs from other sources or
appropriate distributional assumptions on which to base ILFs. We might assume one of the
loss distributions from Section 5.1. An assumption quite frequently used for European
casualty treaty business leads to a family of curves called Riebesell curves.
These curves are very popular in Germany (Paul Riebesell was a German mathematician).
The reason that the curves are more commonly used for casualty (liability) business rather than
property business is as follows:
In property business, a common assumption when applying exposure curves is to assume that, for
a particular group of risks, the loss when expressed as a proportion of the sum insured is
independent of the risk.
However, in casualty business, the sum insured is not the maximum amount of a claim (since
claims can effectively be unlimited), but instead is the limit of indemnity chosen by the
policyholder, which varies with each risk. This messes up the maths when using ILFs. Riebesell
curves successfully allow for this complexity.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 33
More details are given in the following paper, which is not part of the Core Reading:
Mack, T and Fackler, M, Exposure Rating in Liability Reinsurance, ASTIN Colloquium Berlin
2003.
These curves are not derived from underlying data, but are based on an assumption
regarding the original loss cost. The assumption is that each time the sum insured doubles,
the loss cost increases by a constant factor (x%). Thomas Mack and Michael Fackler
showed that this assumption is consistent with an original loss distribution having a Pareto
tail (parameter < 1).
The Pareto parameter we are referring to here is the shape parameter, called in the Tables.
So if we believe that our casualty claims have a Pareto tail with a shape parameter less than 1,
then we can assume that the Riebesell curves are suitable to use for ILF purposes.
Mack and Fackler also showed that the assumption can be consistent with the collective
risk model provided that it is only used for sufficiently high loss thresholds (that is, the level
at which the reinsurance cover starts).
For the original loss distributions they considered, a threshold of about 5 E X was
appropriate (so that the reinsurance has to cover losses in excess of 5 E X or greater).
For many international casualty markets, where limits of liability are high, this condition is
easily met and reinsurers use a family of Riebesell curves with the factor x varying
depending on the nature and class of the original business. Note: the threshold condition
means that using the Riebesell curves to adjust for original deductibles (analogously to
equation (2.4)) is often not appropriate.
Question
Explain why it is often not appropriate to use Riebesell curves to adjust for original deductibles.
Solution
The deductible d on the original policy written by the direct writer is unlikely to exceed five times
the expected losses. Hence we cannot use the Riebesell curve to estimate ILF (d ) . This makes it
difficult to adjust for original deductibles using Riebesell curves.
The Riebesell curves are easy to use in practice because they and the ILFs derived from
them are scale invariant. This means they and the ILFs do not have to be adjusted for
inflation or changes in currency (provided the attachment points remain sufficiently high for
the curves to be valid). This is a consequence of the assumption (explained above) on
which the curves are based.
5.3 Some market curves
Many reinsurers will not have sufficient data to derive a whole suite of exposure curves.
They will usually have a set of curves from different sources (both internal and external)
that they consider appropriate for different types of business and use judgement to select
the most appropriate curves for each treaty. Some curves have been published from time to
time and have been used throughout the market.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
For example:
the Swiss Re / Gasser curves based on an analysis by Peter Gasser of Swiss fire
loss data for 1959-67
so-called Lloyd’s curves which originated within the London reinsurance market
(though the origin and basis is uncertain)
other exposure curves derived by Swiss Re.
These are purely examples of some curves that have been used in the market. We should
seriously consider whether a curve is appropriate before using it for any specific pricing
exercise. Anecdotes abound within reinsurance markets of curves being lifted from
actuarial papers and used in completely inappropriate contexts for years, or even decades.
The ISO in the US derives exposure curves for US property business classes and ILFs for
US casualty classes. These are available as part of computer packages sold by ISO.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 35
6 Some other uses of curves in reinsurance pricing
In this section, we mention two further complications that arise when applying exposure curves.
The interested student (particularly those studying Subject SA3) might wish to read further into
these topics, using the references below.
6.1 Inferring treaty loss distributions from exposure rating
The methodology outlined in Sections 2.4 and 3.4 is appropriate when we estimate the
annual average loss cost for a treaty with unlimited free reinstatements. Often there will be
some features of a treaty that are affected by the aggregate losses to the layer.
These are often simply called aggregate features. The important thing about aggregate features
is that they depend on the claims experience of the treaty itself.
In their simplest form this may be an annual aggregate limit or deductible. Paid
reinstatements and swing-rated premiums are also common in some markets.
Question
Explain each of the following terms:
annual aggregate limits and deductibles
unlimited free reinstatements and paid reinstatements
swing-rated premiums.
Solution
Annual aggregate limits and deductibles
These are limits and deductibles that only apply to the annual aggregate (otherwise recoverable)
losses. For example, with an annual aggregate deductible of £1m on an excess of loss treaty, this
means that if reinsurance recoveries on an excess of loss treaty total less than £1m (within a
year), then no recovery will in fact be made. Once the recoveries exceed £1m, then the excess
over £1m will be paid.
Reinstatements
Within excess of loss reinsurance, reinstatements are the restoration of full cover following a
claim. Normally, the number of reinstatements, and the terms upon which they are made, will be
agreed at the outset. Once agreed, they are automatic and obligatory on both parties.
Unlimited free reinstatements mean that reinstatements can continually be made, at no cost.
Paid reinstatements mean that a reinstatement premium must be paid before the
reinstatement(s) go ahead.
Swing-rated premiums
This is where the premium of each individual risk depends, at least in part, on the actual claims
experience of that risk in the period covered.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
A full introduction to pricing these aggregate features is beyond the scope of this section.
Here, we just give a brief introduction.
However, we will require an estimate of the aggregate loss distribution (before any
aggregate limit or deductible) to the layer. We will sometimes assume a parametric form of
the aggregate distributions (either for aggregate losses or frequency and severity
separately depending on the nature of the layer and the frequency of losses). We will
choose the parameters so that the modelled loss cost matches the mean annual loss for the
layer. We then make volatility assumptions based on a benchmark.
However, we can use the following approach to make sure that the severity distribution
chosen is consistent with the exposure rating (and hence the underlying risk profile and
assumed original loss severity distributions).
From equation (2.3) we have:
CL Layer loss cost E N E X L D X D (6.1)
Consider now a narrow layer of limit l
C l E N E X l D X D
(6.2)
E N S D l
where the second line follows from equation (1.2) and the fact that l is small.
Note: S(D) is the survival function defined in Section 2.1, ie S x 1 F x P X x .
Therefore:
C
E N S D l (6.3)
l
E N S D represents the expected frequency of a (ground-up) loss of size D or greater.
Suppose that we have an exposure rated estimate of the aggregate loss for each layer.
The process is as follows:
We can divide the layer into a series of narrow layers starting at the attachment
point and ending at the limit of the treaty.
We estimate the aggregate loss for each layer on the exposure rated basis.
We use equation (6.3) to estimate a series of points on the severity distribution that
is consistent with the exposure rated estimates.
We fit a parametric curve to these points or derive a discrete estimate of the
distribution function for the severities.
To model the aggregate loss distribution it is still necessary to make an assumption about
the distribution of the number of claims impacting the layer as the method (described
above) only gives us an estimate of the mean. Often we will use a negative binomial
distribution with benchmark volatility assumptions. Because of parameter error and
possible dependence between loss occurrences, a Poisson assumption is unlikely to be
appropriate.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 37
We can estimate the aggregate distribution of losses to the layer (before allowance for
aggregate features) using, for example, simulation, Panjer Recursion or a Fast Fourier
Transform method.
You should remember the Panjer Recursion method from Chapter 11.
A Fourier Transform is an example of an inversion method, ie a statistical technique that can be
used to obtain the probability function of a distribution given some other measure, such as the
moment generating function. A Fast Fourier Transform is an algorithm that enables this to be
performed very quickly.
When we have estimated the aggregate distribution, we can estimate the impact of the
aggregate features on the losses/premiums and adjust the proposed rate accordingly.
The method is explored in detail in:
Mata, AJ, Fannin, B and Verheyen, MA, Pricing Excess of Loss Treaty with Loss Sensitive Features:
An Exposure Rating Approach, GIRO Convention Paris 2002.
6.2 Exposure adjustment in treaty experience rating
We can use exposure rates to help to experience rate XL (excess of loss) treaties.
When experience rating excess of loss treaties, it can be difficult to allow for changes to the
risk profile over time.
A standard way to adjust for exposure changes is to use the on-level premiums (original
premiums adjusted for rate changes). However, because of changes in the risk profile, it is
possible that changes in exposure to the layer are very different from the ground-up
exposure change given by on-level premiums.
One way around this is to use historical limits profiles to exposure rate the layer for
previous years. This will give an estimate of how the exposure to the layer has changed
over time. We can use this as the exposure measure for experience projections.
The method is explored in detail in:
Mata, AJ and Verheyen, MA, An Improved Method for Experience rating Excess of Loss Treaties
using Exposure Rating Techniques, Casualty Actuarial Society Forum, Spring 2005 pp. 171-214.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 38 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
7 Closing remarks
Exposure curves and ILFs are very useful tools to enable us to estimate consistent prices
for different layers, provided we can estimate the full value loss cost (or a limited loss cost).
They are particularly useful where historical data for a risk are sparse and/or lacking in
relevance, so experience-based rates are not credible.
This chapter has given an introduction to the methodology. Like most actuarial methods
the application in practice is difficult, mainly, in this case, because of uncertainties in
estimating and/or selecting appropriate curves. It is important to note that the modelled
loss cost to layers (particularly high ones) can be extremely sensitive to the selected curve.
Practitioners in many markets will not have access to sufficient relevant data to model
curves with any confidence so judgement will be key, and it is important to monitor closely
the emerging results. It will be difficult to improve on this situation in many markets without
improved market-wide data collection.
We have not considered loadings for expenses and risk / profit in this chapter, but we
should consider the uncertainties associated with the methodology when we add the
loadings. We should also consider the uncertainties when judging the credibility of the
rates derived against those from another method (for example, experience rating).
After noting some of the difficulties and disadvantages of the methodology, it is worth
reminding ourselves of some of the advantages:
it is relatively simple to implement
it is relatively easy to explain to non-technical colleagues
the loss costs obtained should be internally consistent
it can be used where little or no credible loss data is available.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 39
Chapter 15 Summary
Original loss curves are more often called:
Property business: first loss scales, exposure curves or loss elimination functions.
They show the proportion of the full value premium allocated to primary layers at
different values. When showing the proportion to allocate to the excess layer rather
than the primary layer, they are also called excess of loss scales.
Casualty business: increased limit factors. They give the ratio of premium for higher
limits to a basic limit.
Curves often only account for pure loss cost, but may be adapted to allow for ALAE, ULAE
and a load for risk at each limit.
The curves are closely related to the limited expected value function, which is a non-
decreasing function that increases at a decreasing rate.
Property business
LEVY x
Exposure curves are defined as G x , where Y is the relative loss severity. The
E Y
closer the curve is to the diagonal, the greater the proportion of large losses. To calculate
LD D
the loss cost of a layer, we use the formula: CL C G G .
M M
When using exposure curves, we may need to make adjustments for:
the heterogeneity of the underlying business, eg by using separate curves for each
peril or risk size band
the effect of claims inflation.
When using exposure curves in XL treaty rating, we should also be aware of:
the lack of suitable curves to use
the lack of credible data
uncertainty of the original loss ratio
the treatment of original deductibles
the treatment of inuring reinsurances (which apply before the treaty does)
stacked limits
alternative methods to allow for the nat-cat element separately, eg cat models.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 40 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
Casualty business
Here, severity can be unlimited (or an upper limit selected), and so we assume that within
each risk group:
the ground-up loss frequency is independent of the limit purchased
the ground-up severity is independent of the number of losses and of the limit
purchased.
LEVX x
Here, we use ILFs: ILF x , where the base limit is b.
LEVX b
ILF L D ILF D
For a layer we use: CL Cl , where l is the original limit.
ILF l
Constructing curves
The following process could be used to construct exposure curves:
collect claims data and express each claim as a percentage of the risk size
divide data into homogenous groups
construct table of accumulated loss cost by percentage of risk size
construct empirical exposure curve by dividing accumulated loss cost by total value
of losses and combine groups where curve is similar
smooth the curve.
Also, allow for:
open claims
deductibles/limits on underlying policies
inflation (trend).
Deriving ILFs for casualty business presents additional problems. The ISO methodology using
closed claims, grouped by time lag to construct empirical survival functions might be used.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 41
Curves used in practice
In practice, we might:
fit statistical curves to the data, eg MBBEFD curves, log-normal, Pareto, truncated
Pareto, mixed exponential
use Riebesell curves, based on an assumption for the original loss cost
use a market curve, eg Swiss Re, Gasser, Lloyd’s.
Special treatment is required:
where there are aggregate features in the data
to allow for changes in risk features when experience rating XL treaties.
Advantages and disadvantages
The application of exposure curves and ILFs is difficult in practice, often due to uncertainty in
estimating or selecting the appropriate curves.
However, they are relatively simple to implement, easy to explain, provide
internally-consistent loss costs and can be used where there is little or no credible data.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 42 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
The practice questions start on the next page so that you can
keep the chapter summaries together for revision purposes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 43
Chapter 15 Practice Questions
15.1 Describe the methodology used to estimate an expected loss cost using original loss curves for
each of:
property XL treaty rating
liability XL treaty rating.
15.2 Describe a methodology that could be used to construct ILFs that, in particular, attempts to deal
Exam style
with the problem of closed claims. [6]
15.3 You are the pricing actuary for a reinsurance company. A property insurer wishes to purchase
Exam style
£300,000 xs £200,000 risk XL treaty reinsurance and has provided you with the following
information for Year 1:
Original ultimate loss ratio for Year 1 (based on ground-up data): 70%
Expected future claims inflation: 5% pa.
Exposure curve
Original policy information for Year 1
values
Sum insured band Original premium y G(y)
(£s) (£000s) 0% 0.0%
0 to 50,000 8,500 10% 44.7%
50,001 to 100,000 9,000 20% 56.9%
100,001 to 150,000 8,500 30% 65.6%
150,001 to 200,000 8,000 40% 72.6%
200,001 to 300,000 14,500 50% 78.5%
300,001 to 400,000 12,000 60% 83.6%
400,001 to 500,000 10,000 70% 88.3%
500,001 to 750,000 15,000 80% 92.5%
750,001 to 1,000,000 8,000 90% 96.4%
Total 93,500 100% 100.0%
(i) Calculate the expected loss cost to the layer for this business in Year 2, expressed as a
proportion of original premiums. State any assumptions that you make. [10]
(ii) Comment on the appropriateness of the assumptions that you made in part (i). [8]
[Total 18]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 44 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 45
Chapter 15 Solutions
15.1 The methodology used to estimate an expected loss cost using original loss curves
Property XL rating
For property business, we consider the relative loss severity.
X
That is, Y
M
where:
X is the random variable representing the loss severity
M is a measure of the size of the risk, which could be sum insured, probable maximum
loss, etc.
We define the exposure curve, G ( x ) , as:
LEVY x
Gx
E Y
where the LEV (limited expected value) function represents the expected value of the (relative)
losses limited to a primary layer of size x.
More formally,
x
LEVx x E X x Sx y dy
0
where
Sx x 1 Fx x P X x .
To calculate the cost to the layer, for a layer L excess of D, we use:
LD D
C G G
M M
where C is the ground-up expected loss.
The underlying assumption in using the relative loss is that Y is independent of the size of the risk.
This is generally true for reasonably homogenous data, eg for residential buildings fire claims.
However, when the data becomes more heterogeneous, we may need different exposure curves
for different risk groups.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 46 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
When allowing for claims inflation (trend), if its effect is uniform across all loss sizes and the sums
insured M are being adjusted appropriately for inflation, no adjustment would be required
(because the distribution of Y would be unchanged).
Casualty XL rating
For casualty business, we consider the loss severity in monetary terms, X, rather than dividing by a
risk size.
This is because there is no easily definable limit on the loss severity – the limit of insurance
actually purchased may bear no relation to the potential claim amount (it’s just a limit on how
much the insurer pays out on that particular policy).
Hence, we select risk groups, and within these, we make the following assumptions:
● the (ground-up) loss frequency is independent of the limit purchased
● the (ground-up) severity is independent of the number of losses and of the limit purchased.
The ‘curve’ is expressed in terms of a table of increased limit factors (ILFs) at each limit x, which
are defined as:
LEVX x
ILF x , where the base limit is b.
LEVX b
To calculate the cost to the layer, for a layer L excess of D, we then use:
ILF L D ILF D
Cl , where l is the original limit.
ILF l
The treatment of allocated loss adjustment expenses (ALAE) is usually a much more important
consideration for casualty business than for property business as this can often represent a very
significant proportion of the claims cost. Hence, it is more likely that the ILFs include the ALAE
component.
Split limits, ie a per-claimant limit and per-occurrence limit, may apply, and so the ILFs (and
method for constructing them) may need to be modified accordingly.
The effect of inflation (trend, including secular changes) may be more significant for casualty
business, and may be more likely to change the shape of the underlying loss distribution.
If claims inflation is expected to affect the loss distribution uniformly, say by increasing losses by
a% between time t and time t , then:
x
ILFt x ILFt .
1a
15.2 Firstly, adjust the individual losses for inflation, secular changes etc, from the experience period to
the period for which the ILFs will be applied. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 47
Consider only closed claims, but from several accident years. [½]
Group these claims by payment lag, ie the time in years from accident to settlement. Where
multiple payments are made, use the average lag weighted by amount paid. [1]
For each payment lag, construct an empirical survival function for the claim size: [½]
split data into (hopefully more than 50) discrete loss-size intervals [½]
for each interval, estimate the probability that the loss will exceed the upper bound, given
it exceeds the lower bound (ie the conditional survival probabilities) [½]
estimate discrete points on the survival probability by multiplying these conditional
survival probabilities together. [½]
In practice, lags beyond a certain period, say five years, are grouped and the same loss
distribution assumed. [½]
Estimate the proportion of the number of loss occurrences for an accident year that are settled at
each payment lag. [½]
Combine these proportions with the empirical survival functions at each lag to estimate the
combined survival function for all claims. [½]
Smooth the tail of the combined survival function (eg by fitting a truncated Pareto distribution
above a selected threshold) and then fit a parametric distribution to the smoothed curve
(eg using a mixed exponential). [1]
We can then derive limited average severities (and hence ILFs) from the fitted loss distribution. [½]
[Maximum 6]
15.3 (i) Calculation of cost to the layer
Assumptions:
(1) sums insured (SIs) are distributed evenly within each sum insured band, so that each band
is represented by the average sum insured for the band
(2) the same loss ratio applies to each band
(3) the same risk profile (ie distribution of SIs) will apply in Year 2
(4) the data given is for the middle of Year 1, and hence exactly one year’s inflation can be
applied
(5) the (single) exposure curve given can be applied to all the business to be reinsured
(6) the same claim distribution (as represented by the exposure curve) will apply in Year 2
(7) the same inflation figure (5%) can be applied to all policies (eg irrespective of size)
(8) there are no features of the original business, such as deductibles or stacked limits, that
would complicate the calculation
(9) there are no features of the reinsurance treaty, such as reinstatements or inuring
reinsurance, that would complicate the calculation
(10) intermediate points on the exposure curve can be obtained by linear interpolation.
[½ each]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 48 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
Working in £000s throughout.
To allow for 5% inflation, we can reduce the attachment point and exit point of the layer by 5%,
ie:
200
Adjusted attachment point: 190.48
1.05
500
Adjusted exit point: 476.19 [1]
1.05
Calculations for each band that falls within the treaty are as follows:
Average Original Attachment Exit point % Attachment Exit point % Cost to the
SI premium point % of SI of SI point % of of loss cost layer
(£000s) (£000s) loss cost (£000s)
250 14,500 76.2% 90.9% 923.7
350 12,000 54.4% 80.7% 1,621.2
450 10,000 42.3% 74.0% 1,820.0
625 15,000 30.5% 76.2% 66.0% 90.9% 2,614.5
875 8,000 21.8% 54.4% 58.5% 80.7% 1,243.2
Calculate a SI value to represent each SI band, such as the average (shown in the table
above). [1]
(Marks awarded for correct averages as above or any sensible assumption, eg taking upper points,
where justified; deduct ½ mark for each error).
For layers below £190k, there is no cost to the layer. Hence, if the layer £150k to £200k is
represented by the average (£175k), this will not contribute to the layer. [½]
For higher layers, we need to calculate the attachment point as a proportion of the assumed sum
insured. For example, for the layer £200k to £300k, this is:
190.48
76.2% . [½]
250
Similarly, for all other layers [1]
(See table above, deduct ½ mark for each error.)
Also, for layers above £500k, calculate the exit point as a proportion of the assumed sum insured.
For example, for the layer £500k to £750k, this is:
476.19
76.2%
625
[½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 49
For the layer £750k to £1,000k, this is:
476.19
54.4% [½]
875
Use the values from the exposure curve to convert the exposure proportions into the proportions
of the loss cost for each layer (related to the ground-up losses).
For example, to calculate the cost of the attachment point as a proportion of the loss cost for the
layer £200k to £300k, we could use interpolation to estimate G(76.2%) , ie:
6.2
88.3 92.5 88.3 90.9%
10
[½]
Similarly, for all other attachment points and exit points. [1]
(See table above, deduct ½ mark for each error, but any reasonable approximations permitted.)
For each band (for which the reinsurance will apply), the original loss cost can be estimated by
applying the loss ratio (70%) to the original premiums.
For layers below £500k, the cost to the layer is the proportion 100% G(L) applied to the original
loss cost.
So, for example, the cost of the layer £200k to £300k is calculated as:
100% 90.9% 70% 14,500 923.65 [1]
Similarly for the next two layers. [½]
(See table above, deduct ½ mark for each error.)
For layers above £500k, we use the proportion G(U) G(L) , where L and U are the lower and
upper limits respectively.
Hence, for example, the cost of the layer £500k to £750k is calculated as:
90.9% 66.0% 70% 15,000 2,614.5
Total cost to the layer is the sum of this final column, ie £8,222.6k. [½]
As a percentage of the original premium this is:
8,222.6
8.8% [½]
93,500
[Maximum 10]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 50 SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves
(ii) Appropriateness of the assumptions
Assumption (1) may not be realistic. For example, for most bands, we might expect more policies
with lower than average SIs, because the volume of business in each (equal width) band is
decreasing with size of SI. [½]
On the other hand, there may be a significant number of policies at the very top of each band,
eg 200k or 300k, because ‘round’ SI amounts may be popular. [½]
A particular issue here is that we have excluded the £150k to £200k band in the calculation,
whereas some policies above £190k will contribute to the cost of the
layer. [½]
Also, the result may be very sensitive to this assumption, particularly as the band widths here are
quite large. [½]
Ideally, we should obtain exposure data in more detail to investigate this assumption in more
detail. At the very least, sensitivity testing should be carried out. [½]
Assumption (2) may not be true if:
claims experience varies by sum insured (eg SI may be a proxy to socio-economic group
and hence the tendency to claim) [½]
the insurer’s pricing basis has cross-subsidies by policy size (eg large policies subsidising
smaller ones). [½]
For assumption (3), the distribution of sums insured by premium may be affected by the
insurance cycle. [½]
For assumption (4), even if data is not mid-year, it is probably reasonable to assume one year’s
inflation, but we should check how the dates of the treaty compare with the data we have. [½]
Assumption (5) is unlikely to be realistic, unless the business being ceded is quite homogeneous.
Ideally, we should split the data by risk groups and apply different exposure curves (and loss
ratios) to each. However, the approach we’ve made may be the best we can do with the (limited)
data we have. [1]
Assumption (6) may be rather simplistic. We should investigate whether large claims are affected
by inflation differently from small claims. This may be the case, because different types of claims
will be affected by different types of inflation to varying extents. [1]
Similarly, for assumption (7), large policies may be affected by inflation to a different extent than
small ones. [½]
However, the inflation adjustment may have a relatively small impact as it is only for one
year. [½]
If there are features of the business or reinsurance that have not been allowed for this would
invalidate assumptions (8) or (9), and so adjustments would have to be made. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-15: Rating using original loss curves Page 51
Assumption (10) is probably an oversimplification and using straight interpolation could make a
difference to the estimated cost because we only have a few values on the exposure curve table.
It may be better to fit a parametric curve to the points (or obtain values in more detail). [1]
[Maximum 8]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold
for the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is
owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a
subsidiary of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or
photocopy any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it
is not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through
the profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished
using the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 1
Generalised linear modelling
Syllabus objectives
3.8 Understand generalised linear models and multivariate modelling.
3.8.1 Assess the applications of generalised linear models to the rating of personal
lines business and small commercial risks.
3.8.2 Evaluate the uses of multivariate models in pricing.
3.8.3 Outline the different types of multivariate models.
Covered in part in this chapter.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
0 Introduction
With the increasing power of computers, the use of generalised linear models (GLMs) is now
widespread for personal lines pricing, and is increasingly used for some commercial lines of
business. There are a number of commercially available software packages that enable actuaries
and underwriters to calculate frequencies, average claim costs and burning costs to use as a basis
for setting future premium rates.
This chapter considers some of the mathematics behind GLMs, which you may have met in your
earlier studies, and then goes on to consider how we might use these models. If it has been a
while since you studied GLMs, it is probably worth reviewing your previous study material before
tackling this chapter.
Section 1 explains the concepts of GLMs and looks at the exponential family of distributions in
some detail.
In Section 2 we describe the principles of how a GLM is constructed and look at the types of
factors that might be included within a model.
Section 3 deals with the techniques we can use to check the significance of the factors used in the
model.
Section 4 describes techniques that can be used to check the appropriateness of the chosen
model structure, eg by considering the residuals.
Finally, in Section 5, we consider how we might refine our model. We will look at how we can use
interactions and offsets, and will discuss aliasing of potential rating factors.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 3
1 Assess the applications of generalised linear models to the rating
of personal lines business and small commercial risks
A generalised linear model (GLM) can be used to model the behaviour of a random variable that is
believed to depend on the values of several other characteristics, eg age, sex, vehicle group. The
Glossary defines a GLM as follows:
In statistics, the generalised linear model (GLM) is a flexible generalisation of ordinary least
squares regression. The GLM generalises linear regression by allowing the linear model to
be related to the response variable via a link function and by allowing the magnitude of the
variance of each measurement to be a function of its predicted value.
The link function is formally defined in Section 1.6.
1.1 Multiple linear regression and the normal linear model
A linear regression model with k parameters representing the relationship between a
number of observations Yi and independent variables X ik takes the form:
Yi 0 1f1( X i 1) 2f2 ( X i 2 ) ... k fk ( X ik ) i
where:
Yi are the observed data values (also called the response variable)
f j () may be non-linear functions
X ij is the value of the j th independent variable factor
j is the j th parameter value
i are random variables representing errors in the relationship.
This can be written as:
k
Yi 0 j f j ( X ij ) i .
j 1
It can also be written in matrix form, by allowing appropriately for the constant term and
treating the independent factors as applying the variables net of any non-linear functions,
as:
Y X.β ε.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
One way to deal with the constant term would be to define a dummy variable Xi 0 which just
takes the value 1 for all observations i and let f0 be the identity function, so that f0 ( Xi 0 ) 1 .
Then we would have Y X.β ε where
Y1 X10 X11 X1k 0 1
Y X X21 X2k
Y 2 X 20 β 1 ε 2
Yn X n0 Xn1 Xnk k n
Here ε is the error term for the model and E Y E X.β .
The expected value of the error term is zero.
As an illustrative example, the following table summarizes a simple dataset of the frequency
of vehicle collisions in a year, which has two independent variables, age and gender. Note:
following EU legislation that came into force on 22 December 2012, it is no longer
permissible to rate on gender.
Young Old
Male 90% 10%
Female 45% 5%
We assume a linear model structure and that the observations Yi have the normal
distribution with mean i and variance 2 . So we define the matrices as follows:
90% 1 1 0
0
10% , X 1 1 1
Y , β 1
45% 1 0 0
3
5% 1 0 1
where the first column of the matrix X is a constant term, the second column means ‘Is
male?’, and the third means ‘Is old?’. We do not include columns for ‘Is female?’ or for ‘Is
young?’ because these are dependent on the ‘Is male?’ and ‘Is old?’ variables respectively.
For instance, if the person is not male, then they will by definition be female. The columns
which have been omitted from the design matrix construction are usually termed ‘base
levels’.
0 , 1 and 3 are the constant, male parameter and old parameter respectively. So the
‘base levels’ for this example are female, young.
The omitted ‘Is female’ column would have corresponded to 2 and the ‘Is young’ column would
have corresponded to 4 .
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 5
Here we have n 4 and k 2 , and the model is:
90% 1 1 0 1
10% 1 0
1 1 2
.
45% 1 0 0 1 3
5% 1 0 1 3 4
We can also write this in component form as:
90% 0 1 1
10% 0 1 3 2
45% 0 3
5% 0 3 4 .
We now want to estimate the parameters 0 , 1 and 3 . We can do this using the method of
maximum likelihood. Since we have n observations, y1 , y2 ,..., yn , from a continuous (in this case,
normal) distribution, the likelihood function is of the form:
n
L f (yi )
i 1
The density function for the normal distribution is:
(y )2 1
f (y i ; i , 2 ) exp i 2i ln(2 2 )
2 2
This is a rearranged form of the expression given on Page 11 of the Tables.
So here the likelihood function is:
n ( y )2 1
L(y ; , 2 ) exp i 2i ln(2 2 )
2 2
i 1
To calculate the maximum likelihood estimates of the parameters, we can first take the log
of the likelihood function and then calculate its maximum. The log of the likelihood function
is:
n
( y i i )2 1
l (y ; , 2 ) 2 2
ln(2 2 ).
2
i 1
It can be proved that maximising the log-likelihood is equivalent to minimising the sum of
squared errors:
n
y i i
2
l * y; .
i 1
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
The sum of squared errors for our example is:
2 2 2 2
l * 90% 0 1 10% 0 1 3 45% 0 5% 0 3 .
We want to calculate the values of the parameters 0 , 1 and 3 that make l as small as
possible. So we differentiate l with respect to each of 0 , 1 and 3 and set the three partial
derivatives equal to 0.
Solving this in the usual way by setting partial derivatives to zero gives:
l *
0 2 90% 0 1 2 10% 0 1 3 2 45% 0 2 5% 0 3
0
l *
0 2 90% 0 1 2 10% 0 1 3
1
l *
0 2 10% 0 1 3 2 5% 0 3
3
This gives:
ˆ0 55%, ˆ1 25%, ˆ3 60%.
Using these model parameters we can readily calculate the predicted values for Y .
The predicted values for Y are:
80%
20%
E Y
55%
5%
So, for example:
E male, old constant male parameter old parameter
55 25 – 60 20%
Clearly, with more than two factors, a manual solution becomes increasingly long-winded.
Question
Show that the solution of the system of equations above is:
0 55%, 1 25%, 3 60% ,
and confirm the predicted values for Y .
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 7
Solution
We have:
l
0 150% 4 0 21 23 0 (1)
0
l
0 100% 2 0 21 3 0 (2)
1
l
0 15% 2 0 1 23 0 (3)
3
From (1), it follows that:
2 0 75% 1 3 . (*)
Substituting from (*) into (2) and (3) gives 1 25% and 3 60% respectively.
Substituting these values back into (3) gives:
15% 20 25% 120% 0
0 55%.
So:
ˆ0 ˆ1 80%
ˆ ˆ ˆ 20%
E Y Xβˆ 0 1 3 .
ˆ
0 55%
ˆ ˆ 5%
0 3
The model that we have just seen is an example of a GLM. In this example, we assumed that the
random variables Yi were normally distributed. In any GLM, we have to assume that the
distribution of the variable that we are trying to model is one that belongs to the exponential
family, which we describe in the following section.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
1.2 Definition of the exponential family
The exponential family is the set of distributions whose probability function or probability
density function can be written in the form:
y b( )
f (y ; , ) exp c (y , )
a ( )
where a ( ) , b ( ) and c (y , ) are specific functions. Different choices for a ( ) , b ( ) and
c (y , ) define a different distribution and solution to the GLM problem. The parameter is
termed the canonical (or natural) parameter and is the scale parameter.
This formula is given on Page 27 of the Tables.
The parameter is a function of the mean E Y . The mean and variance of Y satisfy the
equations:
E Y b
var Y a b
We also introduce the variance function defined by:
V b .
Note that this is not equal to the variance of Y . This function will be used further in section 1.4.
In earlier subjects we saw that the binomial, Poisson, normal, exponential and gamma
distributions all belong to the exponential family. Here we add another two distributions to that
list, namely the inverse Gaussian (or Wald) distribution and the Tweedie distribution.
The pdf of the inverse Gaussian distribution is nasty! It is:
½ y 2
f (y) exp for y 0
2 y 3 2
2 y
The pdf of the Tweedie distribution is even nastier! It is:
()1 (1 / y) exp[ y
n
fY (y ; , , ) 0 (0 )] for y 0
n1 (n )n! y
where:
1
( ) , 0 1/(1 )
1
and is the prior weight corresponding to the exposure of the observation in question. See
Section 1.5 for more interesting facts about the Tweedie distribution.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 9
The chart below summarises a number of familiar distributions in the exponential family:
a( ) b( ) c (y , )
Normal 2 2 12 ( y 2 ln(2 / ))
Poisson e ln y !
Gamma ln( )
1 ln( y ) ln ( )
ln
Binomial (m trials ) ln(1 e )
y
Inverse Gaussian 2
½ ln(2 y 3 / ) / ( y )
Exponential ln( ) 0
n
1
0 1 y i
Tweedie 1
ln n n ! y i
1 1 1 1 n 1
In all but the Tweedie distribution it can be seen that the choice of a ( ) is the same,
containing .
is a prior weight, a constant that is specified in advance.
For insurance applications, common choices for the prior weight are equal to:
one (for example, when modelling claim counts), or
the number of exposures (for example, when modelling claim frequency), or
the number of claims (for example, when modelling claim severity).
Often the scale parameter is equal to one and plays no part in the modelling problem.
We now take a look at some of these distributions in more detail and show how these values are
derived.
1.3 Deriving the specific functions of the exponential family
Given the above definition of the exponential family of distributions and the table of values
for the functions a() , b () and c () , this section will demonstrate how to manipulate it into
the exponential family form, beginning with the standard statistical notation for the
distribution.
Poisson distribution
To show how these functions are derived, the Poisson is worked through below as an
illustration. The probability function of the Poisson distribution (with mean ) is:
y e
P Y y
y!
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
Hence:
f (k ; ) exp k ln( ) ln k !
The Core Reading is using the notation f k ; instead of P Y k here.
Now replace y with y i , and let i ln . Then:
P (Y y i ) exp y i i ln y i !
or equivalently:
P Y yi exp yii ei ln yi !
This is of the form:
y b(i )
exp i i c(yi , )
ai ( )
where:
1 c(yi , ) ln yi !
ai ( ) 1 b(i ) ei
The inclusion of ai ( ) just allows each observation to be weighted by the appropriate
exposure.
Hence ai ( ) would be set to .
i
Question
Show that the exponential distribution belongs to the exponential family by deriving the
corresponding functions a(), b() and c().
Solution
For the exponential distribution:
f (y ; ) e y
Now replace y with yi :
f (yi ; ) exp yi ln
Now set i and define so that 1 .
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 11
This gives:
1
yii ln
f (yi ;i ) exp
i .
Comparing the expression above with the formula for the exponential family, we see that:
c(yi , ) 0
a( ) 1
1
b i ln ln i
i
1.4 Mean, variance, and variance function
For the above distributions the mean and variance of Yi can be shown to be:
db i
E Yi i
d i
and:
d 2b i
var Yi a V a
d i 2
Recall that V ( ) is called the variance function and is defined to be equal to b( ) .
For the distributions above:
Distribution ( ) V ( )
Normal 1
Poisson e
Gamma 1/ 2
Binomial e / (1 e ) (1 )
1/2
Inverse Gaussian (2 ) 3
Exponential 1/ 2
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
Question
For the exponential distribution with parameter , we showed in the previous self-assessment
question, that:
1
b i ln ln i
i
where i . Use this to derive the formula for V ( ) given in the table above.
Solution
If b ln , then:
1 1
b
and:
1 1
b 2 2
1
since . Now since E (Y ) for Y ~ Exp , it follows that:
V b 2
1.5 The Tweedie distribution
Direct modelling of pure premium or incurred loss data is problematic since a typical pure
premium distribution will consist of a large spike (ie a point mass) at zero (where policies
have not had claims) and then a wide range of amounts (where policies have had claims).
This is illustrated in the diagram below.
0.2
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 13
Question
Suggest a reason for the ‘missing’ data immediately to the right of the spike at zero in the diagram
above.
Solution
It is likely that an excess has been applied to the incurred loss data, meaning that any losses
between zero and the amount of the excess will be included in the zero category.
Many of the traditional members of the exponential family of distributions are not
appropriate for modelling claims experience from such a distribution since they do not have
a point mass at zero combined with an appropriate spread across non-zero amounts.
The Tweedie distribution is a special member of the exponential family that has a variance
function proportional to p , with p being an additional parameter.
In the case of 1 p 2 the Tweedie distribution has a point mass at zero and corresponds
to the compound distribution of a Poisson claim number process and a gamma claim size
distribution. The distribution can be Poisson-like (as p 1 ) or Gamma-like (as p 2 ).
Further information about the Tweedie distribution can be found in the paper ‘Fitting
Tweedie's Compound Poisson Model to Insurance Claims Data’ by Jørgenses, B and De
Souza, M.C.P, Scand. Actuarial J. 1994 1:69-93.
1.6 The structure of a GLM
The linear model structure:
k
Yi X ij j i
j 1
generalises into the following structure:
k
Yi g 1
j 1
X ij j i i .
This enables us to model a wider range of underlying data. Solutions are iterative and
require significant computational power.
Again this can be written in matrix form as:
Y g 1 X.β ξ ε
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
This is where:
g () is known as the link function
X is the design matrix of factors
β is a vector of parameters to be estimated
ξ is a vector of offsets or known effects (these are included when we know the
effect of an explanatory variable and include this as a known effect)
ε is the error term appropriate to Y .
Recall that the distribution of the response variables Yi should be a member of the exponential
family.
A common link function is the log link, which essentially turns models from additive to
multiplicative.
Offsets will be considered in more detail in Section 5.
Sometimes the linear predictor is written:
η X.β ξ
and the expected value of Y shown as:
μ g 1 η
This gives:
Y E Y ε μ ε g 1 η ε g 1 X.β ξ ε
Except for the special case of the Tweedie distribution, the variance of the i th observation
is:
V (i )
var[Yi ]
i
where:
V i is the variance function of the model
is the scale parameter to adjust V i to var Yi
i are the weights assigned to each observation, usually defined as the exposure or
credibility of the data.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 15
2 Constructing GLMs
In this section we describe the principles of constructing a GLM, with specific reference to
its applications to general insurance. Before this, we look at the failings of using one-way
analysis when analysing multiple variable distributions.
2.1 One-way analysis
The failings of using a one-way analysis when analysing multiple variable distributions are
best examined using a simple counter-example.
This example relates to motor insurance.
First consider two factors in a dataset that are correlated, where each has an influence on
the response variable. We will ignore any random variation in the response, and hence
assume the predicted values are exact.
Let our first factor be age (young / old), and we will assume that old drivers are three times
safer than young drivers.
Let our second factor be car group (low / high), and we will assume that the low car groups
are twice as safe.
Risk relativities
(assumed exact)
Young Old
Age 3 1
Low High
Car Group 1 2
Relativities are just numbers that quantify the level of risk in one category compared to that in
another. As their name implies, they do not describe an absolute level of risk. So, in the table
above, we can see that drivers in the young category have three times the level of risk of those in
the old category.
In this example, the relativities have been calculated in such a way that they apply
multiplicatively. So the relativity for the combination of a young driver with a high car group is 6.
Assuming a simple multiplicative model gives the following predicted values. We also let
the exposure be strongly skewed.
Predicted Total
Age Car Group Exposure
value response
Young Low 3 10,000 30,000
Young High 6 100 600
Old Low 1 4,000 4,000
Old High 2 6,000 12,000
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
The predicted values are calculated by multiplying the relativities together. Total response is
given by:
Predicted value Exposure
Now let us calculate the one-way tables for these two factors and consider the outcome.
Predicted Total
Age Car Group Exposure
value response
Young 3.0 10,100 30,600
Old 1.6 10,000 16,000
Low 2.4 14,000 34,000
High 2.1 6,100 12,600
The exposure and total response figures are calculated by adding the appropriate values from the
first table above. The predicted values are then calculated by dividing the total response by the
exposure.
The one-way table for age understates the true relativities because the good experience for
older drivers is masked by their tendency to choose high car groups.
The one-way table for car group is completely misleading because of the predominance of
young drivers choosing the low car groups, and lack of them in the high car group.
Almost all the young drivers have cars in low car groups. The one-way analysis of car group
predicts high claims experience for lower group cars. However, this may result not from the fact
that these lower group cars are riskier, but from the fact that they are driven mainly by the higher
risk young drivers.
A GLM is a way to unpick these relationships, and produce estimates of the true values of
the relativities.
In other words, a generalised linear model can take account of correlations, and allow
investigation of any interactions between the factors and/or variables present in the model. The
terms variable, factor and interaction should be familiar from earlier subjects. In case you need a
reminder, they are defined again in the next section.
2.2 Linear predictors
Variables
A GLM requires two kinds of variables to be defined.
1. Weight / exposure
These are the weights used in the model fit to attach an importance to each observation.
An observation could be an individual policy or claim, or it could be a combination of policies or
claims that share certain defined characteristics.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 17
For example, in a claim frequency model, exposure would be defined as the length of time
the policy had been on risk. For an average claim size model, the exposure will be the
number of claims for that observation.
2. Response
This is the value that the model is trying to predict. Hence, in the claim frequency model, it
is the number of claims for that observation, and for the average claim size model, it is the
total claims cost for that observation.
Response
In general the ‘name’ of the model corresponds to the meaning of the ratio , ie:
Weight
Number of claims
Claim frequency
Policy years
Also:
Cost of claims
Average claim size
Number of claims
The two types of variables described above always take numerical values.
Categorical factor
This is a factor to be used for modelling where the values of each level are distinct, and
often cannot be given any natural ordering or score.
Any non-numerical input into a model, eg gender, would be classified as a categorical factor. A
level of a factor is simply a distinct value that a factor can take. So if gender is a factor in a GLM
and it can only take the values ‘male’ or ‘female’ then gender would be said to have two levels.
An example of this would be car manufacturer, which has various values, eg ’Ford’,
‘Vauxhall’, ‘Toyota’, ‘Lotus’. These could be ordered in a number of ways: sorted
alphabetically, sorted by exposure on risk, sorted by estimated risk. The ordering can help
cosmetically when reviewing the results, but does not affect the calculations.
By contrast, a factor which is not categorical would be one that takes a naturally ordered
value, eg ‘age’ or ‘car value’. These may need to be rounded at the input stage to reduce
the number of levels to a convenient number (say, less than a hundred).
Interaction term
An interaction term is used where the pattern in the response variable is modelled better by
including extra parameters for each combination of two or more factors. This combination
adds predictive value over and above the separate single factors.
An interaction exists when the effect of one factor varies depending on the levels of another
factor.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
For example, male drivers may have an x % higher risk than female drivers. Young drivers may
have a y % higher risk than older drivers. However, the combination of being young and male
may result in a much higher risk than 1 1 1 100% . In this case, the effect of age
x
100
y
100
depends on gender, and the effect of gender depends on age.
(Note that each factor has a base level that should not be included in the model, and for
interactions, each base level row and column of the interaction parameter matrix should be
removed. This will happen automatically in modelling software.)
The base level of each factor is the level to which every other level of that factor is compared and
it will have a relativity of 1. The shaded areas in the table below represent the base levels of the
age and car group factors and of the interaction term.
Using the earlier example, but adding in age.car group interactions from the base level:
Relativities
Young Old
Age 3 1
Low High
Car Group 1 2
Age.Car Group
Low High
Young 1 4
Old 1 1
This will be appropriate if the experience for young and high policies is sufficiently different
from the value that would be predicted just by using (ie multiplying together) the young
relativity and the high relativity. Thus young people driving a high risk car may exhibit a
different claim experience, higher or lower, than that estimated by the model that applies the
effects of each factor independently and ignores the interaction. Note: the single factors
also remain in the model.
Predicted
Predicted Value Total
Age Car Group Exposure
Value without Response
interaction
Young Low 3 3 10,000 30,000
Young High 24 6 100 2,400
Old Low 1 1 4,000 4,000
Old High 2 2 6,000 12,000
The predicted values in the table above are the products of the relativities of age, car group and
age.car group.
The predicted value for the combination of a young driver in a high car group is 24 in the model
containing the interaction term. This is very high compared to the value of 6 in the model that
didn’t have the interaction. This justifies the use of the interaction.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 19
Linear predictor
This was defined earlier in the matrix form as η X.β ξ .
ξ is the offset term, which we are taking to be 0 for the time being.
For the example above, which includes the interaction between age and car group, suppose that:
i 1 for old, low car group
i 2 for old, high car group
i 3 for young, low car group
i 4 for young, high car group
The linear predictor can be written in matrix form as follows:
1 1 0 0 0 1
1 0
2 0 1 2
3 1 1 0 0 3
4 1 1 1 1 4
where, for j 1,2,3,4 :
Xi 1 1
1 if young
Xi 2
0 if old
1 if high car group
Xi 3
0 if low car group
1 if young and high car group
Xi 4
0 otherwise
With this formulation, old/low car group is the baseline group. Note that if we did not want to
include the interaction term in the model, we would omit the fourth column of the matrix X and
the parameter 4 . See Section 1.1 for an example of a two-factor model with no interaction
term.
An example with categorical and polynomial terms
Let us expand the age/car group example above so that instead of taking the values ‘young’
or ‘old’, the age factor now takes individual values 17-99. Let us further assume that the age
factor is to be fitted by a quadratic polynomial. We also add a base level parameter to scale
to the right average.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
So for the linear predictor we have:
i X i 0 0 X i 11 X i 2 2 X i 3 3
where:
X i 0 always takes the value 1
X i 1 takes the value 1 if car group is high; 0 otherwise
X i 2 takes the value of age
X i 3 takes the value of age 2 .
So for each observation i :
i 0 Group High ? 1 Age 2 Age 2 3
Suppose we have four data observations:
Observation Age Car Group
1 17 Low
2 21 High
3 35 Low
4 45 High
Then we get the matrix system:
1 0 17 172
0
1 1 21 212
X β 1
1 0 35 352 2
1 45 452 3
1
This can then be solved by a modelling package using matrix inversion and iteration
according to the error distribution and link function adopted.
2.3 Estimating the parameters of a GLM
In Section 1.1, we saw how the β values were calculated by solving simultaneous
equations. In general, for a simple linear regression Y X.β ξ ε with identity link and
normal distribution, the parameters can be estimated via matrix inversion:
β (XT X)1 XT Y
Here ε is the error term for the model and E Y E X.β ξ .
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 21
Note that the matrix X need not be a square matrix, ie it may not have the same number of rows
as columns. Recall that only square matrices are invertible. Suppose that:
X11 X12 X1k
X X22 X2k
X 21
Xn1 Xn2 Xnk
Then X is an n k matrix and:
X11 X21 Xn1
X X22 Xn2
XT 12
X1k X 2k Xnk
is a k n matrix. (Transposing a matrix swaps around its rows and columns.)
The product XT X is a k k matrix:
X11 X21 Xn1 X11 X12 X1k
X X22 X n2 X22 X2k
XT X 12 X21
X1k X2k Xnk Xn1 X n2 Xnk
n 2 n n
Xi1 Xi1 Xi 2 Xi1 Xik
i 1 i 1 i 1
n n n
X X
i 1 i 2 i1
Xi 2 Xi 2 Xik
2
i 1 i 1
n n n
X X 2
ik i1 ik i 2 ik
X X X
i 1 i 1 i 1
So it makes sense to talk about the inverse of XT X (assuming that this exists).
In cases where the distribution is more complex and other link functions are adopted, the
solution is obtained by a variation of this formula that uses a matrix version of the
Newton-Raphson formula to iterate towards a solution.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
3 Analysis of the significance of factors
In this section we look at techniques used to analyse the significance of the factors used in
the model. The more visual methods in Section 3.3 can be readily explained to
non-technicians.
Note that all of the graphs given in this section form part of the Core Reading.
3.1 Chi-squared, F statistics and AIC
Deviance
Let d be each observation’s contribution to the deviance defined by:
Yi
d Yi ; i 2i
Yi d
V
i
This compares the observed value Yi to the fitted value i with allowance for the weights
and assigning higher importance to errors where the variance should be small.
Using the above definition of deviance residual, the total deviance for a model is defined as
the sum of those:
n
D d Yi ; i
i 1
Scaled deviance
The deviance can be adjusted by the scale parameter (see Section1.6) to give a
standardised measure that can be compared to other models:
D
D*
D is called the scaled deviance.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 23
Question
A generalised linear model has independent Poisson responses {Yi } with:
E Yi var Yi i
The linear predictor i is linked to the mean response by the equation:
i ln i
Evaluate the expression:
yi yi t
di yi , ˆi 2 dt
ˆi V (t )
to determine an expression for the general component di yi , ˆi of the deviance of this GLM in
terms of the observed responses yi and fitted values ˆi .
Solution
We saw in Section 1.4 that the variance function for the Poisson distribution is the identity
function, ie:
V (t) t
So:
yi yi t y y t y y
di yi , ˆi 2 dt 2 i i
dt 2 i i 1 dt
ˆi V (t) ˆi t ˆi t
Integrating gives:
di yi , ˆi 2 yi lnt t ˆi
y
i
2 yi ln yi yi yi ln ˆi ˆi
y
2 yi ln i yi ˆi
ˆi
Chi-squared statistics
The number of degrees of freedom df for the model is defined as the number of
observations less the number of parameters.
Two nested models (that is, one is a subset of the other) can be compared using a 2 test
for the change in scaled deviance.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
For example, if Model 1 has linear predictor:
1 x
and Model 2 has linear predictor:
2 x x 2
then Model 1 is a subset of Model 2. (We have set 0 in Model 1.)
If Models 1 and 2 are nested, then the change in scaled deviance follows a chi-squared
distribution, ie:
D1* D2* ~ df
2
1 df2
Question
Suppose Model A and Model B are nested models with 6 and 10 parameters respectively. The
scaled deviance of Model A is 17.80 and the scaled deviance for Model B is 11.08. Explain
whether Model B is a significant improvement on Model A.
Solution
The difference in the scaled deviance is 17.80 11.08 6.72 .
The difference in the number of degrees of freedom is the same as the difference in the numbers
of parameters in the models, ie 10 6 4 .
Since 6.72 9.488 , the upper 5% point of 42 , there is insufficient evidence at the 5% significance
level to reject Model A in favour of Model B.
Percentage points of the 2 distribution are given on Page 169 of the Tables.
F statistics
In cases where the scale parameter for the model is not known, its estimator is distributed
as a 2 distribution, and the ratio of two 2 distributions is the F distribution:
D1 D2 ~ Fdf1 df2 ,df2
df1 df2 D2 / df2
Again we need the models to be nested for this result to be valid.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 25
Question
Suppose Model C and Model D are nested models with 8 and 16 parameters, respectively, and
have been fitted to a set of 50 observations. The deviance for Model C is 40.89 and the deviance
for Model D is 26.40. Explain whether Model D is a significant improvement on Model C.
Solution
The difference in the deviance is 40.89 26.40 14.49 .
The difference in the number of degrees of freedom is 16 8 8 .
The number of degrees of freedom in Model D is 50 16 34 .
So the value of the test statistic is:
14.49
2.333
26.40
8
34
From Page 172 of the Tables, the upper 5% point of F8,34 is 2.225. Since our test statistic exceeds
this value, we reject Model C in favour of Model D.
Akaike Information Criteria (AIC)
The AIC (an abbreviation for the ‘Akaike information criterion’) is a statistic primarily used
for model selection (that is, comparing which of two models is a better fit).
If two models are nested, then the more usual chi-squared test is the most appropriate to
use.
If the models are not nested, the AIC can be used. The AIC for a model is calculated as:
AIC 2 log-likelihood 2 number of parameters
The AIC looks at the trade-off of the likelihood of a model against the number of parameters:
the lower the AIC, the better the fit. For example, if two models fit the data equally well in
terms of the log-likelihood, then the model with the fewer parameters is the more
parsimonious (and, therefore, ‘better’).
3.2 Measuring uncertainty in the estimators of the model parameters
The Hessian matrix
One of the outputs of the matrix fitting process is the Hessian matrix. This gives the rate at
which the log-likelihood falls off from the optimum solution in each direction.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
Let’s go back to first principles for a moment. Recall that we find the maximum likelihood
estimate of a parameter by differentiation. So we need to differentiate a second time to find the
rate at which we fall away from the maximum likelihood. These second order derivatives will be
partial derivatives, since we will be fitting several (or indeed many) parameters.
So the Hessian matrix is the n n matrix of the second order partial derivatives of the log-
likelihood:
2l 2l 2l
...
1
2 12 1 n
2
l 2l 2l
...
Hess 21 22 2 n
2
l 2l 2
l
...
n2
n1 n2
The Hessian matrix can be interpreted as giving the sensitivity of the likelihood to changes in the
parameter values.
The second derivative of the likelihood in the direction of each parameter has been shown
by the Cramér-Rao lower bound theorem to be inversely proportional to the variance for the
parameter. We can use this to calculate standard errors for each parameter estimator. A
poorly defined parameter will have a large standard error.
Recall from earlier subjects that the Cramér-Rao lower bound theorem is as follows:
Given a random sample of size n from a distribution with density (or probability function in the
discrete case) f (x ; ) , the maximum likelihood estimator ˆ is such that, for large n, ˆ is
approximately normal, and is unbiased with variance given by the Cramér-Rao lower bound, that
is:
ˆ ~ N( ,CRLB)
The formula for the Cramér-Rao lower bound is:
1 1
CRLB .
2
2
nE log f X ; E 2 log L , X
In the diagram below, Parameter 2 has a steep curvature indicating that the parameter is
tightly defined, and Parameter 1 a shallow one. Hence Parameter 1 is poorly defined.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 27
Likelihood
Steep
Curvature
Shallow
Curvature
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
To see the difference in curvature, consider the arches upon which the whole shape is formed.
The relative slopes are quite different in terms of the speed by which likelihood declines,
depending on the direction by which we leave the optimal point.
For parameter 2, the curvature is steepest indicating that the associated second derivative is
highly negative. From the formula for the CRLB above, this implies that the CRLB and hence
variance is small.
3.3 Other methods for checking the significance of a factor
Comparison with expectations
Graphs can provide an intuitive feel as to whether a factor is significant in a GLM, although this is
more subjective than the statistical tests introduced in Section 3.1.
Factor significance is initially checked by considering the spread of relativity values for
each level, combined with the standard errors at each level. In the graph below (on the next
page), the errors 2 standard deviations are plotted. If the relativities are being fitted
individually (as in this case), then the pattern of their values should be consistent with the
definition of the factor under consideration.
For example, if the levels represent a continuous variable (such as vehicle age), then the
relativity should vary smoothly as the factor value increases. The error ranges of these
relativities are also distinct (they don’t overlap too much), indicating that the response from
the data underlying each level has a significantly different relativity value. Hence the factor
should be accepted.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
The graph on the next page shows the fitted parameter values from a GLM for a particular factor
that has 9 levels, along with two lines showing 2 standard deviations. We can be fairly
confident (approximately 95%) that the true relativity for each level of the rating factor will lie
between the two standard error lines. (At this stage you don’t need to worry about what this
factor is or what the scale on the y-axis represents.)
For this factor, the standard error lines are close together. This indicates that there is a high
degree of certainty in the parameter estimates. This factor is therefore useful in predicting the
risk.
Predicted Values - Factor A
0.65
0.55
0.45
0.35
0.25
0.15
0.05
-0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
M o del P redictio n at B ase levels M o del P redictio n + 2 Standard Erro rs M o del P redictio n - 2 Standard Erro rs
In the second example below, the opposite is true. In fact the error ranges overlap so much
that it would be possible to draw a horizontal line of relativities that stayed within the errors
shown. Hence the factor should be discarded.
Here we can see that the standard error lines are wide apart. This indicates that there is a lot of
uncertainty in the parameter estimates.
For example, the parameter estimate for Level 2 of this factor is 0.32 but the standard error lines
suggest that this estimate is likely to fall anywhere between 0.31 and 0.33. Similarly, for Level 3,
the estimate could fall between 0.31 and 0.327. There is a high degree of overlap between the
ranges for these two levels and therefore we would observe that the parameter estimates are not
significantly different from each other. Extending this argument to the other levels of this same
factor, we would conclude that none of the levels are really any different to any of the others and
therefore this factor is not helping to differentiate the risk.
This could be due to low amounts of exposure or simply because this factor doesn’t explain the
underlying risk very well.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 29
Predicted Values - Factor B
0.35
0.345
0.34
0.335
0.33
0.325
0.32
0.315
0.31
0.305
0 1 2 3 4 5 Unknown
Model Prediction at Base levels Model Prediction + 2 Standard Errors Model Prediction - 2 Standard Errors
Comparisons over time
To test the consistency of parameter estimates over time, we can fit a model that includes the
interaction of a single factor with a measure of time, eg a calendar year.
Recall from Section 2.2 that an interaction exists when the effect of one factor varies depending
on the levels of another factor. In the case of time interactions, we are testing whether the effect
of our factor varies depending on the year (or other specified time period) of the experience.
The time consistency check (derived by interacting each factor in turn with a time-related
factor) is important for pricing work, because typically you will be analysing data from two
to seven years ago, and then deploying rates for the next year. So if the pattern you select
is moving rapidly over time, then the model average selected will be inappropriate for future
periods.
The time consistency check is also used to determine more generally whether the effect of each
factor is consistent from year to year. If it is consistent then it is likely to be a good predictor of
future experience.
Let us consider two examples.
Example 1
The first example is where there is a time consistency problem.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
0.8%
0.7%
0.6%
0.5%
0.4%
0.3%
0.2%
0.1%
0.0%
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
This shape was generated on a car theft frequency chart a few years ago, during the period
when motor manufacturers were rapidly improving their security measures. In this chart
the x-axis is vehicle age,
the lines are the response rates for each year (newest is ‘− · − · − ·’, oldest is ‘− − −
−’), and
the bars are the exposure by year.
The response rates in this example are the car theft frequencies. The exposure bars on the graph
represent the amount of data at each level of vehicle age in each year, ie a different shade is used
for each year.
This rendered newer vehicles untouchable for a while, so thieves started to target older,
less secure vehicles. Hence the responses appeared to translate year by year to the right.
New cars are the most valuable to thieves but, with improvements in security measures over
time, they are becoming more difficult to steal or break into. Therefore the highest theft
frequencies in any year are likely to relate to the newest cohort of cars that don’t have high levels
of security. Each year this cohort gets older by one year, ie vehicles that were new in Year n
would be one year old in Year n 1 . In terms of the graph above, we can see that the level of
vehicle age with the highest claim frequency is increasing year on year and this is why the lines on
the graph appear to be shifting to the right.
Question
Given that there has been such a rapid improvement in manufacturer security features, explain
why the new cars on the graph above do not show a zero theft claim frequency for the more
recent years.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 31
Solution
The data used to analyse the claim frequencies will contain a mix of different makes and models
of vehicle. Some manufacturers will introduce higher levels of security than others and at
different times. An individual manufacturer may also introduce different levels of security
depending on the model of the vehicle.
The claim frequencies in this example are likely to relate to theft of vehicles but also to theft from
vehicles. The security improvements, eg immobilisers, are likely to have a greater effect on ‘theft
of’ but will not necessarily stop ‘theft from’.
New cars are still usually the most valuable in the eyes of thieves and over time they will find new
ways of getting around the security features.
Some policyholders may not make use of the security measures on their vehicles, making these
more susceptible to theft. Even if it is a condition of the insurance to use these, a claim is still
likely to be paid if the insurer can’t prove that the policyholder has been negligent.
In this case the relativities that would be suitable to deploy for a future year should be
something like the response for the latest year, translated by the projection period, and with
an ad-hoc adjustment for how the modeller thinks this change may develop.
Example 2
The second example is more usual. We see the model fit line (thick bold curve) varying
smoothly across the factor, and the time consistency responses varying randomly around
this average. The amount of variation should decrease with larger exposure.
This is another example showing the effect of vehicle age (along the x-axis) although in this case it
is more likely to be a graph of damage frequencies than theft frequencies. We can see that the
relativities for the lower car ages are based on more exposure data than the higher car ages and
therefore show less variation in the estimates.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
1.6%
1.4%
1.2%
1.0%
0.8%
0.6%
0.4%
0.2%
0.0%
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Consistency checks with other factors
Note: time is not the only factor that can be used as a consistency check.
If you are producing a model for a multi-distribution channel business then it is particularly
important that each factor is checked to ensure that it is valid for every channel.
For example, a factor such as the age of the vehicle would be expected to show the same pattern
regardless of the distribution channel used. Fitting a model that includes an interaction between
age of vehicle and distribution channel, and plotting a graph of the results, would highlight any
distribution channels where the effect of age of vehicle was different from the others. If this is
the case then you would need to do further investigations.
Differences in the data collection methods by channel can cause problems here.
Also a random factor could be created in the data, as a means to check consistency for a
factor.
Each observation in the data could be randomly allocated to one of ten (say) groups, the idea
being that each group is then a representative sample of the total data. Each of the ten randomly
allocated groups would be expected to behave in a similar way to each of the other groups and to
the whole data.
A new factor would be created, with ten different levels, representing the random group that
each observation had been allocated to. Let’s call this new factor randomgroup.
So if we wanted to test whether age of policyholder (for example) was showing a consistent
pattern throughout the whole data, we could fit a model to the whole data that included an
interaction term between policyholder age and randomgroup.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 33
If this interaction term is insignificant in the model then we would conclude that the effect of
policyholder age is the same for every level of randomgroup and that policyholder age is
consistent throughout the whole data.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
4 Testing the appropriateness of models
In this section we describe the techniques used to check the appropriateness of the model
structure.
Before you start modelling, it is important to check that the model you are intending to use has
the right error structure and is appropriate for your data. If it is not, then this could invalidate
your results.
4.1 Residuals
Various measures of the residual can be derived to show, for each observation, how the
fitted value differs from the actual observation.
Deviance residuals
One residual measure is the deviance residual:
riD sign Yi i d Yi ; i
where d is as given in Section 3.1.
Recall that d Yi ; i is the i th observation’s contribution to the deviance and is defined by:
d Yi ; i 2i
Yi
Yi
V d
i
and we define:
1 if Yi i 0
sign Yi i
1 if Yi i 0
The deviance residual is a measure of the distance between the actual observation and the fitted
value.
In general they (the deviance residuals) will be more closely normally distributed than raw
residuals (the difference between actual and GLM expected values) as the deviance corrects
the skewness of the distributions. For continuous distributions it is possible to test
whether the residuals are normally distributed. Any large deviations indicate that the
distributional assumptions are being violated.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 35
Pearson residuals
A Pearson residual is the difference between the observed response and the predicted
value, scaled by the standard deviation of the predicted value:
Yi i Yi E Yi
riP
V i 1 hii SD Yi 1 hii
i
where hii is the i th diagonal element of the hat matrix:
H X (XT X)-1 XT
derived from the design matrix X .
hii is also referred to as the i th leverage.
It can be viewed as a measure of how much influence an observation has over its own fitted
value. It lies between 0 and 1. If it is close to 1, it is likely that the residual for that
observation will be unusually small because of the high influence the observation has on
the fitted value.
This measure allows observations with different means to be comparable, but does not
adjust for the shape of the distribution.
The hat matrix is the matrix H such that:
yˆ Hy
So the hat matrix puts a hat on y !
For a model of the form Y Xβ ε, with a normally distributed error structure, we have seen that
the estimated parameters are:
βˆ (XT X)1 XT y
where y is the vector of observed values. So the fitted values are given by:
yˆ Xβˆ X(XT X)1 XT y
Hence the hat matrix is:
H X(XT X)1 XT
This definition of the hat matrix is true for the normal linear model. For other models, the hat
matrix can be considerably more complicated!
4.2 Residual plots
Here we look at typical residual patterns for models of average cost, frequency, burning
costs and probabilities.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
For a particular model (for example, average cost, frequency, burning costs and
probabilities), if the chosen error structure is appropriate then the residuals chart such as
the one below will have an average residual of zero, and the range of the residual values will
be fairly constant across the width of the fitted values.
The error structure relates to the statistical distribution assumed for the response variable Yi . For
example, where a Poisson error structure is used, the assumption is that the variance is
proportional to the mean, . For a gamma error structure, the variance is assumed to be
proportional to 2 .
In the diagram on the next page, if the plot were to ‘fan out’ at the right hand side, then this
would tell us that the residuals were increasing as the fitted value increased, indicating that our
chosen distributional assumptions were not correct.
. .
For the graph below, the error structure has been increased to 4 , which is far higher than
the power 2 gamma model from the first chart. The result is a set of residuals where the
range narrows as the fitted value increases, indicating that the model is poor.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
Page 38 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
So a good model should produce residuals that:
are symmetrical about the x-axis
have an average residual of zero
are fairly constant across the width of the fitted values.
Question
State what we would do if the residual checks suggest that our model is not a good fit to the data.
Solution
We would need to re-specify the model by choosing a different statistical distribution.
4.3 Cook’s distance and leverage
The term hii introduced in Section 3.2 is called the leverage.
Recall that the leverage is a measure of how much influence each observed value has on the fitted
value for that observation.
Data points with large residuals (outliers) and/or high leverage may distort the outcome and
accuracy of a regression model. Cook’s distance is used to estimate the influence of a data
point on the model results. Points with a Cook’s distance of 1 or more are considered to
merit closer examination in the analysis.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 39
As a result of your investigations into any data points with a high Cook’s distance, you might
decide to cap the amounts or remove the observations altogether. If you do this, it is important
to remember to allow for them later, to avoid understating claim frequencies or amounts.
Cook’s distance for the i th data point is defined as:
hii 2
ciP riP
1 hii hii
i
where the i th leverage hii is the i th diagonal element of the hat matrix H X(XT X)-1 XT derived
from the design matrix X and riP is the Pearson residual, defined in Section 4.1.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 40 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
5 Model refinement
In this section we examine the refining of models using interactions and restrictions.
We have chosen the structure of our model and checked that it is appropriate for our chosen
factors by testing the residuals. Then we have removed any factors from the model that did not
help to define the risk. We can now start to further refine the model. One way of doing this is to
look for interactions.
Question
Explain the difference between correlations and interactions.
Solution
Correlations occur when there is a relationship between the distribution of exposure between
levels of two or more factors. GLMs automatically take account of correlations (unlike one-way
tables).
Interactions relate to the effect that factors have upon the risk. To define the risk accurately, an
interaction would be necessary where the effect of two (or more) factors depend on each other.
GLMs can be specified to include interactions of our choice.
5.1 Complete and marginal interactions
Interactions can be expressed in different ways. For example, consider the case of two
factors, each with four levels.
Complete interactions
One way of expressing an interaction is to consider a single factor representing every
combination of the two factors (a ‘complete’ interaction). A set of multipliers (in the case of
a multiplicative model) could therefore be expressed as follows:
Factor 1: A B C D
Factor 2: W 0.72 0.80 0.88 0.96
X 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20
Y 0.97 1.20 1.45 1.66
Z 1.26 1.40 1.85 2.10
In this case, the base level has been selected to be the level corresponding to Level B of
Factor 1 and Level X of Factor 2, and the interaction term has 15 parameters.
The base level is the combination that has a multiplier of 1.00.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 41
Marginal interactions
An alternative representation of this interaction is to consider the single factor effects of
Factor 1 and Factor 2 and the additional effect of an interaction term over and above the
single factor effects (or ‘marginal’ interaction). A set of multipliers in this form can be set as
follows:
Factor 1: A B C D
0.90 - 1.10 1.20
Factor 2: W 0.80 1 - 1 1
X - - - - -
Y 1.20 0.9 - 1.1 1.15
Z 1.40 1 - 1.2 1.25
In this case fewer parameters are present in the additional interaction term because the
presence of the single factor effects makes some of the interaction terms redundant. When
fitted in a GLM (assuming that the single factor effects were declared first) the redundant
terms in the additional interaction term would be aliased.
Aliasing occurs when there is a linear dependency among the observed covariates, ie where one
covariate is identical to some combination of other covariates. Aliasing is discussed in Section 5.3.
Overall, the three terms combined (Factor 1, Factor 2 and their interaction) still have 15
parameters, and result in identical predicted values.
For example, in the case of Factor 1 Level D and Factor 2 Level Z, the multiplier is:
1.2 1.4 1.25 2.10
This is because we are assuming that this is a multiplicative model and:
the multiplier for Factor 1 Level D is 1.20
the multiplier for Factor 2 Level Z is 1.40
and the multiplier for the D.Z interaction term is 1.25.
Note that we obtain the same multiplier from both representations of the model.
Question
Explain how you might decide which interaction terms to test for inclusion in a GLM.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 42 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
Solution
One option is to test every possible combination of pairs (or triplets) of factors and test each for
statistical significance and reasonableness. However this is very time-consuming and unlikely to
be done in practice.
You might look at the structure of your existing rating algorithms and see which interactions can
be included without the need for IT support, eg by checking which interaction rate tables already
exist. There is little point in coming up with a highly sophisticated rating structure if it is too
complicated to actually be implemented.
You could use your experience of the product and the market in which it operates. For example,
in private motor insurance it is commonplace to include an interaction between policyholder age
and policyholder gender.
You could speak to underwriters and other experts to see whether there are any parts of the
account where your rates might be out of line with the market. This could indicate that you
haven’t defined the risk correctly and that perhaps an interaction term might help.
5.2 Model restrictions
The theoretical risk premium results from a GLM claims analysis will differ from the rates
implemented in practice since consideration needs to be given to price demand elasticity
and the competitive situation.
Price demand elasticity is a measure of how the demand for a product changes in response to a
change in its price.
The competitive situation is relevant because there may be pockets of business where the
theoretical risk premium rates would produce market premiums that are much higher or lower
than those of your competitors. For example, if your premiums are much lower than those of
your competitors then there may be an opportunity to increase your rates but still be the
cheapest in the market, thereby increasing profit on this section of business without reducing
volumes.
There are, however, some situations where legal or commercial considerations may also
impose rigid restrictions on the way particular factors are used in practice. When the use of
certain factors is restricted, if desired, the model may be able to compensate to an extent
for this artificial restriction by adjusting the fitted relativities for correlated factors. This is
achieved using the offset term in the GLM (see Section 5.6).
If a factor is removed from a GLM then the remaining factors will try to explain as much as
possible of the risk that had previously been explained by the removed factor. This means that
the parameter values for the remaining factors will change. The extent of the change will depend
on the levels of correlation between each remaining factor and the removed factor. Similarly,
whenever a factor is added to a model, or redefined in some way, the model compensates by
changing all the parameter values.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 43
Offsets were introduced in Section 1.6. Up until now, we have assumed that the offset term is
equal to zero.
Specifically, the required parameter estimates (logs of multipliers in the case of a
multiplicative model where specifically a log link function is used) are calculated for each
record and added to the offset term i . The factor in question is then not included as an
explanatory factor in the GLM. (This can intuitively be thought of as fixing some selected
elements of i to be specified values.)
When we fix (offset) the parameter estimates for a particular factor at a level other than that
calculated by the GLM, the remaining factors in the model will try to explain the difference in risk
arising from differences between the calculated and the fixed parameter estimates for the factor
that has been offset. Therefore the parameter estimates for these remaining factors are likely to
change, if they are correlated with the factor that has been offset.
Question
Suppose we have a GLM and we decide to offset the parameter values of one of the factors at the
levels suggested by the GLM. Assuming we make no other changes to the model, explain what
the effect might be on the parameter values for the remaining factors.
Solution
There will be no effect on the remaining parameter values because this is effectively the same
model.
Although restrictions could be applied either to frequency or amounts models (or in part to
both), generally it is more appropriate to impose the restriction on the model at the risk
premium stage, since this allows a more complete and balanced compensation by the other
factors. This can be achieved by calculating the expected cost of claims for each record,
according to ‘unrestricted’ GLMs, and then imposing the restriction in the final GLM, which
is then fitted to the total expected cost of claims. For restricted risk premium models (eg
where you fix your NCD levels and compensate for the ‘true’ cost by varying values of other
factors) this approach is necessary even in the case of a single claim type.
Amounts models are often referred to as severity models. The risk premium stage of the
modelling process is the point at which the frequency and severity models are combined to give
risk premiums.
In the UK, many personal lines policies contained discounts for factors like ‘No Claims
Discount’ (NCD) that were equal across all companies in the market.
NCD is an established practice within UK private motor insurance. The Core Reading says
‘contained’ rather than ‘contain’ here because it is no longer the case that equal NCD scales apply
across all insurers. However, for most, the discount awarded to drivers with four or five
claim-free years is far in excess of that which could be justified by theoretical risk models.
Policyholders like the concept of big discounts and so, for competitive reasons, insurers are
reluctant to move away from the established discount scales. Therefore, when using GLMs, the
NCD scale is often incorporated into the risk premium models using the offset term.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 44 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
There is more detail on how to apply offsets in Section 5.4.
Soon European regulation may impose restrictions on various factors, gender and age
being examples mandated by regulation.
Since the EU Gender Directive came into force at the end of 2012, EU insurers have been unable
to differentiate premiums by gender.
There have also been discussions around age discrimination and the Equality Bill in the UK.
It is possible that these (and other) issues will be reviewed further in the future and that insurers
may become more restricted in their choice of rating factors.
Today's models may indicate that these discounts are not supported by the claims
experience, or in many cases may even indicate a surcharge. If a company chooses to
continue offering such discounts, it is important that these restrictions are incorporated
into the modelling process, since such restrictions can affect the relativities that become
appropriate for other correlated factors.
Counter-intuitive model results may occur on behavioural factors such as factors that
policyholders self-select, eg limits and deductibles. These factors may require restriction if
they are to be used directly in rate-making.
An example of a potentially counter-intuitive result in motor insurance is NCD protection. This
allows a policyholder to retain their NCD level even if they have made one or more claims (where
the number of claims they can make within a defined time period will be specified in the policy).
There will be an extra premium payable for this protection because it is an extra benefit.
NCD protection will typically only be available to policyholders who have had four or five
claim-free years. A policyholder who has managed to stay claim-free for this long, and who is now
seeing the benefit of lower premiums as a result, is likely to be willing to pay a small extra
premium to retain this advantage, particularly if he/she is risk averse. So the policyholders who
choose to protect their NCD level are generally the subset of the better risks that are risk averse,
ie careful.
In the context of a GLM, NCD protection will be a two-level factor (Yes/No) and
NCD protection = Yes will become a proxy for lower risk. This could lead to the theoretical
premium being lower for those choosing (self-selecting) NCD protection than for those who don’t,
even though the market premium needs to be higher.
(There is, of course, the counter-argument that policyholders might only buy NCD protection if
they expect to have a claim in the next year, but remember that they will need to have a number
of claim-free years already and that there is a limit on the number of claims they can make
without losing their NCD protection.)
Prior to incorporating restrictions, it is still important to assess the true effect of all factors
upon the risk by initially including them in the analysis as if they were ordinary factors. In
addition, a comparison of the fitted values of the theoretical model and the restricted
models will demonstrate the degree to which other factors have compensated for the
restriction.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 45
The examples below show two such comparisons. Each graph shows the number of
policies (on the y -axis) that have different ratios of restricted to unrestricted fitted values
(on the x -axis). The graph is subdivided by levels of the restricted factor (shown in
different shading). If the GLM can compensate well for a factor restriction (because there
are many other factors in the model correlated with the restricted factor) then this
distribution will be narrow. Conversely, if the GLM cannot compensate well for the
restriction, this distribution will be wider.
The ratio of restricted to unrestricted fitted values is a measure of how much the fitted values
(eg frequencies or severities) change for each observation as a result of restricting a particular
factor.
In this particular example, the factors in the upper graph have not compensated well for the
restriction. The wide distribution of the restricted to unrestricted ratio implies that the
restriction is moving the model away from the theoretical result. The second graph, on the
other hand, shows a model that contains factors that are more correlated with the restricted
factor, and that have compensated better for the restriction.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 46 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
These graphs are part of the Core Reading. Don’t worry too much about the detail – they are just
examples of the type of analysis that could be undertaken.
Distribution of ratio of fitted values between restricted and unrestricted models
(showing little compensation from other factors)
12000
10000
8000
Count of records
6000
4000
2000
0
0.800 0.830 0.860 0.890 0.920 0.950 0.980 1.010 1.040 1.070 1.100 1.130 1.160 1.190 1.220 1.250 1.280 1.310 1.340 1.370 1.400 1.430 1.460 1.490
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0.810 0.840 0.870 0.900 0.930 0.960 0.990 1.020 1.050 1.080 1.110 1.140 1.170 1.200 1.230 1.260 1.290 1.320 1.350 1.380 1.410 1.440 1.470 1.500
Ratio
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S
Distribution of ratio of fitted values between restricted and unrestricted models
(showing some compensation from other factors)
12000
10000
8000
Count of records
6000
4000
2000
0
0.800 0.830 0.860 0.890 0.920 0.950 0.980 1.010 1.040 1.070 1.100 1.130 1.160 1.190 1.220 1.250 1.280 1.310 1.340 1.370 1.400 1.430 1.460 1.490
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0.810 0.840 0.870 0.900 0.930 0.960 0.990 1.020 1.050 1.080 1.110 1.140 1.170 1.200 1.230 1.260 1.290 1.320 1.350 1.380 1.410 1.440 1.470 1.500
Ratio
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S
We discuss restrictions further in Section 5.6.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 47
5.3 Aliasing
Aliasing occurs when there is a linear dependency among the observed covariates
X 1, ..., X p . That is, one covariate may be identical to some combination of other covariates.
For example, it may be observed that:
X 3 4 X1 5 X 2
Equivalently, aliasing can be defined as a linear dependency among the columns of the
design matrix X .
This means that one or more columns can be expressed as a linear combination of other columns.
See the solution to the first self-assessment question (on page 8 of this chapter) for an example of
this phenomenon.
There are two types of aliasing: intrinsic aliasing and extrinsic aliasing.
Intrinsic aliasing
Intrinsic aliasing occurs because of dependencies inherent in the definition of the
covariates. These intrinsic dependencies arise most commonly whenever categorical
factors are included in the model.
For example, suppose a private passenger automobile classification system includes the
factor vehicle age, which has the four levels:
0-3 years ( X 1 ), 4-7 years ( X 2 ), 8-9 years ( X 3 ), and 10+ years ( X 4 )
Clearly, if any of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 is equal to 1, then X 4 is equal to 0; and if all of X 1 , X 2 , X 3
are equal to 0 then X 4 must be equal to 1.
This is because each vehicle has to belong to exactly one of these categories.
Thus:
X 4 1 X1 X 2 X 3
The linear predictor:
1X 1 2 X 2 3 X 3 4 X 4
(ignoring any other factors) can be uniquely expressed in terms of the first three levels:
1X 1 2 X 2 3 X 3 4 (1 X 1 X 2 X 3 )
( 1 4 ) X 1 ( 2 4 ) X 2 ( 3 4 ) X 3 4
Upon renaming the coefficients this becomes:
1X 1 2 X 2 3 X 3 0
The result is a linear predictor with an intercept term (if one did not already exist) and three
covariates.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 48 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
The intercept term is 0 . In a GLM with more than one factor, the intercept for the whole model
is a combination of the intercept terms for each factor.
GLM software will remove parameters that are aliased. Which parameter is selected for
exclusion depends on the software. The choice of which parameter to alias does not affect
the fitted values. For example, in some cases the last level declared (ie the last
alphabetically) is aliased. In other software the level with the maximum exposure is
selected as the base level for each factor first, and then other levels are aliased dependent
upon the order of declaration. (This latter approach is helpful since it minimises the
standard errors associated with other parameter estimates.)
Extrinsic aliasing
This type of aliasing again arises from a dependency among the covariates, but when the
dependency results from the nature of the data rather than inherent properties of the
covariates themselves. This data characteristic arises if one level of a particular factor is
perfectly correlated with a level of another factor.
For example, suppose a dataset is enriched with external data and two new factors are
added to the dataset. The new factors are number of doors and colour of vehicle. Suppose
further that, in a small number of cases, the external data could not be linked with the
existing data, with the result that some records have an unknown colour and an unknown
number of doors.
Exposures No. of doors
2 3 4 5 Unknown
Red 13,234 12,343 15,432 13,432 0
Green 4,543 4,543 13,243 2,345 0
Colour
Blue 6,544 5,443 15,654 4,565 0
Black 4,643 1,235 14,565 4,545 0
Unknown 0 0 0 0 3,242
Selected Base: No. of Doors = 4: Colour = Red
Additional Aliasing: Colour = Unknown
In this case because of the way the new factors were derived, the level unknown for the
factor colour happens to be perfectly correlated with the level unknown for the factor
number of doors. The covariate associated with unknown colour is equal to 1 in every case
for which the covariate for unknown number of doors is equal to 1, and vice versa.
The covariate associated with unknown colour is equal to 1 when colour is unknown and the
covariate associated with unknown number of doors is 1 when number of doors is unknown. As
we can see from the table above, if number of doors is unknown then colour is unknown and if
number of doors is known then so is colour.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 49
This example assumes that the model has been fitted with only two factors, colour and number of
doors. There are five possible levels of colour and five possible levels of number of doors, giving a
starting point of ten covariates.
Elimination of the base levels through intrinsic aliasing reduces the linear predictor from 10
covariates to 8, plus the introduction of an intercept term. In addition, in this example, one
further covariate needs to be removed as a result of extrinsic aliasing. This could either be
the unknown colour covariate or the unknown number of doors covariate. Assuming, in
this case, the GLM routine aliases on the basis of order of declaration, and assuming that
the number of doors factor is declared before colour, the GLM routine would alias unknown
colour reducing the linear predictor to just 7 covariates.
‘Near aliasing’
When modelling in practice, a common problem occurs when two or more factors contain
levels that are almost, but not quite, perfectly correlated. For example, if the colour of
vehicle was known for a small number of policies for which the number of doors was
unknown, the two-way of exposure might appear as follows:
Exposures No. of doors
2 3 4 5 Unknown
Red 13,234 12,343 15,432 13,432 0
Green 4,543 4,543 13,243 2,345 0
Colour
Blue 6,544 5,443 15,654 4,565 0
Black 4,643 1,235 14,565 4,545 5
Unknown 0 0 0 0 3,242
Selected Base: No. of Doors = 4: Colour = Red
In this case the unknown level of colour factor is not perfectly correlated to the unknown
level of the number of doors factor, and so extrinsic aliasing will not occur.
When levels of two factors are ‘nearly aliased’ in this way, convergence problems can
occur.
For example, if there were no claims for the five exposures indicated in black colour level
and unknown number of doors level, and if a log link model was fitted to claims frequency,
the model would attempt to estimate a very large and negative parameter for unknown
number of doors (for example, –20) and a very large parameter for unknown colour (for
example, 20.2). The sum (0.2 in this example) would be an appropriate reflection of the
claims frequency for the 3,242 exposures having unknown number of doors and unknown
colour, while the value of the unknown number of doors parameter would be driven by the
experience of the five rogue exposures having colour black with unknown number of doors.
This can either give rise to convergence problems, or to results that can appear very
confusing. The issue here is that the model will try to compensate for the rogue number by
producing a parameter that will ‘work’ for all real data and thus negative parameters will
appear where there is no obvious negative relationship.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 50 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
In order to understand the problem in such circumstances, it is helpful to examine two-way
tables of exposure and claim counts for the factors that contain very large parameter
estimates. From these, it should be possible to identify those factor combinations that
cause the near-aliasing. The issue can then be resolved either by deleting or excluding
those rogue records, or by reclassifying the rogue records into another, more appropriate,
factor level.
5.4 Aliasing – a practical example
Consider the example where a factor called payment frequency is collected for the direct
channel, but is unknown for all policies written by the broker channel.
This situation may be caused by variations in the data collection methods, or perhaps
because the broker arranges its own premium credit loans, but these are not sourced
through the insurance company.
The exposure data is likely to relate to numbers of policies and is as follows:
Exposure Annual Monthly Unknown
Direct 17,774 8,262 0
Broker 0 0 12,046
Suppose that annual and direct are the two selected base levels for the model;
some simplified data are given below.
Payment
Channel Exposure Response Rate
Frequency
Direct Annual 17,774 1,777 10%
Direct Monthly 8,262 1,074 13%
Broker Unknown 12,046 2,048 17%
The response in this example might be the number of claims.
Note that:
Response
Rate
Exposure
Now a modelling package may spread the broker / unknown uplift of 1.7 between the two
parameters ‘is broker’ and ‘is unknown’.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 51
The uplift figure of 1.7 is the factor that the direct / annual (ie the selected base level) rate is
multiplied by to get the broker / unknown rate. In the table below, the 1.7 is split into two factors
of 1.3 for each of ‘is broker’ and ‘is unknown’. (All figures are rounded to 1 decimal place here.)
Base Monthly Unknown Broker Predicted
Direct Annual 10% 1.0 1.0 1.0 10%
Direct Monthly 10% 1.3 1.0 1.0 13%
Broker Unknown 10% 1.0 1.3 1.3 17%
Alternatively, it may choose any manner of wild self-cancelling results:
Base Monthly Unknown Broker Predicted
Direct Annual 10% 1.0 1.0 1.0 10%
Direct Monthly 10% 1.3 1.0 1.0 13%
Broker Unknown 10% 1.0 0.0010 1700 17%
The point is that the ‘is unknown’ factor and the ‘is broker’ factor must have a product of 1.7.
This is an example of what is called ‘extrinsic aliasing’, and is likely to be handled by the
modelling package by eliminating one or other of the parameters automatically.
Automatic parameter removal will cause the remaining parameter to obtain all the uplift
required to fit the response. In this case, let’s assume that ‘is unknown’ is eliminated and
therefore that ‘is broker’ takes on the value 1.7.
In other words, the ‘is unknown’ factor takes the value 1.
Now consider a circumstance where this may not be appropriate. Perhaps the modelling
task includes an objective to explain channel differences, or perhaps the future data
collection for the broker channel may change and be expected to include valid annual and
monthly values.
In this case we might no longer be happy with a seemingly arbitrary allocation of the 1.7 value
between ‘is broker’ and ‘is unknown’.
New predicted values from these relativities will look like this:
Base Monthly Unknown Broker Predicted
Broker Unknown 10% 1.0 1.0 1.7 17%
Broker Annual 10% 1.0 1.0 1.7 17%
Broker Monthly 10% 1.3 1.0 1.7 22%
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 52 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
This is because the parameter estimates are:
1.0 for ‘is annual’ because this is the selected base level for premium frequency
1.3 for ‘is monthly’ from the model
1.0 for ‘is unknown’ because this was automatically eliminated
1.0 for ‘is direct’ because this is the selected base level for channel
1.7 for ‘is broker’ because we’ve assumed that ‘is unknown’ was eliminated and therefore
this takes on the whole 1.7 value.
Hence the annual business is given the same prediction as the previous data collected with
the unknown level. The monthly business will attract an extra loading resulting in a
prediction of 22%.
The broker monthly predicted value = 10% 1.3 1.0 1.7 22.1%
It is quite likely that these predictions are not suitable even as initial estimates before any
new data can be analysed.
This is because ‘is unknown’ was automatically eliminated by the modelling package and
therefore given the value of 1.0. However, we know that the observations in this category are
actually a mix of annual policies and monthly policies, in which case we would expect the
predicted value for the unknown level to lie somewhere between the annual value of 1.0 and the
monthly value of 1.3.
Suppose that a brief investigation estimates that the ‘unknown’ broker data was likely to
contain two-thirds annual business and one-third monthly. Then the best way to achieve a
good set of parameters is to fix the ‘is unknown’ parameter with an offset to the weighted
average of the estimates values, eg:
1.0 2 / 3 1.3 1 / 3 1.1
Then the ‘is broker’ parameter will float down to:
1.7 / 1.1 1.545
because we know that the product of ‘is unknown’ and ‘is broker’ must be 1.7.
Now the predictions will adjust as:
Base Monthly Unknown Broker Predicted
Broker Unknown 10% 1.0 1.1 1.545 17%
Broker Annual 10% 1.0 1.0 1.545 15%
Broker Monthly 10% 1.3 1.0 1.545 20.1%
which make more sense as 15% and 20% average to the original fitted value of 17%.
5.5 Parameter smoothing
Smoothing is one of the most important techniques to apply to current modelling exercises.
This is because, over recent years, datasets have become much larger, and computer
software and hardware have become capable of handling these larger datasets.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 53
As a result, historical work to guess the best ways to group and summarise the input data
prior to loading into a modelling package have become redundant. A much better job can
be done by retaining most of the granularity in the data and then using the patterns in the
data itself to help define the grouping and smoothing to apply.
In the past, it was necessary to group the data before loading it into the modelling software. For
example, factors like policyholder age often had to be grouped into bands of five years to make
the model more manageable. Such groupings tended to be based on the results of one-way and
two-way tables as well as on the experience of the modeller, but these were subjective and
potentially led to a reduction in the accuracy of the final models. With today’s modelling
packages and the increasing power of computers, pre-grouping is no longer necessary, giving
much more flexibility and accuracy.
The word granularity refers to the level of detail in the data. A high level of granularity indicates a
lot of detail. When we group levels of factors, or reduce the number of factors in a model, we
reduce the number of possible combinations of levels of factors and reduce the level of
granularity.
In the example below, a polynomial fit has been used for the levels 0 to 14, and the
remaining levels grouped together as the data was too sparse to fit a pattern for levels 15 to
20. The polynomial and the grouping have been rendered piecewise continuous.
We explain the term ‘piecewise continuous’ in the example that follows.
8%
25
7%
6%
20
5%
15
4%
3%
10
2%
5
1%
0% 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Exposure Observed Average Model Prediction
This graph is typical of private motor claim frequency by vehicle age.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 54 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
Fitting a polynomial (a curve) to the data is one way of smoothing the raw parameter estimates.
This is generally only used for factors where there is a natural order in the levels. A polynomial of
order 1 is simply a straight line; a polynomial of order 2 is a quadratic equation, etc. The higher
the order of the polynomial, the better it will fit the unsmoothed parameter estimates but the
less smooth it will be. We are aiming to find the most parsimonious model and so we want to find
the polynomial of the smallest order that still fits the data well.
Question
Explain the principle of parsimony.
Solution
Parsimony is the concept that ‘less is better’. For GLMs, this means that the model with the
smallest number of parameters is preferred, as long as we are not removing statistically
significant parameters.
A model with more parameters than are needed might fit the past data extremely well,
accounting for all the random ‘blips’ observed but this may lead to a lower level of predictive
power for the future.
You can see from the graph that there is a lot of variability in the parameter estimates for levels
15 and above, where there is very little data. It is quite common in practice to group together
levels of a factor where the data are very sparse. This means that the smoothed parameter
estimates for levels 15 to 20 are all equal and are a weighted average of the unsmoothed
estimates.
So we now have a curve fitting one part of the range and a straight line fitting the rest, but we
may also need to make sure that there is no discontinuity at the point where the curve meets the
straight line, ie that it is piecewise continuous. This can be achieved within the modelling
software.
In the next example, the granular data shows significant noise, with no trend on the left-
hand levels, and then a fairly steep trend on the right. The factor has been fitted by fitting a
level group to the left, and a piecewise continuous straight line to the right.
You will notice that this factor has a large number of levels and so the amount of data in any
individual level is likely to be much smaller than it would be for a factor with fewer levels. This is
one reason why there is a lot of randomness (noise) in the parameter estimates.
Question
Suggest another reason why there might be lots of ‘noise’ in the parameter estimates.
Solution
There might be lots of ‘noise’ simply because this factor does not explain the risk very well.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 55
Had the data been grouped prior to loading into the modelling package, this change in trend
may not have been as easy to discern.
Predicted Values
10% 12
9%
10
8%
7%
8
6%
5% 6
4%
4
3%
2%
2
1%
0% 0
80
25
70
98
13
48
86
75
06
35
55
63
83
90
03
07
25
33
40
55
66
00
19
71
14
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
15
16
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
Exposure Obse rved Ave ra ge Model Pre diction
Think about one way in which you could have pre-grouped the levels of this factor and what the
parameter estimates would look like. Now choose a different pre-grouping and estimate what
the parameter estimates would look like. You will see that the estimates for the pre-determined
groups will vary depending on your choice of grouping, and this could affect any modelling
decisions you make. It is therefore better to avoid grouping levels of factors prior to loading into
the modelling software.
Summary of methods for simplifying factors
To sum up, there are four methods for factor simplification:
1. Group and summarise the data prior to loading
This requires knowledge of the pattern that is expected. It is now mainly adopted as a
method to thin out redundant codes from the data that has little exposure.
We saw in the previous example, where we didn’t have any prior knowledge of the pattern
expected, that the results can change depending on our choice of grouping.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 56 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
However, this approach can still be useful at the data cleaning stage. For example, we may have
policyholder gender as a factor, with exposure data as shown in the table below.
Gender Number of policies
Male 64,932
Female 35,055
Unknown 13
We know that we don’t want to use the 13 ‘unknown’ policies to set future rates for unknown
gender, and these represent such a small proportion of the total number of policies that there is
little merit in keeping them separate. (Indeed, as we have seen in Section 5.3, if these are aliased
with the unknown level of other factors then it could cause problems to keep them separate.)
One option is to remove these 13 policies completely from the data. But then we are throwing
away the rest of the data attached to these policies. If there are lots of factors, each with a few
policies in the unknown level, and we always remove these policies, then we might find that we
end up with a much smaller (and potentially biased) dataset than we had expected.
A better option is to group the ‘unknown’ policies with the ‘male’ policies. This will have a
negligible effect on the ‘male’ parameter estimates because the number of unknowns is so small,
and it is likely that 8 or 9 of the policies relate to male policyholders anyway. In this instance, it is
perfectly acceptable to group the data prior to modelling.
2. Grouping in the modelling package
Often called a custom factor, this method simply assigns a single parameter to represent
the relativity for multiple levels of the factor.
A simple factor is a factor where the levels of that factor represent the levels in the raw data. For
example, policyholder age could be a simple factor, taking values between 17 and 100. A GLM
would calculate parameter estimates for each individual age.
A custom factor is where two or more levels of a factor are grouped together in the model.
Policyholder age-band might be a custom factor, with levels 17-50 and 51-100. The GLM would
now only calculate parameter estimates for these two levels (one of which would be the base
level).
Within a GLM, the custom factor would replace the simple factor in the model. The two models,
ie one with the simple factor and the other with the custom factor, are nested models and so the
modeller can, and should, use the appropriate statistical tests to check whether the simplified
model is still valid. These are the same statistical tests that would be used to test for the
significance of a rating factor.
Question
Name the three types of statistical test that can be used to test for the significance of a rating
factor.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 57
Solution
The three types of statistical test given in Section 3.1 are:
Chi-squared
F statistic
Akaike information criteria (AIC).
The grouping done for levels 15 to 20 in the car age example earlier in Section 5.5 is another
example of a custom factor.
3. Curve fitting, or use of a variate
The levels of a factor are each assigned an x -value and a polynomial (in the examples
above a cubic and linear were used) is fitted to the factor. In this case, the parameters in
the model are just the parameters from the polynomial itself, excluding the constant term.
4. Piecewise curve fitting
The factor levels are broken into sections and a custom factor and/or curve from Methods 2
and 3 is applied to each section. By combining these in different ways, the join at each
section boundary can be disjoint or piecewise continuous as the modeller thinks
appropriate.
This method is really just a combination of Methods 2 and 3.
A good modelling package will make this process easy and fun to achieve with just a few
mouse clicks, allowing the modeller to focus on producing quality results.
However, because it is so easy to produce a GLM using modelling software, it is important that
the modeller has a full understanding of the data and of the product being analysed to ensure
that any models produced are sensible and that observed patterns can be adequately explained.
5.6 Offsetting
We have already met offsets in Section 5.2. The offset applies to the linear predictor i , and
not the fitted values i . If a subset of j is fixed, then the sum of their contributions to i
is called an offset i so that:
k n k
i
X ij . j X ij . j i
X ij . j
j 1 j k 1 j 1
where the summation is over the terms for which the parameters j are not fixed. In other
words, we subtract the offset from the linear predictor and the results can then be
regressed on the remaining variables. Add the offset back again after the fit. Everything
else is as before.
In this equation, the subset of j that is fixed (using the offset) is for values of j from k 1 to n .
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 58 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
The main purpose of offsetting is to fix the relativities of a factor to a set of values that
would differ from the naturally fitted values. A classic example of this would be the
discount provided on private car insurance for different levels of no claims discount. These
discount percentages may be fixed by marketing and hence cannot be fitted, but need to be
allowed for when fitting the other data.
A subtle use of offsetting is to ‘fix’ a level of a factor as part of the process of removing
aliasing from the data. See the direct / broker example above.
This example is in Section 5.4.
Offsetting is also commonly used in more complex models where a hierarchy of models is
wanted. This is achieved by fitting the first model, offsetting all the values (ie fixing the
parameters at the values obtained in fitting the first model), and then fitting a second model to
explain the remaining patterns in the data.
Offsetting can be useful when comparing a final model to a new ‘hold-out’ sample of data.
To do this, first divide the data into modelling and test sets. A division like ¾ and ¼ may be
appropriate. Then fit the model on the main dataset, and then fully offset it. Offsetting fixes
the parameters so that they can be reloaded and scored against the test set. The
predictiveness of the model is judged by how well it performs against this test set, by
comparing the observed values directly to the fitted values from the offset model.
A ‘hold-out’ sample of data is a dataset that can be used to validate the results from a model. It
should be a representative sample of the whole dataset and may be, eg 10% of the original data,
chosen at random. This allows the modeller to check whether the parameter estimates derived
from the model are useful in predicting the claims experience for a completely separate set of
data.
Similarly, model results can be validated by applying the fitted values to data from a more recent
policy year rather than from a hold-out sample.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 59
6 Glossary items
Make sure you read the Glossary items relating to this chapter. They are:
Generalised linear model
Link function.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 60 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
The chapter summary starts on the next page so that you can
keep all the chapter summaries together for revision purposes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 61
Chapter 16 Summary
Exponential family
The exponential family is the set of distributions whose probability function or probability
density function can be written in the form:
y b(i )
fi (yi ;i , ) exp i i c(yi , )
ai ( )
The parameter i is a function of the mean i E Yi . The mean and variance of Yi satisfy
the equations:
E Yi b i
var Yi ai b i
The variance function is given by:
V b
The binomial, Poisson, exponential, gamma, normal, inverse Gaussian and Tweedie
distributions are all members of the exponential family.
Uses of GLMs
A GLM can be used to model the behaviour of a random variable that is believed to depend
on the values of several other characteristics, eg age, sex, vehicle group.
Components of a GLM
A GLM consists of:
a distribution for the data, which must be a member of the exponential family
a linear predictor, , and
a link function.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 62 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
Matrix form of a GLM
A GLM can be written in matrix form as:
Y g1 Xβ ξ ε
where:
X is the design matrix of factors
β is a vector of parameters to be estimated
ξ is a vector of offsets or known effects
ε is the error term appropriate to Y .
The linear predictor is: η Xβ ξ
Estimating the parameters of a GLM
For a normal linear model with identity link function, the parameters can be estimated using
the matrix formula:
1
β XT X XT Y
For more complicated models and other link functions, the parameters are obtained using
iterative techniques.
Comparing models
The contribution of the i th observation to the deviance is:
d Yi ; i 2i
Yi
Yi
V d
i
and the total deviance is given by:
n
D d Yi ; i
i 1
The scaled deviance is:
D
D
It can be used to compare the goodness of fit of nested models. In particular, if Models 1
and 2 are nested, then:
D1 D2 ~ df
2
1 df2
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 63
If is unknown, the goodness of fit of nested models can be compared using the result:
D1 D2 ~F
df1 df2 D2 / df2 df1 df2 ,df2
For models that are not nested, the Akaike Information Criterion (AIC) can be used to
compare the goodness of fit. The AIC is:
AIC 2 log-likelihood 2 number of parameters
The lower the AIC, the better the fit.
Leverages
The diagonal entries hii of the hat matrix are called the leverages. These measure the
influence that each observed value has on the fitted value for that observation. Data points
with high leverages or residuals may distort the outcome and accuracy of a model.
The Hessian matrix
The Hessian matrix gives the rate at which the log-likelihood falls off from the optimum
solution in each direction.
Pearson residuals
The i th Pearson residual is:
Yi i Yi E Yi
riP
V i 1 hii SD Yi 1 hii
i
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 64 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
Deviance residuals
The i th deviance residual is:
riD sign Yi i d Yi ; i
where:
Yi
Yi
di 2i V d
i
Residuals should be small and have mean 0.
Cook’s distance
Cook’s distance may also be used as a measure of the influence of a data point on the model
results. Cook’s distance for the i th data point is given by:
hii 2
ciP riP
1 hii hii
i
Points with a Cook’s distance of 1 or more are considered to merit closer examination in the
model analysis.
Model refinement
Interactions can be included in a model. These may be complete or marginal.
Offsets can be used to constrain or fix certain elements of a model in such a way that the
fitted relativities for the other factors adjust to compensate.
Aliasing occurs within GLMs. Intrinsic aliasing occurs because of dependencies inherent
within the definition of the covariates. This is dealt with by modelling software. Extrinsic
aliasing occurs when two or more factors contain levels that are perfectly correlated. ‘Near’
aliasing occurs when this correlation is almost, but not quite, perfect.
A GLM can be improved by smoothing the parameter values. This can be achieved by
grouping levels of factors or by fitting curves to the values.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 65
Chapter 16 Practice Questions
16.1 A generalised linear model has design matrix:
1 0 0
1 0 1
X
0 1 0
0 1 1
and hat matrix:
3 1 1 1
3 1 1
1 1
H
4 1 1 3 1
1 1 1 3
Given that r1P 0.9 , calculate Cook’s distance for the first data point.
16.2 Show that the Poisson distribution belongs to the exponential family.
16.3 You are trying to model the claim rates for car insurance policies using a GLM. You have fitted the
following GLMs to a particular data set of 40 drivers, and have calculated the scaled deviances
given below:
Model Linear predictor Scaled deviance
A i 80.95
for i 1,2,...,20
B i 74.38
for i 21,22,...,40
C i i 55.07
Explain these models and assess whether or not:
(a) Model B is a significant improvement over Model A
(b) Model C is a significant improvement over Model B.
16.4 For two nested GLMs, you are given only the following information:
Model Deviance Degrees of freedom
1 360.6 50
2 225.8 40
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 66 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
Assess whether or not Model 2 is a significant improvement over Model 1, using a 5% significance
level.
You are using generalised linear models (GLMs) to help set the premium rates for a book of motor
business. You mentioned to a colleague that the model might be better if it included some
interaction terms. He has never heard of these before and is interested to find out more.
16.5 (i) Define an interaction term. [1]
Exam style
For a particular multiplicative GLM, we believe there is an interaction between two factors, each
with three levels. Factor 1 can take values A, B and C, while Factor 2 can take values X, Y and Z.
(ii) Explain, using a numerical example, the difference between a complete interaction and a
marginal interaction for these two factors. [7]
(iii) Explain why you would want to check consistency of the model over time and describe
how you would use interactions to do this. [5]
[Total 13]
16.6 (i) Define, using formulae where necessary, the total deviance and the scaled deviance in the
Exam style
context of a generalised linear model. [5]
(ii) Define each of the following tests for significance and state the circumstances in which
each might be used:
(a) chi-squared statistic
(b) F-statistic
(c) Akaike Information Criteria (AIC). [7]
[Total 12]
16.7 You work for a large general insurance company and specialise in generalised linear models
Exam style
(GLMs). A non-actuarial colleague in the pricing department has overheard you talking about
residuals and is interested to learn a bit more about them.
(i) Describe the following measures that can be used to check that a GLM is appropriate for
the data given. You are not required to produce mathematical formulae.
(a) Deviance residuals
(b) Pearson residuals [4]
You have plotted the deviance residuals from your model, to check that the error structure is
appropriate.
(ii) Explain how you will determine from the residual plot whether or not your model is likely
to be a good fit. [4]
[Total 8]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 67
Chapter 16 Solutions
16.1 Cook’s distance for the first data point is:
h11 2 3
c1P r1P 4 0.92 0.81 .
44 4
4 1 3
1 h11 hii
i 1
16.2 The probability function of the Poisson distribution (with mean ) is:
y e
P Y y .
y!
Hence:
P Y k exp k ln( ) ln k! .
Now replace y with yi , and let i ln .
Then:
P(Y yi ) expyii ln yi !
or equivalently:
P Y yi exp yii ei ln yi ! .
This is of the form:
y b(i )
exp i i c(yi , )
ai ( )
where:
ai ( ) 1
b(i ) ei
c(yi , ) ln yi !.
16.3 Model A assumes that the claim rate is the same for each observation because the linear
predictor i is always equal to .
Model B assumes that Drivers 1 to 20 have the same claim rate and that Drivers 21 to 40 have the
same claim rate.
Model C assumes that each driver claims at a different rate.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 68 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
The models are nested (because one is a subset of the other) and the scaled deviances are given
(ie the scale parameter is known) so we can use a 2 test.
We will use a 5% significance level in the tests below.
The difference in the scaled deviance between Model A and Model B is 6.57. Model A has 1
parameter and Model B has 2. So we compare the difference in the scaled deviance with 12 .
From page 169 of the Tables, the upper 5% point of 12 is 3.841. Since 6.57 3.841 , we conclude
that Model B is a significant improvement over Model A.
The difference in the scaled deviance between Model B and Model C is 19.31. Model B has 2
parameters and Model C has 40. So we compare the difference in the scaled deviance with 38
2
.
From page 169 of the Tables, the upper 5% point of 38
2
is 53.38. Since 19.31 53.38 , we
conclude that Model C is not a significant improvement over Model B.
16.4 The two models are nested but only the deviance is given, so the scale parameter is not known.
We must therefore compare deviances using the F-statistic.
We compare:
D1 D2
360.6 225.8 2.388
df1 df2 D2 / df2 50 40 225.8 / 40
with Fdf1 df2 ,df2 F10,40 .
From page 172 of the Tables, the upper 5% point of F10,40 is 2.077. So we conclude that Model 2
is a significant improvement over Model 1 (at the 5% significance level).
16.5 (i) Definition
An interaction exists when the effect of one factor varies, depending on the levels of another
factor. [½]
Interactions would be used where the pattern in the response variable (eg frequency or severity)
is better modelled by including extra parameters for each combination of two of more factors. [½]
[Total 1]
(ii) Complete and marginal interactions
Complete and marginal interactions are alternative representations of the same thing. [½]
A complete interaction is expressed as a single factor that represents every combination of the
factors involved. [1]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 69
For example, for the two factors given, we would have a new single factor, representing the
interaction, which would have nine levels, ie:
AX, AY, AZ, BX, BY, BZ, CX, CY, CZ. [1]
Each of these levels would have a multiplier attached (since this is a multiplicative model). These
could be written in the form of either a one-way or a two-way table. For example:
Factor 1: A B C
Factor 2: X 0.90 1.00 1.10
Y 0.97 1.20 1.45
Z 1.26 1.40 1.85
[1]
In this case, the base level has been selected to be the level corresponding to Level B of Factor 1
and Level X of Factor 2, and the interaction term has 8 parameters. [1]
A marginal interaction considers the additional effect of the interaction term over and above the
single factor effects. [1]
In this case, the single factor effects will be observed separately from the marginal interaction
term effects. [½]
Using the same example as above, the multipliers would look as follows:
Factor 1: A B C
0.90 - 1.10
Factor 2: X - - - -
Y 1.20 0.90 - 1.10
Z 1.40 1.00 - 1.20
[2]
So the overall relativity for Factor 1 Level A and Factor 2 Level Y would be 0.90 1.20 0.90 0.97
and this agrees with the figure given in the table of complete interactions.
0.97
We would therefore calculate this marginal interaction as 0.90 .
1.20 0.90
[Maximum 7]
(iii) Consistency over time
When pricing, it is important to check that the patterns of relativities observed in a GLM are not
changing too much over time. [½]
If a trend emerges over time then it is important to identify it, so that we can project the patterns
to the period over which the rates will apply. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 70 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
The time consistency check is also used to determine whether the effect of each factor is
consistent from year to year. If a factor is consistent then it is likely to be a good predictor of
future experience. [1]
To test the consistency of parameter estimates over time, we can fit a GLM that includes the
interaction of a single factor with a measure of time, eg a calendar year. [1]
Ideally we would do this for every factor in the model and would test the interaction for statistical
significance. [½]
We would also look at graphs of the interaction results to see what patterns are being
produced. [½]
These graphs would plot the response variable (eg frequency or severity) by the factor of interest,
with different lines on the graph representing different time periods. [1]
If an interaction with time proves to be significant then this suggests that the pattern observed for
that factor does change over time. We would need to interpret these results carefully in order to
estimate the relativities that will be suitable for future years. [1]
[Maximum 5]
16.6 (i) Deviance and scaled deviance
The deviance compares the observed value for each observation Yi , to the fitted value i , with
allowance for weights i … [1]
… and with higher importance assigned to errors where the variance should be small. [½]
Each observation’s contribution to the deviance is defined as:
d Yi ; i 2i
Yi
Yi
V d . [1½]
i
The sum of the contributions to deviance, over all observations, is the total deviance for a
model. [½]
The total deviance is defined as:
n
D d Yi ; i . [½]
i 1
The scaled deviance is the model deviance adjusted by the scale parameter . [½]
This standardises the deviance so that it can be used when comparing different models. [½]
D
In formula terms, D* , where D is the scaled deviance. [½]
[Maximum 5]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling Page 71
(ii) Significance test definitions
(a) Chi-squared statistic
Chi-squared statistics can be used for comparing two models that are nested (ie where one is a
subset of the other) and where the scale parameter is known. [½]
A 2 test is applied to the change in scaled deviance between the two models:
D1* D2* ~ df
2
1 df2
[1]
where df is the number of degrees of freedom, defined as the number of observations minus the
number of parameters. [½]
(b) F-statistic
F-tests are used in cases where we want to compare two nested models but where the scale
parameter is not known, ie where we have the deviance but not the scaled deviance. [1]
The estimator of the scale parameter is distributed as a 2 distribution, with the F-distribution
being the ratio of two 2 random variables as follows: [½]
D1 D2 ~F [1]
df1 df2 D2 / df2 df1 df2 ,df2
(c) Akaike Information Criteria (AIC)
The AIC is also used to compare which of two models is a better fit. However, unlike the above
two tests, the AIC can be used when the two models are not nested. [1]
The AIC for a model is calculated as:
AIC 2 log-likelihood 2 number of parameters . [1]
It considers the trade-off between the likelihood of the model and the number of parameters. [½]
[Total 7]
16.7 (i) Residuals
Deviance residuals
A deviance residual, for a given observation, is a measure of the difference between the observed
value and the value fitted by the model. [½]
The deviance residual considers the square root of each observation’s contribution to the
deviance, adjusted for the direction in which the raw residual (the difference between the
observed value and the fitted value) acts. [1]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 72 SP8-16: Generalised linear modelling
The deviance measure corrects for the skewness of the distributions used, meaning that we
would expect the deviance residuals to be more closely normally distributed than the raw
residuals. [1]
Pearson residuals
A Pearson residual, for an individual observation, is the difference between the observed value
and the fitted value (ie the raw residual), scaled by the standard deviation of the predicted
value. [1]
This measure does not adjust for the shape of the distribution. [½]
[Total 4]
(ii) Residual plot
The residual plot could be a scatter plot of deviance residuals against the fitted values [½]
If the chosen error structure is appropriate for the data and response variable that we are
modelling, the residual plot will have the following characteristics:
the average residual will be zero, so there should be an equal number of points above
zero and below zero on the graph [1]
the pattern of residuals will be symmetrical about the x-axis [1]
the range of residual values will be fairly constant across the width (the x-axis) of the
fitted values. [1]
A residual plot where the range of residuals narrows or widens as the fitted value increases, or
where the range of residuals is not symmetrical about the x-axis, indicates that the model
specification is poor. [1]
[Maximum 4]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 1
Use of multivariate models
in pricing
Syllabus objectives
3.8 Understand generalised linear models and multivariate modelling.
3.8.1 Assess the applications of generalised linear models to the rating of personal
lines business and small commercial risks.
3.8.2 Evaluate the uses of multivariate models in pricing.
3.8.3 Outline the different types of multivariate models.
Covered in part in this chapter.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
0 Introduction
This chapter complements Chapter 16, looking further into the use of multivariate models in
pricing.
Section 1 concerns risk and rating factors. It explains in broad terms:
how typical risk and rating factors affect claims experience for UK motor and household
insurance, and why
the categories of external data available to insurers, which may provide further
information on individual risks, and how such external rating factors affect claims
experience for UK motor and household insurance.
Section 2 considers types of multivariate and classification models. It describes in broad terms
possible multivariate models that could be used, including generalised linear models
possible approaches to classification, including:
– spatial smoothing methods
– vehicle classification techniques.
Section 3 discusses forms of models. It describes typical forms for modelling:
claim frequency
claim numbers
average claim amounts
total claim cost
propensity.
Section 4 describes initial analyses typically performed prior to multivariate modelling, explaining
the purpose of each, including:
one-way analyses
two-way analyses
correlation analyses
distribution analyses.
Section 5 explains which claim types are typically modelled for UK motor and household insurance
and why.
Section 6 discusses model combining.
Section 7 describes methods of model validation. Information on model validation can be found
in in Appendix D of the GRIP report, in paragraphs 46 to 52, although all of this information is
repeated in Section 7. The GRIP (General insurance premium Rating Issues working Party) report
is available from the Actuarial Profession’s website, www.actuaries.org.uk.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 3
Section 8 concerns implementation. Once the theoretical rates have been produced, they need to
be compared with the current rates and, if possible, with competitors’ rates. There are various
graphical representations that can help with this, including:
plotting the results of the GLM, existing relativities and competitor relativities
simultaneously
showing the overall effect of all factors combined using graphs showing the distribution of
the ratio of fitted values (see Appendix D, paragraphs 172 to 185, of the GRIP report).
The interested student might like to read the GRIP paper – it is a long paper but fairly easy to
read, and full of information on various methods used in pricing of both insurance (personal lines
and commercial lines) and reinsurance.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
1 Risk and rating factors
In this section we describe the data that may be available when pricing a UK motor or home
insurance policy.
1.1 Motor insurance
A motor insurer might typically seek the following information when preparing a quote:
Information on the policy and coverage, eg
– type of cover (such as comprehensive or third party, fire and theft)
– payment frequency (such as monthly or annual)
– voluntary excess.
Details of the proposer, eg
– age
– gender
– marital status
– occupation.
Details of each driver, eg
– driver experience
– driver restrictions
– age
– relationship (to the proposer).
Details of the vehicle and its use, eg
– registration number
– make / model
– parking location.
Question
Explain why it might be better to record the date of birth for each driver rather than their age.
Solution
A driver’s age will be as at a particular point in time – often the renewal date.
If we record date of birth instead, we will have much more flexibility as we can calculate the age
as at any date we want.
For example, we would need the date of birth if we wanted to sell monthly renewable policies in
the future. Also, if we wanted to use the data to assess the mix of business at a fixed point in
time (eg to perform an impact analysis) then we might want to use the age as at that date rather
than as at the previous renewal date.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 5
There are a number of factors that will ultimately affect the actual claims cost of providing
the insurance coverage. For example, some of the risk factors are:
drivers
– their driving style, experience, level of skill, powers of observation, attitude
to risk, ability to predict road hazards
vehicle
– the value of the vehicle / repair costs if it should be damaged
– safety features available to protect passengers (airbags, etc), and to improve
car control (ABS, traction control, etc)
ABS stands for Anti-lock Braking System. Such systems are designed to prevent vehicles
skidding when braking. Traction control systems are designed to prevent vehicles
skidding when accelerating.
– security features (to prevent theft)
– performance, speed, size, weight
environment
– the road environment where the car is used
– type of road
– the time (of day) and hence level of congestion / pedestrian risks
– natural hazards (rain, sun, ice, flooding, wind)
exposure
– the amount of driving (number of miles / minutes) incurred in each policy
period
third parties the other people driving in the vicinity of the insured, who may well
become involved in an accident or even prevent an accident, including their level of
skill.
Most of the questions asked at the point of sale do not directly measure the genuine risk
factors from this second list. This is because many of those factors cannot readily be
quantified, or they change over time (or even real-time, ie continuously), and certainly cannot
be defined by the customer at the point of sale.
For example, if you asked a prospective policyholder to rate their level of driving ability, the
chances are that they would rate themselves as excellent. This is clearly very subjective and
cannot be accurately defined by the (biased) driver, and so cannot be used as a basis for pricing
the risk. Instead, we would have to use the questions asked at the point of sale to give us an idea
of the level of risk because these are more objective.
The cost of claims is, therefore, predicted using point of sale questions that act as proxies
for unknown genuine risk factors.
Question
Insurers sometimes ask about the number of children under 16 that a proposer has. Explain why
this information might be useful for rating.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
Solution
The number of children under 16 might help in assessing the level of risk.
For example, people with children might tend to drive more carefully when their children are in
the car. Alternatively, the children might cause the driver to be distracted from the road, thereby
leading to a higher number of accidents.
In addition, if an accident does occur with children in the car, this could increase the amounts
relating to third party bodily injury claims.
The effectiveness of such proxy rating factors depends upon:
how directly the factor measures a genuine risk factor
(‘Vehicle value’ is a good example of this since, although the customer will probably
disclose the value they paid for the vehicle, it (a claim) will directly relate to the
residual value of the vehicle at the time of the accident or theft.)
Vehicle value would need to be updated at every renewal; otherwise it could become very
out of date and be of little use in rating. There will be an element of subjectivity involved,
since policyholders are likely to think their vehicle is worth more than it actually is.
if the proxy is a factual quantity that is known to the proposer
(‘Postcode’ is an example of a well-defined fact with good granularity.
In the UK, postcode defines the location to around 15 houses: this can be used to
look up a rating area and as a key for linking external data.)
‘Granularity’ refers to the level of detail involved. The more granularity there is, the
greater the level of detail (ie the information is broken down into a larger number of
‘grains’).
whether the factor has an obvious direction, which the proposer may be tempted to
mis-state to obtain a cheaper quote
(‘Estimated annual mileage’ will often be under-reported by the proposer compared
to the actual annual mileage, since it is clear that this is likely to decrease the price.)
If every proposer underestimated their annual mileage by, say, 2,000 miles then this
would not be a problem as the relative difference between groups of policyholders would
be the same. However, if some did this to a greater or lesser extent than others then it
could cause some inaccuracy when setting premium rates.
the extent to which the proxy overlaps with other existing factors.
(‘Age of licence’ is clearly strongly correlated with ‘age of driver’ and ‘no claims
discount’ for drivers aged 17 to 22, so its value is diluted by these overlaps and it
only has significant value when identifying novice drivers in older age.)
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 7
1.2 Home insurance
There are two broad types of cover for home insurance: buildings and contents. While customers
are likely to be asked the same types of questions for both types of insurance, the rating will
generally be done separately because different factors drive the claims experience for each type
of cover.
A typical list of questions requested by a home (buildings and contents) insurer at the point
of sale is as follows:
policy
– date on risk
– number of adults / children in household and whether they are family
– number of claims (buildings / contents)
– type of cover (buildings and/or contents)
– accidental damage cover (buildings / contents)
– excess (buildings / contents)
– special items cover, garage / freezer / garden / away from home cover
proposer
– age (date of birth)
– gender
– marital status
– smoker / non-smoker
– employment status (eg employed / self-employed / unemployed / retired, part-
time / full-time)
– length of residence in UK
– ever refused insurance?
– convictions / bankruptcy
house details
– purchase year
– type of property (detached / semi / bungalow), own front door
– listed building status
– state of repair
– occupied during day / night
– is property for sale?
– age of property (year built)
– construction type (eg timber-framed / brick / solid wall / thatched roof)
– number of bedrooms / other rooms
– rating area (postcode)
– ownership (owned / mortgaged / rented)
– property rebuild value (sum insured)
– contents value (sum insured)
– alarm / neighbourhood watch / smoke detector
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
– business use
– flood / subsidence experience
– trees near house
– door / window / patio lock types.
For household policies, a wide range of different perils is covered by the standard policy.
These include fire, storm, flood, subsidence, theft and, if purchased, accidental damage.
These factors (ie the questions asked) usually relate to the claims experience as follows:
Some of the questions at the point of sale relate to particular perils, for example:
– smoker / non-smoker is related to the fire peril because many house fires are
caused by the householder’s own cigarettes
– construction type identifies thatched cottages, which are particularly
vulnerable to fire damage
– the presence of an alarm or neighbourhood watch programme has an impact
on theft experience.
Questions relate to the risk exposure for various perils, for example:
– number of children
– number of bedrooms
– sum insured.
Sum insured is the generally-accepted exposure measure for home insurance, where, for
buildings cover, this relates to the rebuild cost of the property and for contents cover, to
the value of the contents. However, many policyholders do not know the rebuild value of
their house (which will generally be very different to the market value), and so some
insurers now use the number of rooms or bedrooms as a proxy for the sum insured to
make the application for insurance easier for their customers.
A significant feature of home insurance is the element of discretion involved in the
claim. Many customers either do not realise that they could claim for a particular
event, or decide that the amount is too small to be worth the effort. Employment
status, number of prior claims and postcode act as significant proxies for this
behaviour.
Many home insurance policies have followed the lead of motor insurance and now offer
NCD for customers who have had no claims in the last few years. The discounts are
generally quite a lot smaller than for motor, but are often sufficient to deter policyholders
from making small claims.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 9
1.3 External data
Motor and home insurance are extremely competitive classes of business in the UK and insurers
are constantly trying to find additional factors that will help them to further refine their
assessment of each individual risk. Rather than restricting themselves to the data available within
the policy and claim records, insurers are increasingly testing and using rating factors that
originate from external data.
In addition to the factors requested at the point of sale, many other factors from other data
sources can be used to predict claims experience. To attach external data to assist in a
modelling exercise the source data needs to include linking fields against which the
external data can be referenced. These are typically:
person (identity of customer: name / address / date of birth)
location (full address-point / postcode)
insured asset (for motor insurance this could be registration number,
or make / model code, as issued by the ABI in the UK).
Then for each of these, various external data can be added. Note: this process can also
include data external to the point of sale questions but internal to the company itself.
Examples of external data
Examples include:
proposer:
– previous insurance company and claims experience
– other cross-product holdings
For example, a customer asking for a car insurance quote from an insurer may
already have household insurance with that insurer. Information already held in
respect of their household policy (eg claims experience) may be useful for
determining the appropriate car insurance premium.
– customer lifetime value models
Customer lifetime value models consider how profitable a customer will be over
the entire period that they are expected to stay with an insurer. A customer who
is only likely to stay with the insurer for one year may be charged a higher
premium initially, to reflect the fact that this is likely to be the only opportunity to
make a profit (and recuperate fixed expenses) on that policy. Conversely, a
customer who is likely to be loyal to the company for many years may be charged
a lower premium – profits each year will be lower, but with the expectation that
these profits will arise for many years to come.
– customer behaviour models
Customer behaviour models attempt to understand what drives each type of
customer to buy and then renew their insurance. For example, some customers
are very price-elastic and will be attracted to the policy with the lowest price,
while others will be price-inelastic and may consider factors other than price (such
as convenience and customer service) to be more important.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
– credit score / customer insurance score
location (full address-point / postcode):
– average wealth data / socio-economic categories
– subsidence / geological soil type data (for household)
– flood data (for household)
– theft survey data
– census data / electoral roll
The census data for the UK is updated every ten years and includes many data
fields, grouped by full postcode, including the age structure of the residents,
employment and occupation information, type and size of accommodation,
amenities and household composition.
– household valuation data
insured asset for motor (ie data on the car itself):
– data from insurers’ trade body, for example ABI in the UK (car group, engine
capacity, number of seats, body shape, gearbox, fuel)
– data from motor registration / licensing authority, for example the DVLA in
the UK (ownership length, number of keepers, actual mileage)
– additional vehicle data (make / model attributes, residual value)
– data from inter-industry agreement to share claims and underwriting
information, for example CUE in the UK (data that relates to prior claims).
CUE stands for the Claims and Underwriting Exchange. It is a central database of
motor, home and personal injury / industrial illness incidents that have been
reported to insurance companies, whether or not they gave rise to a claim. The
aim of CUE is to prevent fraudulent activity either where multiple claims are made
(in the hope of receiving payment for the same thing many times over) or where
previous claims have not been disclosed.
How the external data relates to the claims experience
Some of the external data will potentially be relevant to the whole risk, while other data will
relate only to very specific parts of the claims experience.
The factors relate to the claims experience in the following ways:
Questions that relate to particular perils:
– flood data (for household) provides height data, flood defence data, and prior
flood experience in the area: these relate directly to the flood peril itself
– theft survey data, although often sparse, and then modelled to smooth
across a wider set of areas than originally collected: this data can provide
significant uplift for the theft peril
– data from insurers’ trade body (for example, ABI in the UK) is a relevant
indicator of performance and repair costs.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 11
Questions that relate to the risk exposure for various perils:
– household valuation data may help amend the customer’s own estimate of
the sum insured, particularly if rebuild value is required rather than current
market value, which the customer will tend to provide
– the national vehicle licensing body may collect actual mileage data.
Questions that relate to customer discretionary behaviour:
– wealth, prior claims, cross-product.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
2 Types of multivariate and classification models
2.1 Multivariate models GLM
This is the most common method used today to model personal lines insurance data to
assess claims costs. (See Chapter 16 for further details).
Often the link function g () is chosen as the log function, as this creates the form:
k k
X ij j
Yi exp
j 1
X ij j i
e i .
j 1
and results in a multiplicative relationship between the factors.
k
Remember that the linear predictor i X ij j is related to i E (Yi ) via the relationship:
j 1
i g i .
So if g i log i , it follows that:
k k X
E Yi exp i exp Xij j e ij j .
j 1 j 1
This form is convenient because the effects of different factors can simply be multiplied together
(as you can see from the last term in the equation above).
2.2 Approaches to classification
Classification refers to the grouping of levels of factors. There will be many possible ways in
which the levels of a particular factor can be grouped, and some groupings will produce better
results than others. Where a factor has a very large number of levels (eg postcode in the UK), it is
likely that there will not be enough data in every single one of these levels to enable the grouping
to be done based only on an analysis of past experience. Here we consider other methods that
can be used to help with the accuracy of such a classification.
Spatial smoothing methods
Spatial means ‘relating to space’. The underlying assumption for spatial smoothing is that
physically close areas are likely to have similar experience.
GLM models can be used effectively for factors where the number of levels is small (say,
100 or less), or where the level forms a naturally continuous variable that can be fitted as a
function (say, a polynomial or a set of polynomial splines).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 13
For a factor such as postcode where there are many levels (in the UK, the full postcode has
1.7 million), an alternative approach such as spatial smoothing is required. This allows the
model to fit many values to the postcode factor, and then removes the noise from these
predictions by adjusting the relativity to take into account neighbouring values.
The noise is just the random element of the past experience, which we do not want to project into
the future.
This improves the predicted values by taking into account the credibility (or lack of) for the
response in a single location.
There are different ways in which we can take account of neighbouring values.
Two main forms of spatial smoothing are typically employed:
distance-based smoothing
adjacency-based smoothing.
The features of each form of smoothing make it more or less appropriate to use depending
on the underlying processes behind the loss types being modelled.
Distance-based smoothing
Distance-based smoothing incorporates information about nearby location codes based on
the distance between the location codes: the further away a location code, the less
influence (or weight) is given to its experience.
So the past claims experience of an area 50 miles away from the area we are interested in will be
given less weight than that of an area only 10 miles away.
This is true regardless of whether an area is urban or rural, and whether natural or artificial
boundaries (such as rivers) exist between location codes.
If there is a wide river between two areas, with no bridge access to link those areas, then it would
not necessarily be appropriate to link these areas when considering the theft risk in each. Even
though the areas are physically close to each other, their relative theft experience could be very
different, and so we would not want to use the experience of one to influence the other.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
Urban postcodes tend to have smaller geographical areas than rural ones. Therefore, for any
urban postcode, it is more likely that there will be a greater number of other postcodes that are
close in terms of physical distance. Using this method might therefore influence the urban
experience for a single postcode more than we might want.
As such, distance-based smoothing methods are often employed for weather-related perils
where there is less danger of over- or under-smoothing urban and rural areas.
Distance-based smoothing methods have the advantage of being easy to understand and
easy to implement, as no distributional assumptions are required in the algorithm.
Distance-based methods can also be enhanced by amending the distance metric to include
‘dimensions’ other than latitude and longitude. For example, including urban density in the
distance metric would allow urban areas to be more influenced by experience in nearby
urban areas than by nearby rural areas, which may be appropriate.
Adjacency-based smoothing
Adjacency-based smoothing incorporates information about directly neighbouring location
codes. Each location code is influenced by its direct neighbours, each of which is in turn
influenced by its direct neighbours; distributional assumptions or prior knowledge of the
claims processes can be incorporated in the technique. The algorithms are therefore
iterative and complex to implement.
As this smoothing method relies on defining which location codes neighbour each other,
natural or artificial boundaries (eg rivers or motorways) can be reflected in the smoothing
process.
Location codes tend to be smaller in urban regions and larger in rural areas, so adjacency-
based smoothing can sometimes handle urban and rural differences more appropriately for
non-weather-related perils.
It is very rare for a very urban postcode to be adjacent to a very rural postcode and so, using this
method, postcodes will be influenced primarily by other postcodes that are similar to them in
terms of risk. Compare this with the distance-based methods where an urban postcode would be
more likely to be influenced by a rural postcode.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 15
Degree of smoothing
Employing too low a level of spatial smoothing would mean that near or neighbouring
location codes have little influence on the location code in question. This can result in
some of the random noise element being captured together with the true underlying
residual variation. This causes distortions and reduces the predictiveness of the model.
Conversely, employing too high a level of spatial smoothing can result in the blurring of
experience so that some of the true underlying residual variation is lost, again causing
distortions.
Appropriate diagnostics (eg based on residual analyses) should therefore be used to assess
the level of smoothing required.
Vehicle classification techniques
Vehicle classification may be an important input to multivariate analysis. We describe the
UK system as one example.
The current system of vehicle grouping devised by the ABI has been around in various
forms for many years. It classifies vehicles into one of 50 groups based on similarity of
characteristics. The grouping of a particular vehicle is decided by a board who meet once a
month to consider newly registered vehicles.
The factors used to establish the groupings are:
damage and parts costs
repair times
new car values
body shells
performance
car security.
Some of the factors used to establish the groupings will consider the likelihood of an incident
(eg accident, theft) happening, while others look at the cost of repairing or replacing a vehicle
given that an incident has occurred. So there are both frequency and severity considerations built
in to the assessment.
These groupings can provide a useful indication of the likely relative cost of insurance when
comparing one vehicle with another. However, insurers are not required to follow the ratings
when setting premiums.
Many insurers assess the effect of vehicle on risk by using the ABI vehicle group as a
starting basis for categorising vehicles, and then using additional adjustments (either via
additional factors or via adjustments to the categorisation) based on their own claims
experience.
An insurer that has a lot of past data relating to a particular make of car (perhaps because they
underwrite an affinity scheme for a major car manufacturer) might be able to refine the ABI
vehicle groups to make them more relevant to their expected future claims experience.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
Question
List some additional vehicle-related factors that could be used to adjust the ABI vehicle grouping
for a particular make and model of car.
Solution
security features (alarm / immobiliser / tracker)
safety features (eg airbags)
engine size (cc)
top speed
acceleration
weight of car
fuel type
number of doors
body type (eg cabriolet, estate, 4x4, hot hatch)
transmission type (manual or automatic)
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 17
3 Forms of models
To build a model that accurately describes the response data, the process for generating
the response should be considered.
For a claims process there are likely to be several claim types or perils that may cause a
claim, and the factors appropriate to each will differ.
In addition, there may be benefit in considering the claim event itself (frequency) separately
from the resulting size of claim. This is because different factors affect these two things in
different ways, and the large variability in the size of claim may mask some of the patterns
that could otherwise be identified accurately by modelling frequency in isolation.
It is very common when using GLMs or other multivariate models to analyse frequency separately
to severity.
3.1 Claim frequency
By considering claim frequency in isolation from the claim size, the claim number may be
well modelled by a Poisson process. A log link function is normally used since this results
in a multiplicative model structure of factors, and these have been confirmed in practice as
being the best reflection of the relationship between the variables.
Consider, for example, the motor collision peril. One factor in the model will be the age of
driver, as younger drivers with less experience tend to have more claims. Another factor
will be vehicle group (or a measure of vehicle performance): a high performance vehicle will
probably generate more claims.
Intuitively, one would expect that the effect of putting the inexperienced driver in the high
performance vehicle compounds both these effects in a multiplicative fashion, and the
multiplicative effect of these and other factors can be demonstrated empirically by
comparing the predictiveness of differing model forms (in particular by using the ‘Box-Cox’
link function).
In this example, we expect a multiplicative effect when we combine these two factors, rather than
an additive effect, and this is why a model with a log link is the most appropriate.
In fact, in practice, the combination of an inexperienced driver and a high performance vehicle is
likely to present an even higher risk than that suggested by multiplying these two factor
relativities together, and so we might also need to include an interaction factor. This would also
act in a multiplicative manner.
Therefore, the typical form is a Poisson error function with a log link. The length of time the
policy has been on risk acts as the exposure and becomes the weights within the model.
No offset is required, although one can be used if, for example, the NCD levels are fixed by
the policy wording. The scale parameter can be assumed equal to one, or can be fitted.
Weights, offsets and scale parameters were all covered in more detail in Chapter 16.
Alternatively, the number of claims can be the y-variate, with each exposure observation
having a weight of one, and with the log of the exposure being the offset term. In the
particular case of the Poisson multiplicative model, this model form is identical.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
3.2 Claim severity
Having modelled the claims frequencies in the model, another model is now needed to
predict the claim size given a claim. Typically claim amounts are modelled with a Gamma
error term, and, for the same reason as claim frequencies, with a log link function, which
assumes that factors have a multiplicative effect on risk.
Because the Gamma distribution does not allow zero responses, zero-sized claims are
normally removed from both the frequency and claims size models, and sometimes the
frequency of such claims is modelled as a separate claim type for the purposes of
attributing an element of expenses to the risk premium at a later stage.
The non-zero claim numbers act as the weights for this model.
The nil claims will normally be removed from the data prior to it being loaded into the modelling
software. The overall claims amounts will be the same as if the nil claims hadn’t been removed,
but the balance between the frequency and the severity data will be different. If nil claims are
removed then the frequency will appear lower but the average claims cost will be higher. The
important thing to remember is that the treatment of nil claims must be consistent between the
frequency and severity data.
3.3 Propensity
The word propensity means a tendency towards a particular way of behaving. In insurance, we
would talk about, for example, the propensity for policyholders to renew their policies or the
propensity for policyholders to make a claim.
Propensity to claim is binary in nature and is modelled using a binomial error distribution.
With a binary response, there will only be two possible outcomes. So, in the case of a claim, an
individual policyholder either claims on their policy or they don’t. There can be no in-between.
A multiplicative model is usually used for similar reasons to frequency and severity.
However, because a prediction in the range [0,1] is required rather than 0, , the logit link
function is used, and
e X.β
1 e X.β
returns a value in the range 0,1 .
(The logit function is a combination of logit link and binomial error, commonly referred to as
a logistic model.)
The logit function is defined by the equation:
p
logit(p) log log p log 1 p
1p
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 19
So using the logit link function means:
i logit i
and:
ei
i
1 ei
Question
ei
Show that if i logit i , then i .
1 ei
Solution
If:
i
i logit(i ) log
1 i
then:
i
ei
1 i
Multiplying by 1 i gives:
i ei ei i
Hence:
i 1 ei ei
and:
ei
i
1 ei
Similar binary response variables include policy renewal or quoted policy acceptance.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
A summary of typical model forms is set out in the table below.
Error Link Scale Variance Weights Offset
Model distribution function parameter function i i
V
Claim Poisson ln y 1 Exposure 0
frequency
Claim Poisson ln y 1 1 ln Exposure
numbers
Claim Gamma ln y Estimated 2 Claim 0
severity numbers
Total Tweedie ln y Estimated 1.5 Exposure 0
claim cost
y
Propensity Binomial ln 1 1 1 0
1 y
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 21
4 Initial analyses
This section describes typical initial analyses, which are typically performed prior to multivariate
modelling. These include:
one-way analyses
two-way analyses
correlation analyses
distribution analyses.
Although GLMs are a multivariate method, there is generally benefit in reviewing some one-
way and two-way analyses of the raw data prior to multivariate modelling.
4.1 One-way analyses
Firstly, the one-way distribution of exposure and claims across levels of each raw variable
will indicate whether a variable contains enough information to be included in any models.
(For example, if 99.5% of a variable’s exposures are in one level, it may not be suitable for
modelling.)
Similarly, if there is a high proportion of policies with an unknown level of a factor then we may
decide (depending on what the factor is) that it will be of limited use for modelling.
Secondly, assuming there is some viable distribution by levels of the factor, consideration
needs to be given to any individual levels containing very low exposure and claim count. If
these levels are not ultimately combined with other levels, the GLM maximum likelihood
algorithm may not converge. (If a factor level has zero claims and a multiplicative model is
being fitted, the theoretically correct multiplier for that level will be close to zero, and the
parameter estimate corresponding to the log of that multiplier may be so large and negative
that the numerical algorithm seeking the maximum likelihood will not converge.)
In this situation, we might choose to combine the low exposure levels with another level of the
same factor prior to loading the data into the modelling software. However, if we are not sure
how best to combine these levels, we could test models with different groupings within the
modelling software and choose the most appropriate at that stage.
In addition to investigating the exposure and claim distribution, a query of one-way
statistics (for example, frequency, severity, loss ratio and pure premium) will give a
preliminary indication of the effect of each factor.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
The graph below shows a one-way analysis of motor accident frequency for a factor that has 20
levels, which could relate to vehicle age. Younger (higher claiming) drivers tend to drive older
cars and therefore the one-way analysis is likely to overstate the true relativities for the older
cars. However, this analysis does at least give an idea of the pattern we might expect from the
GLM.
One Way Analysis
Accident Frequency
7%
6%
5%
Observed Value
4%
3%
2%
1%
0%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Factor 1
Exposure Observed Average
4.2 Two-way analyses
A two-way analysis considers key statistics summarised by each combination of a pair of
factors. It can be represented graphically with multiple lines and stacked exposure bars as
shown below.
In the graph below we have two rating factors. Factor 1 has four levels (shown as the
stacks in each bar) and factor 2 has seven levels (shown on the x-axis). The dashed lines
show the claims. There are four claims lines, corresponding to the four different levels of
factor 1. Hence we can see exposure and claims for each of the 4 x 7 = 28 combinations of
the two rating factors.
Two-way analyses can be particularly useful where we think there is some correlation between
levels of two factors. These might be used to help us gain a better understanding of our data
prior to performing a GLM.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 23
Two-Way Analysis
Accident Frequency
8% 400,000
350,000
7%
300,000
6%
250,000
Fitted Value
5% 200,000
150,000
4%
100,000
3%
50,000
2% 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Factor 2
Correlation analyses
Correlations occur when there is a relationship between the distribution of exposure between
levels of two or more factors.
Although not used directly in the GLM process, an understanding of the correlations within
a portfolio is helpful when interpreting the results of a GLM. In particular, it can explain why
the multivariate results for a particular factor differ from the univariate results, and can
indicate which factors may be affected by the removal or inclusion of any other factor in the
GLM.
Recall, from Chapter 16, that a categorical factor is a factor to be used for modelling where the
values of each level are distinct and often cannot be given any natural ordering or score.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
One commonly-used correlation statistic for categorical factors is Cramer’s V statistic,
which is defined as:
(nij eij )2
eij
i, j
min((a 1),(b 1)).n
where:
a number of levels of factor one
b number of levels of factor two
nij amount of the exposure measure for the i th level of factor one and j th level
of factor two
n nij
i j
nij nij
i j
eij
n
Note that eij represents the expected amount of exposure in the i th level of factor one and j th
level of factor two. Hence the term:
(nij eij )2
eij
i,j
in the numerator of Cramer’s V statistic is none other than the 2 test statistic.
Cramer’s V statistic takes values between 0 and 1. A value of 0 means that knowledge of
one of the two factors gives no knowledge of the value of the other. A value of 1 means that
knowledge of one of the factors allows the value of the other factor to be deduced.
Categorical variables do not have a mean so we cannot calculate a covariance between two
categorical variables. Instead, we measure the level of dependency between them by looking at
Cramer’s V statistic, a measure based on the number of risks in each cell of a frequency count
table. Two such tables are shown on the next page.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 25
The two tables below show possible two-way exposure distributions of two categorical
factors, each with only two levels, A and B, expressed as either rows or columns. The top
table shows a Cramer’s V statistic of 0, and the bottom table gives an example of a
Cramer’s V statistic of 1.
A B
A 100 100
B 100 100
A B
A 100 0
B 0 100
An example of the way in which this statistic can be considered for a range of factors is
shown in the table below.
Driving Vehicle
Convictions Experience Policyholder Rating Area Category Years
Factor (#Levels) Class of Use (3) (2) (5) Sex (2) (18) (20) Insured (12)
Class of Use (3) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Convictions (2) 0.026 0 0 0 0 0 0
Driving Experience (5) 0.105 0.098 0 0 0 0 0
Policyholder Sex (2) 0.04 -0.052 0.177 0 0 0 0
Rating Area (18) 0.029 0.023 0.041 0.027 0 0 0
Vehicle Category (20) 0.068 0.067 0.185 0.24 0.023 0 0
Years Insured (12) 0.033 0.047 0.124 0.032 0.015 0.026 0
Policyholder Age (42) 0.099 0.093 0.526 0.119 0.042 0.094 0.089
NCD (6) 0.078 0.017 0.264 0.104 0.03 0.145 0.165
Protected NCD (2) 0.065 0.025 0.516 0.082 0.077 0.205 0.119
Driving Restriction (5) 0.053 0.056 0.165 0.055 0.05 0.079 0.077
Vehicle Age (22) 0.068 0.038 0.029 0.037 0.024 0.05 0.035
Vehicle Value (15) 0.09 0.047 0.103 0.079 0.025 0.111 0.035
Voluntary Excess (5) 0.004 0.018 0.032 0.071 0.03 0.047 0.107
The entries within this table are the Cramer’s V statistics.
Question
Can you spot the error in the table above?
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
Solution
One of the figures is incorrectly shown as negative. Cramer’s V statistic cannot be negative, as
you can see by looking at the way it is defined.
Looking at the table, you can see that there is quite a high correlation between policyholder age
and driving experience, which we would expect given that younger drivers can only have a low
level of driving experience (measured as the number of years since they passed their driving test).
Conversely, there is only a small correlation between rating area and the number of years insured,
and indeed we wouldn’t expect drivers in different rating areas to be significantly different to
each other in terms of the length of time that insurance has been held for.
4.3 Distribution analyses
One helpful preliminary analysis is to consider the distribution of key data items for the
purpose of identifying any unusual features or data problems that should be investigated
prior to modelling. This primarily concerns the distribution of claim amounts (that is,
number of claim counts by average claim size), which are examined in order to identify
features such as unusually large claims and distortions resulting from average reserves
placed on newly reported claims.
This type of analysis can also highlight data problems or issues with the exposure data. For
example, if all the exposure for a particular factor has ended up in just one level of that factor
then it may be that there is an error in the code used to split that factor.
Understanding of the data is enhanced by investigating how the response distribution
varies by different levels of a factor.
So, if we have data for a claim frequency model, we would look closely at the distribution of
frequency by the different levels of each factor.
An example is shown below where the ‘50-54’ line represents middle-aged driver responses
and the ‘16-20’ young drivers. The ‘All’ line is the total of the dataset.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 27
Banded Range Frequency Plot
1.0%
0.9%
0.8%
0.7%
0.6%
Proportion
0.5%
0.4%
0.3%
0.2%
0.1%
0.0%
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
Response
All 16-20 50-54
The ‘16-20’ line is the slightly lighter line with its peak to the right of the other lines.
You will notice that the ‘All’ line (the darker line) in the graph above is the smoothest line because
it is based on a larger volume of data than the other two lines.
Distribution analyses can also highlight specific anomalies that might require addressing
prior to modelling. For example, if many new claims have a standard average reserve
allocated to them, it might be appropriate to adjust the amount of such an average reserve if
it was felt that the average level was systematically below or above the ultimate average
claims cost.
Remember that, for pricing, we want a best estimate of the outstanding claims amounts rather
than a prudent or standard average estimate, so that we can calculate future premiums that don’t
contain implicit margins. Distribution analyses can therefore act as a check that this is what we’ve
got.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
5 Claim type models
Different claim types can be affected by different rating factors in different ways, and,
therefore, (assuming appropriate volumes of data are available) a more accurate
assessment of risk can be constructed by modelling different claim types separately.
Modelling different claim types separately is also helpful when considering different
products that have different coverages corresponding to some of the claim types being
modelled. Typical claim types modelled in the UK for motor and household insurance are
given below:
Motor
Typical claim types are:
accidental damage
third party property damage
third party bodily injury
fire
theft
windscreen.
The low incidence of fire claims can lead to this claim type being combined with theft claims
for convenience.
If there is a sufficient quantity of data for credibility and the data is recorded, it might also be
possible to model theft of vehicles separately to theft from vehicles. Theft of vehicles is often
going to result in a total loss payment (if the vehicle is not recovered) and older cars, with lower
levels of security, will be more prone to this. Theft from vehicles will often result in much smaller
claim payments (depending on what is stolen and on any limits of cover) and this might happen
more equally across all ages of vehicle.
Bodily injury is increasing in importance as a proportion of the total losses. It has a long
term to settlement and a large variance in claims sizes. Hence this claim type is often
treated with special care, often separating out the largest claims or capping the claim
amount, and spreading these extra amounts in a more general way.
These extra claim amounts (above the cap) can be spread equally across all policies, perhaps as a
percentage loading, or alternatively we may want to target the loading towards those groups of
policyholders for whom the bodily injury claims tend to be the highest.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 29
Household (separately for buildings and contents sections)
This would include claims for the following:
accidental damage
fire
theft
burst pipes / escape of water
flood
storm
subsidence
personal possessions
liability.
Increasingly, insurers are starting to split the flood peril between coastal flood and river flood so
that they can model each separately.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
6 Model combining
Once we have analysed the frequency and severity effects for each different type of claim or peril,
we need to combine all these models together again if we want to calculate a total risk premium.
Fitting GLMs separately for frequency and severity experience can provide a better
understanding of the way in which factors affect the cost of claims. This facilitates the
identification and removal (via smoothing) of certain random effects from one element of
the experience. Ultimately, however, these underlying models generally need to be
combined to give an indication of loss cost – or ‘risk premium’ – relativities.
In the case of multiplicative models for a single claim type, the calculation is
straightforward. The frequency multipliers for each factor can simply be multiplied by the
severity multipliers for the same factors (which is analogous to adding the parameter
estimates when using a log link function).
So, given frequency and severity models for each claim type, it is very easy to calculate a
theoretical risk premium for any particular risk for each of those claim types. Then, for each claim
type separately, we could add on the relevant loadings (expenses, commission, profit, etc) to give
an office premium for each claim type. Adding across all the claim types covered by a particular
policy would give an overall office premium for the policy.
Note that this method may be computationally intensive at the point of sale because, for a class
of business with n claim types, the rating algorithm would need to go through n sets of frequency
and severity multipliers and add on the loadings n times in order to calculate an overall premium.
Certain market conditions may warrant the development of a single theoretical risk premium
model, even if different types of claim have been modelled separately. An example is the
aggregation of private motor models by peril into a single rating algorithm at point of sale.
Even if such an aggregation is not required, it can be helpful to understand the overall
multivariate effect that a factor has on the overall level of claims.
If we have a single theoretical risk premium model (ie a combination of all the component risk
premium models) then the point of sale rating algorithm becomes quicker and easier as it only
needs to go through the calculation once. It is also easier (usually) to quantify the loadings for
expenses etc at the overall policy level than at a claim type level.
However, there is more work to be done prior to the point of sale under this method, and this can
be complex.
The derivation of a single model in this situation is not as straightforward since there is no
direct way of combining the model results for the underlying claim types into a single
overall cost of claims model.
In this situation, however, it is possible to approximate the overall effect of rating factors on
the total cost of claims by using a further GLM to calculate a weighted average of the GLMs
for each of the underlying frequency and severity models for each of the claim types.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 31
Specifically this can be done by:
selecting a dataset that most accurately reflects the likely future mix of business
calculating an expected claim frequency and severity by claim type for each record
in the data
combining these fitted values, for each record, to derive the expected cost of claims
(according to the individual GLMs) for each record
fitting a further GLM to this total expected cost of claims, with this final GLM
containing the union of all factors (and interactions) in all of the underlying models.
An illustrative example is shown on the next page.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
Example
The first table represents the intercepts and multipliers from underlying frequency and
severity models for claim types 1 and 2. The second table shows the calculation of the total
risk premium, based on the underlying models, for the first four records in the data. The
additional GLM is fitted to this last column in this dataset in order have a single theoretical
risk premium model.
Claim type 1 Claim type 2
Frequency Severity Frequency Severity
Intercept 0.32 1,000 0.12 4,860
Sex: Male 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Female 0.75 1.20 0.67 0.90
Area: Town 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Country 1.25 0.72 0.75 0.83
Fitted Fitted Fitted Fitted Fitted Fitted
Policy Sex Area Total RP
freq 1 sev 1 RP 1 freq 2 sev 2 RP 2
82155654 M T 32% 1000 320.00 12.00% 4860.00 583.20 903.20
82168746 F T 24% 1200 288.00 8.04% 4374.00 351.67 639.67
82179481 M C 40% 720 288.00 9.00% 4033.80 363.04 651.04
82186845 F C 30% 864 259.20 6.03% 3630.42 218.91 478.11
………… … ……. ……. ……. ……. ……. ……. ……. …….
The fitted frequency is the frequency predicted by the model. This is calculated as the intercept
term multiplied by the relativities for sex and area. So for the second policy in the table above,
the fitted frequency for claim type 1 is 0.32 0.75 1.00 0.24 .
Similarly, the fitted (predicted) severity for the fourth policy in the table for claim type 2 is
4,860 0.90 0.83 3,630.42 .
The fitted risk premium for each claim type is the fitted frequency multiplied by the fitted
severity. The total risk premium is the sum of the risk premiums for the two claim types.
Non-proportional expenses
Non-proportional expenses are those that are not a constant proportion for every policy. A fixed
policy fee of £50 would be considered to be non-proportional because it will have a different
relative impact on a policy with a premium of £200 than on one with a premium of £1,500.
In addition to combining frequency and severity across multiple claim types, the technique
of fitting an overall GLM to fitted values of other GLMs can be used to incorporate
non-proportional expense elements into the modelled relativities. For example, a constant
pound amount could be added to each observation’s expected risk premium and then a
GLM re-fitted to this new field. The resulting ‘flattened’ risk premium relativities will prevent
high risk factor levels from being excessively loaded for expenses.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 33
We can think of young drivers as being a high risk group within the ‘age’ factor for a motor policy
– the frequency and severity (and therefore risk premium) relativities are likely to be very high
compared to other age groups. If we were to add a fixed percentage expense loading across all
policies, this would have the effect of further increasing the differential between young and older
drivers and would mean that the young drivers were subsidising the rest in terms of expenses.
A simple example will demonstrate how the premium relativities are ‘flattened’ when a fixed
amount is loaded onto the risk premium. The first table shows the situation where expenses are
loaded as a fixed percentage (20%) for each policy.
Expenses
Risk premium Expenses (% of Office premium
expressed as a £
(£) premium) (£)
amount
Young 1,500 20% 300 1,800
Other 300 20% 60 360
It is clear that the young drivers are contributing a lot more to expenses than the other drivers
are. The implied risk premium relativities are 5:1 and the implied office premium relativities have
remained at 5:1.
The next table shows the same risk premium relativities but with expenses loaded as a fixed
pound amount for each policy.
Risk premium Expenses (fixed Office premium
(£) £ amount) (£)
Young 1,500 100 1,600
Other 300 100 400
With this treatment of expenses, all ages of driver are contributing the same amount but this is
now a bigger proportion of the premium for the other drivers. The implied office premium
relativities have reduced to 4:1. This is what is meant by a flattening of the relativities. In fact, if
you imagine that the office premium relativities are plotted on a graph, you will see that this line
is flatter than the one where the expenses were expressed as a fixed percentage.
Alternatively, the amount added to each observation’s expected risk premium could be
designed to vary according to the results of a separate retention study. This would allow
risks with a high propensity to lapse to receive a higher proportion of fixed expense than
those risks with a low propensity to lapse. As above, a further GLM is fitted to the sum of
the expected risk premium and a (lapse-dependent) expense load.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
7 Model validation
From a practical point of view, the whole reason for analysing claims data for premium rating is to
get a model that can be used to predict future claims experience so that future premiums can be
set accordingly. An over-fitted model, for example, might fit the past data (including some of the
random noise) very well but be of little use for projecting into the future. It is therefore very
important to check that our model is appropriate.
Whilst many individual aspects of the model selection can be tested using specific formal
statistical tests during the modelling process, it can also be helpful to perform an overall
validation of the effectiveness of a model by testing its predictiveness on out-of-sample
experience.
We met various methods of testing our model selection in Chapter 16.
Validation samples of, say, 20% of the total data can be withheld from the modelling
process. A range of tests can then be undertaken on this validation sample comparing
actual experience with that predicted by the selected model.
If we choose to withhold a random sample in this way, we are implicitly assuming that the future
business, policy conditions, etc will be similar to those in the past data.
The validation data will need to contain both the actual claims data, and the amounts predicted
by the model we want to test. There are various ways of displaying the relationship between the
actual data and the predicted amounts.
One possible method of validating a model is to produce graphs such as the one on the
next page.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 35
Model Validation
100000
0.14
90000
0.12 80000
70000
0.1
Weighted average
60000
Weights
0.08
50000
0.06 40000
30000
0.04
20000
0.02
10000
0 0
<= 6
>0 , < 0 3
>0 , < 3 6
<= 6
>0 , < 6 6
>0 , < 0 9
>0 , < 9 6
<= 2
6
>0 , < 12
>0 <= 8
>0 , < 4
>0 , < 42
, < 48
>0 , < 72
>0 <= 8
>0 , < 4
>0 , < 02
>0 <= 8
>0 , < 4
0
54 .0 5
14 .1 1
6, 0.0
2, 0.1
12
06 0.0
.
12 0.0
18 0.0
36 0 .0
42 0.0
48 0.0
66 0 .0
72 0.0
78 0.0
96 0 .0
02 0.1
08 0.1
=0
=0
0.
0.
0.
=0
0
<=
=
<=
=
,
24
84
,
,
3
9
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.1
.1
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.1
.1
>0
>0
>0
>0
>0
Absolute value: Current model
Weights Data Current m odel
The above graph investigates actual versus predicted claims, grouped by predicted claim
amount (bands on the x-axis). The bars show the exposure we have in each of these bands.
Unsurprisingly, we can see that, where we would expect a very low or very high claim cost
(on the far left and right of the graph), then we have comparatively little exposure. This
represents the more extreme insureds (for example, a young driver in a very powerful car).
The ‘triangle’ line is the predicted values from the model. The ‘blocked’ line represents the
actual claims in these blocks. If the model were perfect, these lines would overlay each
other. However, no model is perfect. Systematic differences can indicate poor model
fitting; for example, if the line was consistently above or below the theoretical line. As can
be seen, the fit is best where we have the most exposure.
A perfect fit of the model to the past data would not be appropriate here anyway as the pattern
of random noise in the future would not be expected to follow precisely that of the past. In this
example, the model appears to fit the validation data very well.
The distribution of exposure on the graph just provides information that is helpful when
interpreting the results. Departures of actual from expected are more concerning when
such departures apply to a significant proportion of the portfolio.
Students should note the reliance placed on internal model validation within the Solvency II
directives.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
Solvency II is the capital adequacy regulation for European insurers and reinsurers. Under this
regulation, insurers can choose to determine their capital requirements under Solvency II using an
internal model, subject to this being approved by regulators. Demonstrating that the internal
model is appropriate through validation is one of the criteria that must be met in order for the
model to be approved. This will require its assumptions and output to be regularly checked for
reasonableness against actual experience.
7.1 Lift curves
Another related way of assessing the predictiveness of a model is to calculate a ‘lift curve’
on an out-of-sample model validation dataset.
As for the example above, this method uses an out-of-sample dataset for validation. This just
means that the validation data has been taken as a random sample (say 20%) from the original
data available for modelling. The multivariate models would then be constructed based on the
remaining data.
This method is also useful for comparing two models of different forms.
One approach is to rank all policies in the validation dataset in order of expected experience
(according to the model being tested), and then to group the policies into bands of equal
exposure based on this ranking. The actual experience for each group can then be
calculated and displayed as a curve. The steeper the curve, the more effective the model is
at distinguishing between high and low experience because there is a greater differentiation
between the good and bad risks.
The below graph (on the next page) shows an example of such a comparison between two
claim frequency models. It is clear from the graph that Model 1 is the more predictive of the
two because it is steeper.
75% 40,000
70%
65% 35,000
60%
30,000
55%
50%
25,000
Exposure (years)
Claim frequency
45%
40%
20,000
35%
30%
15,000
25%
20%
10,000
15%
10% 5,000
5%
0% 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Exposure Model 1 Model 2
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 37
Model 1 in this graph is shown by the solid line, while the dashed line relates to Model 2.
So, in this case, the validation data has been ranked by the expected (modelled) claim frequency
and then split into 20 groups, each containing 5% of the total exposure. The lines on the graph
show the actual claim frequency for each of these groups.
The difference between the frequency of the lowest group and the highest group is the lift. When
comparing more than one model, the lift tells us which model is the most predictive of those
tested.
Lift curves can be applied to claim severity or to burning cost as well as to frequency.
7.2 Gains curve
Another useful way of presenting the final fitted values from the model, and comparing
them to the observed values, is the gains curve.
With this method the data are sorted high to low according to the fitted model values, and
then the chart shows the cumulative values from the fitted model and the cumulative
observed values from the data. A statistical measure for the lift produced by the model is
called the Gini coefficient. This can be thought of as the area enclosed by the model curve
and the diagonal line as a ratio of the triangle above the diagonal.
In this method, the data is not grouped into bands.
Because it is cumulative values that are plotted, the curve will always start at zero and end at the
value relating to the sum of all the fitted values.
Gains Curve
1,800
1,600
1,400
Cumulative Values
1,200
1,000
800
600
400
200
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Cumulative Exposure
Reference Model Observed
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 38 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
In the graph above, which forms part of the Core Reading, the straight diagonal line is the
reference line. The smooth curved line shows the cumulative values for the fitted model. The
area enclosed by these two lines is used to calculate the Gini coefficient.
The Gini coefficient is a measure of statistical dispersion that can range from 0 to 1. The higher
the Gini coefficient, the more predictive the model.
The third line on the graph, which is not smooth but follows a similar path to the smooth line for
the fitted model, shows the cumulative observed values.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 39
8 Implementation
We have completed our multivariate modelling and are now happy that the theoretical model
we’ve come up with is accurate and relevant. This can be thought of as a ground-up process
because we have built up the proposed premium rates by putting together all the appropriate
components.
But it is unlikely that we would use these theoretical rates without any further adjustments. For
example, we also need to consider the impact that these rates would have in the market. This is
particularly important for competitive classes of business such as personal lines motor.
Note that we need to use an office premium (including all loadings) rather than a risk premium for
competitive comparisons, for consistency with our competitors’ premiums.
Below is a chart showing how the impact of proposed changes may be evaluated. The
x-axis is a single rating factor of interest, in this case vehicle group. The bars show the
exposure weighting from the dataset.
Current and proposed relativities can be compared and, in particular if estimated competitor
rates are also available, these can be shown too. Competitor analysis has become
increasingly important over the last few years, as new techniques have been introduced, but
students should be alert to the restrictions imposed by any competition legislation. In
particular, it is now possible to model the elasticity of customer demand and further to
optimise prices subject to portfolio level constraints and stakeholder objectives. The reader
should be aware that this example is only a high level introduction to the subject.
By Factor
1100
12000
1000
900
10000
Average(Competitor), Average(Current),
800
Average(Proposed)
8000
700
Policy Count
600
6000
500
400 4000
300
2000
200
100 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Vehicle Group
Policy Count Average(Competitor) Average(Current) Average(Proposed)
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 40 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
The results of a GLM analysis are interdependent and must be considered together. For
example, while a GLM analysis might suggest that young driver relativities are too low, it
may also suggest that relativities for inexperienced drivers (for example, less than two
years licensed) are too high. Although the existing rating structure may be theoretically
wrong, it might be the case that to a large extent these errors compensate each other. To
understand the true ‘bottom line’ difference between the existing rating structure and the
theoretical claims cost, ‘impact’ graphs such as the one below can be considered.
So we cannot restrict ourselves to looking at individual factors at this stage – we need to consider
the impact on the whole book of business. Ideally, we would want to know the impact on the
future business so, for the purposes of this impact analysis, we need to apply our model to a set
of data that is representative of what we will write in the future.
Impact on portfolio of moving to theoretically correct relativities
7000
Currently
profitable
6000
business
5000
Exposure count
4000
3000
Currently
2000 unprofitable
business
1000
0
0.450 - 0.550 - 0.650 - 0.750 - 0.850 - 0.950 - 1.050 - 1.150 - 1.250 - 1.350 - 1.450 - 1.550 - 1.650 - 1.750 - 1.850 - 1.950 - 2.050 - 2.150 - 2.250 - 2.350 - 2.450 -
0.500 0.600 0.700 0.800 0.900 1.000 1.100 1.200 1.300 1.400 1.500 1.600 1.700 1.800 1.900 2.000 2.100 2.200 2.300 2.400 2.500
Ratio: Risk premium model / Current rates
The graph above shows the number of exposures in the existing portfolio that would
experience different changes in premium if the rating structure were to move from its
existing form to the theoretically correct form immediately.
The x-axis represents, as a ratio, the adjustment to current premiums that should be made to
bring them in line with the theoretically correct ones. Those policies to the left of the thick
vertical line should, in theory, be experiencing a reduction in premium, whereas those to the right
of the line should have their premiums increased.
It is, of course, exceptionally unlikely that such dramatic change would be implemented in
practice. The purpose of this analysis is to understand the magnitude of the existing
cross-subsidies by considering the effect of all rating factors at the same time.
This graph can also be divided by levels of a particular rating factor. (Indeed one such
graph can be produced for each rating factor.) This identifies which sectors of the business
are currently profitable, and which are currently unprofitable, taking into account the correct
theoretical model and considering the effect of all factors at the same time.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 41
Note that we are measuring profitability here by reference to our newly-determined theoretical
model as this is our most up-to-date view of the correct premium rates.
In the example below, the impact graph is segmented by age of driver (notice the shape
does not change, only how the histogram is coloured).
Impact on portfolio of moving to theoretically correct relativities
(segmented by age of driver)
7000
6000
5000
Exposure count
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0.450 - 0.600 - 0.750 - 0.900 - 1.050 - 1.200 - 1.350 - 1.500 - 1.650 - 1.800 - 1.950 - 2.100 - 2.250 - 2.400 -
0.500 0.650 0.800 0.950 1.100 1.250 1.400 1.550 1.700 1.850 2.000 2.150 2.300 2.450
Ratio: Risk premium model / Current rates
17-21 22-24 25-29 30-34 35-39 40-49 50-59 60-69 70+
The histogram shows the impact of all rating factor changes (not just the age of driver
factor) by age of driver levels.
If you are viewing a black and white copy of these notes, you might find it difficult to see what is
going on in this graph. The long flat band to the right of the graph relates to the 17-21 year olds;
the darker band to the left and above of them relates to the 22-24 year olds; and the bands
continue to move leftward and upward as the age bands increase.
It can be seen in this example that a large number of the exposures that would experience
large increases in premium if the rating structure were moved immediately to the
theoretically correct structure are young drivers.
Based on this graph, the 17-21 year old drivers would all experience increases to their current
rates of between 135% and 245% if these new rates were implemented unadjusted.
It had already been seen from the GLM risk premium graphs (not included within this Chapter)
that young driver relativities were too low. This graph suggests there are no effects from
other correlated factors that noticeably mitigate this effect; otherwise, young drivers would
not be so strongly on the ‘unprofitable’ side of the impact graph.
An example may make interpretation of the graph above clearer.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 42 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
Example
Assume the multiplicative claims model uses age, gender, marital status, territory and credit
as rating factors.
Consider the following young driver profile with indicated rate change for each criterion in
parentheses: age 17-21 (+60%), male (+15%), single (–5%), urban territory (+15%), high
credit score (–20%).
All factors considered, the total indicated rate change for this risk profile is +61% and so
this policy would contribute a count of one to the bar at 1.60-1.65.
This rate changed is calculated as:
1.60 1.15 0.95 1.15 0.80 1.61
There are roughly 600 total exposures in this band; roughly one-third of which correspond
to drivers age 17-21.
References
Jørgenses, B., De Souza, M.C.P, Fitting Tweedie’s Compound Poisson Model to
Insurance Claims Data, 1994, Scandinavian Actuarial Journal, 1:69–93.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 43
Chapter 17 Summary
Data
A large range of questions is asked at the point of sale for personal lines motor and home
insurance. These questions relate to the policy, the proposer and the vehicle or house.
Many of these questions do not directly measure the genuine risk factors but act as proxies
instead.
External data can be added, to help predict claims experience. It is necessary for linking
fields to exist so that the external data can be attached to the internal data.
Multivariate models
Generalised linear models (GLMs), often with a log link function to create the form:
k k
X
Yi exp Xij j i e ij j i
j 1
j 1
are the most common multivariate models used in personal lines pricing today. They are
studied in Chapter 16.
There may be some factors (eg postcode or vehicle group) for which there are a large
number of levels. To enable these to be included within a GLM, it is necessary to use some
method of classification to produce a smaller number of groupings.
Approaches to classification include:
spatial smoothing methods (distance-based or adjacency-based)
vehicle classification techniques (eg based on ABI groups).
Forms of models
Separate models will be built for claim frequency and claim severity (average claims cost)
and these will normally be done separately for each type of claim or peril.
A log link function will produce a multiplicative rating structure. Typical distributions are
Poisson for the frequency model and gamma for the severity model.
Claim propensity models tend to be multiplicative and are based on the binomial
distribution.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 44 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
Initial analyses
Prior to fitting a GLM (or other multivariate model), we would normally look at one-way and
two-way tables to check and familiarise ourselves with the data. Incorporating frequency,
severity and loss ratio statistics will also give us an initial indication of the likely effect of
each factor.
It may be helpful to analyse and understand the correlations within our portfolio and we can
(nij eij )2
eij
i,j
use Cramer’s V statistic, defined as: .
min a 1 , b 1 .n
Model combining
Once we have models for each peril or claim type and for both frequency and severity, we
may need to combine these into a single risk premium model. This is not straightforward
where there is more than one claim type.
Model validation
Validation samples can be withheld from the data used in modelling and then used to test
how close the model predictions are to actual experience and therefore how accurate they
are likely to be for future rates. A graph of actual vs predicted claims can be plotted.
Lift curves can be used to compare two models of different forms, to see which is the most
predictive. Gains curves can show a comparison between fitted and observed values. The
Gini coefficient can be calculated as a measure of statistical dispersion.
Implementation
Once the theoretical rates have been produced, they need to be compared with the current
rates (to see what the effect would be on a particular book of business) and, if possible, with
competitors’ rates. There are various graphical representations that can help with this.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 45
Chapter 17 Practice Questions
17.1 You are the actuary of an established general insurer that began underwriting a portfolio of
Exam style
non-comprehensively insured motorcycle business five years ago. The account has grown slowly
and now consists of approximately 45,000 policies, although the mix of business has remained
consistent during this period. The current premium rates are based on five principal rating
factors, namely, age of policyholder, engine capacity, make and model of motorcycle, district and
no claims discount. There are good quality historical policy and claims data available.
(i) Describe how you would carry out a multivariate analysis of the historical experience in
order to assess how the principal rating factors explain the variations in claim frequency
across risk categories. [12]
(ii) State the assumptions you need to make and explain how you can test their validity. [6]
(iii) You are considering applying similar techniques to the average claim cost. Describe
briefly the further problems that must be overcome. [6]
[Total 24]
17.2 You work in the pricing department of a general insurance company that writes a wide range of
personal lines business. You have collected and adjusted some premium and claims data for one
of the classes of business written, with a view to doing a multivariate analysis using this data.
Your next step is to do a one-way analysis of the data, but your manager is keen for you to start
the multivariate analysis straight away and not to waste any time doing a one-way analysis.
Explain the points you would make to your manager in support of the need to do one-way
analyses. [11]
17.3 Discuss reasons why premium rates implemented in practice might differ from the theoretical risk
premium rates derived from a generalised linear model based on past data. Where appropriate,
use examples and explain how these differences would be allowed for. [27]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 46 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 47
Chapter 17 Solutions
17.1 (i) Multivariate analysis to establish principal rating factors
Past claims and exposure data is required. Given the small size of the portfolio it should cover the
whole five years of existence. [1]
Prepare details of claim numbers and exposure for all combinations of rating factors. [½]
Given the lack of data, grouping levels of rating factors may be necessary. [½]
Spatial smoothing or vehicle classification methods could be used for grouping levels of factors
such as postcode and make / model of motorcycle. [1]
One-way tables of each rating factor in isolation can be used to check the reasonableness of the
prepared data and will give a preliminary indication of the effect of each factor in terms of claim
frequency. [1]
Two-way tables can be used to help understand correlations between pairs of rating factors and to
indicate which factors may be affected by the removal or inclusion of any other factor in the
multivariate analysis. [1]
May need to adjust data for:
changes in policy conditions [½]
mid-year endorsements (allocate proportion to each cell) [½]
unreported claims, especially latest year’s data. [½]
Investigate frequency for each major claim type separately – for example, fire, theft, accidental
damage, third party property damage and third party bodily injury. [1]
This is to avoid heterogeneity being introduced by changing policy conditions, and to develop a
better understanding of the factors behind changes in overall experience. [1]
Look for trends over time in the claim data and try to explain them. [½]
Use a statistical rating model (eg a GLM) to produce expected claim frequencies for all
combinations of rating cells chosen. The exposure from each year’s data can be used to weight
the claims frequencies. [1]
Test a range of models to see which gives the best fit to the actual data values. By comparing
actual versus expected claim frequencies for different models, we can assess the error terms. [1]
We can then decide which model gives the best fit to the data. [½]
See part (ii) for how.
We can now study how claim frequency varies across rating factors and different levels of the
factors. Need to consider if the results are reasonable or not. [1]
[Maximum 12]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 48 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
(ii) Assumptions and validity
Assumptions
Choice of model – multivariate, GLM, generalised non-linear model, generalised additive
model. [1]
The link function (which determines whether it’s an additive or multiplicative model, for
example). [½]
Grouping within rating factors. [½]
Type of error structure. [½]
GLMs are commonly used as they are not too complex to run but are based on a sound statistical
framework. [½]
A common choice for claim frequency error structure is a Poisson assumption. [½]
This is because it provides a good fit to claim frequency data and ensures that model frequencies
stay positive. [1]
A log link is often chosen as this will result in a multiplicative model, as we would intuitively
expect this to be the best reflection of the relationship between the rating variables. [1]
The residual errors can be analysed using simple residual plots and by best fit statistical tests. [1]
We can then assess if a particular model gives a good fit. [½]
[Maximum 6]
(iii) Further problems with ACPC models
Because we are using the latest data, we will need to rely upon estimates of IBNR and outstanding
reported claims to project paid to date amounts to ultimate. [1]
Large claims can distort the figures by their presence or absence in particular cells. Bodily injury
claim amounts especially can vary a great deal in amount. In this class they could form a very
significant part of the claim amount. [1]
We could identify this effect by splitting out these types of claim, or mitigate it by using less
detailed splits of rating factors. But we would then lose our ability to study the effects of the
rating factors. In practice, a compromise will be necessary. [1]
We could truncate large claims at a suitable level and gross up across all cells for the occasional
large claim. However, large claims may be associated with particular rating cells (eg low ages,
high engine capacities, living in large cities) which have several past claims. [1]
We could therefore spread the large claims loading across only those cells from which we expect
the large claims to come. [½]
We would need to allow for inflation of claim amounts, by different type of claim. [½]
We may need to adjust for reinsurance recoveries and salvage. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 49
The treatment of nil claims needs to be consistent over the period and consistent with the
frequency model. [½]
Nil claims may be removed from both models or otherwise treated as a separate claim
category. [½]
Need to use a different error structure. A gamma assumption is often found to be appropriate for
modelling claim severity. [½]
[Maximum 6]
17.2 The one-way distribution of exposure and claims across each level of each raw variable will
indicate whether a particular variable contains enough useful information to justify its inclusion in
the multivariate models. [1]
For example, if 99% of a variable’s exposure is in one level then it may not be suitable for
modelling. [½]
Assuming that there is a viable distribution by levels of a variable, a one-way table would highlight
whether there is enough exposure and/or claims information in each level of the variable. [1]
If not, then we may need to do some grouping of levels prior to loading the data into the
modelling software to ensure that the multivariate models can converge. [1]
We can calculate some simple one-way statistics for each level of each factor. [½]
Examples of these statistics are:
frequency
severity
burning cost
loss ratio
pure premium. [½ each, maximum 1]
This will give us a preliminary indication of the likely effect of each factor ... [½]
… and provide a reference to help with the interpretation of any results that we may observe in
the multivariate analysis. [½]
The one-way tables will provide totals, maybe by distribution channel or account, which we can
use for validating the data against other sources. [1]
We may also pick up some useful information by comparing these one-way tables with the ones
produced for previous rate reviews (if these exist). [1]
One-way tables will also allow us to check whether the distribution of exposure by each level of
each variable is as expected. [½]
For example, it might show that we had been selling higher volumes of business in particular
segments than we would have liked. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 50 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
If the distribution was not as expected then this could also suggest that there might be errors in
the raw data … [½]
… and/or programming errors introduced when cleaning the data. [½]
The production of one-way tables is likely to be relatively quick, especially if the process can be
automated or we can use an existing program to do this. [1]
In summary, creating and checking the outputs of one-way tables is not a waste of time because it
has the potential to highlight problems at an early stage, which will save time in the long run. [1]
[Maximum 11]
17.3 Loadings
The biggest reason why implemented premiums would differ from theoretical risk premiums is
that the risk premiums only cover the claims element of the premium whereas the implemented
premium would include allowance for other loadings. [1]
These other loadings include:
expenses [½]
commission [½]
profit and cost of capital [½]
contingencies [½]
investment income (a discount to the premium) [½]
reinsurance [½]
insurance premium tax. [½]
Expenses could incorporated into the final premium as a percentage of premium, a fixed
monetary amount or combination of the two. [½]
Changes
The GLM is based upon past data. There are many reasons why claims experience in the future
might be expected to be different from that seen in the past. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 51
Examples of changes that may need to be taken into account include:
changes in the risk environment, eg climate change could affect weather-related
household claims experience [½]
changes in the level of cover provided, eg the addition or removal of perils or changes in
limits or excesses [1]
changes in underwriting or claims processes that could affect the overall level of claims
experience [½]
changes in the legal or regulatory environment, eg for motor insurance, there have been
changes to the Ogden tables and to NHS costs that can be reclaimed [1]
trends in the claims experience (either frequency or severity or both); judgement will
need to be used to decide whether trends seen in the base data are likely to continue into
the future and, if so, to what extent [1]
an adjustment to allow for large or exceptional claims [½]
unusually heavy or light experience in the base data that is not expected to continue into
the future. [½]
For each of these changes, we would need to try to quantify the level of change and project this
to future rating periods. [½]
Systems issues
A theoretical risk premium model is likely to include all factors that could help to explain the risk.
If there is a risk factor within the GLM that has not been used in the past then it is possible that no
rating table currently exists for that factor. [1]
If it is not easy or quick to change the rating algorithm and tables, it may be necessary to accept
that one or more factors may need to be dropped from the model, at least in the short-term. [½]
The theoretical GLM could then be re-run without any such factors so that the relativities relating
to other factors in the model can allow partially for the effects of the dropped factor(s). [1]
The ability to add new factors may depend upon the distribution channel used. For example, the
broker system might be less flexible than the insurer’s own direct sales system, and so it may be
difficult to introduce new rating factors for business sold through brokers. [1]
Customer behaviour models
An insurer may take account of the price elasticity of various groups of customers in order to
maximise profits and volumes for a whole book of business. The elasticity models would typically
be run after the GLMs and used to adjust the theoretical rates. [1]
For example, an increase in rates might be applied to a customer who is perceived to be inelastic
(ie likely to renew even if the price increases) in order to fund a reduction in rates for a more
elastic customer. [1]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 52 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
Similarly, an insurer may apply models of customer lifetime value to the theoretical rates so that
the premiums can be flexed according to the insurer’s view of how loyal and profitable each type
of customer is likely to be in the long term. [1]
Legal and commercial considerations
There may be legal or commercial restrictions on the way factors can be, or are, used in
practice. [½]
For example, there may be factors (such as age and sex) that, in some countries, are not allowed
to be used as they are perceived to be discriminatory. [½]
NCD in motor insurance is an example of a factor that is likely to be implemented using a very
different set of relativities to those that would be determined in a theoretically correct model. [½]
The NCD scales seen in the market for motor insurance are very steep, for commercial reasons,
with the theoretically correct discounts being much lower. For household insurance, the NCD
scales are much less steep and are a better reflection of the theoretical rates. [1]
We could allow for these restrictions within a GLM by offsetting the restricted factors and
re-running the model. [1]
Company strategy
The insurer may have decided that it does not really want to target certain groups of potential
policyholder, and therefore it may charge more to those groups than what is suggested by the
theoretical models. [1]
Similarly, discounts may be given to other groups of policyholders to encourage them to insure
with our company. [½]
Alternatively, the insurer may have a strategy to increase volumes of business by x% this year for
a particular class of business, and so it may price at a level lower than the theoretical rate for a
period of time for this class. [1]
Any such cross-subsidies need to be done with care to ensure that, allowing for the expected mix
of business, the total premiums across the whole book are sufficient. [1]
The company may want to price-test some policies in order to calculate the price elasticity of
demand for certain groups of customers (ie as a trial), and this will involve moving away from the
theoretical prices. [1]
Comparison with other rates
Before implementing a new set of rates, the insurer will want to check how the new rates
compare to the previous ones because customers generally do not like big changes in premium
from one year to the next. [1]
The results of such an impact analysis might lead to the new theoretical rates needing to be
adjusted. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing Page 53
This could be achieved by capping or moderating any large changes from one year to the next
… [½]
… or by identifying the groups of policyholders affected and changing their premium rate
relativities, … [½]
… perhaps with a view to achieving the theoretical rates over the course of two or three years
rather than immediately. [½]
Again, reductions to certain premiums need to be done in a way that ensures that the total
premiums across the whole book are sufficient. [½]
The insurer will also try to check how the new rates compare to those offered by other insurers in
the same market at that time. They might then adjust their own theoretical rates accordingly. [1]
Other considerations
The theoretical risk premiums from the GLM should already have been smoothed to an extent,
eg over policyholder age. However, there might be further smoothing required before the rates
are ready for the market. [½]
This further smoothing could be done as underwriter adjustments or to make the rates acceptable
to brokers. [½]
For some lower risk policyholders, the theoretical rate could be very low, meaning that the
insurer would not receive enough premium to cover their expenses. Therefore a minimum
premium could be applied to prevent this from happening. [1]
[Maximum 27]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 54 SP8-17: Use of multivariate models in pricing
End of Part 4
What next?
1. Briefly review the key areas of Part 4 and/or re-read the summaries at the end of
Chapters 15 to 17.
2. Ensure you have attempted some of the Practice Questions at the end of each chapter in
Part 4. If you don’t have time to do them all, you could save the remainder for use as part
of your revision.
3. Attempt Assignment X4.
Time to consider …
… ‘revision and rehearsal’ products
Revision Notes – Each booklet covers one main theme of the course and includes integrated
questions testing Core Reading, relevant past exam questions and other useful revision aids.
Students have said:
‘Revision books are the most useful ActEd resource.’
‘I found the revision booklets very helpful as they grouped all past exam questions
by topic and the answers were bullet pointed into key points so it was easy to
check how many of the points you get.’
You can find lots more information, including samples, on our website at www.ActEd.co.uk.
Buy online at www.ActEd.co.uk/estore
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 1
Credibility theory
Syllabus objectives
4.1 Outline the fundamental concepts of credibility theory.
4.2 Describe and compare the classical and Bayes credibility models.
4.3 Describe the practical uses of credibility models in a general insurance environment.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-18: Credibility theory
0 Introduction
In this chapter we will revisit credibility theory, which is a technique that can be used to determine
premiums or claim frequencies in general insurance. You will already have met Bayesian credibility
in an earlier subject.
In Section 1 we provide a basic introduction to the motivation behind credibility theory.
Section 2 discusses classical credibility theory, and Section 3 discusses some of the models based
on classical and Bayesian credibility.
In Section 5 we introduce the Bühlmann-Straub credibility model.
Sections 4, 6 and 7 discuss some of the issues surrounding the use of credibility models in
practice.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 3
1 Credibility Theory - Introduction
Credibility theory is an approach to rate setting that allows for consideration of actual
experience as well as external information.
The problem with using past data to estimate future claims experience is that the past data will
contain an element of randomness. It may, for example, include an unusually large loss.
The law of large numbers tells us, however, that the more data we have available, the lower the
variation of the sample mean. It therefore seems logical to use as much data as possible when
modelling future events. Why not, for example, use industry-wide data, based on the claims
experience of all insurers in the country?
The problem is that, while this data seems more credible than just using claims information from
the individual insurer (since it is based on a greater volume of data), it will not be as relevant to
the specific business being modelled. For example, some of the claims may originate from risks
written under very different conditions, or in very different geographic regions. They may
therefore not be an appropriate predictor of claims for that particular insurer.
There are two extreme choices for deciding which dataset to use:
(i) we could choose an estimate based on the past data of the individual insurer (or
even the individual policyholder) on the grounds that this is based on the most relevant
data or,
(ii) we could choose an estimate based on market-wide data on the grounds that it is, in
some sense, a more reliable figure.
The credibility approach to this problem is to take a weighted average of these two extreme
answers.
For example, an insurance company uses past loss information from an insured or group of
insureds to estimate the cost of providing future insurance coverage.
In other words, the insurer calculates its premium based on the past claims experience of the
insured(s).
But, insurance losses arise from random occurrences. The average annual cost of paying
insurance losses in the past few years may be a poor estimate of next year’s costs. The
expected accuracy of this estimate is a function of the variability in the losses. This data by
itself may not be acceptable for calculating accurate insurance rates.
Rather than relying solely on recent observations, better estimates may be obtained by
combining this data with other information.
For example, suppose that recent experience indicates that carpenters should be charged a
rate of £5 (per £100 of payroll) for employers’ liability insurance. Assume that the current
rate is £10 .
The rate of £5 , based on recent claims experience is described as the ‘observation’ in the formula
below, while the current rate of £10 is described as ‘other information’.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-18: Credibility theory
What should the new rate be? Should it be £5 , £10 , or somewhere in between? Credibility
theory is used to weight together these two estimates.
The basic formula for calculating credibility-weighted estimates is:
Estimate Z Observation (1 Z ) Other information , 0Z 1
The question lies in deciding what value to place on Z .
Z is called the credibility assigned to the observation. 1 Z is generally referred to as the
complement of credibility.
If the body of observed data is large and not likely to vary much from one period to another,
then Z will be closer to one. On the other hand, if the observation consists of limited data,
then Z will be closer to zero and more weight will be given to other information.
In other words, the more reliable we believe our observed claims experience to be (as a predictor
of future experience), the more we can weight our estimate towards that data.
The current rate of £10 in the above example is the ‘other information’. It represents an
estimate, or ‘prior hypothesis’ of a rate to charge in the absence of the recent experience.
As recent experience becomes available, then an updated estimate combining the recent
experience and the prior hypothesis can be calculated.
This can be done, for example, by increasing the value of Z .
The carpenters’ rate for employers’ liability insurance under this model is:
Z £5 (1 Z ) £10
In Subject CS1, a method for determining Z, known as greatest accuracy credibility or
‘Bayesian credibility’ was introduced. In this chapter, an alternative approach for
computing Z, known as the limit fluctuation approach or ‘classical credibility’ is covered.
Bayesian credibility and its relationship to Bayesian statistics is revisited in the following
example. A motivation for an alternative approach to credibility theory is also provided.
Example
In a population of motorists, the number of accidents caused by an individual motorist has
a Poisson distribution with X | Poisson , ie:
x e
f x |
x!
The population of motorists is heterogeneous and it is believed to be made up of equal
numbers of:
‘safe’ motorists with 0.2 , and
‘risky’ motorists with 0.4
where is the probability of an accident.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 5
So, the number of accidents occurring in a year follows a Poisson distribution for each motorist,
although the value of varies for different drivers.
For a randomly selected motorist where no further information is available, the expected
number of claims in the next year is:
E X E E X | E
0.2 0.5 0.4 0.5
0.3
Now suppose that, for a particular motorist, we know that they have had one accident in the
last year. We therefore have some prior knowledge. The likelihood of this outcome is:
1e
f x | e
1!
This is just the probability of the motorist having 1 accident x 1 .
Using the formula for the posterior distribution, based on Bayes’ Theorem as covered in
Subject CS2, the posterior probability of the motorist being ‘safe’ is:
f x | 0.2 P 0.2
P 0.2 | x
f x | 0.2 P 0.2 f x | 0.4 P 0.4
0.2e 0.2 0.5
0.2e 0.2 0.5 0.4e 0.4 0.5
0.379
Since there are only two possible classifications in this example, the posterior probability of the
motorist being ‘risky’ is 1 0.379 0.621 .
The expected number of claims made in the next year by this motorist is thus:
E X n 1 | x E E X n 1 | x ,
E | x
0.2 0.379 0.4 0.621
0.324
Note: the expected number of claims in the next year by the motorist in question is larger
than that of a randomly selected motorist as the sample data leads us to believe that the
motorist is more likely to be ‘risky’ than ‘safe’. This estimate for the accident frequency is
called the Bayesian premium and in Subject CS1, it is shown to be the estimate of the future
number of claims with the smallest mean square error.
Recall from Subject CS1 that the Bayesian estimate under the quadratic loss function is the mean
of the posterior distribution f ( | x ) . This is what is meant by the Bayesian premium in the Core
Reading above.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-18: Credibility theory
The problem with the Bayesian premium is that it requires the model distribution f x |
and the prior distribution to be completely specified. Bayesian credibility allows for a
computation of the premium which only requires estimates of var m and E s 2
where m E X | and s 2 var X | . In Subject CS1, the credibility premium is
shown to be:
Z x 1 Z
where
n
Z
E s 2
n
var m
For the example in question:
n 1
E s 2 E var X | E 0.3
var m var E X | var
E 2 E
2
0.22 0.5 0.4 2 0.5 0.32
0.01
1 1
The credibility assigned is thus Z 0.3
1 0.01
31
This is the credibility associated with the driver’s own experience ie the one claim last year.
The estimate using Bayesian credibility for the expected number of claims made by the
driver in question in the next year is:
1 30
31 1 31 0.3 0.323
Although we have used the model and prior distributions for computing E s 2 and
var m , a non-parametric approach has been covered in terms of the two Empirical
Bayes Credibility Models in Subject CS1.
For the example presented, the Bayesian and Credibility premiums are very similar. In
Subject CS1, the Bayesian Credibility premium is shown to be the linear estimate of the
Bayesian premium with the lowest mean square error. For certain choices of the model and
prior distribution, we have exact credibility in that the Bayesian and Credibility premiums
are identical. This has been demonstrated for the Poisson-gamma and normal-normal
models in Subject CS1.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 7
Although the Bayesian Credibility does not require the prior distribution to be specified,
estimates of E s 2 and var m may not be available. Classical theory, which is
introduced in this chapter, can then be applied, as it allows for estimation of Z with even
less information. Classical credibility can also be used to identify situations where it is
acceptable to rely totally on sample data and ignore external information.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-18: Credibility theory
2 Classical credibility
2.1 Introduction
Classical credibility considers how much data you need before you can statistically assign
100% credibility to a proposition.
In other words, we first ask ourselves ‘how big a sample size do we need for our answer to be
reliable?’ If we believe our sample size will give us reliable results, then we do not need to make
any allowance for any other available data.
We refer to this amount of data as the ‘full credibility criterion’ or the ‘standard for full
credibility’. If one has this much data or more, then Z 1 ; if one has observed less than
this amount of data then 0 Z 1.
In other words, if we think our sample size is too small to give reliable results, we can decide to
assign less credibility to our data, by using a lower value of Z . This also means we will have to
place some reliance on other information; our prior hypothesis.
In the example below, we first decide that 1,000 observations are enough to give us credible
results.
Example
If we observed 1,000 full-time carpenters for one year, we might assign 100% credibility to
their data. (For employers’ liability, that data would be pounds of loss and pounds of
payroll).
It goes without saying that if we had more than 1,000 observations, we would still believe that the
results were credible, ie if we observed 2,000 full-time carpenters we would also assign them
100% credibility. However, for any size of data smaller than 1,000 observations, we would want
to use a lower credibility rating.
One hundred full-time carpenters might be assigned 32% credibility. In this case the
observation has been assigned partial credibility; that is, less than full credibility.
Exactly how to determine the amount of credibility assigned to different amounts of data is
discussed in the following sections. There are four basic concepts from classical credibility
that will be covered:
1) how to determine the criterion for full credibility when estimating frequencies
2) how to determine the criterion for full credibility when estimating severities
3) how to determine the criterion for full credibility when estimating aggregate losses
4) how to determine the amount of partial credibility to assign when one has less data
than is needed for full credibility.
2.2 Full credibility for frequency
We will start with a little revision, and then introduce some more detail so that we can apply this
to credibility theory.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 9
Assume we have a Poisson process for claim frequency, with an average of 500 claims per
year.
Recall that a Poisson process assumes that the number of claims occurring in a time interval (0,t)
is Poisson(t) , where is the Poisson parameter representing the mean number of claims per
unit of time, in this case 500. (You should be familiar with Poisson processes from your previous
studies.)
Then, the observed numbers of claims will vary from year to year around the mean of 500.
The variance of a Poisson process is equal to its mean, in this case 500.
This Poisson process can be approximated by a normal distribution with a mean of 500 and
a variance of 500.
The normal approximation can be used to estimate the spread of the observed results from
the mean.
Example
How often can one expect to observe more than 550 claims?
Using the normal approximation, the probability of more than 550 claims is approximately:
550 500
1 1 (2.24)
500
1 0.9875
1.255%
Thus, there is about a 1.26% chance that the observed number of claims will exceed the
expected number of claims by 10% or more.
Or, equivalently, the standard deviation is 500 22.36 .
50
So 550 claims corresponds to about 2.24 standard deviations greater than average.
22.36
Since 2.24 0.9875 , there is approximately a 1.25% chance of observing more than 550
claims.
More precisely, the probability should be calculated including the continuity correction. The
probability of more than 550 claims is approximately:
550.5 500
1 1 2.258
500
1 0.9880
1.20%
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-18: Credibility theory
Similarly, (ignoring the continuity correction) the chance of observing fewer than 450 claims is
approximately 1.26%. So the chance of observing a number of claims that is more than
10% away from the mean number of claims is about 2.52%. In other words, the chance of
observing within +10% or –10% of the expected number of claims is 97.48% in this case.
We now derive a general formula for calculating this probability.
General formula for variability around the mean
More generally, one can write this algebraically:
The probability P that the observed value of a random quantity X is within a proportion k
or k of the mean is:
P Prob k X k
X
Prob k k
The last expression is derived by subtracting and then dividing through by the standard
deviation, .
Assuming the normal approximation, the quantity Z
X
is standard normally
distributed. We thus have, in terms of the cumulative distribution for the unit normal Z ,
P k k
k 1 k
2 k 1 (18.1)
The Core Reading here is using the term ‘unit normal’ to refer to the standard normal distribution.
We can apply this to numbers of claims as follows:
For a Poisson distribution with expected number of claims n, n and n .
This is just saying that for the number of claims X , where X ~ Poisson(n) , (ie E(X ) var(X ) n ),
we can assume that X is approximately normally distributed, with mean n and standard
X n
deviation n , so that is standard normal. This is exactly what we did in the example
n
above.
The probability that the observed number of claims X is within a proportion k of the
expected number n using the normal approximation to the Poisson is:
P 2 k n 1 (18.2)
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 11
This just substitutes our approximation into equation (18.1) above, ie we substitute n ,
n and Z
X .
Equivalently:
k n 1 P
2
(18.3)
This provides a general formula for the likelihood of the number of claims being a specified
proportion k away from the mean.
Here is a table showing P for different numbers of claims n and for different values of
proportion k :
Probability of being within a proportion k of the mean n
Expected
number k 10% k 5% k 2.5% k 1% k 0.5%
of claims
10 24.82% 12.56% 6.30% 2.52% 1.26%
50 52.05% 27.63% 14.03% 5.64% 2.82%
100 68.27% 38.29% 19.74% 7.97% 3.99%
500 97.47% 73.64% 42.39% 17.69% 8.90%
1,000 99.84% 88.62% 57.08% 24.82% 12.56%
5,000 100.00% 99.96% 92.29% 52.05% 27.63%
10,000 100.00% 100.00% 98.76% 68.27% 38.29%
Question
Verify the probability of 1,000 claims being within 5% of the mean.
Solution
We are given that
k 5% and n 1,000 ,
so:
P 2 k n 1
2 0.05
1,000 1
2 0.9431 1
88.62%
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-18: Credibility theory
Application to credibility theory
This is all very well, but it doesn’t yet tell us how much data we need in order to assign full
credibility to our results.
Turning things around, given values of P and k, one can compute the expected number of
claims nN such that the chance of being within a proportion k of the mean is P.
In other words, for any given probability P and proportion k, we can find the required data volume
(ie number of claims) nN .
nN can be calculated from the formula k nN 1 P
2
. This is formula (18.3) above.
1 P
Let y be such that y . Then given P, y is determined from a normal table.
2
2
y
Solving for nN in the relationship y k nN yields nN .
k
If the goal is to be within a proportion k of the mean frequency with a probability at least
P, then the standard for full credibility is:
y2
nN (18.4)
k2
where y is such that:
1 P
y (18.5)
2
Here are values of y taken from a normal table corresponding to selected values of P:
Values of y as a function of P
P 1 P 2 y
80.00% 90.00% 1.282
90.00% 95.00% 1.645
95.00% 97.50% 1.960
99.00% 99.50% 2.576
99.90% 99.95% 3.291
99.99% 99.995% 3.891
This in itself doesn’t yet help us a great deal; remember we’re interested in the number of claims
required in our dataset for our results to be credible, and y is just an interim step in obtaining this.
However, we can use equation (18.4) above to convert these values into the required claim
numbers.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 13
Example
Let’s say that we want to ensure that our observed claim frequency will not vary from the mean
by more than 5%. If we have enough claims data to be 99% sure of this, then we will assign it full
credibility.
In this example then, k 5% and P 99% . So from the table above:
2
y 2 2.576
y 2.576 and nN 2 2,654 .
k 0.05
In other words, given our criteria for k and P, we need to have an observed value of at least 2,654
claims, if we are to assign 100% credibility to our estimate of claim frequency.
Question
Without reading any further, calculate how many claims would be required in order to assign full
credibility to the data, with no more than a 10% probability of deviating from the mean by more
than 5%.
Solution
1 P 1 0.9
y 0.95 .
2 2
Therefore:
2
y 2 1.645
y 1.645 , and nN 2 1,082 .
k 0.05
This is consistent with the value given in the table of Core Reading that follows.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-18: Credibility theory
The table below outlines the values for the standard for full credibility for the frequency nN ,
given various values of P and k:
Standards for full credibility for frequency (claim numbers)
Probability
k 30% k 20% k 10% k 7.5% k 5% k 2.5% k 1%
level P
80.00% 18 41 164 292 657 2,628 16,424
90.00% 30 68 271 481 1,082 4,329 27,055
95.00% 43 96 384 683 1,537 6,146 38,415
96.00% 47 105 422 750 1,687 6,749 42,179
97.00% 52 118 471 837 1,884 7,535 47,093
98.00% 60 135 541 962 2,165 8,659 54,119
99.00% 74 166 664 1,180 2,654 10,616 66,349
99.90% 120 271 1,083 1,925 4,331 17,324 108,276
99.99% 168 378 1,514 2,691 6,055 24,219 151,367
The value of 1,082 claims corresponding to P 90% and k 5% is commonly used as an
acceptable standard for full credibility. For P 90% we want to have a 90% chance of being
within a proportion k of the mean, so we are willing to have a 5% probability outside on
either tail, for a total of 10% probability of being outside the acceptable range.
Thus, (y ) 0.95 or y 1.645 .
y2 1.6452
Thus, nN 1,082 claims.
k2 0.052
In practical applications appropriate values of P and k have to be selected. (For situations
that come up repeatedly, the choice of P and k may have been made several decades ago,
but nevertheless the choice was made at some point in time.)
While there is clearly judgment involved in the choice of P and k, the standards for full
credibility for a given application are generally chosen within a similar range.
In other words, different practitioners have tended to use the same values of P and k, particularly
for problems which arise quite frequently, and these have hardened into market practice over the
years. Even where practitioners use different values of P and k depending on their subjective
judgement, they are still likely to be reasonably similar.
This same type of judgment is involved in the choice of when forming a 100 1 %
confidence interval around a statistical estimate of a quantity.
The Core Reading is here talking about the choice of k.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 15
The standard for full credibility is not normally important in itself, but is important as a
means of introducing consistency in the rate-making procedure and establishing proper
relationships as regards reliability between different volumes of experience.
Often 2 standard deviations (corresponding to about a 95% confidence interval) will be chosen,
but that is not necessarily better than choosing 1.5 or 2.5 standard deviations. So while
classical credibility involves somewhat arbitrary judgements, this has not stood in the way of its
being very useful for decades in many applications.
Variations from the Poisson assumptions
As we have seen, if one desires that the chance of being within a proportion k of the mean
frequency be at least P, then the standard for full credibility is:
y2
nN
k2
where y is such that
1 P
y .
2
However, this depends on the following assumptions:
we are trying to estimate frequency
frequency is given by a Poisson process (so that the variance is equal to the mean)
there are enough expected claims to use the normal approximation to the Poisson
process.
Occasionally, a binomial or negative binomial distribution will be substituted for a Poisson
distribution, in which case the difference in the derivation is that the variance is not equal to
the mean.
Example
Assume that claim frequency has a binomial distribution with parameters n 1,000 and
p 0.3.
Recall that for X Bin(n, p) we have E ( X ) np and var( X ) np(1 p) . We now use the normal
approximation, equating np and np(1 p) .
The mean is 300 and the variance is 1,000 0.3 0.7 210 .
Let’s say that we want a required proportion k 5% , ie the observed frequency should be within
5% of the mean.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-18: Credibility theory
Using equation (18.1), the chance of being within 5% of the expected value can be
calculated as:
0.05np 0.05np
P 0.95np X 1.05np P Z
np(1 p) np(1 p)
0.05 300 0.05 300
P 0.5
Z
210 2100.5
where Z is standard normal. Therefore:
0.05 300 0.05 300 0.05 300
0.5
0.5 2 1
210 210 2100.5
2 1.04 1
2 0.85083 1
70.2%
This is our required probability P (approximately 70%).
So, in the case of a binomial with parameters 1,000 and 0.3, the standard for full credibility
with P 70% and k 5% is about 1,000 exposures or 300 expected claims. This is a
smaller expected number of claims than under the Poisson assumption.
Question
(i) Explain why we would expect the standard for full credibility to be lower under a binomial
assumption of claim frequency than under a Poisson assumption.
(ii) Calculate the corresponding number of claims required for full credibility under the
Poisson assumption.
The average policyholder can be expected to make 3 claims over a 10 year period.
(iii) Determine how many policies need to be in force to be able to assign full credibility to the
claims data.
(Standards for full credibility in terms of exposure numbers instead of claim numbers are
discussed below.)
Solution
(i) If claim frequencies follow a binomial distribution, the variance will be lower than the
mean. We will therefore require fewer data points in order to be reasonably sure that our
observed frequency falls within a specified range around the true mean.
(ii) For P 70% and k 5% :
1P
(y ) 0.85
2
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 17
So:
y 1.0364
and:
y2
nN 2
k
1.03642
0.052
429.65
In other words, at least 430 claims observations are required to assign full credibility.
(iii) The underlying claim frequency is believed to be 0.3 claims per year.
This is consistent with the claim frequency assumed under the previous binomial model.
An insurer will naturally want to test the appropriateness of different models to its data,
as we are doing here.
Our standard for full credibility, in terms of number of claims is 430.
We also know that Exposure 0.3 430, so rearranging gives:
430
Exposure 1,433 .
0.3
If, instead, a negative binomial distribution had been assumed, then the variance would
have been greater than the mean. This would have resulted in a standard for full credibility
greater than in the Poisson situation.
We can derive a more general formula when the Poisson assumption does not apply. The
standard for full credibility for frequency is:
y2 N2
nN 2 (18.6)
k N
There is an ‘extra’ factor of the variance of the frequency divided by its mean. This reduces
2
to the Poisson case when N N 1 .
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-18: Credibility theory
Question
Explain in words the impact of this extra factor on the volume of data required for full credibility.
Solution
The standard for credibility is a function of the ratio between the mean and the variance of the
underlying frequency distribution. The greater the variance (as a proportion of the mean), the
higher the volume of data required for full credibility.
Exposures v claims
Standards for full credibility are calculated in terms of the expected number of claims. It is
common to translate these into a number of exposures by dividing by the (approximate)
expected claim frequency.
Example
If the standard for full credibility is 1,082 claims (P = 90%, k = 5%) and the expected claim
frequency in household insurance were 0.04 claims per house-year, then 1,082/0.04 ≈ 27,000
house-years would be a corresponding standard for full credibility in terms of exposures.
Subsequent sections deal with estimating severities or aggregate losses rather than
frequencies. As will be seen, in order to calculate a standard for full credibility for severities
or the aggregate losses, generally one first calculates a standard for full credibility for the
frequency.
2.3 Full credibility for severity
Classical credibility can also be applied to estimating claim severity; the average size of a
claim.
Suppose that we are given a sample of N claims, X 1 , X 2 , .. , X N , which are each
2
independently drawn from a loss distribution with mean X and variance X .
The suffix X above is used to denote claim severity.
The argument below is exactly analogous to that used in Section 2.2 above. We will:
1) first estimate the mean and variance of our claim size distribution, based on our observed
claims data
2) then use these in our normal approximation
3) then rearrange the resulting equations to derive a formula for the number of claims
needed to assign full credibility.
Throughout the discussion below, the term ‘severity’ is used to denote the (unknown) mean of
our underlying claim distribution, and ‘observed severity’ is the mean of our sample claims data.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 19
The severity (that is, the mean of the distribution) can be estimated by:
X
X 1 X 2 ... X N
Xi
N N
This is the observed mean severity, which is used to give an estimate of X .
The variance of the observed severity is:
X i 1
var
N N2
var X i
X2
N
X
Therefore, the standard deviation for the observed severity is .
N
These N ’s are assumed to be known.
The probability that the observed severity X is within a proportion k of the (true) mean
X is:
P Prob X k X X X k X
( X 1 X 2 ... X N )
According to the Central Limit Theorem, the distribution of X can be
N
approximated by a normal distribution for large N.
We are saying that a reasonable approximation would be to assume that X follows a normal
X X X
distribution with mean X and standard deviation , so that Z is standard normal.
N X N
Assuming that the normal approximation applies, we have from equation (18.1) that:
1
P 2 k X
N
X
2 k N X 1
X
Equivalently, subtracting the mean X , dividing by the standard deviation X and substituting
N
X X
Z for yields:
X N
P Prob k N X Z k N X
X X
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-18: Credibility theory
This formula is in fact the same as formula that precedes equation (18.1), except that every term
is multiplied by N . So the two results are analogous.
1 P
As in Section 2.2 when estimating claim frequencies, we define y such that y .
2
Question
Derive a formula for y in terms of N, k, X and X .
Solution
So far, we know that the probability that our observed average claim size is within a proportion
k of the true mean X is:
P Prob k N X Z k N X
X X
where Z is standard normal.
Therefore:
X
P k N X 1 k N
X X
2 k N X 1
X
which is exactly analogous to equation (18.1).
Rearranging gives:
1 P
k N X
X 2
which is exactly analogous to equation (18.3).
In other words:
yk N X
X
To have probability P that the observed severity will differ from the true severity by less
than k X , we want y k n X X where n X is the required sample size for full
X
credibility for severity.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 21
Solving for n X :
2 2
y
nX = X (18.7)
k X
X
The ratio of the standard deviation to the mean, CV X , is the coefficient of variation of
X
the claim size distribution.
Since nN is the standard for full credibility of frequency, we have that:
nX nNCVX2 (18.8)
The Core Reading here is assuming that claim frequency follows a Poisson distribution, so that
y2
nN 2 . (We saw this result in Section 2.2.) If claim frequency does not follow a Poisson
k
distribution, formula (18.7) should be used.
This is the standard for full credibility for severity.
So any observed number of claims that is greater than this should be assigned full credibility.
Question
Assume that claim frequencies follow a Poisson distribution, and that individual claim sizes follow
a lognormal distribution with parameters 3.615 and 2 1.980 . You want to be 90% sure
that the observed mean claim size will not differ from the underlying mean claim size by more
than 5%.
Calculate how many observed claims you need in order to assign full credibility to your data.
Solution
The full credibility standard for claim frequency is:
y2
nN 2 where y 1.645 .
k
Hence:
1.6452
nN 1,082 .
0.052
Alternatively, you could have looked at the table in Section 2.2.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-18: Credibility theory
We find the mean X and variance X2 of the lognormal distribution:
12 2 3.615 12 1.980
X e e 99.983 , and
X2 e2 2
2
23.6151.980
e 1 e e1.980 1 62,406 .
So the coefficient of variation is:
X 62,406
2.499
X 99.983
And the required credibility standard is:
N nNCVX2
1,082 2.4992
6,757.
2.4 Full credibility for aggregate losses
Since they depend on both the number of claims and the size of claims, aggregate losses
and loss ratios have more reasons to vary than either frequency or severity. As a
consequence, the standard for full credibility is larger than that for frequency or severity.
Suppose that N claims of sizes X1 , X2 , .. , XN occur during the observation period.
Aggregate losses, S, can be represented using the collective risk model, where
S X 1 X 2 ... X N
Let S and S denote the mean and standard deviation of S. For large numbers of
expected claims, aggregate losses are approximately normally distributed. (The more
skewed the severity distribution, the higher the frequency has to be for the normal
approximation to produce worthwhile results).
Assuming a normal approximation for S, full credibility standards can be calculated
following the same steps as in Sections 2.2 and 2.3.
The probability that the observed aggregate loss is within a proportion k of the mean S
is:
P Prob S k S S S k S
Prob k s Z k s
s s
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 23
S S
where Z is a standard normal variable, assuming the normal approximation.
S
We now follow a very similar argument to Section 2.2, when we derived the standard for full
credibility for frequency.
Applying equation (18.1), we have that
P 2 k S 1
S
Define y such that (y )
1 P
(see Section 2.2 for more details). Then, to have
2
probability P that the observed pure premium will differ from the true pure premium by less
than k S :
y k S (18.9)
S
Question
Derive this result.
Solution
We know the probability that the observed aggregate loss is within a proportion k . of the mean
S is:
P Prob S k S S S k S
S
Prob k S z k
S S
where z
S S is a standard normal variable. (This assumes that the aggregate loss follows a
S
normal distribution with mean S and standard deviation S .)
Then:
S
P k S k
S S
S
k S 1 k
S S
2 k S 1
S
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-18: Credibility theory
Rearranging:
1 P
k S
2
S
so that:
1P
(y ) where y k S .
2 S
We now consider the special case where S has a Compound Poisson distribution.
Suppose that the frequency is Poisson with mean n. S is then said to have a Compound
Poisson distribution. The mean and variance of S were derived in Subject CS2:
S n X (18.10)
S2 n X2 X2 (18.11)
These are the standard results for the mean and variance of a compound Poisson distribution.
Substituting for S and S in equation (18.9), the expected number of claims, nS , required
for full credibility (equating nS to n) for aggregate losses satisfies:
nS X
y k
1
2 2 2
nS X X
Solving for nS :
y
2 2
nS 1 X
k X
2
nN 1 CV X2 (18.12)
This is the standard for full credibility of the aggregate loss.
2
y
Recall that nN is the standard for full credibility of frequency that was derived in
k
Section 2.2, and CVX X is the coefficient of variation of the severity.
X
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 25
It is interesting to note that the standard for full credibility of the aggregate loss is the sum
of the standards for frequency and severity:
nS nN 1 CV X2
nN nN CV X2
nN n X
Standard for full credibility of frequency
Standard for full credibility of severity
Recall from equation (18.8) that nX nNCVX2 .
Note: if we limit the size of claims, then the coefficient of variation is smaller. Therefore, the
criterion for full credibility for basic limits losses is less than that for total losses. It is a
common practice in rate-making to cap losses in order to increase the credibility assigned
to the data.
If claims amounts are limited then there will be more certainty attached to their values. Also, by
capping large losses, the claim amounts below the cap limit can be grouped with the attritional
(ie small) claims and modelled together. Of course, a loading should be included in the premium
rates for that portion of large losses that exceeds the cap level.
Variations from the Poisson assumption
As with the standard for full credibility of frequency, one can derive a more general formula
when the Poisson assumption does not apply. The standard for full credibility is:
2
y
2
2
nS N X (18.13)
k N X
2
Question
Derive this result.
Solution
Recall that the mean and variance of a compound distribution are:
E(S) E(N)E(X )
and
var(S) E(N)var(X ) var(N)[E(X )]2
(These formulae are on page 16 of the Tables.)
Given N nS is the expected number of claims for aggregate losses, then:
S N X nS X and S2 N X2 N2 X2 .
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-18: Credibility theory
Substituting for S and S in equation (18.9) gives:
nS X
y k
1
2 2 2 2
N X N X
Solving for nS (and using N nS ):
2
y 2 2 2
nS N X 2N X
k N X
2
y 2 2
N 2X
k N
X
(We have assumed in the solution above that claim numbers and amounts are independent.)
N2 2
This reduces to the Poisson case when 1 . If the severity is constant then X is zero
N
and (18.13) reduces to (18.6).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 27
2.5 Partial credibility
When one has at least the number of claims needed for full credibility, then one assigns
100% credibility to the observations. However, when there is less data than is needed for
full credibility, less than 100% credibility is assigned.
Recall that the formula for calculating the credibility-weighted estimates is:
Estimate Z Observation (1 Z ) Other information , 0 Z 1 ,
which we can write as:
Estimate Z Xn (1 Z ) other , 0 Z 1
where Xn is the observed sample mean.
If the number of claims observations n in our data is less than the number required for full
credibility nN , ie n nN then the uncertainty surrounding the sample mean (ie the variance of the
sample mean) will be higher than that under full credibility.
We can choose our partial credibility factor Z such that the variance of our credibility-weighted
estimate is the same as it would be if we had fully credible data:
var X nN var Z X n (1 Z ) other
This argument leads to the ‘square root rule’:
Square root rule
Let n be the (expected) number of claims for the volume of data, and nN be the standard
n
for full credibility. Then the partial credibility assigned is Z .
nN
If n nN , then Z 1 . Use of the square root rule applies for partial credibility for either
frequency, severity or aggregate losses.
The Core Reading now provides a derivation of the square root rule.
Derivation of square root rule
The square root rule for partial credibility is designed so that the standard deviation of the
contribution of the data to the new estimate retains the value corresponding to the standard
for full credibility.
We will demonstrate why the square root rule accomplishes that goal.
Let X partial be a value calculated from partially credible data; for example, X partial might be
the claim frequency calculated from the data. Assume X full is calculated from data that
just meets the full credibility standard.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-18: Credibility theory
For the full credibility data, the estimate = X full , while the partially credible data enters the
estimate with a weight Z in front of it, ie:
estimate Z X partial (1 Z ) other information
The credibility factor Z is calculated so that the expected variation in Z X partial is limited to
the variation allowed in a full credibility estimate X full . The variance of Z X partial can be
reduced by choosing a Z less than one.
Suppose you have estimates X partial and X full based on different size samples of a
population. Then they will have the same expected value. But, since it is based on a
smaller sample size, X partial will have a larger standard deviation partial than the standard
deviation full of the full credibility estimate X full . The goal is to limit the fluctuation in the
term Z X partial to that allowed for X full . This can be written as:
P Prob k X full k Prob Z k ZX partial Z k
Here, is the value of the true underlying mean.
(Note that in both cases fluctuations are limited to k of the mean)
Taking the right hand side of this equation and subtracting through by the mean and
dividing by the standard deviation gives:
k ZX partial Z k
P Prob
Z partial Z partial Z partial
(Note: the mean of Z X partial is Z and the standard deviation is Z partial .)
ZX partial Z
Z partial
Assuming that X partial is approximately normally distributed (so that is
approximately a standard normal variable), we have:
k
P 2 1
Z partial
This is derived in exactly the same way as for equation (18.1).
Rearranging the equation above, we have:
1 P k
2 Z partial
Since P is the acceptable proportion for full credibility, we have from equation (18.5) that
k
y
Z partial
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 29
Solving for Z yields:
k
Z (18.14)
y partial
Thus, the partial credibility Z will be inversely proportional to the standard deviation of the
partially credible data.
Assuming that we are trying to estimate frequency where a Poisson distribution holds with
the expected number of claims n being less than that required for full credibility
2
y
(ie n nN ), we have:
k
kn n n
Z (18.15)
y n k
y nN
For a Poisson distribution, n and n , and substituting these into equation (18.14) gives
equation (18.15).
This proves the square root rule for frequency and a similar result is arrived at when
estimating severity or the aggregate loss.
Note that this proof requires the assumptions of the normal approximation and a Poisson claims
distribution.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-18: Credibility theory
3 Classical and Bayesian credibility models
In the previous section, we discussed the ‘classical’ credibility formula, and saw how we can
choose our partial credibility factor Z such that the variance of our credibility-weighted estimate
is the same as it would be if we had fully credible data. This section compares the classical
credibility formula with another method of choosing a value for Z ; the ‘Bayesian’ credibility
formula.
3.1 Classical credibility formula
This chapter provides the motivation for the following formula for the ‘classical’ credibility
factor Zc:
( n ) 12 0 n n
N
ZC = nN (18.16)
1 n nN
where n is the number of claims and nN is the standard for full credibility.
This is the credibility factor derived in equation (18.15) above.
3.2 Bayesian credibility formula
The ‘Bayesian’ credibility factor ZB, based on the principle of minimising the mean square
error, is given by:
n
ZB = (18.17)
nk
E s 2
where k
var m
k is called the Bayesian credibility parameter. You can think of n k as the standard for full
credibility under Bayesian credibility, although at this point we do not necessarily know what
value to assign to k .
3.3 Comparison of the two equations
We need to consider the practical impact of choosing between classical and Bayesian credibility.
The answer depends on the parameters used in the two credibility formulas. For a certain simple
relationship between the parameters, the choice between classical and Bayesian credibility makes
only a relatively small difference and for many practical applications this difference is acceptable.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 31
Although the formulae are very different, classical credibility and Bayesian credibility can
produce similar results as illustrated below for the case nN 1,000 and k 140 :
Classical versus Bayesian Credibility
1.2
1
Credibility Z
0.8
Classical
0.6
Bayesian
0.4
0.2
0
0 500 1000 1500
Number of claims
Classical and Bayesian credibility formulae will produce approximately the same credibility
weights if the full credibility standard for classical credibility nN is about 7 to 8 times larger
than the Bayesian credibility factor k .
So, for most practical applications, we could find the Bayesian credibility factor, k, and multiply
by 8 to get the number of claims for full credibility, nN . When estimating k, we do not need to be
extremely precise as even an inaccurate estimate of k can still produce a fairly good estimate.
The most significant difference between the two models is that Bayesian credibility never
reaches Z 1 , which is an asymptote of the curve. Either model can be effective at
improving the stability and accuracy of estimates.
For a particular application, the actuary can choose the model appropriate to the data and
goals.
Where estimates of E s 2 and var m are available, Bayesian credibility generates
the most accurate insurance rates and forms the basis of most experience rating plans.
Classical credibility can be used if these estimates are unknown or difficult to calculate and
is often used in the calculation of overall rate increases.
As well as the consideration as to which model gives the most accurate results, there may be
other reasons for choosing one model over another.
Larger insureds with favourable claim results usually want their future insurance premiums
to be based solely on their own experience and can do so where standards for full
credibility are met.
Classical credibility is simpler to work with and easier to explain to non-actuaries.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8-18: Credibility theory
4 Practical uses of credibility models: complements of credibility
Many actuarial papers discuss credibility. Actuaries use credibility when data is sparse and
lacks statistical credibility. Specifically, actuaries use it when historical losses have a large
error around the underlying expected losses (average of the distribution of potential loss
costs) that the actuary is estimating.
For example, if the premium rating statistic varies around the true expected losses with a
standard deviation equal to its mean, it will probably have a very low credibility. Therefore,
the vast majority of the rate (in this context, expected loss estimate) will come from
whatever statistic receives the complement of credibility. So it is important to use an
effective statistic for the ancillary statistic (hereafter called the complement of credibility).
4.1 Fundamental principles – what should the actuary consider?
There are four types of issues that any actuary must consider when choosing the
complement:
practical issues
competitive market issues
regulatory issues, and
statistical issues.
We now discuss each of these factors in more detail. We then finish this section by summarising
the desirable qualities of a complement of credibility.
Practical issues
The easiest statistic to use is one that is readily available.
For example, the best possible statistic is next year’s loss costs. Unfortunately, that
statistic is not available (otherwise, companies would not need actuaries). The actuary
must choose from the statistics that are available. Since some statistics require more
complicated programming or expensive processing than others, some statistics are more
readily available than others.
Ease of computation is another factor to consider. If a statistic is easy to compute, it is
often easier to explain to management and customers. Since few actuaries have unlimited
budgets, they usually weigh the time involved in computing a very accurate statistic against
the accuracy improvement it generates. Also, when computations are easy to do there is
less chance of error.
Competitive market issues
Rates are rarely made in a vacuum. Generally, whatever rate the actuary produces will be
subject to market competition.
If the rate is too high, competitors can undercut the rate and still make a profit. That will
cost the actuary’s employer customers and profit opportunities. If the rate is too low, the
employer will lose money.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 33
So, in mathematical terms, the rate should be:
unbiased (neither too high nor too low over a large number of loss cost estimates)
and
accurate (the rate should have as low an error variance as possible around the
future expected losses being estimated).
Also, the difference between lack of bias and accuracy is important. An unbiased statistic
varies randomly about the following year’s losses over many successive years, but it may
not be close. An accurate statistic may average higher or lower than the following year’s
losses, but it is always close.
Ultimately, the complement of the credibility should help make the rate as unbiased and
accurate as possible.
Regulatory issues
Sometimes, rates require some level of approval from insurance regulators. The classic
rate regulatory law requires that rates be ‘not inadequate, not excessive, and not unfairly
discriminatory’.
The principles of adequacy and non-excessiveness imply that rates should be as unbiased
as possible. For most purposes, actuaries interpret ‘not unfairly discriminatory’ in the
premium rating context as ‘unbiased’. Many believe that if a rate truly reflects a class’s
probable loss experience, it is fair by definition.
Those principles could be stretched to imply that rates should be accurate. The argument
goes as follows: inaccurate rates create a much greater risk of insolvency through random
inadequacies. The law is concerned with inadequacy because it seeks to prevent
insolvencies. So, law suggests rates should be as accurate as possible.
The actuary can mitigate regulatory concerns by choosing a complement that has some
logical relationship to the loss costs of the class or individual being rated. That means that
it is easier to explain a high rate for a class or individual in light of the related loss costs.
Statistical issues
Clearly, the actuary must attempt to produce the most accurate rate that is practical, but in
doing so, must consider all the types of error that make up the prediction error.
(The prediction error is the squared difference between the credibility-weighted prediction
and actual results, so it is a measure of the accuracy of the credibilityweighted estimate.)
There are, of course, the natural year-to-year variations in losses about the true mean due to
process variance. There may also be errors because the predictor has a different mean
than the losses (bias).
The error of the predictor may stem from the error of its components. The historical losses
(the usual base statistic), when trended and developed, will contain prediction errors
because the factors used to bring losses to a fully developed current cost level are different
to what will happen (loss development and trend variance). When mathematical models of
losses are used as complements, there may be errors in both the type of model used (model
error) and the specific parameters selected for the model (parameter error). All of these
(including any process error and bias of the complement) contribute to prediction error and
reduce the accuracy of the prediction.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8-18: Credibility theory
Process uncertainty, model uncertainty and parameter uncertainty are discussed in Chapter 9 and
in Subject SP7.
If the complement of the credibility is accurate in its own right and relatively independent of
the base statistic (which receives the credibility), the resulting rate will be more accurate.
The rationale involves statistical properties of credibility-weighted estimates. The details of
these statistical properties are not discussed in the Core Reading. However, interested students
may like to read ‘The Complement of Credibility’ by Joseph A. Boor, from which much of this
section has been drawn, available at www.casact.org. We discuss the impact of these statistical
properties below:
The error in the credibility estimate depends on the errors in the base statistic and the
complement of credibility. In other words, the greater the inaccuracy of either the base statistic
or the ancillary statistic, the greater the increase in the inaccuracy of the credibility-weighted
estimate.
The accuracy of the complement of credibility is just as important as the accuracy of the
base statistic.
The benefits of independence are subtler. As it turns out, independence is most important
when credibility is most important. That is, independence is most important for the
intermediate credibilities (Z between 10% and 90%). In other words, the greater the
independence between the base statistic and ancillary statistic, the greater the accuracy of the
credibility-weighted estimate, particularly for 10% Z 90% .
In fact, the prediction is best when there is a negative correlation between the errors of the two
statistics (ie when the errors offset each other), but this is rarely the case in practice. In general
the two statistics will be positively correlated to some extent.
So, a complement of credibility is best when it is statistically independent of (that is, not
related to) the base statistic.
4.2 Summary of desirable qualities
The previous section showed six desirable qualities for a complement of credibility:
accuracy as a predictor of next year’s mean loss costs (that is, low variance around
next year’s mean loss costs)
unbiasedness as a predictor of next year’s mean expected losses (that is, the
differences between the predictor and the subsequent loss costs should average out
near zero)
independence from the base statistic
availability of data
ease of computation
explainable relationship to the loss costs of the class or individual being rated.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 35
Other factors to consider when choosing the complement include:
ease of explanation to managers and customers
the time taken to calculate the complement (balanced against the need for accuracy)
the chance of error in calculating the complement
the sources of error in the complement.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8-18: Credibility theory
5 Bühlmann-Straub credibility model
The Bühlmann-Straub model was developed in 1970 in the determination of claims ratios in
reinsurance. It is still by far the most widely used and important credibility model in
insurance practice. However, since then a variety of applications has been found for its use
in both life and non-life insurance, in primary insurance as well as reinsurance.
5.1 Motivation
Let us assume that for a class of business eg motor third party liability insurance the
actuary is tasked with estimating the ‘true’ pure risk premium for a future period. This may
be done on the basis of individual claim observations Xik for risk i in year k or from
benchmarking the risk i against other similar risks. The question becomes how much
relevance should be given to the results of each method.
To solve this problem we are going to use the Bühlmann-Straub Model.
5.2 Bühlmann-Straub Model
Definitions
Let us define:
Vi = Volume measure (eg volume = premium income) for risk i
Si = insurance claims for risk i
X i = claims ratio (= Si Vi ) for risk i .
S1 , S2 ,...Sn are random variables representing the aggregate claims for each risk 1,2,...,n .
The random variable Xi represents the aggregate claims, or the number of claims for risk i,
standardised to remove the effect of the size of each risk.
Since Si is a random variable then the corresponding claims ratio must also be a random variable.
It is assumed that the volume measure Vi and the claims ratio X i are based upon the
volume measures Vik and claims ratios X ik for risk i across all years k .
For example, Vi and Si might be the sums of the previous k years of historical data for risk i, so
that Xi would be the long-run average claims ratio, based on historical data.
We are trying to estimate next year’s claims ratio for risk i, ie Xi ,k 1 .
We now assume that the distribution of each X ik depends on the value of a parameter i , whose
value is the same for each year k but is unknown.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 37
The Bühlmann-Straub assumptions are that there exists a latent parameter i (which can be
characterised as a risk profile and which in itself is a random variable) such that:
E X ik i i (that is, the underlying long-run claims ratio of risk i)
2 i
var X ik i (that is, the variance of the observed claims ratio of
Vik
risk i is inversely proportional to the volume measure
of risk i).
Other assumptions are:
The i th risk is described by the pair, (i , ( X ik )k 1) where ( X ik )k 1 is the sequence
of claims ratios observed for risk i in years k .
The pairs (i , ( X ik )k 1) are mutually independent.
The i are independent and identically distributed.
Conditionally on i , the X ik ’s are independent (but not necessarily identically
distributed).
It then follows that:
E X ik i does not depend on k .
Vik Var X ik i does not depend on k .
The first of the two expressions above is saying that, for a given risk i , the expected value of the
claims ratio (as a function of i ) does not vary from one year to the next.
Similarly, the volume-adjusted variance of the claims ratio (as a function of i ) for a given risk
does not vary from year to year.
Now define and :
E i (that is, the benchmark claims ratio).
Recall from your knowledge of conditional expectations that E X E E X Y , so that:
E i
E E X ik i
E ( X ik ).
So is the average claims ratio across all risks. Recall that we are trying to estimate next year’s
claims ratio using a weighted-average of past data for the risk in question and ancillary data.
Since is derived from data not relating to the specific risk, it is the ancillary statistic, or as the
Core Reading calls it, the benchmark claims ratio.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 38 SP8-18: Credibility theory
We also define:
E 2 i (that is, the expected variance of the observed claims
ratios per unit of V ).
By definition, 2 i Vik var X ik i , so that E 2 i E Vik var Xik i .
is therefore the average variability of the observed claims ratios, allowing for the average
volume of data in each cell.
var i (that is, the variance of the long-run claims ratios for
all risks).
By definition, var i var E Xik i .
Now that we have defined the model, we can use it to derive a formula for the
credibility-weighted estimate for Xi ,k 1 .
You are not required to derive the formulae.
Bühlmann-Straub Formula
For fixed values of , and the best linear estimator C BE of i (with respect to the
mean squared error) is the credibility estimator:
C BE zi X i 1 zi
where:
Vi
zi .
Vi
Notes
The expression for cBE takes the form of a credibility-weighted average of the observed
(experience) claims ratio for risk i and the benchmark claims ratio.
The weight given to the observed experience for risk i increases when:
Vi increases (ie the credibility increases if the claims ratio X i is based on a greater
exposure period or a larger risk size)
decreases (ie the credibility increases if the inherent variability of X i per unit of
Vi for each risk i is smaller)
increases (ie the credibility increases if there is wide variation of the long run
claims ratios in the benchmark portfolio).
Note the similarities between this approach and a Bayesian credibility approach. Indeed,
with certain distributions and parameters the two methods will yield the same result.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 39
Note that the Bühlmann-Straub Formula tells us how to estimate the value of Xi ,k 1 , the claims
ratio for risk i for the coming year. If we want to estimate Si ,k 1 , the aggregate claim amount
for the coming year for risk i, we have to multiply our estimate of Xi ,k 1 by Vi ,k 1 , the risk volume
for the coming year.
In other words:
Pure Premium = Claims Ratio (= Insurance Claims / Volume) Volume. For example, in
motor insurance the volume measure would be the number of vehicle-years; or in fire
insurance sums insured.
Let’s look at an example.
Example
You manage a small, specialist portfolio, where the total losses were Y1 £5,400 in year one and
Y2 £3,780 in year two. The number of policies sold were V1 6 in year one and V2 24 in year
two.
V
You believe that the distribution of your average losses in year k is Xk ~ Gamma Vk , k , where
~ U 50,500 .
Calculate the Bühlmann-Straub risk premium for the total losses in year three, assuming that you
sell V3 12 policies next year.
Solution
Note that there is only one risk here so we do not need a subscript i corresponding to the risk.
Using the formulae for the mean and variance of the gamma distribution given in the Tables, we
get:
E Xk
Vk
Vk
2 Vk Var X k Vk
Vk
2.
Vk 2
Similarly, using the formulae for the mean, variance and second moment of the uniform
distribution given in the Tables, we get:
E E 275
E 2 E 2 92,500
Var Var 16,875.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 40 SP8-18: Credibility theory
We now use the Bühlmann-Straub formula for the credibility factor. The volume figure V is equal
to the total exposure (ie total number of policies) over the previous two years (ie V V1 V2 30 )
and the base statistic is the average claims ratio over the previous two years.
V 30
Z 0.84551
V 30 92,500
16,875
Y Y 5,400 3,780
X3 1 2 306.
V1 V2 30
So the Bühlmann-Straub credibility premium per unit of volume is:
C BE Z X (1 Z )
Z 306 (1 Z ) 275
301.211.
So the risk premium for the total losses in year three is 301.211 12 £3,614.53 .
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 41
6 Practical uses of credibility models: experience rating plans
In practice, many different forms of credibility model are used in experience rating, and the
choice of model will depend on the class of business concerned, market practice in the territory
where the business is written and the preferences of the individual insurer.
This section discusses the factors to consider when deciding which credibility model to use in
practice.
When designing experience rating plans (ie when deciding what form of experience rating to
use), there are some administrative considerations that cannot be overlooked. The first is
that experience ratings are done frequently and so simplicity is of paramount importance.
A second consideration is that experience rating, as opposed to class rating, is very visible
to the individual insured. A consequence of this is that the experience rating plans must
give due consideration to what the insured perceives to be fair. Historically, these plans
have done this by including the following two features:
1) A single claim should change the premium by no more than a predetermined
amount. This predetermined amount is known as the swing of the experience rating
plan.
2) All insureds above a certain predetermined size are self-rated; that is they are rated
entirely on the basis of their own experience.
In addition to the administrative considerations mentioned above, there are some
mathematical considerations. The mathematical foundations of experience rating come
from Bayesian estimation and credibility theory. The success of the application of Bayesian
estimation and credibility theory depends upon how closely the model represents reality.
So the choice of model should be a good fit to the situation being modelled.
The experience rating formulae derived from administrative considerations may be different
from those derived from the mathematical credibility considerations, often referred to as
‘theoretical’ formulae. We would judge the formulae to be compatible if the accuracy of the
‘practical’ formula (ie where a simplified model is used) is near that of the ‘theoretical’
(ie unsimplified) formula. Whilst it is by no means certain that accuracy in simplified models
implies accuracy in real life situations, inaccuracy in a simplified model should imply that
something is wrong with the formula being tested. So there is a balance to be made between
simplicity and accuracy.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 42 SP8-18: Credibility theory
7 Practical uses of credibility models: credibility and data
considerations
Another estimation problem concerns the credibility of the data. Since competition
encourages insurers to refine their classification systems, refinement will generally
continue to the point where the credibility of the data becomes minimal.
The competitive nature of insurance means that insurers need to charge as accurate a premium
as possible. If the premium is too high they will lose business, but if it is too low then the business
will be unprofitable.
In an effort to improve the accuracy of their premium rates, insurers will try to divide their risks
into homogeneous sub-groups. This makes the data within each sub-group more characteristic of
that group, removing any distortions in the results and enabling a more accurate premium to be
charged. The problem is that if the data is grouped into too many sub-divisions, there will not be
enough data in each group to allow a credible analysis.
When we estimate a group’s future cost, we can use credibility to compare the relevance of
the group’s past cost to the relevance of the credibility complement’s cost. Assume, for
example, that the task is to estimate the cost of Group A. If Group A has a large body of
data, that experience alone may be sufficient for estimating its cost. As Group A becomes
smaller, at some point it will be useful to compare Group A’s empirical costs to the cost of
some other group. This other group is the credibility complement. Group A’s empirical
cost may be twice the cost of the complement. Since Group A has less data or less reliable
data, the actuary may decide that Group A’s true cost is only 60% higher than the
complement. This is just saying that we can estimate future values by using a mix of past data
and ancillary (or credibility complement) data.
Thus, two credibility-related problems emerge:
(1) how to obtain more data or more reliable data
(2) what is the most appropriate credibility complement?
Obtaining more (or more reliable) data can be done in several ways. Most obviously, more
years of data or, possibly, data from several areas of the country (or countrywide) can be
used. Of course, the threshold question is whether the broader base actually applies, ie is
the extra data relevant? Has there been a change over time? Do national indications apply
in each area?
Another method is to give more weight to more stable phenomena. For example, relativities
can be based primarily on frequency (by looking only at claim counts or by limiting the size
of claims), instead of pure premiums.
No claims discount systems are a good example of this, where the premium depends in part on
the number of previous claims on a policy but not on the amounts of those claims.
Partial pure premiums can be calculated. For example, property damage liability costs may
be more stable than bodily injury liability; employers’ liability medical costs may be more
stable than deaths or permanent disabilities. In determining relativities, more emphasis
(credibility) is given to the more stable phenomena.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 43
In other words, the insurer could calculate the premium for each claim type under a policy and
then calculate the final premium as a mix of these partial premiums. It will give more weighting
to the more stable claim types.
The choice of credibility complement may be more difficult than obtaining more (or more
reliable) data. It may not be clear which group is most similar to the group in question.
National or regional data may be applicable. Related industry group data may be applicable.
In most of these cases, adjustments must be made because the level of costs can be quite
different for the complement. Often, the percentage change in the complement is
considered, rather than the actual value. As a last resort, the complement may be based on
the prior year’s analysis; this, in effect, takes more years of data into account.
Finally, it should be noted that the application of credibility theory is never purely one of
checking for adequacy of exposure and then employing formulae mechanically. The
assessment of the premium requires considerable judgement, even to allow for everyday
features in risk experience.
Large claims
To what extent should an individual risk be charged fully for its own experience, if it
suffered from a single large and unusual claim in the recent past? In considering
this matter, we need to think about what is large, what is unusual and what is recent?
If the individual risk is not to be fully ‘charged’ for its own claims, how is the surplus
to be spread over the balance of the experience-rated portfolio (and indeed the risk
itself)?
If we expect to receive these large claims at any point in the future then it is important
that we load for the cost of them somewhere, to avoid making losses. The unusual nature
of these claims makes it difficult to know which policy might give rise to the next one and
therefore difficult to know which policies to load.
Trends
To what extent should an individual risk’s future premium be adjusted for claims
trends that are an accepted feature of that line of business?
Inflation is possibly a candidate for adjustment. But, equally, patterns in recent
frequency and severity will need to be considered before accepting a risk premium
based purely on past experience.
We will be setting premium rates for future periods so it will almost always be necessary
to adjust for trends and inflation.
These issues have already been discussed in the burning cost approach to premium
rating in Chapter 14.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 44 SP8-18: Credibility theory
Divergence of book rate and observed experience
What should be done in practice when the credibility proposition is significantly
different from that suggested by normal underwriting, in either direction?
Certainly the risk proposed must be examined very carefully before one premium is
accepted ahead of the other; there may be business capture possibilities but,
equally, the insurer could lose considerably if key features are overlooked in the
chosen approach.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 45
8 Accreditation
The Faculty and Institute of Actuaries would like to thank the numerous people who have helped
in the development of the material contained in this Core Reading, and are grateful to the
Casualty Actuarial Society for permission to use some of its educational material for sections
within the Core Reading.
In particular various sections of this chapter have been used by permission of the Casualty
Actuarial Society. Republished with minor modifications from Foundations of Casualty Actuarial
Science, Fourth Edition, (Arlington, Virginia, USA: CAS, 2001).
Please note that the development of many of the numerical examples in Section 3 can be studied
further if necessary in the appendices and exhibits of ‘An actuarial note on credibility parameters’
by Howard C. Mahler, from which much of this section has been drawn.
http://www.casact.org/pubs/proceed/proceed86/86001.pdf
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 46 SP8-18: Credibility theory
The chapter summary starts on the next page so that you can
keep all the chapter summaries together for revision purposes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 47
Chapter 18 Summary
Claim frequencies and aggregate losses can be estimated using a combination of direct data
(ie data from the risk under consideration) and ancillary data (ie data from other similar, but
not identical, risks).
Credibility weighted estimate Z Observation (1 Z ) Other information, 0 Z 1
Standards for full credibility
If the goal is to be within a proportion k of the mean, , with a probability of at least P,
1P
then for y , the standard for full credibility is:
2
y2
Frequency (Poisson) nN 2
k
y2 2
Frequency (general) nN 2 N
k N
y2
Severity nX 2 CVX2 where CVX X X , the coefficient
k
of variation of the claim size
Aggregate losses (Poisson frequency) nS nN nX
2
y 2 2
Aggregate losses (general) nS N 2X .
k N
X
Partial credibility
If n is the (expected) number of claims for the volume of data and nN is the standard for full
credibility, then for n nN , Z 1 and for n nN :
1
ZC n
2
Classical formula (square root rule)
nN
n
Bayesian formula ZB (expressed in units of claims).
nk
For ZB ZC , choose nN to be about 7 to 8 times larger than the Bayesian factor k.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 48 SP8-18: Credibility theory
Bühlmann-Straub model
Definitions: Si represents the insurance claims for risk i
Vi represents the volume measure for risk i
Xi Si / Vi represents the claims ratio for risk i
i E X i i 2 i Vi Var Xi i
E i E 2 i Var i
Vi
Credibility factor: zi
Vi
Credibility premium: C BE zi X i 1 zi
Practical considerations
Issues to consider when using credibility theory in practice include:
simplicity
visibility consider imposing a maximum swing, or self-rating
goodness of fit ie accuracy versus simplicity
level of grouping versus accuracy
source of data more years / more locations / national data etc
stability of data eg weightings based on numbers, not amounts
use of partial premiums
choice of credibility complement accuracy / bias / independence from base
data / availability / ease of calculation / relationship to risk
the need to use considerable judgement when considering how to allow for large
claims, trends and differing opinions of the correct rate.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 49
Chapter 18 Practice Questions
18.1 Claim frequency per policy is expected to follow a Poisson distribution with parameter 0.05 .
Claim sizes are expected to follow a lognormal distribution with mean £1,200 and variance
£22,245,000 . Calculate the number of policies required for full credibility, if you want a 98%
probability of being within plus or minus 6% of the true pure premium.
18.2 You are reading an old library book on credibility theory and you come across the following result:
‘To obtain a probability P of the observed claims being within k % of the underlying mean, then
the standard for full credibility is:
y2 1P
nN 2 , where (y) .’
k 2
Unfortunately, a vandal has ripped out the following page, so you cannot read any further. State
the assumptions underlying the above result.
18.3 You require a 98% chance that your estimated claim frequency for your motor book is within
7.5% of the true underlying value. Calculate the number of claims required for full credibility.
(You may assume that claim frequency follows a Poisson distribution.)
18.4 The number of claims from one group of drivers in a year has a Poisson distribution with mean ,
and the number of claims from a second group of drivers has a Poisson distribution with mean
2 . In one year, there are n1 claims from group 1 and n2 claims from group 2.
(i) Derive the maximum likelihood estimator, ̂ , of .
(ii) Suppose that past experience shows that has an exponential distribution with
1
mean .
(a) Derive the posterior distribution of .
(b) Show that the Bayesian estimate of under quadratic loss may be written in the
form of a credibility estimate combining the prior mean of with the maximum
likelihood estimate ̂ in (i) and state the credibility factor.
18.5 Claim amounts follow a distribution with mean 800 and variance 6,400,000. You want to be 93%
sure that your estimate of claim severity is correct to within 5% . Find the number of claims
required for full credibility.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 50 SP8-18: Credibility theory
18.6 The full credibility standard for an insurer is set so that the total number of claims is to be within
2% of the true value with probability P . This full credibility standard is calculated to be 8,000
claims.
(i) Calculate P , assuming that claim frequency follows a Poisson distribution.
The pricing actuary then decides to take into account the claim severity as well as claim
frequency, so the standard is altered so that the total cost of claims is to be within 5% of the true
value with probability P .
Claim severity has the following distribution:
f (x) c(100 x) , for 0 x 100 .
(ii) Calculate the expected number of claims necessary to obtain full credibility under the new
standard.
An analysis of your claims data indicates that the number of claims has a negative binomial
distribution.
(iii) State how your answer to parts (i) and (ii) would differ if the number of claims has a
variance that is twice as large as the mean.
(iv) You have observed 1,230 claims. Use the square root rule to determine the credibility
weighting you should assign to your data, and state the advantage of using this rule.
18.7 The standard for full credibility for claim severity is 2,100 claims, and your observed claims data
totals £10,132,000. The observed number of claims is 1,096 and the expected number of claims
over the observation period is 1,000.
To supplement your data, you have analysed the claims arising on similar classes of business and
you believe the average cost per claim on these classes is £8,678.
Calculate a credibility-weighted estimate of the average cost per claim for the particular class of
business under consideration.
18.8 Property damage claims amongst your company’s insured drivers follow a claim size
distribution X . The standard for full credibility when estimating the average property damage
claim size is nX 9,000 claims for a given probability P and tolerance k . Liability claims follow a
distribution Y , where Y has a standard deviation that is twice as large as that for distribution X ,
and a mean that is larger than X ’s by a factor of 3.
Assuming that you require the same P and k for both claim types, calculate the standard for full
credibility for severity for liability claims.
18.9 Aggregate claims are assumed to follow a Poisson process, with claim severity X Gamma( , )
Exam style with 1.75 and 6 . Your standard for full credibility requires a 95% probability of being
within 5% of the true pure premium.
Calculate the credibility to be assigned to 263 claims. State any assumptions you make. [6]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 51
18.10 You have based your estimate of claim frequency on a data set of 900 claims, and you assume
Exam style
that claim frequency follows a Poisson distribution. The pricing actuary has asked you for a
measure of the uncertainty surrounding your work. Calculate the percentage probability that
your estimate will be within 6% of the underlying value. [3]
18.11 You work for a general insurer who has always assumed that claim numbers follow a Poisson
Exam style
distribution. However, your analysis suggests that the number of claims is more likely to be
negative binomial with parameters k 15 and p 0.6 .
Calculate the percentage increase in the number of claims required for full credibility. [4]
18.12 In any year j ( j 1,..., n ), there are N j claims from mj policies. The number of claims on an
Exam style individual policy is Poisson with parameter ~ Gamma , .
(i) Describe the assumptions underlying the Bühlmann-Straub model. [4]
(ii) Find the Bühlmann-Straub estimate of the total number of claims in year n 1 if the
number of policies next year is mn1 . [9]
[Total 13]
18.13 You are given the following information for a class of general insurance business:
Exam style the number of claims is Poisson
the severity distribution is lognormal with parameters 10 and 1.9
full credibility is defined as having a 95% probability of being within plus or minus 1% of the
true aggregate loss.
Calculate the minimum number of expected claims that will be given full credibility. [7]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 52 SP8-18: Credibility theory
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 53
Chapter 18 Solutions
y2
The minimum expected number of claims is nS nN nX , where nN 2 and nX nN CVX .
2
18.1
k
So:
1 P 1 0.98
y 0.99 , so that y 2.3263 .
2 2
Hence,
2
y 2 2.3263
nN 2 1503.242 .
k 0.06
And
2
nX nN CVX
2
nN X where
X
2,245,000
nX 1,503.242 2,343.596
1,2002
So nS 1,503.304 2,343.596 3,846.900
The expected claim frequency is 0.05 so that the required number of policies is
nS 76,938 .
18.2 We are trying to estimate claim frequency.
Frequency is given by a Poisson process (so that the variance is equal to the mean).
There are enough expected claims to use the normal approximation to the Poisson process.
We do not need to use a continuity correction when applying the normal approximation.
y2
18.3 nN 2 where k 0.075 and
k
1 P 1 0.98
y 0.99 , so that y 2.326 .
2 2
So:
2.3262
nN 962 claims are required for full credibility.
0.0752
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 54 SP8-18: Credibility theory
18.4 This question is revision of the material covered in earlier subjects. The Core Reading for Subject
SP8 does not go into this much depth. However, since Subject SP8 does cover the Bayesian
formula for the credibility factor Z , this question is still useful preparation for the exam.
(i) Maximum likelihood estimate
In our sample we have obtained a value of n1 from a Poisson distribution with parameter
, and a value of n2 from a Poisson distribution with parameter 2 . By definition, the
likelihood is the probability of observing the sample obtained:
e n1 e 2 (2 )n2
L( ) Ce 3 n1 n2 , where C is a constant.
n1 ! n2 !
Taking logs gives:
ln L( ) lnC 3 ln n1 n2 lnC 3 (n1 n2 )ln
Differentiating and setting the derivative equal to zero gives:
d n n n n
lnL( ) 3 1 2 0 ˆ 1 2
d
ˆ 3
Checking whether we have a maximum
d 2 lnL (n n )
1 2 2 0 max
d 2
(ii)(a) Posterior distribution
, the prior pdf is e . So
1
Since the prior distribution for is exponential with mean
we have:
postpdf e e 3 n1 n2 n1 n2 e (3 ) .
Comparing this to the standard distributions given in the Tables, we can see that this is
the PDF of a gamma distribution with parameters n1 n2 1 and 3 . Hence
the posterior distribution is gamma(n1 n2 1,3 ) .
(ii)(b) Credibility estimate
The mean of the posterior distribution is:
n1 n2 1
3
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 55
This can be written in the form:
3 n n 1 3 n n 3 1
1 2 1 2 1
3 3 3 3 3 3
3
This is in the form of a credibility estimate with credibility factor Z .
3
18.5 We have:
1 P 1.93
y 0.965 .
2 2
So y 1.81195 .
y2
The standard for full credibility for severity is nX nNCVX2 where nN 2 and where CVX X ,
k X
giving:
2
y2
nX 2 X
k X
1.811952 6,400,000
2
0.05 8002
13,133
18.6 (i) Probability P that the total number of claims falls within 2% of the true value
We have:
y2
nN 8,000 , so that y 1.7889 .
0.022
Hence:
1P
(y ) 0.96318 , and P 0.92636 .
2
(ii) Expected number of claims with Poisson claim frequency
Under the new credibility standard, y (as a function of constant P ) will remain
unchanged, so that:
y2 1.78892
nN 1,280 .
0.052 0.052
2
We now need to find nX nN CVX
2
nN X .
X
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 56 SP8-18: Credibility theory
100
c 100 x dx 1 gives c 0.0002 .
0
100
EX 0.0002 x 100 x dx
0
100
0.0002 3
0.01 x 2 x
3 0
100 66.67
33.33
and:
100
E X2 0.0002 x 2 100 x dx
0
100
0.02 3
x 0.00005 x 4
3 0
6,666.67 5,000
1,666.67
Hence
var X 1,666.67 33.332 555.56 .
555.55
nX 1,280 640 .
33.332
So
nS 1,280 640 1,920 .
(iii) Expected number of claims with negative binomial claim frequency and variance twice
as large as mean
y2 2 y2
nN 8,000 2 N 2 , so that y 1.2649 and P 0.79410 .
k N 0.022
Under the new standard y will again remain unchanged, but we now need:
y 2 2 2 1.26492 555.56
nS 2 N 2X 2 1,600.
k N X 0.052
33.332
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 57
(iv) Square root rule for partial credibility
Since the expected number of claims is unknown, assume the observed number of claims is an
appropriate estimate for the expected number of claims:
n 1,230
Z 0.8768 .
nF 1,600
Note that the square root rule uses the expected number of claims (if this is available) in
preference to the observed number of claims in the numerator. In this question, it is acceptable to
use the observed number of claims, providing students state the assumption above.
The advantage of the square root rule is that we can choose our partial credibility factor Z such
that the variance of the data’s contribution to the credibility-weighted estimate is the same as it
would be if we had fully credible data.
18.7 Using the square root rule, the partial credibility factor Z is:
n 1,000
Z 0.6901 .
nF 2,100
The average claim size of the observed data is 10,132,000 1,096 9,245 .
So the credibility-weighted average claim size is:
(0.6901 9,245) (1 0.6901) 8,678 £9,069.
We require nY nNY CVY .
2
18.8
nNY nN X since both depend only on P and k , which are the same for both sections of the
portfolio.
2 X 2
CVY Y CV .
Y 3 X 3 X
Therefore:
nY nNY CVY
2
2
2
nN X CVX
3
4
nN X CVX
2
9
4
nX
9
4,000.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 58 SP8-18: Credibility theory
2
(Note that since the ratio of the standard deviations the ratio of the means is 1 , the
3
standard for credibility is actually lower for liability claims than it is for property damage claims.)
18.9 Claim frequency and severity are assumed to be independent. [½]
1.95
y 0.975 , giving y 1.960 . [1]
2
1.9602
nN 1,536.64 . [1]
0.052
1.75 1.75
For X ~ Gamma(1.75,6) we have X and X2 . [1]
6 36
nS nN nX nN 1 CVX2
1.75 36
1536.64 1 [1]
1.75 6 2
2,414.72
Since the expected number of claims is unknown, we assume that the observed number of claims
is an adequate approximation of the expected number of claims. [½]
Using the square root rule:
263
Z 0.330 . [1]
2,414.72
[Total 6]
y2
18.10 nN 2 900 where k 0.06 . [1]
k
So:
y2
nN 2 900
k [1]
y 900 0.062 1.8
And:
1P
1.8 0.96407
2 [1]
P 0.96407 2 1 0.92814
So you are 92.8% sure that your estimate lies within 6% of the true underlying claim frequency.
[Total 3]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 59
y2
18.11 For Poisson claim frequency, the standard for full credibility is: nP 2 . In the general case
k
y2 2
however, the standard for full credibility is nN 2 N .
k N
So the percentage increase in the number of claims required is:
y 2 N2
nN k 2 N 2
1 2 2 1 N 1 [1]
nP y k N
For a negative binomial distribution, we have:
kq 15 0.4 kq 15 0.4
N2 2
2
and N , [2]
p 0.6 p 0.6
so that:
N2 15 0.4 0.6 1
1 1 [½]
N 0.6 2 15 0.4 0.6
So the percentage increase in the number of claims required for full credibility is 66.67% . [½]
(Note that it makes sense in this case to use the Type 2 format for the negative binomial
distribution, since this gives a minimum number of claims = 0.)
[Total 4]
18.12 (i) Assumptions
For each risk i , there exists a parameter i , whose value is the same for each year j but is
unknown (ie ij i for all j )… [1]
… and there exist functions and 2 such that:
i E Xij i [½]
2 i
var Xij i mij
[½]
where mij denotes the volume measure for risk i in year j . [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 60 SP8-18: Credibility theory
Other assumptions are: [½ mark for each]
The i th risk is described by the pair, (i , (Xik )k 1 ) where ( Xik )k 1 is the sequence of claims
ratios observed for risk i in years k .
The pairs (i , (Xik )k 1 ) are mutually independent.
The i are independent and identically distributed.
Conditionally on i , the X ik ’s are independent (but not necessarily identically
distributed). [Maximum 4]
(ii) Bühlmann-Straub estimate
We only have one risk here so we can drop the double subscripts and just use the
subscript j in place of 1 j. We can also write in place of 1 . Hence X j N j mj is the
average number of claims per policy, in year j .
If the number of claims on an individual policy is Poisson( ) then the total number of
claims from the portfolio of mj policies is N j ~ Poisson m j . [½]
E X j E N j m j
1 1
E N j m j [1]
mj mj
Nj 1
2 m j Var X j m j Var
1
Var N j m j [1]
mj mj mj
So :
E E [1]
E 2 E [1]
var var . [1]
2
So:
mj mj mj
Z [1]
mj mj
mj
2
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-18: Credibility theory Page 61
So the credibility estimate for the number of claims on an individual policy is:
C BE ZX 1 Z
m
X [1]
m m
m
X
m m
n Nj
j 1
where m m j the total number of policy-years to date, and X n , the overall average
j 1
mj
j 1
loss per policy over the n years. [1]
Therefore, the Bühlmann-Straub estimate of the total number of claims in year n 1 is
m
mn1C BE mn1 X . [½]
m m
[Total 9]
y2
18.13 The standard for full credibility for the aggregate loss is nS nN nX , where nN 2 and
k
nX nN CVX .
2
1 P 1 0.95
y 0.975 , so that y 1.960 . [1]
2 2
2
y2
1.960
Hence, nN 2 38,416 . [1]
k 0.01
2
nX nN CVX
2
nN X where: [1]
X
2
1 2
133,920 and s2 e 2 e 1 803,1432
12 2 2
s e [2]
2
803,143
nX 38,416 1,381,679 [1]
133,920
So nS 38,416 1,381,679 1,420,095. [1]
[Total 7]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold
for the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is
owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a
subsidiary of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or
photocopy any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it
is not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through
the profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished
using the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 1
Actuarial investigations
Syllabus objectives
2.3 Outline the major actuarial investigations and analyses of experience undertaken with
regard to pricing for general insurers, including the monitoring of business being
written.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
0 Introduction
In much actuarial work, we analyse data and draw conclusions from the results. We
perform most analyses on a regular basis. Often in an investigation, we will compare the
expected forecast from the previous analysis with the actual observed experience since the
analysis was performed.
You will often hear this referred to as an ‘actual versus expected’ analysis.
Some of the investigations described in this chapter are covered in greater detail elsewhere in the
course, so you should use this chapter to complement those other areas of the course.
This chapter sets out the key investigations that are regularly performed and others that
may be needed reasonably frequently. Other chapters in the course describe the
investigations in more detail.
Section 1 describes the steps involved in performing a rating analysis.
Section 2 discusses the analysis of expenses and considers how the expenses can be sub-divided
into different types.
Section 3 looks at monitoring the business that is sold, in terms of business volumes and
persistency, allowing for any changes to premium rates that have occurred.
Finally, Section 4 suggests how these types of investigation might be used in practice.
Note: there is no limit to the investigations a general insurance actuary can be called on to
perform. It is important for the actuary to be clear on the question being asked and the data
available. The analysis that can be undertaken will depend on the available data and should
be appropriate to the question being asked.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 3
1 Rating analyses
We need to determine the premiums to be charged over a forthcoming period both for an
established class of business for which there is an existing rating structure and existing
underwriting guidelines, and for a new class of business being underwritten for the first
time. In the former case, we need to allow for changes to policy conditions over the period
of the data being used as a base; for example, policy excesses may have increased.
In other words, if we are reviewing the premium rates for an existing class of business, we will use
policy and claims data relating to our existing business, but may need to adjust this data for past
and future changes in policy conditions.
We will discuss results with management and underwriters, so we should document and
explain the key features of the results, including key assumptions and areas of uncertainty.
In these circumstances, when we estimate the premium rates needed to meet the insurer’s
profit objective, we will go through the following steps:
Estimate the cost of claims incurred in recent periods as an intermediate step in the
rating process.
The new premium rate for a policy will be based on the expected cost of claims for that
policy. We estimate this using recent claims experience from the existing portfolio.
We will base any pricing analysis on past data, and we will have to project claims to
their ultimate level in order to get a realistic view of recent past claims experience.
For example, if we are setting premium rates for business to be sold in 2016 based on the
claims experience in the years 2013–2015, some of the claims will not yet have been
settled, or even reported. An estimate of the ultimate claim amount will therefore be
required.
Estimate the profitability of the existing premium rates by reference to the recent
claims experience, adjusted if necessary for any abnormal features.
In this analysis, we will look at the claims corresponding to the premium and
compare actual and expected experience. We should analyse the reasons for any
differences between the two.
This is important for understanding how our assumptions can be revised to make them
more accurate, and is an application of the actuarial control cycle, covered in Subject CP1.
We are likely to express the results not only in money terms, but as a return on
capital employed in that class of business.
The company will have a target level of profitability that it hopes to achieve, relative to
the capital resources it uses. It will therefore want to know whether or not the existing
rating structure is achieving that level of profitability.
In excluding abnormal experience, we should bear in mind the limitations of
statistical models in explaining the real world.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
The existence of process uncertainty, model uncertainty and parameter uncertainty
means that we should take care when excluding abnormal claims in case these turn out to
be normal claims after all.
Process uncertainty, model uncertainty and parameter uncertainty were discussed in
Chapter 9 and also in Subject SP7.
Project forward to the period over which the new rates will be charged and the
corresponding claims will be settled.
In doing this, we make assumptions about future claims trends. This introduces a
further element of uncertainty into the investigation.
Our projections will need to allow for claims inflation as well as trends.
Review the suitability of the existing rating structure, perhaps with the aid of a
sophisticated rating model, and consider possible changes.
The term rating structure refers to the rating factors used and the relative levels of
premium charged to different policyholders, depending on their particular risk profile.
For example, in motor insurance, a young driver will usually be charged a very different
premium to a middle-aged driver.
If the rating structure is inappropriate, it may lead to anti-selection.
This is an in-depth investigation and will be the most difficult to explain to non-
actuaries / non-statisticians. However, it will have the most impact on the final
prices charged. We may use one-way, two-way or multivariate analyses for this.
Many sophisticated multivariate rating analysis models have been developed by general
insurance consultants, and their software packages can be purchased in order to analyse a
company’s data.
Multivariate analysis is covered in Chapter 17.
Compare final rates with those of competitors, using external data.
In making the final pricing decision, we will be strongly influenced by what the
market is doing and will aim for an overall profit level, with some parts of an account
expected to make more money than others where we believe the market is
overpricing risks.
In other words, our premium rates must make allowance for our competitors’ rates and
for the potential for cross-subsidies to exist between different areas of the account.
There is a pure risk cost (including direct expenses) that we must always keep in
mind, in particular when comparing actual and expected results.
The pure risk cost is the amount of premium required to cover the expected cost of
claims. Sometimes the pure risk cost will also include expenses directly attributable to the
contract. This was covered in more detail in Chapter 12. Note that the final premium will
also need to allow for other items such as indirect expenses, profit, tax, reinsurance
costs, etc.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 5
Apply adjustment for lifetime value.
Adjustments might be applied to the technical premium in consideration for the
value added by the ongoing loyalty of particular policyholders.
It is normally more cost-effective for an insurer to renew an existing policy than to write a
new one and so loyal customers (who may stay with the insurer for many years) are
valuable to the insurer. These customers may therefore be rewarded by a reduction in
their premium.
Analyse profitability of old years on new rates.
The new rates should give us our most up-to-date view of risk and so applying this to old
data will give us an up-to-date view of profitability.
Other more detailed aspects of the steps in rating are considered in Chapter 13.
The scope for detailed modelling is usually greatest in the case of personal lines business,
where the number of policies in force is often sufficient to support such analyses.
So far, we have considered the situation where an insurer already has premium rates and data
from existing business, which it can use for its rating analysis.
When an insurer is about to enter a new market or introduce a new type of policy, it will
often have no suitable data from its own experience. In these circumstances, we may be
able to use some relevant external data or internal data from related accounts, but in
general we will be obliged to adhere closely to existing market practice where we can
identify that.
Question
List the possible sources of the ‘relevant external data’.
Solution
reinsurers’ data
industry data, eg a motor organisation such as the Association of British Insurers (ABI) in
the UK
other insurers’ data
relevant organisations or government bodies
This is an area where we need to seek out external and internal data sources, and adjust as
necessary to make them relevant.
If an insurer doesn’t have any suitable data from its past experience, it will generally not want to
deviate far from the rating structures or levels of rates used by other insurers in the same market.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
As alternative options, we could:
ask reinsurers
partner with another insurer on a quota-share basis and use their data
use market data such as that compiled by Lloyd’s of London.
The rating process was covered in much more detail in earlier chapters of the course.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 7
2 Expense analyses
Owing to the short-term nature of contracts and the relatively high volume of claims and
endorsements, expenses form a very significant element of an insurer’s total outgo,
especially if the business written suffers from low persistency rates.
An endorsement is an amendment to a policy during the term of the policy. Endorsements are
sometimes called ‘mid-term adjustments’.
It generally costs more to write a new policy than to renew an existing policy. Therefore, if
persistency rates are low, the insurer will be writing a high proportion of new business, leading to
higher expenses overall.
In an analysis of expenses, we are mainly concerned with allocating the insurer’s expenses
correctly between the different classes and rating groups in the portfolio. This enables us
to measure the past performance of each class and determine a level of expense allowance
in any future premium-rating exercise, after adjusting for inflation.
An expense analysis is also an important part of an insurer’s financial plans.
If management know where and how expenses are being incurred then they can introduce
effective measures to control the expenses.
In statutory returns, we are required to show specific details of expenses, including an
allowance within the technical liability calculations for deferred acquisition costs and claims
handling expenses. An expense analysis, therefore, should include sufficient detail for this
purpose.
Question
Define deferred acquisition costs.
Solution
Deferred acquisition costs are defined in the Glossary as acquisition costs relating to unexpired
periods of contracts in force at the balance sheet date. They are carried forward as an asset from
one accounting period to subsequent accounting periods in the expectation that they will be
recoverable out of future margins within insurance contracts, after providing for future liabilities.
For the deferred acquisition cost calculation, we should analyse administration expenses
between:
those incurred on inception of the policy
those incurred throughout the policy year in general administration support
claims handling costs.
This enables us to express those expenses incurred at inception as a percentage of the
corresponding written premiums.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
We will compare the expenses incurred in writing the class of business, in its administration
and in the payment of claims with the assumptions in the pricing basis, and make revisions
to the pricing assumptions where appropriate.
2.1 Subdividing the data
Direct vs indirect expenses
The concept of direct and indirect expenses should be familiar to you from your previous studies.
In theory, we can divide the expenses of an insurance company into:
direct – the expenses that we can allocate accurately to individual policies, whether
new business acquisition or the administration of business on the books
Direct expenses are those that are incurred directly as a result of providing insurance
cover and that can therefore be directly allocated to a class of business or to an individual
policy (eg underwriting costs, commission and claims settlement expenses).
indirect or overheads – the balance of the expenses; that is, those that relate to
general management and service departments that are not directly involved in new
business acquisition or policy maintenance activities, and that are insensitive to
either the volume of new business or the level of business on the books.
Indirect expenses relate to support functions and therefore cannot be directly attributed
to any one class of business or policy (eg computing costs, human resources department
and general management costs).
This is broadly equivalent to the economist’s split between fixed and variable expenses but,
in practice, there is not a clear dividing line between these two categories.
To begin with, we normally exclude commission from the expenses because its format is
known, and we can add it in later by a formula approach.
Commission is often expressed as a percentage of written premium, although it can be expressed
as a fixed absolute amount per policy, or as a combination of the two.
For the purpose of an expense analysis, we can split the non-commission expenses into:
initial expenses, which arise when business is being acquired and written into the
books of the insurer
administration expenses, which arise at times during the policy year (or other such
policy term)
renewal expenses, which are incurred in the recosting, renewing or lapsing of a
policy at the end of the policy period; these are often markedly different to initial
expenses
claims expenses, which are incurred in the assessment and payment of policyholder
compensation
investment expenses, which relate to the management of the company’s assets.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 9
Question
State whether each of these five types of expense is direct or indirect.
Solution
initial expenses – direct
administration expenses – direct
renewal expenses – direct
claims handling expenses – direct
investment expenses – indirect
We can split each of the first three further according to whether the expense is proportional
to:
the number of contracts being acquired or on the books
the amount of sum insured or Estimated Maximum Loss
the amount of premiums being acquired or on the books.
So the initial, administration and renewal expenses can be expressed as an amount per policy or
as a percentage of either the sum insured or the premium.
We find in practice that most of these expenses are proportional to the number of contracts
in force. Exceptions include:
underwriting expenses – mainly related to the amounts of new business premium
claims expenses – typically related to the level of claims payout.
Fixed vs variable expenses
We can also divide the expenses of an insurance company into:
fixed – the expenses that remain relatively fixed, regardless of how many policies we sell;
for example, rental costs for the building or the costs associated with building
maintenance
variable – expenses that vary according to the amount of insurance business being
handled. These expenses may be linked to the number of policies or claims or to the
amount of premiums or claims. Isolating variable expenses is particularly important for
premium rating purposes.
Note that all variable expenses are direct, but fixed expenses can be direct or indirect.
Question
Explain why it is important to isolate variable expenses for the purposes of premium rating.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
Solution
The premium charged for a particular policy should cover not only the expected claims costs but
also the variable expenses incurred by that policy – otherwise it will cost more to write the policy
than will be covered by its premium. So it is important to know how much the variable expenses
are.
Note that the company will want the premium to cover the expected claims cost, the variable
expenses, and a bit more, to cover the fixed costs and profit. However, even if a policy makes
only a small contribution to the company’s overall fixed expenses, it may still be worthwhile
writing that policy as long as it has covered its own variable expenses.
In practice, all expenses can vary in the long term. For example, the salaries of administrative
staff are generally considered to be a fixed cost but, if the company wants to scale back its
operations, it could implement redundancies to reduce its staffing levels and costs over time. So
the concept of fixed costs makes most sense if we confine it to the short term. Property costs and
salary costs do not generally vary with the amount of business in the short term.
Question
Give an example of a variable cost that might be related to each of the following:
number of policies
number of claims
premium amount
claim amount.
Solution
number of policies – postal costs for policy documents
number of claims – postal costs for claim forms
premium amount – commission, levies
claim amount – legal expenses
There are no fixed rules as to the boundary between fixed and variable costs. Some costs could
easily fall into either category. For example, the cost of processing a new policy might be
described as a fixed cost because you would not hire an extra member of staff or pay higher salary
costs as a result of the new policy. On the other hand, if marginal sales of policies meant paying
staff bigger bonuses or making overtime payments, then the cost of processing a new policy is a
variable cost.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 11
The insurer will want to analyse which costs are attributable to each class of business, eg in order
to include an accurate allowance for expenses in its premium rates. The problem is that indirect
expenses cannot be easily attributed to any one class and so approximations will be required.
These are discussed in Section 2.2 below.
2.2 The process
We will need to split the expenses down and analyse them into the required ‘cells’.
Typically, the cells may be:
the whole business of the insurer
the whole business of a particular accounting fund
each main product line of the insurer.
Question
Explain why a general insurer would want to allocate expenses to different product lines.
Solution
The insurer will want to allocate the expenses as accurately as possible to ensure that the
premium charged to each class (and therefore to each policy) is correct and that the profitability
of each class is assessed correctly.
The choice of cells will vary across offices. It depends upon the types and volumes of
business written, and the requirements of the analysis. The cells chosen should not be so
small that the analysis becomes unreliable.
Equally, the cells should not be so large that the analysis becomes of little use for the required
purpose.
The main items of expense are:
salaries and salary-related expenses
property costs (rent, property taxes, heating, lighting and cleaning)
computer costs
investment costs (investment department, stamp duty, commission and so on)
one-off capital costs
claim handling costs.
We now discuss how to apportion each of these items to individual product lines.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
There is no definitive approach to splitting these. We describe one possible approach in the
following section.
Salaries and salary-related expenses
These expenses cover staff salaries, and also related items such as pensions costs and national
insurance contributions.
A large part of the expenses are staff-related, owing to the labour-intensive nature of
administering the business. In the short term, much of this may remain fixed in real terms.
In the longer term, staff costs (and accommodation costs) will vary to meet changing levels
of business being written, changes in services provided and the degree of automation used
to provide those services.
We can split staff into three groups:
(i) staff whose work falls entirely within a single cell of the analysis
(ii) staff whose work falls within more than one cell
(iii) other staff.
The other staff in (iii) are likely to be working wholly or partly in support functions that do not
relate directly to providing insurance cover (eg in IT, HR or finance departments).
We can directly allocate the salaries and related costs of staff in (i) to the appropriate cell.
For group (ii), we can use staff timesheets to split their salaries and related costs between
the appropriate cells.
The work of the group (iii) staff will straddle both overheads and direct expenses.
For example, some of the IT staff might be assigned to working solely on computer projects within
specific lines of business or within specific departments, whereas others might work on projects
that are on a company-wide basis.
We are likely to make a pragmatic split between the two. We can split the direct part further
in proportion to the overall split of the group (i) and (ii) staff.
In other words, we first split the group (iii) costs into direct and indirect expenses, and then
further split the direct portion of these into each cell, in proportion to the overall split of groups
(i) and (ii).
Property costs
We should charge an actual rent (if the insurer rents office space) or a notional rent (if the
insurer owns any of the buildings that it occupies) to the relevant departments.
Question
If a company owns the property, explain why we would charge a notional rent rather than
allowing for the actual purchase costs.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 13
Solution
It would not be practical to charge a premium that includes an allowance for the actual purchase
cost of the property, because the premium in the year of purchase would be excessively high. A
notional rent is charged instead. This provides an approximate annual cost of the property, which
can then be allocated by product line.
Of course, if the company actually pays rent to a third party then we would use this amount in our
expense allocation.
We can split this rent, plus property taxes, heating costs and so on, for example, by floor
space occupied, between departments. We can then allocate the departments’ property
costs between cells in the same proportions as the departments’ salaries.
Computer costs
We could amortise the cost of purchasing a new computer over its useful lifetime and then
add it to the ongoing computer costs. We can then allocate these according to computer
usage.
The term ‘amortise’ is used here to mean ‘depreciate’ although, strictly speaking, it should be
used in reference to intangible assets.
Investment costs
These are the investment expenses that would be deducted from any gross rate of return
achieved on assets before deciding what rates of return might be used in pricing and
setting liabilities and in any comparative analysis of investment or asset class return.
So the investment return used for pricing or other analyses would be reduced by the amount of
the investment expenses.
One-off capital costs (other than purchase of a new computer)
The purchase of a new computer was dealt with above.
The expenses analysed exclude large one-off capital costs that we should amortise over the
expected useful lifetime of the item purchased. We may then treat the amortised cost as
part of the overheads.
If we can treat the item as an asset of the general insurance fund – for example, a new head
office building – we would not amortise the cost. Instead we would usually make a charge,
for example, a notional rent.
We would exclude exceptional items (which are not likely to recur) from the analysis.
Remember that we will be setting premium rates for the future, so we would only want to include
likely future expenses and not exceptional past expenses.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
Claim handling costs
We should analyse claim handling expenses between direct internal expenses, indirect
internal expenses and those directly related to specific claims. We can then calculate the
direct claim expenses as a percentage of the corresponding cost (or number) of claims
handled in the period as required.
Direct claim handling expenses, and those related to specific claims, can be easily allocated to
product lines. We can apportion all the other (indirect) claim handling expenses according to the
number or amount of claims arising from each product line.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 15
3 Analysis of policy experience
General insurance organisations typically invest much time and resource into analysing the
business they have recently written. The aim of this section is to outline the reasons why
these organisations do this, what key statistics are typically monitored, and how they might
do it.
3.1 Reasons for monitoring business written
The main reasons for monitoring the business written, covered in this section, are to:
assess performance against goals
manage risk
gain market intelligence
satisfy the regulators
influence the market
assist with reserving
validate assumptions as part of the actuarial control cycle.
These reasons are now covered in more detail.
Assessing performance against the organisation’s goals
The ultimate goal for most general insurance companies is to exceed a minimum level of
profit or return on equity for a given level of risk. However, companies will break this
objective down into more specific targets. The hope is that if these individual targets are
met then so will the overall company objective.
Breaking the objective down into specific targets enables different parts of the business to be
monitored more effectively. If one target is not met, this can be investigated and rectified,
whereas an overall profit analysis would hide any underperforming areas behind other areas
where targets are being exceeded.
Examples of targets might include:
a minimum level of new business, by policies or premium income
a minimum level of persistency
a maximum loss ratio or expense ratio.
A general insurance company will monitor the business it has written to gauge its
performance against these targets. This enables informed planning and decision making.
The contents of a financial plan are discussed in more detail in Subject SA3.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
Managing risk
Monitoring written business allows the company to assess how much risk is inherent in the
portfolio (for example, accumulations). The amount of risk will be a factor in determining
how much capital the company should hold and what its reinsurance purchasing strategy
should be.
A risky portfolio will generally require more capital and more reinsurance, although to a certain
extent capital and reinsurance are interchangeable (but not for some purposes, eg legislative
reasons).
Determining appropriate reinsurance for a particular portfolio is covered in Subject SP7. Capital
modelling is also covered in Subject SP7.
Gaining market intelligence
Monitoring written business can provide useful information about competitors’ strategies.
It can also allow the company to compare itself with the market and assess the underwriting
cycle.
For example, a sharp decline in volumes written may indicate that competitors have reduced their
premium rates or made their coverage terms more generous.
Satisfying regulators
Market regulators may require periodic monitoring and reporting of written business.
Influencing the market
A company may be able to influence the market by publishing the results of its monitoring
exercises.
Question
Give an example of how an insurer’s results might have an impact on market behaviour.
Solution
A company might choose to publish its persistency rates. If the company has been retaining its
business, this may attract prospective policyholders in the belief that they must be getting ‘a good
deal’ since the company is popular with existing policyholders.
Reserving
The outputs of any monitoring exercise can be used for other purposes such as an input
into the reserving process. Considered in isolation this would not necessarily be a reason
to monitor written business. The most common example is the use of rate indices (derived
from the monitoring exercise) to adjust a priori loss ratios (often called initial expected loss
ratios) in Bornhuetter-Ferguson reserving methods.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 17
Reserving is covered in detail in Subject SP7. However, you might remember from earlier subjects
that the Bornhuetter-Ferguson method includes an independent assumption of the ultimate loss
ratio, which is used with the development pattern derived from a chain-ladder method in order to
project claims to date to ultimate.
The choice of the a priori loss ratio is important, and it may be that a premium rate index
(discussed later in this section) can assist with this assumption.
Part of the actuarial control cycle
Another reason for monitoring would be to validate assumptions in a model.
You should remember the actuarial control cycle from studying earlier exams.
By comparing actual experience with that expected, we can assess the need to adjust our
assumptions, for example, in our premium model.
3.2 Key factors that are monitored
In this section, we describe how we can monitor:
premium rate changes
portfolio movements:
– lapses at renewal / renewal rates
– new business volumes
– quotes that result in written business (called the strike or conversion rate)
– mid-term cancellations
– policy endorsements
– mix of business
volumes of quotations
persistency and profitability by source.
Premium rate changes
In broad terms, the premium rate is a measure of how profitable a policy or segment of
business is expected to be. In principle, if premium rates and business volumes are high
enough then the insurance company can expect to make a profit. Therefore, the premium
rate is a key statistic to monitor.
If we can be clear about how we’re defining a premium rate (eg as a percentage of claims) then
monitoring becomes more meaningful and should be a better indication of profitability.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
Definition
There are many definitions of premium rate used in the general insurance market.
Examples are:
premium income per unit of expected loss
premium per unit of limit
premium per unit of exposure
premium per unit of risk-adjusted exposure.
The suitability of each definition depends largely on the type of business being monitored. For
example, liability classes often do not have a limit and so the second example above would not be
appropriate.
Question
Discuss which of the above definitions might be best for monitoring domestic household business.
Solution
For domestic household business, the limits will be different for each peril, so per limit would not
be ideal.
For either buildings or contents, the sum insured is readily available as the exposure measure, so
we could use this, either risk-adjusted or not. Alternatively, per unit of expected loss might be
more accurate, as very few claims under household insurance are for the full sum insured.
Even premium within the above examples can have many definitions.
Premium can be gross or net of commission. It may or may not include the effects of trends
on claims. The definition used often depends on:
the purpose of the analysis (for example, to monitor profitability we would usually
require premium net of commission; for Bornhuetter-Ferguson reserving we would
require premium gross of commission)
the available data (for example, exposure may not be recorded at a policy level).
Question
Explain the choice of net / gross in the two examples given in the first bullet point above.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 19
Solution
To monitor profitability we would usually require premium net of commission. This would be the
case if we were analysing the profitability of the business from a pure claims point of view. If we
also wanted to build in the effects of commission on profitability, we would probably use
premium gross of commission (unless we analyse this separately).
For Bornhuetter-Ferguson reserving we would require premium gross of commission when the a
priori loss ratio is also based on premiums gross of commission, and vice versa.
Premium rates can be calculated at a policy level or at an aggregated portfolio level.
The choice would depend on the purpose of the analysis. For example, for a rough approximation
of relative overall profitability year-on-year, we might use premium rates at an aggregated
portfolio level.
In order to analyse the change in premium rate over time, we need to construct a premium rate
index.
The change in premium rate from time t1 to t2 is defined as:
Premium Ratet 2
Rate changet1t 2 1
Premium Ratet1
But this can be hard to derive. We need to remove / standardise all other factors,
eg changes in exposure, changes in commission charge, changes in period covered,
inflating asset values.
A series of premium rate changes can easily be expressed as an index.
The index can start at an arbitrary point, say, 100. The subsequent rate changes can then be
expressed in terms of this starting point.
Calculating premium rate changes
There are many ways to calculate rate changes. Some examples are described below.
We will describe four such methods, namely:
direct calculation for each risk separately
direct calculation using a ‘standard’ risk
measuring rate changes on individual renewals
using underwriters’ views.
Direct calculation of the premium rate
This is the most obvious method that of simply calculating the premium rate for every policy,
then comparing the results from one time period to the next.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
This method requires the use of actuarial techniques to assess the expected loss and hence
the premium rate at different points in time.
The advantages of this method are that many factors affecting the expected loss can be
taken into account and the absolute (ie not relative) premium rate is calculated in addition to
the rate change.
Quantifying the effect of softer factors may be difficult (for example, subtle changes in
terms and conditions, risk management changes).
An example of a ‘subtle’ change in terms and conditions might be a requirement for all
policyholders to make all claims over the internet rather than by telephone. This may affect the
reporting delays and/or likelihood of claiming in an unquantifiable way.
An example of a change in risk management would be the use of television advertising to
encourage safer driving.
Price a standard risk
This is a similar method to the direct calculation method described above. However, the
premium rate is calculated for a specified ‘standard’ risk or sample of risks which reflect the
business mix of the portfolio as a whole. This works best where changes to rates are made
across the board – or where a representative portfolio of risks is assessed.
This method is simpler, quicker and less data onerous than calculating the expected loss
for every risk written. However, the method requires the additional assumption that the rate
change for the standard risk is equal to the rate change for the entire portfolio.
Measure rate changes on individual renewals
For some segments of the general insurance industry it may be very difficult to determine
accurately the absolute (ie not relative) level of the premium rate. This is because of the
technical problems in assessing the expected loss for a heterogeneous book.
This might be the case, for example, with a book of large unique commercial property risks. In a
heterogeneous book of this kind, it is difficult to estimate the expected losses for a particular risk
because there is not a sufficient number of similar risks. In other words, there is a lack of credible
data for rating.
We address this problem by considering only the renewing policies and estimating the change in
expected losses for these policies without determining the expected losses themselves.
The aim of this method is to express the premium rate at t2 as a proportion of the premium
rate at t1 for every renewed policy. If a rate change is calculated in this way then we do not
need to know the absolute level of the premium rate.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 21
We can express this mathematically by identifying factors that are proportional to the
expected loss. In the following example we assume that the expected loss for a policy
depends on the limit / attachment, the coinsurance share and the exposure measure. All
other factors affecting the expected loss are assumed to be constant from t1 to t2 .
E Losst ILF @ Limt ILF @ Attacht Sharet Expt
where:
ILF @ Lim is the increased limit factor at the upper policy limit
ILF @ Attach is the increased limit factor at the policy attachment point
Exp is the exposure of the policy.
You should remember the concept of increased limit factors from Chapter 15.
The ratio of expected losses for a risk which originally incepted at time t1 and renews at t2
is therefore:
E Losst 2 ILF @ Limt 2 Sharet
ILF @ Attacht 2
2
Expt 2
E Losst ILF @ Limt
1 1
ILF @ Attacht Sharet
1 1
Expt1
and:
Prem Ratet 2 Premt 2
Prem Ratet1
Premt1
ILF @ Limt 2 Sharet
ILF @ Attacht 2
2
Expt 2
ILF @ Limt 1
ILF @ Attacht Sharet
1 1
Expt1
The denominator on the right-hand side is sometimes known as the ‘as-if’ premium.
This is because it is as if the premiums from time t1 were being applied at time t2 . An as-if basis
is also commonly called an ‘on-level’ basis.
It represents the premium that would have been charged for the renewal at t2 if the
premium rates at t1 had applied.
This model can be easily extended to allow for other factors (for example, claim inflation in
excess of exposure change, change in rating factors and change in policy duration).
The rate change for a group of renewed policies can be expressed as:
Rate Changet1t 2
Premt 2
1
As - if Premt1
although the individual detail will be lost when individual rate changes are grouped in this
way.
The main disadvantage with this method is that the impact of new and lost business written
at different premium rates is ignored.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
In other words, the numerator and the denominator aren't consistent: The numerator includes
new business (ie business that was written at time t2 but that wasn't written at time t1 ) whereas
the denominator does not. Similarly the denominator includes lapsed business (ie business that
was written at time t1 but not renewed at t2 ) whereas the numerator does not.
It can also be difficult to quantify some of the ‘soft’ factors.
Underwriter’s view of the rate change
This method involves recording how the underwriters perceive premium rates to be
changing.
The main advantage of this method is that it can allow for more of the soft factors
mentioned above that would otherwise be unquantifiable.
The main disadvantage is that it is very subjective and therefore difficult to ensure
consistency. It is also difficult to assess across companies and verify in detail analytically.
There may also be confusion around pure rate change and mis-pricing. For example, an
underwriter may say that premiums have reduced because there have been no claims, thus
a zero-rate change. We would define this as a rate decrease.
Portfolio movements
A ‘movement’ refers to a policy going on risk, off risk, or moving between risk groups.
Movements can be viewed for a whole portfolio, or split by:
class of business
policy cover level, eg third party, comprehensive
risk group.
There are many reasons why an insurer would want to monitor its portfolio movements; most
notably to manage:
volume and mix of business
cross-subsidies, and
growth of the business.
Volume and mix of business
Expense assumptions will be based on an expected range of business volumes.
This is because the insurer will need to cover a specified amount of fixed expenses and will
include a fixed loading per policy in the premium so that each policy contributes to the overall
fixed costs.
If more or less business is written than expected (or the mix of new and renewal business in
the portfolio changes), the unit cost may be higher, either because the fixed expenses are
spread over a smaller base or because of overtime payments and so on.
As noted in Section 2, it generally costs more to write a new policy than to renew an existing
policy and so a higher proportion of new business will lead to higher expenses overall.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 23
The business may be written unevenly so that there are concentrations of risk. This
reduction in the diversification of the business will increase the risk to the business.
It is therefore crucial to monitor any potential accumulations of risk.
Cross-subsidy
The rates charged will often include an element of cross-subsidy between different parts of
the portfolio or different products. If this is well-managed, such cross-subsidies can
improve the overall profitability or assist the meeting of growth targets. However, if the mix
of business does not follow the expected pattern the business may end up with a
substantial amount of unprofitable business.
Growth of the business
A company may wish to grow its business, either by extending existing coverage to new
groups (for example, extending travel insurance to older age groups) or by writing entirely
new products. To do this, the company must make a large number of assumptions, and
there may be little appropriate data to help it. Possible data sources include industry data,
population statistics, data from reinsurance companies and data from similar products in
other territories.
This lack of good-quality data means that there may be a lot of uncertainty in the premium rates
charged.
There are risks that the resulting business volumes will differ from those expected, and that
the claims experience will be worse than anticipated.
Types of portfolio movements
We usually monitor the movements in respect of:
lapses or renewals failure to renew, or renewal of, an existing policy
new business inception of a new policy
quotes not taken up where a quote is given but the policy is not incepted
mid-term cancellations where a policy is stopped mid-term
endorsements where a policy is amended during the policy year, also
called a ‘mid-term adjustment’.
Question
List some endorsements that might take place on a private motor policy.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
Solution
change of cover
change of car
addition or removal of a driver
change of address
change of use
enhancement of a car, eg change of engine
An insurer will also wish to monitor the mix of business in its portfolio.
Changes in the total number of policies within a portfolio can be explained by adding and
subtracting the movements:
number at end = number at start + new business – lapses – cancellations.
If we were analysing the number of policies within a risk group, the right-hand side would include
adjustments for policies moving by endorsements into or out of that group.
Movement rates can therefore be used as a check that all the data are accounted for and can
indicate errors in the data.
By studying the movements of the business and their trends we can:
measure the extent to which different parts of the portfolio are growing or
contracting
get an early indication of undue losses or gains in business that might indicate that
rates are out of line with the market
assess the effects of a new set of rates or marketing campaign on the business and,
hence, the sensitivity of the portfolio to market influences.
The movements give an important early warning on adverse changes. They might indicate
that we need to review premium rates for certain risk groups. Hence, we will do a
movement analysis frequently.
Since movement rates relate to rates of change, they are good to look at to help spot trends at
the earliest opportunity. This can give an initial guide as to where the premium rates might be
out of line with the rest of the market. In a competitive class (such as personal lines motor), a
high lapse rate for a particular rating cell suggests that the rates for that cell are high. Conversely,
a high new business rate indicates very competitive rates.
We usually calculate movement rates by reference to a suitable measure of exposure, using
the principle of correspondence; for example, by number of policies or by currency unit of
premium.
We now describe each of the movement rates in turn.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 25
Lapses at renewal / renewal rates
A company may not want to renew all of its in-force business. Lapses at renewal of a policy
can (by definition) only stem from those policies actually invited for renewal in that period.
The best way to measure lapses is therefore to express them as a percentage of the
renewals invited in that period.
no. of lapses for period x
Lapse rate =
no. of renewals invited for period x
So we would use the number of renewals invited rather than the number of policies coming up
for renewal, to ensure correspondence between the numerator and the denominator of the
calculation.
The renewal rate is usually defined as the number of renewals divided by the number of
expiring policies in a given period (although this can be adjusted for cancellations).
Question
Explain how you would adjust this for cancellations.
Solution
The denominator would simply be the number of expiring policies minus the number of mid-term
cancellations. In other words it would be the number of renewals invited.
The renewal rate is the complement of the lapse rate because all policies invited for renewal
either lapse or renew (although this depends on how you treat those upgrading or reducing
cover).
The company will want to monitor its loss experience because it will be keen to renew its
more profitable policies. If policyholders are more likely to shop around, the company will
need to ensure that it offers competitive rates on renewal to those policyholders that it
wants to keep.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
Issues to consider when analysing lapse rates include:
We may do the analysis at a total level and on specific subgroups.
We will normally monitor lapses on a monthly basis. We should be careful to allow
for the time lag between the renewal date and the point at which it becomes
apparent that a policy has lapsed. We might estimate this lag from recent past
experience, but we cannot necessarily assume that such an estimate is accurate for
current experience.
If there are processing delays, we may not know the final number of lapses
stemming from a particular month of renewal until some months later. For this
reason, insurers usually impose a deadline for acceptance of renewals. We can
estimate the ultimate number of lapses from a particular cohort of policies using
standard chain ladder techniques.
We can obtain lapse rates by projecting the number of lapses processed to date for
each month’s renewal cohort to their ultimate value, using normal chain ladder
techniques.
New business
We have the same problems in estimating new business rates as we have for lapse rates.
Delays occur because of internal processing delays or, more significantly, intermediary
delays, particularly where underwriting authority is delegated. The delays are likely to be
shorter than for lapses, but we can still do a projection by month of notification.
We can measure new business rates in similar ways to those for lapse rates.
The major difficulty in this case, however, is in relating new business to a relevant measure
of exposure. Normally, the best solution will be to relate new business incepting in a
particular month to the corresponding number of renewals invited in that month (that is, the
same base as we use to measure lapses).
no. of new policies for period x
New business rate =
no. of renewals invited for period x
In this way, we can screen out normal seasonal variations in the volumes of business
transacted and we can compare the new business rates more readily with the
corresponding lapse rates.
If we define the new business rate in this way then we can add it to the renewal rate to give a
quick indication of whether the business is growing or contracting.
We can also relate the number of new policies to the number of quotes given. However there will
often be problems in defining the number of quotes (even if these have been recorded and the
information is available). For example, some prospective policyholders will obtain multiple
quotes, maybe for different cover levels or excess levels. For others, it may not be possible to
receive a quote if their risk details fall outside the underwriting criteria set by the insurer,
particularly where automated quote systems are used.
Not taken up / strike rates
The strike rate is usually defined as the number of written policies divided by the number of
quoted policies in a given period (although this can be adjusted for declinatures).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 27
The strike rate is often called the conversion rate.
The strike rate is the complement of the not-taken-up (NTU) rate, because all quotes will either be
taken up or not.
Any quotes are usually only valid for around one month. This limits the delay problem we
discussed above for renewals.
A declinature is where the insurer refuses to provide cover.
An insurance company will monitor renewal rates, strike rates and new business volumes
because a change in any of these statistics may indicate that the company’s pricing is out
of line with the rest of the market.
This could result from a change in the company’s or competitors’ pricing strategy. Lower
renewal rates, strike rates and new business volumes indicate that premium rates are
generally higher than that of competitors and vice versa.
It is important to consider a company’s targets for renewal rates, strike rates and new
business volumes in conjunction with targets for premium rates.
Mid-term cancellations
Mid-term cancellations can, in theory, occur at any time to any policy in the portfolio,
irrespective of renewal date, although in reality they tend to arise earlier in the policy year.
Hence, the best exposure measure we can relate these to is the mean in-force portfolio over
(say) the last 12 months.
no. of cancellations during period x
Cancellation rate =
no. of policies exposed for period x
This gives a central rate, ie analogous to an m-type mortality rate.
Alternatively, as a rough approximation, we may relate them to the renewals invited in the
last 12 months. This may be preferable, if we want to compare the cancellation rate more
directly with the lapse and new business rates.
no. of cancellations during period x
Cancellation rate =
no. of renewals invited for period x
This gives an initial rate, ie analogous to a q-type mortality rate.
When we use this method, we should be careful in the case of an expanding portfolio,
because mid-term cancellations can also arise from new business and not just from
renewals invited.
If we use the number of renewals invited in the last 12 months as the denominator then this will
not allow for new business. However, the numerator will include mid-term cancellations on new
business. Since an expanding portfolio will include a relatively high proportion of new business,
the cancellation rate will appear to be correspondingly high.
Cancellation rates are normally relatively low in comparison with new business and lapses,
so we can use simpler calculation methods than those for lapses and new business.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
Policy endorsements
Endorsements occur internally within a class of business whenever the risk covered by a
policy is changed.
Examples of endorsements include:
a change of address under a motor insurance policy
an increase to sum insured for a domestic home contents policy following purchase
of a valuable antique to be kept on the premises
the installation of a market-leading water sprinkler system in a warehouse covered
by a commercial fire policy, which may reduce the risk of a total loss.
Some endorsements may leave the premium unchanged. Others may result in an increase
or decrease in the premium.
There will not normally be any change in the total numbers of policies in force. However,
there will be a change in the number of policies when we analyse movements by risk factor.
Perhaps the easiest way of allowing for this is on the same lines as for mid-term
cancellations. We have to create both an exit from the old sub-group and an entry into the
new sub-group, with exits and entries measured separately or netted off.
So, for example, if a policyholder changes their 6 year old group 10 car for a brand new group 12
car mid-way through the policy year, the policy would earn half a year’s exposure in the
‘group 10, age 6’ risk group and half a year in the ‘group 12, age 0’ risk group.
As for mid-term cancellations, the best measure of exposure is likely to be the mean
in-force policy count.
no. of endorsements during period x
Endorsement rate =
no. of policies exposed for period x
Question
Define the various movement rates and explain why they are as you have defined them.
Solution
no. of lapses for period x
Lapse rate =
no. of renewals invited for period x
no. of newpolicies for period x
New busines rate =
no. of renewals invited for period x
no. of cancellations during period x
Cancellation rate =
no. of policies exposed for period x
Or, as an approximation:
no. of cancellations during period x
Cancellation rate =
no. of renewals invited for period x
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 29
no. of endorsements during period x
Endorsement rate =
no. of policies exposed for period x
The key point in each of these definitions is that the numerator and denominator must
correspond to each other. The new business rate is defined like this for comparison with the
lapse rate.
Business mix
As mentioned above, for practical, legal and commercial considerations, policyholders are
seldom charged the theoretically correct premium rate. This results in cross subsidy
between groups of policyholders and exposes the insurer to the possibility of selection. A
change in the mix of business between groups can result in a change in the overall level of
profitability.
A change in business mix can also result in a change in the risk profile of the portfolio, so
that a different risk management solution may be required.
For example, the reinsurance arrangements may need to be reviewed if the business mix
becomes more concentrated.
An insurer will monitor the mix of business in its portfolio for both of these reasons.
Quote volumes
An insurance company will monitor the change in the number of quoted policies in a given
period. This is especially useful when assessing the effectiveness of marketing campaigns,
the level of support from different brokers and the impact of new distribution channels.
When monitoring the number of quotes, this will naturally lead to a need to monitor the strike
rate, as above. For example, a rapid increase in quote volumes but a simultaneous drop in strike
rates might indicate a successful marketing campaign combined with uncompetitive prices.
Analysis of persistency and profitability by source
An insurance company may sell business through different sources, eg:
sales direct to the policyholder
salaried sales staff
brokers
banks or other organisations
other insurers (eg reciprocal arrangements).
The form of an analysis by business source will depend to some extent on the structure of
the insurer. However, we should try to measure persistency and profitability by branch,
broker / agency and direct business (telephone, internet, post and so on).
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
This should reveal from where the better quality, longer-lasting business comes, helping the
insurer to avoid the less profitable sources of business or to devise incentive schemes or
commission terms to retain or attract the more profitable business and reward better
providers.
Question
Give examples of how analysing business by source could help an insurance company detect and
avoid adverse selection.
Solution
Some brokers might favour other insurers in preference to us. This might become evident if our
results from those brokers were worse than from other, similar brokers. (We won’t usually be
able to check competitors’ results for business from those brokers directly.)
Reciprocal business from a particular company could be poor quality overall. This would show up
if our business from that source suffered much worse performance than the other company had
on its retained business.
We can analyse profitability by source in the same way that we analyse it by class, taking
note of claims and expenses, provided the policy records contain a source identifier.
There is a close link between profitability and persistency as the expenses are usually
greater for new business than for renewals. It may, therefore, be worthwhile to include the
length of time that a policy has been on the books as a factor in the profitability analysis by
source. This gives a further indication as to why a particular source is profitable or not and
will help further in devising commission or incentive schemes.
The insurer may also be able to negotiate reductions to commission payments on business
which proves to be less profitable or concentrate on selling business through sources with
lower commission amounts payable if the quality of such business is not markedly
different.
Problems
In practice there are a number of problems to overcome when analysing the profitability of
business from different sources. To form sensible comparisons between two sales outlets the
data will need to be standardised to remove distortions caused by the mix of business.
The premium rating structure will usually result in some types of policy being more profitable
than others. For example, premium rates may have proved to be inadequate in one geographical
area or for one type of risk, eg sports cars in a motor portfolio. If so, business from a broker
introducing lots of this type of policy would appear to have a relatively bad claims experience,
through no fault of the broker. If the insurance company can ‘correct’ its premium rating
structure, then that broker’s future business could be as profitable as any other.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 31
Different intermediaries could be paid different levels of commission. The overall expense the
company incurs may be reduced, though, where intermediaries do much of the work themselves.
Building societies, for example, typically do much of the administration for the block policies they
operate, and hence receive a higher rate of commission than other intermediaries. If possible,
the insurance company should calculate the total net expense (including commission) to itself of
the business from a given source.
To assess the profitability of a given block of business it is important to take a long-term view.
Initial expenses are typically much higher than renewal expenses. Hence we would expect
policies with a high degree of persistency to result in larger profits in the long term.
To analyse fully the profitability by source would require a profit testing assessment of the
present value of future profits of the business from that source (in the same way as used by life
insurance companies). In practice, however, few general insurers carry out analyses that are as
sophisticated as that.
3.3 Key features of a good system for monitoring business
This section outlines some of the important IT and data issues for a monitoring system.
Systems for monitoring business typically include a data capture process, calculations
and/or manipulations on the data, and a process for reporting the results. Desirable
features for such a system are set out below.
Tailored output
Output should generally be concise (‘information not data’), and tailored to the strategic
goals of the organisation. Output should aid decision making.
Accuracy
Data used should be reliable and validated.
Calculations should take into account all the key drivers.
Results should be validated (for example, historical premium rate changes could be
compared with changes in emerging loss ratios). This is part of the actuarial control
cycle.
Ease of use
Data should be easy to collect.
Calculations should not be overly complex.
System should be documented, extendable and low maintenance.
Results should be clear and easy for users to interpret.
Consistent
Output should be consistent over time. If, for example, methods for calculating
rates change, then indices should be restated.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
Inputs should be consistent with other data sources. If two quantities are the same
(for example, premium) then it should be the same regardless of data source.
Otherwise the user will lose confidence.
Outputs should be consistent with other analyses (for example, results should be
shown split into the same business segments).
Timely production of results
The delay between the data cut-off date and the production of results should be kept to a
minimum.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 33
4 Utilising actuarial investigations
We may use the results of the above types of investigation to:
Carry out a profit testing exercise – to do this, we model positive and negative
income streams under sample policies, to assess both the timing and impact of
cashflows. We can use the net income streams by month or by year to assess, for
example, profitability for a given premium level, or the premium to be charged for a
given profit criterion.
Profit testing involves projecting future income (from premiums and investments) and
future outgo (expenses and claims) to give the expected profitability of a set of premium
rates. The projection may also allow for any statutory solvency margin that might be
required and for the strength of the statutory reserving basis. Profit testing is often used
when setting premium rates.
Estimate price elasticity curves – to do this, we model customer behaviour in the
light of potential premium rate changes and we may include an allowance for
competitor reaction.
We can use price elasticity curves to estimate changes in business volumes as a result of
changes to our premium rates. These are particularly useful for highly competitive classes
of business, such as private motor insurance.
One way in which insurers can investigate new business price elasticity is by increasing or
reducing the premium quoted to a random sample of potential policyholders and looking
at the effect this has on uptake.
Create lifetime pricing models – to do this, we estimate customer lifetime value.
This is the inherent added worth of an existing customer to whom a policy has
already been sold. It will take account of the policyholder’s likelihood to renew, the
policyholder’s acceptance of future rate increases and the potential for cross-selling
other products.
Redesign rating tariffs – we estimate and recalculate premium rates on behalf of
markets where the regulator decides the rates for certain segments and classes of
business.
Help to make other pricing and reinsurance decisions.
Feed into other processes, such as capital modelling.
General insurers, like other companies, prefer to make decisions based on information and
data. Some will be regular decisions, such as what prices to charge or what reinsurance to
buy. Others will be one-off decisions, such as whether to start writing a new class of
business.
Before starting any investigation, we should be clear on the question being asked and the
limitations of the data. Management will base decisions on these analyses, and it is
important that they understand all relevant information, particularly in situations where the
person preparing the analysis is not part of the discussion. Otherwise results can be taken
out of context and used in ways that were not envisaged when the analysis was undertaken.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
5 Finally
5.1 Glossary items
Having studied this chapter you should now read the following Glossary items:
Allocated loss adjustment expenses (ALAE)
Claims handling expenses
Commutation
Commutation account
Commutation clause
Endorsement
Functional costing
Fund (or funded) accounting
Lapse
Lapse rate
Persistency
Unallocated loss adjustment expenses (ULAE).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 35
Chapter 19 Summary
There are a number of actuarial investigations that a general insurer should perform,
including:
Rating analyses
The steps involved in a rating analysis include:
estimating ultimate claims
estimating profitability of existing rates
projection forward to a new rating period
reviewing the suitability of the existing rating structure
comparing rates with those of competitors
applying adjustments for lifetime value
analysing the profitability of old years on new rates.
Expense analyses
In expense analysis, we:
split between direct and indirect expenses
split between types of expense (eg initial, admin, renewal, claims, investment)
allocate by class and rating group
express the expenses as a proportion of numbers of policies or claims, or of amounts
of premium, sum insured or claim.
Direct expenses are those that can be directly allocated to a class of business, while indirect
expenses (overheads) relate to support functions and therefore cannot be directly attributed
to any one class of business or policy.
The main items of expense for a general insurer are salaries (and related costs), property
costs, computer costs and investment costs.
Monitoring business written
The main reasons for monitoring business written are to:
assess performance against goals
manage risk
gain market intelligence
satisfy the regulators
influence the market
assist with reserving
validate assumptions as part of the actuarial control cycle.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
The key factors monitored are:
premium rate changes
portfolio movements:
lapses at renewal / renewal rates
new business volumes
quotes that result in written business (called the strike or conversion rate)
mid-term cancellations
policy endorsements
mix of business
volumes of quotations
persistency and profitability by source.
The four main methods of calculating premium rate changes are:
direct calculation for each risk separately
direct calculation using a standard risk
measuring rate changes on individual renewals
using underwriters’ views.
A good system for monitoring business has the following features:
tailored output
accurate and validated data / results
easy to use and well documented
consistent over time and with other data sources and analyses
minimal delay between data cut-off and production of results.
Actuarial investigations can be used to:
carry out profit testing
estimate price elasticity
create lifetime pricing models
redesign rating tariffs
help with other pricing and reinsurance decisions
feed into other processes, eg capital modelling.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 37
Chapter 19 Practice Questions
19.1 (i) Explain why an insurer analyses its movement statistics.
(ii) Explain why a general insurer analyses the profitability of its business by source.
19.2 You are the actuary for a general insurance company. The company’s financial director has been
concerned about the method of accounting for lapses in the private motor insurance account.
The company currently includes premiums for all policies falling due for renewal in the premium
income shown in its management accounts at the renewal date, even though it does not know
whether or not the policies have been renewed. This is because the policies are sold through
brokers who may not confirm whether a policy has renewed or lapsed until some weeks after the
renewal date. If a policy lapses then the premium income is reduced at the date the lapse is
notified.
You have been asked for your views on two issues:
At the end of the financial year there will be a number of lapses outstanding which relate
to renewals in the year just completed, but which will not be reported until the following
year. As the renewal premiums for these policies have been included in the previous
year’s income, this will overstate the premium income for that year. Should a provision
be set up for unnotified lapses?
When a lapse is notified, even if it is before the end of the year, it will be recorded later
than the renewal date. This will cause a distortion in the statement of earned premium.
What could be done to correct these distortions?
Outline the contents of your reply.
19.3 Explain why persistency of business may be an important issue to a general insurer.
19.4 Define, giving formulae, four different types of movement rate.
19.5 State the main purposes for which an insurer analyses expenses.
19.6 You have just been recruited to work for a brand new general insurance company selling
household business.
Suggest reasons why claims experience might be worse than assumed for such a company.
19.7 State the three primary processes that should be included within a system for monitoring
Exam style
business, and list the key features of a good system. [7]
19.8 A general insurance company is re-pricing its domestic household business. The company has an
Exam style
estimate of how many policies it will sell during the next year and it knows what the expenses of
the ‘new business processing’ department were last year. Discuss the factors that the insurer
should take into account when loading the premium for initial expenses. [8]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 38 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
19.9 You are the pricing actuary for an established but rather old-fashioned general insurer selling only
Exam style
motor business. You have been asked to carry out an investigation into the appropriateness of
the current premiums using a straightforward approach without GLMs.
(i) Describe the steps to follow when determining a new risk premium. [9]
The insurer has decided to expand its operations and to start marketing its business abroad.
(ii) Describe how you might determine the risk premium for the new business. [4]
[Total 13]
19.10 The motor portfolio of a medium-sized insurance company (which has been operating for almost
Exam style
a decade) accounts for 80% of its general insurance portfolio. The motor business premium
income in Year 9 was substantially lower than in Year 8. The general manager has requested a
report on the motor account, highlighting the areas for concern and recommending measures to
stop the decline in business.
(i) Outline the points you would expect to include in your report, describing possible reasons
for the fall in premium income from Year 8 to Year 9. Suggest corresponding actions that
the insurer could take to stop the decline. [13]
You have been given the following information on the private motor account.
Comprehensive Non-comp Total
Premiums Year 9 44.1 15.8 59.9
(£millions) Year 8 49.6 19.0 68.6
Vehicle years Year 9 402 197 599
(000's) Year 8 447 219 666
Claim frequency Year 9 14.3% 10.3% 13.0%
Year 8 14.1% 10.8% 13.0%
Year 8 claim ratio estimated at 31/12 72% 62.3% 69.2%
of Year 8
Year 8 claim ratio estimated at 31/12 67.2% 58.6% 64.8%
of Year 9
Year 9 claim ratio estimated at 31/12 70.1% 64.5% 68.6%
of Year 9
In the above table, premiums and vehicle years are on a written basis and claim frequency and
ratios on an earned basis.
(ii) Outline your main observations on the data above. [5]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 39
The general manager is asking for an estimate of the average premium rate increase or decrease
to apply to future premiums, as indicated by the data.
(iii) List any points of clarification you need. [3]
(iv) Describe the further details required before you would attempt to calculate the
estimate. [9]
[Total 30]
19.11 (i) List the main factors that, in practice, will determine how the expenses of an insurance
Exam style
company are allocated between classes. [5]
(ii) Suggest possible reasons why expense loadings may prove to be inadequate. [3]
[Total 8]
19.12 Describe the main reasons for monitoring the business written by a general insurance
Exam style
company. [9]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 40 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 41
Chapter 19 Solutions
19.1 (i) Analysis of movement statistics
As an early warning system to spot trends or adverse changes in business written.
In particular, this will allow the insurer to:
Measure the growth or contraction of parts of the portfolio. This may indicate that the
premium structure is out of line with the rest of the market.
Get early notice of the growth or contraction of the whole portfolio. This may indicate
that the insurer’s level of premium rates is out of line with the rest of the market.
Measure volumes of business. If more (or less) business is written than expected, the
fixed expenses will be spread over a higher (or lower) base.
Measure and manage the mix of business written. For example, due to the different
levels of expenses for new business compared to renewals, a change in the proportion of
new business compared to renewals will have implications for overall profitability.
Measure and manage concentrations of risk in a portfolio. In particular, if volumes are
reducing, the level of diversification may also reduce, leading to a higher concentration of
risk.
Measure and manage cross-subsidies in order to improve overall profitability or meet
growth targets.
Assess the effects of a new set of rates or a marketing campaign on the business …
… and hence the sensitivity of the portfolio to market influences.
(ii) Analysis of profitability of business by source
This will help the insurer in its financial planning by:
showing where the better quality, longer-lasting business comes from, ...
… helping the insurer to avoid the less profitable (or unprofitable) sources of business
devising incentive schemes or commission terms to retain or attract the more profitable
business and reward better providers
helping it to negotiate reductions in commission payments on less profitable business
enabling it to concentrate on selling business through sources with lower commission (if
the quality of such business is not markedly different).
19.2 The stated effects are likely to be present in the accounts but are likely to be smaller than
expected because of a factor that acts in the opposite direction to lapses:
Reporting of new business is also delayed …
… resulting in an understatement of written premium and earned premium.
If delays and volumes of lapses and new business are similar, they will tend to cancel each other
out.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 42 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
If there is a tendency for either lapses or new business to predominate then a similar effect will
occur at the end of each year, which will tend to cancel out …
… and unless conditions are changing rapidly, the distortions will be small.
If the business is growing then the value of unreported new business is likely to be larger than the
value of unreported lapses and therefore the profitability of the business may actually be
understated.
Will need to consider if the company is prepared to allow for this (eg have a negative provision) in
its accounts.
In order to measure the effect of the delays:
analyse new business and lapses reported in any one month, into months of inception or
renewal
repeat on a monthly basis for, say, two years, in order to get an idea of any seasonality
may also be sensitive to the number of working days in that month, especially December
possible that larger policies are reported more quickly or more slowly.
There should be a consistency in the delay patterns, which can be used to project unreported new
business and lapses.
It should then be a simple exercise to project numbers and average premiums to calculate the
total value of unreported new business and lapses.
These estimates could then be used in place of the reported figures to assess written premium
and earned premium.
The accounting principle of consistency implies that accounting practices ought not to change
unless there are clear improvements to be made.
19.3 Persistency of business may be an important issue to a general insurer because:
with falling business volumes, it becomes more expensive (per policy) to spread fixed
costs over each policy
a large proportion of the costs may be fixed, so this could have a material impact on
profits
it is usually more expensive to acquire / regain new business than it is to process renewals
…
… but the same premium is usually charged on both new and renewed business
it is a sign of customer satisfaction, and so low persistency may imply a poor level of
service and/or that premium rates are not competitive.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 43
19.4 The lapse rate is the rate at which potential renewals do not renew their insurance:
Number of lapses / Number of invitations to renew
The new business rate is the rate at which new policies start, as a proportion of renewals invited:
Number of new policies / Number of invitations to renew
The cancellation rate is the rate at which policies cancel prior to the end of the period of cover:
Number of cancellations / Average number of policies in force, or
Number of cancellations / Number of invitations to renew
The endorsement rate is the rate at which policies are altered:
Number of endorsements / Average number of policies in force
19.5 An insurer analyses expenses in order to allocate its expense costs correctly between the different
classes and rating groups in the portfolio.
This enables the insurer to:
measure the past performance of each class
determine the expense loadings for premium rating.
An expense analysis is an important part of an insurer’s financial planning process and helps to
identify inefficiencies or areas where expenses might need to be controlled.
Expenses need to be analysed so that the information can be included within the insurer’s
statutory returns.
19.6 Reasons include:
lack of reliable data upon which to base your premium rates / determine your reserves
misinterpretation of the data that you have
experience is volatile from year to year
anti-selection, eg if you use number of bedrooms rather than sum insured as an exposure
measure, or don’t rate by location (and other insurers do)
under-insurance leading to higher than expected claims per unit of exposure
worsening trend in crime
policyholders submitting fraudulent or inflated claims, eg during recession
an increase in the propensity to submit claims
unusual weather patterns leading to increased subsidence claims
accumulations of risk, especially if regionally based
a storm or flood leading to a larger number of property damage claims than expected
an unexpected catastrophe, such as an earthquake, or terrorist attack
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 44 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
a demand surge (eg on builders, following a catastrophe) that pushes up the cost of
claims
higher than expected claims inflation
a court award leading to high liability claims
poor control of claim payments
a change in regulation, eg a requirement to provide unlimited cover on certain claims
failure of a reinsurer, so that we make lower than expected recoveries
19.7 The three processes are:
a data capture process
calculations and/or manipulations on the data
a results reporting process. [½ each]
The ideal features of such a system are:
the delay between data cut-off date and results production should be minimal
data used should be reliable and validated
data should be easy to collect
inputs should be consistent with other data sources
calculations should take into account all key drivers
calculations should not be overly complex
output should be consistent over time
output should be concise and tailored
outputs should be consistent with other analyses
results should be validated
results should be clear and easy for users to interpret
the system should be documented, extendable and low maintenance. [½ each]
[Maximum 7]
19.8 Factors to take into account when loading the premium for initial expenses
Consider the appropriate amount to load
Consider all initial expenses, such as marketing, underwriting and premium collection. Take
account of all other relevant expenses not covered by this department. [1]
Consider whether the new business processing department does any work for other classes. If so,
only include the expenses that relate to domestic household business. [½]
Consider separate expense allowances for building and contents cover since expenses may differ,
eg different underwriting costs. [1]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 45
Consider the impact of changes in volumes on the per policy expenses. [½]
Consider if and how overheads should be allowed for. [1]
Allow for expense inflation to the mid-point of the period for which the rates will be in force. [½]
How to load into premium rates
Each element should be matched with the corresponding element in the formula. [½]
Consider the cross-subsidy between renewals and new policies. Consider if we want to have the
same loading for each. [½]
You could charge a fixed expense amount for each policy. However this charges the same amount
to small and large policies. Policyholders with small premium sizes may not take out the policy,
resulting in lower sales of small policies. [1]
It may be better to charge the expense as a percentage of premium, especially since you might
argue that larger policies do constitute more work (to some extent anyway). [1]
If you load as a percentage of premium, you must make sure that the smallest policies cover their
marginal costs. You could allow for this by using a small fixed charge or a minimum premium
size. [1]
In practice, you may use a mixture of these approaches, ie partly a fixed amount and partly a
percentage of premium. [½]
You can allow for commission explicitly as a percentage of premium. [½]
[Maximum 8]
19.9 (i) Proposing a new risk premium based on past data
You are reviewing the premium rates for an established motor book, so there should be sufficient
data available for a detailed analysis. [½]
Past policy and claims data will be needed, but may need to be adjusted for past and future
changes in policy conditions. [½]
Data should be grouped into homogeneous groups and in particular by claim type. [½]
The appropriate risk premium rates will be based on the expected cost of claims for the policy.
This should be estimated using recent claims experience from the existing portfolio. [½]
The most recent claims data will not yet be complete, for example some claims will not yet be
settled or even reported… [½]
… so we should project claims to their ultimate level using techniques such as the chain ladder
method. [½]
The analyses should examine claim frequency and severity separately. This should help identify
trends in the data. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 46 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
The estimated ultimate claims cost should be adjusted for any abnormal experience. For
example, if recent wide-scale flooding resulted in abnormally poor claim experience, then these
claims should be truncated and an average annual amount should be included in the estimate of
future risk-premiums. [1]
However, we should be careful when truncating abnormally severe claims since it is difficult to
judge what level of claim is ‘abnormal’ and what is ‘normal’. This is due to the potential for
process uncertainty, model uncertainty and parameter uncertainty. [1]
We should compare the estimated ultimate claims to the risk premiums for the corresponding
policies. The reasons for any differences between the two should be investigated so that our
assumptions about future claims experience can be updated. [1]
The estimated ultimate claims should be projected forward to the mid-point of the period over
which the new rates will apply and the corresponding claims will be settled. [½]
This will involve allowing for future inflation, and projecting forward any trends in the claims. For
example, allowance should be made for expectations of future seasonal fluctuations or any
expected future increases in claim severity eg due to court award inflation relating to liability. [1]
A decision should be made as to whether the above analysis should include direct expenses. If
not, an appropriate allowance for this will need to be made when loading the premium for
expenses. [½]
The key features of the results should be documented and explained, including key assumptions
and areas of uncertainty. [½]
The results should be discussed with management and underwriters. [½]
[Maximum 9]
(ii) Proposing a risk premium for a new business
The claim experience under the new portfolio is likely to be very different to the insurer’s existing
portfolio. [½]
For example, risks are likely to be subject to very different:
legal, political and social factors, eg court award inflation and policyholders’ propensity to
claim
environmental factors
drivers of claim inflation, eg medical expenses
economic conditions. [½ each, maximum 1]
The insurer’s current data is therefore unlikely to be relevant to the new target market. [½]
It may be possible for the insurer to use its existing data, if it believes it can adjust this for the
expected differences in claim frequency / severity arising from the factors above. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 47
However, it is likely that its initial rating structure will follow market office rates quite closely.
Hence the assumed risk premium will implicitly be governed by these less the value of required
loadings for profit, expenses etc. [1]
The insurer should collect external data to help with this, for example from:
reinsurers and brokers
from other insurers, eg by arranging a reciprocal quota share agreement
market sources. [1]
The insurer will be able to adjust its rates at a later date, when it has collected a sufficient amount
of data to enable a credible analysis. [½]
[Maximum 4]
19.10 (i) Points to include in the report
Investigate where the reduction has occurred. Analyse premium income by source and category
of business to see if the fall is widespread or focused in particular areas. [1]
Consider and investigate possible reasons for the fall. These could include:
market competitiveness overall: need to consider figures against motor insurance
capacity in the market as a whole: [½]
– perhaps rates are at the soft stage of the insurance cycle [½]
– competition from other, non-traditional, providers [½]
– competition from new sales methods, eg internet [½]
competitors with more sophisticated rating techniques may have caused selection against
the insurer, leaving it with the poorer risks [½]
recent increase in insurer’s premium rates leading to loss of new business and reduced
persistency [½]
insurer may have just lost one or more big clients who previously introduced high
volumes of business, eg: [½]
– loss of preferred insurer status for national broker network [½]
– end of arrangement with chain of garage outlets [½]
company may have inefficient business processing systems and thus higher expense
loadings within the premium basis than competitors [½]
changes to own or other insurers’ NCD scales may have resulted in reduction in customer
loyalty [½]
if insurer sells mainly through brokers:
– predominance of direct writers into motor market with generally lower premiums
reduces insurer’s competitiveness [½]
– reduction of commission rates to brokers could have resulted in reduced
sales. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 48 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
Other areas for concern include:
higher per policy fixed expenses due to lower volumes, leading to lower profits or possible
losses [½]
new business costs more to attract than the cost of a renewal, especially for telephone
sales (for broker sales it is much less of an issue). Hence the costs of regaining previous
market share increase the more current business declines. [1]
Possible remedies to stop decline are to:
develop marketing plan to stop decrease or regain market share [½]
– increase commission rates to key brokers (increases premium rates) [½]
– redesign NCD scale to be more attractive to policyholders [½]
– introduce new sales channel, eg direct sales if currently dependent on brokers [½]
– advertising campaign to improve public awareness of insurer [½]
reduce premium rates, but this will reduce profitability and return on shareholders
capital. [½]
The report could also include a section on trends. This could cover:
the company’s own experience [½]
wider market experience and what other insurers are doing. [½]
[Total 13]
(ii) Main observations
reduction in premiums, more for non-comp (17%) than for comp (11%) [½]
reduction in vehicles covered of 10% is evenly spread across comp/non-comp [½]
average premium falls marginally for comp (1%) but by 8% for non-comp [½]
claim frequency up slightly for comp, but down 5% for non-comp [½]
reduction in frequency for non-comp mitigates (to some extent anyway) the fall in
average premium [½]
– can’t tell whether reduction is due to premium cuts, reflecting improving
experience generally, or changing mix of business [1]
Year 8 claim ratio improves from 31/12 of Year 8 to 31/12 of Year 9 suggesting possible
over reserving at the end of Year 8. [½]
The Year 9 claim ratio as at 31/12 of Year 9 could be similarly overestimated. [½]
Assuming the same degree of prudence in reserving, the Year 9 claims ratio suggests an
improvement for comp business (72% to 70.1%) but a deterioration in non-comp business
(62.3% to 64.5%). [1]
[Maximum 5]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 49
(iii) Points of clarification
What is the aim of the revised premium rates? [½]
Is there a deliberate decision not to defend market share? [½]
Has company made efforts or been successful at increasing the other non-motor business
which makes up 20% of its portfolio? [½]
How are competitors likely to react to our premium rate changes? Will they change their
premium rates? If so, by how much? Critically, how will this affect our likely future
volumes? [1]
What are the driving forces behind the trends in experience? [½]
[Total 3]
(iv) Further details
more detailed analysis of motor experience split by rating groups [1]
details of the rating structure compared to those of our competitors [½]
how large claims have been allowed for [½]
any unusual events causing accumulations, eg bad weather or a pileup [½]
how we have allowed for reinsurance protection, cost and expected recoveries [1]
consider quality of management, sales staff and underwriters and whether they have
changed during the year [1½]
how fixed expenses are to be split between the motor business and the rest of the
portfolio [1]
expected (or desired) future levels of business needed for expense allocation [½]
the appropriate level of loadings – eg for fixed and variable expenses, commission,
investment income, contingencies [1]
level of profit (or return on capital) that is required in the future [½]
future level of inflation to be allowed for [½]
period during which new premium rates will be in force [½]
[Total 9]
19.11 (i) Expense allocation
Main factors determining expense allocation between classes:
results of latest expense analysis [½]
basis used, eg ongoing or wind-up [½]
management plans and perspectives [½]
purpose of the allocation, eg setting premium rates or declaring profitability. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 50 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
For rate-setting:
market is crucial, ie how competitive the class is and whether cross-subsidies are
possible [½]
the marginal costs [½]
the commission rates [½]
size and importance of class to the insurer [½]
expectations for future competitive position and volume. [½]
When analysing profitability:
ensuring the results are consistent with shareholders expectations and that the allocation
is reasonable for internal and external analysts. [½]
[Total 5]
(ii) Inadequate expense loadings
The number of policies sold could be lower than planned leading to higher fixed expenses
per policy than assumed when rating. [½]
Higher than assumed inflation of costs, eg salary inflation. [½]
Higher than expected legal and professional fees, possibly related to more unusual or
complicated claims. [½]
Higher levels (more expensive) new business, rather than renewal business, which is less
expensive to process. [½]
Heavy expenses from an unexpected change in circumstances, eg costs of new statutory
requirements. [½]
Unexpected one-off payments such as a special tax. [½]
Poor management control of expenses. [½]
The expense allocation may not have been appropriate. [½]
[Maximum 3]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-19: Actuarial investigations Page 51
19.12 Reasons for monitoring business written
Assessing performance against the organisation’s goals [½]
The company will have certain overall goals (eg profit), and will put together more detailed
targets designed to achieve these goals. [½]
Monitoring will enable the company to see whether these targets are going to be met, and hence
the likelihood of achieving the overall goals. [½]
If expectations are not being met, decisions can be made in order to put the business back on
target (eg re-pricing products). [½]
Managing risk [½]
Monitoring written business allows the company to assess how much risk is inherent in the
portfolio (for example, accumulations). [½]
The amount of risk will be a factor in determining how much capital the company should hold
… [½]
… and what its reinsurance purchasing strategy should be. [½]
Gaining market intelligence [½]
Monitoring written business can provide useful information about competitors’ strategies. It can
also allow the company to compare itself with the market and assess the position of the
underwriting cycle. [1]
Satisfying regulators [½]
Market regulators may require periodic monitoring and reporting of written business. [½]
Influencing the market [½]
A company may be able to influence the market by publishing the results of its monitoring
exercises. [½]
Assist with reserving [½]
The outputs of any monitoring exercise can be used for other purposes such as an input in to the
reserving process, for example when setting a priori loss ratios within the BF method. [½]
Part of the actuarial control cycle [½]
Another reason for monitoring would be to validate assumptions in a model. [½]
By comparing actual experience with that expected, we can assess the need to adjust the
assumptions, for example, in our premium rates. [½]
[Maximum 9]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 52 SP8-19: Actuarial investigations
End of Part 5
What next?
1. Briefly review the key areas of Part 5 and/or re-read the summaries at the end of
Chapters 18 and 19.
2. Ensure you have attempted some of the Practice Questions at the end of each chapter in
Part 5. If you don’t have time to do them all, you could save the remainder for use as part
of your revision.
3. Attempt Assignment X5.
Time to consider …
… ‘revision and rehearsal’ products
ASET – This contains past exam papers with detailed solutions and explanations, plus lots of
comments about exam technique. Students have said:
‘The ASET packs were great and I would highly recommend them for everyone.’
‘The ASET Pack is great because it gives tips on how to start a question.’
You can find lots more information, including samples, on our website at www.ActEd.co.uk.
Buy online at www.ActEd.co.uk/estore
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 1
Reinsurance pricing
Syllabus objectives
4.4 Outline the similarities and differences between pricing direct and reinsurance
business.
4.5 Describe how to determine appropriate premiums for each of the following types of
reinsurance:
proportional reinsurance
non-proportional reinsurance
property catastrophe reinsurance
stop losses.
4.6 Describe the data required to determine appropriate premiums for each of the
above types of reinsurance.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
0 Introduction
0.1 Objectives
The aim of this chapter is to provide a grounding in the methodology and techniques for
pricing property and casualty reinsurance.
If you are studying Subject SP7, you will find that there are many common themes between this
chapter and the Subject SP7 chapter on reinsurance reserving.
After reading this chapter the candidate should be able to:
outline the data required to price a reinsurance contract
understand and explain why the data requirements might differ for different types of
reinsurance and original business
identify the key assumptions that might need to be made when pricing a reinsurance
contract
carry out a simple rating exercise, given appropriate information
The later sections in this chapter will describe how to price the main reinsurance
contracts:
– pricing excess of loss (Section 3)
– pricing proportional reinsurance (Section 4)
– pricing stop loss reinsurance (Section 5).
You should note that the pricing methods described in this chapter are by no means
definitive. Other common methods exist that are not described by the Core Reading. In
the exam, you will need to choose a suitable method, which will largely depend on the
data you have been given and the product you are pricing.
describe how to deal with some of the more complex features of certain reinsurance
contracts.
This is discussed in Section 6.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 3
0.2 Overview
The basic principles behind reinsurance pricing are no different to those for direct
insurance pricing, particularly the pricing of excess layers.
These common principles will be outlined in Section 1.
The key differences are:
the volume and nature of data available to inform the pricing analyses and decision
there are very few standard contracts – it is always necessary to read the slip to
clarify how the contract works and what it covers
the individual nature of most pricing exercises
reinsurers often price stochastically.
These key differences will be discussed further in Section 2.
The emphasis of the analytical work will also differ slightly depending on whether:
the task is to quote terms (that is, price the contract from scratch) or
to act as a following underwriter, where we are being asked to write a line on the
contract at an already quoted rate.
For example, if we are the lead underwriter, then it will be our objective to determine the price
(or the commission for a proportional treaty) that we would be willing to offer in order that our
profit criteria can be met. Hence the profit criteria will be an input to our model and the
price/commission will be the output.
However, if we are a following underwriter, then the price and/or commission will already have
been set by the lead underwriter, and hence be an input to our model. In this case, our objective
will be to assess whether the price/commission generates sufficient profit, which will be the
output of our model.
The methods described in the following sections are illustrative and they are by no means
exhaustive. Many different methods are used in practice.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
1 Elements of pricing essentially identical to pricing direct business
This section outlines some of the similarities in technique between pricing direct business and
pricing reinsurance business. The overall technique that of finding an expected loss cost then
loading for various other items is exactly as for direct insurance.
As a reminder, the normal loadings for direct insurance are:
expenses
commission and/or brokerage
reinsurance
profit and contingencies, ie return on capital, or return on equity (ROE)
investment income (as a deduction rather than loading)
insurance premium tax, if applicable.
Question
State which of these loadings will not apply when pricing reinsurance.
Solution
Commission will only apply if commission is payable to the cedant, which normally applies only for
proportional reinsurance.
Reinsurance will not apply, but retrocession (when a reinsurer buys its own reinsurance) will.
Insurance premium tax is not necessarily payable on reinsurance premiums (for example, in the
UK).
1.1 Expense loadings
Aside from commission and brokerage, a reinsurer will load for own expenses using the
same approaches and techniques as the direct insurer. This includes allowances for:
operational expenses (eg general management expenses or the cost of HR)
expenses associated with the administrative maintenance of the policy (which may
be partly fixed and partly variable). For example, the expenses relating to handling
claims from the cedant.
the costs of the reinsurer’s own reinsurance (retrocessional) protections.
However, good practice dictates that the reinsurer should always be aware of the gross risk
premium.
As the pricing is usually individual to the risk, the final form of the loading may tend in
practice to be simpler than for direct pricing (a percentage loading to the risk premium for
instance) even where the loading was originally derived on a more complex basis.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 5
You will recall from earlier chapters that expense analyses and allocation for pricing direct
insurance can become quite involved.
1.2 Profit/ROE loadings
As for direct insurers, reinsurers will build a profit loading into the reinsurance price.
This can be derived in a number of ways:
from a profit target, perhaps expressed as a percentage of gross or net premiums
from a return on capital target
from a target loss or combined ratio.
Normally, we talk of the profit and contingency loadings as one combined loading. This is because
an insurer (or reinsurer) will not necessarily have the same profit loading for all contracts and
then add a contingency margin for riskier business rather, it will have higher profit margins for
riskier business.
1.3 Commission and brokerage loadings
As for direct insurance, the expected brokerage to reinsurance brokers, and commission to
be paid to the ceding company, will be loaded into the reinsurance price.
The level of both can vary by:
line of business
type of reinsurance
broker
territory from which the reinsurance placement is being driven.
Brokerage is usually priced as a percentage load to the net of brokerage reinsurance cost.
It varies to reflect the administrative cost to the reinsurance broker of supporting the
placement of the cover and the servicing of the contract thereafter. In the case of
reinsurance of long-tailed lines in particular, the broking support provided in making and
processing the reinsurance recoveries associated with reinsurance cover for a single
12-month period continues over many years. The costs of this can be very significant, and
the broker may have an additional service agreement with the cedant under which explicit
fees are charged related to the number of claims transactions being processed.
As quota share reinsurances tend to involve higher reinsurance premiums than excess of
loss, the percentage rate of brokerage tends to be relatively low, of the order of 1% to 3%.
Question
Explain why quota share reinsurances usually involve higher reinsurance premiums than excess of
loss.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
Solution
Simply because the cedant is passing a proportion of each and every premium to the reinsurer,
whereas for excess of loss reinsurance, the cedant only pays a premium to reflect the expected
large claims that breach the retention of the cover.
For other covers the standard brokerage would tend to be around 10% (though can be up to
20%).
The rate of brokerage will be stated on the slip circulated to reinsurers.
The broker may in practice agree to rebate part of this to the cedant (they may have agreed
a fixed fee for instance), but this is handled as exactly that a refund of some of the
brokerage received by the broker to the cedant. The reinsurer would not be party to this
agreement and is unaffected by it and should load for the level of brokerage stated on the
slip.
1.4 In practice
In practice, however, although the various loadings may have been derived separately, for
simplicity and clarity they will often be combined into a single loading, eg one total
percentage loading or into a target loss ratio that is to be applied to the premium.
For example, if R is the risk premium, then you might apply a total 30% loading in order to get a
total office premium of 1.3R.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 7
2 Elements of pricing where approach differs from that for pricing
direct business
In this section, we will see that whilst the broad techniques behind pricing reinsurance are as for
direct business, there are a few differences that need consideration, stemming mainly from the
different claims characteristics of the business.
2.1 Derivation of expected risk premium – overview
The fundamental idea behind assessing the risk premium – based on the expected loss cost
plus a loading that reflects the risk that the actual loss cost turns out to be worse than
expected – is just as it is for direct insurance.
Notice here that risk premium is being defined as including a contingency margin or ‘risk loading’,
ie a prudent estimate of the expected loss cost. Elsewhere throughout this course, the Core
Reading has taken risk premium to be the expected loss cost without any loading.
The form of the risk loading being used in practice can also vary from one reinsurer to the
next, just as it can for a direct insurer, and might be as follows:
a proportion of the standard deviation of the expected loss cost to the contract
The more variable the expected loss cost, the higher the risk loading. Remember that
much reinsurance operates at the extremes of distributions, and so the variance can be
substantial.
based on a required return on capital
investment-equivalent pricing
In other words, the loading is designed so that the extra premium charged provides the
extra return required by shareholders for the extra risk.
the marginal impact on capital of writing a risk and load for the required rate of
return on the additional capital required to write that risk.
The main difference for reinsurance pricing (as opposed to direct insurance pricing) is the
amount of and type of data and information available to assess the expected loss cost and
the distribution (or volatility) of that loss cost.
In addition, the purchaser (ie the cedant) is arguably as knowledgeable as the seller (ie the
reinsurer), unlike the situation for many direct insurance transactions.
For example, when pricing high-layer excess of loss reinsurance for which there is limited (or no)
historical claims experience, the expected future claims experience is pretty much anybody’s
guess!
This makes the process more of a negotiation more akin to insuring a major corporation.
The exact approach also differs materially by the line of business – in particular between
property catastrophe covers and all other covers.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
These differences will now be discussed further.
2.2 Derivation of risk premium property catastrophe business
Catastrophe models
The claims experience of property catastrophe reinsurance business is by its nature very volatile.
Hence, little emphasis can be placed on the historical claims data available (if any).
The pricing of property catastrophe reinsurance is heavily dependent on the proprietary
catastrophe models such as RMS, AIR and EQECAT.
These models are discussed further in Chapter 21.
These models do differ in the way in which they work and also in what is included in the
information that they output. It is, therefore, important to have a good understanding of
their relative merits. It is important to consider:
which models are viewed as more robust for which perils and in which geographical
locations. This can change over time, so reinsurers need to keep up to date.
This can be done by reading the insurance press and having regular discussions with the
catastrophe model providers. Selling such models is a commercial enterprise, and so it
will be important to read between the lines of ‘marketing hype’.
how the assumptions behind the models differ and how often they are updated
how the input data requirements differ – this may have an impact on results
how the output differs – the primary outputs are files containing large numbers of
simulated events (earthquakes, windstorms, floods) along with the probability of that
event happening and the expected loss for the set of risks in the input data. There is
also a measure of the uncertainty in that expected loss. Some models include two
sources of uncertainty in that measure, some only one. Hence the output from some
models would imply a lower amount of volatility or a smaller range of possible
outcomes, and hence a smaller risk load than others. The two sources of
uncertainty are:
(i) uncertainty about which events will happen
(ii) uncertainty about, for a given event, the exact amount of insured loss it will
cause.
The latter source is often referred to as secondary uncertainty, and is not accounted
for in the output of some of the catastrophe models.
Where catastrophe models do allow for this secondary uncertainty, it forms part of the
‘vulnerability’ and ‘financial analysis’ modules of the catastrophe model. This will be
discussed further in Chapter 21.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 9
When pricing property catastrophe reinsurance, it is important to:
(i) read the catastrophe model manuals – they are more informative and interesting
than might be thought
(ii) keep abreast of model developments and changes
(iii) talk to the catastrophe modellers – both about the models in general and for a
particular risk about the quality of the data and any concerns that they may have
about the reliability of the results.
Many students will not work for a company that has direct access to catastrophe models or their
developers. In those circumstances, we suggest you look in more detail at the websites and
literature produced by the model providers mentioned above.
Note: sometimes the reinsurer will receive not the original data itself, but the model output,
either as run by the cedant or by their reinsurance broker. In this case, the reinsurer will
need to speak to the catastrophe modellers at the cedant or broker and involve the
reinsurer’s own catastrophe modellers if possible.
From catastrophe model output to risk premium
This section describes just one approach used by some catastrophe models to convert the output
into a suitable risk premium. Other approaches and output formats do exist.
The catastrophe model output would usually be the distribution of events. There are two
bases for these files:
OEPs – an occurrence exceedance probability file, which considers the probability
that the largest individual event loss in a year exceeds a particular threshold.
The OEP file for exposures under a reinsurance contract would be used mainly for
evaluating per-event reinsurance; for example, losses likely to arise from a covered event
seen only once in 200 years. The problem with this file is that it may ignore the possibility
of multiple events.
AEPs – an aggregate exceedance probability file, which considers the probability
that the aggregate losses from all loss events in a year exceeds a particular
threshold.
The output of this file is often displayed as a graph (the AEP curve) with loss amounts on
the x-axis and the corresponding probability of exceeding that loss amount on the y-axis.
The area under the AEP curve is equal to the annual expected (gross) losses. The AEP
outputs will often be used for capital or reserving projections.
The reinsurer can use these event files in a stochastic frequency-severity model to simulate
catastrophe loss experience from the cedant in an annual period. Next the reinsurance
contract terms can be applied to these simulated losses to calculate the resulting
recoveries. Then the distribution of the annual reinsurance recoveries can be derived,
along with the expected annual recoveries and the volatility measure being used in the risk
loading (for example, standard deviation, 1 in 250 largest).
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
3 Derivation of risk premium – property and casualty per-risk non-
proportional covers
This section describes some methods of how to price excess of loss reinsurance. Other methods
do exist in practice. The decision as to which method to use largely depends on the data available
and any cost / time restrictions.
There are currently few equivalents of the catastrophe models for non-natural catastrophe
property and casualty reinsurance pricing.
As we will see in Chapter 21, some catastrophe models have been developed more recently to
cover non-natural catastrophes such as terrorism risk and diseases.
As a result, the pricing methodology used has more in common with approaches used for
pricing direct excess layer insurance.
This will consist of blending an assessment of the risk premium based on:
(i) benchmarks for the appropriate line of business / territory applied to the cedant’s
current risk profile (‘exposure rating’)
(ii) the cedant’s own historical loss experience (‘experience rating’).
Section 3.1 will look at exposure rating, whilst Section 3.2 looks at experience rating.
3.1 Exposure rating
Introduction
The main principle of exposure rating is to not use historical claims experience at all, but instead
to base premium rates on the amount of risk (ie exposure) that policies bring to the portfolio.
In exposure rating, reinsurers are using a benchmark to represent (or may be directly
derived from) a market severity distribution for the line of business and territory being
covered.
There are two common forms of benchmark: ILFs and first loss scales. The former tend to
be more common in liability (re)insurance and the latter elsewhere.
ILFs and first loss scales were covered in detail in Chapter 15.
Ideally the cedant will have provided a list in electronic form of all the risks that they have
written in a recent complete 12-month period. Ideally the 12 months should be the most
recent 12 months that would be completely processed and entered on the cedant’s systems.
If an older set of data was used, it would be less relevant to the risk environment that the
proposed rates will be covering, and so would need more adjustment before it could be used.
The detail of what should be on the list will vary by the line of business.
The tables in Section 7 show what would be required for some of the more common areas of
business.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 11
It should be noted that large commercial risks are often shared between insurers
(‘subscription market’ business). It is important to understand whether the limits in the risk
data provided are the insurer’s share or 100% of the limit for that risk – the total for all
insurers involved. Reinsurers will need to know or be able to derive both. In addition,
where a risk has been placed in a series of layers (for example, $5m xs $5m, $15m xs $10m,
$25m xs $25m) the reinsurer will need to be able to identify and connect the programme
layers on which the cedant has participated (which may not be all of them).
Basic exposure rating using ILFs (casualty reinsurance)
If a basic exposure rating exercise using ILFs is being performed, the expected loss cost
only (and not the volatility or distribution of the loss cost) will be assessed.
On the assumption that 100% of the risk is being written, for each risk in the list of risks in
the cedant’s data, the reinsurer will need to use (calculate) the 100% limit (L) and the excess
(E). Suppose that ILF (n) is the ILF value corresponding to limit n in the ILF table. Suppose
also that a reinsurance layer with limit LR and excess ER is being priced.
The ILF table will be used to calculate what proportion of the expected losses from the
ceded risk would fall in the reinsured layer.
ILF LR ER ILF (ER )
Proportion
ILF L E ILF (E )
The diagram below helps to illustrate this. The curve shows the ILF n (y axis)
corresponding to each loss limit n (x axis).
2.80
2.60
2.40
2.20
% of premium for exposure
to reinsurance layer:-
2.32 - 1.71
2.00
2.20 - 1.88 ILF(ER + LR) -ILF(ER)
ILF( E + L) - ILF(E)
1.80 Reinsurance Layer = 2.20 - 1.88
Limit, LR 2.32 - 1.71
1.60
= 52.46%
Reinsurance
Retention, ER
1.40
ER + LR
1.20
L+E
1.00
1,000,000 6,000,000 11,000,000 16,000,000 21,000,000
Policy retention, E Policy Limit, L
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
This needs some modification:
where the reinsurance retention is below the bottom of the cover on the risk, ILF(ER)
is replaced with ILF(E)
where the top of the reinsured layer is beyond the top of the cover on the risk,
ILF(LR+ER) becomes ILF(E+L)
where the reinsurance layer finishes below the risk (0% reinsured)
where the reinsurance layer starts above the cover on the risk (0% reinsured).
This gives the expected losses to the reinsurance layer as a proportion of the expected
losses for the reinsured (ceded) risk. Now the expected losses for the ceded risk are
needed. For this, the premium charged for each risk is needed and, with a loss ratio for the
risk, the expected losses could be calculated as the loss ratio times that premium.
Note: the denominator of the loss ratio and the premium must be consistent. For example,
given gross premiums, a loss ratio will be needed as a percentage of gross premiums.
Given premiums net of original brokerage and commissions, a loss ratio will need to be
calculated on the same basis.
Sometimes the cedant will provide an expected loss ratio; at other times the historical
development triangles and rate changes for the line of business, or the cedant may provide
both or neither. All the available information should be used – which may include
information for the market or other cedants – to determine a reasonable loss ratio. It is
possible that this is not the same as the loss ratio the cedant provided. The reinsurer can
apply the selected loss ratio to each risk in the risk data to calculate risk level estimates of
expected losses.
So, for each risk in the data, the reinsurer can calculate the expected reinsurance losses
and then sum them over all the risks. This gives the undiscounted expected loss cost for
the reinsurance contract. The reinsurer can then discount this to reflect the expected
payment pattern of the reinsurance losses (that is, the payment of recoveries to the cedant
from the reinsurer). This payment pattern could be based on the reinsurer’s own
experience (for example, from the latest reserve review) or from the historical large loss
experience of the cedant, or on a blend of the two, reflecting the credibility of the cedant’s
historical loss experience.
So far, it has been assumed that there is no limit on the total amount or number of
reinsurance recoveries available (called ‘sideways cover’) on the contract, and that there are
no reinstatement premiums (that is, that all the reinsurance cost is paid up front).
Reinstatements were discussed in Chapter 6 but we will meet them again at the end of this
chapter. Following a reinsurance claim, a reinsurer will often require an additional payment
(a reinstatement premium) to be paid in order to restore full cover. There will usually be a
limit to the number of reinstatements that can be made before the reinsurance cover is
exhausted.
The best way of handling this is to use the ILFs in a more sophisticated way.
There are some approximate methods that can be used to adjust for reinstatements and
limited sideways cover (see later) where only basic exposure rating is being used (as may
well be the case at busy periods).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 13
Exposure-based rating – practice
In practice, even reinsurers have limited historical loss data for some lines of non-property
catastrophe business, especially for very large loss events. Pricing for high excess layer
reinsurance is often driven by minimum rate requirements and by expenses and cost of
capital rather than expected loss cost, which may well be close to zero.
In other words, rather than using expected loss cost to derive the price for high layer business,
there is a tendency to charge a price simply to cover expense costs and the extra capital needed
to write such a volatile layer (which may come from regulatory or internal capital requirements).
In some instances, the cedant does not provide individual risk information. What the cedant
normally provides in such cases is a limit profile – a table showing number of risks and
written / earned premiums by limit bands and also by excess bands (where the cedant
writes excess business). Sometimes this information is split into two separate tables, one
for limit bands and one for excess bands. Occasionally only limit bands are provided.
Where this happens, it is necessary to make an assumption about where in the band the
limits actually lie, bearing in mind commonly-purchased limits for the line of business. The
reinsurer can then use the data in blocks. This is more approximate than using
individually-listed data. It is even more approximate if the excess information is provided
separately. Finally, the reinsurer will need to make assumptions about how the excess and
limit information interact as well.
Let’s explain this last paragraph a little further.
Suppose that risk profile data tells us that a total amount of premium income has been received
in respect of several risks, and each risk has limits somewhere between £2.5m and £5m. We need
to decide what value in that band we will use for the calculations.
We could, for example, assume that the limit for each risk is just the midpoint, ie £3.75m.
However, certain limit sizes are more commonly purchased than others. For example we may be
aware that for this line of business £5m is a very common limit, so we might choose £5m as being
the most representative value to use instead.
Alternatively, we may know that for this line of business, the number of risks with a particular
limit tends to reduce as the limit gets bigger. We may therefore pick a value below the midpoint,
eg £3m, as being a better representation of the typical risk in that band. If we are being
conservative, we would choose the highest limit value.
Often the profile given is a two-way table with limit bands down the side and excess bands across
the top (or vice versa). Similarly then, we would need to select a representative excess value for
risks in a band as well as a limit value.
Sometimes we may be given separate profiles for limit and for excess (ie two one-way tables). In
this case, we would have to decide how to combine these into a two-way table and then select
single representative limit / excess values for the calculations.
We could also split the band further (for example if there are two common limits falling in that
limit band) but then we have to make even more assumptions about how the income splits
between each subdivision.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
All these calculations are really just an attempt to adapt grouped data so as to obtain
approximate data on each individual risk. Once we have estimated data on an individual risk level
we can estimate the reinsurance premium using the ILF method.
3.2 Experience-based rating
Introduction
This section looks at two possible methods of pricing excess of loss reinsurance using actual past
claims experience. These methods are more commonly used than exposure rating techniques
when there is credible and reliable data, for example on working layers.
There are two main approaches to assessing the cost of non-proportional reinsurance using
the cedant’s loss experience. The first is a basic burning cost calculation. The second is to
construct a stochastic frequency / severity model.
Both approaches were described in Chapter 14.
The choice of approach is influenced by:
the approach to loading for profit (does it require a volatility measure or a
distribution of outcomes?)
If distributions are required, the stochastic approach would clearly be preferable.
volume of loss data
For example, if you have plenty of reliable claims data, the variability is already captured
and so you might rely on a burning cost approach.
time / resource constraints (especially close to peak renewal dates such as
1 January).
Burning cost calculation
In the burning cost calculation, the reinsurer will apply the reinsurance terms to the
historical losses after adjusting for claims inflation (trend) and expected future
development.
Below is found a common method of calculation:
First the reinsurer will apply trends to the loss data.
We discussed ‘trending’ in Chapter 14. It is a popular name given to the technique of adjusting
the data for inflation (and sometimes other factors such as frequency trends). You will also hear
the technique referred to as putting the data ‘on level’ or putting it on an ‘as-if’ basis (in other
words, as if the claims were occurring today).
Note: the form of data will vary depending on the basis of cover. For ‘losses occurring
during’ cover, loss data should be capable of aggregation by year of loss and exposure
(premium) data should be on a calendar year (earned) basis. For ‘risks attaching during’
cover, loss data should be capable of aggregation by underwriting / policy year and
exposure (premium) on a written year basis.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 15
Losses occurring during (LOD) is another term for an accident year approach. Risks attaching
during, also called ‘policies incepting’, is another term for an underwriting year approach. Note
that complications would arise if the cover basis changed during the period of investigation.
The loss data should include the paid and case reserve positions for each loss at regular
(usually annual) points in time. The loss data should be from the ground up before
application of the reinsurance contract excess and uncapped (that is, before application of
the cedant’s policy limit or reinsurance contract limit) if possible.
However, as mentioned earlier, often the reinsurer will get fully ground-up data but only for
claims breaching a certain census point (often half the lowest retention). You need to make sure
you look closely at the data you are working with, and if you’re in any doubt about what it
represents, you should make a suitable assumption.
The reinsurer will apply trends to the historical loss payments and corresponding case
reserves, using appropriate inflation assumptions to a common fixed point in time.
It may instead be that the case reserves have already been set based on the expected settlement
amount in the future, ie already allowing for future inflation. In this case, you would only need to
trend the payment data.
Then the reinsurance contract terms will be applied to each trended loss, to give the
trended losses to the layer.
Further complications arise if stability clauses apply to the layer, which would increase the
effective limits. This is covered further in Section 6.3.
These amounts will be aggregated by year of loss or underwriting year (as appropriate) to
produce triangulations of paid and incurred loss development for losses to the layer. The
reinsurer can then develop these to ultimate, using as far as is reasonable development
patterns derived from the triangles themselves.
At this stage you need to make sure that the development pattern you have is appropriate for
your needs. The ideal development pattern to apply would be:
applicable to the reinsurance layer you are pricing
applicable for that cedant’s experience
already adjusted for inflation
include allowance for both IBNR and IBNER.
Question
Describe how the method described above would change if you were only given the development
pattern for the fully ground-up cedant experience.
Solution
In this case, you would have to develop your claims before calculating the amounts hitting the
reinsurance layer.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
Where the data is sparse (for example, high excess layers), benchmarks will be used for the
class / territory instead. These are usually based on aggregated data for all a reinsurer’s
cedants or may be based on industry standards (most easily available in the US – RAA and
ISO being the two main sources).
RAA is the Reinsurance Association of America. It is a trade association that influences and guides
various bodies as they consider legislation affecting the reinsurance industry. ISO is the Insurance
Services Office, a private US firm that deals with information about risk.
Benchmarks have also been developed in the UK by various bodies, eg actuarial consultants. If
using benchmarks, you should take the usual precautions that the business they have been based
on will be suitable for your own use.
This provides an estimate of losses to the layer for each historical year. However, so far,
exposure changes have not been considered during the historical period covered by the
loss data.
We need the exposure measure in order to calculate a burning cost.
The most common exposure measure is premium net of acquisition costs – although for
motor insurance, vehicle-years is also likely to be available at least for the private car
element of the cedant’s business.
Quite often, vehicle-year data is not available so readily for motor fleet business.
If reinsurers use premium as the exposure measure, information is required about historical
rate changes plus an estimate of rate changes for the period of cover so that all the
historical premiums can be adjusted to be as if they are based on rates for the contract year
being priced (hence the term ‘as-if’ that we mentioned earlier).
In addition, if the rates for the underlying direct business are applied to an exposure base
that is affected by inflation (for example, wages for direct employers’ liability (EL), turnover
for direct general liability (GL)), then premiums should change to the same extent as the
exposure base without any change in the real exposure to risk. For example, in GL,
turnover may increase purely as a result of the insured company increasing its prices to
cover wage / expense inflation without any change in the amount of product it is selling.
What we are doing here is making exposure consistent with claims. We have already adjusted the
claims data for inflation, to put them on an as-if basis, and now we are going to adjust the
premiums too, to make them as if we are selling the business in the proposed period of cover.
Only then will we be able to calculate a burning cost consistently.
A common mistake would be to use claims inflation to adjust the historical premiums, instead of
using actual historical premium rate changes.
Question
Explain what would happen if you adjusted both premiums and claims for claims inflation.
Solution
The adjustments are the same for both premiums and claims, and so when we calculate a loss
ratio or burning cost, they cancel out and effectively we haven’t adjusted the data at all.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 17
As an example, consider the following table.
Rate Rate Wage Wage Adjusted
Year Premium
change index inflation index premium
1998 25,433,227 100.00 100.00 43,505,962
1999 27,566,903 -10% 90.00 4.82% 104.82 49,986,372
2000 31,298,563 -5% 85.50 4.49% 109.53 57,171,077
2001 32,096,751 5% 89.78 4.50% 114.46 53,432,742
2002 41,679,236 25% 112.22 3.54% 118.51 53,609,919
2003 45,905,285 15% 129.05 3.42% 122.56 49,646,361
2004 51,239,374 10% 141.96 4.38% 127.93 48,263,978
2005 56,289,106 5% 149.05 4.02% 133.08 48,542,363
2006 57,616,193 -5% 141.60 4.12% 138.55 50,234,637
2007 55,250,000 -10% 127.44 3.50% 143.40 51,714,000
2008 54,000,000 -10% 114.70 4.00% 149.14 54,000,000
Here, the rate index and wage index are just the yearly rate changes or wage inflation
compounded up. The adjusted (to 2008) premium is then the original premium multiplied up by
the ratio of indexes at 2008 to the indexes at the original year.
114.70 149.14
So, for example: 43,505,962 25,433,227
100.00 100.00
You may notice small rounding differences, as it appears that the above Core Reading table was
produced by a spreadsheet.
Note: the real exposure for 2008 is actually less than that for 2000, not more, as might
initially have been thought.
This is simply because rates and wages have increased substantially since 2000, and so the as-if-
2008 exposure in 2000 was actually quite sizeable.
By scaling the losses to the layer (trended and developed) for each historical year to 2008
exposure levels (for example, for 2000, multiply by 54m/57.17m), a set of exposure-adjusted
losses to the layer can be obtained which in turn can be averaged (say) to arrive at an
estimate of loss cost for 2008.
Alternatively, each year’s trended and developed losses to the layer could be divided by the
corresponding exposure-adjusted premiums. This would give a set of loss cost rates,
which we could average (say) to give a rate for 2008, to apply to the 2008 premium estimate.
It is advisable to examine the individual years’ exposure-adjusted losses to the layer / rates,
in case there are upward or downward trends still remaining. (Here, we mean trends in the
traditional sense.) These may be real (so the reinsurer will need to allow for them in the final
selection of expected loss cost) or they may indicate that the trend (say) used is
inappropriate. (Here, we mean trend as in inflation adjustment.) By discussing this with the
underwriters (reinsurer and cedant) the most likely outcome can be determined.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
In the above example, there are further complications to be considered such as a change in
the basis of cover, any allowance for claims inflation already built into the case reserves, or
indexation clauses.
Frequency / severity model
As an alternative to a burning cost analysis, the reinsurer may construct a
frequency / severity model in which statistical distributions are fitted to the cedant’s
historical loss data.
Firstly, trends are applied to the individual losses, as for the burning cost calculation.
There may be times when the reinsurer will use this method, even though material
development for open claims in the more recent years is expected – usually the case for
liability lines, for example EL (employers’ liability), GL (general liability), E&O (errors and
omissions), motor TPL (third party liability). In this case, either:
(i) losses for these years can be ignored, or
(ii) losses on an individual basis can be developed.
The first of these approaches would be rather foolish, however.
The second approach is not entirely satisfactory. This is because, when development
factors for aggregated experience are applied to each individual loss, the variability in
development between losses is understated and possibly also overdeveloping claims with
large current case reserves.
A better approach would be to use a stochastic model for the development factors. Using
this, the reinsurer generates a large number of sets of trended and developed large losses,
fits severity distributions to each set and then selects the distribution type with the best
overall fit. The reinsurer will then use the distribution of the corresponding parameters to
determine the mean fit and the parameter variability.
However, this is a far from trivial exercise and there may be occasions where following
approach (ii) above may be the only practical option.
In either approach, the development should only allow for incurred but not enough reported
(IBNER) – ie the development of known claims, not development due to claims not yet
reported. The reinsurer should apply the development factors to open, not settled, claims.
The IBNER development from the cedant’s large loss experience can be derived by
arranging historical loss developments into development triangles aggregated by year and
then comparing the (trended) incurred at time t for losses for year n reported at time t, with
the (trended) incurred at time t + 1 for losses for year n reported at time t.
The Core Reading example on the next page illustrates the following steps:
triangulate the loss experience for each claim (in the first table)
aggregate the data by year of loss (in the second table)
find the incurred amounts at time t+1, but only for losses notified at time t (in the third
table).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 19
For example, for 2002 the incurred amount of 900k at time 3 (t+1) for claims notified at time 2
includes figures relating only to losses 6, 7 and 8 (ie 225k, 250k and 425k).
This gives us the development profile of claims already notified and thus helps us analyse IBNER.
Then the final table (headed factors) calculates the ratio of the figures in the third table to those
in the second table, and takes the average.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
For example:
Large Losses - Incurred Development History
Development Year
Year Claim 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2000 Loss 1 100,000 200,000 250,000 250,000 250,000 250,000 250,000
2000 Loss 2 260,000 275,000 280,000 295,000 307,000 306,000
2000 Loss 3 350,000 390,000 410,000 410,000 410,000 410,000
2001 Loss 4 200,000 240,000 250,000 255,000 255,000 255,000
2001 Loss 5
2002 Loss 6 175,000 210,000 225,000 240,000 238,000
2002 Loss 7 225,000 250,000 275,000 280,000
2002 Loss 8 400,000 425,000 450,000 445,000
2002 Loss 9 310,000 350,000 356,000
2003 Loss 10 125,000 145,000 165,000 165,000
2003 Loss 11 200,000 245,000 250,000
2004 Loss 12 150,000 175,000 180,000
2004 Loss 13 300,000 350,000 370,000
2004 Loss 14 110,000 140,000
2005 Loss 15 130,000 150,000
2005 Loss 16 110,000 125,000
2006 Loss 17 245,000
2006 Loss 18 210,000
Incurred at time t, for losses notified at time t
Year 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2000 100,000 810,000 915,000 940,000 955,000 967,000 966,000
2001 200,000 240,000 250,000 255,000 255,000 255,000
2002 175,000 835,000 1,210,000 1,315,000 1,319,000
2003 125,000 345,000 410,000 415,000
2004 450,000 635,000 690,000
2005 240,000 275,000
2006 455,000
Incurred at time t+1, for losses notified at time t
Year 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2000 200,000 915,000 940,000 955,000 967,000 966,000
2001 240,000 250,000 255,000 255,000 255,000
2002 210,000 900,000 1,315,000 1,319,000
2003 145,000 410,000 415,000
2004 525,000 690,000
2005 275,000
2006
Factors
Year 1:2 2:3 3:4 4:5 5:6 6:7
2000 2.00 1.13 1.03 1.02 1.01 1.00
2001 1.20 1.04 1.02 1.00 1.00
2002 1.20 1.08 1.09 1.00
2003 1.16 1.19 1.01
2004 1.17 1.09
2005 1.15
2006
Average 1.31 1.10 1.04 1.01 1.01 1.00
Weighted Average 1.24 1.10 1.05 1.01 1.01 1.00
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 21
So far, we have only calculated IBNER development. We also need to calculate IBNR.
The large loss count development can be used to determine IBNR development and so
estimate the ultimate large claim count for each historical year. Next the reinsurer should
adjust this for exposure changes in the same way as for the burning cost calculation. The
final adjusted ultimate claim counts can be used to fit a frequency distribution.
Finally, the frequency and severity distributions can be combined to produce a stochastic
model for the cedant’s large losses and so to model the corresponding reinsurance
recoveries for the contract being priced.
This was all covered in more detail in Chapter 14.
Practical issues
Reporting threshold for large loss data
Typically, cedant historical loss data is provided for all losses that exceed a particular size.
This threshold is often called a census point.
The size is often dictated by the reporting requirements of their past reinsurers and may be
a fraction (often half) of their current lowest retention.
If we use a census point that is too high, we will not see many historical claims in the data
provided, because of inflation. It would also mean that we would not be provided with any data
relating to claims that have been notified but which have not yet developed beyond the retention
limit.
Question
An insurer writes liability business that has a 10-year tail. Inflation in the past has averaged 10%
per annum. Estimate a reasonable census point for claims in order to price an excess of loss
reinsurance treaty that attaches at £1m.
Solution
10 years of inflation at 10% per annum means that the census point would ideally be no greater
than £1,000,000v 10 £385,543 . However, for prudence, perhaps a census point of, say,
£350,000 would be more suitable. More complex approaches are possible, for example by
allowing for the fact that not all claims would take 10 years to settle.
In most countries, and with most lines of business, half the retention is reasonable as a census
point given that inflation may act whilst the claim develops. For longer-tailed classes, or in
countries where severe inflation is common-place, it is not unusual to have far lower reporting
points (or even fully-ground-up data).
Lower reporting points are useful even if some smaller claims will never breach the retention,
because more data is then available to the reinsurer for claims analysis purposes.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
There can be two practical issues with this.
Firstly, if the losses reported are those that are currently over the reporting threshold, then
the dataset will be missing losses that have exceeded the threshold in the past but have
developed downwards since and now have an incurred value below the threshold.
Development factors assessed from such a dataset will tend to overstate the actual future
development. The impact on frequency needs to be considered also. Ideally loss data
should include all losses that have ever exceeded the threshold.
Secondly, if the reporting threshold is the same for all years then, without additional
adjustment, the volume of data for the different years will actually be inconsistent.
Example
Consider a claim that occurred in 1997 and settled for £250,000. Because of claims inflation
(whether economic, for example, wage inflation or social, for example, additional heads of
damage) the same event in 2007 would settle for a larger amount.
Conversely a claim for £250,000 from 2007 would have settled for less if it had occurred in
1997. If the large loss data from the cedant is for losses over £250,000 (for example) for all
years, then the reinsurer will be missing losses from all but the most recent year, that would
be over £250,000 if trended to the most recent year.
In other words, there will be a number of losses from previous years that will exceed £250k once
trended to today’s terms, but which the reinsurer will not know about.
Hence any assessment of frequency of losses over £250,000 will be too low for all but the
most recent year, and any assessment of severity will overstate average severity for all but
the most recent year.
This is because we are ignoring some of the smaller losses.
To overcome this, the reinsurer will need to restate the threshold for all but the most recent
year in the data. Using the same claims inflation rates as were used to trend the losses, the
reinsurer will also inflate the threshold year by year, so that its real value is preserved and
any untrended losses that never exceeded the inflated threshold for the appropriate year are
discarded.
Equivalently, the trended losses can be compared to the original threshold trended to the
same point in time. In practice this is often the easier approach.
Choice of inflation rates
The choice of inflation rate depends on a number of factors:
Whether the loss data to be inflated represents ground-up original losses or losses
to an excess layer. Inflation assumptions for losses to excess layers will be higher
often much higher than those for ground-up losses. However, the difference may
be difficult to estimate.
For very low layers (if they exist), where most claims are for damage to a third party’s
property, claims may increase in line with a mix of price and labour inflation, for example
510% pa in the UK at the time of writing.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 23
Wage index inflation (say, 10% pa) would normally be appropriate for most liability excess
of loss layers since most liability claims that are of this level are generally based on
compensation for loss of earnings.
At the very highest layers, judicial inflation and the general increase in the litigiousness of
society can produce even higher claims cost increases.
The drivers of inflation. For example, for injury losses a large element of inflation is
wages and care costs but there will be additional inflation over and above this
covering trends such as increased tendency to claim, claiming compensation for a
wider range of heads of damage, changes in society’s view of the appropriate level
of compensation for the injury itself (general damages as opposed to the cost of
its consequences, such as loss of earnings and care costs) and so on.
These were discussed in Chapters 7 and 8.
The territory or territories in which business is written (wage inflation, for example,
varies by country).
The size of loss – inflation rates will not necessarily be the same for small and large
losses, although often this assumption is made because of insufficient data to
establish any difference.
Ideally a reinsurer will use all the data available to it from cedants and/or market sources
(most common in the US) to make its own inflation study.
In the UK, such studies also exist, for example those published by the International Underwriting
Association (IUA).
There are other factors that are more dependent on payment or settlement dates rather than
notification dates. For example, landmark legal decisions which affect all future claim
payments but which will not be replicated again in the future. These factors must be
considered on an individual basis to make sure that they receive appropriate action.
Treatment of shock losses
In many instances, a cedant’s loss history may contain an exceptionally large loss.
Depending on how many years of history the cedant is providing, it may be excessive to
allow for a loss of that size to occur once in that many years. The reinsurer could instead
remove the loss, do the loss cost analysis without it, and then add a loading for large losses
at the end. The reinsurer could base this loading on an analysis of the reinsurer’s entire
book or allow for it by spreading the cedant’s own large loss over a more reasonable period
of time.
Discounting
Theoretically, the reinsurer should base pricing on discounted values (for example,
discounting the expected loss cost to reflect the expected payment pattern of the losses to
the contract).
For high layer contracts with little claims experience, the payment pattern will have to be derived
from benchmarks.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
Some reinsurers do not explicitly discount but may compensate for this by a reduction in
other elements of the pricing basis. The choice of discount rate will reflect the investment
return expected on the assets in which the reinsurer holds the reserves and capital required
for the risk.
For liability lines the assets may be held for a very long time – the payment pattern being
very long – and so the pricing can be very sensitive to the discount rate selected.
Changes in cedant business mix
Where the mix of business written by the cedant has changed materially, care must be
taken. If it is possible, the business should be analysed in different segments, pricing each
segment separately and then combining the segments in the expected future proportions.
Often this is not possible because there is an insufficient number of claims for this to
provide reliable rates, or because lack of detail in the claims data does not allow the
reinsurer to make the segmentation. In the latter circumstance, the reinsurer may need to
discard data for years prior to the material change. If this leaves insufficient data, the
reinsurer should make some subjective adjustment or reduce the credibility given to the
experience-based pricing assessment.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 25
4 Pricing of property and casualty proportional covers
Whereas in excess of loss contracts a price is paid for the possibility of future recoveries, in
proportional reinsurance the prices of the direct business are already set by (or in conjunction
with) the cedant, and the reinsurance premium is simply a percentage of the cedant’s premium.
Determining a risk premium is not actually a major consideration of a proportional cover.
The key considerations are:
assessing the likely overall loss ratio for the account
determining what level of ceding commission and/or profit commission can be
offered whilst still retaining an acceptable profit for the reinsurer.
However, it is worth bearing in mind that many reinsurance programmes combine proportional
and non-proportional reinsurance. If the non-proportional arrangement inures to the benefit of
the proportional arrangement, then some adjustments will need to be made to the methodology
described in this section.
Question
Explain what ‘inures to the benefit of’ means.
Solution
Recall from Chapter 15 that reinsurance X is said to inure to the benefit of another reinsurance
arrangement Y if X acts before Y, and Y acts on the net retained amount after X has been applied.
4.1 Assessment of overall loss ratio
This is essentially a best estimate reserving exercise, and so the data needed will closely
resemble that for a reserve review.
The aim is to estimate the loss ratio for the period of cover. The data needed will be as follows:
As many years as possible (ideally at least 10) of triangulated premium, paid and
incurred data. Usually, proportional covers are written on a risks incepting basis, so
the triangles should if possible be on an underwriting year basis. Where more than
one line of business is to be covered, separate triangles should be obtained for each
line.
The ideal number of years of data will depend heavily on the line of business. For shorter-
tailed lines such as household, it may be sufficient to look at perhaps five years of
historical data.
Information on rate changes over the period covered by the data triangles, by the
same line of business split as the data triangles.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
Estimates of premium income to be written and rate changes for the period of cover
being priced.
The rate changes will be used to put the premium on-level, as we did in Section 3.2.
Information on changes in mix of business, and policy terms and conditions, over
the period.
Information on catastrophe exposure.
Inflation, historical and future, in order to put the claims on-level.
Next, an appropriate set of actuarial methods can be used to project the triangulated data to
the ultimate settled position for each historical year. Then the resulting loss ratio for each
year can be calculated. Finally, trends should be applied to these loss ratios (for the effect
of claims inflation) to put them ‘on-level’ to reflect the level of premium rates for the period
of cover being priced.
Now that we have inflated claims to the proposed cover period, and adjusted premiums for rate
changes to the proposed cover period, we have a series of possible ultimate on-level loss ratios
that the policy we are pricing might result in.
The set of resulting adjusted loss ratios (say) could be averaged to give an estimate of the
expected loss ratio for the period of cover. If they are considered as a set of observations
from a statistical distribution, their mean and standard deviation could be used to
parameterise a distribution. The log-normal distribution is commonly used for this purpose.
At this stage it is important to consider the effects of any other trends. If we averaged all the loss
ratios blindly as suggested above, we may miss any trends and under/overestimate the loss ratio
for the forthcoming year.
Example
Suppose the historical on-level ultimate loss ratios are 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 80%, 75% for the
previous six years.
It would be tempting to say that the average loss ratio is 77.5% and to build this into the profit-
test model to calculate a commission. However, there is clearly a trend in these ratios and,
without doing any calculations, you may validly expect the loss ratio to be 70% in the forthcoming
year.
Whether you use 77.5% or 70% will affect your calculated commission considerably and will
undoubtedly affect your decision as to whether to write the business or not.
In addition to this, we need to consider the short-term and long-term goals. We may decide, for
example, that a 70% loss ratio is acceptable for the forthcoming year, but a 77.5% long-term ratio
is not acceptable. However, if we start making decisions in this way, we must realise that it is not
always practical to accept and decline the same treaty at different points in time, as we need to
consider relationships with the broker and cedant.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 27
4.2 Determining acceptable ceding and/or profit commission terms for quota
share contracts
If there is no profit commission and ceding commission is flat (that is, has the same
percentage value regardless of the profitability of the underlying business), then this is a
fairly simple exercise. It only remains to check that:
100 loss ratio% ceding commission%
leaves enough to cover the reinsurers’ expenses and profit.
We may also need to make sure there is enough left to pay for any retrocession cover and
brokerage.
In addition, we should allow for investment income. One way of doing this is to calculate the
discounted values of all the cashflows.
Question
Suggest a reasonable discount period for each of the following cashflows:
premiums
claims
expenses
brokerage
ceding commission.
Solution
Premiums average time to premium receipt can be derived from the premium triangulations we
used earlier.
Claims average time to claim payment can be derived from the claims paid triangles we used
earlier.
Expenses half a year, if we assume that they are incurred evenly over each year.
Brokerage depends on the terms of payment. For example, if brokerage is paid on the inception
date of the contract, then no discount is needed.
Ceding commission probably in line with premium discount period, if that is when commission is
paid.
It may also be instructive to use the loss ratio distribution to identify the probability of the
reinsurer making a loss. If this is too high, then the reinsurer should reduce the ceding
commission even though the mean outcome is satisfactory.
An alternative method is to add a cost of capital loading, or extra contingency loading, in addition
to the cashflows mentioned above.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
Allowing for loss-sensitive features
The analysis above gets slightly more complicated if we have cashflows within the quota share
contract that depend on the loss experience itself. Examples of this include sliding scale and
profit commissions.
Where the ceding commission percentage varies with the loss ratio on the underlying
business (‘sliding scale ceding commission’) or there is a profit commission as well as (flat)
ceding commission, then the loss ratio distribution should be used to calculate the
distribution of the reinsurer’s financial position.
The distribution is necessary because we need to estimate the probability that the loss-sensitive
feature will bite, and if it does, by how much.
In such cases the reinsurer will often have requirements related to:
a probability of making a loss of no more than x%
a probability of making a loss of y% or more of no more than z%
a combination of the two.
The reinsurer can adjust the ceding commission scale or the profit commission
scale / percentage until these requirements are met.
Using the loss ratio distribution, a stochastic method will be needed to calculate a suitable
allowance for the anticipated extra commission.
It is normal for the cedant or their broker to indicate the terms they would prefer, and if
these meet the reinsurers’ requirements no adjustment will be needed. If not, then the
reinsurer has to negotiate this with the cedant or broker.
4.3 Surplus share contracts
Elsewhere in the Core Reading, these are called surplus treaty contracts. The term surplus share
is more common in the US.
Surplus share contracts can be approached in a similar way to quota shares, but they are
more complicated to assess.
Unlike quota share contracts, the differing cession rates between risks imply that the
reinsurer’s loss ratio can be materially different to that for the cedant; higher or lower. Two
examples below illustrate this. Both cases cover the same set of risks with the same
surplus retention and hence the same premium cession.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 29
Surplus threshold 2,000,000
Limit Ceded % Gross Premium Ceded Premium Gross Loss Ceded Loss
Risk 1 1,000,000 0.0% 25,000 0 24,766 0
Risk 2 2,000,000 0.0% 34,500 0 1,856 0
Risk 3 3,000,000 33.3% 125,000 41,667 17,807 5,936
Risk 4 5,000,000 60.0% 250,000 150,000 59,212 35,527
Risk 5 5,000,000 60.0% 135,000 81,000 18,357 11,014
Risk 6 6,000,000 66.7% 320,000 213,333 66,262 44,175
Risk 7 7,500,000 73.3% 200,000 146,667 8,045 5,900
Risk 8 8,000,000 75.0% 210,000 157,500 2,283 1,712
Risk 9 10,000,000 80.0% 333,000 266,400 3,978 3,182
Risk 10 10,000,000 80.0% 400,000 320,000 917,724 734,179
TOTAL 57,500,000 2,032,500 1,376,567 1,120,289 841,625
ceded premium % 67.73% gross loss ratio 55.12%
ceded loss % 75.13% ceded loss ratio 61.14%
Surplus threshold 2,000,000
Limit Ceded % Gross Premium Ceded Premium Gross Loss Ceded Loss
Risk 1 1,000,000 0.0% 25,000 0 660,015 0
Risk 2 2,000,000 0.0% 34,500 0 28,267 0
Risk 3 3,000,000 33.3% 125,000 41,667 56,155 18,718
Risk 4 5,000,000 60.0% 250,000 150,000 2,785 1,671
Risk 5 5,000,000 60.0% 135,000 81,000 33,015 19,809
Risk 6 6,000,000 66.7% 320,000 213,333 4,296 2,864
Risk 7 7,500,000 73.3% 200,000 146,667 43,677 32,030
Risk 8 8,000,000 75.0% 210,000 157,500 15,601 11,700
Risk 9 10,000,000 80.0% 333,000 266,400 6,533 5,227
Risk 10 10,000,000 80.0% 400,000 320,000 6,013 4,811
TOTAL 57,500,000 2,032,500 1,376,567 856,358 96,830
ceded premium % 67.73% gross loss ratio 42.13%
ceded loss % 11.31% ceded loss ratio 7.03%
In the first table, the risks with high limits and so high cession rates have much larger
losses than those with lower or no cession and so the ceded loss ratio is higher than the
original gross loss ratio. In the second, the opposite is the case, and so the ceded loss
ratio is lower than the original gross loss ratio. The reinsurer’s experience is dependent on
the way in which the large losses are distributed.
Hence it is important for the reinsurer to be confident that:
large limit risks do not have disproportionately heavy large loss experience
In fact, the reinsurer will want to make sure that the cedant is not simply passing larger
proportions of the ‘bad’ risks to the reinsurer, and keeping the ‘good’ risks for itself. It
can do this by simply keeping a close eye on the difference between the cedant’s loss
ratios and the reinsurer’s loss ratios.
Question
Explain why cedants don’t generally pass large proportions of ‘bad risks’ to the reinsurers.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
Solution
Because at renewal, the reinsurer will either decline the business, or at the very least reduce the
commission dramatically, to compensate. These cedants may also find it difficult to get
reinsurance elsewhere, as word gets around the reinsurance market that they don’t ‘behave
nicely’.
the contract terms restrict the choices that a cedant has to determine the amount
ceded (the more choice afforded to the cedant over the cession rate the more
potential there is for anti-selection, and the reinsurer will need to bear that in mind
when assessing the potential claims experience).
Many surplus treaties allow the cedant to pick and choose exactly how much of each risk
to cede to the reinsurer (this is the flexibility that quota share does not give). In this case,
it will be important for the reinsurer to keep an eye on the ceded experience.
Other surplus treaties have very closely-defined rules for cession, and some allow no
choice at all. The more flexible the cession can be, the more cautious the reinsurer’s
assumptions will be when calculating the commission.
In the case of a surplus share, the risk data can be used – the same as would be used for
non-proportional per-risk reinsurances – to assess the likely distribution of cession rates.
The reinsurer could then use the cedant’s own loss data or exposure rating, to parameterise
the cedant’s gross loss experience. Then, each time a gross loss is generated, the
distribution of limits could be used and so cession rates to select randomly a cession rate
(from those risks with a limit large enough to have a loss of that size) to apply to the loss
and so calculate the ceded loss.
This should permit the calculation of the distribution of the reinsurer’s financial outcomes,
much as for a quota share.
In practice, however, if you are assessing the likely future ceded loss ratio for a surplus treaty, it is
simpler just to use the historical loss ratios of the ceded business and project these when
assessing a suitable commission. Of course, there is an implicit assumption here that the business
ceded in the future will be similar to that ceded in the past, and a deterministic approach tells you
nothing about the variability of the results.
Once you have a projected ceded loss ratio for the surplus treaty, the calculations are exactly as
for quota share business.
Again, there are likely to be ceding and profit commissions involved. As for a quota share,
it is an important part of the pricing process to determine whether these are too generous or
not.
In summary then, the pricing of a surplus treaty is similar to that of a quota share, except that the
reinsurer will want to ensure that there is no adverse selection from the cedant in terms of the
types and amounts of risk being ceded compared to that retained.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 31
5 Pricing stop loss reinsurance
A stop loss contract is priced using similar methods to those already discussed for other
types of excess of loss reinsurance, but where the excess point and limit can be expressed
as a loss ratio rather than a monetary amount. The main difference with a stop loss is that it
will respond to the aggregate of losses in the year (rather than just, say, individual large
losses or large catastrophic losses).
A view of the loss ratio can be derived from historical experience, suitably adjusted, in a
similar way to that described in Section 4.1.
This loss ratio would need to be modelled stochastically, to assess the volatility and hence the
likelihood (and extent) of large aggregate losses.
Alternatively, the losses may be modelled separately – for example, by splitting out
attritional, large and catastrophe losses (or attritional and large/catastrophe).
The catastrophe loss could come from a vendor model (where applicable), such as
those discussed in Chapter 21.
The large losses could come from a frequency and severity approach (see
Section 3.2).
The attritional losses could be assessed using past historical attritional experience,
suitably adjusted (see Section 4.1).
This may produce a better model of the overall volatility.
Important considerations when pricing a stop loss include:
meeting risk transfer criteria (regulatory minima), ie any regulatory minimum transfer
of risk
the particular terms of the stop loss in question
any inuring reinsurance
the amount of the recoverable layer returned by the cedant.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
6 Complications
This section deals with some of the more unusual elements of reinsurance arrangements.
6.1 Limited and/or paid reinstatements
In most lines of business, reinsurers will want to understand their maximum exposure, and
so will limit the total cover offered under a reinsurance contract. They usually do this by
imposing a maximum amount of recovery that can be made.
So, for example, a motor excess of loss contract might be £10m xs £1m.
If the maximum is large – essentially there just to ensure that there is a maximum – and
unlikely to be needed in practice, then this would have little impact on the pricing.
If, however, the maximum is not that large and has a non-negligible probability of being
applied, then the pricing needs to account for that.
The impact of the maximum will encompass:
multi-class risk losses
largest risk exposures
RDS (realistic disaster scenarios)
These are a pre-defined set of scenarios used by Lloyd’s syndicates to monitor their
exposure to catastrophe risks. A detailed description of realistic disaster scenarios is
given in the Glossary.
catastrophe losses.
This is relatively simple to do for experience rating. For a burning cost, the maximum is
applied to each year’s losses. For a frequency / severity stochastic model, the same is done
in each stochastic simulation of the loss experience and recoveries. Note that the impact
on pricing is likely to be greater where loadings based on volatility are used. The maximum
will affect the standard deviation as well as the expected loss, and probably to a greater
extent.
It is less straightforward for a basic exposure rate. Reinsurers are likely to have created
(and kept updated) tables of discounts, based on analyses using their benchmark severity
distributions, to apply to exposure-based rates.
Often cover is limited and second and subsequent limits of cover are not paid for up front,
but as cover is used up.
As reinsurance recoveries are made, ‘reinstatement premiums’ are paid. For example, if a
recovery of £100,000 is made on a £1m xs £1m reinsurance contract, 10%
(100,000/1,000,000, ie the recovery as a percentage of the limit) of the original (‘upfront’)
premium would be paid to the reinsurer as a reinstatement premium.
This calculation has assumed that the reinstatement premium is ‘at 100%’ of original premium, as
will be explained below.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 33
This process stops once the maximum number of reinstatements has been paid. For
example, if there are two reinstatements, a cedant continues to pay the reinstatement
premiums until it has collected two limits of cover and then it collects the third and final
limit of cover with no more premiums to pay.
Typically, reinstatements are ‘at 100%’ of original premium. So in the above example,
recovering 10% of the limit implies a reinstatement premium of 10% (of 100%) of the original
premium. Sometimes, they are at other percentages. For example, if in the above example
the reinstatements are at 50%, then recovering 10% of the limit incurs a reinstatement
premium of 10% 50% 5% of original premium.
Note that ‘original premium’ refers to the reinsurance premium and not the original gross
premium income (OGPI) written by the cedant.
It is relatively straightforward to adjust pricing to allow for paid reinstatements into a
burning cost calculation or frequency / severity stochastic model calculation. It is again not
as easy to allow for in a basic exposure rating exercise. Reinsurers may have constructed
tables for common reinstatement terms (for example, 2 @ 100% for marine reinsurance)
using their benchmarks in a stochastic model.
There is also an approximation that can be used (with more validity in some classes than
others).
If it is assumed that losses are always limit (ie full) losses (this works best for lines like
property catastrophe and D&O, and not so well for EL, GL or motor), and that frequency is a
Poisson variate and that the timing of the cashflows is ignored, then the discount for paid
reinstatements is estimated from the frequency and cost for the same number of free
reinstatements.
For example, if P is the cost of a reinsurance contract with one free reinstatement, and P
is the upfront cost for one reinstatement at 50% then:
P 0.5P probability of at least one loss P
If frequency is Poisson then Pr at least one loss 1 Pr no loss 1 e
P
So P .
1.5 0.5e
6.2 Aggregate deductibles
Sometimes a contract will have an aggregate deductible. This means that the first £X of
losses that would otherwise be recoverable under the contract terms is not recovered. For
example, suppose a cedant has purchased a £1m xs £1m contract with a £1m aggregate
deductible.
Here, we have assumed free reinstatements.
If the cedant has four losses of £1.5m, only £0.5m of the third and fourth losses can be
recovered, as the £0.5m of each of the first two that falls in the £1m x £1m layer is used to
exhaust the aggregate deductible.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
Gross Loss to Cumulative Cumulative Incremental
loss £1m x £1m layer loss to layer recoverable loss recoverable loss
£1.5m £0.5m £0.5m £0.0m £0.0m
£1.5m £0.5m £1.0m £0.0m £0.0m
£1.5m £0.5m £1.5m £0.5m £0.5m
£1.5m £0.5m £2.0m £1.0m £0.5m
Again, pricing this theoretically is relatively straightforward for a burning cost exercise or
for a frequency / severity experience or exposure model. The reinsurer can reduce the
losses to the layer for each year / simulation by the aggregate deductible (subject to a
minimum of zero for each recoverable loss).
Where basic burning cost analysis is being used, a reinsurer will again have tabulated
discounts for common aggregate deductibles (probably tabulated by layer retention and
aggregate deductibles as a multiple of limit). These will have been derived from stochastic
modelling using the reinsurer’s benchmark severity curves.
6.3 Indexation clauses
These are covered in numerous other parts of this course. Most of the rest of the Core Reading
calls them stability clauses.
Liability claims can take a long time to settle, and bodily injury claims in particular are prone
to inflationary effects during the delay between incident and settlement. As a result of this
it is common to find ‘indexation clauses’ applying to injury claims (only) covered by a
contract.
Often the clause applies to all claims, but since large long-tailed claims are usually in respect of
bodily injury, it makes little difference.
The aim of the clause is to try to maintain the real value of the limit and retention for the
reinsurer.
Question
Explain what would happen if no clause was applied.
Solution
More claims would eventually hit the layer, and so the price of the reinsurance would creep up
over time. Also, the layer would effectively be targeting a different level of claims, which may no
longer meet the insurer’s needs this may necessitate a manual change in the limits rather than
automatic indexation.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 35
There are different forms of indexation clause depending on where the contract was placed.
There is a standard clause in the London Market (LMIC94) and this in effect indexes the limit
and retention in line with average earnings up to the time the claim is settled. The earnings
index to use is specified in the clause (for example, in the UK it is a particular index
produced by the National Statistics Office; for other countries it is the index produced by
the IMF, ie International Monetary Fund).
For contracts placed outside London, the reinsurer should read any indexation clause
carefully to understand how it works. For example, many European clauses index each
individual payment for a claim separately to its payment date and then apply the overall
weighted average indexation for the sum of the payments under the claim to determine the
indexed limit and retention. Indexation clauses are not common in the US (nor in some other
countries, eg Ireland).
In addition to all this, indexation clauses come in three variants:
Fully indexed – index the limits and retentions for the full effect of inflation between
the contract commencement date and claim settlement date (London clause) or loss
date and payment date(s) (European clauses). That is, the product of the published
applicable earnings inflation rates is calculated for the period required.
Severe indexation – calculate the effect of indexation as above, but only apply it if
the cumulative indexation increase is above a particular threshold (for example,
25%) and then only index for the excess of indexation over the threshold. So, if the
cumulative indexation factor is 1.275 and the threshold was 25%, multiply the limit
and retention by 1.02 (1.275/1.25) in effect.
Franchise indexation clause – calculate the effect of the index as above, but only
apply if the cumulative indexation is above a particular threshold. Once it exceeds
the threshold apply the full cumulative indexation. So in the previous example we
would multiply the limit and retention by the full 1.275.
You may come across other types of indexation clause in your work.
The reinsurer can allow exactly for indexation in a burning cost calculation, but this can
become very complex where multiple countries (so indices) and payment date indexation
are involved.
The reinsurer can make a simpler, if approximate, allowance by estimating the average
delay to settlement / payment (whichever is appropriate). By making an assumption about
the average future rate of earnings inflation (which may be a weighted average if more than
one country is covered) the average effect of indexation can be calculated. This can be
used to calculate to what on average the limit and retention should be indexed, and thus to
price a layer with this limit and retention.
The reinsurer can do this just for injury claims and price the non-injury claims, where there
are any, separately. Or the reinsurer can estimate the proportion of the claims that the
reinsurer believes will be injury and can use this to weight between the unindexed and
indexed layer prices.
6.4 Swing rates
Sometimes – often in situations where there is a marked difference in opinion about the
future loss experience between reinsurer and cedant – a contract may be swing rated. This
means the final rate (premium) paid will depend on the loss experience very directly.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
Question
State what swing rating is a form of.
Solution
Swing rating is a form of experience rating, as the premium paid depends on the loss experience
in the period of cover.
There are two forms of swing rate:
In the first version, sometimes called ‘minimum plus’, the final premium that the
cedant pays consists of a minimum (paid upfront) plus a factor times the actual
losses to the layer, subject to an overall maximum amount.
In the second version, the cedant pays an upfront premium and then the final
premium is determined as a factor times the losses subject to a minimum and
maximum. Usually the deposit is between the minimum and maximum.
The factors may be different depending on the chosen form. In the second form, the cedant
might end up with a refund of some premium.
Common factors for the second version are 100/80 or 100/75. For the first version, the
factors tend to be more variable, as they depend more on the minimum, but still tend to be
greater than one.
Question
Explain why insurers would want this reinsurance, assuming the factors used are greater than 1.
Solution
If the cedant’s experience is worse than expected (by a sufficient degree), the maximum will apply
thus capping their losses.
Otherwise, the cedant will pay a bit more in premium than they would have paid in claims had
they not reinsured, but they accept this as the price of removing some of the downside risk.
To price a swing-rated contract, the approach is rather similar to that for proportional
contracts.
Start with an aggregate distribution.
Check the terms of the swing (and again the cedant and/or their broker may suggest
terms to start with) to see if they meet the required profit criteria.
If not, the reinsurer can vary the terms to find combinations that do.
The reinsurer then has to negotiate the terms.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 37
The reason these contracts work in situations where there is a disagreement about the
expected loss experience is that if the reinsurer turns out to be right, the swing will ensure
more premium is collected, and if the cedant turns out to be right, the swing ensures less
premium is collected. In both cases, the actual losses determine the outturn (outcome).
6.5 Loss ratio caps
These commonly appear in conjunction with swing rating. The reinsurer applies a
maximum limit on cover which prevents the loss ratio to the contract exceeding a certain
limit. Caps of 250% and 300% are common.
These are awkward to price as the amount of limit depends on the price, ie the value that is
being determined.
This can be done iteratively.
Set the price without a limit.
Work out what amount of limit corresponds to the loss ratio using the unlimited
price.
Reset the price with that maximum limit.
Repeat until the premium stabilises.
It is worth checking from the aggregate loss distribution what the likelihood of the cap
being breached on an unlimited price basis would be first. If it is very low, then it is
probably not unreasonable to assume the unlimited price.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 38 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
7 Tables of data items
This table shows some typical data items of interest for different types of reinsurance coverage.
Property (re)insurance Casualty Marine
Insured name Insured name Insured name
Policy inception date Policy inception date Policy inception date
Policy expiry date Policy expiry date Policy expiry date
Programme identifier Programme identifier Programme identifier
(‘stacking code’) (‘stacking code’) (‘stacking code’)
Property identifier Line of business (eg public Line of business (eg hull,
liability and employers’ cargo, specie and P&I)
liability)
Postal code/zip code/cresta Insured industry type/code Insured flag (for hull,
zone Protection & indemnity
(P&I))
Property TIV (total insured Limit Limit
value)
Premium charged for Deductible/excess Deductible/excess
property
Occupancy type Premium Premium
Insured activity Original Original
(commercial property) brokerage/commission brokerage/commission
Buildings sum insured Cost of any fac/ri purchased Cost of any fac/ri purchased
Original Limit of any fac/ri Limit of any fac/ri
brokerage/commission purchased purchased
Cost of any fac/ri purchased Deductible/excess for any Deductible/excess for any
fac/ri purchased fac/ri purchased
Limit of any fac/ri Cedant’s line on the insured Cedant’s line on the insured
purchased risk risk
Deductible/excess for any
fac/ri purchased
Cedant’s line on the insured
risk
The programme identifier (often also referred to as the ‘stacking code’ or ‘link code’) should
enable the reinsurer to identify individual policies that are all part of a programme of layers
of insurance for a particular insured that stack one on top of another and all cover the same
perils / risks / events. This is important because for this insured the cedant is exposed to a
single claim equal to the sum of the limits the cedant writes on these stacking layers. It
increases the maximum loss size that is possible. This is also important for recovering
outward reinsurance.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 39
The cedant’s line is required as it caters for the situation where larger commercial risks do
not / cannot place all their cover with one insurer, but instead share it between a number of
insurers. The reinsurer will need to know whether the limit provided is the 100% original
limit or just the part of the policy that this cedant wrote.
For example, suppose the insured wanted a $100m limit, and had placed 10% of that with
the cedant. The 100% limit would be $100m and the cedant’s line would be $10m.
This is important when exposure rating, because the benchmarks used are almost
invariably derived from 100% claim and limit values. So the reinsurer will need to be able to
apply the 100% limit to the benchmark and then scale down the resulting amount by the
cedant’s line. Applying the cedant’s limit to the benchmark will produce an incorrect
(because too high) value.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 40 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
8 Glossary items
Having studied this chapter you should now read the following Glossary items:
Realistic Disaster Scenarios.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 41
Chapter 20 Summary
Pricing reinsurance differs from pricing direct business mainly in the amount and type of
data available to assess expected claims and their volatility.
Property catastrophe reinsurance
Catastrophe models are the key tool to price these.
Non-proportional reinsurance
Here, we can use:
exposure rating
experience rating.
For exposure rating, claims costs can be derived from benchmarks either ILFs (for casualty
business) or first loss scales (for property business). In practice, pricing for high layers is
driven by factors other than expected loss costs.
For experience rating, we use either a burning cost calculation or a stochastic frequency /
severity model, depending on whether we need a volatility measure, the volume of data and
any time / resource constraints.
For the burning cost calculation, the process is:
trend the claims data
apply the reinsurance contract terms to give the loss to the layer
aggregate by year to give triangles of paid / incurred losses
develop to ultimate using benchmarks if necessary
adjust exposure (often premium) for past rate and exposure changes
divide losses by exposure to get burning cost.
A stochastic (frequency / severity) approach is suitable if volatility information is needed, as
long as there is enough historical loss data and adequate time / resource.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 42 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
For either approach, take care with:
the census point
the choice of inflation rate
shock losses
discounting (particularly for long-tailed business)
changes in the cedant’s business mix.
For stop loss contracts, we model the loss ratios then use a stochastic model.
Proportional reinsurance
The process for a quota share is:
adjust claims for inflation and premiums for rate / exposure changes
use triangulations to get ultimate historical loss ratios
decide on an estimated loss ratio for the period in question
calculate a suitable commission, bearing in mind other outgo, eg expenses
use a stochastic model if there is profit or sliding scale commission.
For surplus treaties, we use the same approach but we may need an algorithm to anticipate
the ceded proportion on each risk as the cedant and reinsurer’s experience will now differ
(which is worth monitoring).
Complications
These can arise due to:
reinstatements
aggregate deductibles
indexation clauses
swing-rated contracts
loss ratio caps.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 43
Chapter 20 Practice Questions
20.1 The loss ratio experience of portfolios, A, B, C and D, over the last 5 years has been:
A B C D
1 77% 67% 81% 50%
2 23% 53% 76% 76%
3 63% 107% 75% 104%
4 87% 43% 69% 30%
5 75% 55% 49% 40%
(i) Calculate the mean and standard deviation of the observed loss ratios for each portfolio.
On the evidence of these statistics, state, with reasons, which portfolios should have the
largest and smallest risk premiums for each of the following stop loss covers in turn:
(a) all losses over 70%
(b) all losses over 100%
(c) losses in the layer 25% excess 90%
(ii) Calculate the burning cost pure premium for each of the portfolios and each of the stop
loss covers. Comment on your answers.
(iii) Comment on the suitability of the above methods, and discuss how, in practice, you
would rate a stop loss treaty.
20.2 A reinsurance company transacts only individual excess of loss reinsurance. The reinsurer
Exam style
calculates the reinsurance premium to be paid for each company in the following year as:
Total claims paid by the reinsurer over the last five years for that individual company
divided by
Total premiums written by the insurer over the last five years
multiplied by
The expected level of premiums written by the insurer in the following year.
Discuss the advantages and disadvantages to the reinsurer of this method of calculating the
premium. [8]
20.3 You are the actuary of a large general insurance company that underwrites a broad and stable
Exam style
portfolio of risks. The company is in the process of reviewing its reinsurance strategy for the
commercial property account. Historically, the company protected the commercial property
portfolio using a ten-line surplus reinsurance treaty. The following underwriting statistics and
large claim data for the commercial property account are available as at 31 December of Year 5.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 44 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
Underwriting statistics (in £000s) are as follows:
Underwriting Gross Net Gross Gross Net Net paid
year written written incurred paid incurred claims
premium premium claims claims claims
1 120,456 96,726 81,308 79,237 62,872 61,117
2 124,218 95,648 85,338 81,592 58,536 55,419
3 130,987 102,956 93,263 83,745 66,201 60,781
4 131,421 98,566 97,514 84,006 61,406 52,784
5 128,976 99,956 98,667 57,981 63,472 37,925
Individual claims incurred above £400,000 were as follows:
Under- Year Gross paid Gross Date of Date of No of
writing of £ outstanding reporting of payment if lines on
year event £ claim made surplus
1 1 674,321 0 4/5/Yr 1 30/11/Yr 2 1
1 1 1,452,908 0 30/7/Yr 1 22/11/Yr 1 5
1 1 1,265,943 0 7/11/Yr 1 4/6 Yr 2 3
3 3 812,364 0 1/4/Yr 3 8/12/Yr 3 1
3 3 0 984,213 6/7/Yr 3 4
3 3 6,374,306 0 10/12/Yr 3 6/5/Yr 5 9
4 4 0 542,164 21/5/Yr 4 3
4 4 0 794,002 5/11/Yr 4 4
4 4 0 803,000 10/4/Yr 5 9
5 5 0 850,000 17/8/Yr 5 1
The company is considering changing its reinsurance programme to a 20% quota share plus a risk
excess of loss insurance, on the net account, for £4.5 million excess of £0.5 million with two free
reinstatements. The premium for the risk excess of loss would be 2% of the gross premium
income for the underwriting year.
(i) Calculate the pro-forma underwriting statistics as at 31st December of Year 5 for each of
the underwriting years 1 – 5 assuming that the company had used the new reinsurance
arrangements. [9]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 45
(ii) Assuming an inflation rate of 5% per annum, and that the case estimates of the company
include a 10% surplus, estimate what you would expect to be the burning cost for the
excess of loss contract for underwriting year 6 based upon the company’s historical data.
State any assumptions that you make. [11]
(iii) Your general manager has asked for your advice in assessing the proposed changes to the
reinsurance programme. Outline the matters that you would address in your analysis.
(You should calculate any figures you would propose to include in your analysis. [22]
[Total 32]
20.4 A reinsurance company writing aggregate excess of loss business is attempting to calculate the
Exam style
premium rates for a layer of £2.5m excess of £1.5m for coverage of the first claim occurring within
the policy year (that is, if a claim exceeds £1.5m the reinsurer will pay the excess over £1.5m with
a maximum liability to the reinsurer of £2.5m). It is assumed that in this case the premium is
calculated assuming no partial losses (that is, if a loss exceeds £1.5m then it will also exceed £4m),
that the numbers of claims to the layer are Poisson distributed, that there is a loading of 20% of
the gross premium for brokerage, contingencies etc, and that investment income has been
ignored. The premium using this basis is calculated to be £1.5m.
(i) Calculate for this layer (£2.5m excess of £1.5m):
(1) the probability of at least one claim occurring in the policy year
(2) the gross premium to be charged for cover of the first two losses occurring in the
policy year
(3) the gross premium to be charged to cover all losses occurring in the policy year
[4]
(ii) It might be considered that the premium to be charged for a policy covering all losses
occurring after the second loss should be the difference between the premiums
calculated for (2) and (3). Give reasons why this is unlikely to be a realistic assumption.
[4]
[Total 8]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 46 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 47
Chapter 20 Solutions
20.1 (i) Risk premiums
The means and (sample) standard deviations are as follows:
A: mean 65% s.d. 25%
B: mean 65% s.d. 25%
C: mean 70% s.d. 12.5%
D: mean 60% s.d. 30%.
Looking at these statistics, A and B are equally risky, so should have the same stop loss risk
premium.
C has a higher mean loss ratio, but a lower variability. D has the reverse.
When deciding on the risk premiums for stop loss cover, we need to consider the excess pure
premium and not just the probability that the limit will be breached.
(a) XS 70%
C will have the highest probability of making a recovery under this contract. (For a symmetrical
distribution the chance of exceeding the mean is 50%. For one skew to the right, as is more likely
here, the probability tends to be somewhat under 50%.)
However, for C to exceed 95%, for example, the result would have to be more than two standard
deviations above the mean. The chance of this for the normal distribution is only about 2½%; for
other distributions the probability may be of a similar order (possibly a little larger).
A or B make a recovery when the result is 0.2 standard deviations above the mean. This is a little
less likely than C making a recovery. However, 90% is only 1 s.d. above the mean, and 2 s.d.
above is 115%. This shows that the chance of a large recovery is greater for A or B than for C. The
premium for A or B seems likely to be bigger than that for C (although this ‘evidence’ is not totally
conclusive).
D makes a recovery when the result is 0.33 standard deviations above the mean. This is a little
less likely than A or B making a recovery. However, 90% is only 1 s.d. above the mean, and 2 s.d.
above is 120%. This shows that the chance of a large recovery is somewhat greater for D than for
A or B.
It seems clear that C will have the smallest premium, because it is much less variable.
The overall result between D and A/B seems to us to be a close call and the result of the
calculations may well depend on the assumed distribution of the loss ratio.
(b) XS 100%
D will have the greatest chance of any recovery and also the greatest chance of a large recovery.
C will have the least chance of any recovery and also the least chance of a large recovery.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 48 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
Hence D should have the largest premium, A and B the next and C has the smallest.
(c) 25% XS 90%
This time we have, in terms of standard deviations above the mean, the layer:
A or B : +1.0 to +2.0
C : +1.6 to +3.6
D : +10 to +1.8.
Whenever the upper limit of this layer is breached (likeliest for D) a full recovery of 25% is made.
So it is clear that the premium order must be the same as in (b), ie D should have the largest
premium, A and B the next and C has the smallest.
Using a statistical package we get the following illustrative pure premiums by fitting distributions
of the stated form with the same moments as the empirical distributions:
(a) logNormal A,B 7.64% C 4.94% D 7.76%
Gamma A,B 7.80% C 4.97% D 8.00%
(b) logNormal A,B 1.80% C 0.12% D 2.56%
Gamma A,B 1.55% C 0.08% D 2.25% (tail is thinner)
(c) logNormal A,B 2.09% C 0.48% D 2.21%
Gamma A,B 2.14% C 0.42% D 2.37%
(ii) Burning cost
The burning costs pure premiums are just the average past recoveries, if the cover had been in
place throughout. These are as follows:
(a) A: 5.8% B: 7.4% C: 4.4% D: 8.0%
(b) A: 0.0% B: 1.4% C: 0.0% D: 0.8%
(c) A: 0.0% B: 3.4% C: 0.0% D: 2.8%
These are dramatically different from the results in part (i). Now:
B always has a much larger premium than A.
D is not the largest for (b) or (c), but B is.
A and C each have no premium at all for (b) and (c).
(iii) Rating a stop loss treaty
Clearly neither (i) nor (ii), by itself, provides a suitable way to rate a stop loss treaty.
In particular, (i) penalises A relative to B, although past experience suggests that when B makes a
loss at all it makes a relatively big loss, which is exactly what unlimited or high layer stop loss
cover is protecting against.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 49
In (ii) it seems inappropriate to have a zero pure premium for cover (b) or (c) to A or C, despite
there (presumably) being some chance that a recovery would be made in the future.
Now what would we do in practice, given full information?
The ideal would be to decide, somehow, what the prospective distribution of the loss ratio for any
company is. We could then calculate the pure premium for any layer of cover directly from that
distribution. Whether it is an analytical or empirical one, we could do this given a suitable
computer package.
A view of the loss ratio can be derived from historical experience, suitably adjusted, as follows:
Gather triangulated premium, paid claims and incurred claims data.
Obtain rate change information for the period covered.
Estimate the premium income to be written and rate changes for the period of cover
being priced.
The rate changes will be used to put the premium on-level.
Obtain information on changes in mix of business, and policy terms and conditions, over
the
period.
Adjust claims data for inflation, historical and future, in order to put the claims
on-level.
Use an actuarial method (eg chain-ladder) to project the claims and premiums to ultimate, and
calculate the loss ratio for each past year.
We could average the set of resulting adjusted loss ratios (say) to give an estimate of the
expected loss ratio for the period of cover. If we consider them as a set of observations from a
statistical distribution, we could use their mean and standard deviation to parameterise a
distribution.
The log-normal distribution is commonly used for this purpose.
As an alternative to the above, the losses may be modelled separately, for example, by splitting
out attritional, large and catastrophe losses (or attritional and large / catastrophe).
Then:
The catastrophe losses could come from a vendor model.
The large losses could be modelled using a frequency / severity
approach.
The attritional losses could be analysed as above.
This may produce a better model of the overall volatility.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 50 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
When pricing a stop loss important considerations include:
meeting risk transfer criteria
the particular terms of the stop loss in question
any inuring reinsurance.
Once we have the final risk premium, we need to add the normal loadings, ie:
expenses
commission (if applicable), particularly profit commission or other loss-sensitive
features
retrocession
profit and contingencies and/or cost of capital
brokerage
investment income (as a deduction).
Finally, a check with competitors’ rates would be advisable.
20.2 Advantages
This method is simple, cheap and requires no underwriting expertise. [½]
Provided the insurer stays with the reinsurer, the reinsurer’s profit is stable (with a time lag) since
the insurer pays back the claim amount eventually. The reinsurer is taking little risk over the long
term. [1]
All risks are charged premiums that reflect their past experience. [½]
Disadvantages
There is no graduation of large claims. [½]
So if the insurer had a number of large claims that didn’t quite result in recoveries, it could select
against the reinsurer. Similarly, if the insurer had unusually good experience the premium will be
inadequate. [1]
Since the reinsurer is not taking any risk, then the insurer is not actually benefiting from
reinsurance cover. The only benefit is the opportunity to select against the reinsurer. [1]
Also, since the reinsurer is not taking a risk, there is no opportunity for risk profit. [½]
The data is based on claims paid. It should be based on claims incurred. There is no allowance for
outstanding claims, IBNR, reopened claims or partial payments. [1]
There is no loading to cover the reinsurer’s expenses, profit, etc. [½]
There should be an adjustment for claims inflation and inflation of the excess point or else the
premium will probably be inadequate. [1]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 51
The premium should be based on actual written premium not expected. Therefore an adjustment
premium should be paid. Otherwise, this gives the insurer the opportunity to select against the
reinsurer by mis-estimating the premium. [1]
There is no allowance for any changes that make the past data irrelevant. For example, the
insurer’s target market, underwriting and policy conditions. [1]
[Maximum 8]
20.3 This question is from a past fellowship examination, so is longer and more difficult than you would
normally find in a Subject SP8 examination.
(i) Calculation of figures
UY GWP NWP GCI GCP NCI NCP
1 120,456 93,956 81,308 79,237 63,832 62,175
2 124,218 96,890 85,338 81,592 68,270 65,274
3 130,987 102,170 93,263 83,745 69,673 62,346
4 131,421 102,508 97,514 84,006 77,734 67,205
5 128,976 100,601 98,667 57,981 78,754 46,385
[4]
Explanation of figures above
All gross figures unchanged. [½]
Net written premium (NWP) = (1 – 0.2 – 0.02) GWP (ie reduced for QS and XLS premiums). [1]
Net claims incurred (NCI):
Reduce GCI by 20% for QS [½]
Reduce by the XLS recoveries as follows:
– reduce by 20% for QS [½]
– adjust for recoveries up to £4.5m in excess of £0.5m. [½]
For example, NCI(Year 5) = 80% 98,667 – (80% 850 – 500) = 78,754 [½]
Net claims paid (NCP): methodology as for NCI. However the claims paid relate to claims paid to
date for that underwriting year irrespective of the calendar year in which the claim was settled. [1]
For example, for Year 1, all XOL claims have been paid, so all are deducted. For Year 4, none have
been paid, so none have been deducted. [½]
[Total 9]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 52 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
(ii) Burning cost
Assumptions
Business is written evenly over the year; therefore adjust the data by six months to reflect
unexpired risks.
Risk incidence is spread evenly over the year.
Reporting delays are negligible, so ignore.
Hence, the average UY claim occurs at the end of the UY (ie 31/12).
Equal weights can be given to each year’s data because we expect the exposure to be
relatively constant. [½ each]
Method
1. Increase past claims for inflation to 31 December Year 6 values. [½]
2. Reduce outstanding amounts for outstanding reserve release. [½]
3. Net down by 20% for QS. [½]
4. Burning cost is total past claims divided by exposure. [½]
The figures show the risks in the same order as in the question.
Inflated gross inc
Gross inc net of Inc net of over
Gross incurred net of over Cost to XLS
over reserving reserving & QS
reserving
674,321 674,321 888,750 711,000 211,000
1,452,908 1,452,908 1,892,797 1,514,238 1,014,238
1,265,943 1,265,943 1,627,342 1,301,874 801,874
812,364 812,364 975,503 780,403 280,403
984,213 885,792 1,050,123 840,099 340,099
6,374,306 6,374,306 7,400,032 5,920,025 4,500,000
542,164 487,948 554,265 443,412 0
794,002 714,602 793,711 634,969 134,969
803,000 722,700 786,152 628,921 128,921
850,000 765,000 817,949 654,359 154,359
Total: 7,565,862
[6]
Hence, the cost per year of exposure based on the 4½ years’ data is £1,681,303.. [1]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 53
Example: top risk
Original gross claim of 674,321 inflated at 5% pa for 5 years 7 months and 27 days gives 888,750.
There is no 10% of reserves to release in this case.
80% 888,750 = 711,000
Less the retention of 500,000 gives the cost to the XLS of 211,000 [Maximum 11]
(iii) Issues to address in analysis
Comment
This part of the question asks for figures but gives little direction as to what to do. We are going
to be very pushed for time. If you find yourself in this position in the exam, it’s a good idea to
make simplifying assumptions.
The current surplus arrangement
Year RP RR INCR IGCR
1 23,730 18,404 65% 67%
2 28,570 26,738 61% 68%
3 28,031 26,652 64% 70%
4 32,855 35,619 61% 73%
5 29,020 33,680 61% 73% [5]
RP Reinsurance premium, the difference between gross and net premium from the table in
the question.
RR Reinsurance recoveries, the difference between net and gross claims incurred.
Gross claims incurred are taken from the table, but allowing for the 10% loading for the claims not
yet settled, eg for Year 5, 57,981 + 0.9 ( 98,667 – 57,981) = 94,598.
Net claims incurred are also from the table but allowing for reinsurance recoveries and the 10%
loading on those not yet settled.
For example, for Year 5, 37,925 + 0.9 (63,472 – 37,925) = 60,917.
RR for Year 5 is the difference between these two.
IGCR = Gross claim ratio. The ratio of gross incurred claims to gross written premiums.
INCR = Insurer’s net claims ratio. The ratio of net claims incurred to net written premiums.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 54 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
XOL Arrangement
Year RP RR INCR
1 2,409 1,215 50%
2 2,484 0 0%
3 2,620 4,859 185%
4 2,628 150 6%
5 2,580 112 4%
[3]
RP is 2% of gross written premium
RR is found by taking 80% of gross claim, then calculating the XOL recovery. For those not yet
paid the claim is reduced by 10%, eg for Year 3:
0.8 812.364 500 4,500 984.213 0.9 0.8 500 4,859
Quota share
Year RP RR INCR
1 24,091 16,220 67%
2 24,844 16,993 68%
3 26,197 18,462 70%
4 26,284 19,233 73%
5 25,795 18,920 73%
[2]
RP is 20% of the gross written premium.
The reinsurance recoveries are equal to 20% of incurred claims, but those not yet settled are
reduced by 10% to allow for the loading,
eg for Year 5 0.2 98,667 57,981 0.9 57,981
Quota share plus XOL together
Year RP RR INCR
1 26,500 17,435 68%
2 27,328 16,993 70%
3 28,817 23,321 68%
4 28,913 19,382 75%
5 28,375 19,032 75%
[2]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 55
Conclusions
Smoothing
Both the current surplus programme and the proposed QS/XLS package smooth the net claims
experience. Surplus (ranging from 6165%) has historically been more effective than the QS/XLS
(6875%). [1½]
Hence, any effects on statutory solvency could be predicted with greater confidence under the
surplus cover. [1]
Solvency protection
The surplus cover gives unlimited cover where an EML is breached whereas the XSL recovery is
capped at £4.5m. That could prove to be inadequate for some larger risks. [1]
Cost versus benefit
The net CI ratios show that the surplus treaty has been the most cost effective, with losses greater
than the reinsurance premiums for the last two years (ie 108% and 116%). [1½]
This may give concern about the security of the reinsurer in the longer term if this performance is
widespread across the reinsurer’s other business. [1]
Moreover, it is unreasonable that the reinsurer will continue to write loss-making business. The
reinsurer will increase their rates if this persists. [1]
Whilst the immediate benefit to the insurer is good, we should try to assess the likely availability
of this cover or premiums for it in the future. [1]
The insurer was lucky in that nine lines of the surplus treaty were used for the largest claim.
Ignoring that claim from the analysis, or if that claim did not occur, then the results would be
different. [1]
Further, more detailed analysis is required, rather than just looking at loss ratios for the
portfolio. [1]
[Maximum 22]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 56 SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing
20.4 (i) Reinsurance calculation
Note:
premium of £1.5m is for first loss only
for a Poisson distribution, if m is the mean number of occurrences, then probability of r
claims mr e m / r !
probability of 0 claims e m
probability of 1 claim me m
all claims on the reinsurance are for £2.5m
Premium charged = risk premium 0.8 [many students get this wrong!]
Therefore, risk premium = 0.8 1.5 = £1.2m
The risk premium = 2.5 (1 – probability of 0 claims)
So 1 e m 1.2 / 2.5 0.48 . Therefore, m 0.6539 [1½]
(1) Probability of at least one claim = 0.48 (from above).
(2) Additional premium if also pay on second loss
2.5 (probability of 2 or more claims)/0.8
2.5 1 0.52 me m 0.8 0.4375
Therefore total premium for first two losses = £1.9375m [1½]
(3) Gross premium for all losses:
expected number of losses = m = 0.6539 (at £2.5m each)
so gross premium = 0.6539 2.5 0.8 = £2.043m [1]
[Total 4]
(ii) Why premium is not (3) – (2) (ie £106,000)
20% loading will not be appropriate for the smaller premium (ie it is less than 10% of the
first loss premium), especially with respect to the contingencies loading. The brokerage
fee may also form a bigger proportion of the premium. [1]
There is much greater variance for this part of the risk. A higher premium would be
required in lieu of the greater uncertainty. [1]
There is also greater variance for any small errors in the mean of the Poisson distribution.
[½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-20: Reinsurance pricing Page 57
The premiums are calculated ignoring investment income. This may not be appropriate,
especially where the third plus claim is involved (ie hold premiums longer). [1]
The reinsurer might be worried about selection. The insurers wanting cover for three or
more claims may well be those expecting three or more claims. [½]
This cover is unusual so the reinsurer would charge as much as possible. [½]
[Maximum 4]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold
for the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is
owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a
subsidiary of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or
photocopy any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it
is not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through
the profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished
using the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models Page 1
Use of catastrophe models
Syllabus objectives
4.7 Outline the basic structure of a catastrophe model.
4.8 Describe the key perils that can be modelled in a catastrophe model.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models
0 Introduction
This short chapter introduces the concepts and usage of catastrophe models, such as those used
to model flood and earthquake events. Modelling infrequent extreme events will demand a
significantly different approach to modelling attritional claims, due primarily to the uncertainty
surrounding their frequency and severity.
Section 1 introduces the background to these models and their basic structure.
Section 2 looks at the main perils that are analysed within catastrophe models, both natural and
human-made.
This topic is discussed further in Subject SA3.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models Page 3
1 Overview of catastrophe models
This section looks at why we use catastrophe modelling and the generic structure of catastrophe
models.
1.1 Catastrophe modelling versus traditional rating approaches
Traditional rating approaches such as burning cost and frequency / severity (described in
Chapter 14) work well for a high frequency, low severity risk. However, they are far less
appropriate for a low frequency, high severity risk. This is because the observed losses
may not reflect the true underlying risks, as the period over which losses have been
observed may be much shorter than the return period of the losses under consideration. In
some cases, certain event scenarios under consideration may never have occurred
previously.
The main actuarial assumption that is used when modelling high frequency, low severity risks is
that the past is a reasonable guide (with some adjustment) to the future. This assumption is not
so justifiable when it comes to events that are rare or uncertain in terms of either frequency or
severity.
Typically, such low frequency, high severity risks are naturally occurring hazards (or natural
catastrophes) such as hurricanes and earthquakes, although some events are human-made
(such as the terror attacks on the World Trade Center).
Question
List other catastrophes or events (either naturally occurring or human-made) that are typically
low frequency, high severity.
Solution
Possibilities include:
flood, both riverine and coastal
hailstorm
freeze
disease
nuclear disaster
marine (tidal waves)
financial
tornado.
In simple terms, a ten-year burning cost model (or a frequency / severity approach based on
ten years of observed losses) is unlikely to be a reliable method of pricing for earthquake
risk on a fault with a 250-year return period.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models
Since the late 1980s a new approach has been developed for the assessment of such perils:
catastrophe modelling.
Early catastrophe models were simplistic and largely theoretical. However, modern models were
developed largely in response to a series of catastrophes (mainly hurricanes and earthquakes,
particularly Hurricane Andrew) in the early 1990s.
Question
Name a product, introduced in the early 1990s, that accelerated the development of catastrophe
models.
Solution
Catastrophe bonds.
This development has been made possible by increased computing power (and in particular
the development of Geographical Information Systems (GIS) software) and an increased
scientific understanding of the natural hazards themselves.
A GIS integrates hardware, software and data for capturing, managing, analysing and displaying all
forms of geographically-referenced information.
A catastrophe modelling approach may start with historical events but may apply over a
much longer timescale (decades or centuries). The model uses past experience and a
scientific understanding of the underlying causes of the natural hazards as a basis to create
other possible future events including ones that have never been observed historically –
known as the stochastic event set. The model then calculates the effect of these events on
the insured portfolio, utilising a detailed understanding and representation of the actual
locations insured.
In addition, the catastrophe modelling approach can allow for:
changes in demographics
changes in the vulnerability of buildings
changing frequencies of events over time
changing severity of impact of events
changes in portfolio.
These allowances can be based on the latest research in areas such as:
seismology (the study of earthquakes and their effects, eg tsunamis)
meteorology (the study of the atmosphere, and weather in particular)
hydrodynamics (the study of liquids in motion)
structural and geotechnical engineering (the behaviour of earth materials).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models Page 5
As a result of the variety and complexity of the inputs to a catastrophe model, proprietary models
produced by a small number of specialist catastrophe modelling firms predominate in the
industry.
In the UK, two of the largest proprietary catastrophe model providers, AIR and RMS, were
established in the late 1980s. A small number of other providers entered the market in the 1990s,
most notably EQECAT. These providers are discussed further in Subject SA3.
The raw data behind many commercially available models is to an extent ‘hidden’ (arguably to
avoid inquisition and accusations of inappropriateness or unreliability, but also to avoid
plagiarism).
1.2 Basic structure of catastrophe models
Catastrophe models all tend to follow the same generic structure, consisting of a number of
interlinked modules:
event module
hazard module
inventory (or exposure) module
vulnerability module
financial analysis module.
Diagrammatic structure
The basic structure of a catastrophe model is as follows:
Event Hazard
Vulnerability
Loss
Inventory
Financial
Analysis
The diagram above is part of the Core Reading.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models
Explanation of modules
Event module
A database of stochastic events (the event set) with each event defined by its
physical parameters, location and annual probability / frequency of occurrence.
This module will critically contain details of the sorts of events that can occur, and their
likelihood: for example, a storm akin to that in the UK in 1990 might be a 1-in-50 year
event.
Hazard module
This module determines the hazard of each event at each location. The hazard is the
consequence of the event that causes damage. For example, in the case of a
hurricane, wind speed is the primary cause; for an earthquake it is ground shaking.
So this module will specify, for example, that if a storm happens again, then it is likely to
result in some wind damage, some floods, etc.
Inventory (or exposure) module
A detailed exposure database of the insured systems and structures. As well as
location this will include further details such as age, occupancy and construction.
This module is the detail of all the insured’s risks, and associated risk factors such as
location, etc.
Vulnerability module
Vulnerability can be defined as the degree of loss to a particular system or structure
resulting from exposure to a given hazard (often expressed as a percentage of sum
insured).
This module specifies how much damage each insured item (eg property) is likely to
sustain given a certain peril. For example, a detached house on a flood plain will be more
vulnerable to flood than a third-floor flat. The degree of damage will be expressed in
monetary terms.
Financial analysis module
Uses a database of policy conditions (limits, excess, sublimits, coverage terms) to
translate the total ground-up loss into an insured loss.
This module converts the physical damage loss from the vulnerability module to an
insured recovery.
Of these modules, two the inventory and financial analysis modules rely primarily on
data input by the user (an insurer or reinsurer) of the models. The data will be specific to
the user. The other three modules represent the engine of the catastrophe model. The
event and hazard modules are based on seismological and meteorological assessment, and
the vulnerability module is based on engineering assessment.
The inventory and financial analysis module data is based on the insurer’s own data, and so it will
be important to control the quality of this data.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models Page 7
Catastrophe models tend to fall into one of two categories:
Aggregate models.
Here, detailed information on the exposed risks (eg properties) is not known. Instead,
aggregate exposures (eg sums insured) in an area are used in conjunction with industry
average losses to estimate the likely losses. This works well as long as the actual risks
insured are representative of industry averages, for example in terms of size and
construction.
Detailed models.
Here, individual insured risk information is used, and the likely loss for each insured risk is
calculated, before summing to get aggregate losses.
The primary factors to consider when deciding whether to use an aggregate model or a detailed
model are those of cost and time.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models
2 Key perils modelled
This section discusses some of the perils that are frequently covered by catastrophe models. As
such, it is less actuarial and more about geographical hazards.
The key perils discussed are:
hurricanes
earthquakes
tornadoes
hailstorms
winter storms
floods
disease
terrorism.
2.1 Hurricane modelling
Hurricane and windstorm models are widely used for the US, Caribbean, Northern Europe
and Japan, and are increasingly used for other territories in the Far East and Latin America.
As one might expect, the quality of the historical data upon which the models are based
varies by territory. The relative accuracy of the hurricane models for each territory reflects
this.
For each of the hurricanes within the event set, the model will include a number of
parameters such as:
track (the path the hurricane will travel)
maximum sustained wind speed
storm radius
forward speed (the speed at which the hurricane is following its track)
the rate of decay of the wind field (wind speed reduction as a function of distance
from the storm centre).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models Page 9
2.2 Earthquake modelling
Earthquake models are well established for the US and Japan, and are also used for a
number of other territories such as Canada, Southern Europe, Mexico and Indonesia.
Whilst each year there may be a large number of tremors and minor earthquakes, major
earthquakes are rare. Much of the historical information on major earthquakes has been
derived from paleoseismic studies, where prehistoric seismic records are inferred from
geologic sediments.
For each of the earthquakes within the event set, the model will include a number of
parameters such as:
the moment magnitude (measuring the energy release)
focal depth (shallow fault ruptures are more damaging for a given value of moment
magnitude)
total area of fault rupture
fault type (convergent plate boundaries are highest hazard).
Event recurrence along a fault line is affected by the elapsed time since the last rupture on
that fault and by ruptures on other faults (these may increase or decrease the energy stored
within a given fault).
In addition to the conventional ‘property damage’ catastrophe models, for some territories
there are also earthquake models available that can be used for assessing the risk to
workers’ compensation and group life business.
Workers’ compensation is similar to employers’ liability insurance, although there are slight
differences in what exactly is covered, depending on the territory.
2.3 Other natural perils
There are a number of catastrophe models available for other weather-related natural perils,
such as tornado, hail, winter storm, and river flood. Many of these models may be available
for only a small number of territories.
More recently, infectious disease models have been created. Given the very low frequency
of genuine epidemics these models necessarily include a large number of assumptions on
how factors such as changes in demographics, ease and frequency of travel and improved
medical care will impact epidemics. At present these models are not commonly used.
2.4 Non-natural perils
Terrorism models differ slightly from the models for natural perils both in the way they are
constructed and the way in which output is used. These models may offer separate
deterministic and probabilistic modules. The deterministic module will enable the insurer to
assess its portfolio’s maximum expected loss from each of a number of different types of
terrorist attacks. The stochastic module includes a statistical model of the annual
frequency for each of the types of attack considered within the model. Given the very
volatile nature of the probability of attack, insurers and reinsurers typically rely more upon
the results of the deterministic module.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models
The types of terrorist attacks modelled include small scale, large scale and extreme attacks,
for example:
explosive devices carried by an individual (small scale)
vehicle bombs (large scale)
civilian aircraft hijacking and crashing into targets (large scale)
weapons of mass destruction (extreme scale).
Relative to hurricane and windstorm modelling, terrorism modelling is in its infancy. It is
likely that the sophistication of these models will increase within a relatively short time.
Non-natural perils are commonly referred to as ‘human-made perils’ in the industry.
Subject SA3 develops this topic further by discussing the shortcomings of catastrophe models.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models Page 11
Chapter 21 Summary
Catastrophe models can be used to replace traditional rating methods for low frequency,
high severity risks. The range of possible future events modelled is called the stochastic
event set.
Catastrophe models incorporate knowledge of seismology, meteorology, hydrodynamics and
structural and geotechnical engineering to build models that consists of five inter-linked
modules:
event
hazard
inventory
vulnerability
financial analysis.
The perils modelled can include, for example:
hurricanes
earthquakes
tornadoes
hailstorms
winter storms
floods
disease
terrorism.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models
The practice questions start on the next page so that you can
keep the chapter summaries together for revision purposes.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models Page 13
Chapter 21 Practice Questions
21.1 List the main uses to which you think catastrophe models could be put.
21.2 List the modules within a catastrophe model, and for each, state the primary data source used as
Exam style
its input. [5]
21.3 Describe the advantages and disadvantages of using a proprietary catastrophe model for pricing a
Exam style
small general insurance company’s private motor insurance. [12]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models
The solutions start on the next page so that you can
separate the questions and solutions.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models Page 15
Chapter 21 Solutions
21.1 Catastrophe models can be used for:
monitoring aggregate insured losses as part of risk management
structuring, pricing and purchasing insurance and reinsurance
capital allocation and assessment, for both internal and regulatory purposes
financial planning
setting underwriting guidelines
disaster recovery planning
reserving assessment of major catastrophe events
designing insurance-linked derivatives such as catastrophe bonds.
21.2 The modules are:
● event module
● hazard module
● inventory (or exposure) module
● vulnerability module
● financial analysis module. [½ each]
The inventory and financial analysis modules both rely primarily on data input by the user (an
insurer or reinsurer) of the models. [1]
The event and hazard modules are based on seismological and meteorological assessment. [1]
The vulnerability module relies on engineering assessment. [½]
[Total 5]
21.3 The catastrophe model may be useful for adding a loading to premium rates to allow for the small
possibility of a catastrophic event affecting many insured vehicles … [1]
… such as a flood (river or coastal), hailstorm or hurricane. [1]
The model may also assist with the following areas:
reinsurance loadings [½]
capital allocation and the RoC loading within premium rates. [½]
Both of these are particularly important areas for a small company. [½]
However, for a small company, the cost of such a model may be prohibitively
expensive. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models
In addition, catastrophic events for motor insurance are so rare that using a complex model may
be ‘over the top’. It may instead be better to use a very simple approach such as using margins
elsewhere in the rating exercise. [1]
In particular, a small company will undoubtedly have an extensive reinsurance programme
… [½]
… including catastrophe excess of loss reinsurance, which would cover claims from these events
anyway. [½]
In this case, it would be sufficient to add a loading for the cost of reinsurance into the premium
rates instead of using a catastrophe model … [1]
… although we would still need to consider the need for premiums to be competitive, particularly
as the company is small. [½]
Using a catastrophe model has generic disadvantages too:
the model will be partly subjective, as it has significant elements of judgement [½]
the science behind the models is still relatively immature [½]
due to the infrequent nature of the perils being modelled, it is difficult to know how ‘right’
it is [½]
the perils modelled are changing themselves, for example as a result of climate
change [½]
the accuracy of the models can be distorted, for example by:
– changes in mix of business, eg by location [½]
– changes in population trends [½]
– changes in insurance terms and conditions [½]
the models use approximations, which can be difficult to quantify [½]
the models can be based on sparse data [½]
different models often give different results [½]
models won’t allow for everything, for example they cannot compensate easily for
inaccurate or missing data [½]
it can be difficult to interpret and communicate the results. [½]
[Maximum 12]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8-21: Use of catastrophe models Page 17
End of Part 6
What next?
1. Briefly review the key areas of Part 6 and/or re-read the summaries at the end of
Chapters 20 and 21.
2. Ensure you have attempted some of the Practice Questions at the end of each chapter in
Part 6. If you don’t have time to do them all, you could save the remainder for use as part
of your revision.
3. Attempt Assignment X6.
Time to consider …
… ‘rehearsal’ products
Mock Exam and Marking – You can attempt the Mock Exam and get it marked. Results of
surveys have found that students who do a mock exam of some form have significantly higher
pass rates. Students have said:
‘I find the mock a useful tool in completing my pre-exam study. It helps
me realise the areas I am weaker in and where I need to focus my study.’
‘Brilliant feedback! SO thorough and encouraging. I really appreciate it. It’s
helped me know where I’ve gone wrong, how to improve and has given me so much
encouragement to know I can and will do better.’
You can find lots more information on our website at www.ActEd.co.uk.
Buy online at www.ActEd.co.uk/estore
And finally ...
Good luck!
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold
for the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is
owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a
subsidiary of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or
photocopy any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it
is not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through
the profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished
using the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
SP8: Glossary Page 1
Glossary
Syllabus objectives
0.1 Define the principal terms in use in general insurance.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8: Glossary
0 Introduction
In general insurance many terms vary by company, class of business, market or country.
An important part of any actuarial investigation is to verify the exact meaning of any
important terms used. This glossary gives the definitions mainly used in practice and an
appendix at the end provides a list of abbreviations used.
The glossary includes terms used in Subjects SP7, SP8 and SA3. An asterisk denotes
terms applicable to Subject SA3 only. Some terms are defined that are not used elsewhere
in the Core Reading – these are included because the candidate may come across them in
background reading.
A potential source of confusion is the term used to denote the value assigned to the
liabilities. It has been the practice of accountants to use the word ‘provision’ to denote the
value of a liability that is known or assumed to exist at the accounting date, and to confine
the term ‘reserve’ to an estimate of additional liabilities, over and above the provisions,
either in respect of future events or in respect of past events for which the provisions may
prove to be inadequate. However, among insurers, and also among actuaries, there has
been a long-established practice of applying the term ‘reserve’ to both categories.
In the European Union, following the adoption of the Insurance Accounts Directive and its
enactment in the legislation of each of the Member States, it has become the practice to
distinguish between provisions and reserves in insurance companies’ shareholders’
accounts and also in the accounts that form part of the statutory returns to the insurance
supervisory authorities. However, in North America and to some extent in the Lloyd's
market, the practice of applying the term ‘reserve’ to both categories continues. It seems
likely that among actuaries and others the habit of using the term ‘reserves’ for what are
often called provisions will persist for some time even in the UK, notwithstanding the
legislative changes.
This glossary generally uses ‘reserve’ in text, and in headings uses the word ‘reserve’
followed by ‘provision’ in brackets; for example:
Additional reserve (provision) for unexpired risk
It should be noted that the precise form of words may vary. Candidates may, for example,
find references to an additional unexpired risk reserve (or simply an unexpired risk reserve).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 3
24ths method
A method of estimating the unearned premium reserve, based on the assumption that
annual policies are written evenly over each month and risk is spread evenly over the year.
For example, policies written in the first month of the year are assumed to contribute 1/24th
of the month’s written premium to the unearned premium reserve at the end of the year.
365ths method
A method of estimating the unearned premium reserve, based on the assumption that
annual policies are written evenly over a year and that the risk is spread evenly over the 365
days of a year of cover. For example, where a policy was written 100 days ago, 265/365ths
of the premium is taken as being unearned.
Accident year
An accident year grouping of claims means that all the claims relating to loss events that
occurred in a 12-month period (usually a calendar year) are grouped together, irrespective
of when they are actually reported or paid and irrespective of the year in which the period of
cover commenced. Alternative methods of grouping are underwriting year or reporting
year.
Accumulation of risk
An accumulation of risk occurs when a single event can give rise to claims under several
different policies. Such an accumulation might occur by location (property insurance) or
occupation (employers’ liability insurance), for example.
Acquisition costs
Costs arising from the writing of insurance contracts, such as commission.
Act of God
An event, such as a storm or flood, that is unexpected and outside human control. From
the perspective of insurers, it is a cause of insurance losses.
Actual total loss*
A form of total loss, defined by the Marine Insurance Act 1906.
Actual total loss is deemed to occur in one of three ways:
The insured item is totally destroyed.
The item is so damaged that it can no longer be classed as the type of object
originally insured.
The insured is irretrievably deprived of the insured item.
See also constructive total loss.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8: Glossary
Additional reserve (provision) for unexpired risk (AURR)
The reserve held in excess of the unearned premium reserve, which allows for any
expectation that the unearned premium reserve will be insufficient to cover the cost of
claims and expenses incurred during the period of unexpired risk.
Adjustment premium
The adjustment premium is an additional premium payable at the end of a period of cover.
This may result from the use of retrospective experience rating or from a situation where
the exposure cannot be adequately determined at the start of the period of cover.
Adverse development cover
A reinsurance arrangement whereby a reinsurer agrees, in return for a premium, to cover
the ultimate settled amount of a specified block of business above a certain pre-agreed
amount.
Agents’ balances
Moneys (typically premiums) that belong to an insurer but are held by an agent.
Aggregate excess of loss reinsurance
A form of excess of loss reinsurance that covers the aggregate of losses, above an excess
point and subject to an upper limit, sustained from a single event or from a defined peril (or
perils) over a defined period, usually one year.
All risks
Cover that is not restricted to specific perils such as fire, storm, flood, and so on. The cover
is for loss, destruction or damage by any peril not specifically excluded. The exclusions
will often be inevitabilities like wear and tear. The term is sometimes loosely used to
describe a policy that covers a number of specified risks, though not all.
Allocated loss adjustment expenses (ALAE)
See claims handling expenses.
Annual basis of accounting
Annual accounting is one of two commonly used statutory bases of accounting, the other
being fund accounting. Annual accounting is based on the cover provided during the
accounting period, regardless of when the contracts of insurance start and end.
This is also known as one-year (accident-year) accounting.
Anti-selection
The preference of some insurance applicants for policies whose underwriting requirements
are less stringent than others. Thus anti-selection refers to an asymmetry of information
between policyholder and insurer where the former has more knowledge of the negative
aspects of the risks presented than the latter.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 5
Asset liability modelling (ALM)
A form of actuarial projection which analyses future flows of asset income against liability
outgo.
Atafs Age to age factors
Used by the CAS to refer to link ratios or development factors.
Atufs Age to ultimate factors
Used by the CAS in triangulation reserving methods to refer to the grossing-up factor to get
from an intermediate period of development to ultimate.
Average
In non-marine insurance, the term relates to the practice of reducing the amount of a claim
in proportion to the extent of underinsurance.
In marine insurance, the term is generally used to describe damage or loss.
Average cost per claim method (ACPC)
A method of reserving which relies on the average cost of claims paid or incurred.
Balance of a reinsurance treaty
The ratio of the total premiums receivable by a reinsurer under a surplus treaty to the
reinsurer’s maximum liability for any one claim, based on estimated (or expected) maximum
loss (EML).
Bancassurance
An arrangement in which a bank and an insurance company form a partnership so that the
insurance company can sell its products to the bank's client base. This partnership
arrangement can be profitable for both companies.
Benchmark
A benchmark is any statistic derived from external sources; for example, loss ratio,
expense-related measure, claim reporting or claim payment development pattern.
Binding authorities
Contractual agreements setting out the scope of delegated authority, allowing cover holders
to enter into contracts of insurance and to issue insurance documents on behalf of Lloyd’s
managing agents.
Bonus hunger
The reluctance of policyholders under a no-claim discount (NCD) or bonus-malus system to
notify claims or claim amounts when faced with a potential increase in premiums. Also
known as hunger for bonus.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8: Glossary
Bonus-malus
A rating system in which the base premium can be discounted or loaded in response to the
policyholder’s claims experience.
Bordereau
A detailed list of premiums, claims and other important statistics provided by ceding
insurers to reinsurers (or by coverholders to insurers in direct insurance), so that payments
due under a reinsurance treaty (or delegated authority schemes in direct insurance) can be
calculated.
Bornhuetter-Ferguson method (BF or BHF)
A reserving method which uses weights based on an a priori loss ratio and claim
development.
Break-up basis
A valuation basis that assumes that the writing of new business ceases and cover on
current policies is terminated. Current policyholders would normally be entitled to a
proportionate return of the original gross premium and deferred acquisition costs would
probably have to be written off. Also known as a wind-up basis. An alternative to this is
using a going-concern basis.
Broker
An intermediary between the seller and buyer of a particular insurance contract who is not
tied to either party. A reinsurance broker is similarly defined where reinsurance contracts
are bought and sold. See also Lloyd’s broker.
Burning cost
The actual cost of claims paid or incurred during a past period of years expressed as an
annual rate per unit of exposure. This is sometimes used (after adjustment for inflation,
incurred but not reported claims (IBNR), and so on) as a method of calculating premiums for
certain types of risks or monitoring experience, for example, motor fleets and
non-proportional reinsurance.
Business interruption insurance
Insurance cover for financial losses arising following damage (for example, by a fire) to
business premises. Also called loss of profits or consequential loss insurance. This is
sometimes referred to as BI insurance.
Cancellation
A mid-term cessation of a policy, which may involve a partial return of premium.
Capacity
The amount of premium income that an insurer is permitted to write or the maximum
exposure it is permitted to accept. It could refer to an insurance company, a Lloyd’s Name,
a Lloyd’s syndicate or a whole market.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 7
Cape Cod method
A reserving method, similar to the Bornhuetter-Ferguson method which, instead of an a
priori loss ratio, uses weights proportional to a measure of exposure and inversely
proportional to claims development.
Captive
An insurer wholly owned by an industrial or commercial enterprise and set up with the
primary purpose of insuring the parent or associated group companies, and retaining
premiums and risk within the enterprise. Some insurers are set up with the primary
purpose of selling insurance to the customers of the parent. These are often known as
captives but, as they write third-party business, this is not strictly correct. If the word
‘captive’ is used without qualification it should be assumed that only the parent or
associated group companies are being insured. Lighter regulatory capital requirements for
captive reinsurers only apply if the purpose of the captive is to provide cover exclusively for
the risks of the undertaking or group to which it belongs and so does not provide cover for
third parties.
Casualty Actuarial Society (CAS)
The Casualty Actuarial Society is a professional society of actuaries based in the US. Its
members are mainly involved in the property and casualty areas of the actuarial profession.
Case by case estimation
A method of determining the reserves for outstanding reported claims. Each outstanding
claim is individually assessed to arrive at an estimate of the total payments to be made. The
shorter term ‘case estimation’ is often used and the estimates are referred to as case
estimates.
Casualty insurance
Specifically, the term is used in the US, and to a lesser extent in the UK, as an alternative to
liability insurance. In a wider context ‘casualty insurance’ may be used as a phrase to cover
all non-life insurance.
Catastrophe
In the context of general insurance, a catastrophe is a single event that gives rise to an
exceptionally large aggregation of losses.
Catastrophe reinsurance
This is a form of aggregate excess of loss reinsurance providing coverage for very high
aggregate losses arising from a single event. It is common that these will contain a clause
to limit the claims that can be made on the policy to be spread over a set number of hours;
often 24 or 72 hour periods are used. See related hours clause.
Catastrophe reserve
A reserve built up over periods between catastrophes to smooth the reported results over a
number of years. The purpose of a catastrophe reserve is smoothing profit not solvency.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8: Glossary
Ceding company (cedant)
An insurer or reinsurer that passes (or cedes) a risk to a reinsurer. The insurer or reinsurer
may be a company or a Lloyd’s syndicate.
Central fund (Lloyd’s)
Specific to Lloyd’s, this is a contingency reserve built up from contributions by Lloyd’s
Names and held by Lloyd’s as a layer of protection for policyholders. It is used to
demonstrate overall solvency to the regulator. This capital is in addition to members’
capital resources held as Funds at Lloyd’s (FAL). See related Funds at Lloyd’s.
Chain ladder method (Basic chain ladder, CL, BCL)
A statistical method of estimating outstanding claims, whereby the weighted average of
past claim development is projected into the future. The projection is based on the ratios of
cumulative past claims, usually paid or incurred, for successive years of development. It
requires the earliest year of origin to be fully run-off or at least that the final outcome for
that year can be estimated with confidence. If appropriate, the method can be applied to
past claims data that have been explicitly adjusted for past inflation. Further variations on
this original theme are now in wide usage.
Claim
The word ‘claim’ has a variety of meanings. The most common ones are:
as a noun: an assertion by a policyholder that an insurer is liable to make a payment
in accordance with the terms of a policy
as a verb: to make a request for payment from an insurer.
Care is often needed to discover the precise meaning in a given context; for
example, whether a reference to ‘claims’ is to the number of claims or their cost.
Claim amount distribution
A statistical frequency distribution describing the total amount of claims.
Claim cohort
A group of claims with a common period of origin. The period is usually a month, a quarter
or a year. The origin varies but is usually defined by the incident date of a claim, the date of
reporting of a claim, the date of payment of a claim, or the date when the period of cover to
which a claim attaches commenced.
Claim cost inflation
The rate of increase in the cost of like-for-like claim payments.
Claim frequency
The number of claims in a period per unit of exposure, such as the number of claims per
vehicle year for a calendar year or the number of claims per policy over a period.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 9
Claim frequency distribution
A statistical frequency distribution for claim occurrence.
Claim ratio
The ratio of the cost of claims to the corresponding premiums, either gross or net of
reinsurance. An alternative term is loss ratio.
Claim size distribution
A statistical distribution describing the size of individual claims.
Claims handling expenses (CHE)
The expenses incurred in handling and settling claims are known in some countries,
including the UK, as claims handling expenses, the equivalent term in the US (and
increasingly elsewhere) being ‘loss adjustment expenses’.
In the US the terms allocated loss adjustment expenses (ALAE) and unallocated loss
adjustment expenses (ULAE) are used.
Claims incurred
See incurred claims.
Claims made policy
A policy that covers all claims reported to an insurer within the policy period irrespective of
when the incident occurred. The type of cover provided by such a policy is known as
claims made cover.
Claims reported
Claims incurred that have been reported to the insurer. The term is often used in relation to
those claims reported during the accounting period. It may refer to the number of claims
themselves or the cost of claims that have been reported.
Claims run-off analysis
A tabulation showing the speed of reporting or settlement for cohorts of claims. Also called
a delay table or, since it is usually triangular in form, a run-off triangle. The analysis may be
in terms of claim numbers or claim amounts. It is often presented as an intermediate step in
a chain ladder projection.
Clash cover
Excess of loss cover for liability business, limiting insurers’ exposure to the risk that one
event gives rise to claims on more than one policy.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8: Glossary
Closed year
In the case of fund accounting a closed year is an underwriting year that is older than the
prescribed limit for the class in question. In the Lloyd’s market, a closed year is one that
has been closed by reinsurance to close (RITC).
Coinsurance
An arrangement whereby two or more insurers enter into a single contract with the insured
to cover a risk in agreed proportions at a specified premium. Each insurer is liable only for
its own proportion of the total risk. It is frequently applied to individual ‘slip’ business in
the London Market where a lead insurer takes a major share of the risk and manages the
outturn, while others subscribe on fixed terms. See related slip system.
The term is also used in direct insurance and reinsurance to describe an arrangement in
which the insured or cedant retains a proportion of their own risk.
Combined ratio or Combined operating ratio
The sum of the claim ratio and the expense ratio (and thus not a ratio itself, unless the two
separate ratios have the same denominator). Also called the operating ratio or underwriting
ratio. The fact that the denominators for the claim and expense ratio may be different can
give rise to anomalies.
Commercial lines
Classes of insurance for commercial and business policyholders. Those for individuals are
usually referred to as personal lines.
Committee of Lloyd’s
A committee that is responsible for administrative matters within Lloyd’s under delegation
from the Council of Lloyd’s. Prior to the establishment of the Council of Lloyd’s by the
Lloyd’s Act 1982, the Committee had sole responsibility for the overall direction of Lloyd’s.
Commutation
The process of prematurely terminating a reinsurance contract by agreeing an amount to
settle all current and future claims.
Commutation account
A register of the inflows and outflows to the treaty after the commutation has taken place.
Commutation clause
A clause in an insurance or reinsurance contract that allows the contract to be commuted
under certain conditions. The clause works in conjunction with commutation accounts,
which are used to calculate the relevant numbers.
Composite insurer
A single insurance company that writes both life and non-life business.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 11
Consequential loss insurance
See business interruption insurance.
Constructive total loss*
An expression defined by the Marine Insurance Act. Constructive total loss is where the
insured abandons the insured item because an ‘actual total loss’ is unavoidable or because
the costs of preventing a total loss exceed the value saved.
Co-reinsurance
Similar to coinsurance, but referring to reinsurance of a risk rather than insurance.
Council of Lloyd’s
The governing body responsible for the overall direction of Lloyd's. It was established as a
result of the Lloyd’s Act 1982 and consists of six working members, six external members
and six nominated members whose appointment must be confirmed by the Governor of the
Bank of England. One of the nominated members is the Chief Executive.
Cover note
A note issued by an insurance company to confirm the existence of insurance cover
pending the issue of formal policy documentation.
Credibility
A statistical measure of the weight to be given to a statistic.
CRESTA zones
The Global Catastrophe Risk Evaluating and Standardising Target Accumulations (CRESTA)
zone data set helps brokers and reinsurers assess and present risks, based on the zoning
system established by the world's leading reinsurers. Based primarily on the observed or
expected seismic activity (although drought, flood and wind storms are also considered)
within a country, CRESTA zones consider the distribution of insured values within a country
as well as administrative or political boundaries for easier assessment of risks.
Deductible
The amount which, in accordance with the terms of the policy, is deducted from the claim
amount that would otherwise have been payable and will therefore be borne by the
policyholder. See also excess.
Deep pocket syndrome
A situation where claims are made based on the ability of the defendant to pay rather than
on share of blame. An injured party may try to blame the party with the greatest wealth (that
is, deepest pocket) where there is more than one potential defendant.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8: Glossary
Deferred acquisition costs (DAC)
Acquisition costs relating to unexpired periods of contracts in force at the balance sheet
date. They are carried forward as an asset from one accounting period to subsequent
accounting periods in the expectation that they will be recoverable out of future margins
within insurance contracts after providing for future liabilities.
Delay table
See claims run-off analysis.
Deposit premium
This occurs in cases where all relevant exposure or rating information is not known at the
start of the period of cover, or the premium to be paid is dependent on the claims
experience during the policy term. An initial ‘deposit’ premium is paid at the start of the
period of cover, followed by an adjustment at the end when the information required is
known.
Where this latter adjustment is stipulated at the outset as being upwards only, the term
‘Minimum and Deposit Premium’ applies.
Where it is found in cases relating to retrospective experience rating, the term ‘swing rated
premium’ is often applied.
Development factors
The factors emerging from a chain ladder calculation that are the ratios of claims in
successive development periods. Sometimes known as link ratios.
Direct business
This term has two meanings:
Business acquired without the intervention of an intermediary.
The cover provided by an insurer to an original policyholder, as opposed to any
reinsurance cover provided for the insurer.
The meaning intended is usually clear from the context in which the term is used.
Discovery period
A time limit, usually defined in the policy wording or through legislative precedent, placed
on the period within which claims must be reported. It generally applies to classes of
business where several years may elapse between the occurrence of the event or the
awareness of the condition that may give rise to a claim and the reporting of the claim to the
insurer, for example, employers’ liability or professional indemnity.
Dynamic financial analysis (DFA)
A phrase given to any form of actuarial modelling in financial services.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 13
Earned premiums
The total premiums attributable to the exposure to risk in an accounting period; they can be
gross or net of adjustment for acquisition expenses and gross or net of reinsurance.
Eighths method
A method of estimating the unearned premium reserve, based on the assumption that
annual policies are written evenly over each quarter and the risk is spread evenly over the
year.
Endorsement
Some change to the policy wording, usually following a change in the risk covered, which
takes effect during the original period of insurance and is usually, but not necessarily,
accompanied by an alteration in the original premium.
Escalation clause
A policy clause that permits the insurer to raise automatically the level of benefits or sum
insured (and therefore the premium) in line with some form of inflation index.
Estimated (or expected) maximum loss (EML)
The largest loss that is reasonably expected to arise from a single event in respect of an
insured property. This may well be less than either the market value or the replacement
value of the insured property and is used as an exposure measure in rating certain classes
of business.
See related probable (possible) maximum loss (PML).
Event
An occurrence that may lead to one or more claims.
Events not in data (ENIDs)
The balancing amount required to bring the best estimate claim liabilities before ENID up to
an amount allowing for all possible future outcomes. In other words, this is the additional
amount that needs to be included in the best estimate claim liabilities to ensure that the
best estimate is a true best estimate of all possible outcomes, as opposed to something
less, such as a best estimate of all reasonably foreseeable outcomes. In theory, this means
that one needs to allow for possibilities that one may not have experienced before either
within the (re)insurer or across the entire insurance industry.
Excess
The amount of a claim, specified in the policy, that the insured must bear before any liability
falls upon the insurer. See also deductibles.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8: Glossary
Excess and surplus lines insurance
Excess and surplus lines insurance is a segment of the insurance market that allows
consumers to buy property and casualty insurance through the state-regulated insurance
market, where policyholders, agents, brokers and insurance companies all have the ability
to design specific insurance coverages and negotiate pricing based on the risks to be
secured.
Excess of loss (XL or XOL) reinsurance
A form of reinsurance whereby the reinsurer indemnifies the cedant for the amount of a loss
above a stated excess point, usually up to an upper limit. The excess point and upper limit
may be fixed, or indexed as specified in a stability clause. Usually this type of reinsurance
relates to individual losses, but it can be a form of aggregate excess of loss reinsurance
covering the total of all losses in a period and subject to a total aggregate claim limit. See
also risk excess of loss and aggregate excess of loss.
Exclusion
An event, peril or cause defined within the policy document as being beyond the scope of
the insurance cover.
Expected maximum loss (EML)
See estimated (or expected) maximum loss (EML).
Expense ratio
The ratio of management expenses plus commission to premium (usually calendar
accounted expenses to written premium, or sometimes to earned premium).
Experience account
Often a feature of multi-year financial engineering contracts, this is an account that tracks
the performance of the business reinsured by the treaty so that the profitability or otherwise
of the treaty can be determined.
Experience rating
A system by which the premium of each individual risk depends, at least in part, on the
actual claims experience of that risk (usually in an earlier period, but sometimes in the
period covered). The latter case is sometimes referred to as swing rated or loss sensitive,
and there are often upper and lower limits defining a ‘collar’ or ‘corridor’.
Experience rating also has a more general meaning; for example, in the context of London
Market rating. In this context, it is a rating based purely on the experience of the historic
risk presented, as opposed to ‘exposure rating’.
Expiry date
The date on which the insurance cover for a risk ceases.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 15
Exposure
This term can be used in three senses:
the state of being subject to the possibility of loss
a measure of extent of risk
the possibility of loss to insured property caused by its surroundings.
Exposure statistics are usually shown in one of three common bases: written exposures,
earned exposures and in-force exposures.
Exposure rating
A method of calculating the premium that is based on external data or benchmarks. The
risk profile (exposure) of every insured from the product in question is examined.
Scenarios of losses of various sizes are analysed and the impact on the policies is
determined. The premium of each individual insured does not depend on the actual claims
experience of that insured. Instead, the amount of exposure that the insured brings to the
insurer and the experience for comparable risks is used to calculate a premium rate.
Exposure unit / measure
The basic unit used by the insurer to measure the amount of risk insured, usually over a
given period and usually used directly in rating, with premiums expressed as the rate per
exposure unit times the number of units for the risk.
Facultative reinsurance
A reinsurance arrangement covering a single risk as opposed to a treaty reinsurance
arrangement; commonly used for very large risks or portions of risks written by a single
insurer.
Facultative-obligatory reinsurance
A reinsurance facility with an obligation placed on the reinsurer to accept.
Fidelity guarantee insurance
Insurance covering the insured against financial losses caused by dishonest actions of its
employees (fraud or embezzlement).
Financial engineering
Financial engineering contracts can generally be characterised as ones that attempt to
improve a company's balance sheet but with little or no transfer of risk.
Financial risk reinsurance, finite risk insurance or reinsurance
This is a form of reinsurance (or insurance) involving less underwriting risk transfer and
more investment or timing risk transfer from the cedant than is customary in reinsurance.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 16 SP8: Glossary
Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS)*
A scheme established by the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 to compensate
policyholders of insolvent insurance companies in defined circumstances. It is funded by a
levy on insurance companies.
First loss
A form of insurance cover in which it is agreed that the sum insured is less than the full
value of the insured property and average will not be applied.
Fleet
A group of vehicles, ships or aircraft that are insured together under one policy.
Fleet rating
The process of determining premium rates for fleets.
Franchise
A minimum percentage or amount of loss that must be attained before insurers are liable to
meet a claim. Once it is attained the insurers must pay the full amount of the loss. This
feature distinguishes a franchise from a deductible or excess. Note that franchise is also a
term to describe the permission given to syndicates to operate within the Lloyd’s market.
Free reserves
The excess of the value of an insurer’s assets over its technical reserves and current
liabilities. Also known as the solvency margin and sometimes, in the case of a proprietary
insurer, referred to as shareholders’ funds or net asset value.
From the ground up
A statement of an original insurer’s experience of a class of business offered for
reinsurance is said to be from the ground up when it shows the number and distribution by
amount of all claims however small, even though reinsurance is required for large claims
only (above retention levels or other contract lower limits).
Fronting
Fronting occurs when an insurer, acting as a mere conduit, underwrites a risk and cedes all
(or nearly all) of the risk to another insurer which is technically acting as a reinsurer. The
ceding or ‘fronting’ insurer will typically receive a fee for its involvement to cover its
expenses and profit.
In insurance the term ‘fronting’ may also be used to describe the process whereby an
individual effects a policy for him/herself but tries to save money by putting the policy in
someone else’s name.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 17
Functional costing
A process used within an expense analysis to split the expenses of each line department
between the different classes of business covered by that department. The process usually
relies upon fixing relative unit costs for each of the processes carried out by the department
and counting the number of times that each of the processes is carried out over the period
in question.
Fund (or funded) accounting
Fund accounting is one of two commonly used statutory bases of accounting, the other
being annual accounting. A method of accounting whereby premiums, claims and
associated expenses are related to the underwriting year in which the policies start. The
recognition of any underwriting profit is deferred until a subsequent accounting period but
provision is made for losses as soon as they are foreseen. See related annual basis of
accounting.
Funds at Lloyd’s (FAL)
Each member of Lloyd's is required to provide capital as security to support their total
Lloyd’s underwriting business. This is known as Funds at Lloyd’s. The level of Funds at
Lloyd’s determines the amount of insurance business that a member can underwrite.
Generalised linear model (GLM)
In statistics, the generalised linear model (GLM) is a flexible generalisation of ordinary least
squares regression. The GLM generalises linear regression by allowing the linear model to
be related to the response variable via a link function and by allowing the magnitude of the
variance of each measurement to be a function of its predicted value.
Going-concern basis
The accounting basis normally required for an insurer’s published accounts, based on the
assumption that the insurer will continue to trade as normal for the long term future. See
also wind-up basis.
Grossing-up factor
A factor used to adjust an immature or incomplete figure to an ultimate or complete one.
Hard premium rates
High, profitable premium rates. See related soft premium rates.
Home foreign business*
General insurance business written in the UK relating to risks that originate or are located
outside the UK.
Hours clause
A clause within a catastrophe reinsurance treaty that specifies the limited period during
which claims can be aggregated for the purpose of one claim on the reinsurance contract.
Commonly 24 or 72 hours are used.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 18 SP8: Glossary
Hunger for bonus
See bonus hunger.
Inception date
This is the date from which the insurer assumes cover for a risk. This may or may not
coincide with the premium collection date.
Increased limit factors
These are factors which estimate the cost for a new limit as a multiple of the basic (original)
limit.
Incurred but not enough reported (IBNER) reserve
A reserve reflecting expected changes (increases and decreases) in estimates for reported
claims only (that is, excluding any ‘true’ or ‘pure’ IBNR claims). The abbreviation is
sometimes stated as ‘incurred but not enough reserved’. The two terms can be regarded as
identical in meaning.
Incurred but not reported (IBNR) reserve
A reserve to provide for claims in respect of claim events that have occurred before the
accounting date but still to be reported to the insurer by that date. In the case of a
reinsurer, the reserve also needs to provide for claims that, although already known to the
cedant, have not yet been reported to the reinsurer as being liable to involve the reinsurer.
Quite often, especially in reinsurance and in the London Market, IBNR provisions include
any IBNER provisions. Sometimes the provision for claims incurred on or before the
valuation date and reported after the valuation date is referred to as the True IBNR or the
Pure IBNR.
Incurred claims (or claims incurred)
Incurred claims refer to the total amount paid on a cohort of claims up to a specified
valuation date plus the total of all case estimates on these claims as at the valuation date.
In this sense it is used in contrast to paid claims, which refers only to the amounts paid up
to the valuation date. Incurred claims usually include ALAE (allocated loss adjustment
expenses).
The term is also used to refer to the estimate of ultimate claims in annual accounting, which
is defined as the total amount paid in the year plus the total claims reserve at the end of the
year less the total claims reserve at the start of the year.
This term can be used in different senses and it is essential to confirm the intended
meaning in every case.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 19
Indemnity, principle of
The principle whereby the insured is restored to the same financial position after a loss as
before the loss. This is typical of most types of insurance. This contrasts with the
new-for-old basis of settlement, often used in home contents insurance, under which the
insured is entitled to the full replacement value of the property without any deduction for
depreciation or wear and tear.
Insurance certificate
A certificate provided by an insurer to confirm that the policyholder has insurance cover.
Insurance cycle
The observed tendency of insurance prices and hence profitability to vary over a period of
several years.
Insured
The person, group or property for which an insurance policy is issued.
Integrated Lloyd’s Vehicles (ILVs)
Syndicates on which the entire participation has been bought by insurance groups.
Internal Model Approval Process (IMAP)
Process that insurers and reinsurers have to be approved through, under Solvency II, in
order to be able to use either a partial or full internal model. The approval or rejection is
given by their group supervisor.
Inwards reinsurance
Reinsurance business accepted or written by an insurer or reinsurer, as opposed to
outwards reinsurance which is ceded to a reinsurer.
Knock-for-knock agreement
An agreement between two insurers specifying how claims costs are shared between them
when vehicles insured by each of them are involved in the same accident. It specifies that
each insurer meets the cost of the damage to the vehicle it has insured without any
investigation or allocation of legal liability.
Lapse
When a policyholder, having been invited to renew the policy, does not do so, the policy is
said to lapse.
Lapse rate
Usually defined as the ratio of the number of lapses in a defined period to the
corresponding number of renewal invitations, but could be another ratio associated with
lapses.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 20 SP8: Glossary
Latent claims
Strictly, latent claims are those claims that result from perils or causes that the insurer is
unaware of at the time of writing a policy, and for which the potential for claims to be made
many years later has not been appreciated.
In common parlance, latent claims are also those that generally take many years to be
reported.
Lead underwriter
An underwriter who takes the lead in setting premium rates and agreeing policy conditions
under a system of coinsurance (for example, in the Lloyd’s market). A lead underwriter
may, or may not, be the lead claims handler depending on market practice and agreements
for the class of business.
Letter of credit
A financial guarantee issued by a bank that permits the party to which it is issued to draw
funds from the bank in the event of a valid unpaid claim against another party.
Liability insurance
Insurance against the risk of being held legally liable to pay compensation to a third party.
Line
Three different meanings arise the context usually makes it clear which is intended:
The ceding office’s retention under a surplus reinsurance treaty.
The percentage allocated to an insurer under coinsurance arrangements.
An alternative name for a class of business.
Line slip
A facility under which underwriters delegate authority to accept a predetermined share of
certain coinsured risks on their companies’ behalf. The authority may be exercised by the
leading underwriter on behalf of the following underwriters; or it may extend to the broker
or some other agent authorised to act for all the underwriters.
Link function
A link function provides the relationship between the linear predictor and the mean of the
distribution function.
Link ratios
See development factors.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 21
Lloyd’s of London (Lloyd’s)
A society, incorporated by the Lloyd’s Act 1871, that provides a market place and regulatory
framework within which individual and corporate members may participate in the
underwriting of insurance risks on their own account.
Lloyd’s broker
An agent approved by the Committee of Lloyd’s to place business with Lloyd’s
underwriters.
Lloyd’s deposit
Wholly owned, non-assigned assets that must be lodged in trust with the Committee of
Lloyd’s before a member can write any business. The amount of the Lloyd’s deposit, when
added to individual Names’ deposits or to incorporated Names’ capital, determines the
maximum limit of premium income that may be written on their behalf. See also Funds at
Lloyd’s.
Lloyd’s managing agent
A company appointed to manage the affairs of an underwriting syndicate, appoint an
underwriter, and provide technical and administrative services.
Also known as an underwriting agent.
Lloyd’s members' agent
A company that looks after the interests of individual Lloyd's Names. The members’ agent
will introduce Names to syndicates, and advise Names on how to spread their capital
between different syndicates. The members’ agent will also be responsible for the regular
audit of a Name’s wealth, and for submitting all financial statements to Lloyd’s.
Lloyd’s special reserve fund
A contingency reserve of limited size that may be built up by individual Lloyd’s Names out
of pre-tax income.
LMX on LMX
Excess of loss reinsurance provided for syndicates or companies operating in the London
Market in respect of LMX business written by them. This is a form of retrocession business.
LMX spiral
The concentration of risk that occurred prior to the mid-1990s when, through the writing of
retrocession business (particularly LMX on LMX business), insurers unwittingly ended up
reinsuring themselves.
London Market
The part of the insurance market in which insurance and reinsurance business is carried
out on a face-to-face basis in the City of London. Sometimes known as the London
Reinsurance Market although not all transacted business is reinsurance.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 22 SP8: Glossary
London Market excess of loss (LMX)
Excess of loss reinsurance provided for syndicates or companies operating in the London
Market.
Long-tailed business
Types of insurance in which a substantial number of claims take several years from the date
of exposure and/or occurrence to be notified and/or settled.
Loss
This may signify:
the financial loss suffered by a policyholder, as distinct from the amount of any
insurance claim that may be payable in respect of that financial loss
the amount of the insurance claim, as in the expression ‘loss reserve’ which means
the same as the reserve (or provision) for outstanding claims
the opposite of ‘profit’ in relation to accounts. In this case, the word needs to be
appropriately qualified; for example, underwriting loss or operating loss.
Loss expense reserve
Another expression for any type of claims handling expense provision.
Loss of profits
See business interruption insurance.
Loss portfolio transfer
An arrangement whereby the total liabilities in respect of a specified book of business is
passed in its entirety from one insurance entity to another. Policyholders will be informed
of this ‘novation’.
Loss ratio
Another expression for claim ratio.
Loss reserve
Another name for claims reserve. The expression is also often used in association with the
reserve deposited by a reinsurer with the cedant to cover in part outstanding claims (exact
terms would indicate which party received the investment income on associated assets).
Loss sensitive
See experience rating.
Losses-occurring (losses occurring during or LOD) policy
A reinsurance policy providing cover for losses occurring in the defined period no matter
when they are reported, as opposed to a claims made policy or a risk attaching policy.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 23
Managing agent
See Lloyd’s managing agent.
Members' agent
See Lloyd’s members’ agent.
Minimum and deposit premiums
See deposit premium.
Model uncertainty
When modelling, the risk that an inappropriate model has been used is known as model
uncertainty. The quantification of model uncertainty is difficult to assess, but by using
alternative models the risk can be minimised and hence the level of uncertainty can be
assessed by comparing the outputs of alternative models.
Moral hazard
Moral hazard refers to the action of a party who behaves differently from the way that they
would behave if they were fully exposed to the circumstances of that action. The party
behaves inappropriately or less carefully than they would otherwise, leaving the
organisation to bear some of the consequences of the action. Moral hazard is related to
information asymmetry, with the party causing the action generally having more information
than the organisation that bears the consequences.
Motor Insurers Bureau (MIB)*
An association of motor insurers in the UK that meets the cost of claims under compulsory
motor insurance where the driver is uninsured or untraced.
Mutual insurer
An insurer owned by policyholders to whom all profits (ultimately) belong.
See related proprietary insurer.
Names (Lloyd’s)
The members of Lloyd’s who accept the liability for (and profits from) the risks underwritten
in their name. Names may be individuals or corporate entities.
Net premium
This can refer to the premium net of the cost of reinsurance, or net of premium tax, or net of
acquisition expenses and/or commission. Premium net of both reinsurance and acquisition
expenses is sometimes referred to as net net premium, this is common in the Lloyd’s
market.
New for old
See replacement; also indemnity, principle of.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 24 SP8: Glossary
Nil claim
A claim that results in no payment by the insurer, because, for example:
the claim is found not to be valid
the amount of the loss turns out to be no greater than the excess
the policyholder has reported a claim in order to comply with the conditions of the
policy but has elected to meet the cost in order to preserve any entitlement to
no-claim discount.
Also known as zero claim.
No-claim discount (NCD)
A form of experience rating in which an individual policyholder may be granted a discount
from the relevant base premium depending on his or her claims experience. See related
protected NCD.
Non-proportional reinsurance
Reinsurance arrangements where the claims are not shared proportionately between the
cedant and reinsurer, for example an excess of loss contract.
Non-technical account
The non-technical account is a feature of accounts of insurance companies in the EU. It is
an account made up from the balance on the technical account plus the balance of the
investment income and gains not included in the technical account, plus profits on any
other activities less tax, dividends and any other charges.
Novation*
The transfer of the rights and obligations under a contract from one party to another.
Office premium
This is the total premium charged for the period of cover. This premium will contain the risk
premium, commission, an allowance to cover all other types of expenses, an allowance for
any premium tax and a profit loading.
Ogden tables
These are a set of tables used to help in the calculation of special damages and the present
value of loss of earnings or annual expenses in personal injury and fatal accident cases.
The tables provide multipliers which take account of life expectancies and a range of
discount rates and are prepared by the Government Actuaries’ Department. The discount
rate is set by the Government’s Lord Chancellor.
One-year (accident-year) accounting
A basis of accounting that presents, at the end of each year of account, the estimated
technical account for business exposed during the year. See also annual basis of
accounting.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 25
Open year
Under fund accounting an open year is one that has not yet reached the stipulated period
for closure. In the Lloyd’s market, an open year is one that has not yet been closed by
RITC. See related closed year.
Operating ratio
See combined ratio.
Original gross premium income (OGPI)
The gross premium income received by an insurer in relation to business that is covered by
a non-proportional reinsurance treaty. The reinsurance premium is calculated as a
percentage of this OGPI. Similar abbreviations, such as OGWP, OGEP, GWPI and GEPI are
also used (see the list of abbreviations).
Abbreviations are provided at the end of this Glossary
Outstanding claims reserve (OCR) or outstanding claims provision
The reserve set up in respect of the liability for all outstanding claims, whether reported or
not, including reserves for future payments on claims that are currently regarded as settled
but may be reopened.
or
The reserve set up in respect of the liability for all reported outstanding claims, including
reserves for future payments on claims that are currently regarded as settled but may be
reopened.
Outwards reinsurance
Reinsurance ceded by an insurer or reinsurer, as opposed to inwards reinsurance, which is
reinsurance accepted.
Overriding commission
Additional commission paid by a reinsurer to an insurer ceding proportional business, as a
contribution towards expenses and profit. The term is often used on primary business
written through agents or brokers and refers to any addition to basic commission rates
either for volume or for profitable business.
Parameter uncertainty
When a model is fitted based upon historic data, certain parameters are selected, for
example, development factors and associated tail distributions or average cost
assumptions. The goodness of fit represented by these parameters can be tested to
identify this element of uncertainty.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 26 SP8: Glossary
Partial payment
Partial claim settlement paid on account, before a claim is finalised or closed.
Any claim for less than the full sum insured.
Peril
A type of event that may cause a loss that may or may not be covered by an insurance
policy. An insured peril is one for which insurance cover is provided.
Period of unexpired risk
For a policy in force on an accounting date, the period from the accounting date to the
expiry date.
Persistency
A measure of the probability that a policy will remain in force at renewal, rather than lapse.
Personal lines
Types of insurance products offered to individuals, rather than to groups or business
entities. Products include private motor, domestic household, private medical, personal
accident, pet and travel insurance.
Points rating system
A system for calculating the office premium by relating it to points associated with each cell
within a rating factor; the higher the risk associated with the cell, the higher the points and
the higher the premium. For example, for a motor insurance policy a driver aged 20 would
be associated with many more points and, all other things being equal, a higher premium,
than a driver aged 40.
Pooling
Arrangements where parties agree to share premiums and losses for specific types of class
or cover in agreed proportions. To some extent all insurance is pooling but specific pooling
arrangements often apply particularly where the risks have very large unit size (for example,
atomic energy risks) or via mutual associations, such as P&I clubs, catering for an industry.
Portfolio claims*
Used in proportional and other forms of reinsurance. The outstanding claims that, together
with the portfolio premiums, make up the reinsurance premium required for a portfolio
transfer; usually used to transfer obligations from one year of account to the next and
hence enable a result for the year to be struck. Can also apply to the body of claims
transferred in a portfolio transfer.
Portfolio premiums*
The premiums that together with the portfolio claims make up the reinsurance premium
required for a portfolio transfer.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 27
Portfolio transfer*
The reinsurance of an entire portfolio at a premium relating to the estimated outstanding
claims (including IBNR) and unexpired risk under that portfolio. Usually used when an
insurer has decided to discontinue writing a particular class, or by a reinsurer wanting to
close a treaty year and pass on the liability to the following year for administrative reasons.
Possible maximum loss (PML)
See probable (possible) maximum loss (PML).
Premium income limit
The amount of premium that a Lloyd’s Name may write in a given year, determined by the
size of the Name’s wealth, the Name’s Lloyd’s deposit and whether or not incorporated.
Premiums trust fund (PTF)
A fund into which all premiums for a Lloyd’s syndicate in a given underwriting year are paid.
No moneys may be released from the fund other than any profit on closure and on-going
claims and expenses.
Primary insurer
An insurer providing cover directly to the insured policyholder, as distinct from a reinsurer.
Probable (possible) maximum loss (PML)
The term ‘probable maximum loss’ represents an attempt to quantify exposure, and is used
in rating or to judge requirements for outwards reinsurance. It may be used as another term
for estimated maximum loss, depending on the class of business. The term ‘possible
maximum loss’ implies the consideration of more remote scenarios than those for probable
or estimated maximum loss and therefore carries a higher value. The fact that the same
abbreviation, PML, may be used for both is a source of possible (and, indeed, probable)
confusion.
Process uncertainty
Process uncertainty is the risk inherent in writing business and settling claims in general
insurance. The modelling of the number and amount of claims will vary from the true value
owing to random variation.
Product costing
Product costing is the calculation of the theoretical office premium to be charged for a
particular class of business.
Product pricing
Product pricing is the determination of the actual office premium. This will take account of
current market conditions.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 28 SP8: Glossary
Profit commission
Commission paid by a reinsurer to a cedant under a proportional reinsurance treaty that is
dependent upon the profitability of the total business ceded during each accounting period.
Also, commission paid by an insurer to a broker or insured that is dependent upon the
profitability of the business written.
Profit testing
A term used for estimating the economic value of contracts using net present value
techniques; that is, proposed premium rates are tested by projecting possible levels of
future business, claims, expenses, investment experience and profit. The process may be
extended to include all business and so form a model office akin to those used in life
companies.
Proportional reinsurance
A reinsurance arrangement where the reinsurer and cedant share the claims proportionally.
Usually, premiums follow the same proportions but commission rates may differ. Two
types commonly arise: quota share and surplus.
Proprietary insurer
An insurance company owned by shareholders; that is, not a mutual insurer. See related
mutual insurer.
Protected NCD
A modification to an NCD system whereby a policyholder who has attained a high level of
NCD may elect to pay an extra premium in order to be able to make claims without losing
future entitlement to discount. There may be a specified limit to the number of claims that
can be made without affecting the discount, or the insurer may simply reserve the right to
withdraw the policyholder’s option to continue on protected NCD.
Protection and Indemnity (P & I) Clubs
Mutual insurers of marine risks.
Quota share (QS) reinsurance
A form of proportional reinsurance where the proportions used in apportioning claims and
premiums between the insurer and reinsurer are constant for all risks covered by the treaty.
Rate on line
For non-proportional reinsurance, the total premium charged (ignoring reinstatement
premiums) for the reinsurance divided by the width of the layer covered.
Rating
The process of arriving at a suitable premium for an insurance risk. The term is sometimes
synonymous with underwriting, though rating is strictly just one part of the underwriting
process.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 29
Rating basis
The collection of assumptions used to associate the risk premium with the characteristics
of the risk being insured.
Rating factor
A factor used to determine the premium rate for a policy, which is measurable in an
objective way and relates to the intensity of the risk. It must, therefore, be a risk factor or a
proxy for a risk factor or risk factors.
Realistic Disaster Scenarios (RDS)
Lloyd’s maintains a set of mandatory Realistic Disaster Scenarios to stress test both
individual syndicates and the market as a whole. The event scenarios are regularly
reviewed to ensure they represent material catastrophe risks.
There are three sets of Realistic Disaster Scenarios. First are the compulsory scenarios, for
which all syndicates report estimated losses to Lloyd’s; these represent events to which
most of the market would potentially be exposed, and for which Lloyd's monitors the total of
all syndicate losses. There is a set of more specialist scenarios, which need only be
reported if estimated losses exceed a threshold. Finally, there are two events which
syndicates must define for themselves as representing material potential losses not
captured in other scenarios.
Reciprocity
An arrangement between two insurers who agree to reinsure risks with each other.
Commonly used with quota share reinsurance to diversify the insurers’ overall portfolios.
Recoveries
Amounts received by insurers to offset directly part of the cost of a claim. Recoveries may
be made from several different sources, for example, reinsurers, other insurers, salvage and
liable third parties.
Reinstatement
The restoration of full cover following a claim.
Normally, the number of reinstatements, and the terms upon which they are made, will be
agreed at the outset. Once agreed, they are automatic and obligatory on both parties.
Reinsurance
An arrangement whereby one party (the reinsurer), in consideration for a premium, agrees
to indemnify another party (the cedant) against part or all of the liability assumed by the
cedant under one or more insurance policies, or under one or more reinsurance contracts.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 30 SP8: Glossary
Reinsurance to close (RITC)
An agreement under the Lloyd’s system of three-year accounting. Underwriting members
(the reinsured members) for one year of account (the closing year) of a syndicate agree with
another party (the reinsuring party) that the reinsuring party will assume responsibility for
handling and paying all known and unknown liabilities of the reinsured members arising out
of insurance business underwritten by the syndicate and allocated to the closing year.
The reinsuring party will usually be the subsequent open year of the same syndicate but
could also be a later open year, an open year of another syndicate or a reinsurer outside
Lloyd’s.
The term is also sometimes used to refer to the premium paid to the reinsuring party by the
reinsured members.
Reinsurer
An insurer providing reinsurance cover. Some reinsurers do not write any direct or primary
insurance business.
Reopened claim
A claim formerly deemed settled, but subsequently reopened because further payments
may be required.
Replacement
A basis of cover under which the insurer pays the cost of replacing the insured item with a
similar but new item. Also referred to as ‘replacement as new’ or ‘new for old’ and contrasts
with ‘the principle of indemnity’.
Reporting year
A reporting year grouping of claims will combine all the claims that are reported within a
given calendar year, irrespective of the date on which the relevant policy commenced,
irrespective of when the claims are actually paid and irrespective of the year in which the
incident actually arose. See related underwriting year, accident year.
Retention
The amount (or proportion) of risk retained by the cedant under a reinsurance arrangement
or the insured under an insurance arrangement.
Although, in the case of non-proportional reinsurance covering a band from R (retention) to
U (upper limit), the cedant may be said to retain not only the risk from 0 to R but also the
risk above U, it is R that would be termed the retention.
Retroactive date
Used for claims-made cover. It is the date after which claims must have occurred in order
to be covered.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 31
Retrocession
Reinsurance purchased by a reinsurer in relation to its inwards reinsurance liabilities (that
is, reinsurance of reinsurance).
Retrocessionaire
A reinsurer that accepts reinsurance from another reinsurer.
Return commission
Commission paid by a reinsurer to an insurer ceding proportional business, as a
contribution towards expenses and profit. Also called overriding commission.
Return period
A return period, also known as a recurrence interval, is an estimate of the interval of time
between events like an earthquake, flood or hurricane of a certain intensity or size. It is a
statistical measurement denoting the average recurrence interval over an extended period
of time, and is usually required for risk analysis (ie whether a project should be allowed to
go forward in a zone of a certain risk) and also to dimension structures so that they are
capable of withstanding an event of a certain return period (with its associated intensity).
Risk-attaching basis
A basis under which reinsurance is provided for claims arising from policies commencing
during the period to which the reinsurance relates.
Risk-based capital (RBC)
The assessment of the capital requirement for a general insurer by considering the risk
profile of the insurance business written and of any other operations. In the US, the
required minimum margins of solvency are determined after considering RBC requirements.
Risk excess of loss reinsurance
Excess of loss reinsurance that relates to individual losses affecting only one insured risk
at any one time.
Risk factor
A factor that is expected, possibly with the support of statistical evidence, to have an
influence on the intensity of risk in an insurance cover. See related rating factor.
Risk group
The rating cell or risk segment into which particular policies are categorised, within a type
of insurance cover. The objective is to achieve a group of policies or risks that have
homogeneous characteristics.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 32 SP8: Glossary
Risk premium
The amount of premium required to cover claims expected for a risk; that is, average claim
amount times average claim frequency. It may alternatively be expressed as a rate per unit
of exposure.
Road Traffic Act*
The UK legislation that, among other things, requires anyone using a motor vehicle on the
road to have insurance to cover their legal liabilities to third parties (including passengers)
in respect of personal injury and property damage.
Run-off basis
A valuation basis that assumes an insurer will cease to write new business, and continue in
operation purely to pay claims for previously written policies. Typically expenses and
reinsurance arrangements change after an insurer ceases to write new business.
Run-off triangle
See claims run-off analysis. The development or run-off triangle may be of paid or incurred
claims by amount or number, or of premiums.
Salvage
Amounts recovered by insurers from the sale of insured items that had become the property
of the insurer by virtue of the settling of a claim.
Self-insurance
The retention of risk by an individual or organisation, as distinct from obtaining insurance
cover.
Short-tailed business
Types of insurance in which most claims are usually notified and/or settled in a short period
from the date of exposure and/or occurrence.
Signing down
The process of reducing the proportion of risk that each coinsurer has accepted for a given
risk where the slip has been more than 100% subscribed.
Slip system
The face-to-face system used within the London Market to coinsure risks. Proposed risks
are described by a broker on a standard form (slip); terms and the premium rate are added
after negotiation with a lead underwriter (who also signs for a certain proportion of the risk),
before the slip is circulated by the broker amongst other underwriters who sign the slip to
confirm the proportion of risk that they will accept.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 33
Soft premium rates
Premium rates with significantly reduced margins due to the competitive state of the
market. See related hard premium rates.
Solvency margin
Another term for free reserves.
Solvency ratio
The free reserves divided by the net (of reinsurance) written premiums.
Stability clause
A clause that may be included in a non-proportional reinsurance treaty, providing for the
indexation of monetary limits (that is, the excess point and/or the upper limit) in line with a
specified index of inflation.
Stop loss reinsurance
An aggregate excess of loss reinsurance that provides protection based on the total claims,
from all perils, arising in a class or classes over a period. The excess point and the upper
limit are often expressed as a percentage of the cedant’s premium income rather than in
monetary terms; for example, cover might be for a claims ratio in excess of 110% up to a
limit of 140%.
Subrogation
The substitution of one party for another as creditor, with a transfer of rights and
responsibilities. It applies within insurance when an insurer accepts a claim by an insured,
thus assuming the responsibility for any liabilities or recoveries relating to the claim. For
example, the insurer will be responsible for defending legal disputes and will be entitled to
the proceeds from the sale of damaged or recovered property.
Sunset clause
Clause defining the time limit within which a claim must be notified, if it is to be valid.
Suretyship
Insurance to provide a guarantee of performance or for the financial commitments of the
insured. In the UK this is known as financial guarantee insurance.
Surplus lines insurance
Specialised property or liability coverage in the US provided by an unlicensed insurer in
instances where it is unavailable from insurers licensed in the state in question. See also
surplus reinsurance.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 34 SP8: Glossary
Surplus reinsurance
A form of proportional reinsurance where the proportions are determined by the cedant for
each individual risk covered by the treaty, subject to limits defined in the treaty.
Swing rated
See experience rating.
Syndicate (Lloyd’s)
A group of Lloyd’s Names who collectively coinsure risks. The syndicates often specialise
in particular types of insurance.
Tail Value-at-Risk (Tail VaR)
Tail VaR is the expected value of the loss in those cases where it exceeds the predefined
confidence level. It is sometimes also called conditional tail expectation, expected shortfall
or expected tail loss. Thus the Tail VaR is equal to the average loss a company will suffer in
case of (extreme) situations where losses exceed a predefined confidence level (eg 99.5%).
Technical Account – General Business*
The Technical Account – General Business is part of the Profit and Loss Account for
insurance companies within the EU. It is made up of earned premiums less incurred claims
(both adjusted for reinsurance as appropriate), less expenses (with an allowance for
deferred acquisition costs as appropriate), plus any part of the investment income that may
be allocated to the technical account.
Technical reserves (provisions) (TPs)
The accounting entries in the balance sheet that represent the insurer’s liabilities from the
business that has been written.
Under Solvency II, technical provisions comprise claims provision + premium provision +
risk margin, where:
The claims provision is the discounted best estimate of all future cash flows (claim
payments, expenses and future premiums) relating to claim events before the
valuation date.
The premium provision is the discounted best estimate of all future cash flows
(claim payments, expenses and future premiums due) relating to future exposure
arising from policies that the (re) insurer is obligated to at the valuation date.
The risk margin is intended to be the balance that another (re)insurer taking on the
liabilities at the valuation date would require over and above the best estimate. It is
calculated using a cost of capital approach.
Three-year accounting
The usual form of funded accounting, in which the underwriting profits are first recognised
at the end of the third accounting year from the start of the underwriting year.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 35
Time and distance reinsurance
A type of financial reinsurance that had widespread use in the London Market and Lloyd’s,
whereby an insurer pays a single premium in return for a fixed schedule of future payments
matched to the estimated dates and amounts of the insurer’s claim outgo. The purpose of
such contracts was to achieve the effect of discounting in arriving at the reserves for
outstanding claims. Since Lloyd’s changed its rules so that the credit allowed for time and
distance policies in a syndicate’s accounts was limited to the present value, such policies
have become less popular.
Treaty reinsurance
Reinsurance that a reinsurer is obliged to accept, subject to conditions set out in a treaty.
Uberrima fides
Latin for ‘utmost good faith’. This honesty principle is assumed to be observed by the
parties to an insurance, or reinsurance, contract. An alternative form is uberrimae fidei: ‘of
the utmost good faith’.
UK Guarantee Fund
The UK guarantee fund is a fund operated by the Motor Insurers Bureau (MIB) to
compensate victims of negligent uninsured or untraced drivers who have no other source of
compensation.
Unallocated loss adjustment expenses (ULAE)
See claims handling expenses.
Underinsurance
When the sum insured is less than that required under the terms of the contract. Depending
on the policy conditions, where underinsurance is proved to exist, insurers may be able to
claim that the policy is null and void. Alternatively, average may be applied to claim
amounts.
Underwriter
An individual who assesses risks and decides the premiums, and the terms and conditions
under which they can be accepted by the insurer.
Underwriting
The process of consideration of an insurance risk. This includes assessing whether the
risk is acceptable and, if so, the appropriate premium together with the terms and
conditions of the cover. It may also include assessing the risk in the context of the other
risks in the portfolio. The more individual the risk (for example, most commercial lines), the
more detailed the consideration.
The term is also used to denote the acceptance of reinsurance and, by extension, the
transacting of insurance business.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 36 SP8: Glossary
Underwriting agent
An organisation at Lloyd’s providing management services for syndicates and/or advice for
Names. See Lloyd’s managing agent.
Underwriting factor
Any factor that is used to determine the premium, or terms and conditions for a policy. It
may be a rating factor or some other risk factor that is accounted for in a subjective manner
by the underwriter.
Underwriting ratio
See combined ratio.
Underwriting year
An underwriting year grouping of claims will combine all the claims relating to loss events
that can be attributed to all policies that commenced cover within a given year, irrespective
of when they are actually reported or paid and irrespective of the year in which the incident
actually arose. See related reporting year, accident year.
Unearned premium reserve (UPR) or provision for unearned premiums
The amount set aside from premiums written before the accounting date to cover risks
incurred after that date.
Unearned premiums
The portion of premium written in an accounting period that is deemed to relate to cover in
one or more subsequent accounting periods. It can be calculated in at least two ways:
Net of deferred acquisition costs (DAC); that is, by deducting acquisition expenses
before proportioning the written premium.
Gross of DAC; that is, by proportioning the full written premium without any
deduction for DAC.
The first approach is consistent with a going-concern basis, whilst the second is consistent
with a break-up basis. However, the second approach can also be used for a going-concern
basis by including DAC as an asset in the balance sheet.
A typical balance sheet includes values gross and net of reinsurance also.
Unexpired risks reserve (URR) or provision for unexpired risks
This term is often used in two ways:
(1) The reserve required to cover the claims and expenses that are expected to emerge
from an unexpired period of cover.
(2) The reserve required to cover the excess of (1) over the UPR. This is sometimes
known as the additional unexpired risk reserve (AURR).
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 37
Value at Risk (VaR)
In financial mathematics and financial risk management, Value at Risk is a widely used
measure of the risk of loss. For a given probability and time horizon, VaR is defined as a
threshold value such that the probability that the loss on the portfolio over the given time
horizon exceeds this value is the given probability level.
Verticalisation
When different coinsurers have different terms (premium rates).
Wind-up basis
See break-up basis.
Working layer
A layer of excess of loss reinsurance at a level where there is likely to be a fairly regular
flow of claims.
Written premiums
The amount of premium, either gross or net of reinsurance, for which cover commenced in
an accounting period.
Zero claim
Another term for nil claim.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 38 SP8: Glossary
APPENDIX – List of abbreviations
ABI Association of British Insurers
ACPC Average cost per claim
AEP Aggregate exceedance probability
AIC Akaike information criteria
ALAE Allocated loss adjustment expenses
ALM Asset liability modelling or management
ALM Association of Lloyd’s members
ANOVA Analysis of variance
AP Adjustment premium
APH Asbestos, pollution, health hazard
APS Actuarial Profession Standards
ART Alternative risk transfer
ASTIN Actuarial STudies In Non-life insurance
ATAFs Age to age factors
ATUFs Age to ultimate factors
AURR Additional unexpired risk reserve
AV Annual venture (Lloyd’s)
BAU Business as usual
BCL Basic chain ladder
BF Bornhuetter-Ferguson
BHF Bornhuetter-Ferguson
BI Bodily injury
BI Business interruption
CAR Contractors’ all risks (insurance)
CAS Casualty Actuarial Society
CDF Cumulative density function
CGL Comprehensive general liability (policies)
CHE Claims handling expenses
CIL Coming into line (Lloyd’s)
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 39
CL Chain ladder
CRTF Credit for reinsurance trust fund (Lloyd’s)
CUE Claims and underwriting exchange (in UK)
D&O Directors and officers (insurance)
DAC Deferred acquisition costs
DFA Dynamic financial analysis
E&O Errors and omissions (insurance)
E&S Excess and surplus (lines insurance)
ECA Economic capital assessment (Lloyd’s)
EIOPA European Insurance and Occupational Pensions Authority
EL Employers’ liability
ELC Expected loss cost
EML Estimated (or expected) maximum loss
ENIDs Events not in data
EPD Expected policyholder default
ERM Enterprise risk management
ESG Economic scenario generator
FAL Funds at Lloyd’s
FATF Financial Action Task Force
FCA Financial Conduct Authority
FGU From the ground up
FPD Franchise performance directorate (Lloyd’s)
FRC Financial Reporting Council
FSCS Financial Services Compensation Scheme
FSMA The Financial Services and Markets Act
GAAP Generally accepted accounting principles
GCR Group Capital Resources
GDP Gross domestic product
GEPI Gross earned premium income
GIRO General Insurance Research Organisation
GIS Geographical Information Systems
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 40 SP8: Glossary
GLM Generalised linear model
GWPI Gross written premium income
HSE Healthy and Safety Executive
IAA International Actuarial Association
IAIS International Association of Insurance Supervisors
IASB International Accounting Standards Board
IBNER Incurred but not enough reported
IBNR Incurred but not reported
IFRS International Financial Reporting Standards
IID International Insurers Division
ILFs Increased limit factors
ILS Insurance-linked securities
ILVs Integrated Lloyd’s Vehicles
ILWs Industry loss warranties
IMAP Internal model approval process
IMF International Monetary Fund
IPO Initial public offering
IUA Insurance Underwriting Association
LDF Loss development factor
LDP Low discrepancy point
LMA Lloyd’s Market Association
LMX London Market excess of loss
LoC Letter of credit
LOD Losses occurring during
LPT Loss portfolio transfer
LTA Long term agreement
M&A Mergers and acquisitions
MAT Marine, aviation and transport
MCR Minimum capital requirement
MGA Managing general agent
MGF Minimum guarantee fund
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Glossary Page 41
MGF Moment generating function
MIB Motor Insurers Bureau
MIG Mortgage indemnity guarantee (insurance)
MLE Maximum likelihood estimate or estimation
MoM Method of moments
MPL Maximum probable loss
MSARC Market supervision and review committee (Lloyd’s)
NAIC National Association of Insurance Commissioners
NCD No-claim discount
NCF New Central Fund (at Lloyd’s)
NYID New York Insurance Department
OCR Outstanding claims reserve
ODP Overdispersed Poisson
OEP Occurrence exceedance probability
OGEP Original gross earned premium
OGPI Original gross premium income
OGWP Original gross written premium
ONS Office for National Statistics (UK)
OPIL Overall premium income limit (Lloyd’s)
ORSA Own Risk and Solvency Assessment
P&I Protection & Indemnity
PCS Professional Conduct Standards
PD Property damage
PML Probable (possible) maximum loss
PRA Prudential Regulation Authority
PTF Premiums trust fund
QS Quota share
RBC Risk-based capital
RDS Realistic disaster scenarios
RITC Reinsurance to close
RMS Required margin of solvency
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 42 SP8: Glossary
RMS Risk Management Solutions
ROC Reserving Oversight Committee
ROE Return on equity
RSR Regular Supervisory Reporting
SAO Statement of actuarial opinion
SCR Solvency Capital Requirement
SFCR Solvency and Financial Condition Report
SLTF Surplus lines trust fund (Lloyd’s)
SME Small to medium (sized) enterprises
SMR Solvency Margin Requirement
SORP Statement of recommended practice
TAS Technical Actuarial Standard
TPs Technical provisions
TPL Third party liability
TVaR Tail value at risk or Tail VaR
ULAE Unallocated loss adjustment expenses
ULR Ultimate loss ratio
UPR Unearned premium reserve
URR Unexpired risks reserve
VaR Value at risk
XL Excess of loss
XoL Excess of loss
YOA Year of account
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
Subject SP8: Assignment X1
2019 Examinations
Time allowed: 2¾ hours
Instructions to the candidate
1. Please:
– attempt all of the questions, as far as possible under exam conditions
– begin your answer to each question on a new page
– leave at least 2cm margin on all borders
– write in black ink using a medium-sized nib because we will be unable to mark
illegible scripts
– note that assignment marking is not included in the price of the course materials.
Please purchase Series Marking or a Marking Voucher before submitting your script.
– note that we only accept the current version of assignments for marking, ie you can
only submit this assignment in the sessions leading to the 2019 exams.
2. Please do not:
– use headed paper
– use highlighting in your script.
At the end of the assignment
If your script is being marked by ActEd, please follow
the instructions on the reverse of this page.
In addition to this paper, you should have available actuarial tables and an
electronic calculator.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Submission for marking
You should aim to submit this script for marking by the recommended submission date. The
recommended and deadline dates for submission of this assignment are listed on the summary page
at the back of this pack and on our website at www.ActEd.co.uk.
Scripts received after the deadline date will not be marked, unless you are using a Marking Voucher.
It is your responsibility to ensure that scripts reach ActEd in good time. If you are using Marking
Vouchers, then please make sure that your script reaches us by the Marking Voucher deadline date
to give us enough time to mark and return the script before the exam.
When submitting your script, please:
complete the cover sheet, including the checklist
scan your script, cover sheet (and Marking Voucher if applicable) and save as a pdf
document, then email it to: [email protected]
do not submit a photograph of your script
do not include the question paper in the scan.
In addition, please note the following:
Please title the email to ensure that the subject and assignment are clear eg ‘SP8 Assignment
X1 No. 12345’, inserting your ActEd Student Number for 12345.
The assignment should be scanned the right way up (so that it can be read normally without
rotation) and as a single document. We cannot accept individual files for each page.
Please set the resolution so that the script is legible and the resulting PDF is less than 4 MB
in size.
Do not protect the PDF in any way (otherwise the marker cannot return the script to ActEd,
which causes delays).
Please include the ‘feedback from marker’ sheet when scanning.
Before emailing to ActEd, please check that your scanned assignment includes all pages and
conforms to the above.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
Subject SP8: Assignment X1
2019 Examinations
Please complete the following information:
Name:
Number of following pages: _______
Please put a tick in this box if you have solutions
and a cross if you do not:
Please tick here if you are allowed extra time or
ActEd Student Number (see Note below): other special conditions in the
profession’s exams (if you wish to
share this information):
Time to do assignment
(see Note below): _____ hrs _____ mins
Note: Your ActEd Student Number is printed on all
personal correspondence from ActEd. Quoting it will help Under exam conditions
us to process your scripts quickly. If you do not know (delete as applicable): yes / nearly / no
your ActEd Student Number, please email us at
Note: If you take more than 2¾ hours, you should
[email protected].
indicate how much you completed within this
Your ActEd Student Number is not the same as your exam time so that the marker can provide useful
IFoA Actuarial Reference Number or ARN. feedback on your progress.
Score and grade for this assignment (to be completed by marker):
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 Q10 Total
=_____%
4 4 5 4 10 14 8 12 10 9 80
Grade: A B C D E Marker’s initials: ________
Please tick the following checklist so that your script can be marked quickly. Have you:
[ ] Checked that you are using the latest version of the assignments, ie 2019 for the sessions leading
to the 2019 exams?
[ ] Written your full name in the box above?
[ ] Completed your ActEd Student Number in the box above?
[ ] Recorded your attempt conditions?
[ ] Numbered all pages of your script (excluding this cover sheet)?
[ ] Written the total number of pages (excluding the cover sheet) in the space above?
[ ] Included your Marking Voucher or ordered Series X Marking?
Please follow the instructions on the previous page when submitting your script for marking.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Feedback from marker
Notes on marker’s section
The main objective of marking is to provide specific advice on how to improve your chances of
success in the exam. The most useful aspect of the marking is the comments the marker makes
throughout the script, however you will also be given a percentage score and the band into which
that score falls. Each assignment tests only part of the course and hence does not give a complete
indication of your likely overall success in the exam. However it provides a good indicator of your
understanding of the material tested and the progress you are making with your studies:
A = Excellent progress B = Good progress C = Average progress
D = Below average progress E = Well below average progress
Please note that you can provide feedback on the marking of this assignment at:
www.ActEd.co.uk/marking
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X1 Questions Page 1
X1.1 List commonly-used rating factors for household property (buildings and contents) insurance. [4]
X1.2 (i) Explain the difference between facultative and treaty reinsurance. [2]
(ii) State the disadvantages of facultative reinsurance. [2]
[Total 4]
X1.3 (i) Explain why premiums may be used as a measure of exposure. [2]
(ii) Suggest reasons why they are not always appropriate. [3]
[Total 5]
X1.4 Define the following general insurance terms:
(a) Uberrima fides
(b) Professional indemnity insurance
(c) Nil claim. [4]
X1.5 You are sitting in the staff canteen of a general insurance company that writes all classes of
business. You can’t help listening to the conversation of the student actuaries sitting at the table
next to yours. The comments you think you hear are:
Comment A: ‘Motor claims are reported and settled quickly.’
Comment B: ‘Late reported claims are bigger on average than claims reported quickly.’
Comment C: ‘Claims from employers’ liability do not occur very often, but when they do, they
end up in court with large payments to the injured employee.’
Discuss the points of clarification you would raise, assuming you were invited to join in with the
conversation. [10]
X1.6 (i) Define the terms exposure measure, risk factor and rating factor. [4]
(ii) State an appropriate exposure measure and list the risk factors and rating factors for each
of the following classes of business:
(a) personal motor
(b) marine hull. [10]
[Total 14]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8: Assignment X1 Questions
X1.7 A general insurance company sells public liability business on a losses-occurring basis. It is
considering moving to a claims-made basis to differentiate its product from those of its
competitors.
(i) Define the terms ‘losses-occurring basis’ and ‘claims-made basis’. [2]
(ii) Discuss this course of action from the point of view of the insurer. [6]
[Total 8]
X1.8 You are an actuary working for a large proprietary general insurance company that writes a wide
variety of business in a developed country. One of the directors has suggested that the company
should not renew any of its existing reinsurance programmes nor take out any further
reinsurance.
(i) List the types of reinsurance treaty that the company may already have. [2]
(ii) Discuss the possible reasons for the director’s suggestion and its disadvantages. [10]
[Total 12]
X1.9 You are the actuary for a general insurance company. The finance director has suggested that in
order to save money on reinsurance, the company should increase its retention levels.
Describe briefly the factors you would take into account in assessing this suggestion. [10]
X1.10 You are an actuary working for a large general insurance company that writes a wide range of
personal lines products. The company is looking to move into the pet insurance market writing a
product that covers domestic cats and dogs. You have been asked by the personal lines director,
who knows very little about this product, to write a report on the product features of pet
insurance, and the considerations to be made in designing the product.
Outline the points you would make in your report. [9]
END OF PAPER
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
Subject SP8: Assignment X2
2019 Examinations
Time allowed: 2¾ hours
Instructions to the candidate
1. Please:
– attempt all of the questions, as far as possible under exam conditions
– begin your answer to each question on a new page
– leave at least 2cm margin on all borders
– write in black ink using a medium-sized nib because we will be unable to mark
illegible scripts
– note that assignment marking is not included in the price of the course materials.
Please purchase Series Marking or a Marking Voucher before submitting your script.
– note that we only accept the current version of assignments for marking, ie you can
only submit this assignment in the sessions leading to the 2019 exams.
2. Please do not:
– use headed paper
– use highlighting in your script.
At the end of the assignment
If your script is being marked by ActEd, please follow
the instructions on the reverse of this page.
In addition to this paper, you should have available actuarial tables and an
electronic calculator.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Submission for marking
You should aim to submit this script for marking by the recommended submission date. The
recommended and deadline dates for submission of this assignment are listed on the summary page
at the back of this pack and on our website at www.ActEd.co.uk.
Scripts received after the deadline date will not be marked, unless you are using a Marking Voucher.
It is your responsibility to ensure that scripts reach ActEd in good time. If you are using Marking
Vouchers, then please make sure that your script reaches us by the Marking Voucher deadline date
to give us enough time to mark and return the script before the exam.
When submitting your script, please:
complete the cover sheet, including the checklist
scan your script, cover sheet (and Marking Voucher if applicable) and save as a pdf
document, then email it to: [email protected]
do not submit a photograph of your script
do not include the question paper in the scan.
In addition, please note the following:
Please title the email to ensure that the subject and assignment are clear eg ‘SP8 Assignment
X2 No. 12345’, inserting your ActEd Student Number for 12345.
The assignment should be scanned the right way up (so that it can be read normally without
rotation) and as a single document. We cannot accept individual files for each page.
Please set the resolution so that the script is legible and the resulting PDF is less than 4 MB
in size.
Do not protect the PDF in any way (otherwise the marker cannot return the script to ActEd,
which causes delays).
Please include the ‘feedback from marker’ sheet when scanning.
Before emailing to ActEd, please check that your scanned assignment includes all pages and
conforms to the above.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
Subject SP8: Assignment X2
2019 Examinations
Please complete the following information:
Name:
Number of following pages: _______
Please put a tick in this box if you have solutions
and a cross if you do not:
Please tick here if you are allowed extra time or
ActEd Student Number (see Note below): other special conditions in the
profession’s exams (if you wish to
share this information):
Time to do assignment
(see Note below): _____ hrs _____ mins
Note: Your ActEd Student Number is printed on all
personal correspondence from ActEd. Quoting it will help Under exam conditions
us to process your scripts quickly. If you do not know (delete as applicable): yes / nearly / no
your ActEd Student Number, please email us at
Note: If you take more than 2¾ hours, you should
[email protected].
indicate how much you completed within this
Your ActEd Student Number is not the same as your exam time so that the marker can provide useful
IFoA Actuarial Reference Number or ARN. feedback on your progress.
Score and grade for this assignment (to be completed by marker):
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 Total
=_____%
3 9 8 8 6 9 10 14 13 80
Grade: A B C D E Marker’s initials: ________
Please tick the following checklist so that your script can be marked quickly. Have you:
[ ] Checked that you are using the latest version of the assignments, ie 2019 for the sessions leading
to the 2019 exams?
[ ] Written your full name in the box above?
[ ] Completed your ActEd Student Number in the box above?
[ ] Recorded your attempt conditions?
[ ] Numbered all pages of your script (excluding this cover sheet)?
[ ] Written the total number of pages (excluding the cover sheet) in the space above?
[ ] Included your Marking Voucher or ordered Series X Marking?
[ ] Rated your X1 marker at www.ActEd.co.uk/marking?
Please follow the instructions on the previous page when submitting your script for marking.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Feedback from marker
Notes on marker’s section
The main objective of marking is to provide specific advice on how to improve your chances of
success in the exam. The most useful aspect of the marking is the comments the marker makes
throughout the script, however you will also be given a percentage score and the band into which
that score falls. Each assignment tests only part of the course and hence does not give a complete
indication of your likely overall success in the exam. However it provides a good indicator of your
understanding of the material tested and the progress you are making with your studies:
A = Excellent progress B = Good progress C = Average progress
D = Below average progress E = Well below average progress
Please note that you can provide feedback on the marking of this assignment at:
www.ActEd.co.uk/marking
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X2 Questions Page 1
X2.1 Explain what is meant by the insurance cycle and give a brief description of it. [3]
X2.2 Following a recent spate of news articles about the rising cost of childcare, a general insurance
company specialising in personal lines has decided to start selling ‘twinsurance’. This will pay out
a specified lump sum to the parents of unexpected twins (or triplets, or other multiple births).
Suggest, with reasons, which distribution channels the company might use to sell this
product. [9]
X2.3 A new general insurance company is being set up to specialise in private motor insurance.
Outline the factors that should be considered by the company when establishing a central
computer system. [8]
X2.4 You are an actuarial consultant who has been asked to review the premium rating calculations for
a large household contents book of business.
Suggest appropriate checks that should be undertaken to ensure that the risk premiums have
been calculated correctly. [8]
X2.5 Discuss the uncertainties underlying any estimates that might be made of an insurer’s claims
liabilities. [6]
X2.6 (i) Explain why there are usually many questions for an individual to answer on a private
motor proposal form. [7]
(ii) Explain how a company might reduce the amount of data it collects for each private
motor applicant, and yet still be able to write profitable insurance business. [2]
[Total 9]
X2.7 A general insurance company that writes only motor business exclusively through brokers has
experienced a gradual but increasing reduction in its market share over the past five years. The
company has decided to use the internet with a view to preventing further reduction and
achieving 50% of its sales through this medium within the next five years. Discuss the possible
effect this strategy may have in the following areas of the company’s business:
the cost structure
broker arrangements
calculation of premiums
business mix and volumes
reinsurance arrangements. [10]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8: Assignment X2 Questions
X2.8 Two years ago, a new general insurance company entered the travel insurance market. Its
strategy was to focus on growth, and over the two years it has grown rapidly.
The insurer is about to do a re-pricing exercise based on its own internal data.
(i) Explain why past claims experience might not necessarily be a good guide to the
future. [7]
(ii) Discuss the areas of uncertainty arising from using this data. [7]
[Total 14]
X2.9 A general insurance company writes commercial property insurance in a small country. Up until
now, the sale of alcohol in this country has been strictly controlled by the State. As a result, all of
the country’s pubs and bars were State-owned, with any risks being borne by the State (ie they
were self-insured).
Regulation is about to change and so private individuals (known as landlords) will be allowed to
run pubs and bars. Your company is considering insuring these landlords.
(i) Describe the particular risks to the insurer of writing this type of business. [9]
(ii) Outline the restrictions and exclusions the insurer might place on the cover. [4]
[Total 13]
END OF PAPER
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
Subject SP8: Assignment X3
2019 Examinations
Time allowed: 2¾ hours
Instructions to the candidate
1. Please:
– attempt all of the questions, as far as possible under exam conditions
– begin your answer to each question on a new page
– leave at least 2cm margin on all borders
– write in black ink using a medium-sized nib because we will be unable to mark
illegible scripts
– note that assignment marking is not included in the price of the course materials.
Please purchase Series Marking or a Marking Voucher before submitting your script.
– note that we only accept the current version of assignments for marking, ie you can
only submit this assignment in the sessions leading to the 2019 exams.
2. Please do not:
– use headed paper
– use highlighting in your script.
At the end of the assignment
If your script is being marked by ActEd, please follow
the instructions on the reverse of this page.
In addition to this paper, you should have available actuarial tables and an
electronic calculator.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Submission for marking
You should aim to submit this script for marking by the recommended submission date. The
recommended and deadline dates for submission of this assignment are listed on the summary page
at the back of this pack and on our website at www.ActEd.co.uk.
Scripts received after the deadline date will not be marked, unless you are using a Marking Voucher.
It is your responsibility to ensure that scripts reach ActEd in good time. If you are using Marking
Vouchers, then please make sure that your script reaches us by the Marking Voucher deadline date
to give us enough time to mark and return the script before the exam.
When submitting your script, please:
complete the cover sheet, including the checklist
scan your script, cover sheet (and Marking Voucher if applicable) and save as a pdf
document, then email it to: [email protected]
do not submit a photograph of your script
do not include the question paper in the scan.
In addition, please note the following:
Please title the email to ensure that the subject and assignment are clear eg ‘SP8 Assignment
X3 No. 12345’, inserting your ActEd Student Number for 12345.
The assignment should be scanned the right way up (so that it can be read normally without
rotation) and as a single document. We cannot accept individual files for each page.
Please set the resolution so that the script is legible and the resulting PDF is less than 4 MB
in size.
Do not protect the PDF in any way (otherwise the marker cannot return the script to ActEd,
which causes delays).
Please include the ‘feedback from marker’ sheet when scanning.
Before emailing to ActEd, please check that your scanned assignment includes all pages and
conforms to the above.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
Subject SP8: Assignment X3
2019 Examinations
Please complete the following information:
Name:
Number of following pages: _______
Please put a tick in this box if you have solutions
and a cross if you do not:
Please tick here if you are allowed extra time or
ActEd Student Number (see Note below): other special conditions in the
profession’s exams (if you wish to
share this information):
Time to do assignment
(see Note below): _____ hrs _____ mins
Note: Your ActEd Student Number is printed on all
personal correspondence from ActEd. Quoting it will help Under exam conditions
us to process your scripts quickly. If you do not know (delete as applicable): yes / nearly / no
your ActEd Student Number, please email us at
Note: If you take more than 2¾ hours, you should
[email protected].
indicate how much you completed within this
Your ActEd Student Number is not the same as your exam time so that the marker can provide useful
IFoA Actuarial Reference Number or ARN. feedback on your progress.
Score and grade for this assignment (to be completed by marker):
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Total
=_____%
4 7 17 6 13 12 21 80
Grade: A B C D E Marker’s initials: ________
Please tick the following checklist so that your script can be marked quickly. Have you:
[ ] Checked that you are using the latest version of the assignments, ie 2019 for the sessions leading
to the 2019 exams?
[ ] Written your full name in the box above?
[ ] Completed your ActEd Student Number in the box above?
[ ] Recorded your attempt conditions?
[ ] Numbered all pages of your script (excluding this cover sheet)?
[ ] Written the total number of pages (excluding the cover sheet) in the space above?
[ ] Included your Marking Voucher or ordered Series X Marking?
[ ] Rated your X2 marker at www.ActEd.co.uk/marking?
Please follow the instructions on the previous page when submitting your script for marking.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Feedback from marker
Notes on marker’s section
The main objective of marking is to provide specific advice on how to improve your chances of
success in the exam. The most useful aspect of the marking is the comments the marker makes
throughout the script, however you will also be given a percentage score and the band into which
that score falls. Each assignment tests only part of the course and hence does not give a complete
indication of your likely overall success in the exam. However it provides a good indicator of your
understanding of the material tested and the progress you are making with your studies:
A = Excellent progress B = Good progress C = Average progress
D = Below average progress E = Well below average progress
Please note that you can provide feedback on the marking of this assignment at:
www.ActEd.co.uk/marking
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X3 Questions Page 1
X3.1 A general insurer wishes to introduce a new set of premium rates. Explain why the date the
insurer chooses to introduce the rates is likely to be some time after the date of the latest
available base statistics. [4]
X3.2 An insurance company operating in the land of ‘Claysoil’ is worried about the claim costs on its
household account, caused by subsidence. The insurer is considering excluding subsidence
claims.
(i) List the advantages and disadvantages of this course of action. [4]
(ii) Explain how the insurer could calculate the revised premium rate, assuming that this peril
is excluded. [3]
[Total 7]
X3.3 A general insurer has announced a loss of £3m on its private motor business for the year to
30 September 2015. The last revision of premium rates took effect from 1 October 2014, and the
next premium rate revision is planned for 1 January 2016.
A director has observed that the company wrote £60m of premiums on its private motor book in
the year to 30 September 2015 and that premium rates should therefore be increased by 5% to
remove the £3m loss.
(i) State the main reasons why this suggestion is probably inappropriate. [9]
(ii) List any further information you would require if you were asked to assess the rates to be
charged from 1 January 2016. [8]
[Total 17]
X3.4 You are an actuary working for a large general insurer. The company does not currently write
tractor insurance, however the Farmers Union (FU) has approached your company asking you to
insure its members’ tractors. Each member will have to take out its own policy but the FU thinks
that it can act as a broker between the farmers and your company to help reduce costs.
You have been asked to provide the managing director of your company with a report explaining
the main issues to the company of providing this new insurance. Outline the content of the
report. [6]
X3.5 You are an actuary working for a general insurance company that writes household contents
insurance in a country where the market for this type of business is small, but developing.
Premiums for this business are currently calculated based on a small number of rating factors.
It is proposed that the insurer introduces a new rating factor, namely the age of policyholder, on
this business.
(i) Explain, using examples, the rationale behind this proposal. [5]
(ii) Describe the difficulties that the insurer may face before implementing this proposal. [8]
[Total 13]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8: Assignment X3 Questions
X3.6 The following information applies to a class of business for which the numbers of claims follow a
Poisson process. All policies are annual.
(a) Expected claim size is £1,000 at 1/7/2015.
(b) Excess fixed in monetary amounts at £300.
(c) Inflation of claims and expenses expected to be 1% per month.
(d) Policy covers first two losses only.
(e) The frequency of underlying claim events is thought to be 25%.
(f) The policyholder pays a reinstatement premium of half the original premium on the date
the first loss is settled.
(g) Acquisition expenses are 25% of premium.
(h) Per policy expenses are initially £1 per month throughout the life of the policy.
(i) Contribution to fixed expenses and profit should be 15% of gross premium.
(j) Assumed rate of investment return is 1% per month.
(k) There are no mid-term lapses or cancellations.
(l) Policies are not expected to be renewed.
(m) All premiums (net of acquisition costs) are received at the date of policy inception.
(n) Assume all claims and per policy expenses are paid 9 months after inception.
(o) Acquisition expenses and the contribution to fixed expenses and profit should be assumed
to occur at policy inception.
Stating any further assumptions or approximations that you make, calculate an office premium to
apply for all new policies commencing in 2016. [12]
X3.7 The number of claims, N, arising from a particular group of policies has a negative binomial
distribution with parameters k 3 and p 0.9 . Individual claim amounts, X, have the following
distribution:
P( X 500) 0.5
P( X 1,000) 0.25
P( X 2,000) 0.25
The aggregate claim amount is denoted by S .
(i) Show that the relationship
b
P(N n) a P(N n 1)
n
holds for n 1,2, , and determine the values of a and b . [2]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X3 Questions Page 3
(ii) Calculate P(S 2,000) using
(a) the recursive method
(b) a normal approximation
(c) a translated gamma approximation.
You should ignore any continuity corrections. [17]
(iii) Comment on your answers to (ii). [2]
[Total 21]
You may use without proof the following result for a compound negative binomial random
variable, S:
3kq2 2kq3 3 kq
Skew(S) m m
1 2 m1 m3
p2 p3 p
where mk E ( X k ) , the kth non-central moment of the claim amount distribution.
END OF PAPER
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold
for the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is
owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a
subsidiary of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or
photocopy any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it
is not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through
the profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished
using the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Subject SP8: Assignment X4
2019 Examinations
Time allowed: 3¼ hours
Instructions to the candidate
1. Please:
– attempt all of the questions, as far as possible under exam conditions
– begin your answer to each question on a new page
– leave at least 2cm margin on all borders
– write in black ink using a medium-sized nib because we will be unable to mark
illegible scripts
– note that assignment marking is not included in the price of the course materials.
Please purchase Series Marking or a Marking Voucher before submitting your script.
– note that we only accept the current version of assignments for marking, ie you can
only submit this assignment in the sessions leading to the 2019 exams.
2. Please do not:
– use headed paper
– use highlighting in your script.
At the end of the assignment
If your script is being marked by ActEd, please follow
the instructions on the reverse of this page.
In addition to this paper, you should have available actuarial tables and an
electronic calculator.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Submission for marking
You should aim to submit this script for marking by the recommended submission date. The
recommended and deadline dates for submission of this assignment are listed on the summary page
at the back of this pack and on our website at www.ActEd.co.uk.
Scripts received after the deadline date will not be marked, unless you are using a Marking Voucher.
It is your responsibility to ensure that scripts reach ActEd in good time. If you are using Marking
Vouchers, then please make sure that your script reaches us by the Marking Voucher deadline date
to give us enough time to mark and return the script before the exam.
When submitting your script, please:
complete the cover sheet, including the checklist
scan your script, cover sheet (and Marking Voucher if applicable) and save as a pdf
document, then email it to: [email protected]
do not submit a photograph of your script
do not include the question paper in the scan.
In addition, please note the following:
Please title the email to ensure that the subject and assignment are clear eg ‘SP8 Assignment
X4 No. 12345’, inserting your ActEd Student Number for 12345.
The assignment should be scanned the right way up (so that it can be read normally without
rotation) and as a single document. We cannot accept individual files for each page.
Please set the resolution so that the script is legible and the resulting PDF is less than 4 MB
in size.
Do not protect the PDF in any way (otherwise the marker cannot return the script to ActEd,
which causes delays).
Please include the ‘feedback from marker’ sheet when scanning.
Before emailing to ActEd, please check that your scanned assignment includes all pages and
conforms to the above.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
Subject SP8: Assignment X4
2019 Examinations
Please complete the following information:
Name:
Number of following pages: _______
Please put a tick in this box if you have solutions
and a cross if you do not:
Please tick here if you are allowed extra time or
ActEd Student Number (see Note below): other special conditions in the
profession’s exams (if you wish to
share this information):
Time to do assignment
(see Note below): _____ hrs _____ mins
Note: Your ActEd Student Number is printed on all
personal correspondence from ActEd. Quoting it will help Under exam conditions
us to process your scripts quickly. If you do not know (delete as applicable): yes / nearly / no
your ActEd Student Number, please email us at
Note: If you take more than 3¼ hours, you should
[email protected].
indicate how much you completed within this
Your ActEd Student Number is not the same as your exam time so that the marker can provide useful
IFoA Actuarial Reference Number or ARN. feedback on your progress.
Score and grade for this assignment (to be completed by marker):
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Total
=_____%
16 8 17 3 10 18 28 100
Grade: A B C D E Marker’s initials: ________
Please tick the following checklist so that your script can be marked quickly. Have you:
[ ] Checked that you are using the latest version of the assignments, ie 2019 for the sessions leading
to the 2019 exams?
[ ] Written your full name in the box above?
[ ] Completed your ActEd Student Number in the box above?
[ ] Recorded your attempt conditions?
[ ] Numbered all pages of your script (excluding this cover sheet)?
[ ] Written the total number of pages (excluding the cover sheet) in the space above?
[ ] Included your Marking Voucher or ordered Series X Marking?
[ ] Rated your X3 marker at www.ActEd.co.uk/marking?
Please follow the instructions on the previous page when submitting your script for marking.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Feedback from marker
Notes on marker’s section
The main objective of marking is to provide specific advice on how to improve your chances of
success in the exam. The most useful aspect of the marking is the comments the marker makes
throughout the script, however you will also be given a percentage score and the band into which
that score falls. Each assignment tests only part of the course and hence does not give a complete
indication of your likely overall success in the exam. However it provides a good indicator of your
understanding of the material tested and the progress you are making with your studies:
A = Excellent progress B = Good progress C = Average progress
D = Below average progress E = Well below average progress
Please note that you can provide feedback on the marking of this assignment at:
www.ActEd.co.uk/marking
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X4 Questions Page 1
X4.1 A colleague is doing a pricing exercise, using GLMs, for a motor book of business and has come up
with an initial model containing many potential rating factors.
They are unsure whether to keep one particular factor in the model and they have asked for your
advice. This factor has five levels: A, B, C, D, Unknown.
The initial model contains 50,000 observations and has 80 parameters fitted. The scaled deviance
for this model is 392.45.
Your colleague has fitted a model that excludes the factor in question and the scaled deviance has
now increased to 401.97.
(i) Carry out a statistical test to decide whether or not this factor is statistically significant.
Explain the rationale behind the test and state your conclusion clearly. [6]
(ii) Discuss the further considerations you would take into account when deciding whether or
not to keep this factor in the model. [10]
[Total 16]
X4.2 A generalised linear model has independent normally-distributed responses Yi , i 1,2,...,n , and
uses the identity link function.
(i) Show that the normal distribution is a member of the exponential family. [4]
(ii) Obtain the variance function for this model. [1]
(iii) Calculate the expression:
yi yi t
di yi , ˆi 2 dt
ˆi V (t)
and hence obtain an expression for the deviance of this GLM in terms of the observed
responses y i and fitted values ˆi . [3]
[Total 8]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8: Assignment X4 Questions
X4.3 You have been working in an actuarial pricing department for the last year, and have done some
work on generalised linear models (GLMs).
You have run a simple multiplicative generalised linear model using some household contents
theft data. The tables below show the initial results from the frequency model and the exposures
split by rating cell.
Relativities
Intercept 0.08
Country 0.5
Area Town 1.0
City 1.5
1-3 0.5
No. of bedrooms
4+ 1.0
Young 2.0
Age of policyholder
Old 1.0
No. of Age of Policy
Area
bedrooms policyholder years
Country 1-3 Young 10,200
Town 1-3 Young 12,000
City 1-3 Young 17,500
Country 4+ Young 50
Town 4+ Young 200
City 4+ Young 50
Country 1-3 Old 6,700
Town 1-3 Old 12,000
City 1-3 Old 8,000
Country 4+ Old 18,250
Town 4+ Old 25,000
City 4+ Old 50
(i) Calculate the predicted claim frequency for each combination of the factor levels. [3]
(ii) Calculate one-way tables of frequency for these three factors. [5]
(iii) Comment on how well the one-way table results predict the GLM results. [9]
[Total 17]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X4 Questions Page 3
X4.4 Outline the main problems that can arise when attempting to derive increased limit factors (ILFs)
for casualty (liability) business. [3]
X4.5 State and explain four distinct methods of factor simplification that can be used in a generalised
linear model. [10]
X4.6 You are a pricing actuary who works for an insurance company that writes personal lines motor
business.
(i) List the risk factors affecting the collision claims experience that relate to:
(a) the driver
(b) the environment
(c) the vehicle. [5]
(ii) Explain why these factors are not usually used directly for rating. [4]
(iii) Discuss, with examples, the factors that affect how effective a proxy rating factor might
be. [9]
[Total 18]
X4.7 You are an actuary working for a small general insurance company that sells annual travel
insurance direct to the public.
The policy includes £500 of cover for holiday cancellation beyond the control of the policyholder.
Sales of policies have fallen in recent years, and evidence suggests that this is because the level of
cover for this peril is too low. You have been asked to review the limit and the resulting new
premium rate.
(i) List the main rating factors for annual travel insurance. [5]
You have obtained the following data from a travel association that shows costs of holidays sold in
their affiliated travel agents over the last three months:
Range of individual Total value of Number of holidays
holiday cost holidays sold sold
Under £500 £1.0m 3,000
£500 £999 £5.0m 6,500
£1,000 £1,499 £7.0m 5,500
£1,500 £1,999 £9.0m 5,000
£,2000 £2,999 £6.0m 2,500
£3,000 £3,999 £3.5m 1,000
£4,000 upwards £6.0m 1,000
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8: Assignment X4 Questions
You are thinking of increasing the limit of cover to either £1,000, £2,000, £3,000 or £4,000.
(ii) Using the data in the table, construct a table of ILFs for use in your analysis. [7]
(iii) List the assumptions you will need to make in order to use the factors you have calculated
to estimate the increase in losses at each higher limit. [7]
(iv) Describe the other factors that may influence your choice of the new limit. [9]
[Total 28]
END OF PAPER
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
Subject SP8: Assignment X5
2019 Examinations
Time allowed: 3¼ hours
Instructions to the candidate
1. Please:
– attempt all of the questions, as far as possible under exam conditions
– begin your answer to each question on a new page
– leave at least 2cm margin on all borders
– write in black ink using a medium-sized nib because we will be unable to mark
illegible scripts
– note that assignment marking is not included in the price of the course materials.
Please purchase Series Marking or a Marking Voucher before submitting your script.
– note that we only accept the current version of assignments for marking, ie you can
only submit this assignment in the sessions leading to the 2019 exams.
2. Please do not:
– use headed paper
– use highlighting in your script.
At the end of the assignment
If your script is being marked by ActEd, please follow
the instructions on the reverse of this page.
In addition to this paper, you should have available actuarial tables and an
electronic calculator.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Submission for marking
You should aim to submit this script for marking by the recommended submission date. The
recommended and deadline dates for submission of this assignment are listed on the summary page
at the back of this pack and on our website at www.ActEd.co.uk.
Scripts received after the deadline date will not be marked, unless you are using a Marking Voucher.
It is your responsibility to ensure that scripts reach ActEd in good time. If you are using Marking
Vouchers, then please make sure that your script reaches us by the Marking Voucher deadline date
to give us enough time to mark and return the script before the exam.
When submitting your script, please:
complete the cover sheet, including the checklist
scan your script, cover sheet (and Marking Voucher if applicable) and save as a pdf
document, then email it to: [email protected]
do not submit a photograph of your script
do not include the question paper in the scan.
In addition, please note the following:
Please title the email to ensure that the subject and assignment are clear eg ‘SP8 Assignment
X5 No. 12345’, inserting your ActEd Student Number for 12345.
The assignment should be scanned the right way up (so that it can be read normally without
rotation) and as a single document. We cannot accept individual files for each page.
Please set the resolution so that the script is legible and the resulting PDF is less than 4 MB
in size.
Do not protect the PDF in any way (otherwise the marker cannot return the script to ActEd,
which causes delays).
Please include the ‘feedback from marker’ sheet when scanning.
Before emailing to ActEd, please check that your scanned assignment includes all pages and
conforms to the above.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
Subject SP8: Assignment X5
2019 Examinations
Please complete the following information:
Name:
Number of following pages: _______
Please put a tick in this box if you have solutions
and a cross if you do not:
Please tick here if you are allowed extra time or
ActEd Student Number (see Note below): other special conditions in the
profession’s exams (if you wish to
share this information):
Time to do assignment
(see Note below): _____ hrs _____ mins
Note: Your ActEd Student Number is printed on all
personal correspondence from ActEd. Quoting it will help Under exam conditions
us to process your scripts quickly. If you do not know (delete as applicable): yes / nearly / no
your ActEd Student Number, please email us at
Note: If you take more than 3¼ hours, you should
[email protected].
indicate how much you completed within this
Your ActEd Student Number is not the same as your exam time so that the marker can provide useful
IFoA Actuarial Reference Number or ARN. feedback on your progress.
Score and grade for this assignment (to be completed by marker):
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 Total
=_____%
6 3 4 10 14 12 15 19 17 100
Grade: A B C D E Marker’s initials: ________
Please tick the following checklist so that your script can be marked quickly. Have you:
[ ] Checked that you are using the latest version of the assignments, ie 2019 for the sessions leading
to the 2019 exams?
[ ] Written your full name in the box above?
[ ] Completed your ActEd Student Number in the box above?
[ ] Recorded your attempt conditions?
[ ] Numbered all pages of your script (excluding this cover sheet)?
[ ] Written the total number of pages (excluding the cover sheet) in the space above?
[ ] Included your Marking Voucher or ordered Series X Marking?
[ ] Rated your X4 marker at www.ActEd.co.uk/marking?
Please follow the instructions on the previous page when submitting your script for marking.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Feedback from marker
Notes on marker’s section
The main objective of marking is to provide specific advice on how to improve your chances of
success in the exam. The most useful aspect of the marking is the comments the marker makes
throughout the script, however you will also be given a percentage score and the band into which
that score falls. Each assignment tests only part of the course and hence does not give a complete
indication of your likely overall success in the exam. However it provides a good indicator of your
understanding of the material tested and the progress you are making with your studies:
A = Excellent progress B = Good progress C = Average progress
D = Below average progress E = Well below average progress
Please note that you can provide feedback on the marking of this assignment at:
www.ActEd.co.uk/marking
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X5 Questions Page 1
X5.1 You are a general insurance actuary in charge of setting the premium rates for a certain class of
business. You have decided to use the Bühlmann-Straub model to estimate the risk premium, and
have collected the following data:
The volume measures for the business written in the last two years are V1 50 and V2 100 .
Total losses for the previous two years have been S1 5,000 and S2 2,500 .
You believe that i ~ N 100,525) and that X i i is normally distributed with mean i and
variance 2 i Vi 300 / Vi .
Calculate the Bühlmann-Straub risk premium for the total losses in year three, assuming that the
volume measure for year three will be V3 25 . [6]
X5.2 A general insurance portfolio consists of N independent, identically distributed risks. The claim
frequency per unit of exposure is a random variable F with E(F ) 0.06 and var(F ) 0.10 . The
standard for full credibility requires that the observed claim frequency lies within 2% of the
expected population claim frequency 95% of the time.
Calculate the number of risks required for full credibility. [3]
X5.3 List the desirable qualities for a complement of credibility. [4]
X5.4 You are the actuary in charge of pricing a household property book. You have decided to use a
credibility approach to future claim frequency, which you then multiply by your historic average
claim size, to obtain the pure risk premium P on a policy. ie:
P S ZX 1 Z M , with 0 Z 1 where:
Z is the credibility factor, calculated using the square root rule
X is the average past claim frequency experience on policies in the portfolio
M is a benchmark average claim frequency experience obtained from industry statistics
S is the average past claim size on policies in the portfolio.
Your standard for full credibility is 1,082 claims and the expected claim frequency for the portfolio
is 900.
(i) Describe the disadvantages of using this method for calculating P . [7]
(ii) You decide to change your method of calculating Z to a Bayesian approach, but you are
concerned that the change in method will cause your premium rates to seem inconsistent
with previous years. Calculate the Bayesian credibility parameter k that will leave the
credibility factor Z unchanged. [3]
[Total 10]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8: Assignment X5 Questions
X5.5 For a particular class of business, the number of claims N is thought to follow a Poisson
distribution. For full credibility, the insurer has always required the number of claims to be within
3% of the true mean, with a probability of 95%.
(i) Calculate the number of claims required for full credibility. [2]
An actuary who has recently joined the insurer is concerned that it is not sufficient to consider
only the claim frequency when calculating credibility. They suggest that the claim severity should
also be taken into account and estimate that, for this class of business, the individual claim size
random variable X has the following distribution:
f x c 1600 2x for 0 x 800 where c is a constant.
(ii) Calculate the revised number of claims required for full credibility, stating any
assumptions you make. [7]
The new actuary is now beginning to doubt the assumption that the number of claims for this
class actually does follow a Poisson distribution. They would now like to test how the numbers
for full credibility would change under a different distributional assumption.
(iii) Calculate the revised number of claims required for full credibility, assuming that the
number of claims has a binomial distribution with parameters n 2000 and p 0.2 . [4]
(iv) Comment on the relative sizes of your answers to parts (ii) and (iii). [1]
[Total 14]
X5.6 You are the actuary of a general insurance company that writes many classes of insurance
business through a broker network. A new director has recently joined the Board of Directors.
Before their appointment, the director had little experience of the general insurance market, but
did have some accounting experience.
The director has stated that, because claim costs are a much higher percentage than expense
costs of the premium paid by the customer, expense analyses are not important when setting
premium rates. As a consequence, in allocating expenses for premium rating they suggest that
the following method be used:
Take the total expenses from the statutory returns by accounting class, and divide by the
corresponding premium. Load this as a percentage of premiums for each accounting class.
(i) State the reasons why an expense analysis should be carried out. [4]
(ii) Discuss the director’s proposed method and suggest a better alternative. [8]
[Total 12]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X5 Questions Page 3
X5.7 (i) Define strike rate. [1]
A large general insurer, which sells business via a variety of distribution channels, has noticed a
steady decrease in its strike rate over the last few months.
(ii) Outline possible reasons why this might have occurred, and suggest actions that the
general insurer could take in order to improve its strike rate. [14]
[Total 15]
X5.8 Explain the considerations that should be taken into account when using credibility theory in
practice. [19]
X5.9 You work for a general insurer that sells only commercial property insurance.
(i) Explain why you might wish to monitor the insurer’s premium rate changes. [2]
(ii) Suggest, with reasons, a suitable definition of premium rate for monitoring the
profitability of the commercial property book. [2]
(iii) Discuss four ways in which the rate changes could be calculated. [13]
[Total 17]
END OF PAPER
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold
for the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is
owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a
subsidiary of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or
photocopy any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it
is not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through
the profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished
using the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Subject SP8: Assignment X6
2019 Examinations
Time allowed: 3¼ hours
Instructions to the candidate
1. Please:
– attempt all of the questions, as far as possible under exam conditions
– begin your answer to each question on a new page
– leave at least 2cm margin on all borders
– write in black ink using a medium-sized nib because we will be unable to mark
illegible scripts
– note that assignment marking is not included in the price of the course materials.
Please purchase Series Marking or a Marking Voucher before submitting your script.
– note that we only accept the current version of assignments for marking, ie you can
only submit this assignment in the sessions leading to the 2019 exams.
2. Please do not:
– use headed paper
– use highlighting in your script.
At the end of the assignment
If your script is being marked by ActEd, please follow
the instructions on the reverse of this page.
In addition to this paper, you should have available actuarial tables and an
electronic calculator.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Submission for marking
You should aim to submit this script for marking by the recommended submission date. The
recommended and deadline dates for submission of this assignment are listed on the summary page
at the back of this pack and on our website at www.ActEd.co.uk.
Scripts received after the deadline date will not be marked, unless you are using a Marking Voucher.
It is your responsibility to ensure that scripts reach ActEd in good time. If you are using Marking
Vouchers, then please make sure that your script reaches us by the Marking Voucher deadline date
to give us enough time to mark and return the script before the exam.
When submitting your script, please:
complete the cover sheet, including the checklist
scan your script, cover sheet (and Marking Voucher if applicable) and save as a pdf
document, then email it to: [email protected]
do not submit a photograph of your script
do not include the question paper in the scan.
In addition, please note the following:
Please title the email to ensure that the subject and assignment are clear eg ‘SP8 Assignment
X6 No. 12345’, inserting your ActEd Student Number for 12345.
The assignment should be scanned the right way up (so that it can be read normally without
rotation) and as a single document. We cannot accept individual files for each page.
Please set the resolution so that the script is legible and the resulting PDF is less than 4 MB
in size.
Do not protect the PDF in any way (otherwise the marker cannot return the script to ActEd,
which causes delays).
Please include the ‘feedback from marker’ sheet when scanning.
Before emailing to ActEd, please check that your scanned assignment includes all pages and
conforms to the above.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
Subject SP8: Assignment X6
2019 Examinations
Please complete the following information:
Name:
Number of following pages: _______
Please put a tick in this box if you have solutions
and a cross if you do not:
Please tick here if you are allowed extra time or
ActEd Student Number (see Note below): other special conditions in the
profession’s exams (if you wish to
share this information):
Time to do assignment
(see Note below): _____ hrs _____ mins
Note: Your ActEd Student Number is printed on all
personal correspondence from ActEd. Quoting it will help Under exam conditions
us to process your scripts quickly. If you do not know (delete as applicable): yes / nearly / no
your ActEd Student Number, please email us at
Note: If you take more than 3¼ hours, you should
[email protected].
indicate how much you completed within this
Your ActEd Student Number is not the same as your exam time so that the marker can provide useful
IFoA Actuarial Reference Number or ARN. feedback on your progress.
Score and grade for this assignment (to be completed by marker):
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 Total
=_____%
5 2 5 8 7 26 4 14 29 100
Grade: A B C D E Marker’s initials: ________
Please tick the following checklist so that your script can be marked quickly. Have you:
[ ] Checked that you are using the latest version of the assignments, ie 2019 for the sessions leading
to the 2019 exams?
[ ] Written your full name in the box above?
[ ] Completed your ActEd Student Number in the box above?
[ ] Recorded your attempt conditions?
[ ] Numbered all pages of your script (excluding this cover sheet)?
[ ] Written the total number of pages (excluding the cover sheet) in the space above?
[ ] Included your Marking Voucher or ordered Series X Marking?
[ ] Rated your X5 marker at www.ActEd.co.uk/marking?
Please follow the instructions on the previous page when submitting your script for marking.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Feedback from marker
Notes on marker’s section
The main objective of marking is to provide specific advice on how to improve your chances of
success in the exam. The most useful aspect of the marking is the comments the marker makes
throughout the script, however you will also be given a percentage score and the band into which
that score falls. Each assignment tests only part of the course and hence does not give a complete
indication of your likely overall success in the exam. However it provides a good indicator of your
understanding of the material tested and the progress you are making with your studies:
A = Excellent progress B = Good progress C = Average progress
D = Below average progress E = Well below average progress
Please note that you can provide feedback on the marking of this assignment at:
www.ActEd.co.uk/marking
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X6 Questions Page 1
X6.1 State the four main factors that would determine the level of ceding commission paid on a motor
quota share reinsurance policy. [5]
X6.2 Define the term stochastic event set and explain how it is used within a catastrophe model. [2]
X6.3 List the perils that may be modelled within a catastrophe model. [5]
X6.4 An insurer expects 50 claims per year from a particular class of insurance that it writes. The
distribution of individual claim amounts (£x) is given by:
f(x) = 55,000 / (50,000 + x)2 for 0 < x < 500,000 and
f(x) = 0 for x > 500,000.
Stating any assumptions you make, calculate the premium that a reinsurer would charge for an
individual excess of loss contract of £200,000 in excess of £100,000, given that the reinsurer
requires an expenses and contingency margin of 35% of the premium. Outline the circumstances
under which the insurer will choose not to use the reinsurance. [8]
X6.5 Explain the term demand surge and how it affects catastrophe models. [7]
X6.6 It is February 2016. You are a pricing actuary, working for a large global reinsurer in the London
Market. Your company writes a wide range of reinsurance contracts and is one of the lead players
in many lines of business.
One of the underwriters has passed you the details of a stop-loss treaty, which was due to renew
on 1 January 2016 for a two-year period, but which has yet to be agreed. The treaty provides
unlimited cover for a portfolio of private cars, attaching at an incurred loss ratio of 40%. Bodily
injury claims are excluded from the treaty. There is also a profit commission payable.
Amongst the pile of correspondence is a note from the broker that is placing the business,
addressed to the underwriter:
John,
Why are you not happy to accept the renewal of this treaty at the expiring terms? The lead
underwriter is happy with it and you were happy to follow them last time. Not only that, but the
experience has once again been good – there have been no losses to the treaty at all.
Regards, Julie.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8: Assignment X6 Questions
You sift further through the information supplied and find the following experience statistics:
Year Incurred Loss Ratio
2010 30%
2011 35%
2012 30%
2013 30%
2014 35%
2015 38%
Inflation of car parts and associated labour costs has been 3% per annum over the period, and the
figures were calculated by the ceding company.
The underwriter has asked you to prepare some discussion points for a forthcoming meeting with
the broker.
(i) Outline how premium rates for this stop-loss policy would be calculated. [9]
(ii) List, with reasons, the factors other than price that the underwriter should consider
before writing the business. [10]
(iii) Outline the contents of a reply for the underwriter to send to the broker in advance of the
meeting, which should include possible non-price changes to the deal to make it more
attractive to the reinsurer. [7]
[Total 26]
X6.7 A general insurance company is assessing its need for property natural catastrophe reinsurance.
It has been suggested that the best approach is to use a stochastic model to estimate the
likelihood of catastrophic claims and also the expected cost should a claim arise. Describe briefly
how this would work. [4]
X6.8 (i) State the two main approaches for assessing the risk premium for non-proportional
reinsurance using a cedant’s loss experience, and outline the steps involved in each
approach. [12]
(ii) State the three main factors that the choice of approach would depend on. [2]
[Total 14]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X6 Questions Page 3
X6.9 You have been asked to build a catastrophe model to assist general insurers in their management
of their flood risk for their domestic household insurance in a developed country.
(i) Explain why traditional rating methods, such as the burning cost approach, may be
unsuitable for dealing with flood risk. [2]
(ii) Outline briefly the components of the model. For each module, state the data needed
and any problems you envisage. [21]
(iii) List the uses that insurers could make of your model. [6]
[Total 29]
END OF PAPER
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold
for the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is
owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a
subsidiary of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or
photocopy any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it
is not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through
the profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished
using the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Assignment deadlines
For the session leading to the April 2019 exams – SP Subjects
Marking vouchers
Subjects Assignments Mocks
SP1, SP2, SP4, SP7, SP8 13 March 2019 20 March 2019
SP5, SP6, SP9 20 March 2019 27 March 2019
Series X Assignments
Recommended
Subjects Assignment Final deadline date
submission date
SP1, SP2, SP4, SP7, SP8 5 December 2018 9 January 2019
X1
SP5, SP6, SP9 12 December 2018 9 January 2019
SP1, SP2, SP4, SP7, SP8 12 December 2018 23 January 2019
X2
SP5, SP6, SP9 19 December 2018 23 January 2019
SP1, SP2, SP4, SP7, SP8 2 January 2019 6 February 2019
X3
SP5, SP6, SP9 9 January 2019 6 February 2019
SP1, SP2, SP4, SP7, SP8 16 January 2019 20 February 2019
X4
SP5, SP6, SP9 23 January 2019 20 February 2019
SP1, SP2, SP4, SP7, SP8 30 January 2019 6 March 2019
X5
SP5, SP6, SP9 6 February 2019 6 March 2019
SP1, SP2, SP4, SP7, SP8 13 February 2019 13 March 2019
X6
SP5, SP6, SP9 20 February 2019 20 March 2019
Mock Exams
Recommended
Subjects Final deadline date
submission date
SP1, SP2, SP4, SP7, SP8 6 March 2019 20 March 2019
SP5, SP6, SP9 13 March 2019 27 March 2019
We encourage you to work to the recommended submission dates where possible.
If you submit your mock on the final deadline date you are likely to receive your script back less than a week
before your exam.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Assignment deadlines
For the session leading to the September 2019 exams – SP Subjects
Marking vouchers
Subjects Assignments Mocks
SP2, SP8 21 August 2019 28 August 2019
SP1, SP4, SP5, SP6, SP7, SP9 28 August 2019 4 September 2019
Series X Assignments
Recommended
Subjects Assignment Final deadline date
submission date
SP2, SP8 5 June 2019 17 July 2019
X1
SP1, SP4, SP5, SP6, SP7, SP9 12 June 2019 24 July 2019
SP2, SP8 19 June 2019 24 July 2019
X2
SP1, SP4, SP5, SP6, SP7, SP9 26 June 2019 31 July 2019
SP2, SP8 3 July 2019 31 July 2019
X3
SP1, SP4, SP5, SP6, SP7, SP9 10 July 2019 7 August 2019
SP2, SP8 10 July 2019 7 August 2019
X4
SP1, SP4, SP5, SP6, SP7, SP9 17 July 2019 14 August 2019
SP2, SP8 24 July 2019 14 August 2019
X5
SP1, SP4, SP5, SP6, SP7, SP9 31 July 2019 21 August 2019
SP2, SP8 31 July 2019 21 August 2019
X6
SP1, SP4, SP5, SP6, SP7, SP9 7 August 2019 28 August 2019
Mock Exams
Recommended
Subjects Final deadline date
submission date
SP2, SP8 14 August 2019 28 August 2019
SP1, SP4, SP5, SP6, SP7, SP9 21 August 2019 4 September 2019
We encourage you to work to the recommended submission dates where possible.
If you submit your mock on the final deadline date you are likely to receive your script back less than a week
before your exam.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X1 Solutions Page 1
Assignment X1 Solutions
This document sets out the marking schedules for the questions in Assignment X1.
Notes to the marker or student are given in italics.
Comments about the question are made, where relevant, in boxes.
The text of the marking schedule is in ordinary type.
Mark allocations are [Right hand justified in square brackets]
A limited number of bonus marks are available, where markers feel that a good point is relevant
and deserves credit.
Important note to students who are new to Subject SP8
A key skill for this exam is to be able, where the question demands it, to generate a wide range of
relevant points. The ability to do this develops with increasing familiarity with the content of the
course (and with practice). Schedules for the early assignments are likely, therefore, to include a
number of ideas that you have not been able to generate, first time round. Don’t be put off by
this, but carefully study the marking schedules and learn from the points that you didn’t make in
your attempt.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8: Assignment X1 Solutions
Solution X1.1
This question is testing the material in Chapter 3, Insurance products – types.
Common rating factors include:
sum insured
number of rooms
location
the voluntary or compulsory use of excesses
whether there is any business use of the property
whether the policyholder owns or rents the property
if the property is normally unoccupied during the day
whether it is a house or flat or some other construction
type of house, eg detached, semi-detached, terraced, bungalow, flat etc
type and standard of construction
age of the building
type of locks and/or burglar alarms fitted
whether smoke alarms have been fitted
high risk contents
previous claims experience
family composition
smoker / non-smoker
type of cover ( ‘new for old ‘ or indemnity)
age of policyholder
credit rating of policyholder.
[½ each, maximum 4]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X1 Solutions Page 3
Solution X1.2
This question is testing the material in Chapter 5, Reinsurance products – background.
(i) Facultative vs treaty
Under facultative reinsurance cover:
each risk is negotiated individually with the reinsurer [1]
there is no obligation for the ceding office to offer the business, neither is the reinsurer
obliged to accept it [½]
each case is therefore considered on its own merits, and the reinsurer is free to quote
whatever terms and conditions it sees fit to impose for that risk. [½]
Under treaty reinsurance:
there is an arrangement between the cedant and the reinsurer whereby the cedant
agrees to place certain defined business with the reinsurer [½]
the reinsurer is obliged to accept the business. [½]
[Maximum 2]
(ii) Disadvantages of facultative reinsurance
The main disadvantages of facultative reinsurance are:
it is a time-consuming and costly exercise to place such risks individually [½]
there is no certainty that the required cover will be available when needed [½]
even if cover is available, the price and terms may be unacceptable [½]
the direct writer may be unable to accept a large risk until it has been able to find the
required reinsurance cover; this inhibits the insurer from accepting business automatically
when it is offered, thus reducing its standing in the market. [½]
[Total 2]
Solution X1.3
This question is testing the material in Chapter 2, Insurance products - background.
(i) Why premiums may be used as a measure of exposure
Premiums can generally be used as a measure of exposure because they are usually quite closely
related to the insurer’s assessment of the amount of risk on a policy. [1]
They are objectively measurable and practical for many purposes. [1]
[Total 2]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8: Assignment X1 Solutions
(ii) Reasons why they are not always appropriate
not suitable as a measure of exposure for premium rating [½]
premium bases change over time [½]
market pressures may lead to distortion of premium bases [½]
premiums may be set wrongly, eg if little experience of new type of risk [½]
loadings applied to risk premium (for expenses, profit etc) change over time [½]
premiums are subject to inflation [½]
[Total 3]
Solution X1.4
Parts (a) and (c) of this question are testing the material in the Glossary while part (b) is testing
the material in Chapter 3, Insurance products - types.
(a) Uberrima fides
Latin for ‘utmost good faith ‘. [½]
This honesty principle is assumed to be observed by the parties to an insurance, or reinsurance,
contract. [½]
An alternative form is uberrimae fidei: ‘of the utmost good faith ‘. [½]
(b) Professional indemnity insurance
Professional indemnity insurance provides cover for professionals (eg actuaries, accountants) [½]
… against liabilities they may incur due to negligence in the services and advice that they provide
to their clients. [½]
(c) Nil claim
A claim that results in no payment by the insurer, because, for example: [½]
the claim is found not to be valid [½]
the amount of the loss turns out to be no greater than the excess [½]
the policyholder has reported a claim in order to comply with the conditions of the policy,
but has elected to meet the cost in order to preserve any entitlement to a no-claim
discount. [½]
[Maximum 4]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X1 Solutions Page 5
Solution X1.5
This question is testing the material in Chapter 3, Insurance products – types.
Comment A
Generally true. Most motor claims are reported and settled quickly, especially for property
damage claims. [1]
But reporting delays do sometimes occur, for example: [½]
an injury to a third party, such as a back problem, may get worse [½]
a small loss may initially make the policyholder wonder whether to claim and lose some
NCD [½]
an injured party may not claim until they have recovered. [½]
Settlement delays are not uncommon, for example: [½]
where there is protracted debate on which party (and hence which insurer) is liable [½]
for bodily injury conditions to stabilise (and amount established). [½]
[Maximum 3]
Comment B
Again generally true, but depends on class. [1]
For example, in household buildings, late reporting might be mainly due to amounts being
relatively small … [½]
… or large subsidence losses which may not be evident for some time. [½]
For employers’ liability, for example, late reporting may also result from minor amounts (many
asbestosis claims are for small amounts, since they are paid to old people) but other latent
diseases can give large settlements compared with a typical early-reported injury. [1]
Other factors affecting the average claim size:
impact of inflation [½]
impact of claims settled at no cost [½]
cautious reserving (which makes unsettled claims appear big). [½]
[Maximum 3]
Comment C
‘Not very often ‘, yes per employee, … [½]
… but an office may receive many thousands of claims each year! [½]
Claim frequency varies mainly by type of business. [½]
A large proportion of claims are for relatively minor injuries, so small payments. [1]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8: Assignment X1 Solutions
A few claims will be for more serious injuries … [½]
… and others for disease / illness (only injury is mentioned in the comment). [½]
Only a very small proportion go to court … [½]
… and some of these will establish that there is no liability for the insurer. [½]
[Maximum 4]
Solution X1.6
The definitions in part (i) can be found in the Glossary, and are discussed in more detail in
Chapter 2, Insurance products – background. Part (ii) tests the application of these ideas to
specific products from Chapter 3, Insurance products – types.
(i) Definitions
An exposure measure is a basic unit used by an insurer to measure the amount of risk. It is usually
stated over a given period. [1]
A risk factor is a factor that is expected to influence the intensity of risk. It is usually backed up by
statistics. [1]
A rating factor is a factor that is used to determine the premium rate charged. [1]
Rating factors tend to be measurable risk factors or proxies for risk factors. They should be
measurable, verifiable and objective. [1]
[Total 4]
(ii)(a) Personal motor
The exposure measure would be vehicle years. [½]
The risk factors include:
the number of miles driven
the density of the traffic where the car is driven
the ability of the driver
the speed at which the vehicle is usually driven and its general level of performance
the ease with which the vehicle can be damaged and the cost of repairing it
the theft risk
weight of the vehicle
fire risk. [½ each, maximum 2]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X1 Solutions Page 7
The rating factors include:
type of cover (eg comprehensive)
size of excess for each claim type
location of policyholder (eg postal code)
sex of main driver (if allowed as a rating factor)
age of policyholder and other drivers
policyholders’ marital status
policyholders’ credit score
whether there are additional drivers of the vehicle as well as the policyholder
the occupation of the policyholder and other named drivers
number of years since the driver(s) passed their driving test
whether or not the driver(s) have any driving convictions
whether or not driving is restricted to certain named drivers
estimated mileage over the next 12 months
past claims history (NCD)
details of vehicle, eg make, model, and age of vehicle etc
value of vehicle
use of vehicle (eg business use)
where the vehicle is kept overnight: on the road / on a driveway / in a garage etc
anti-theft devices
the extent of any modification to the engine or body. [½ each, maximum 3]
(ii)(b) Marine hull
The exposure measure would be the insured value of the hull. [½]
The risk factors include:
size of vessel
type of vessel
age of vessel
condition and maintenance of vessel
miles travelled
routes travelled
crew training / ability
management ability. [½ each, maximum 2]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8: Assignment X1 Solutions
The rating factors include:
sum insured
type of vessel
commercial category
use of vessel / scope of voyages
geographic region / destination
the number and experience of the crew
deductible
past experience (loss history). [½ each, maximum 2]
Markers, please give credit for alternative valid answers. [Total 10]
Solution X1.7
The definitions in part (i) can be found in the Glossary, and these topics are discussed in more
detail in Chapter 2, Insurance products – background.
(i) Definitions
A losses-occurring basis is where the policy provides cover for losses occurring in the defined
period no matter when they are reported. [1]
A claims-made basis is where the policy provides cover for all claims reported to an insurer within
the policy period irrespective of when they occurred. [1]
(ii) Changing from a losses-occurring to a claims-made basis
+ There will be less uncertainty over future claims so reserving may be easier. [½]
+ In particular, exposure to latent claims will be limited, since if claims are not reported
within the period, then they will not be covered. [½]
+ Claims will be reported more quickly, since policyholders will have to meet a ‘deadline ‘ if
they want their claims to be accepted. [½]
+ The insurer will be able to determine its profits more quickly. [½]
+ There will be greater clarity as to which period of insurance cover each claim relates to.
[½]
+ There will be less scope for expensive legal action between insurers to determine who is
liable for any particular claim. [½]
– There is a risk that a customer takes out a policy knowing that a claim has already
occurred, with a view to claiming for it. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X1 Solutions Page 9
– This basis is out of line with the rest of the market, which may make the policy less
marketable … [½]
– … and less well understood, which may lead to customer dissatisfaction. [½]
– Policyholders may face gaps in coverage if they subsequently move from this insurer back
to an insurer that uses a losses-occurring basis, making them reluctant to buy policies
from this insurer in the first place. [½]
– The policy may not meet the needs of the customer, since policyholders may require
cover for latent claims. [½]
– The claims that emerge will be from different periods of exposure. This introduces
heterogeneity and may make it harder to analyse experience. [½]
– Historical development patterns may not be relevant, so reserving may be harder. [½]
Similarly, there will not be much past data available on this basis, so pricing uncertainty
will increase. [½]
– There may be an increased number of claims reported (as policyholders are more likely to
report claims as soon as they become aware of them) which could increase claims
handling costs. [½]
[Maximum 6]
Solution X1.8
The various types of reinsurance treaty are covered in Chapter 6, Reinsurance products - types.
The rationale for purchasing reinsurance is covered in Chapter 5, Reinsurance products –
background.
(i) Types of reinsurance
These could include:
quota share
surplus treaty
risk excess of loss
aggregate excess of loss
catastrophe excess of loss
stop loss
financial reinsurance. [½ each, maximum 2]
[Total 2]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8: Assignment X1 Solutions
(ii) Director’s suggestion
Reasons
The company is well diversified and so does not need reinsurance for that purpose. [½]
Also, if it is large it is probably well-capitalised, which means that it could rely on the cushion of
free assets rather than reinsurance. [1]
A large company should have sufficient experience and so is less reliant on technical assistance
from the broker and/or reinsurer. [½]
The company may have a particularly bad relationship with the existing reinsurance brokers. [½]
Much of the business written may not be volatile, leading to less need for reinsurance. In
particular, there may be few large risks that could lead to large claims. [½]
Alternatively, the company may have taken the view that the benefit gained from the reinsurance
was not sufficient. For example, few recoveries may have been made in recent years. [½]
In any case, it may be that the reinsurance is deemed expensive in the current climate. This could
be due to a lack of capacity in the reinsurance market. [½]
The company may have decided that suitable reinsurance is not actually available in the market at
the current time. [½]
Not having reinsurance would mean that profit would not be ceded. Shareholders may thus
receive better returns. [½]
Also, the company could spend the money elsewhere, perhaps more profitably. [½]
There would also be the expense saving resulting from not having to organise the reinsurance
purchase and manage ongoing reinsurance recoveries. [½]
Disadvantages
The company may not be able to meet catastrophe claims or claims resulting from an aggregation
of risk. [½]
It is likely that the company covers liability business. Individual claims on this type of business can
be very large. [½]
Even a large, well-financed company may not be able to cope with these sorts of events without
reliance on reinsurance. [½]
For example, even if it has the finances to pay for unexpected claims, it will still need to protect its
solvency margin for other purposes, eg expanding the business. [½]
If the company did cease its reinsurance arrangements, this may weaken any relationship with the
broker. This would be particularly important if it later decided to re-enter the agreements,
perhaps when reinsurance rates soften or when the need arises due to new ventures. [1]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X1 Solutions Page 11
Not having reinsurance would probably concern the regulators … [½]
…and would look out of line with competitors. [½]
Rating agencies would also be concerned. A downgraded credit rating could result in loss of
credibility for the insurer and, ultimately, loss of business. [½]
It may result in reduced investment, as the company will have to protect its liquidity
position. [½]
The company will probably have to hold more capital. [½]
This could lead to:
increased premiums [½]
lower sales volumes [½]
less ability to take advantage of new opportunities. [½]
Reinsurance may even be compulsory for some classes. [½]
The shareholders will want smooth dividends. This will be more difficult to achieve without
reinsurance. [½]
[Maximum 10]
Solution X1.9
Factors affecting the amount of reinsurance an insurer requires are covered in Chapter 5,
Reinsurance products – background.
It would be important to take into account the existing reinsurance arrangements of the insurer.
In particular:
details of existing reinsurance arrangements (types of reinsurance, retention
levels etc) [½]
appropriateness of existing reinsurance arrangements. [½]
The type(s) of business sold should also be considered. In particular:
the classes of business written [½]
the size of the risks [½]
the volatility of claims experience [½]
the geographical spread of risks [½]
possible accumulations of risk [½]
the risk of catastrophes [½]
the predictability of the business written, which will depend on: [½]
– the extent of past claims experience, say 5–10 years [½]
– the goodness of fit of statistical distributions to past claims experience. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8: Assignment X1 Solutions
Features relating to the company will be important, in particular:
the size of the company [½]
the solvency margin / free assets [½]
the company’s appetite for risk. [½]
Features relating to the available reinsurance will also be important, in particular:
alternatives to reinsurance [½]
availability of reinsurance with higher retentions [½]
cost of reinsurance (perceived value for money) [½]
reinsurance premiums relative to gross premium income [½]
the security of the available reinsurance. [½]
The reasons why reinsurance has been purchased at all should be taken into account:
the limitation of exposure to risk / need to spread risks [½]
the need to stabilise results [½]
the effect on the solvency position [½]
the need for financial support [½]
the need for technical assistance. [½]
Finally, the impact on the business of the change should be considered:
the effect on profitability of higher retention levels [½]
the effect on business volumes [½]
the effect on the investment freedom of the insurer [½]
the possible reduction in administrative costs if there is less contact with reinsurers. [½]
[Maximum 10]
Solution X1.10
Pet insurance is not covered in the Core Reading for Subject SP8, so the skills needed to tackle this
question are covered in Chapter 4, Problem solving.
Consideration should be given to the benefit provided, any maximum levels of benefits, and any
indexation of these benefit levels. [1]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X1 Solutions Page 13
Benefits might include:
vets’ fees, which may be capped at a maximum amount per year, per illness or per
treatment [½]
hospital benefits, which may be capped at a maximum total amount, or a maximum stay
in hospital [½]
death benefit (for death by accident or illness up to a certain age), which should cover the
value of the pet, up to a maximum value [½]
loss benefit, which should cover the value of the pet, up to a maximum value [½]
advertisement costs if the animal goes missing [½]
kennel fees if the owner is hospitalised [½]
quarantine costs [½]
liability cover if the pet attacks a third party [½]
liability cover if the pet damages property. [½]
There may be different bands of benefit. [½]
Bearing in mind the benefits provided, it would be necessary to consider the perils that are likely
to be insured. [½]
The period of cover of the contract may be one year (so that it is an annually renewable product)
or a single premium contract covering the pet over its lifetime. [1]
Terms and conditions would need to be clearly defined. [½]
The terms and conditions of the product may include:
the level of excess (if any), which may be a fixed amount, or a percentage of the
claim [½]
exclusions, eg:
– certain routine treatments and vaccinations [½]
– any pre-existing conditions [½]
– certain breeds [½]
– certain uses of pet [½]
– claims resulting from incidents outside of certain geographical limits [½]
– war / nuclear risks [½]
eligibility criteria, such as minimum and maximum age at entry [½]
any cancellation terms under the policy. [½]
In determining benefit levels, terms and conditions, customer needs would need to be
considered. [½]
It may be necessary to offer different products through different distribution channels. [½]
[Maximum 9]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold
for the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is
owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a
subsidiary of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or
photocopy any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it
is not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through
the profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished
using the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
SP8: Assignment X2 Solutions Page 1
Assignment X2 Solutions
Solution X2.1
This question tests the material in Chapter 8, External environment.
In any given class of general insurance over a period of time, companies move from large profits
to losses (or very small profits) and back again. The effect is much more pronounced for some
classes of business than for others. [1]
When profits are large, existing companies seek to expand and new companies are attracted into
the market. [½]
Increased competition drives down premium rates (or weakens underwriting controls), and
profits are subsequently reduced, or losses are made. [½]
Faced with inadequate profits, some insurers contract or withdraw from the market. [½]
Premium rates can then increase for the remaining companies, who subsequently make good
profits again. [½]
[Total 3]
Solution X2.2
This question is testing the material in Chapter 7, General insurance markets.
Off-the-page advertising [½]
The company could place adverts in newspapers / magazines, particularly in those that have
published recent articles on childcare costs … [½]
… since these may attract readers who are more likely to buy the product. [½]
Similarly it could advertise on relevant parenting websites or discussion forums. [½]
Internet sales [½]
Internet sales are likely to be appropriate because:
it is a cost-effective sales channel (once the initial design of the IT system is complete) [½]
it provides scope for high volumes of business, and this will be key to making profits on
this product since the premium per policy will be relatively low [½]
the sales process can be automated, which is ideal since the product is not particularly
complex (eg the lump sum payment will be specified in advance and a limited number of
rating factors will be needed). [½]
Staff employed directly by the insurer [½]
Telesales staff are likely to be used. The company probably already employs these staff so set-up
costs would be minimal. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8: Assignment X2 Solutions
Affinity groups [½]
Using affinity groups can help target potential policyholders specifically, and hence reduce the
costs of mass-marketing. [½]
For example the company could purchase the customer database of parenting shops and use this
to contact prospective parents directly (ie by writing / phone / email etc). [½]
Fertility clinics would not be an appropriate affinity group, since these parents would be more
likely to have multiple births and therefore would not be attractive risks. [½]
Intermediaries [½]
The company could arrange for a life / health insurer to act as a fronting insurer. [½]
This would give the general insurer access to a ready customer base, and multiple-birth insurance
could be sold alongside similar products, eg private medical cover. [½]
The company may even be a composite insurer, in which case it could sell the product through its
existing life arm. [½]
Other intermediaries, such as banks, may be used. However, this may not sell much more
business than a direct marketing approach, but would meanwhile incur an extra layer of costs. [½]
Brokers are unlikely to be used because: [½]
the premium per policy will be low [½]
there is no need to use brokers’ expertise for a relatively simple product such as this. [½]
Hence, the brokerage costs would make the product price unattractive. [½]
[Maximum 9]
Solution X2.3
This question is testing the material in Chapter 10, Data.
Function of the system. Need input from all potential users:
– administration
– accounting
– actuarial / statistical
– management
– marketing
– other (underwriters, reinsurers, claims, investment, computing, risk managers,
catastrophe modellers).
[½ each, maximum 1]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X2 Solutions Page 3
For private motor, there is potentially a lot of data to be processed. All of the above users
will rely heavily upon the system. Their input initially is important. [½]
Structure or outline of the system, for example: [½]
– how the system should operate
– for private motor, the company will probably want to be able to give on-line
premium quotes to brokers.
[maximum ½ for any relevant example]
Which computer? What type of software? [½]
Cost of implementation. [½]
Security, for example:
– how the system will be monitored
– who will have access to the system, eg branches / agents
– data protection laws, particularly if the system is to be used by third parties.
[½ each, maximum 1]
The data that will need to be held. For private motor, we should retain all the data for
individual policyholders on the system. [½]
How files will be structured. For example, should the policy and claims records be held on
separate files? [½]
How long the data will be stored the longer the better, subject to legal and cost
constraints. [½]
Capability. The system will need to be able to capture claim features such as multiple
payments, nil claims and reopened claims. [½]
The output from the system is important, for example: [½]
– premium quotations (linked to brokers’ systems)
– policy documents
– renewal notices
– endorsement notices
– marketing statistics
– run-off tables
– statutory returns / accounting reports / management reports
[½ each, maximum 1]
Ease of use. Need to consider the computer literacy of the end users. [½]
Implementation of the system. How the system will be developed, and by whom. How it
will be tested. [½]
When the system will be ready. This needs to be linked to the proposed launch of the
new policies. [½]
Error aversion. What steps will be taken to ensure data accuracy? [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8: Assignment X2 Solutions
Changes to the system. The system must be sufficiently robust so that future
developments can be incorporated. [½]
New company. There should be few constraints (other than cost), so the system design
need not be too concerned with existing practices. [½]
[Maximum 8]
Solution X2.4
This question is testing the material in Chapter 10, Data.
check for completeness of the data, eg raw claims and policy data reconciles with the
accounting information [½]
check that only household contents data included (eg where combined buildings and
contents business) [½]
check that recent and appropriate data has been used [½]
check credibility of data in cells and homogeneity within cells [½]
high level checks of frequency and average cost over periods of time [½]
compare data with that used in a previous review [½]
check that claims have attached correctly to the policy data [½]
check that data hasn’t been corrupted in the cleaning process, eg using one-way tables by
rating factors [½]
check that the data has then fed through correctly into any rating software packages [½]
reconcile any adjustments for IBNR and IBNER with figures produced by the claims
reserving department [½]
check that frequency and average cost models combine correctly, and that all claim
causes are included [½]
check that frequency, inflation or any other trends have been correctly projected to the
expected claims payment dates for the new rating series [½]
comparison of risk premium rates with a previous analysis [½]
adjustments made to allow for new rating factors have been made on a consistent basis
across each peril [½]
check that appropriate allowance has been made for individual large claims and
accumulations [½]
obtain sample quotes for new business and renewals [½]
as you are a consulting actuary, you are likely to have information regarding competitors’
risk premiums and therefore can check against this [½]
gross up risk premium for general level of expenses, etc and compare with office
premiums of competitors [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X2 Solutions Page 5
check suitability of model, including appropriate rating cells [½]
check that the increases in risk premiums look reasonable by comparing with recent
years’ loss ratios [½]
[Maximum 8]
Solution X2.5
This question is based on the material in Chapter 9, Risk and uncertainty.
With a few exceptions, such as personal accident insurance, the size of payment to be made will
not be known in advance, particularly if it may be subject to inflation. [1]
When considering the patterns arising in the dates of claims payments there may be several
factors acting, for example:
the policyholder may not even know the event giving rise to the claim has taken place, for
instance a slowly developing disease, or
the claim may have been notified to the broker but they have not yet passed it on to you
the insurer. [1]
Even after full details of the claim have been reported to an insurer, different members of the
claims staff could reach different but equally valid conclusions about the facts and so produce
different estimates of the liability. [1]
There may be protracted discussions about whether or not the claim falls within the terms of the
policy. [½]
During the period to settlement there may be long discussions with the reinsurer who may take a
different view about the claim from the insurer. This can result in delays and lower than expected
recoveries. [½]
Even if the insurer could estimate the liabilities arising from the current year’s business, it will be
very difficult for it to estimate the liabilities arising from future years. These will be made up
from:
claims from business which renews with the insurer it will be difficult to predict how
much of the business will renew at the end of each year, and
claims from completely new business, which will be even harder to estimate. [1]
Business mix and volume may not be the same as in the past. [½]
Standards of underwriting or claims handling may change, impacting liabilities. [½]
Unexpected legislative changes may affect liabilities. [½]
There will be uncertainty over the extent and eventual value of any large losses or catastrophe
claims. [½]
Latent claims may emerge. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8: Assignment X2 Solutions
The chosen statistical model or its parameters may not be suitable. [½]
The assumptions underlying the statistical method / model may no longer be appropriate (for
example the run-off triangle assumption for development). [½]
There may be uncertainty over exchange rate movements and the currency in which claims will be
paid. [½]
There may be errors in the data or model. [½]
[Maximum 6]
Solution X2.6
Proposal forms and data issues are discussed in Chapter 10, Data. Part (i) also requires knowledge
of Chapter 3, Insurance products – types.
(i) Why there are so many questions on motor proposal forms
In order to charge individuals premiums that reflect the risk, data needs to be collected to define
the risk as accurately as possible. [½]
This will enable a better classification of risk when calculating premiums. [½]
The risks faced by an insurer are:
how likely the policyholder is to claim, and [½]
how big each claim will be, on average. [½]
There are many factors affecting each of these (ie many different risk factors) ... [½]
... and there are many different causes of claims. [½]
In practice, many of the risk factors may be difficult to measure and verify, so information is
collected on various rating factors instead, to use as proxies for the risk factors. [1]
For example, ‘how good a driver is’ might be indicated by a combination of: age, number of years’
driving experience, recent experience, occupation, convictions, etc. [1]
Other reasons include:
high variability in risk levels [½]
insurers collect data for rating factors that they are not currently using. [½]
market practice – potential customers seem willing to answer a large number of
questions, particularly if they think this may entitle them to a cheaper price [1]
the method of sale, eg internet or telephone, may enable many questions to be answered
relatively quickly. [1]
Information is also collected for marketing purposes. [½]
[Maximum 7]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X2 Solutions Page 7
(ii) How to reduce the amount of data
The first possibility is to investigate claims experience carefully and decide which, if any, rating
factors can be removed. Some of the rating factors may be proved to have negligible impact on
the level of risk. [1]
This approach may still lead to problems if the company’s rating structure is very different from
the rest of the market, due to the risk of selection. [½]
Other possibilities are to:
offer insurance to niche groups that can be defined by fewer rating factors [½]
use external data that can be linked to the data already provided by the policyholder,
eg census data can be linked to the policyholder’s postcode. [½]
automatically decline to quote for anything except standard risks. [½]
[Maximum 2]
Solution X2.7
This question is based on material from Chapter 7, General insurance markets, but also
encompasses other topics such as premium rating, reinsurance and actuarial investigations.
The cost structure
There will be one-off set-up costs, eg IT staff and equipment. [½]
Advertising costs may need to increase in the short term, but may fall in the longer term where
less expensive means are available on the internet. [½]
Cheaper claims handling may become possible, eg due to greater use of internet or email. [½]
The overall long-term costs across the company should be lower as efficiency gains are
achieved. [½]
Overall fees to brokers are likely to fall as less business is obtained through them. [½]
The cost structure will change as more of the expenses are fixed (maintaining an infrastructure)
and fewer are variable (commission). [½]
Broker arrangements
Brokers may be unhappy about the introduction of the new sales channel. [½]
This may lead to further reduction in broker business. [½]
The number of brokers and their commission arrangements, together with the pricing strategy,
may need to be changed. [½]
Capital efficiency may improve because the balance of premiums tied up with brokers (and hence
not investible) is likely to reduce. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8: Assignment X2 Solutions
Calculation of premiums
Set-up costs will need to be amortised over a suitable period in the premium calculation. [½]
Separate premium rates are likely to be appropriate for internet sales, eg to reflect the lower
expenses. [½]
A more sophisticated premium calculation system may be possible for internet sales. [½]
Need to consider consistency between the broker and internet premium, but note that the
internet rates will need to be competitive in the market. [½]
It may be possible to obtain policy information in more detail, which may allow the use of new
rating factors. [½]
It should be easier to update rates more frequently to allow for new experience as it emerges.
[½]
Business mix and volumes
The business mix will change, probably steering towards the more financially aware. [½]
It will probably worsen a little as underwriting will be less tight so we are more likely to accept a
few bad risks. [½]
The age profile and geographical spread of customers is also likely to change. [½]
This will affect claims experience and persistency. [½]
Projected business volumes will hopefully improve overall, but are highly uncertain. [½]
Much depends upon the competitiveness of the premium rates, the level of advertising, design of
the website and whether people actually want insurance to buy over the internet. [½]
Renewal rates may improve due to the ease of renewal via the internet (alternatively, they may
deteriorate due to more customers shopping around). [½]
Reinsurance arrangements
Reinsurance arrangements are likely to be reviewed, eg to reflect changing business
mix/volumes. [½]
Initially, there may be an increased need to obtain technical assistance from the reinsurer on the
new sales channel. [½]
There may be an increase in large losses as bad risks may be filtered out less well over the
internet. Hence we may require more Risk XL reinsurance. [½]
The business may grow sufficiently to let the company rely less on reinsurance. [½]
[Maximum 10]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X2 Solutions Page 9
Solution X2.8
This question tests the skills discussed in Chapter 4, Problem solving, and the material in
Chapter 10, Data.
(i) Why past experience may not be a good guide to the future
Inflation can invalidate claims amount data. [½]
For travel insurance, there might be many different types of inflation, eg:
price inflation (which will affect the cost of replacing lost items) vs medical inflation
(which will affect medical costs from accident / bodily injury claims) [½]
different rates of inflation in different countries. [½]
With many different types of inflation to consider, it may be difficult to analyse the underlying
claims experience. [½]
Similarly, there are many possible trends that could affect both claim frequencies and claim
amounts. [½]
For example:
crime rates in different countries could affect the frequency of theft claims [½]
popularity of different countries could affect the cost of holidaying there, which would
affect the size of cancellation claims. [½]
Currency is also a significant risk for travel insurance. Exchange rates are liable to fluctuate
significantly, which could invalidate past claim sizes, although an explicit adjustment could be
made for this. [1]
Since the insurance company is relatively new, and growing rapidly, its claims management and
payment procedures will not be established (and so may be quite volatile). This will make it
difficult to assess claims run-off patterns from past data. [½]
Furthermore, underwriting and/or claims management procedures may change in the future. [½]
Alongside the re-price there may also be changes in the cover provided, eg:
policy wordings [½]
excess levels. [½]
Other recent / future changes that might invalidate the use of past experience include changes in:
the distribution channel used [½]
the mix of business [½]
legislation. [½]
The level of competition may have changed leading to a change in the stage of the insurance
cycle, which would invalidate certain items of experience (such as profit margins). [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8: Assignment X2 Solutions
Finally, the two year period to which the data applies may have been unusual, eg it may have
been a severe recession. [½]
[Maximum 7]
(ii) Uncertainty arising from using this data
Even though the insurance company is growing rapidly, there is unlikely to be enough internal
data to accurately assess claim frequencies and severities. [1]
In particular, there will almost certainly be a lack of data on:
unusual risks [½]
new territories / travel destinations [½]
low-frequency claim types. [½]
The insurer may have no experience of certain types of claims. For example, it may not have
experienced a significant (catastrophic) event, such as a tsunami. [½]
There is also unlikely to be enough of a history of data to identify trends. [½]
The lack of data will prevent the insurer from holding any data back to use for validation
purposes, which could result in the model ‘over-fitting’ the data. [½]
Since the insurer has been focussing on growth, it may have been lax in its data handling – in
particular its data entry and subsequent data manipulation. [½]
Also, this is a new product and so there could be teething problems associated with the IT
systems used for recording data. [½]
As a result, the data may be:
incomplete [½]
incorrect. [½]
Since the insurer is taking data up to the current time, it will have IBNR claims to estimate, which
is a further area of uncertainty. It could leave a period between the end of the exposure period
and the analysis, but lack of data will almost certainly rule this option out. [1]
In addition, many claims may not be fully developed. This is fairly likely for travel insurance
because verifying and settling claims in other countries can be difficult. [½]
Assumptions on volume and mix will also be particularly difficult to predict since the insurer will
not have data from a stable period of time. [½]
Expenses are uncertain – particularly for a relatively new insurer that will have some relatively
large set-up costs. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X2 Solutions Page 11
Since the insurance company is growing, there will also be uncertainty over:
commission, since the bigger the insurer gets, the more power it will be able to exert over
distributors [½]
staffing levels (administrators, underwriters, claims assessors etc) [½]
per policy expense loadings. [½]
[Maximum 7]
Solution X2.9
This question draws on material from Chapter 9, Risk and uncertainty. For part (ii), exclusions to
cover are discussed in Chapter 3, Insurance products – types.
(i) Particular risks
There is likely to be a lack of claims data available with which to accurately price the product.
Even if the State could provide statistics on claims this is unlikely to be sufficiently detailed or
relevant for this purpose, particularly given this is a small country. [1]
Volumes of business will be uncertain. It will be difficult to predict how many people will own
pubs, and hence require this type of insurance. The level of competition will also be uncertain,
which will further increase the uncertainty of business volumes. [1]
It will be difficult to predict the mix of business – eg by type of pub or location – the insurer will
be undertaking. [½]
The insurer will have little experience in knowing what underwriting and rating factors to ask for
and use (and to what extent), which may leave it open to undesirable risks and anti-selection. [1]
As there have not been any similar products in the market it will be difficult to establish clear and
appropriate policy conditions (including exclusions). This may result in payment of claims that are
not intended (or may lead to low sales volumes). [1]
Claim sizes at any one time could be very variable – for example, some liability claims (eg as a
result of a serious injury) could be large. [½]
Also, claims may be very volatile over time – for example, there may be the occasional serious fire
leading to total damage to the property (and many liability claims). [½]
The volatility and variability of claims is made worse because the country is small, and so
experience will be limited. [½]
There will be uncertainty over the public’s attitude to claiming. For example, there may be an
increasing number of members of the public suing the pubs for accidents occurring on the
premises, leading to an increase in liability claims. [1]
Crime rates will be uncertain. This will, for example, affect claims for arson and theft. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8: Assignment X2 Solutions
The attitude of landlords to claiming is uncertain. For example, fraudulent claims may be an issue
(eg a new pub fails to make money, and so the landlord makes false or exaggerated insurance
claims to make up the loss). [1]
The impact of legislation may be uncertain. The government is likely to enforce controls on these
new pubs (eg restrictions on opening hours), which are likely to change as the situation
develops. [1]
Uncertainty over economic conditions is another source of risk. This may affect sales volumes
(and renewals), as people are less likely to want to run pubs (and afford insurance premiums) in
times of economic depression. [½]
Possible accumulations of risk may arise, eg if the pubs insured are all in a similar location (it is a
small country). [½]
Reinsurance may not be available or may not be offered at a suitable price (eg liability cover may
be scarce or expensive). [½]
[Maximum 9]
(ii) Restrictions and exclusions
The insurer might decide not to cover certain properties that lead to a risk that is unacceptable to
the insurer. [½]
For example:
buildings with flammable materials, eg pubs with thatched roofs [½]
buildings in high-risk locations, such as on river banks (flooding risks) [½]
buildings with insufficient security features. [½]
The following exclusions might also apply:
any deliberate loss, such as arson initiated by the landlord
situations where the policyholder has not taken reasonable steps to prevent the loss (eg a
break-in where security measures have not been activated)
liability which is the fault of a third party
loss arising as a result of war, terrorism and similar risks
loss arising from illegal or criminal activity
loss or theft where the police have not been informed
loss or theft of cash (and other items that would be difficult to verify)
costs below a specified excess level or above a specified policy limit. [½ each]
[Maximum 4]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X3 Solutions Page 1
Assignment X3 Solutions
Solution X3.1
This question is testing material from Chapter 12, Rating methodologies and bases.
The delay may be due to:
the length of time that can elapse before sufficient claims have been notified [1]
delays in processing and analysing the claims experience [1]
the time taken to assess and agree with management the new premium rates and
premium structure to be charged [1]
the time required to administer and implement the new rates [½]
the time delay between the risk period and the payment of claims [½]
the possible need to obtain approval from a regulatory body [½]
a strategic delay in order to wait for the right market conditions. [½]
[Maximum 4]
Solution X3.2
Part (i) is based on material from Chapter 3, Insurance products – types. Part (ii) tests the
concepts discussed in Chapter 12, Rating methodologies and bases.
(i) Excluding subsidence claims
Advantages
Future claim frequency will fall, so total claim costs will be lower.
The uncertainty as to future claim frequency and claim amount from subsidence claims
will also be eliminated.
Future claim handling expenses will be lower.
Policyholders may not want the cover and may prefer lower premiums, which might lead
to an increase in volumes and overall profitability.
Disadvantages
Policyholders will want the cover, so loss of new business and lower coverage of fixed
costs.
Policyholders expect cover, so possible ill-will and cost of arguing with policyholders later.
May be better alternatives to the problem like higher premiums, excesses or use of
reinsurance.
Administration problems if different policy conditions for different groups of
policyholders.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8: Assignment X3 Solutions
The regulator may not approve.
Costs and time taken to do the re-pricing.
Markers, award bonus marks for any other valid points [½ per point, maximum 4]
(ii) Premium calculation
The insurer is likely to use a frequency / severity approach ... [½]
... so it will need to revise its claim frequencies and claim amounts, to give distributions excluding
subsidence cover. [½]
The claim frequency would be estimated by looking at past claims, by peril, excluding subsidence
claims from the analysis. [½]
The claim frequency to include in the rates would be a projection of trends, to give expected
future claim frequency. Therefore, the projection of trends should exclude subsidence claims. [½]
The claim amount would be adjusted by looking at past experience of claim amounts, excluding
subsidence claims, to give an average cost per ‘non-subsidence’ claim. [½]
When inflating the claim amount the office would need to ignore subsidence claim inflation from
its inflation assumption. [½]
The revised risk premium is calculated by adjusting the frequency and amount to allow for any
policy excess. [½]
Other loadings would also be adjusted, such as expense loadings, profit and contingency
margins. [1]
[Maximum 3]
Solution X3.3
This type of question combines many topics from across the course.
(i) Main reasons why the suggestion is probably not appropriate
About half of the incurred claims may have arisen from premiums written prior to 01/10/14. [½]
So, a straight percentage increase based on a loss over this financial year may not be appropriate.
[½]
The loss in 2014/15 might not have been representative of the expected future experience. [½]
2014/15 might have produced exceptionally bad claims experience from an unusual event
(eg exceptionally icy or stormy winter). [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X3 Solutions Page 3
No allowance has been made for important trends:
inflation of claims costs and expenses [½]
trends in experience (eg increase in car thefts). [½]
Investment income and gains affect profit but have not been considered. [½]
No allowance appears to have been made for what the rest of the market is doing. [½]
Our profit / loss will depend on the number of policies sold, which is affected by our pricing policy
compared with that of competitors. [½]
The loss might be due to an inappropriate rating structure. A flat 5% increase would not address
this. [½]
The problem may be expense overrun. This could be addressed by being more efficient (ie reduce
costs where possible). [½]
Policy conditions may have changed. [½]
The regulator may restrict the percentage increases allowed, especially for compulsory cover. [½]
The ‘loss’ might not be as drastic as at first appears. It depends on the basis used to determine
the loss with regard, for example, to:
reserving basis
allocation of expenses between classes. [1]
In particular, consider whether the loss is still there on a realistic reserving basis, allowing for
accurate allocation of expenses and investment income. [1]
Even if the above points were ignored, the calculation of 5% (presumably 360) is inappropriate
because even if the rates had been 5% higher:
we would have sold fewer policies (so fixed costs may be less well covered) [½]
some of the increased premium would be paid out as commission [½]
we would want to make some profit. [½]
[Maximum 9]
(ii) List of information required
Company data for full claims and exposure experience analysis over a reasonable period. This
should be suitably matured (say 9 months) and if the company is small then you would need to go
back for a number of years. [1]
You need details of policies (ie risk factor data) and corresponding claims data (ie amounts and
dates paid). Claims data should include best estimates of outstanding claims. [1]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8: Assignment X3 Solutions
Also we need:
details of how existing rates were derived
details of large claims and periods of unusually severe conditions
period new rates are to be in force
inflation data and projection of future inflation
details of changes in the risks (eg mix, policy conditions, underwriting or claims
settlement)
details of environmental factors that might affect claims (eg economic, legal or technical
changes)
variable per-policy handling expenses
required per-policy contribution to fixed costs
commission levels
estimates of likely sales volumes (eg based on modelled past experience)
expected investment rates
profit loading and return on capital
contingency loading
market considerations (eg details of competitors’ premium rates, the stage of the
insurance cycle, the acceptability of the increase to the market and the level of brand
loyalty)
details of reinsurance arrangements.
[½ each, maximum 6]
[Total 8]
Solution X3.4
This question draws on knowledge gained across many of the chapters in Subject SP8, but
particularly Chapter 4, Problem solving.
Main issues to the company
If the company goes ahead with the proposal, this will result in expanding to a new class of
business and hopefully giving a new profitable stream of income. [½]
Need to decide who will be responsible for the administrative duties including the sales and
claims administration. If the FU carries out a lot of the duties for the company, we need to decide
how closely it should be monitored. The commission paid to the Union will have to reflect the
work that they do. [1]
If the FU acts as a broker, this may not reduce costs as there will be duplication of administration
and a need to pay commission. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X3 Solutions Page 5
Need to ensure adequate systems are in place to cope with the new business. Systems currently
used for other motor business can hopefully be used with little modification needed. [½]
Accounts and reserving processes must be set up or changed to cope with the new class. [½]
The expansion should fit in with the company’s strategic plan. It needs to complement the
existing portfolio and not lead to new excessive accumulations of risk. [½]
Consider whether the company has enough experience or data to be confident of quoting an
appropriate premium rate and drafting appropriate policy wordings. [½]
If not, there is a risk of under-pricing / over-pricing / an inappropriate rating structure etc. [½]
The pricing risk should not be too great and rates can be revised once reliable data has been
collected. [½]
Consider whether adequate reinsurance is in place. If not, see if it is available at an acceptable
price. [½]
Staff should be adequately trained to be able to cope with the new business, or new staff will
have to be hired who do have the required expertise. [½]
The company may effectively have a monopoly over the tractor insurance market which means it
could be very profitable. [½]
Consider whether the business can be retained over the long term. [½]
Consider whether the connection with the FU can be used to cross-sell other business from
farmers, like household insurance. [½]
The company may not have enough capital to write the new class. [½]
Regulatory approval may need to be given in order for the company to write the new class. [½]
Similarly, the FU may need to be licensed as a broker. [½]
Take-up rates may be low, so fixed costs will have to be spread over relatively few policies. [½]
The level of competition and competitors’ premium rates should also be considered. [½]
[Maximum 6]
Solution X3.5
This question tests material from Chapter 13, Further considerations when rating.
(i) Rationale behind the proposal
The age of policyholder is likely to be an indicator of future claims experience. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8: Assignment X3 Solutions
For example:
older people may be more likely to stay at home during the day, and this reduces the
opportunity for theft claims [½]
there may be lower moral hazard with older policyholders, eg they may be more careful
not to leave windows open. [½]
The use of this additional rating factor should remove some residual heterogeneity. [½]
The age of the policyholder is objective, easily measurable and verifiable. [½]
The age of the policyholder may also be an indicator of future persistency. For example, younger
policyholders may be more likely to shop around and so not renew policies (leading to higher per-
policy expenses). [1]
Charging a premium according to this risk factor will encourage more of the lower risks (ie older
policyholders) to take out policies with the insurer … [½]
… and similarly, fewer of the higher risks (ie younger policyholders) will take out the policy. [½]
This should lead to better experience overall, and hence cheaper premiums generally, or higher
profitability for the insurer. [½]
This will be particularly important if other insurers are also rating by age of policyholder, in which
case this insurer will be subject to anti-selection if it does not rate by age. [1]
If premiums get cheaper as a policyholder gets older, this should result in lower premiums on
renewal, which will improve persistency levels. [½]
[Maximum 5]
(ii) Difficulties
The insurer will need to calculate the extent to which the age of the policyholder will affect the
premium charged. [½]
If data on the age of the policyholder has already been collected then the likely impact could be
calculated from the insurer’s own data, eg by calculating premium rates directly for each age or
age-band (or by statistical methods). [½]
But if the age of the policyholder has not historically been collected, this will instead need to be
estimated using external data, which may not be available … [½]
… or from a purely subjective view, which may not be accurate. [½]
In any case, the data available may not be sufficiently reliable or credible to be able to calculate
an accurate premium. [½]
If the adjustment to the premium rates to allow for age is incorrect, this may result in anti-
selection. [½]
Application procedures and IT systems may need to be amended in order to collect and use the
required information (ie ask for the date of birth of the policyholder) from now on. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X3 Solutions Page 7
Procedures may need to be put in place to verify that the age of the policyholder is correct
(eg random checks on a sample of claims or insist on sight of birth certificate on application). [½]
In households with more than one occupant, the age of the policyholder will only make a crude
allowance for the ages of all the people in the household. [½]
Customers may object to being asked their age, and this may result in reduced sales. [½]
As the rating structure is currently fairly simple, the addition of one more rating factor may be
seen to over-complicate the product. [½]
The insurer may be accused of discriminating against people of a certain age (by charging them a
higher premium for cover). [½]
The rating factor may not be liked by sellers (eg if it is seen to make the product more difficult to
sell), and some sellers may be less willing to sell this insurer’s products. [½]
The insurer will need to consider:
the need to smooth rates from one age (or age band) to the next [½]
the need for a simple rating structure, eg using 10-year age bands. [½]
Rating manuals (or quotation software) will need to be redesigned, and sellers may need to be
trained to explain the effect of policyholders’ age on the premiums charged. [½]
The insurer may need regulatory approval to allow for the additional rating factor – eg it may
need to provide statistical evidence that age of policyholder does have an impact on claims
experience. [½]
The proposed change could make a significant difference to the premium paid by existing
policyholders on renewal, which may adversely affect renewal rates. For example, a younger
policyholder might see a significant premium increase when the new rating factor is
introduced. [½]
The age of the policyholder might not actually make a significant difference to the predictability of
claims – in which case it may not be worth adding it in as a rating factor. [½]
Alternative rating factors, which may reflect the risk better and/or be more acceptable, should be
investigated. [½]
Reinsurance arrangements may need to be reviewed following the proposal. [½]
[Maximum 8]
Solution X3.6
This question tests the material in Chapter 12, Rating methodologies and bases.
Claim cost
From (n), and assuming policies commence on average on 01/07/16 [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8: Assignment X3 Solutions
... average date of claim settlement is 01/04/17. [½]
From (a), (b) and (c), the amount of claim payment is:
1,000 1.0121 – 300 = £932.39. [1]
Discounted to 01/07/16 at given rate of interest (1% per month), claim cost per claim is:
932.39 1.019 = £852.52. [1]
Expenses per policy
Information on the per-policy expense is not very clear. Assume: £1 at 01/01/16, inflating at 1%
per month. For contracts starting 01/07/16, the starting amount is increased by 6 months of
inflation. So the present value of these expenses at inception is:
12 1.016 = 12.74 [1]
The expenses are assumed to be paid after 9 months (3 months later than the expected average
date), so there is another 3 months to discount at 1%, giving £12.37 [1]
Probabilities of claim
Probability of no claims = P (N 0) = 0.250 e– 0.25 = 0.77880 [1]
Probability of one claim = P (N 1) = 0.251 e– 0.25 = 0.19470 [1]
Probability of two or more = P (N 2) = 1 – 0.77880 – 0.19470 = 0.02650 [1]
Calculation of premium
Premium Pr N 1 value at 1/7/16 of claim cost 1/2 premium
Pr(N 2) 2 value at 1/7/16 of claim cost 1/2 premium
+ per policy expense as at 1/7/16
+ acquisition costs
+ profit loading [2]
To be precise, the reinstatement premium should be discounted for nine months at 1% per
month. We have ignored this added complexity.
P 0.1947 (852.52 P / 2) 0.0265 (2 852.52 P / 2) 12.37 0.25P 0.15P
P 223.54 0.7106
P 314.58 [1]
Hence the required premium is £315. [1]
[Total 12]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X3 Solutions Page 9
Marks should be particularly harsh on answers that are not close to £300 and deduct marks for:
– sloppy explanations
– not stating assumptions explicitly
– calculation errors
– erroneous logic.
Solution X3.7
This question tests material in Chapter 11, Aggregate claim distribution models.
(i) Finding a and b
Since N has a negative binomial distribution with parameters k 3 and q 0.1 :
n 2 3 n
P(N n) (0.9) (0.1)
n
and:
P(N n) n 2 n 1 (n 2)(n 1) 0.2
0.1 n 1 0.1 0.1 .
P(N n 1) n (n 1)n n
Hence the relationship holds with a 0.1 and b 0.2 . [2]
(ii) Calculating probabilities
(a) The recursive method
The recursive formula states that:
s
bx
P(S s) a P X x P S s x , s 1
x 1 s
and:
P ( S 0) P (N 0) [1]
So, working in units of £500, we have:
P(S 0) P(N 0) 0.93 0.729 [1]
2 1
P(S 1) 0.1 1 P( X 1)P(S 0) 0.1 3 0.5 0.729 [1]
1
0.10935
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8: Assignment X3 Solutions
2 1 22
P(S 2) 0.1 1 P(X 1)P(S 1) 0.1 1 P( X 2)P(S 0)
2
[1]
2
0.06561
2 1 22
P(S 3) 0.1 1 P(X 1)P(S 2) 0.1 1 P( X 2)P(S 1)
3
[1]
3
0.01185
2 1 22
P(S 4) 0.1 1 P( X 1)P(S 3) 0.1 1 P( X 2)P(S 2)
4 4
24
0.1 1 P( X 4)P(S 0) 0.05884. [1]
4
Hence the probability that the aggregate claim amount is less than or equal to £2,000 is:
P ( S 4) 0.729 0.10935 0.06561 0.01185 0.05884 0.97465 [1]
(b) Normal approximation
The mean and variance of S must first be calculated from the formulae:
E ( S ) E (N )E ( X )
and:
Var (S) E (N)Var( X ) E( X ) Var(N)
2
[1]
From the formulae in the Tables:
kq 3 0.1 1
E (N) [1]
p 0.9 3
and:
kq 10
Var (N) 2 [1]
p 27
Now, working in units of £1,000, we have:
E ( X ) (0.5 0.5) (1 0.25) (2 0.25) 1m
E ( X 2 ) (0.52 0.5) (12 0.25) (22 0.25) 1.375 [1]
and:
Var(X) 1.375 12 0.375 [1]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X3 Solutions Page 11
It follows that:
1
E (S) [1]
3
and:
1 10
Var (S) 0.375 12 0.495370 [1]
3 27
We can now estimate the required probability as follows:
2 13
P(S 2) P N(0,1) (2.37) 0.99111 [1]
0.495370
(c) Translated gamma approximation
We shall assume that S k ~ Gamma ( , ) for some constants , and k.
The values of , and k have to be estimated using the method of moments. We already know
the values of the first and second central moments of S. The value of the third may be found from
the equation:
3kq2 2kq3 3 kq
Skew(S) m m
1 2 m1 m3
p2 p3 p
where mi denotes the i th non-central moment of X, i 1,2,3.
The third non-central moment of X is:
E(X 3) (0.53 0.5) (13 0.25) (23 0.25) 2.3125 [1]
So:
0.1 2 0.1 3 1
Skew(S) 9 1.375 6 2.3125 0.931842. [1]
0.9 0.9 3
The values of , and k can now be found from the equations:
1
E (S) k Var(S) 2 0.495370 [1]
3
2
Skew(S) 3 0.931842.
Solving these equations gives 0.55997 , 1.06321 and k 0.19335 .
[½ for each correct parameter value]
Hence we should approximate the distribution of S 0.19335 by Gamma(0.55997, 1.06321) . [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8: Assignment X3 Solutions
In order to estimate P ( S 2) using the Tables, we have to convert the Gamma distribution to a
2 distribution. Recall that, if Y Gamma ( , ) , then 2Y 22 .
Hence 2 1.06321(S 0.19335) 1.12 approximately, so we can estimate the probability using
2
a 1 distribution:
2
P(S 2) P(S 0.19335 2.19335)
P 2.12642(S 0.19335) 4.6640
P 12 4.6640 [1]
From the Tables, we see that:
P 12 3.841 0.95 and P 12 5.024 0.975 [1]
Interpolating between these values gives:
P 12 4.6640 0.95
4.6640 3.841
5.024 3.841
0.025 0.9674 [1]
Note: To obtain an estimate for the probability using 1.12 df, we could interpolate between the
probabilities calculated using 1 and 2 df. Using a similar method to the above gives
P(22 4.6640) 0.9261 . Interpolating between degrees of freedom then gives
2
P(1.12 4.6640) 0.9624 . However, estimating using 1 df is acceptable.
[Maximum 17]
(iii) Comments
The three methods used in (ii) gave the following results:
Method P S 2
Recursive formula (exact method) 0.9747
Normal approximation 0.9911
Translated gamma approximation 0.9674
The exact distribution of S is compound negative binomial, which is positively skewed.
The normal approximation has overestimated P S 2 . This can be explained by the fact that the
normal distribution is symmetric and has a thinner right-hand tail than a positively skewed
distribution. [1]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X3 Solutions Page 13
The translated gamma distribution is positively skewed and this approximation has slightly
underestimated P S 2 . We can conclude that the approximate distribution must have a
thicker right-hand tail than the exact distribution. However, the translated gamma approximation
is the better of the two. [1]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold
for the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is
owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a
subsidiary of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or
photocopy any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it
is not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through
the profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished
using the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
SP8: Assignment X4 Solutions Page 1
Assignment X4 Solutions
Solution X4.1
This question is testing the material in Chapter 16, Generalised linear modelling.
(i) Statistical test
Define Model 1 to be the initial model and Model 2 to be the reduced model.
2
These two models are nested, so we can use a test to compare the changes in scaled deviance
between the models. [1]
The scaled deviance for Model 1 = 392.45 (given).
The scaled deviance for Model 2 = 401.97 (given).
Degrees of freedom for Model 1 = 50,000 – 80 = 49,920. [½]
Degrees of freedom for Model 2 = 50,000 – 76 = 49,924 (since the reduced model has only 1 level
for this factor instead of 5 so there are 4 fewer parameters fitted). [1]
We know that, under the null hypothesis, there is no difference between Model 1 and Model 2:
D2* D1* df
2
2 df1
[1]
The difference between the scaled deviances is 401.97 – 392.45 = 9.52. We should compare this
2
with the 4 distribution. [½]
2
The upper 5% point of the 4 distribution is 9.488 (from page 169 of the Tables). [1]
Our test statistic of 9.52 exceeds this value. So, at the 5% significance level, we would reject the
reduced Model 2 in favour of the initial Model 1. [1]
Therefore, based on our statistical test, and assuming a 5% significance level, we would keep this
factor in the model. [1]
[Maximum 6]
(ii) Further considerations
This factor is only just significant, based on the 5% statistical test, so we might want to conduct a
more detailed analysis. [½]
We do not know what this factor is, although we know it has five levels. We would need to
investigate whether these five levels are groupings of more detailed levels. If so then we could try
including the original ungrouped factor in the model instead, to test for significance ... [1]
… although this might be difficult if the factor has been grouped due to there being insufficient
data. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8: Assignment X4 Solutions
We would need to look at the parameter values associated with each of the five levels to see if
they are as we would expect, relative to each other. [½]
We could draw a graph of the values, to enable us to see this more clearly. [½]
We should calculate the standard error, since:
a poorly defined parameter will have a large standard error [½]
standard errors can help assess the reasonableness of the relativities. [½]
For example, it could be that the relativity for the ‘Unknown’ level is so different to the relativities
for the other levels that it is this alone that is making the factor appear statistically significant. [1]
If this is the case then we may conclude that the factor is not really adding much in terms of
predictive power for the future. [½]
Alternatively, we could group ‘Unknown’ with one of the other levels and re-fit the model to see
whether it is then statistically significant. [½]
We would want to fit an interaction between this factor and some measure of time, to enable us
to see whether the pattern observed for the relativities is consistent over time. [1]
Similarly we could fit an interaction between this factor and other factors, eg distribution channel,
again to check for consistency across relativities. [½]
If the pattern is not consistent then we may reject this factor on the basis that it does not show a
stable pattern and is therefore not useful for predicting the future. [1]
A random factor could be created in the data, as another means to check consistency. [½]
We should consider whether the factor is likely to be acceptable to policyholders … [½]
… and brokers, eg their systems may be unable to handle an extra rating factor. [½]
We could investigate whether this factor has been used in previous rating exercises for this book
of business. If so, we might be more inclined to keep it in the model this time. [1]
We could also find out whether this factor is used by other insurers in the personal lines motor
market. If we drop the factor from our model while other insurers continue to use it then we
could suffer from anti-selection. [1]
If we haven’t used this factor before then we need to consider the practicalities of how easily it
could be incorporated into our rating algorithms. If it is likely to take a lot of IT time to build the
relevant tables then this would be an argument for not using the factor. [1]
[Maximum 10]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X4 Solutions Page 3
Solution X4.2
This question is testing material from Chapter 16, Generalised linear modelling.
(i) Normal distribution is a member of the exponential family
If Y N , 2 , then the pdf of Y is:
1 1 y 2
fY (y) exp
2 2
To show that the normal distribution belongs to the exponential family, we have to show that its
pdf can be written in the form given on Page 27 of the Tables, which is:
y b
fY (y) exp c y , . [½]
a
The term must be a function of the mean and the c y , term does not contain .
For the normal distribution, we have:
1 y
2
fY (y) exp ln
2
2
½ y2 y ½ 2
exp ln
2 2
y ½ 2 ½ y2
exp ln 2 . [1½]
2
2
This is in the required form if we define:
[½]
½ y2
c y , ln
2
2
[½]
a 2 [½]
[½]
1
b 2 . [½]
2
[Maximum 4]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8: Assignment X4 Solutions
(ii) Variance function
The variance function is given by:
V b . [½]
Here we have:
b and b 1 .
So:
V 1 . [½]
[Total 1]
(iii) Deviance
Since V 1 , we have:
yi yi t
di yi , ˆi 2 dt
ˆi V (t )
yi
2
ˆi
yi t dt
yi
2 yi t ½ t 2
ˆi
2 yi2 ½ yi2 yi ˆi ½ ˆi2
yi2 2yi ˆi ˆi2
yi ˆi
2
[2]
The deviance is then:
n n
D di yi , ˆi yi ˆi
2
[1]
i 1 i 1
[Total 3]
Solution X4.3
This question is testing material from Chapter 16, Generalised linear modelling.
(i) Predicted claim frequencies
The predicted claim frequencies are shown in the last column of the table below.
They are calculated by multiplying together the relativities for the relevant level of each factor
with the intercept term.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X4 Solutions Page 5
So, for example, the predicted frequency for the first row is 0.08 0.5 0.5 2 0.04 .
No. of Age of Predicted
Area
bedrooms policyholder frequency
Country 1-3 Young 0.04
Town 1-3 Young 0.08
City 1-3 Young 0.12
Country 4+ Young 0.08
Town 4+ Young 0.16
City 4+ Young 0.24
Country 1-3 Old 0.02
Town 1-3 Old 0.04
City 1-3 Old 0.06
Country 4+ Old 0.04
Town 4+ Old 0.08
City 4+ Old 0.12
[3]
(ii) One-way tables
Policy years
First we need to calculate the total number of policy years (exposure) for each level of each rating
factor. This is obtained by adding the exposure for each rating cell that relates to each level.
For example, take Area = Country. The total number of policy years is calculated as
10,200 50 6,700 18,250 35,200 . [2 for correct numbers]
Number of claims
Then we need to calculate the total number of claims for each level of each rating factor. We
know the predicted claim frequency and the exposure for each cell so we can calculate the
number of claims in each cell and then add these across each level of each rating factor.
For example, for Area = Country, the total number of claims is calculated as
10,200 0.04 50 0.08 6,700 0.02 18,250 0.04 1,276 .
[2 for correct numbers]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8: Assignment X4 Solutions
Frequency
Then, for each level of each factor, we can calculate the one-way claim frequency by dividing the
number of claims by the number of policy years. [1 for correct numbers]
The table below summarises the results.
No. of Age of Total no. of One-way
Area Policy years
bedrooms policyholder claims frequency
Country 35,200 1,276 3.6%
Town 49,200 3,472 7.1%
City 25,600 2,598 10.1%
1-3 66,400 4,562 6.9%
4+ 43,600 2,784 6.4%
Young 40,000 3,516 8.8%
Old 70,000 3,830 5.5%
[Total 5]
(iii) One-way results vs GLM results
The following table shows the one-way claim frequencies together with the GLM frequencies for
each level of each factor:
No. of Age of One-way GLM
Area
bedrooms policyholder frequency frequency
Country 3.6% 4.0%
Town 7.1% 8.0%
City 10.1% 12.0%
1-3 6.9% 4.0%
4+ 6.4% 8.0%
Young 8.8% 16.0%
Old 5.5% 8.0%
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X4 Solutions Page 7
The GLM frequencies for each level of each factor are calculated as the relativity for that level
multiplied by the intercept term (the base-level frequency). [1]
The one-way table significantly understates the claim frequency for young policyholders
compared to the GLM. [½]
The exposure distribution shows that young policyholders tend to live in smaller houses (1-3
bedrooms), which are less risky, and this is masking their relatively poor claims experience. [1]
Conversely, the one-way frequency for houses with 1-3 bedrooms is overstated because it is more
likely that the riskier younger policyholders will live there. [1]
The vast majority of the old policyholders live in the country or in a town, with only a few (11.5%)
of them living in the higher-risk cities. The one-way frequency for old people therefore appears
lower than it really is because it is being pulled down by the fact that they live primarily in low-risk
areas. [1]
The one-way frequency for larger houses (4+ bedrooms) is also lower than the GLM value
because, although large houses are twice as risky as small houses, it is almost exclusively the
lower-risk old people who live in them. [1]
The one-way table frequencies for area are generally closer to the GLM values than for the other
two factors. [½]
This is because the distribution of age by area is relatively similar to the distribution of age overall
… [½]
… and the distribution of house size by area is relatively similar to the distribution of house size
overall. [½]
The main exception when considering the area factor is the city. Over two-thirds (69%) of people
living in the city are young (compared with only 36% of people in the data that are young). This
will make the city appear even riskier when looking at one-way tables. [1]
Also, although 4+ bedroom houses make up nearly 40% of the total houses in the data, hardly any
(0.2%) of these are located in the city. This will make the city appear less risky when looking at
one-way tables. [1]
These two sets of correlations for the city work in different directions, with house size having the
strongest effect. This is why the one-way frequency table for area understates the ‘true’
frequency. [1]
[Maximum 9]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8: Assignment X4 Solutions
Solution X4.4
This question covers the material in Chapter 15, Rating using original loss curves.
Lack of volume and of credibility of data. [½]
Information about large losses may be lost, due to the impact of policy limits. [½]
Adjusting for trends: [½]
– working out what the adjustment should be (depends on court inflation,
legislation, economy, etc) [½]
– adjusting the ILFs appropriately (as the impact of trend may vary by size of
loss). [½]
Many claims will still be open: [½]
– these may take a long time to settle [½]
– the final claim amount may be very different from the current case estimate. [½]
[Maximum 3]
Solution X4.5
This question is testing material from Chapter 16, Generalised linear modelling.
1. Group and summarise the data prior to loading into the GLM software [½]
This method can be used to remove redundant codes from the data … [½]
… especially when there is little exposure associated with these … [½]
… for example, data relating to unknown levels of a factor. [½]
However, this method requires some knowledge or experience of the pattern that would be
expected from the GLM. [½]
2. Group data within the modelling package [½]
Two or more levels of a factor can be grouped together within the model, to create a custom
factor. [½]
The grouped levels will then be assigned a single parameter value when the model is run. [½]
3. Fit a curve [½]
Instead of grouping levels of a factor, we can fit a polynomial curve to the factor. [½]
This could be a quadratic, a cubic or a higher order curve. [½]
The parameters associated with this factor in the model are then the parameters from the
polynomial, excluding the constant term. [1]
A higher order of polynomial will provide a better fit to the data, but may be less useful as a
predictor of future experience. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X4 Solutions Page 9
A balance should be struck between parsimony and predictive accuracy. [½]
A fitted curve is sometimes referred to as a variate. [½]
4. Fit a piecewise curve [½]
Here, we would split the levels of a factor into different sections and fit either a custom factor or a
curve to each section. [1]
Therefore, this is a combination of methods 2 and 3 above. [½]
At the boundary of each section, the join can be disjoint or constrained to being piecewise
continuous, depending on which is more appropriate for the model. [1]
[Maximum 10]
Solution X4.6
This question is testing material from Chapter 17, Use of multivariate models in pricing.
(i) Collision risk factors
The collision risk factors that relate to the driver are:
level of skill
number of miles typically driven
attitude to risk. [½ each]
The collision risk factors that relate to the environment in which the car is typically driven are:
density of traffic (may be affected by when as well as where the car is driven)
presence of hazards (eg potholes or ice)
the type of roads where the car is used (motorway, country lane etc)
[½ each]
The collision risk factors that relate to the vehicle are:
the performance and speed capability of the car
the repair costs if the vehicle is damaged
safety features to protect passengers (eg airbags)
safety features to improve car control (eg ABS, traction control)
the size and weight of the car. [½ each]
[Maximum 5]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8: Assignment X4 Solutions
(ii) Why the factors are not used directly in rating
Although the factors listed in part (i) help to define the genuine risk for an individual policyholder,
many are not used as rating factors because:
they may not be readily measurable [½]
they may be subjective [½]
they may change over time [½]
they may be difficult to verify [½]
they may be open to manipulation [½]
they cannot be defined by the customer at the point of sale. [½]
they may be unacceptable to brokers [½]
they may be unacceptable to policyholders [½]
they may be out of line with the market. [½]
[Maximum 4]
(iii) Effectiveness of a proxy rating factor
A proxy rating factor will be more effective if it is a good direct measure of a genuine risk
factor. [1]
For example, length of licence (number of years since passed test) might give a good direct
indication of driving skill (although it doesn’t take into account the number of miles driven during
that time), while age of driver may only give a partial indication of the driver’s attitude to risk. [1]
A rating factor will be more effective if it is a factual quantity that is known to the proposer, as
opposed to something that is open to debate. [1]
For example, postcode is a well-defined fact that all policyholders are likely to know, whereas
they might not remember exactly when they passed their driving test. [1]
If the rating factor has an obvious ‘direction’ then the proposer might be tempted to under or
overstate this in order to get a cheaper premium. This will make the rating factor less
effective. [1]
For example, most prospective policyholders will know that a lower estimated annual mileage will
lead to a lower quoted premium, and so they may deliberately underestimate this. [1]
If there is a lot of overlap between the information provided by different proxy rating factors then
the effect of each one will be less significant. [1]
For example, for young drivers, there is a lot of overlap between their age, their NCD level and
their driving experience. A 17 year old will only be able to have less than a year’s experience and
no earned NCD so there will be a lot of correlation between these factors. [1]
A rating factor will be less effective if there is no way of checking whether the policyholder is
telling the truth about the factor in question. [1]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X4 Solutions Page 11
For example, ‘miles driven on motorways’ may be difficult to check. [1]
Markers: give equivalent credit for all alternative, relevant and valid examples.
[Maximum 9]
Solution X4.7
Part (i) of this question tests your ability to apply your knowledge of Chapter 2, Insurance
products – background. The remainder of this question tests material from Chapter 15, Rating
using original loss curves.
(i) Rating factors
As the specific holiday details are not known for annual policies, there are not many rating factors
used, but they would normally include: [½]
number of people covered, together with their age and gender (if allowed) [1]
countries covered (normally grouped into UK only / US / worldwide) [1]
reason for travel (pleasure or business) [½]
type of holiday coverage, eg winter-sports cover or not [½]
health (although existing medical conditions are usually excluded) [½]
level of excess (if optional) [½]
level of cover (if optional) [½]
maximum holiday length (if optional). [½]
[Maximum 5]
(ii) ILF calculation
We need to calculate the limited expected value (LEV) at the base of £500, and at each of the
proposed limits (ignoring probability of a claim see part (iv)).
At the base of £500, 3,000 holidays were sold with a total value of £1m. All of these would get
refunded in full in the event of a claim. In addition, each of the 21,500 other holidays would
expect to receive £500 as their claims would be capped at that level.
This gives:
LEV£500 E X 500 1m 500 21,500 24,500 480 [1]
Similarly for the other levels proposed:
LEV£1,000 1m 5m 1,000 15,000 24,500 857 [1]
LEV£2,000 22m 2,000 4,500 24,500 1,265 [1]
LEV£3,000 28m 3,000 2,000 24,500 1,388 [1]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8: Assignment X4 Solutions
LEV£4,000 31.5m 4,000 1,000 24,500 1,449 [1]
Hence the ILFs are:
ILF£1,000 857 480 1.79 [½]
ILF£2,000 1,265 480 2.64 [½]
ILF£3,000 1,388 480 2.89 [½]
ILF£4,000 1,449 480 3.02 [½]
[Total 7]
(iii) Assumptions
There is no excess on claims. [½]
Frequency is independent of the limit. [½]
The distribution of claim size is independent of the number of claims and of the limit. [1]
Sales from the affiliated travel agents are typical of those insured by us in terms of, eg: [½]
– cost [½]
– mix of business (eg type of holiday, destination) [½]
– type of policyholder (eg young/old). [½]
We have ignored the possibility of using different ILFs for different rating cells, eg
business or leisure travel. [½]
The three months were typical of sales over the year … [½]
… which is unlikely to be the case due to seasonality. [½]
We have ignored inflation since the data was produced. [½]
We have ignored any other trends in holiday costs. [½]
We have ignored the associated claims handling expenses at each size of loss, which
implicitly assumes they are proportionately the same. [1]
There is no allowance for the possible extra variability of claims at higher limits, which
may, for example, result in higher expected costs. [1]
The effect of a higher limit would not affect claim frequency or severity for other perils
covered by the policy. [½]
[Maximum 7]
(iv) Other factors to consider
We should check the evidence to ensure that the limit is the true reason for the falling sales
volumes. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X4 Solutions Page 13
The limit may be out of line with competition, so we should check the levels in the
marketplace. [½]
We should quantify the demand for a rise in limits at various levels. This could be by undertaking
some market research or by talking to travel agents. [1]
This would primarily be to get an idea of likely holiday costs in the future (since this is the key
driver of the cancellation claim amount). [½]
We should assess the likely effect on renewals of existing business … [½]
… as some policyholders will not need/want an increase in the limit and might resent the extra
premium payable at renewal. [½]
We may therefore wish to leave existing business at the old limit, or give the option of moving to
the new limit and premium level. [½]
The expense of changing the limits needs to be allowed for perhaps by amortising the expense
over a number of years’ business. [½]
This expense arises due to the cost of:
this investigation
making appropriate IT changes
changes to marketing literature
changes to policy wording. [½ each, maximum 1]
We should anticipate any need to increase the limit again in the future due to inflation or further
changes in competitors’ limits, etc. This might mean that we err for a slightly higher limit at this
stage to avoid further changes in the near future. [1]
We should ask our reinsurers for their opinions. We are a small company and will therefore
probably have extensive reinsurance. [½]
As we are small, we should also consider the possible effects on volumes solvency may be tight
and rapid increases might imperil this. [½]
We should review our profit criteria and ensure that the new premium level is appropriate. [½]
We will need to undertake a full profit testing exercise to assess the balance of volumes,
premiums and claims. [½]
We should investigate the effect that the change in limit would have on the total premium
charged for the contract. For example, given the other perils covered, the change may not have
that great an effect. [1]
We should compare the new premiums with those charged by other companies. [½]
We should check any legal or social constraints on the limits we use. For example, there may be
pressure from travel agents, or from press articles, on suitable limits. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8: Assignment X4 Solutions
We might want to consider implementing the change over time, so that any premium rate hikes
are not too dramatic. [½]
[Maximum 9]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X5 Solutions Page 1
Assignment X5 Solutions
Solution X5.1
This question is testing the material in Chapter 18, Credibility theory.
From the information given in the question, we have:
Year Volume Total losses Claims ratio
1 50 5,000 100
2 100 2,500 25
Total 150 7,500 50
[1]
and
i E Xi i i [½]
2 i Vi var Xi i Vi
300
300 [½]
Vi
E i E i 100 [½]
E 2 i E 300 300 [½]
var i var i 525 [½]
Vi 150
So: Z 0.996205 [1]
Vi 150 300
525
Now we take the observation statistic for year three as the long-run observed claims ratio 50 ,
and the ancillary statistic is .
So the Bühlmann Straub credibility premium per unit of volume is:
C BE Z X3 (1 Z )
Z 50 (1 Z ) 100
50.189 [1]
So the risk premium for the total losses in year three is 50.189 25 1,254.744 . [½]
[Total 6]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8: Assignment X5 Solutions
Solution X5.2
This question is testing the material in Chapter 18, Credibility theory.
We are given that P 0.95 , so:
1P
y 0.975 [½]
2
giving y 1.960 . [½]
The mean and variance of F are not equal, so we know that the claim frequency does not follow a
Poisson distribution. Therefore we need to use the general formula to establish the number of
claims required for full credibility:
y 2 2 1.9602 0.10
nN 2 N 16,006.67 [1]
k N 0.022 0.06
16,006.67
So the number of risks required for full credibility is 266,778 . [1]
0.06
[Total 3]
Solution X5.3
This question is testing the material in Chapter 18, Credibility theory.
The desirable qualities for a complement of credibility are:
accuracy, ie low variance around next year’s mean claim cost [½]
unbiasedness as a predictor of next year’s mean claim cost (ie the differences between
the predictor and the subsequent loss costs should average out near zero) [½]
independence from the base statistic [½]
availability of data [½]
ease of calculation [½]
explainable relationship to the claim costs of the class or individual being rated [½]
ease of explanation to managers and customers [½]
low probability of error occurring in the calculation of the complement [½]
time needed to calculate the complement is not excessively great. [½]
[Maximum 4]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X5 Solutions Page 3
Solution X5.4
This question is testing the material in Chapter 18, Credibility theory.
(i) Disadvantages of using this model to calculate P
If the standard for full credibility is nN observations, such that PN is the probability of your
estimated premium falling within k % of the true underlying value, then Z is a function of nN
and therefore a function of PN and k . However, the model does not specify the optimal values
of PN and k . [2]
The model assumes that the estimate of future claims experience M based on external data is
appropriate to the portfolio being considered. [1]
The model assumes that the observed claims experience X is also an appropriate approximation
to the expected future claims experience. [1]
Therefore, if either of X or M is inappropriate, P will be a less accurate estimator of future
claims experience than if only the other (appropriate) estimator were used. [1]
No allowance has been made in X or S for:
inflation or other trends [½]
unusual claims experience [½]
any changes in business mix / terms and conditions etc [½]
which may mean that past experience is not a good estimator of the future. [½]
The model assumes it’s appropriate to use the square root rule. [½]
A Bayesian method may be preferred. [½]
[Maximum 7]
(ii) Bayesian credibility parameter k
n
ZB [½]
nk
and
1
n 2
ZC [½]
nN
where n is the expected number of claims for the portfolio and nN is the number of claims
required for full credibility.
n
1
2
n
1
2
1
2
n 1 n n Z 1 Z .
We require , which gives k nN [1]
n k nN nN nN N
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8: Assignment X5 Solutions
1
900 2
For nN 1,082 and n 900 , this gives Z 0.91203 and k 86.813 . [1]
1,082
[Total 3]
Solution X5.5
This question is testing the material in Chapter 18, Credibility theory.
(i) Number of claims for full credibility
1 P 1.95
y 0.975 [½]
2 2
So y 1.960 . [½]
y2
nN where k 0.03 [½]
k2
So
1.9602
nN 4268.44 4,269 claims. [½]
0.032
[Total 2]
(ii) Revised number of claims for full credibility
Assume
we still want to be within 3% of the mean with a probability of 95% [½]
the normal approximation applies. [½]
nN is still 4268.44, from part (i). (Note that we use the unrounded figure here.) [½]
2
We need to find nX nN CVX
2
nN X .
X
800
c 1,600 2x dx 1
0
Integrating gives:
800
1,600cx cx 2 1
0
so:
c 0.0000015625 [1]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X5 Solutions Page 5
Therefore:
800
E X x 0.0000015625 x 1,600 2 x dx
0
800
0.0025 x 2 0.000003125 x 3
2 3 0
800 533.33333
266.66667 [1]
Also:
800
E X2 0.0000015625x 2 1,600 2x dx
0
800
0.0025x 3 0.000003125 x 4
3 4 0
426,666.66667 320,000
106,666.66667 [1]
So:
var X 106,666.66667 266.666672
35,555.5538 [1]
35,555.5538
nX 4,268.44 2,134.22 [1]
266.666672
and:
nS nN nX 4,268.44 2,134.22 6,402.66 6,403 claims. [1]
[Maximum 7]
(iii) Revised number of claims for full credibility (binomial)
E N np 2,000 0.2 400 . [½]
var N np 1 p 200 0.2 0.8 320 . [½]
Assuming the normal approximation still applies:
y2 N2
nN [½]
k2 N
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8: Assignment X5 Solutions
So:
1.9602 320
nN 2
3,414.76 [½]
0.03 400
And:
y2 2 2
nS N X [1]
k2 N 2
X
1.9602 320 35,555.5538
5,548.98 5,549 claims. [1]
0.032 400 266.666672
[Total 4]
(iv) Relative sizes of answers
The number of claims required for full credibility using a binomial distribution is lower than that
using a Poisson distribution ... [½]
... because the binomial distribution has a lower variance than the Poisson. [½]
For the binomial distribution, the variance will be lower than the mean, whereas for the Poisson
the variance equals the mean. [½]
[Maximum 1]
Solution X5.6
Part (i) of this question is testing the material in Chapter 19, Actuarial investigations. Part (ii)
incorporates some of the material in Chapter 12, Rating methodologies and bases.
(i) Reasons for doing an expense analysis
Expenses can still account for a large proportion of the premium charged ... [½]
… especially if the business written suffers from low persistency rates. [½]
We will want to allocate all the insurer’s expenses correctly between the different classes of
business it writes and within rating groups for each class. [1]
If there are any cross-subsidies either between classes or within a class then an expense analysis
will help us to understand these. [½]
This allocation of expenses will enable us to more accurately measure the past performance of
each class. [½]
It will also help us to determine the appropriate level of expense allowance to be included in any
future premium-rating exercise, after adjusting for inflation. [½]
An expenses analysis might indicate whether all the expenses are expected to be covered by
future premiums if not, then we need to have some idea of the amount not covered. [1]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X5 Solutions Page 7
An expenses analysis may help with financial planning. [½]
[Maximum 4]
(ii) Director’s proposed method
In formula terms, the director’s suggestion is:
P E P C
where:
P is the premium to charge
E is the expense ratio for a particular class, derived from the statutory returns
C is the non-expense element of the premium (which includes the claims). [1]
This is a simple approach. [½]
However, it will lead to high expense loadings for high premium business and low expense
loadings for low premium business … [½]
… which will lead to cross-subsidies between high and low premium business, and a consequent
risk of anti-selection. [1]
The director’s method also makes no allowance for:
inflation of expenses [½]
changes in volumes of business [½]
one-off charges [½]
other trends [½]
from the base period associated with the statutory returns to the period for which the new
premiums are to apply.
The definition of classes in the statutory returns may not be appropriate as a rating group. [½]
For example, the method makes no allowance for the different costs associated with the
processing of new business, renewals, etc within an accounting class. [½]
Alternative method
Instead, we could use a formula along the lines of:
P C 1 ce p P pp c P O
where:
P = premium to charge
C = claims cost
ce = claims expenses as a proportion of claims cost
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8: Assignment X5 Solutions
p = per premium expenses as a proportion of premium
pp = per policy expenses in £
c = commission as a proportion of P
O = other items, eg profit, contingencies, investment income.
where ce, p, c and pp are after allowing for inflation and other trends from the base period of the
analyses to the average date for which the new premiums are expected to apply.
[3 for development of appropriate formula]
This formula should then be applied separately for each product. [½]
A further refinement would be to load expenses according to numbers of claims rather than just
overall claim cost. However, this would add greater complexity to the formula, which may not be
justified. [1]
This formula addresses the main problems associated with the director’s proposed method. [½]
[Maximum 8]
Solution X5.7
This question is testing material from Chapter 19, Actuarial investigations.
(i) Strike rate
This is usually defined as the number of written policies divided by the number of quoted policies
in a given period, possibly adjusted for declinatures. [1]
(ii) Reasons for a reducing strike rate and measures to improve
We should first make sure that credibility of data is not an issue. We may find that the drop is not
significant or is just a blip. [½]
There could have been a change in the mix of business, eg by type of business or distribution
channel, towards business with lower strike rates. We should investigate the mix of business and
analyse strike rates by these factors, and review our strategy if necessary. [1]
The sales staff (eg telephone staff) may be unmotivated to complete sales. This could be
addressed by reviewing / offering incentives, bonuses and pay scales. [1]
In particular, brokers may not be getting enough commission and so do not have the motivation
to complete a sale. [½]
A review of the commission levels and perhaps increasing the initial commission may improve the
strike rate. The commission should target the more effective brokers. [1]
The sales staff may not be competent in selling, and so not assess needs fully or offer alternative
products. Training of sales staff should improve this situation. [1]
There may be greater competition, eg the launch of a similar product by a competitor. Increasing
the marketing spend or redesigning the product may help here. [1]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X5 Solutions Page 9
Premiums may be uncompetitive. A full pricing review and comparison with competitors will
quantify the effect of this. [1]
There could be a delay in reporting of take-up rates, so we don’t yet know how many quotes were
actually taken up. Limiting the quotes validity period to, say, a month would help to reduce this
problem. [1]
There may have been a change in the calculation, or in the underlying data. [½]
For example, renewal quotes may now be included in the calculated strike rate. In this case,
customers could be leaving at renewal due to poor customer service. [½]
There could have been IT issues. For example, if quotes are given over the internet, there may
have been a problem with the reporting of take-up or quote numbers, perhaps due to time lags or
some other practical reason. It would be wise to ask the IT department to investigate whether
this is the case. [1]
The system may make it very difficult for customers to renew, for example by taking a long time
to process or by the system ‘hanging’. [½]
Internet quote engines may not be well-designed (eg by asking too many questions, or questions
that the policyholder is reluctant to answer). As a result, prospective policyholders are not
inclined to take up the quote. A redesign might help, perhaps reducing or rewording the
questions, or by looking at how our engines differ from those of our competitors. [1]
A recent marketing campaign may have stopped, or competitors may have increased their
marketing spend. We can check this with our marketing department. [½]
It may be that the product is not suited to the prospective policyholders’ needs. Better up-front
marketing of the product would ensure that quotes are only requested by policyholders who
deem it suitable first. [1]
It may be that the company is targeting the wrong customers, for example, those likely to heavily
shop around for quotes. We should analyse the quotes given to ensure that the target market is
in line with our strategy. [1]
If we quote via aggregator (price comparison) websites, we may find that our prices are, for some
reason, uncompetitive. We should review what gets shown on these sites to make sure we’re
happy with where we are ‘placed’. [1]
If we have only recently started to quote via aggregators, then we should expect a drop in strike
rates because aggregator strike rates are generally lower than those for other channels. [½]
A poor strike rate isn’t necessarily a problem as long as the profit per policy makes up for the drop
in business. [½]
[Maximum 14]
Markers: Give marks for any other reasonable explanations with suggested actions to
address.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8: Assignment X5 Solutions
Solution X5.8
This question is testing the material in Chapter 18, Credibility theory.
Choice of model
From a practical perspective, it is important to choose a model that is simple and easy to use since
it will be used very frequently. [½]
This will help to minimise the chance of error in calculating the credibility estimate… [½]
… and make it easier to explain the choice of premium to managers, underwriters and customers.
[½]
Since the premium charged is explicitly affected by experience rating, and this is understood by
policyholders, the insurer must take care that the policyholder perceives the model to be fair
… [½]
… otherwise there is a risk of losing business. [½]
In practice therefore, insurers should consider imposing a predetermined ‘swing’ to the
experience-rating model … [½]
… in other words, there should be a maximum limit imposed on the impact that a single claim can
have on the premium. [½]
Large insureds should be rated entirely on their own experience. [½]
The choice of model should be a good fit to the business being modelled, ie the resulting estimate
should have a low variability around the true underlying figure. [1]
The estimate should also be unbiased. [½]
So, an insurer should aim to minimise model error … [½]
… however there should be a balance between accuracy and simplicity. [½]
If the model is a simplified version of a theoretical credibility model, it should have a similar level
of accuracy to the theoretical credibility model … [½]
… since this means that the model is more likely to have been simplified correctly. [½]
Model error will depend on any error in the base statistic as well as any error in the complement.
[½]
So both figures should be as accurate as possible. [½]
The choice of ancillary data should be appropriate to the business being modelled. [½]
So there should be an explainable relationship between the choice of complement and the class
or individual being rated. [½]
The complement should be independent from the base statistic. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X5 Solutions Page 11
Data considerations
Consideration should be given to the level of grouping to be applied to the data. [½]
Too many subgroups will reduce the credibility of each data cell, whereas not enough grouping
will introduce heterogeneity into each cell and make accurate pricing more difficult. [1]
As much reliable data should be collected as possible. [½]
Ways to increase the amount of data available for the base statistic include, for example,
collecting:
more years of historic data [½]
data from different locations, or country-wide data. [½]
However, a balance should be struck between the volume of data available and the
appropriateness of this data. [½]
The cost of collecting data should also be taken into account. [½]
Consider giving more weight to more stable data, eg claim frequency instead of claim amounts.
[½]
Partial premiums (for each claim type) may be used and the final premium could give more weight
to the more stable parts of the premium. [½]
Possible sources of ancillary data include national / regional / industry data. [½]
The ancillary data should be adjusted to ensure that the credibility complement is suitable. [½]
Where this is problematic, the percentage change in complement may be used. [½]
Or the credibility complement may be based on prior year’s analysis. [½]
This essentially takes more years’ data into account. [½]
However, there is the risk in this case that the insurer is slow to react to adverse changes in claims
experience. [1]
Application of judgement
Consider the extent to which an individual risk should be charged for its own experience,
especially if it has recently experienced a large claim. [1]
If the individual risk is not to be fully charged for its own claims, consider over how many risks
should the surplus be spread, and which specific risks would be chosen. [½]
Consider patterns in recent frequency and severity in order to apply inflation and other trends to
a risk premium based on past experience. [½]
Judgement should be applied where the premium calculated using credibility theory is
significantly different from that suggested by normal underwriting. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 12 SP8: Assignment X5 Solutions
The results of each approach should be carefully examined, and checks done to ensure that key
features have not been missed in any of the methods. [½]
[Maximum 19]
Solution X5.9
This question is testing material from Chapter 19, Actuarial investigations.
(i) Reasons for monitoring rate changes
To assess performance against goals, eg profitability targets.
To manage risk, eg identifying variability of past profitability helps in deciding how much
capital is needed to support the business.
To gain market intelligence, eg assess the underwriting cycle.
To satisfy regulators (may require premium rate monitoring).
To help with reserving, eg by giving (pure) rate indices for use in the Bornhuetter-
Ferguson method.
[½ mark for each, maximum 2]
(ii) Definition of premium rate
We could use premium per unit of risk-adjusted exposure. [1]
For commercial property business, the exposure would be well-defined in terms of either sum
insured or expected maximum loss. [½]
By adjusting for risk, we can allow for the very heterogeneous features of each commercial
property. [½]
The premium would be net of commission. [½]
[Maximum 2]
Markers: justified alternatives are acceptable.
(iii) Ways to calculate rate changes
Direct calculation of the premium rate [½]
Here, we calculate the premium rate for every policy, then compare the results from year to
year. [½]
The advantages of this method are that:
many factors affecting the expected loss can be taken into account [½]
the absolute premium rate is calculated in addition to the rate change. [½]
For commercial property risks, we probably have the premium rate data already. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X5 Solutions Page 13
However, quantifying the effect of softer factors, such as subtle changes in terms and conditions,
may be difficult. [½]
The method takes time and is data-hungry. [½]
Price a standard risk [½]
This is a similar method but the premium rate is calculated for a specified ‘standard’ risk or
sample of risks which reflect the business mix of the portfolio as a whole. [½]
This method works best where changes to rates are made across the board – or where a
representative portfolio of risks is assessed. [½]
This method is simpler, quicker and less data-onerous than calculating the expected loss for every
risk written. [½]
However, the method requires the additional assumption that the rate change for the standard
risk is equal to the rate change for the entire portfolio. [½]
The method may be unsuitable for heterogeneous business such as commercial property risks, as
there is rarely a ‘standard’ risk. [½]
Measure rate changes on individual renewals [½]
For a heterogeneous book, it can be difficult to calculate the expected loss for a particular policy
because the number of similar policies does not provide a credible basis for calculation. We
address this problem by considering only the renewing policies and estimating the change in
expected losses for these policies without determining the expected losses themselves. [1]
The aim of this method is to express the premium rate at t2 as a proportion of the premium rate
at t1 for every renewed policy. If a rate change is calculated in this way then we do not need to
know the absolute level of the premium rate. [1]
The model allows for the effect on premium rates of factors that are proportional to the expected
loss – for example, limit / attachment points, the coinsurance share and the exposure measure. [1]
The model can be easily extended to allow for other factors – for example, claim inflation in
excess of exposure change, change in rating factors and change in policy duration. [1]
The rate change for a group of renewed policies can be expressed as:
Rate Changet1 t2
Premt2 1 [1]
As - if Premt1
The ‘as-if’ premium is the premium that would be charged for the renewal at time t2 but on the
rates applicable at time t1 . [½]
The main disadvantage with this method is that the impact of new and lost business written at
different premium rates is ignored. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 14 SP8: Assignment X5 Solutions
In addition, the individual detail will be lost when individual rate changes are grouped in this
way. [½]
It can also be difficult to quantify some of the soft factors (see above). [½]
Underwriter’s view of the rate change [½]
This method involves recording how the underwriters perceive premium rates to be changing. [½]
The main advantage of this method is that it can allow for more of the soft factors mentioned
above that would otherwise be unquantifiable. [½]
This is particularly useful for a commercial property account, where much of the pricing is
performed by underwriters anyway. [½]
The main disadvantage is that it is very subjective, and therefore difficult to ensure consistency
between underwriters and over different time periods. [½]
It is also difficult to verify in detail analytically. [½]
There may also be confusion around pure rate changes and hence mis-pricing. [½]
[Maximum 13]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X6 Solutions Page 1
Assignment X6 Solutions
Solution X6.1
This question is testing material from Chapter 20, Reinsurance pricing.
The profitability of the business ceded, ie the loss ratio. [1]
Competitive pressures, such as how keen the reinsurer is to obtain motor quota share
business. [1]
The level of other cashflows, ie the reinsurer’s expenses, profit and contingency loadings,
investment income, brokerage, retrocession costs. [1½]
The level of the cedant’s acquisition expenses and claims handling expenses. [1]
Loss sensitive factors, such as sliding scale or profit commission. [½]
[Total 5]
Solution X6.2
This question is testing material from Chapter 21, Use of catastrophe models.
A stochastic event set is a set of possible future events … [½]
… created using past experience and a scientific understanding of the underlying causes of the
natural hazards. [½]
It will include events that have never been observed historically. [½]
The model calculates the effect of these events on the insured portfolio, providing a detailed
understanding and representation of the actual locations insured. [1]
[Maximum 2]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 2 SP8: Assignment X6 Solutions
Solution X6.3
This question is testing material from Chapter 21, Use of catastrophe models.
Perils include:
hurricanes
earthquakes
tornadoes
hailstorms
winter storms
river floods
coastal floods
disease
warfare
nuclear disasters
wildfire (uncontrolled wilderness fires)
terrorism. [½ each, maximum 5]
Solution X6.4
This question is testing material from Chapter 20, Reinsurance pricing.
Average cost per claim can be calculated as follows (in £000s):
300 500 300 500
55(x 100) 11,000 150 200
(50 x)2 dx (50 x)2 dx 55 loge (x 50) (x 50) 55 (x 50) [2]
100 300 100 300
which is equal to:
15.173 11.429 26.60 [1]
The expected number of claims is 50 and a contingency / expenses margin of 35% of the premium
is required. The reinsurance premium is therefore given by:
50 26,602 0.65 £2,046,000 . [1]
Reasonableness check:
The proportion of claims falling in the band might be about 30% and the average payment from
the reinsurer might be about £100,000, giving £30,000 as the cost per claim to the reinsurer.
Hence answer looks OK.
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X6 Solutions Page 3
The assumptions used here are:
claim inflation can be ignored
reinsurer also expects 50 claims from the portfolio and agrees the claim amount
distribution
no further profit loading is required (assumed to be covered by the contingency loading)
this figure is before any profit commission arrangements.
[½ mark each]
Circumstances in which reinsurance would not be used:
the 35% being paid towards expenses and contingencies is considered high in relation to
the risks covered. That is, if the variance of the claim numbers and individual claim
amounts is low, then the reinsurance would not be used. (Variance can be calculated in a
similar way to the premium, if you have a few spare minutes!)
if the company is financially strong, ie has large free reserves in excess of the required
minimum margin
if the company has other sources of finance, eg a parent company
this business is relatively insignificant (ie a very large insurer)
the company is not risk averse. [½ mark each]
[Maximum 8]
Solution X6.5
This question is testing material from Chapter 21, Use of catastrophe models.
Demand surge reflects the basic economic reality of reduced supply and increased demand
following a natural catastrophe. [1]
It is the temporary increase in repair / mitigation costs above the standard level of costs, resulting
from the secondary impacts of the natural catastrophe itself. [1]
This increase is typically caused by:
shortage of building materials due to, for example, damage to timber yards rendering
available materials unusable [½]
increased demand for building materials to repair / replace damaged properties [½]
shortage of skilled labour due to, for example, people evacuating the area [½]
increased demand for skilled labour to repair / rebuild properties. [½]
In practice, the labour shortage is often short-lived, as wages would increase, attracting new
labour supplies. [½]
However, we may need to bring in labour from further afield which could be expensive eg involve
paying accommodation costs. If the work takes longer than expected due to lack of materials, this
will further increase the accommodation costs. [1]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 4 SP8: Assignment X6 Solutions
When using catastrophe models, it is important for actuaries to understand the level of severity
adjustments already included in the model and then decide on what other adjustments are
appropriate, given the use to which the modelled output will be put. [1]
It can be difficult to decide on the adjustments for demand surge. [½]
The level of demand surge will depend on, for example:
the timing of the catastrophe [½]
existing supply and demand [½]
location (which can affect the availability of labour, for example). [½]
[Maximum 7]
Solution X6.6
This question is testing material from Chapter 20, Reinsurance pricing.
(i) Premium calculation
We would start by looking at last year’s pricing analysis, if any. At the very least we would see
how the data provided this year differs from that provided in previous years, to assess any
under-reserving or anomalies. [1]
We would hope to collect other relevant data, including:
triangulations of paid claims (in order to allow for the timing of claims), incurred claims
and premiums [½]
slip terms [½]
methodology used to calculate outstanding reserves [½]
external data for use as benchmarks (eg loss ratios, development patterns, similar
business written for other cedants). [1]
For motor property damage, however, we would not expect to see large delays in claims reporting
or settlement, so we might be happy to assume that all years are fully run-off, maybe with the
exception of the latest year. [½]
We would then adjust all the data to allow for:
IBNR, if any
claims inflation – using the 3% pa provided
premium rate changes
risk and exposure changes
one-off events, large claims (unlikely for property damage), catastrophes and
trends. [½ each]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X6 Solutions Page 5
We would then fit a model to the loss ratio, checking the goodness of fit and adjusting if
necessary. Suitable claims distributions might include the log-normal distribution, for example. If
the data is available, we might try to model frequency and severity separately. [1]
We would then calculate the expected loss to the layer using a stochastic approach for the
forthcoming year of exposure, and allowing the possibility of the profit commission applying. [1]
Finally, we would add on the other loadings for contingencies, profit, normal commissions,
brokerage and expenses. [1]
We would also make a small deduction for investment returns, which would be based on the
claims payment pattern expected. [½]
[Maximum 9]
(ii) Important factors other than price
Terms and conditions detailed on the slip, in order to assess other costs or possible exposure
problems. [½]
Lack of underwriting control. Motor insurance is particularly vulnerable to competitive forces and
short-term losses are often deemed to be ‘acceptable’, whilst insurers build market share. [1]
The current position in the insurance cycle – particularly important for motor, to assess the
likelihood of further rate reductions due to competitive pressures. [1]
Quality of the cedant’s underwriting expertise and profit experience. A visit to the cedant may
help here. [1]
Other similar business written by the reinsurer – consider whether we want more exposure to this
class. [½]
Cost of capital needed to back this business – particularly as the downside is unlimited. [½]
Opinions from the other reinsurers, particularly the lead underwriter. [½]
Relationship with the broker – effects on other business they pass to us. [½]
Relationship with the cedant – other business we participate on. [½]
Availability of retrocession if required, if we wanted to limit our exposure. [½]
Standing in the market of other following reinsurers, if any, and their line sizes. Consider whether
they have reduced their lines and if they are reputable. [½]
Who the lead underwriter is, and their standing in the market. [½]
The quality, quantity and credibility of the data we have been given – poor data often hides poor
experience. [½]
The possibility of writing other business through this broker or with this cedant. [½]
Reason for such a late finalisation of the treaty – it’s possible this is due to a lack of interest in the
market. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 6 SP8: Assignment X6 Solutions
The reason for the two-year term – will lock in to current reinsurance rates, and open up
exposure to low original rates even further. [½]
Experience so far for 2016 – data should be available now and can supplement our analysis. [½]
Downside (say feasible maximum loss) in relation to upside (premium less expenses and profit
commission). [½]
[Maximum 10]
(iii) Reply to underwriter
Yes, the underlying experience has so far been good … [½]
… but the price depends on the expected cost to the layer, not the actual historic cost to the
layer. [1]
The expected cost will depend on the predicted variability of the claims experience, which
historically has been reasonably high … [½]
… and is showing signs of worsening in recent years. [½]
Additionally, we ought to allow for changes in profitability over the period. [½]
There is clearly some concern in the market as the deal isn’t placed yet. [½]
Can we visit the cedant to get an idea of their competency? [½]
Whether it is possible to limit the downside, for example: [½]
add a loss participation clause
reduce our share
revise the commissions, eg profit commission
reduce the term to one year
raise the attachment point
put in an upper limit. [½ each]
[Maximum 7]
Solution X6.7
This question is testing material from Chapter 20, Reinsurance pricing.
This approach would normally begin with the output from a proprietary catastrophe model. [½]
This usually comes in the form of files (AEPs and OEPs) showing the distribution of events. [½]
An occurrence exceedance probability (OEP) file considers the probability that the largest
individual event loss in a year exceeds a particular threshold. [½]
An aggregate exceedance probability (AEP) file considers the probability that the aggregate losses
from all loss events in a year exceeds a particular threshold. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X6 Solutions Page 7
These files can be used in the stochastic frequency-severity model to simulate catastrophe loss
experience in an annual period. [½]
The model could be run several thousand times for each of a number of different retention limits.
[½]
For each retention limit, we can then derive the distribution of the annual reinsurance recoveries,
along with the expected annual recoveries and the variance. [1]
By varying the retention limit the model could be used to find a suitable level. [½]
[Maximum 4]
Solution X6.8
This question is testing material from Chapter 20, Reinsurance pricing.
(i) Two approaches
For both approaches
Choose an appropriate base period, allowing for: [½]
– the volume of data availability
– volatility of experience
– trends in the data
– its relevance to the future rating period
– the need to estimate future development on more recent years.
[½ each, maximum 1]
Collect data. The detail required will depend on the line of business, but in any case
historical loss data may be limited. [½]
Burning cost approach [½]
Apply trends to the fully-ground-up historical loss data, which should include the paid and
case reserve positions for each loss at regular points in time. [½]
Apply the reinsurance contract terms to each trended loss to give trended losses to the
layer, allowing for stability clauses if necessary. [1]
Aggregate these amounts by year of loss or underwriting year to produce triangulations of
paid and incurred loss development for losses to the layer. [1]
Develop the triangles to ultimate using appropriate development patterns. [½]
Supplement the data with benchmarks if necessary. [½]
Allow for any exposure changes during the historical period covered by the loss data, for
example by adjusting for rate changes. [½]
We could, for example, take the average of each year’s exposure-adjusted losses to the
layer to arrive at an estimate of the loss cost for the year being priced. [1]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 8 SP8: Assignment X6 Solutions
Alternatively, we could divide each year’s losses to the layer by the exposure to give a loss
rate for each year, then take the average and apply to the exposure for the year being
priced. [1]
Examine individual years’ exposure-adjusted losses to the layer in case there are any
remaining trends. [½]
Allow for any changes in basis of cover. [½]
Frequency / severity model [½]
Apply trends to the individual losses as per the burning cost method. [½]
Allow for any material expected development on open claims (IBNER), for example by
using development triangles. [½]
Use the large loss count development to determine IBNR, in order to estimate the
ultimate large loss count for each historic year. [½]
Adjust for exposure as in the burning cost calculation. [½]
Fit distributions to frequency and severity. [½]
Combine the two distributions to produce a stochastic model for large losses, and hence
model the reinsurance recoveries. [1]
For both methods, allow for practical issues such as:
the appropriateness of the census point
the choice of inflation rates
treatment of shock losses
discounting
changes in the mix of business. [½ each]
[Maximum 12]
(ii) Factors affecting choice of approach
the approach to loading for profit – ie whether it requires a volatility measure or a
distribution of outcomes [1]
the volume of loss data [½]
time / resource constraints. [½]
[Total 2]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X6 Solutions Page 9
Solution X6.9
This question is testing material from Chapter 21, Use of catastrophe models.
(i) Main problem with traditional methods
Traditional rating approaches work well for a high frequency, low severity risk. [½]
They are much less appropriate for flood risk because:
floods are a low frequency, high severity event [½]
the observed losses may not be reflective of the true underlying risks as the period over
which losses have been observed may be much lower than the return period of the losses
under consideration … [½]
… or the loss in question may not have occurred [½]
for example, it is not appropriate to use 10 years’ worth of data to estimate a flood event
that is deemed to occur once every 50 years. [½]
[Maximum 2]
(ii) Model components
Event module [½]
This will contain the ‘event set’ with each flood event primarily defined by its physical
parameters, eg: [½]
location [½]
expected frequency and severity [½]
type of flood, ie sea or river. [½]
The frequencies and severities will need to take into account trends in sea and river levels and in
the weather. [½]
Although this data can come from industry bodies, it may be difficult to interpret. [½]
In any case, floods can be infrequent and are unpredictable. This makes obtaining reliable
frequency and severities difficult. [1]
The effect of climatic change (eg global warming) can be difficult to quantify and needs
considerable expertise. [½]
There will always be population trends to consider – for example, any trends in the location of
buildings. [½]
Hazard module [½]
This module will describe the consequence of each flood event. [½]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
Page 10 SP8: Assignment X6 Solutions
For example:
the depth of floodwater by area [½]
the duration of flooding [½]
the speed of water flow [½]
the area covered by each flood. [½]
There is a need to obtain and interpret survey information on coastal defences, eg location,
height and quality. [1]
This requires considerable expertise and time. [½]
Flood maps and terrain models could be used, if available. [½]
We should take into account any impending government initiatives, although again the results
may be difficult to quantify. [½]
Inventory module [½]
This will consist of a detailed exposure database of insured properties. [½]
The key details held for each property will be:
type of cover (buildings or contents, new for old or indemnity) [½]
type of property [½]
location [½]
construction [½]
number of floors [½]
sum insured [½]
age [½]
occupancy [½]
elevation [½]
previous flooding [½]
proximity to rivers / coasts / lakes. [½]
[½ each, maximum 2]
One problem here is that the policyholder may not know about:
a property’s proximity to rivers and its vulnerability to flooding [½]
any previous flood experience to that property (or may give false information, giving rise
to moral hazard) [½]
height of property above sea level or river level [½]
and they may be resistant to answering these types of questions … [½]
…although the data sources for the Hazard module should help to mitigate this problem. [½]
© IFE: 2019 Examinations The Actuarial Education Company
SP8: Assignment X6 Solutions Page 11
Vulnerability module [½]
This module will describe the degree of loss to each property resulting from exposure to flood
(perhaps expressed as a percentage of sum insured). [½]
There will be considerable uncertainty involved in assessing the exact effects of flood on
individual properties. [½]
Financial analysis module [½]
This module translates the total ground-up loss into an insured loss. [½]
In order to do this, it will need policy conditions for each policy, for example:
limits
flood excess
coverage terms and conditions. [1]
Reinsurance details will also be needed so that net claims can be assessed. [½]
[Maximum 21]
(iii) Uses for flood catastrophe model
The prime use is to monitor the aggregate insured losses for risk tolerance purposes. [1]
Capital assessment and allocation, both internally and externally. [1]
Reinsurance planning and assessment. [½]
Operational risk assessment. [½]
To assist in the disaster recovery planning process. [½]
Pricing – exposure rating for larger risks, property-specific pricing, and overall catastrophe
loadings for the whole portfolio. [1]
To help set underwriting guidelines. [½]
To help set appropriate reserves. [½]
To help in the design of insurance-linked derivatives, eg catastrophe bonds. [½]
Financial planning. [½]
[Maximum 6]
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
All study material produced by ActEd is copyright and is sold
for the exclusive use of the purchaser. The copyright is
owned by Institute and Faculty Education Limited, a
subsidiary of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries.
Unless prior authority is granted by ActEd, you may not hire
out, lend, give out, sell, store or transmit electronically or
photocopy any part of the study material.
You must take care of your study material to ensure that it
is not used or copied by anybody else.
Legal action will be taken if these terms are infringed. In
addition, we may seek to take disciplinary action through
the profession or through your employer.
These conditions remain in force after you have finished
using the course.
The Actuarial Education Company © IFE: 2019 Examinations
You might also like
- ActEd - Actuarial Practice Subject CP1 CMP 201975% (4)ActEd - Actuarial Practice Subject CP1 CMP 20191,492 pages
- Life Insurance Specialist Principles Subject SP2 CMP 2019 - BPP ActEd PDF75% (4)Life Insurance Specialist Principles Subject SP2 CMP 2019 - BPP ActEd PDF1,120 pages
- ActEd - Modelling Practice Subject CP2 CMP 201980% (5)ActEd - Modelling Practice Subject CP2 CMP 2019280 pages
- Cm2 Compiler Setted (1 To 9) With Answers (18.03.23)100% (2)Cm2 Compiler Setted (1 To 9) With Answers (18.03.23)237 pages
- Cm2 Assignment (Q and A) Setted (23.03.2023)100% (1)Cm2 Assignment (Q and A) Setted (23.03.2023)165 pages
- Material CA1 Actuarial Science IAI IfoANo ratings yetMaterial CA1 Actuarial Science IAI IfoA323 pages
- Institute of Actuaries of India: SA2 - Life Insurance Specialist AdvancedNo ratings yetInstitute of Actuaries of India: SA2 - Life Insurance Specialist Advanced8 pages
- A Summary of Actuarial Formulae and Tables: Curtin Student Actuarial Society Last Updated: February 20, 2019100% (2)A Summary of Actuarial Formulae and Tables: Curtin Student Actuarial Society Last Updated: February 20, 201955 pages
- SP6 - Financial Derivatives Specialist Principles: SyllabusNo ratings yetSP6 - Financial Derivatives Specialist Principles: Syllabus8 pages
- Institute of Actuaries of India: Subject SA1 - Health and Care InsuranceNo ratings yetInstitute of Actuaries of India: Subject SA1 - Health and Care Insurance4 pages
- CS2 Booklet 7 (Mortality Projection) 2019 FINAL100% (1)CS2 Booklet 7 (Mortality Projection) 2019 FINAL38 pages
- L R F E S: OSS Eserving and Inancial Ngineering Ummary Xam For100% (2)L R F E S: OSS Eserving and Inancial Ngineering Ummary Xam For184 pages
- CS2 B Chapter 1 Poisson Processes - QuestionsNo ratings yetCS2 B Chapter 1 Poisson Processes - Questions2 pages
- A&J Flashcards For Exam SOA Exam FM/ CAS Exam 2100% (1)A&J Flashcards For Exam SOA Exam FM/ CAS Exam 239 pages
- Cb2 Booklet 1-6 Setted (Q & A Bank) (10.03.2022) Final100% (1)Cb2 Booklet 1-6 Setted (Q & A Bank) (10.03.2022) Final303 pages
- CS2 - Risk Modelling and Survival Analysis Core Principles: Syllabus0% (1)CS2 - Risk Modelling and Survival Analysis Core Principles: Syllabus8 pages
- Investment and Finance Specialist Principl - 18No ratings yetInvestment and Finance Specialist Principl - 18966 pages
- Forecasting - Guide To Forecasting in SPSSNo ratings yetForecasting - Guide To Forecasting in SPSS3 pages
- Funding Policy and Actuarial Cost Methods: March 22, 2013No ratings yetFunding Policy and Actuarial Cost Methods: March 22, 201342 pages
- Understanding Binomial Distribution in Actuarial ScienceNo ratings yetUnderstanding Binomial Distribution in Actuarial Science12 pages
- Value at Risk and Expected Shortfall: Risk Management and Financial Institutions 4e by John C. HullNo ratings yetValue at Risk and Expected Shortfall: Risk Management and Financial Institutions 4e by John C. Hull23 pages
- Lesson 2 - Applications of Valuing Cash FlowsNo ratings yetLesson 2 - Applications of Valuing Cash Flows10 pages
- Regression Analysis in Machine LearningNo ratings yetRegression Analysis in Machine Learning13 pages
- Time Value of Money Problems Single and Mixed StreamsNo ratings yetTime Value of Money Problems Single and Mixed Streams2 pages
- Aia Bhd. Malaysia: Institute of Mathematical Sciences Faculty of Science University of MalayaNo ratings yetAia Bhd. Malaysia: Institute of Mathematical Sciences Faculty of Science University of Malaya31 pages
- MGMT2023 Lecture 4 & 5 TVM Slides - Parts I, II IIINo ratings yetMGMT2023 Lecture 4 & 5 TVM Slides - Parts I, II III91 pages
- Full Download Principles of Econometrics 4th Edition Hill Test Bank100% (61)Full Download Principles of Econometrics 4th Edition Hill Test Bank35 pages
- FINA2010 Midterm Formula Sheet: 1. Present Value For AnnuitiesNo ratings yetFINA2010 Midterm Formula Sheet: 1. Present Value For Annuities1 page
